Year: 2013

  • Singin’ in the Rain: A Hypertextual Reading

    Adrian Miles

    Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology
    amiles@rmit.edu.au

     

    This work presents a hypertextual reading of a key sequence, the song-and-dance number “You Were Meant for Me,” from Kelly and Donen’s 1956 musical Singin’ in the Rain. The sequence is read as characteristic of the film’s general semiotic principles, which combine several levels of seduction to establish an aesthetic claim for a properly musical cinema.This reading represents an experiment or heuristic exercise meant to discover possibilities for interpretation (not just of film but of any complex text) in multi-linear, hypermedia presentation. Forced into an artificially singular sequence, the components of this reading might seem elliptical and repetitive; they are designed to be explored from various perspectives and in differing combinations. Though it has an argument and an interpretive agenda, this is not so much an essay as a text in the deepest sense: a fabric of ideas deeply and multiply connected.There is of course always more than one way to read a hypertext. All the components of this text are listed in the table at right. You could begin with the numbered pages at the top of this list, begin instead with the collected presentation of the sequence, or choose some other point of entry. (You may want to bookmark this index page for later reference.) On the component pages you will find a large number of textual links representing various lines of connection and development.

     

    This hypertext incorporates film extracts in the form of QuickTime movies. To view these extracts you must have QuickTime installed on your computer, and the QuickTime plug-in installed in your Web browser. If you do not have the plug-in installed, the movie extracts will have to be downloaded to your machine and played using a helper application.

     

    If you have both the plug-in and the QuickTime system resources in place, the clips will play within the browser window. The clips are designed to need an 8Kb stream (easily supported by most modems). This will provide 1 frame per second and sound.

     

    Extract pages also include a download link to a more economical version of the same material, sampled at 5 frames per second for faster transfer. These files require an appropriate helper application for QuickTime and will play in a separate window.

     

    Many pages are illustrated with images from the film. Each in-line illustration is linked to a larger version of the same image.

     

    It is recommended that you use Netscape or Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.x or later. QuickTime is available for Macintosh and Windows from the Apple QuickTime Web site.

    Component Files

     

  • The Madness of Images and Thinking Cinema

    William D. Routt

    La Trobe University
    w.routt@latrobe.edu.au

     

    Abstract: This article attempts a preliminary understanding of the experience–or sensation–of place evoked in the cinema, based on some of the earliest films and their spectators. It exposits certain ideas contained in Vachel Lindsay’s The Art of the Moving Picture and finds a delirious resemblance between these ideas and some in Gilles Deleuze’s two Cinema books. Perhaps the piece suggests that madness is a property of the sensation of place in the cinema. Animated GIF files, maddening their sources, offer a crude supplementary patchwork commentary.–wdr

     

     


    Proceed to Hypertext…
     

     

  • Casablanca’s Régime: The Shifting Aesthetics of Political Technologies (1907-1943)

    Jorge Otero-Pailos

    School of Architecture
    Polytechnic University of Puerto Rico
    jotero@mit.mit.edu

     

    …the concept of reality is always the first victim of war.

     

    –Paul Virilio, paraphrasing Kipling (War and Cinema 33)

     

    Vacillating Realities

     

    At the corner of the bar a man in a white suit, probably an American business traveler, asks for more coffee and looks intently at a young professional woman who, seated across the room, is slowly sipping a Martini. The bartender notices his stare and quietly smiles while drying off the sparkling glassware. The room is dimly light by wall sconces that cast a pale glow over posters of Bogart and Bergman in Casablanca. “As Time Goes By” is playing almost imperceptibly in the PA system. Five clocks on the wall mark the time in L.A., New York, Paris, Moscow, and Tokyo. He could be anywhere in the world. The napkin under his drink has a familiar logo that reads “Rick’s Café,” and through the front door he can see the Hotel receptionist. The man finishes his coffee, walks slowly to the front door of the Hotel, and exits. He pauses for a moment to light a cigarette and to look around. An immense boulevard lies before the building dividing a row of modern structures from an old masonry city wall. “Is this really Casablanca? It looks nothing like the movie,” he murmurs. It is a typical scene inside Casablanca’s Hyatt Hotel.

     

    Figure 1: Rick’s Café (postcard).

    Figure 2: Hyatt in Casablanca (photo by author).

     

    Hyatt’s version of Rick’s Cafe is the only place in Casablanca where one can find a designed and direct reference in the real to the imaginary scenes of the Film. And yet the city owes much of its international fame to the Hollywood movie. Most people can picture Casablanca, although they might have never been there, as a city of tight sinuous streets, claustrophobic markets, parrot vendors, hookah pipes, picturesque locals, and filmic foreigners. What is shocking when we set foot on the real streets of Casablanca is that they bear no resemblance whatsoever to the movie: they are ample boulevards lined with modern low rise structures and harboring a bustling metropolitan life. Inside the old Casbah walls there are no wooden trellises overhead, signs like those outside of the “Blue Parrot Club” have been replaced by advertisements for Levis, and the French administrative buildings–which are crucial in the spatialization of the old city in the film into the Café-Police Headquarters-Airport triangle–are nowhere in sight–they are, as it turns out, outside the Casbah in the “modern” city.

     

    Arriving in Casablanca as a Western traveler/movie fan, one feels strangely betrayed by the city’s reality. The movie had placed an emphasis on its own adherence to reality with the authority, and transparent objectivity, implied by the war documentary style of its introductory scenes, where the very real struggle of European refugees in World War II is superimposed on a map of Northern Africa and views of the city.

     

    Figure 3: Still from Casablanca.

     

    To buttress this blurring effect, the film was released in New York on Thanksgiving Day 1942, just eighteen days after the Allies landed in Casablanca, in an obvious attempt to benefit from the international attention the city was receiving. The army’s use of “Rick’s Place” as a pseudonym for Casablanca throughout the war just goes to prove the film’s effectiveness at conflating the imaginary and the real. In fact, ever since the premiere of the motion picture, the virtual and the real cities of Casablanca have coupled in the collective imaginary of the West. It is therefore understandable that, when confronted with a city that looks and feels nothing like what we might have been led to expect by the movie, we experience in Casablanca a strange perversion of the horror vacui which, according to Umberto Eco, emerges when “the ‘completely real’ becomes identified with the ‘completely fake,’” and “absolute unreality is offered as real presence” (7). A similar feeling would pervade us if, arriving in Paris, we all of a sudden realized the Tour Eiffeldid not exist, outside of post cards and films, and that in its place was just a wonderful six-lane highway.

     

    One could speculate about the reasons why Director Michael Curtiz might have chosen to construct the city out of revamped props of Warner Brothers’ 1942 version of The Desert Song, and shoot in the company’s Burbank Studios rather than on location. First there was the economic factor. Moving the crew to Casablanca was certainly more expensive than working in California. Second, the world was at war, and after Pearl Harbor it was clear that US interests were not safe abroad. Traveling to Morocco could mean endangering the crew. Can the significant gap between the filmic and real cities be the result of these unfortunate logistic imperatives? But what about all the other “flaws” of the film; can they be attributed to the same cause? Certainly not. Logistics had nothing to do in the wrongful depiction of uniformed Germans in Casablanca. Studio writers knew that the German Army did not set foot in Casablanca during World War II, just as they knew that such things as Letters of Transit signed by Général Charles de Gaulle did not exist, and that neither American nor French troops entered Berlin in 1918 (Robertson 79). Another exterior pressure was driving writers and producers to exaggerate and distort the real, one that demanded political effectiveness over historical accuracy: the war. And, in the name of this effort, reality would have to be betrayed by virtuality, and turned into ideology.

     

    It is widely known that Casablanca was a war film aimed at sedating the general American opposition to US involvement in World War II. If a number of historical flaws are consciously present, it is because they were deemed necessary in order to

     

    Figure 4: The fighting French march
    outside of New York’s Hollywood
    theater, 1942 (from Miller, Casablanca:
    As Time Goes By–50th Aniversary
    Commemorative.

     

    accomplish this objective. By depicting fictitious Germans, Americans, Frenchmen, and Resistance leaders in simple exchanges, and encouraging the spectator to synecdochally associate each character and his/her actions with his/her nation and its international policies, the film effectively transfigured a complex international political situation into an easily understandable set of social relationships. The successful resolution of the movie’s crisis thanks to an American expatriate’s involvement in the affairs of a number of Europeans, and his ability to retain his autonomy and freedom in the end, were narrative mechanisms geared to convince American audiences that it was possible for them to fight in the war and maintain the unencumbered relation to Europe that had stood as the basis of their identity and freedom. In re-presenting Casablanca, the film industry rendered the all too gray world of international politics in vivid chiaroscuro, dividing, beyond reasonable doubt, the light from the dark, the good from the bad, radically affecting the audience’s perception of the real, and consciously attempting to sway public opinion towards a homogeneous support of the war. It is difficult to assess the exact extent to which Casablancaalone influenced the American body politic in deciding to engage in the war. We do know, however, that it was the most widely acclaimed of the enormous volume of war films produced by the major Hollywood studios during the 1940s, and that its premiere caused a number of pro-war demonstrations, including the 1942 parade of the Fighting French outside of New York’s Hollywood Theater.

     

    A little known fact is that just as war and its contingencies were at the root of the film’s production, so too was armed struggle the basis for the modern city’s construction by the French, next to the old Medina. Indeed, the principal importance of both objects resided in their ability to serve as political technologies which helped mobilize the population as a single unit towards war. In the late 19th century, German and French imperialistic interests clashed in Morocco, turning control of the West-African country into a veritable arm-wrestle where military force, and the ability to rapidly mobilize troops and armament, were measured up before an imminent conflict. The monumental effort to erect the “modern city” and to overhaul the old Casbah was carried out, not out of a magnanimous will to “share” modernity with Morocco, but out of a necessity to demonstrate France’s military response time, strength, and administrative expediency. But this “show” was not staged just for foreign powers, it was (as was the movie in America) devised to quell national anxiety and low self image before the increased strength of the German Empire. The new city’s main objective would not be to adhere to the forms and spatial configurations of Moroccan architecture and urbanism with archaeological precision, but to construct and project an alternate reality where the French might find a compelling, almost mythical, image of their own mettlesome nature, their industrious spirit, their benevolence towards the colonized, and their republican stability. This effort would entail a necessary manipulation of the city’s reality (which prefigures Hollywood’s later distortions).

     

    Political Technologies of Control: The Idea of War

     

    Although the film and the city bear no visual resemblance, this is not to say that they have nothing in common. As we shall see, they share a number of particulars which, understood historically, cast new light onto the performative potential of architecture and film as social practices in contemporary society. To begin let us return to the most obvious commonality: the blatant interpretative liberties (not to say disregard) that both objects exhibit towards their pre-existing context. French designers, far from employing or referencing local typologies in their plans, imposed a Beaux Arts spatiality to their new cities, which they then adorned, if ever so slightly, with simulated Moroccan motifs (Koranic script is conveniently erased in the French versions).

     

    Figure 5: Casablanca’s Palais de Justice (Joseph Marrast, 1925), in Casablanca’s Grand Place, now Place Mohammed V (photo by author).

     

    In turn, Hollywood’s productions designers chose to present a wholly fictitious city, where not a single building of the French or Moroccan town is present.

     

    Figure 6: Scene from Casablanca; the film’s version of Casablanca’s Palais de Justice can be seen in the background.

     

    It would be impossible to attribute this attitude towards design to a designer’s whim, to time constraints, or to mere logistics. Both architecture and film are intensely decision-based artistic practices, and solutions are contingent on approval by the designer or director, the client or producer, the financing institutions, the prospective user’s or audience’s preferences, etc., so that such basic considerations are not likely to be the result of mere oversight or typical contingencies. In fact, we know that French administrators amassed large reference libraries of photographs and drawings documenting existing Moroccan buildings and cities,1 and that Hollywood production designers used photographs of French Casablanca as a reference in their work.2 We might contend that if the motivations for the construction of these objects were political, decisions concerning their final appearance were also political, and we should therefore turn, not to architecture or film, but to the art of politics, to ask why disavowing the real in representation might be an effective and desirable practice. Now, if only for a moment, we make a backward leap to the fourth century B.C. to ask this very question.

     

    In his construction of the Ideal Republic, Plato describes rhetoric as a fundamental technology of politics. It was the art used by the orator in convincing an assembly that a particular course of action was good and virtuous. Of course for Plato, this orator, a man capable of persuasion, should also be a man capable of discerning right from wrong and of determining what goals and public policies might ensure or enable the individual happiness of all citizens–i.e., a philosopher. Rhetoric’s political value lay in its ability to make the members of the assembly (a group of individuals including those daltonic non-philosophers unable to perceive the subtle shades of truth) see actions and situations in a particular light, to sharpen their awareness of what was virtuous as the camera focuses our attention with its depth of field, to penetrate reality and represent its essence. Already in the Republic it is clear that the notion of representation is a prerequisite for the very existence of politics.

     

    Unfortunately, Plato–who was as we know a fine orator–had more than a few difficulties carrying on his self-appointed mission as politician in the public sphere. His mentor Socrates, another able speaker, had already met an untimely death for not holding his tongue before the state. War, in this case the Peloponnesian War, combined with the instability of the 403 B.C. counterrevolution, had radically transformed the operations of the Athenian State from a forum for debate to a mechanism for homogenizing thinking and legislating ideology. The visions of death and destruction that plagued the minds of Athens’ democratic rulers turned all considerations of good and evil on a single axis: winning the war. The Idea of War was a specter so powerful it could fracture and dismantle any rhetorical presentation constructed by philosophers. This for Plato was the root of all the social evil of his time. Thinking men, concerned with the able exegesis of the real, had been cast off from politics by men of action in the name of the war. A new technology of politics, the spectacle of war had befallen every transaction of state affairs, threatening to subvert any attempt to understand the real by simply establishing a new reality (by decree).

     

    If the goal of politics is to conduct the public affairs of a body of people, it is also necessarily to exercise control over the agency of individuals in the name of efficiency. State affairs are deemed too complex to explain to everyone, yet they must somehow meet with the support of all affected by them if the government is to function effectively. Therefore, policies and directives, once resolved at the legislative level, must be presented as the best and most desirable solutions, and communicated to the socius in simple but persuasive terms. This aspect of politics–the interface between government and individual–is all about representation, about wheedling, about influencing the public’s understanding of reality. In this sense, war is a perfect political technology: It exercises its political strength by placing an emphasis on difference, and rallying a particular and otherwise heterogenic socius into a cohesive unit–within which difference is not tolerated. It is a condensation of complex diplomatic relations into a simple and understandable right and wrong: either you are in or out; it is a matter of life or death. Plato himself, however against men of action, recognized political virtue in war, and sought the unification of dissenting Greek states by projecting the Idea of War against the Persians onto the minds of his interlocutors. But he knew full well that in order for these thoughts to develop into sinister specters they needed to excite a dreadful imagery of death and destruction, and so Plato advocated the practice of sending children and women as spectators into the field of battle so that “in that way they will get a good view of their future business” (170). In this way, when the children-turned-adults would hear of a possible battle, they would be so stricken by fear that they would rally together to protect themselves against the oncoming perils.

     

    The Idea of War, as prospect or memory of bloodshed, can be stimulated in the socius as pure representation, functioning as a political technology more efficiently, permanently, and economically than war itself–armed conflict as a political practice is, as

     

    Figure 7: The “body of the town,” anthropomorphic city with fortress (Francesco di Giorgio Martini, Architettura, ingegneria e arte militare. Late fifteenth century. Turin, Codex Saluzzianus 148, fol. 3).

     

    we know, not infinitely sustainable. Historically, during times of peace, the tools employed in war (walls, fortresses, shields, armors, weapons, and banners) served as its mnemonic symbols in public spectacles (i.e., in parades, architectural ornaments, sculptures, paintings, etc.), keeping the threat of bloodshed alive in the minds of spectators to buttress various forms of government. For instance, the political power of wall circuits, constructed around cities up until the 19th century, went well beyond their physical resistance to projectiles. These military structures established, in a simple spatial language, those that stood outside or inside the body politic, and served as permanent reminders to both inhabitants and visitors of the threat of aggression. When describing these walls in 1452, Alberti would point out that they were founded with “the greatest religion” to protect a city which was “continually exposed to Dangers and Accidents; just as a ship which is tossed on the sea” (133). The idea of the encircling wall generated theoretical discourses and images of anthropomorphic cities that buttressed the notion of a collective body struggling for survival, and emphasized the concept of allegiance between citizens. Not surprisingly in these representations the noblest part of the city was the military fortress. City walls are thresholds to the polis, moments which, for phenomenologists such as Christian Norberg-Shultz, represent “the ‘rift’ between ‘otherness’ and manifest meaning, it embodies suffering and is ‘turned to stone’” (133). Indeed these objects exercise their communicative capacity by manipulating the material reality of the world, but there is more. A military wall will, at one level, be understood as separationprimarily because it divides us from each other, but, at another level, the wall will always be exercising a deictic reference to war, for it is only because of armed conflict that its existence is justifiable.

     

    Efforts such as the French and American versions of Casablanca were conceptually similar to the fortress wall insofar as they were, first and foremost, visualization technologies aimed at propagating a homogeneous, orderly, politicized world view. The Idea of War was mobilized in both as a means of internal control, as a kind of endogenous war where victory was determined not by fire power but by persuasive ability, since they aimed not at killing but at rallying supporters for a particular political platform by affecting their perceptual fields. To answer our original question, the extent to which the film and the modern city manipulated perceived notions of reality was directly proportional to these political aims. As political technologies, both objects could only be effective if they paid careful attention to establishing a play on the real that remained within the parameters of the dominant perceptual modes of the times, that is, within the general field of what reality was understood to be. We have intentionally begun by discussing a simple vertical plane (a city wall) which performed simultaneously as a tool to apportion space, as a military defense, and as a vehicle of propaganda, to stress the convergence of architecture, war, and politics around a notion of reality that was centered on territory, space, and time. Architecture is, ontologically, a field of endeavor concerned with the manipulation of space in time. Understandably, so long as the realm of the real has been circumscribed by these two concepts, architecture has stood as the prime tool to manipulate it. What concerns us in this essay is to expose how, as industrial and technological developments of the first half of the 20th century shifted the (conscious or subconscious) dominant perception of reality away from time and space, architecture became increasingly obsolete as an effective political technology, and was displaced by tools, like film, whose nature coincided with new notions about the makeup of man’s perceptual environment.

     

    The Urgency of Order

     

    There are striking similarities between the social conditions that prompted politicized institutions to use Casablanca city and Casablanca film as propaganda vehicles for the Idea of War. The years preceding both works are times when internal crisis, social strife, and discord menaced the prevailing order of things. Consider the following descriptions of conditions in France in the 1890s and the United States in the 1930s:

     

    Aesthetic disarray and moral decay shared the same root, in that both seemed to reveal fundamental weaknesses, most notably a pervasive apathy, in French society itself. From University lecterns, church pulpits, and town council halls came repeated calls for "rejuvenation," "moral education." New voluntary organizations vowed to break the debilitating lethargy afflicting both the state and the older, established social groups. (Wright 16)

     

    Among intellectuals and in centers of political power, the importance of cultural myths to social stability was a seriously debated topic.... The widespread doubt about traditional American Myths threatened to become a dangerous political weakness. In politics, industry and the media there were men and women... who saw the necessity, almost as a patriotic duty, to revitalize and refashion a cultural mythology. (Sklar 195-9)

     

    In either scenario the prevailing sentiment was one of generalized disillusionment with the present. The cacophony of divergent opinions resulted in the perception that traditional values were being lost, and that a once-united socius had fallen into disorder and degeneracy. A central, recurring theme in both countries was an understanding that people’s lack of direction, and lax value systems were conditions that could spur uncontrollable, debilitating mass spasms. The crowd’s fragmentation was conceived as a dangerous symptom of political feebleness before other world powers. To avoid this, recreating the illusion of a single body politic became a national priority. The imperative for both nations was the same: to steer the masses, as a cohesive unit, back to the values that had traditionally stood as symbols of national identity and pride. Just as before World War I, France’s urbanists labored earnestly to provide new mechanisms of establishing social order, so too did Hollywood’s film industry carry out its self-appointed mission in the 40s to congeal the American socius into a single block. Needless to say, this was a conservative effort, a folding back onto safe ground, a regrouping of the troops to gather new strength.

     

    France’s low self esteem was exacerbated when its efforts to gain control over Morocco were stemmed by German initiatives. Hostilities were ushered in when, in an overt attempt to undermine France’s prospective territorial score, German Emperor William II exacted his theatrical proclamation of Moroccan independence and integrity from his yacht on March 3rd 1905 while visiting Tangier. Two marked international crises ensued, one in 1905-06 and one in 1911, which almost resulted in an early start to World War I. In 1907, as a result of the first face-off, Colonel Hubert Lyautey was instructed to take an army unit from Western Algeria into Morocco and establish a “definitive French presence” in Morocco.

     

    Figure 8: Général Lyautey and Général D’Amade inspect the “Général Drude” command post in Casablanca, 1908 (from Marcelin Flandrin, Casablanca Rétro)

     

    To carry out his orders, the French official would need a vehicle not only capable of carrying the message, but in itself the verifiable proof of the message. Concerned with making visible the new territoriality, he fashioned the request for presence on a millenary tradition of staking out the ground: architecture. He resolved to erect French buildings on Moroccan soil and to make Casablanca his first test case. With Casablanca, the French responded to Germany’s aggression by superseding it theatrically and thus dwarfing Emperor William II’s gesture. From the outset, the city was understood as a weapon deployed in the theater of inter-national and intra-national warfare. It was a counterattack to Germany that simultaneously marshaled the Idea of War before the French socius, binding it together in the common cause of national defense. Lyautey understood that exercising political and military power was not “a matter of destroying [people], but transforming them” (qtd. in Wright 16). Lyautey’s self-declared infatuation with urbanity was rooted in a conviction that cities, in their ability to partition the space of social exchanges, constituted a “pacifist arsenal” capable of segregating, harmonizing, and reconstructing social structures and ways of life. The Colonel was not alone in his thinking. In fact, in the late 19th and early 20th centuries, the work of French scholars, like the vastly influential 1894 book by Jean Izoulet, La cité moderne et la métaphisique de la sociologie, had focused on achieving social order through careful urban design and strict social policies. “Issues as varied as the low national birthrate, poor industrial productivity, class antagonisms, inadequate housing stock, and a perceived decline in national prestige since the humiliation of the Franco-Prussian war, all these had urbanistic implications” (Wright 17). Whereas the tenuous political strength of regional administrators in France prevented these theories from being implemented on French soil, the pressing need to control Morocco made the Western Mahgreb a fertile culture for experimentation. Constantly referring to his initiatives as progressive and contrasting them with the intransigence and torpidity of legislature in the métropole, Lyautey sought to demonstrate how French inventiveness and power, if nourished by a strong political system, could continue to stand at the forefront of the world. The French needed only to secure their traditional values through new, clearly planned cities, a spirited and forceful government (like his own), and a consolidated socius, in order to become, once more, a great nation and empire.

     

    The colonization of Morocco, decided in the privacy of a government office, could only perform as an image of French strength and stability if it was cast in the realm of the visible and offered up for the world’s consumption. Lyautey knew his primary task was to produce evidence of his administration’s ability to maintain a “definitive presence” in Morocco–in other words, of his capacity to control space in time. Many options were initially shuffled, from tourism to magazines, but none could be mobilized without having an object to “show.” At a fundamental and symbolic level, even before considerations of urbanity as a tool to mold social patterns, architecture was a perfect vehicle to carry out Lyautey’s orders, insofar as its relationship to the ground responded to the 19th century’s technology of war–one that emphasized victory as the permanent acquisition of territorial gains. Architecture offered Lyautey a means to guarantee the extended temporal presence of France in North Western Africa.3

     

    By grounding French structures in Casablanca, Lyautey was very consciously making visible the new status of the Moroccan geography. The first military barracks, erected around the old medina, were quickly followed by a full blown national Architecture and Urbanism program that legislated the growth and aesthetic character of all major Moroccan towns. French architects like Henry Prost, Joseph Marrast, Adrien Laforgue, and Albert Laprade were handpicked, summoned to serve as functionaries of the state, and charged with all the public commissions. In their hands lay the responsibility of transforming the physical milieu to convey the new political order. The approach seemed to yield positive results. On November 4, 1911, after much haggling with Germany and Spain, France was “given” rights to a protectorship over Morocoo in exchange for ceding parts of French Congo to Germany and revising Franco-Spanish borders in the Mahgreb. Nonetheless, international tensions continued, and, in 1912, Poincaré had promoted Lyautey to Résident-Général of Morocco and head of the Army, so long as he could channel and mold social and economic desires and consolidate the success of the French occupation.

     

    To control architectural production, Lyautey immediately set up two government offices that would wield uncontested command over Moroccan cities’ patterns of growth, infrastructure, and aesthetic character. In 1912 he founded the Bureau of Fine Arts, appointed Tranchant de Lunel as director, and “granted him unprecedented powers, greater than anywhere else in the French-speaking world, to regulate new construction and restore existing buildings in the Moroccan medinas and mellas (Wright 130). In addition, in 1913, Lyautey established the Architecture and Urbanism Department under the direction of Henry Prost, to devise master plans for the new towns, draft zoning ordinances, and design all public structures, and canonize styles. The effect was the production of perfectly controlled urban environments. Casablanca sprang up as a veritable phantasmagoria, in perfect communion with the aims of the state.

     

    Perception is Reality

     

    Prost and Lyautey were convinced that their city would soon become the New York of Africa, through a convenient marriage of architectonic aesthetizations of politics and iron-fisted socio-economic policies. Unfortunately, the main objective of their collaboration–to make an international presentation of the solidity of the French Empire to the world in the face of imminent war–was dramatically behind schedule. By 1917, when Prost’s team finished drafting the master plan for Casablanca’s monumental central square (the Grand Place) World War I was well underway, placing enormous economic burdens on France and its colonies. Architecture, as an effective visualization technology of politics, had been rendered outmoded by the speed of war: There were simply no funds to build Casablanca. However, instead of postponing construction until the finances were made available, colonial administrators opted for increasing the speed of construction at all costs. Lyautey, under the battle cry “every quarry spares me a battalion” (Marrast 54), ordered the acceleration of building projects on course, and the immediate initiation of new works. The result was Prost’s “architecture en surface” where only the facades of buildings were constructed to create the “appearance” of a coherent city. The rest would be “filled in” when funds were made available. The intention was clear, and it was quite obviously Haussmanian: the surface of architecture would be spread over the city like a varnish to cover its discontinuities. A surface rendition of unity, a new reality, spreading over the dismembering city. The foremost task of architects was shifting from their traditional role as organizers and distributers of programmatic activities in space, to a new and awkward responsibility to produce the stage sets of a photographically ordered, almost two-dimensional, city.

     

    Such was the rush to get from design to finished city, that in documents such as Prost’s Grand Place plan, certain key structures, like the edifice facing the Hotel de Ville, were simply blocked out, but contained no indication of what program they were to house.

     

    Figure 9: Master plan for the Grand Place Casablanca, Henry Prost and Jean Marrast, 1914-1917 (from Wright, The Politics of Design)

     

    Designing on the run, architects valued aesthetic clarity over content. What initially seemed a strategic refusal to accept reality was actually a deliberate effort to construct an alternate reality, which was deemed essential for the survival of the empire. Architecture was marshaled to represent France’s ability to endure war with spirited confidence and full command. Lyautey could not turn back. Forced to keep up with the pace of war and to design at an accelerated rate, architects had to draw from conventions and ready-made solutions, to install meaning rather than to excavate it, to produce the real. When Lyautey was called back to France in 1925, he left behind a Casablanca that had nearly tripled its population, and that boasted a new “ville moderne,” and a scenographically remodeled Casbah.

     

    Figures 10 and 11: Aerial views of Casablanca taken in 1907 from a reconnaissance balloon by Lieutenant Bienvenue, and in 1928 from an airplane by Marcelin Flandrin (from: Flandrin, Casablanca Rétro).

     

    Notwithstanding the strategically choreographic maneuverings carried out in Morocco to demonstrate military superiority without physical confrontation, World War I broke out in 1914. It took the death of millions of men, three years of trench warfare, and the near exhaustion of the industrial production machine (the Allied effort almost came to a halt a year into the conflict due to scarcity in munitions), to make commanders realize that the technological advances of weaponry had transformed the logics of battle beyond their comprehension. Soldiers who had initially been sent into battle in bright uniforms (offsprings of the 17th and 18th century when smoke in the field made it difficult to discern your friends from your foes), were rapidly clothed in earthly tones to blur their contours against the desolate topography of no-man’s-land. To look beyond to the other trench meant being seen, and whatever was visible was the potential target of artillery and snipers. These limitations on the utility of human vision and hand-to-hand combat prompted the production of technologically mediated images of the battlefield, inducing a transformation of the dominant field of perception and space/time conceptualizations.4 The increased replacement of the battlefield’s topography with reproductions, the necessary reliance on imaging devices given the inability to depend on the soldier’s direct vision in conflicts where targets were literally out of sight, had a noted effect crucial to our understanding of Casablanca: The diminished relevance of the territory (of space in time), and the increased importance of speed (which collapses space and time into motion, as does cinema) as a primary register of reality.

     

    Already during World War I, photographic technology had proved quite attuned to the new perceptual exigencies of the war machine (there were regular air reconnaissance operations carried out, especially by the US expeditionary corps, to document troop movements). A veritable coupling of the art of war and the art of chronophotography was being achieved that rapidly turned film into a weapon. According to Paul Virilio, the possibility of this amalgam was rooted in the similitude of space-time distortions produced by technological advances in modern war and in cinema:

     

    [T]he military voyeur is handicapped by the slowness with which he scans a field of action overstretched by the dynamic revolution of weaponry and mass transport.... For the disappearance of the proximity effect in the prosthesis of accelerated travel made it necessary to create a wholly simulated appearance that would restore three-dimensionality to the message in full.... [T]his miniaturization of chronological meaning was the direct result of a military technology in which events always unfold in theoretical time. As in cinema, what happens is governed not by a single space-time principle but by its relative and contingent distortion, the capacity of repressive response depending upon the power of anticipation. (59-60)

     

    As the cataclysmic events of the Great War unfolded, the trust placed on the ability of spatial technologies to control the crowd was put into crisis: The inertia of physical barriers could not match the explosive power of new projectiles. However, French officials insisted on the relevance of urbanity. But, because of the exigencies of the war, they were forced to rely on the image of urbanity over its real presence, to convey the idea

     

    Figure 12: Poster for the 1917 exhibit of Morroccan art organized by Lyautey’s administration in Casablanca. The profits went to benefit wartime construction.

     

    of France’s long term presence in Morocco. Prompted by the critical importance of convincing the world that French Casablanca was a reality, even if it was not a finished product, the colonial government deployed an aggressive publicity campaign, hiring travel writers, photographers, poster artists, and filmmakers. As early as 1908, journalists, like Reginald Rankin of the London Times, were regularly sent to the city to report on current events. The Franco-Moroccan Exposition (1915) held in Casablanca with the intention to “demonstrate France’s determination to maintain the white city” (Cohen and Eleb 19) triggered the first comprehensive photographic documentation of Moroccan buildings and cities–other similar exhibits would follow regularly. Official journals like La Renaissance du Marocwere founded with the objective of disseminating the image of French Morocco, and of lauding the work of French professionals (architects were deliberately compared to renaissance masters, salvaging and re-interpreting the Islamic past). In this and other similar periodicals, French-built cities were continuously described as generating the kind of civic morality needed in France at the time.

     

    Just as the city wall had at once been a physical instrument of military deterrence that literally contained the socius, Casablanca had been constructed as a spectacular deterrence mechanism that would unite France under a single effort. But it was becoming increasingly evident that the political task of the city was being carried out in other fields of endeavor. The gap in temporality between the political commission and the architectural delivery was being filled in, almost imperceptibly, by photographs and written accounts that were twice-removed from the real. But in these photographs, the memory of the Idea of War was alive, much more alive than in the actual cities. In fact, photography could already be classified as a military weapon. Photography, as a medium, was not only the primary source of military surveillance, but also the new synthetic battlefield. Children would no longer have to be sent to view the spectacle of war. It could be delivered to them with the same intensity as it was experienced by military commanders behind the lines: in pictures (and, not much later, in moving pictures). Under the camera’s eye, architecture fused into the new simulated territories, no longer as a material substance, but as an ethereal phenomenon symbolically designating ownership, and certifying the verity of the new representations. Conspicuously, writers such as Pierre Mac Orlan would describe Casablanca not as a physical presence, but as an essence, a symbol of French prowess: “Endowed with all that modern industry can provide, this spontaneous phenomenon of French energy [is Casablanca]” (qtd. in Cohen and Eleb 19). But the spectacular construction was not as spontaneous as the French writer would have liked: its production required such a slow gestation that the city’s “presencing” in the real would only come after the Great War it was meant to deter, as a kind of flashback of it. Mac Orlan’s prose, published in 1934, veiled the fact that the city’s construction had been 27 years in the making, and that many official buildings were still unfinished.

     

    Figures 13 and 14: View of the corner of Bouskoura and Galiéi Streets towards the Grand Place in 1926 and 1928 respectively. The Hotel des Postes can be seen terminating the axis, but most structures remain unfinished (from: Flandrin, Casablanca Rétro).

     

    Lyautey had originally thought of the flourishing tourist industry as a means to exhibit his urbanistic prowess and to boost the economy. His contention was that “since the recent, intense development of large-scale tourism, the presentation of a country’s beauty has taken on an economic importance of the first order. To attract a large tourist population is to gain everything for both the public and the private budgets” (qtd. in Wright 134). Tourism had the added advantage that it effectively held the tourist’s sight captive, from official monument, to canonized local quarters, to scenographic French boulevards and plazas. To create a desire for the French public to visit Morocco, Lyautey sent his architects to Paris to reconstruct fragments of the Empire. In 1925, Tranchant de Lunel would design the Moroccan section of the North African Pavilion for the Arts Déco exhibition, and in 1931 a large architectural display was erected at the 1931 Colonial Exhibit. But tourism was still too selective and expensive, entailing long trips from Marseilles to Oran and then to Casablanca. However, the touristic gaze could be molded, controlled, and allowed to perceive the colonies, without actual travel, through representation. The added advantage was that the surface rendition of unity ushered in by Prost’s architecture en surface could be made to appear whole and complete. With the disappearance of the “proximity effect,” there was a window of opportunity to move from the prolonged constructive temporality of Architecture, to wholly simulated, instant environments that could fill in the discontinuities of the real city. It was becoming increasingly evident that architecture could no longer serve either as a primary means of military deterrence nor as a sufficiently expedient political technology. As “Countries, including Britain, would down their traditional means of defense and concentrated on research into perception” (Virilio 50), Lyautey would invest in alternative means to propagate the idea of order embodied in his Casablanca. He invited Jean and Jérôme Tharaud, acclaimed travel writers of the 20s and 30s, to Morocco, so that they might, through their work, foment the touristic visions of Morocco. The Tharauds willingly came under the mandates of the colonial administration–probably thinking they were helping bring morale back to the disconcerted French socius–and produced a wealth of popular accounts on Moroccan cities. The two brothers traveled much of the Mahgreb (and the globe for that matter) in military planes, peering down at the work of the empire from the sky, as their compatriot fighter pilots had targeted objectives with their guns and cameras during World War I. What is interesting in the work of the Tharauds is that, as Emily Apter has pointed out, they repeatedly described their aeronautic eye as a cinematograph panning across the landscape, evidencing the fact that filmic vision had already become the predominant perceptual mode of their era.

     

    In 1930 Josef Von Sternberg released his film Morocco, and in his footsteps, a multitude of filmmakers were enticed to use Lyautey’s theatrical cities as backdrops to their scenes. During the 30s, “the film crew had become such a commonplace appearance in the Moroccan landscape that Wyndham Lewis dedicated an entire section of his jaundiced Moroccan Travelogue Journey into Barbery to a pastiche of what he called ‘film-filibusters,’ industry magnates who ‘send their troupes (not troops) merely to afford their sham-sheiks a Hispano-Mauresque photographic setting’” (Apter 22). The residual components of an unfinished Casablanca were being reconstituted according to a new cinematic logic which defied single space-time relationships, and which was increasingly independent of the ground, of space, and of architecture. In his 1921 essay entitled “Grossissement,” Jean Epstein theorized this displacement from space to cinema as rooted in the cinematograph’s ability to subject time to technical manipulation–a quality paralleled by spatial technologies. Giovanni Pastrone, the Italian Futurist filmmaker, contemporary of Epstein, saw the camera not as an instrument to produce realistic portraits but as an instrument to falsify dimensions. With film cameras the spectator’s viewpoint could be mobile, in communion with the speed of moving objects. Epstein dreamt of being inside his characters, of moving with them and seeing what they saw. For Virilio, what Epstein and Pastrone saw as manipulation was in effect the production of a new kind of understanding of reality, one that would no longer be based on space/time conceptualizations, but on speed:

     

    [W]hat was "false" in cinema was no longer the effect of accelerated perspective but the very depth itself, the temporal distance of the projected space. Many years later, the electronic light of laser holography and integrated-circuit computer graphics would confirm this relativity in which speed appears as the primal magnitude of the image and thus as the source of its depth. (Virilio 16)

     

    With World War II this new conception of reality became predominant, as the globe’s geography became increasingly commensurate with cinematic samplings, and millions of attentive viewers lived the terror of battlefields, once scattered across the globe, now perceived simultaneously, collapsed onto the silver screen via news reels and war propaganda. By the time the next world war was brooding, it was clear that speed of communication (the kind of speed that Architecture could not deliver) was a determinant factor in victory. In speed lay the new possibility of military superiority. Up until the nineteenth century, permanent military fortifications had produced the effect of surprise with the help of booby traps, ditches, and moving gates or walls. Where the enemy was once startled by spectacular architectures, now he would be paralyzed by the sudden appearance of images and signs on monitor screens that simulated the field of battle. As the world’s reality was supplanted by surrogate military technologies, cinema came under the category of weapons, not because of its ability to depict battles, but because of its capacity to create surprise.5 In Lyautey’s mobilization of Casablanca as a vehicle of the Idea of War, where architecture was inevitably superseded by cinema, we find a rare film-city, a strange hybrid prefiguring the transformation in political technologies from architecture to film, from physical space to filmic time/space simultaneity, and finally to speed. Here we find evidence of how architecture, serving outdated political technologies of territorial conquest, proved inefficient and was supplanted by more effective mechanisms of propaganda: war films.

     

    Ordering the New Reality

     

    In the late 1930s and early 40s, when the US felt the danger of war approaching, and fears of unpredictable mass actions causing social breakdown began to resurface, spatial technologies could no longer be considered as viable solutions to curb internal political weaknesses. With the pressing need to wake its population to the new reality of industrialized production and destruction, the political machine turned not to architects but to movie producers. Whereas French architects and urbanists had sought to present a new world order to their compatriots by attempting to actually change the world, the American moviemakers focused on altering people’s perception of reality in order to achieve similar goals. The Hollywood studios, understanding that their own distribution networks and economic survival were at stake, answered the call to arms with a rich assortment of war movies that focused on bringing the aspirations and desires of the population closer to the political goals of the state. The particular attraction of film was that it comfortably slid under the skin (or should we say pupils) of a socius increasingly accustomed to equating reality with their cinematic perceptions of the world. Film, as a technology of politics, was unburdened by the immobility and territorial constraints of architecture. It was almost instantaneous, affecting the entire population simultaneously, and offering as commodities pure emotions and ideas.

     

    With lines as unburdened by sophistication as Ferrari (Sydney Greenstreet)’s “My dear Rick, when will you realize that in this world, today, isolationism is no longer a practical policy,” Casablanca informed American audiences about the new contingencies of international affairs. The message reached the entire population almost instantly. Between 1930 and 1945 Hollywood’s film industry dominated the American socius’ field of perception with its visual entertainment products. Eighty million citizens, more than half of the US population at the time, crowded movie houses every week, drawing 83 percent of the total spent on recreation by Americans. Television, still in its infancy, remained a luxury for the majority–only 8,000 US homes had TV sets in 1946 (Ray 25-26, 132). Hollywood held distribution networks that spanned the world, making the profits reaped internationally by Casablanca upon release roughly equal US takings–the production, which had cost little over a million dollars, made almost six million dollars at the box office.

     

    Casablanca‘s emphasis was, again, not on depicting the spaces of the original (the French city), but on creating a new city that could generate simple emotions in the spectator thanks to elementary scale contrasts (small, tortuous city streets to

     

    Figure 15: Warner Bros. 1942 poster

     

    express confinement, against a vast airport, which, occupying a space comparable to the entire city, stood as the allegory of freedom). The world was at war, and Casablancawas fired at the population to reinforce the idea of a collective project, and of particular values and codes that stood in contrast to those of other nations. The film was aimed at uniting the nation, rallying it against the forces that endangered traditional societal bonds. It was clear to producers that the film’s potential strength would not come from its photo-realistic depictions of the city, but from its ability to surprise the general public. When, on November 8, 1942, the allies landed in Casablanca, final touches on the film were dropped to speed up release and divert the public’s attention away from the real events and into the movie houses. Eighteen days after the incident, American movie houses were playing the film, and newspapers were filled with advertisements reading “Warner’s Split-Second Timing! ‘Casablanca’: The Army’s got Casablanca–and so have Warner Bros!” Inside the dark theaters, the camera’s lens became America’s prosthetic eye, and where there once was an incomprehensible and chaotic world, now a clear image of right and wrong came sharply into focus.

     

    The stamina exemplified in the building of Lyautey’s city and Curtiz’s film drew its lifeblood from an understanding that war “consists not so much in scoring territorial, economic or other material victories as in appropriating the ‘immateriality’ of perceptual fields” (Virilio 7). This is an archetypal military concept, yet, in Casablanca, its logic appears to us in relation to the delirium of industrialized production, and acquires new meaning and relevance. What is fascinating, and at the same time terrifying, about the American and French mobilizations of Casablanca is that they used aesthetics that were fundamentally militaristic as a means to solve socio-political problems. Both summoned the Idea of War as a reductivist filter of state affairs, where clear distinctions between what is correct and good, and what is deviant and bad were established and propagated, by responding to political demands with the theatrics of warfare. The surprise that befell on French colonial administrators when they realized their city was not ready in time to prevent war, was matched by the impotence and frustration of French generals, when, unable to break the enemy’s trench lines, they failed to understand that the strategies of 19th century offensives had become obsolete with the advent of long-range automatic weapons. Industrial production had delaminated the human senses, and projected them beyond time and space, subverting the old ways of experiencing the world. If reality is perception, the impulses sent by the new photographic eyes of the armies to the minds of their fellow men were visions of a whole new universe. Architecture, as a structure that, in a strange double motion, casts the condition of the ground in the visible by standing over it and veiling it, could not stand on top of this new, infinitely expanding dominion. Cinema, however, by technologically collapsing time/space relationships in terms of speed, was capable of delimiting and describing this new topography, and rendering it in the visible. As in architecture, the ability of cinema to perform its exegesis of the new ground could only be carried out by covering it, by concealing the original. Theoreticians like Virilio have read this phenomenon as causing the “disappearance” or the “disintegration” of “things and places,” but we must differ. Just as the ground remains under buildings allowing them to stand, territories and space remain under the surface of film as its supporting scaffolding. In Casablanca one can perceive the sequence unfolding, from ground to architecture to film, as a function of war. Each vehicle of representation, forged in accordance to the conditions of reality, was superseded when the general perception of that reality changed. The thread that guides us through this protean sequence is politics, for the changing perceptions of reality ushered in with each evolution of communication technologies threatened chaos and instigated the need to establish order. The political deployment of the Idea of War in architectural or filmic vehicles, as a means to structure disorder, marks the extension of perceptual realities that characterize our contemporary condition. Casablanca, as rendered in stone or film, does not exemplify the ending and the beginning of mutually exclusive realities, but the buttressing simultaneity of perceptions that constitute our understanding of the world today, from the immediacy of the spaces we live in, to the poliverses of overlapping global territories we inhabit.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The Rabat headquarters of the Bureau of Fine Arts, for example, boasted a collection of 25,000 photographs of various Moroccan buildings. See: Gwendolyn Wright., The Politics of Design in French Colonial Urbanism (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1991) 133.

     

    2. Some of the original photographic and textual references, provided by the Warner Bros. Research Department, and used as background for the film’s writers, designers, and director, are presented in Frank Miller, Casablanca: As Time Goes By–50th Anniversary Commemorative (Atlanta: Turner Publishing; [Kansas City, Mo.: Distributed by Andrews and McMeel], 1992) 45.

     

    3. The dependency of a building to its site is perhaps better understood in philosophical terms. Philosophy is the construction of propositions characterized by their ability to stand up. However, the exercise of that capacity is dependent on the ground’s condition, on the structure’s supporting presence. In any case, “standing up through construction makes visible the condition of the ground” (Wigley 8). In The Architecture of Deconstruction, Mark Wigley references Heidegger’s propensity to address philosophy as a kind of architecture, and metaphysics as an “edifice” with firm “foundations,” laid on stable “ground” that must first be prepared to receive the structure. “Heidegger argues that philosophy’s original but increasingly forgotten object, ‘being’ [Sein], is also a kind of construction, a ‘presencing’ [Answesenheit] through ‘standing.’ Each of philosophy’s successive terms for ‘ground’ [Grund] designates ‘Being,’ understood as ‘presence.’ Metaphysics is the identification of the ground as ‘supporting presence’ for whatever stands like an edifice” (Wigley 8). Wigley’s analysis draws our attention to relationship between architecture and its ground in an oblique fashion: by demonstrating how philosophy, in order to perceive itself as a construction concerned with the exegesis of the structure of Being, must first perceive itself metaphorically as an architecture that renders the status of its ground perceivable, we come to understand that architecture is, in part, a technology to visualize the state of the ground.

     

    4. See Paul Virilio, War and Cinema: The Logistics of Perception (London and New York: Verso, 1989). Also see Stephen Kern, The Culture of Time and Space, 1880-1918 (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1983).

     

    5. See Virilio 7-9, 72.

    Works Cited

     

    • Alberti, Leon Battista. The Ten Books of Architecture. Trans. Giacomo Leoni. London: Edward Owen, 1755; New York: Dover Publications, Inc., 1986.
    • Apter, Emily. “The Landscape of Photogeny: Morocco in Black and White.” Architecture New York 16 (November 1996).
    • Casablanca. Dir. Michael Curtiz. Perf. Ingrid Bergman, Humphrey Bogart, Sydney Greenstreet, Paul Henreid, Peter Lorre, and Claude Rains. Warner Bros. Pictures, Inc., 1942.
    • Cohen, Jean-Louis, and Monique Eleb. “The Whiteness of the Surf: Casablanca.” Architecture New York 16 (November 1996).
    • Eco, Umberto. Travels in Hyperreality: Essays. San Diego: Harcourt Brace & Company, 1986.
    • Kern, Stephen. The Culture of Time and Space, 1880-1918. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1983.
    • Marrast, Jean. “Maroc.” L’oeuvre de Henri Prost: Architecture et Urbanisme. Ed. Académie d’Architecture. Paris: Imprimerie du Compagnonnage, 1960.
    • Miller, Frank. Casablanca: As Time Goes By–50th Anniversary Commemorative. Atlanta: Turner Publishing (Kansas City, Mo.: Distributed by Andrews and McMeel), 1992.
    • Norberg-Shultz, Christian. Genius loci: Towards a Phenomenology of Place. New York: Rizzoli International Publications, Inc., 1986.
    • Plato. Republic. Trans. Francis Macdonald Cornford. New York and London: Oxford UP, 1967.
    • Ray, Robert B. A Certain Tendency of the Hollywood Cinema, 1930-1980. Princeton N.J.: Princeton UP, 1985.
    • Robertson, James C. The Casablanca Man: The Cinema of Michael Curtiz. London: Routledge, 1993.
    • Sklar, Robert. Movie Made America: A Social history of American Movies. New York: Random House, 1975.
    • Wigley, Mark. The Architecture of Deconstruction. Cambridge and London: The MIT Press, 1993.
    • Virilio, Paul. War and Cinema: The Logistics of Perception. London and New York: Verso, 1989.
    • Gwendolyn Wright. The Politics of Design in French Colonial Urbanism. Chicago: The U of Chicago P, 1991.

     

  • Presenting the Cyborg’s Futurist Past: An Analysis of Dziga Vertov’s Kino-Eye

    Joseph Christopher Schaub

    Department of Comparative Literature
    University of Maryland

    Joseph_C_SCHAUB@umail.umd.edu

    Introduction

     

    Contemporary discussions about gender in cyberspace often rely on assumptions about the immanently liberatory potential of technology.

     

    Animated image constructed by
    author using Man With a
    Movie Camera
    production stills.

     

    Undoubtedly much of this enthusiasm for technology has been generated by Donna Haraway’s “A Cyborg Manifesto,” the foundational essay on cyborg subjectivity. Haraway embraces technology’s disruption of such previously stable borders as that between the organism and the machine. She is making “an argument for pleasure in the confusion of boundaries… an effort to contribute to socialist-feminist culture and theory in a postmodernist, non-naturalist mode and in the tradition of imagining a world without gender” (Haraway 150). But amid all the enthusiasm for a postgender cyberspace, it is important to remember that Haraway is not the first to imagine a world without gender in the coupling of humans and machines. The writers of the Futurist movement of the early twentieth century precede her vision, but to achieve it they called for the elimination of the feminine.

     

    In an essay entitled “War, Sole Hygiene of the World,” the premiere theorist of the Italian Futurist movement, F. T. Marinetti, “specifies that the ideal universe remains devoid of women, consisting only of men and machines” (Orban 56). The passage creates a troubling obstacle for theories of the cyborg which attempt to establish a connection between the disappearance of the techno/organic boundary and the disappearance of gender. Perhaps for that reason, the Futurist roots of the cyborg have been largely ignored in the hope that the technological advances which have made the cyborg “our ontology” (Haraway 150) have eliminated Marinetti’s misogyny.

     

    Instead of ignoring the Futurist roots of the cyborg, I have chosen to explore alternatives to the misogyny inherent in Marinetti’s writings on Futurism. The Russian Futurists, for example, though their platform was very similar to the Italians’ in their hatred of bourgeois conventions, differed remarkably in two areas which the Italians saw as fundamental for escaping those conventions: the glorification of war and the demonization of women. Particularly in the work of Dziga Vertov, filmmaker and theorist of the early Soviet era, the anti-feminist stance of the Italian Futurists is rejected in favor of a representational strategy that privileges women as filmic subjects without reinforcing patterns of visual pleasure that support bourgeois patriarchal ideology. In what follows I will examine the traces of Futurism that inform Dziga Vertov’s Man With a Movie Camera (1929) and discuss the way that Vertov’s cyborg construction, the Kino Eye, destabilizes the gender hierarchy that underlies bourgeois capitalism without eliminating women from the world of the text. By foregrounding its own process of production, and displaying both men and women involved in creating the film, Man With a Movie Camera radically departs from the bourgeois conventions which all Futurists despised; but it does so without scapegoating women.

     

    Man With a Movie Camera is the result of Vertov’s ten-year effort to work out a theory of technologically-assisted vision. “Kino-Eye” is the name he gave to his the ory, and it involves not only a disappearance of the border between the camera and the eye but a dissolution in the stages separating the process of film production as well. Vertov’s cameraman and brother, Mikhail Kaufman, appears in the film as often as Vertov’s editor and wife, Elizaveta Svilova. As a historical representation of the cyborg that promotes strategies for minimizing the hierarchical stratification of gender, the film serves as a model for contemporary discussions of postgender cyberspace . Rather than eliminating one or both genders in a human/machine merger, Vertov balances the masculine and feminine contributions to the production of meaning in what may be the first revolutionary cybertext, Man With a Movie Camera, with th e first revolutionary cyborg, the Kino-Eye.

     

    The Futurist Roots of the Cyborg

     

    After being conquered by Futurist eyes our multiplied sensibilities will at last hear with Futurist ears. In this way the motors and machines of our industrial cities will one day be consciously attuned, so that every factory will be transformed into an intoxicating orchestra of noises.

     

    –Luigi Russolo

     

    Donna Haraway’s “A Cyborg Manifesto” outlines a number of boundaries that have been broken by the late twentieth century in the United States. For discussions of the cyborg, the most important of these is the distinction between organism and machine which she says is now “thoroughly ambiguous” (152). As Haraway notes, “Our machines are disturbingly lively, and we ourselves, frighteningly inert” (152). In creating a postmodern cyborg subjectivity, Haraway acknowledges changes in our conception of the various binary structures which modernist notions of subjectivity were founded upon. High modernist works such as The Scream illustrate the split in the subject, a division between the subject’s inside and outside, which the modernists define as alienation. This division and its implications “are no longer appropriate to the world of the postmodern,” as Fredric Jameson notes (14). Strict distinctions between signifier and signified, subject and object, reality and representation have collapsed in the wake of the late twentieth century’s poststructuralist critique. Haraway’s extension of this critique into the line dividing organic and inorganic matter is as much a product of postmodern/poststructuralist thinking as a contribution to it. Likewise, when Haraway states that “the cyborg is a creature in a postgender world” (150), she acknowledges the fragmentation of gender as a binary structure, as well.

     

    The early Futurists would have found it difficult to engage in this particular border dispute. As modernists they were thoroughly entrenched in the kind of binary thinking that separated organic from inorganic and masculinity from femininity. As a result their conception of the cyborg is only apparent through their pairings of men and machines in their art. In “The Founding Manifesto of Futurism,” Marinetti makes clear that man with machine is the subject of the future. “We want to hymn the man at the wheel, who hurls the lance of his spirit across the Earth” (21), Marinetti writes in point number 5. This follows the oft-quoted statement in point number 4 which affirms that a roaring motorcar is more beautiful than the Victory of Samothrace. For Marinetti the future was guaranteed to “Man” by his insoluble bond to machines. Woman and femininity belonged to the past, to the 19th century. The connection with women and institutions of the past is made obvious in point number 10, which reads, “We will destroy the museums, libraries, academies of every kind, will fight moralism, feminism, every opportunistic or utilitarian cowardice” (22). The future belonged to men.

     

    The Russian Futurists were different, though, like the Italians, they disdained the past and the various institutions which preserved it. Their founding manifesto reads, “The Academy and Pushkin are less intelligible than hieroglyphics. Throw Pushkin, Dostoevsky, Tolstoy, etc. overboard from the Ship of Modernity” (B urliuk et al 51). But Russian Futurism and Italian Futurism were never as closely aligned as their common name would suggest. In his 1927 article, “We Are the Futurists,” Osip Brik acerbically states, “Russian Futurists arose long before Marinetti becam e well known in Russia. And when Marinetti came to Russia in January 1914, the Russian Futurists met him with complete animosity (252-252). Still, Brik concedes that the Russian Futurists “have made use of certain of the Italian Futurist’s slogans…”(Burliuk 252). He goes on to list the points which the Russians had adopted from Marinetti’s founding manifesto. The list contains points 1 through 4. It skips points 5 and 6, then includes points 7 and 8, but leaves out 9, 10 and 11 (Burliuk 252).

     

    The points Brik repudiates in this crucial essay reveal the stark differences between Russian and Italian Futurism. Point number 5, which hymns the “man at the wheel,” has already been discussed, as has point 10, which vows to destroy feminism, as well as museums, libraries, and academies. Perhaps the most objectionable notions, though, are contained in point 9. It reads: “We will g lorify war–the world’s only hygiene–militarism, patriotism, the destructive gesture of freedom-bringers, beautiful ideas worth dying for, and scorn for woman” (Marinetti 22). The Russian Futurists never relied on the glorification of war or misogyny to advance their platform celebrating humanity’s union with technology. The intention behind Russian Futurist art was “not the hymning of technology, but its control in the name of the interests of humanity” (Mayakofsky 35).

     

    In the work of Dziga Vertov, we can see how the Russian Futurists recuperated the essentially cyborg notion of combining technology and humanity from the misogynist trap into which the Italians fell. Vertov’s cyborg construction was originally conceived as a device for enhancing human optics, as this 1923 statement sug gests: “I am kino-eye, I am a mechanical eye. I, a machine, show you the world as only I can see it” (17). But Kino-Eye’s first person address already suggests a merger between human and machine, something that would be further explored and complicated i n Vertov’s later writings.

     

    By the time Man With a Movie Camera was made, Vertov’s conception of the Kino-Eye was divided into the three stages of the production process that he and his collaborators used to create their films. In 1929, Vertov wrote: “Kino-eye = kino-seeing (I see through the camera) + kino-writing (I write on film wit h the camera) + kino-organization (I edit)” (87). These three stages correspond perfectly to the three positions occupied by Elizaveta Svilova, Dziga Vertov, and Mikhail Kaufman, collectively known as “The Council of Three” (12).

     

    After Vertov, Kino-Eye.

     

    As the camera-man, and Vertov’s brother, Mikhail Kaufman fulfilled the kino-seeing function, Vertov himself, as director, was responsible for what was shot, the kino-writing, and Elizaveta Svilova, Vertov’s wife, edited their pieces.

     

    The Kino-Eye, then, is a cyborg construction that contains multiple positions for the production of film meaning. Those positions were obviously chosen so that equitable contrib utions could be made from representatives of each gender. (The apparently uneven number of males and females in the Council of Three will be explained later, in light of the importance of editing in Soviet filmmaking, relative to the other stages of pro duction.) It is the first example of a theory of the cyborg that does not rely on a misogynistic eradication of the feminine in order to unite man and machine. In order to see how the Kino-Eye works in a film text we must now examine Man With a Mo vie Camera.

     

    Man With a Movie Camera

     

    After Vertov, Kino-Eye.

     

    As the last of Vertov’s silent films, Man With a Movie Camera stands at the peak of the Soviet avant garde film movement of the twenties, and extends the most thorough vision of Vertov’s understanding of the combination of the human and the machine implicit in the term Kino-Eye. The subject of Man With a Movie Camera is the cyborg; it is not “man.” Vertov ass ociated man as subject with the bourgeois filmmaking he hoped to supplant with Kino-Eye filmmaking. In a polemical treatise reminiscient of the early Futurist writings, Vertov attacks the mainstream tradition of the narrative “film-drama” which draws upo n previous bourgeois conventions, such as the romance and psychological novel. Vertov writes, “the ‘psychological’ prevents man from being as precise as a stopwatch; it interferes with his desire for kinship with the machine.” In banishing the conventio ns of bourgeois cinema, Vertov also eliminates the human character, as he acknowledges in this statement: “For his inability to control his movements. We temporarily exclude man as a subject for film” (7).

     

    Vertov’s exclusion of “man” as a subject for film has a double meaning. Not only does it allude to the need for a filmic subject able to transcend the imprecision of the traditi onal psychologically motivated narrative, but this same subject must not be gendered in a way which implicates the viewer in the logic of the look so essential to maintaining power relationships in patriarchal culture. It is the look, or “gaze,” and its obvious association with scopophilic pleasure, which Laura Mulvey has discussed as essential to maintaining patriarchal power relationships. Mulvey writes:

     

    Woman... stands in patriarchal culture as a signifier for the male other, bound by a symbolic order in which man can live out his fantasies and obsessions through linguistic command by imposing them on the silent image of woman still tied to her place as bearer, not maker, of meaning. (15)

     

    This is where Man With a Movie Camerapresents the greatest challenge to mainstream filmmaking. While excluding man as subject of the film, Vertov also includes woman as maker of meaning.

     

    Man With a Movie Camera begins with a shot of a movie camera, facing the viewer, and from out of the top of the camera a miniature Mikhail Kaufman climbs with his camera and tripod, aims it at the offscreen space to the right, and begins to crank. A cut reveals the top of a building, which, according to the conventions of mainstream narrative cinema, where the spectator identifies with the look of a character, is presumably the object the came raman is filming. But already this simple association begins to subvert those conventions it appears to follow, as Judith Mayne points out in her analysis of this segment:

     

    Production stills, Man With a Movie Camera.

     

    The “how” precedes the “what”; the image is designated as a product of the cinematic process, and not as a reflection of a world outside that of the film. The following two shots repeat a similar pattern with slight differences. In shot three, the cameraman is seen at an increased distance; and the angle of shot four, a la mppost, is slightly different from the angle of shot two. A puzzling reversal occurs as well: the off-center but nonetheless continuous match between shots one and two is impossible between shots three and four, since in shot three the cameraman picks u p his equipment and moves off-screen. Thus a sense of continuity is established and violated at the same time (Mayne 159).

     

    Following these four brief shots, we see the cameraman, now in scale with his surroundings, entering the movie theater through the curtains and heading to the projection booth. He then threads the projector with what the logic of continuity driven cinema would have us believe is the film he has just exposed. This completely elides the processes in between shooting and screening a film.

     

    Here the particulars of the filmmaking process are not hidden to disguise aspects of the film’s production as in mainstream narrative cinema, which does not wish to jeopardize th e viewer’s pleasure, but rather to avoid the possibility of showing that process so completely that a narrative centered on filmic production might arise from the very attempt to subvert traditional narrative. Again, a sense of continuity is established and violated. This pattern of foregrounding the process of production appears again and again throughout the film, because “the film aims to take the spectator from a position of unreflective consumption of cinema to one of actively producing the film’s meaning” (Crofts and Rose 15). This is a crucial point, and will be returned to shortly, but I will first address a problem regarding the opening sequence.

     

    Reading the opening sequence as a narrative preliminary to the rest of the film sets up the cameraman as the central character which would then appear to violate Vertov’s exclusion of “man” as a subject of film, and reinstitute the gendered hierarchy which Mulvey critiques. However, it soon becomes apparent through scenes such as the one in which a young woman’s eyes blinking are intercut with venetian blinds opening and closing that there is no central characte r to this film. In fact it is possible to determine this even before the venetian blind scene as Mayne displays in stating:

     

    From the very beginning... the centrality of the cameraman's vision is put into question, since he moves out of frame in the third shot of the film. In other words, the cameraman cannot be equated with a central character, or even the central narrating i ntelligence of a narrative film, since visual perspective is not localized in a single figure, but dispersed through multiple perspectives. (162)

     

    This notion of the visual subject dispersed through multiple perspectives is as fundamental to an understanding of the Kino-Eye as an essentially cyborg construction as the combining of human and machine, which is also seen throughout the film.

     

    The Kino-Eye, then, can be understood as an ideological weapon, a cyborg combination of human and movie camera, which both creates and depends upon multiple perspectives for its interpretation and communication. In taking the spectator from the position of passive consumer to active producer of cinematic meaning, the K ino-Eye functions as a contagious “virus,” contained in the film text. Once infected by it the viewer becomes Kino-Eye, “challenging the human eye’s visual representation of the world and offering its own ‘I see’” (Mayne 21). Through a new form of visua lization it begins to destabilize the various hierarchies which patriarchal capitalism depends upon for maintaining hegemonic dominance.

     

    Animated image constructed by
    author using Man With a
    Movie Camera
    production stills.

     

    The most prevalent hierarchy destabilized is gender. Several writers have commented on the complex way that gender is questioned in Man With a Movie Camerasince most of the subjects of the camera are women. Kaufman is the human figure who appears most frequently in the film, but he never appears in close-up, thereby making character identification quite difficult, and he never appears without his camera, which suggests that he is not gendered male, but cyborg. In other words he is not man as bearer of the look, but man, bearer of the camera. Even more important, though, is the presence of Vertov’s wife and editor, Elizaveta Svilova, at the editing table creating cinematic meaning from ribbons of celluloid.

     

    Svilova appears about 21 minutes, or one-third of the way into this 66-minute film, seated at her editing table, with scissors in hand, cutting the film and cement-splicing it into new patterns. About one minute before she appears a series of freeze-frame stills, beginning with a horse pulling a carriage and ending with close-up faces of people, appears for the first time in the film. S ince Man With a Movie Camera uses all manner of camera and editing techniques, the use of freeze-frames isn’t unusual. But in this instance the stills prepare us for a pseudo-identification with Svilova’s “gaze,” since she sees the film firs t as an extensive strip of separate images. In some of the images we even see the perforated sprocket holes at the edge of the frame, completely demystifying the illusion of cinematic continuity as well as mimesis.

     

    Svilova’s appearance as the editor in this film is somewhat more complex than Kaufman’s appearance as cameraman because of the place that editing had in the hierarchy of Soviet s ilent film theory. In numerous articles advanced by Eisenstein, Pudovkin, Kuleshov, and Vertov, editing, or “montage,” was given prominence as the most important aspect of filmmaking. Pudovkin’s famous quote that, “the film is not shot, but built, built up from the separate strips of celluloid that are its raw material” (Leyda 211), serves as a not-so-subtle reminder of the place of editing, and of cinematography in the filmmaking process of the early Soviets. However, it may be pointed out that the fi lm is entitled Man With a Movie Camera, not “Woman With a Pair of Scissors.” The important thing here is not so much whether the cameraman or the editor serves as the privileged locus of signifying practice, rather it is the way in which the gender hierarchy is destabilized by the Kino-Eye, which must now include the eyes of the editor as part of its totality.

     

    Further examples of the way that gender is destabilized by the Kino-Eye include the ambiguous nature of the eye itself when reflected in the lens of the camera. Lynne Kirby, in “From Marinetti to Vertov: Woman on the Track of Avant-Garde Representation,” argues that the eye we see superimposed over the camera lens is not Kaufman’s, but rather the eye of a woman who is awakened by a train passing over the cameraman who lies on the tracks. According to Kirby, “The association of the camera lens and shutter with the woman’s eye is the most frequently cited example of the self-reflexive operations of Vertov’s film. That this is first a woman’s eye, however is often overlooked” (313). For Kirby, the Kino-Eye is a feminine machine set in motion, or awakened by the passing of a train over the body of the cameraman. But I see a more gender-neutral identity for the Kino-Eye. In the sequence of shots Kirby cites (approximately eight and a half minutes into the film), the cameraman does appear to be run over by the train at the very point when a woman wakes and begins to look around. But immediately following the shots comprising his being run over, which include close-ups of his feet and head on the tracks, quickly spliced between shots of the train rushing by, the cameraman gets up unscathed and walks back to a car waiting to drive him away. The fact that the cameraman is completely unharmed by his encounter with the train rules out any possibility of perceiving this sequence as strictly violent. Kirby, however, argues that the train, the woman awakening, and more specifically the shots of her dressing which follow constitute “the setting in motion of a sexual imaginary…” (313). Indeed there are erotic undercurrents pervading this film, which doesn’t hesitate to display in fragmented form semiclad bathers at the beach, the slow motion bodies of both male and female athletes performing various feats, even a woman giving birth. But the eroticism is always mitigated by the gender-neutrality of the Kino-Eye, which does not indulge in the kind of scopophilic fantasy narrative so common in mainstream Hollywood cinema.

     

    The erotic undercurrents in Man With a Movie Camera are impossible to explain using theories in which desire is either masculine or feminine, but theories of the cyborg explain the eroticism in this film quite adequately. William R. Macauley and Angel J. Gordo-Lopez, in their article “From Cognitive Psychologies to Mythologies,” discuss seduction and technological abandonment of the body through the performance artist, Stelarc: “He claims that mutilation of the body is an obligatory passage point for our communion with technological webs” (435). In light of this quote, the initial train scene, in which Kaufman appears to be run over, can be viewed as the obligatory passage point for the cameraman’s transformation into the Kino-Eye, awakened by the “mutilation” of Kaufman’s body. But in Man With a Movie Camera, the merger that occurs is as much with the awakened woman as it is with technology.

     

    This is the real source of the erotic undercurrent in Man With a Movie Camera. The Kino-Eye is neither masculine nor feminine. Vertov emphasizes its hybrid nature both as a techno/organic and as a postgender creation. In her analysis of the film Kirby even suggests this by attempting to locate a “di–v ision… between a feminine and masculine voyeurism” (309). By hyphenating the word, “di–vision,” Kirby appears to be searching, not so much for two separate types of voyeurism, which the word “division” would imply, as two related types–a double visio n. Understanding the Kino-Eye as a gender-neutral, or more appropriately, androgynous human-machine construction, makes this di–vision, a scopophilic desire to understand other cyborgs, or as Vertov would put it, “the sensory exploration of the world th rough film” (14).

     

    Conclusion

     

    While Man With a Movie Camera has been closely examined as a Marxist and constructivist text (most notably in Stephen Croft’s and Olvia Rose’s “An Essay Towards Man With a Movie Camera”), the film’s value as a cybertext has gone largely untapped. This comes as a bit of a surprise since Dziga Vertov’s depiction of the Kino-Eye in Man With a Movie Camera has much in common with the postmodern cyborg that Donna Haraway has theorized in the “Cyborg Manifesto.” Like Haraway’s cyborg, the Kino-Eye is not dependent upon an organic ontology, an d its multiple perspectives closely resemble the heterogenous points of entry which characterize Haraway’s conception of cyborg subjectivity.

     

    Italian Futurism glorified the union of man and machine, but Vertov’s Kino-Eye escaped this binary perception of gender which lead Marinetti to efface the feminine. The Kino-Eye embraces the feminine perspective and represents woman as maker of meaning in Man With a Movie Camera. Vertov’s decision to completely foreground the production process was a bold move even for an avant-garde filmmaker, since many of his contemporaries were still working largely within the narrative tradition. No less bold was his decision to emphasize the contribution of women. Man With a Movie Camera presents these two separate agendas seamlessly in a direct reversal of the Classical Hollywood style which hides the process of production. Classical Hollywood Cinema also presents woman as spectacle for masculine pleasure. The pleasure in Man With a Movie Camera begins with liberation from gender hierarchy.

     

    Production still, Terminator 2: Judgment Day.

     

    In contemporary discussions of gender in cyberspace the equitable representation of women is not a foregone conclusion. The cyborg has done as much to reify existing stereotypes about gender as it has to eradicate them. Hyper-masculine cyborg creations potrayed by Arnold Schwarzenneger in the Terminatormovies suggest that the dream of the Italian Futurists, a world devoid of women, leaving only men and machines, rules Hollywood today. For this reason it is even more important to seek out historical representations of the cyborg that promote strategies for minimizing the hierarchical stratification of gender. In this paper I have tried to suggest that there is a wealth of relevant theory in the revolutionary work of the Russian Futurists. Vertov’s Kino-Eye is one applicable example of a responsible paradigm for managing the merger of technology and humanity.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Burliuk, D., Alexander Kruchenykh, V. Mayakovsky, Victor Khlebnikov. “Slap in the Face of Public Taste.” Russian Futurism Through its Manifestos, 1912-1928. Ed. Anna Lawton. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1988. 51-53.
    • Crofts, Stephen, and Olivia Rose. “An Essay Towards Man With a Movie Camera.” Screen 18 1 (Spring 1977): 9-58.
    • Haraway, Donna J. “A Cyborg Manifesto: Science, Technology, and Socialist-Feminism in the Late Twentieth Century.” Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Women. New York: Routledge, 1991. 149-181.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, Or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Kirby, Lynne. “From Marinetti to Vertov: Woman on the Track of Avant-Garde Representation.” Quarterly Review of Film Studies 10: 309-323.
    • Leyda, Jay. Kino: A History of the Russian and Soviet Film. London: Ruskin House, 1960.
    • Macauley, William J, and Angel J. Gordo-Lopez. “From Cognitive Psychologies to Mythologies: Advancing Cyborg Textualities for a Narrative of Resistance.” The Cyborg Handbook. New York: Routledge, 1995. 433-444.
    • Marinetti, F. T. “The Founding and Manifesto of Futurism 1909.” Futurist Manifestos. Ed. Umbro Apollo nio. New York: Viking Press, 1970.
    • Mayakovsky, Vladimir. The Bedbug and Selected Poetry. Ed. Patricia Blake. New York: The World Publishing Company, 1960.
    • Mayne, Judith, Kino and The Woman Question: Feminism and Soviet Silent Film. Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 1989.
    • Mulvey, Laura, “Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema.” Visual and Other Pleasures. Bloomington & Indianapolis: Indian University Press, 1989. 14-26.
    • Orban, Clara. “Women, Futurism, and Fascism.” Mothers of Invention: Women, Italian Fascism, and Culture. Ed. Robin Pickering-Iazzi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1995. 52-75.
    • Russolo, Luigi. The Art of Noises (excerpt). Futurist Manifestos. Ed. Robert Motherwell. Trans. Caroline Tisdall. New York: Viking Press, 1970.
    • Vertov, Dziga. Kino-Eye: The Writings of Dziga Vertov. Ed. Annette Michelson. Trans. Kevin Obrien. Berkeley: U of California P, 1984.

     

  • Simultaneity and Overlap in Stanley Kubrick’s The Killing

    Stephen Mamber

    Department of Film/TV
    University of California at Los Angeles
    smamber@ucla.edu

     

    …the cinematographic image is in the present only in bad films.

     

    –Deleuze

     

    Stanley Kubrick’s racetrack robbery caper film The Killing (1956) is a conceptual exercise in time travel.[1] Using a narrator reminiscent of Dragnet, or the impersonal narrators of Kubrick’s later films, the film goes forward in time most often in overlap, by first going backward to pick up the thread of another character’s movements earlier than where we are currently placed. There is no progress in the film, because wherever you go returns you to where you’ve already been. Once again, an early Kubrick preoccupation is evident–exactly the same might be said of The Shining or Full Metal Jacket and most of his circularly organized constructions.

     

    Rather than stress the intimations of early Kubrick in The Killing, I want to explore what it does rather strikingly on its own terms–to express temporal notions of simultaneity and overlap. The ingenious, complex narrative structure is worth some examination in its own right. The Killing might be called a flashback film with no flashbacks (with one exception, as I shall discuss), an expression of the idea Deleuze has expressed so well in Cinema 2: The Time Image: that awareness of the past doesn’t depend upon flashback constructions. The Killing goes backward from the very beginning, and its end is where we start, so the entire movie is a series of elliptical goings-back.

     

    To illustrate this strategy, let us resort to a chart:

     

    The chart is of roughly the second half of the film, which all takes place in one day–the day of the robbery and the subsequent capture of Johnny, the leader (or should we say recapture, as a week earlier, at the start of the film, he had just been let out of jail). Each horizontal line of the chart represents the character announced by the narrator, always in terms of where they are at the start of a sequence and importantly, what time of day this action is taking place. If a segment shifts location or time, the narrator generally offers us the particulars, and most sequences end as well with another announcement of time (“Nikki was dead at 4:23”). By following these indicators, we can construct the chart. Each colored rectangle represents a narrative sequence; the gaps indicate temporal breaks. To “read” each line from top to bottom is to go through all of the film on the day of the race. Ordinarily we would have to line up the sequences in time, as shown in this chart. When do we go backwards? By a lot or a little? And more importantly, when do we go back over time we have already seen elsewhere or by some other point of view? To see that on the chart, one must construct vertical time slices after we’ve seen all the pieces. When we do, as we might expect, the overlap and the expressions of simultaneity are considerable.

     

    The film has some interesting means to express simultaneity, generally through repetition, which perhaps keeps it from being completely impossible to follow. However, its genius lies in the conceptual nature of this enterprise, the glimpses of a grand design which are far larger than the simple signs that can initiate the investigation.

     

    Easy-to-read repetitions obviously include the racetrack announcer, who can tell us that the seventh race is about to begin or a horse is down. Others include repetitions of dialogue, such as Maurice the Wrestler’s staged racial epithet as he begins to cause a scene. When these repetitions occur, we know we are back where we’ve been, free now to see another piece of the puzzle. Some use of this kind of construction is not unique to The Killing. What is unique is the extent to which it becomes the organizing principle of the work. One clear predecessor (as for so many movies) is Citizen Kane, whose flashback structure also has pointed overlaps–Susan’s opera debut being shown twice would be one instance among many. It’s not for nothing that Kane and The Killing both make overt use of the jigsaw puzzle metaphor, as both films also make clear that their pieces aren’t going to fit. Also, what constitutes a “piece” becomes a nice problem, as particularly in The Killing, we often might not be sure where and how the overlaps are coming. There is, in fact, only one true flashback in the film, tossed in like one of those moments in a jazz improvisation where the melody is played straight, to show that the person breaking the rules knows what they are. That one flashback occurs in a scene in which most of the gang are still alive and are back at their rendezvous-apartment. There they recall how the money bag had been thrown out the window to land at the feet of Randi the Cop–an action we had already seen from inside during one of Johnny’s sequences. In The Killing we lurch back and forth in a manner that only comes to make sense retrospectively.

     

    Along with the narrator, the failed mastermind Johnny warns us of this difficulty in seeing the big picture. Johnny is that combination of grandiose, power-mad genius and dumb sap so familiar in Kubrick–in no small ways, something like both God and a film director. The linkage between the artist and the gangster is made perhaps too explicit in a near incomprehensible speech by the heavily-accented Maurice,2 but importantly, while Johnny has come up with the grand scheme, he doesn’t motivate or control it. Johnny is under the thumb of the narrator as completely as all other characters, and while he gets somewhat more attention (see the chart again), he has no privileged position. The king on the chessboard is still a piece, and still as vulnerable to attack.

     

    An important consequence of this temporal strategy is spatial isolation, although we could as well reverse the equation–the sequences of isolation lead to the temporal overlaps (the small diagram below seeks to represent this notion). Members of the gang during the course of the robbery rarely see each other. They can occupy the same space briefly, Johnny going in a door as Maurice is dragged away by a gaggle of security cops, but only as they go in different directions (and/or to their deaths). As such, the little boxes of the chart have a counterpart in the separation of spaces. Even though most of the film takes place at one racetrack, our view of it is greatly fragmented. The task of filling in the spaces, as it were, is just as conceptual as the temporal ordering. In both cases, the filling in is a mental activity on our part of grand designs Kubrick suggests through his ingeniously fragmentary construction. We as much have to figure out a temporal ordering as a spatial arrangement; the two, of course, strongly depend upon each other.

     

    In his useful new biography of Kubrick, Vincent LoBrutto reports (very thoroughly, but without all the irony it deserves) that Hollywood was less than pleased with Kubrick’s temporal experiment. Attempts were made, fortunately to no avail, to see if the film could be recut and presented in a more classical manner (LoBrutto 123). That would be rather like Michael Powell trying to do The Red Shoes in black-and-white, taking the film’s reason for being and seeing if it could be eliminated. These last-minute fears about intelligibility have, of course, dogged Kubrick throughout his career.

     

    Back at the racetrack, let’s add some spatial considerations to our temporal ones. In a simple reconstructed overview, let’s visualize the space of the film as follows:

     

    Even in so simple a view, some things become apparent a bit more easily. For one, the space of the film is extremely limited (maybe not much bigger than the Overlook Hotel in The Shining, say). Even though nobody hardly ever sees anyone else, you’d think they’d have a hard time not doing so. If Nikki’s shot at Red Lightning were to miss, he’d as likely hit Johnny or the easy target of Maurice. In other words, temporal isolation enforces spatial separation. Also, the spaces are used as isolated fragments. Even though no more than a door or a window may separate two spaces, they are as likely to be shown to us in separated temporal segments. Johnny going through a door in one episode won’t come out the other side until much “later” in another sequence. (The same can be said many times, of money bags, girl friends, cops.)

     

    Seen as a construction in this manner, The Killing becomes something like what it already is, a grandly conceptual vision that perhaps can be expressed in something like a video game as much as a movie, or as much a chessboard filled with game pieces as a jigsaw puzzle. To that end, I have taken the visual pieces included here and put together a way to explore the film which uses space and time to explore each other. Clicking on the chart above would take you to the appropriate point in the film, together with a model of the space in question and an indication on an overview of where this moment/place belongs. It’s only by visualizing this linkage between isolated spaces and temporal overlaps that one begins to appreciate the conceptual complexity of Kubrick’s film. To that end, a few of the 3-D recreations are included here, and it will be left to the reader to see where they would belong in the earlier time chart, though it’s not feasible to include the corresponding video clips here as well.3

     

    Click here to see the 3-D images
     

    To look at one key moment in a bit more detail, we can examine the all-important shooting of Red Lightning, which signals the delay (Johnny using a wise Kubrick strategy) that allows the money to be in one place long enough for Johnny to steal it. While this is only one instance of temporal overlap, it gives a pretty good idea of how the rest of the film also works (Johnny getting in the door during Maurice’s diversionary fight, finding a way to get the money out of the park, and the gang shootout are a few other examples of the same narrative strategy). We can take a little “time slice” of one hour and see how extensive the overlap becomes–pieces of the same hour are shown during five separate sequences.

     

    In virtually every one of the episodes, not everything goes according to plan, but it goes smoothly enough to keep the whole enterprise lurching forward. Nikki shoots the horse as he was hired to do, but is himself killed. Earlier when accepting the assignment, Nikki has theorized what the effects of his act will be, but Johnny characteristically insists upon the importance of his remaining in the dark. Ironically, however, Nikki’s horseshoe-aided demise seems to be the result of his own human deficiencies and not Johnny’s plan. (Like Major Kong in Strangelove, the guy who delivers the goods is the first to go.) We get an inkling of simultaneity when the “horse is down” announcement is heard while Johnny dons his disguise just before bursting into the money-counting room. In another near screw-up, after sending the money through the window, Johnny escapes as planned, but only because the drunken Marv has ignored his instruction to stay away from the track and is there to bump into a returning security guard. Are we seeing unplanned contingencies or major errors? Is there a grand design? The horse-shooting suggests the general orientation–the isolated pieces fit in terms of a strategy, but the foul-ups can never be fully accounted for. Somebody’s always going to fight in the War Room.

     

    Click here to Get Quicktime File – 3-D Model of Betting Area
     

    In John Huston’s great earlier version of the grand caper, The Asphalt Jungle (also starring, of course, the wonderful Sterling Hayden), the plan falls apart because of human weaknesses of the participants involved. The Killing seems to offer a similar conclusion, but it veers into more complex territory. The ability to conceive the exploit, like the bone-becoming-weapon in 2001: A Space Odyssey, carries both the brilliance of the plan and with it the capacity for self-destruction. (The title 2001, by the way, is also a nice temporal indicator.) By the time Johnny’s plan has fallen apart in at least a dozen ways, one almost begins to adopt Johnny’s own bit of philosophy in the film’s last line: “what’s the use?”. The problem lies in the difference between the elegant conceptual construction and the need to use human beings to execute that construction. What makes The Killing particularly brilliant is that its own daring construction exposes that process so extensively.

     

    Notes

     

    1. This article assumes the reader has already seen the film, so no summary is provided. For one very useful breakdown of the film, see Falsetto 100-123.

     

    2. Quoted by Falsetto, 106-107.

     

    3.The author wishes to acknowledge the contributions of one of his students, Kevin Scharff, to the 3-D model.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Deleuze, Gilles. Cinema 2: The Time-Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.
    • Falsetto, Mario. “Patterns of Filmic Narration in The Killing and Lolita.Perspectives on Kubrick. NY: G.K. Hall, 1996. 100-123.
    • The Killing. Dir. Stanley Kubrick. Perf. Vince Edwards, Jay C. Flipper, Coleen Gray, Sterling Hayden, and Marie Windsor. United Artists, 1956.
    • LoBrutto, Vincent. Stanley Kubrick: A Biography. NY: Donald I. Fine Books, l997.

     

  • Transnational Cinema, Hybrid Identities and the Films of Evans Chan

    Gina Marchetti

    University of Maryland and
    Nanyang Technological University
    tgmarchetti@ntu.edu.sg

     

     

    Figures 1 and 2: Posters for To Liv(e) and Crossings.

     

    Introduction

     

    This article looks at the changing shapes of global Chinese cinema through the works of Hong Kong/New York filmmaker Evans Chan. As Chinese films cross beyond traditional borders, they move in directions and among audiences far removed from the Hong Kong, Taiwan, Southeast Asian, and “Chinatown” markets that transnational Chinese cinema addressed from its inception. From the edges of Hong Kong’s traditional markets, there emerges a new kind of film culture, mingling more freely with Taiwan and the PRC, drawing on the overseas Chinese experience, produced by filmmakers who often live outside Asia. This give and take between Hong Kong (or China) and the world necessitates a new way of thinking about film culture that transcends the linguistic and cultural determinism of national cinema as well as the aesthetic strictures of established auteurs, genres, and styles.

     

    Thinking Beyond Culture

     

    The politics of multiculturalism has recently been hotly debated within American society. However, few efforts have gone beyond the “smorgasbord” approach to culture. A “taste” of African music, a sampling of Latin American literature, an appreciation of a Chinese holiday represent tokenism at its worst or the frustrations of identity politics seeking to convey the essence of a culture to the broader body politic with little more than a tourist’s gaze. Scholarship coming from a variety of disciplines has sought to engage this problem (see Shohat and Stam). How can culture be looked at within the context of a national body politic when that body is divided by race, ethnicity, class, gender, and sexuality? Postcolonial theory has contributed the notion of hybridity to these debates, and a call to place all notions of an “essential” identity into question within the multiple identities available within the postmodern metropolis (see Bhabha and Chow). Others call for a “radical” multiculturalism that refuses to conceal the issues of power and struggle behind the “melting pot” veneer of contemporary culture (see West). Within these debates, the centrality of the economy and globalization of the culture industry cannot be neglected. Filmmakers, for example, may live in one country, make all their films in a second country, and find financing in a third, while hoping to address a global, polyglot audience with a localized narrative. Because of the transnational nature of these films, a new, “transcultural” politics of representation needs to be elucidated.1.

     

    The oeuvre of Evans Chan can be taken as a case study of the difficulty and the necessity of developing a transcultural approach within film studies. Chan is a New York-based filmmaker, born in mainland China, bred in Macao, educated in Hong Kong and America, who makes independent narrative films primarily for a Hong Kong, overseas Chinese, “greater China” audience. His films straddle the gulf between the international art film and Hong Kong commercial cinema, and thus have also attracted some international art film viewers.

     

    To date, Chan has completed two features, To Liv(e)2 (1991) and Crossings3 (1994). Both these films openly address issues that find only a marginal voice in the mainstream cinema of Hong Kong and the United States. With one foot in the United States and the other in Hong Kong, Chan can freely address diverse issues. His films look at Hong Kong’s return to China in 1997 and the legacy of June 4th in Tian’anmen Square. Both examine the role of women in the world economy (in the “official” economy and the “informal sector” that can include prostitutes and traffickers in narcotics). Each film looks at the processes of immigration and dispersal involving the Chinese globally. While fears of censorship arising from Hong Kong’s laws and the unofficial censorship of the marketplace in the United States place a boundary around what can be said in the cinema, Chan, with his transnational production team, manages to seriously explore controversial topics. In this way, Chan creates a transnational, transcultural discourse through the medium of the motion picture, pointing to a new type of cultural sphere that must be noted within film studies (see Lu, Franncia, and Fore).

     

    Determining Indeterminacy: To Liv(e) and Crossings

     

    In The Geopolitical Aesthetic: Cinema and Space in the World System, Fredric Jameson devotes a chapter to Edward Yang’s Terrorizer. Jameson notes that the film is poised between the modern and the postmodern:

     

    What we must admire, therefore, is the way in which the filmmaker has arranged for these two powerful interpretative temptations--the modern and the postmodern, subjectivity and textuality--to neutralize each other, to hold each other in one long suspension in such a way that the film can exploit and draw on the benefits of both, without having to commit itself to either as some definitive reading, or as some definitive formal and stylistic category. Besides Edward Yang's evident personal mastery, the possibility of this kind of mutually reinforcing suspension may owe something to the situation of Third-World cinema itself, in traditions in which neither modernist nor postmodern impulses are internally generated, so that both arrive in the field of production with a certain chronological simultaneity in full post-war modernization. (151)

     

    To Liv(e) and Crossings can be looked at in a similar way. They can be seen as works suspended between the modern and the postmodern; indeed, their textual strategies rely on this deeply rooted indeterminacy to explore people and issues that are themselves difficult to determine.

     

    Like Yang, Chan is profoundly influenced by European cinema. The English title, To Liv(e), for example, conjures up both Godard and Gorin’s Letter to Jane as well as Ingmar Bergman’s many works with Liv Ullmann. Chan characterizes the film as “inevitably a response to both Bergman and Godard” (Chan 6). Chan’s film can be looked at as part of the international New Wave discussed by Robert Kolker in The Altering Eye. In her insightful essay on the film, “The Aesthetics of Protest: Evans Chan’s To Liv(e),” Patricia Brett Erens outlines the various ways in which the film draws on Godard. As Erens observes, To Liv(e) favors an aesthetic sensibility rooted in a Brechtian tradition of dramatic distance and political engagement.

     

    Peter Wollen’s approach to Godard’s political films as “counter cinema” can be used here to further elucidate this legacy in both To Liv(e) and Crossings. To Liv(e), for example, is organized around a series of letters addressed to Liv Ullmann. These letters admonish Ullmann for her criticism of Hong Kong’s deportation of Vietnamese “boat people” in December, 1989. Ullmann fails to mention Hong Kong’s own uncertain future when it becomes part of the People’s Republic of China, still bloodied from the events of that June. Rubie (Lindzay Chan) composes these letters, which are sometimes read as voice-overs and sometimes read by the character directly addressing the camera. The letters run parallel to other plot lines involving Rubie’s lover, family, and circle of friends.

     

    The impact of Godard is clearly apparent in the scene in which Rubie reads her first letter to Liv. Over a shot of boats used as a transitional device, the tinny, hollow sound of a recording of Cui Jian’s “Nothing To My Name” comes up on the sound track. The camera pans across an audience; Rubie is seated in the auditorium. A dance performance “Exhausted Silkworms” [3 MB Quicktime Clip], inspired by the events of June 4th, takes place on stage. Three male dancers, dressed simply in white shirts and black pants, tear their clothes to form gags and, later, nooses. A red scarf is pulled out of one dancer’s shirt like spurting blood. As “Nothing To My Name” ends, one dancer falls, as if shot. Suspended for a moment with a freeze frame, he finally lands on the ground, as the audience applauds.

     

    This performance is layered by the inclusion of Rubie’s first letter as a voice-over. As the dancers perform, Rubie’s address to Liv Ullmann (and, through her, to the world at large) adds another dimension to both Cui Jian’s rock music, which says nothing explicit about “democracy” or politics at all, and to the performers’ reenactment of the Tian’anmen demonstration and its suppression. As the dancers act out this violence, accompanied by Cui Jian’s harsh and direct vocals, Rubie likens Liv Ullmann to a respected, distant portrait that comes to life and slaps her in the face with accusations of cruelty and indifference. Rubie not only complains of Ullmann’s ignorance about the Hong Kong situation that her statement about the Vietnamese displays, but also questions her timing. Speaking just months after Tian’anmen, an event that was taken by many in Hong Kong as a barometer of what to expect after 1997, Rubie reminds Ullmann that the population of Hong Kong may soon find themselves in the same boat, so to speak, as the Vietnamese.

     

    In this scene there is a juxtaposition of two visual planes. One features Rubie as the originator of the letter. Close-ups of her face accompany the voice-over presentation of the contents of the letter, grounding the letter in the person of Rubie as a fictional character. The other visual plane, using the same images, features Rubie as a spectator, clearly moved by the dance presentation. There are also two audio planes: Cui Jian’s music and the sounds of the auditorium on one, and Rubie’s voice-over letter to Liv on the other. In this fragmented presentation of narrative information, all the elements of “counter cinema” come into play. Narrative intransitivity comes to the fore in the casual introduction of an evening at the theatre for Rubie’s character; time is thrown out of synch because Rubie writes the letter heard in the voice-over at another time and in another place away from the theatre. There is an estrangement from the character of Rubie as she becomes a mouthpiece for the people of Hong Kong, addressing an actual person about actual events, in addition to being a fictional character involved in other plot developments. Her address is not to other fictional characters, but to Liv, and to the world at large represented by the film audience. Foregrounding occurs as the film spectators are invited to see themselves as witnesses to the dance performance, and, by extension, the events in Tian’anmen, and think of themselves, with Rubie, as something more than spectators. Watching Rubie look at a political work of art foregrounds To Liv(e)‘s own status as a similar work of political commentary. The diegesis splits, featuring a self-contained performance work within the film. Aperture must be noted, since an understanding of the references in the dance depends on a familiarity with the mass media spectacle of June 4th, including photos of the demonstrators standing together in the square, Cui Jian’s presence, etc. The unpleasure of the breaking of classical conventions is self-evident, as is the non-fictional basis of the entire scene as a commentary on actual events; i.e., the expulsion of the Vietnamese, Ullmann’s trip to Hong Kong and public condemnation of Hong Kong’s action, the events of June 4th in Tian’anmen, etc. Fictional and non-fictional realms overlap.

     

    However, it would be wrong to conclude that To Liv(e) is simply an imitation of Godard. There is another element to this scene that takes the film in a radically different direction. While Rubie is presented as an agent addressing Ullmann, a spokesperson for Hong Kong, and as a spectator of a dance piece (and, by extension, a political event), Rubie is also depicted as distracted. Near the beginning of the scene, she looks at her watch and looks around the auditorium. Later, the fact that Rubie is waiting for her brother, Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming), is revealed. Rubie’s relationship with her brother, his fiancée, and her family propels the film into another, totally different arena, i.e., the realm of the love story and family melodrama. Rubie may be the voice of Hong Kong, but she also plays the roles of daughter, sister, lover, and friend in other parts of the narrative. Her distraction as a character points to a more general “distraction” found within the narrative itself. To echo Jameson, the “textuality” of counter cinema meets the “subjectivity” of the melodrama, the “woman’s film,” and the love story.

     

    Figure 3: Rubie’s brother Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming) in an intimate pose with his financée, Teresa (Josephine Ku), in To Liv(e) (production still).
    Figure 4: Tony with Teresa (production still).

     

    There is a similar sense of distraction in Crossings. While less directly indebted to the European New Wave, Crossings still bears the marks of cinematic modernism. Again, fiction and non-fiction overlap as actual footage of Tian’anmen 1989 is cut into newscasts in which fictional characters appear. Dance presentations divide the diegesis further into self-contained fictional realms. Characters again function as mouthpieces for policies or ideas as well as fictional creations involved in narrative events. Rubie (again played by Lindzay Chan) reappears to serve this function again, appearing on New York television as the public voice of the Chinatown community and, through voice-over excerpts from a diary, as the personal voice of the Hong Kong emigrant. However, while To Liv(e) has more clearly demarcated divisions between the various layers of the discourse, Crossings, closer to Yang’s Terrorizer and other works of the Taiwanese and Hong Kong New Wave, experiments with time and space to a much larger degree. Distraction, in fact, becomes disorientation, since from scene to scene it is often difficult to figure out whether the location is New York or Hong Kong.

     

    In one scene, for example, Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen), the film’s female lead, has just finished a meeting with Rubie in Central Park. She walks past a shop window displaying a model airliner. The film cuts to a shot of clouds passing over the moon, followed by a graphic match on a toilet bowl. Mo-Yung is vomiting. Members of her family come back from a shopping trip and notice the smell of the vomit. In this case, the transition from New York City to Hong Kong and earlier story events is quite abrupt. The shot in the bathroom offers no clue to Mo-Yung’s whereabouts. Rather, this disorienting presentation of time and place mirrors the contemporary experience of immigration. Unlike previous generations of explorers, pilgrims, colonialists, pirates, and other travellers, contemporary wanderers travel according to a different set of rules and restrictions. Instantaneous communication via international telephone lines connects the spaces again in a different way. (Later, in the scene mentioned above, Mo-Yung receives a call from her boyfriend Benny [Simon Yam] in New York, again reorganizing the sense of space presented in the film.) Jet travel condenses the time and space between New York and Hong Kong even further. If the spectator is disoriented following the character’s disorientation, then the fictional world simply reflects a postmodern experience of time and space.

     

    Here, Jameson’s difficulty with Yang’s Terrorizer as both modern and postmodern begins to make sense for To Liv(e) and Crossings as well. While both have elements of counter cinema and both fit within the generic parameters of Hong Kong commercial film as love stories, crime stories, and melodramas, they seem to be doing something that adds up to more than just the sum of these modernist and commercial parts. They have a “schizophrenic” quality that can be seen in their titles. The English title, To Liv(e), is a deconstructed play on words referring to Liv Ullmann, Letter to Jane, and a heartfelt desire for the people of Hong Kong to somehow endure and “to live.” The title in Chinese, roughly translated as Love Songs From a Floating World, refers to the other face of the film that deals with romantic relationships and a Chinese tradition of misdirected and/or impossible love.

     

    Crossings offers a similar case in point. The English title conjures up images of immigration, exile, nomadism, the modern metropolis as a “crossroads,” while the Chinese title, Wrong Love, refers to unhappy affairs of the heart. As the titles imply, these polyglot films offer a multiple address and, potentially, a multiple interpretation, or at least a divided ordering of narrative hierarchies, for the English-speaking, art film audience at festivals and art cinemas globally, for the expanding circle of Asian American film spectators, and for the Chinese-speaking audience looking at the films in relation to the standard Hong Kong commercial product.

     

    However, it is wrong to look at the films as split discourses in this way, because another possible address needs to be taken into consideration. Rather than operating as a dialectic between the art film and the commercial love story, between English and Chinese, the films can be taken as palimpsests where the elements overlie one another, obscuring meaning for some, illuminating a different kind of meaning for others. A new meaning is not created through the clash of contradictory discourses, as can be seen in the work of Godard. Rather, layers sit on top of one another, some (almost) postcolonial in English, some diasporic and accented in American English, some (almost) post-socialist in Chinese, some modern and part of the tail end of an international New Wave, others postmodern and part of contemporary global cinema culture.

     

    Although To Liv(e) and Crossings are quite different, more than a single director links the works together. Taken as a set, they comment on certain common themes (e.g., Hong Kong 1997, immigration, changing family and social relationships in “Greater China,” etc.) from two different temporal and spatial perspectives. To Liv(e) primarily looks at the edginess of Hong Kong residents who are able to leave, but may or may not leave before July 1997. Crossings looks primarily at newly transplanted Hong Kong émigrés in New York City, i.e., at immigration as a fait accompli rather than as a possibility. Two anchors hold these two films together. One is a contemplation of June 4th in Tian’anmen Square, and the other is Rubie. The first represents a common location away from both Hong Kong and the world beyond the People’s Republic at a specific point in time that galvanized the world’s attention on China. The other represents a certain face and voice that embody the socio-political as well as the personal, psychological issues addressed by both texts. Both Tian’anmen and Rubie are difficult to pin down, and it is the indeterminacy of both that forms the heart of this analysis of these films.

     

    From Tian’anmen to Times Square

     

    There has been a great deal of recent discussion of location within film and cultural studies circles (see Kaplan). Issues of where a scholar is located geographically, politically, and otherwise come up as concerns for evaluation of research. However, the positioning of any intellectual brings to bear many problems. As Rey Chow points out in her work on Chinese intellectuals, looking for an “authentic” voice or a “native” position presupposes an Orientalist belief in a pure and distinct other and represents a desire on the part of the critic rather than anything or anyone that actually exists (1-26).

     

    To Liv(e) and Crossings are both positioned in a similarly mercurial way. While characters move around Hong Kong and New York City and talk about places as diverse as Australia, Canada, Scandinavia, Italy, and South Africa, the films inevitably come back to Beijing, specifically to Tian’anmen, as a starting point. While footage and still photos of the May-June 1989 demonstrations appear, no plot action occurs in Beijing. Indeed, very little is said about the demonstrations at all.4 (See Hinton.) Rather, Tian’anmen anchors the slippery identities of the films’ characters as well as the slippery identities those characters represent as citizens of Hong Kong or as immigrants elsewhere.

     

    One scene in To Liv(e) brings to the fore this question of identity in relation to Tian’anmen. Rubie and her activist friend Trini have a snack in a Hong Kong noodle house after seeing an anti-nuclear performance. The scene begins as Trini talks about her family, resettled in England, and her white British husband. She is not keen to immigrate to England, however, because of the treatment she received from the British embassy while in Beijing during the demonstrations. She goes on at length about her experiences. At one point, she contacted the embassy to help some Hong Kong students escape arrest as “counter-revolutionaries.” The reply from the embassy was: “This should teach them a lesson. They should have thought twice before interfering with other people’s business.” On another occasion, Trini contacted the embassy for an escort to the airport. Her request was denied by the same staff member because her party was travelling on documents issued by the PRC government, implying that the bearers were considered Chinese citizens. Trini sums up the situation as follows:

     

    The first time he denied us help was because we're non-Chinese and he advised us to "think twice before interfering with other people's business." The second time he refused to help was because we are Chinese. We're Chinese subjects travelling with our re-entry permit. Either way we lose! What does he want us to be? My conclusion is we're not British subjects. We're probably British objects--to be freely disposed of. (Wong 35)

     

    In To Liv(e), Tian’anmen is filtered through the experiences of a number of characters. All of these experiences of Tian’anmen have one thing in common: the positioning of the characters as spectators. Rubie watches in the audience as dancers perform “Exhausted Silkworms” about the events in Tian’anmen. The newsreel footage of Hong Kong demonstrations in support of the Tian’anmen demonstrators illustrates one of Rubie’s letters. She listens as her friend, Trini, acting as an activist/journalist during the demonstrations, finally concludes that she was an outsider in Tian’anmen, a spectator rather than a participant. Trini notes, “We’re only onlookers. There’s no question about that.” Rubie also listens as Elsie Tu, a white resident of Hong Kong, a former missionary and social activist (playing herself) describes her reaction:

     

    The Tian'anmen Massacre has thrown everything into a dilemma for me. On the one hand, I can't be disloyal to China. On the other hand, I can't accept what happened. I wonder, am I going to see the people I've been living with all my life be massacred if they speak up? In any case, I do plan to stay in Hong Kong till the end.... I've devoted all my life trying to make Hong Kong a better place and I, too, would like to know what happens here after 1997. (Wong 49)

     

    Rubie, Elsie Tu, and Trini are all caught up in the problem of identity. Neither Chinese nor British, they are activists and onlookers uncertain of what they can or should be doing to help themselves and, by extension, Hong Kong.

     

    In Crossings, the use of Tian’anmen as a point from which identity may or may not be determined continues. Here, the shift is from Hong Kong to New York’s Chinatown community. During the credit sequence, Rubie appears on a television news segment discussing apathy in the Chinese community on the anniversary of June 4th. Introduced by an image of the “Goddess of Democracy,” a woman newscaster remarks: “Almost five years after the Tian’anmen Square Massacre, amnesia seems to have set in New York’s Chinatown. Is the United States foreign policy toward China still obsessively based on a tragedy that has no bearing on today’s reality?” Rubie appears as an expert to answer this question. However, her reply is non-responsive: “I feel that China and America are intimately connected.” She continues as an off-screen voice, “Did you know the boots Chinese soldiers wore to put down the demonstrators were made in America and the gloves American medics wear to protect themselves from AIDS are made in China?”

     

    Here, America is brought into the equation and implicated in the Tian’anmen events. However, the connection, like the connection of Rubie to the students and other demonstrators with whom she empathizes, remains vague. As Rubie comments on the anniversary of Tian’anmen off-screen, another character, the psychotic American, Joey (Ted Brunetti), laughs hysterically on screen, enjoying a joke with some imaginary cronies. Rubie’s observations on the political dimensions of the global economy are juxtaposed with Joey’s lunatic obsessions with Asia and Asian women.

     

    At this point, Tian’anmen comes closer to another square, Times Square, as the center for New York’s sex trade. Times Square takes up as a spatial reference where Tian’anmen leaves off. The painter John (Fung Kin Chung), Rubie’s boyfriend in To Liv(e), laughingly mentions that he can always work as a street artist in Times Square, like his mainland counterparts. Indeed, struggling Chinese painters can be found on the streets of New York, Paris, and other cities, trying to eke out a living painting portraits and caricatures of tourists. John fears, though, that he is not as tough as these other artists. Later, a shot of Times Square appears in Crossings, but no artists are present. In this scene, Rubie compares New York to Chang An (Xi’an) during the Tang Dynasty as a “crossroads” of civilizations. From the Goddess of Democracy to the Statute of Liberty, from Tian’anmen to Times Square, the “crossroads” of China and America, specifically New York, point to an unsettling dislocation.

     

    From Organic to Diasporic Intellectual

     

    Contrasting the “traditional” with the “organic” intellectual, Antonio Gramsci saw the former as educated to maintain the status quo of the powers ascendant at that time, while the “organic” intellectual rose from the ranks of the subaltern classes in order to act as a mouthpiece for their concerns and empower them with a voice in the larger body politic. The idea of the “organic intellectual” has been influential in the thinking of many theorists since Gramsci. More recently, another view of public intellectuals has become current, i.e., the “diasporic” intellectual. Unlike the organic intellectual who remains rooted in the community from which he/she emerged, the diasporic intellectual moves between nations, cultures, languages, and other “positions.” Indeed, the “position” as well as the “location” of the diasporic intellectual is often difficult to pin down.

     

    From the scattering of the Frankfurt School, to the postcoloniality of Said, Spivak, and Bhabha, to the work of Stuart Hall (see Chen) in cultural studies, the diasporic intellectual works from the perspective of exile and/or immigration, from the pain as well as the freedom of displacement.

     

    In the character of Rubie, To Liv(e) and Crossings create a fictional representation of the process of transformation of a concerned, educated, “organic” intellectual into a “diasporic” intellectual. Like the activist Elsie Tu, who appears in To Liv(e) as the disillusioned British missionary/housewife turned urban activist, Rubie in Crossings leaves behind her roots in Hong Kong to take up the role of community activist and spokeswoman in New York City.

     

    In this way, the character of Rubie (played by Lindzay Chan in both films) acts as the other bridge that links To Liv(e) and Crossings. Although it is never made explicit that a single, unified “Rubie” is exactly the same character in both films, the two Rubies clearly function in the same way in both texts and in most ways can be taken as a single character.

     

    However, the possible identity of the two Rubies does not belie the fact that the character is presented as a conflicted, often contradictory presence in the two films. As such, she represents all those conflicts of identity central to the thematic dynamics of both films. On the one hand, her roots are found among the poorer quarters of Hong Kong society. During a scene depicting a rather uncomfortable family gathering, her father digresses on the family history as squatters selling groceries, moving from one temporary housing development to another, threatened by floods and ravaged by fire, as well as by corrupt officials demanding kickbacks for a business license. The family is taken under the wing of Elsie Tu, who uses her influence to set the family up in a legitimate shop.

     

    From these lower middle class, small merchant roots, the children emerge as full-fledged members of Hong Kong’s professional/intellectual sector. Rubie is a journalist who becomes a community activist/social worker in New York. Her brother Tony is a highly skilled radiologist, and the eldest brother has successfully established himself in Canada. Unlike their parents, the children have the education and skills to move outside a Chinese environment into a global, English-based, diasporic community of post-colonial professionals and intellectuals plying their trades along the path of the former British empire–from Canada to Australia, the United States, and South Africa. They come from an impoverished China, but they move now in other circles. Ironically, it is the experience of colonialism (here embodied by the personal patronage of former British missionary Elsie Tu) that makes this movement and this upward mobility possible.

     

    At one point, Rubie pays a visit to her family home and shop. It is filled with the details of a marginal, small merchant’s existence, including the outdoor tables and shop, the bare floor of the main living room, the worn table used as part of the elevated family shrine, the special, round table top brought in for the family gathering, the padded, old-fashioned vest and trousers worn by her mother. It becomes clear Rubie has not always led a solidly bourgeois existence. It may seem that the casting of the Eurasian actress Lindzay Chan in this role and the inclusion of her reading from the lengthy series of letters to Liv in English contradicts this picture of Rubie’s humble origins. Not only does this contradiction alienate the spectator from the character, but it also serves to highlight the indeterminate identity and position of the people of Hong Kong as Chinese British subjects, as educated and superstitious, as Western and Asian, as poor and struggling and established and well-to-do.

     

    Rubie speaks in two voices–in fluent Cantonese and in impeccable British-accented English. Like Hong Kong itself, sometimes she looks Western, British, white and sometimes she looks Chinese and Asian. For example, in To Liv(e), she reads several of her letters directly addressing the camera in medium shots, seated against a British union jack, the American stars and stripes, and the flag of the People’s Republic of China. Interestingly, when she is shot in front of the Chinese flag, the lighting of her hair accentuates its reddish highlights. The light allows her to blend in with the flag at the same time it emphasizes her distinctiveness as a Eurasian performer. Rubie sometimes plays the role of a British subject, the role of an ethnic Chinese, the role of an Asian American immigrant, and, most importantly, the role of a character of an indeterminate identity.

     

    In Crossings, Rubie tells another story about her origins. She explains her features as a throwback to the Tang Dynasty when she must have acquired some European ancestor from exchanges on the Silk Route. The fact that Rubie’s ethnic and cultural hybridity needs to be explained at all is itself telling. Addressing the reception of To Liv(e), Evans Chan has commented on critics who demand an “authentic” Hong Kong subject:

     

    One controversial issue the film does occasion seems to be the establishment of 'the (post-)colonial subject,' hence the problematic status of the letters which are written in English.... I can understand the film's identity being characterized as schizophrenic, however, the notion that English is alien to the film's yet-to-be-post colonial identity is curious. After all, English is still primarily the official language of Hong Kong, where three major English dailies and two English TV channels permeate the everyday life of the educated class. Legal proceedings are conducted in English and Chinese politicians make speeches in English at the Legislative Council. If an average Hong Kong citizen speaks little English, that proves how linguistic schizophrenia may turn out to be a colonial legacy that will take some time, provided the will, to eradicate. ...That Hong Kong is a linguistically hybridized being is a fact that the film is not obliged to transcend. (5)

     

    Rubie functions as the voice of Hong Kong, expressing, through her letters in To Liv(e) and her diary and appearances on the television news as an “expert” insider in Crossings, the hopes and fears of her community. Her identity and the identity of that community may be difficult to pin down as they slip among Britain, America, Hong Kong, and China, between the lower small merchant classes and the upwardly mobile professionals, between a “traditional” older generation and a more urbane younger one. Rubie, however, manages to embody this cacophony of “voices.”

     

    Rubie is more than a “mouth,” however; she is also an “ear.” Throughout To Liv(e), the “ear” appears again and again as a motif associated with both Hong Kong as a place and Rubie as a character. Near the end of the film, the painting John has been working on throughout is revealed to be a picture of an ear. To break the tension of her brother’s departure, John orchestrates a Vincent Van Gogh practical joke with a bloody cloth over the side of his face and a fake, severed ear. Still unsteady from having just prevented her brother’s attempted suicide, Rubie faints at the sight of the phony severed ear and falls into a dream in which the ear reappears.

     

    Figure 5: Dream sequence with the severed ear featuring John (Fung Kin Chung) and Rubie (Lindzay Chan) in To Liv(e) (production still).
    Figure 6: Dream sequence featuring Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming) and Teresa (Josephine Ku) as Rubie imagines them as a self-destructive and troubled couple.

     

    In her last letter to Liv, Rubie refers to George Bernard Shaw’s trip to Hong Kong in 1933:

     

    Hong Kong 1933 didn't seem to exist for Bernard Shaw, except as a bad ear messed up by the British for communication with China. And an imperfect ear we've always been--as a bastardized link between a China weighed down by tradition and the clamorous demands of modernity. (Chan 61)

     

    Throughout both films, Rubie is this same kind of “bastardized” ear, understanding English (and, through that, the perspectives of the British, American, and international community represented by Liv Ullmann) and Chinese (through Cantonese, she understands the Hong Kong Chinese and, through Mandarin, she understands the “greater China” community). Her trained, cultivated ear can appreciate experimental satiric theatre as well as Italo Calvino and the films of Ingmar Bergman. Like the organic intellectual, she can “hear” the marginalized and dispossessed as well as the bourgeoisie. Like the diasporic intellectual, she can “hear” the subtleties of the official and unofficial proclamations of various governments and other institutions.

     

    Indeed, Rubie moves in a social world that is marked by this cultural and linguistic hybridity. This “floating world” of transnational, petit bourgeois labor includes artists, professionals, activists, journalists, among others, who are young, educated, culturally astute, and mobile. Although business people, artists, theatrical performers, and professionals like lawyers and doctors find their way into commercial popular culture, intellectuals seldom make a serious appearance in the cinema (see Ross). To Liv(e) and Crossings, therefore, are unusual.

     

    In both To Liv(e) and Crossings, Rubie’s circle is rich in characters who are involved in a variety of artistic and intellectual endeavors. Again, like Bergman and Godard, Chan favors educated, thoughtful, cultured protagonists. In To Liv(e), Rubie’s boyfriend John busily works on his paintings and reads to Tony from Calvino’s Invisible Cities; Rubie attends experimental dance performances (“Exhausted Silkworms” on Tian’anmen, “Nuclear Goddess” on Daya Bay, China’s first nuclear power plant, constructed in suspiciously close proximity to Hong Kong); Rubie’s brother’s girlfriend, Teresa (Josephine Ku), relaxes as an experimental video piece plays on her television; Rubie quotes George Bernard Shaw and The New York Times in her letters to Liv.

     

    Figure 7: “Nuclear Goddess” performed by Karen Suen and South ASLI dancers (production still).
    Figure 8: Rubie and her artist boyfriend, John in To Liv(e) (production still).

     

    This world is not only cultured but cosmopolitan. Rubie’s friends and relatives are part of a global society. In addition to Rubie’s elder brother in Canada and younger brother on his way to Australia, Rubie’s circle includes the interracial couples (Chris and Leanne, Trini and her husband), ex-patriots like Elsie Tu, overseas Chinese like Tony’s old flame Michelle, on a trip back from the United States, and many others.

     

    Crossings extends Rubie’s circle even more. Again, Rubie functions as a bridge between various groups. Rubie befriends Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen), who is an illegal visitor to New York in search of an errant boyfriend. In this case, Mo-Yung acts as a fulcrum with Rubie on one side of the scale and Mo-Yung’s gangster boyfriend, Benny (Simon Yam), on the other side. Rubie and Benny battle over Mo-Yung. Rubie tries to divorce her from her destructive relationship with Benny, and Benny tries to find Mo-Yung either to use her to get to a cache of drugs or to take possession of her heart.

     

    Artists, writers, and filmmakers have a long history of using criminals and gangsters as more than objects for social or psychological studies. Indeed, filmmakers as diverse as Godard, Bresson, Fassbinder, John Woo, and Ho Hsiao-hsien have used petty gangsters as cinematic “alter egos,” articulating more than the concerns of petty hoods. The character of Benny is crafted in this tradition. It is difficult to tell whether Benny is a drug trafficker and pimp masquerading as a fine art photographer or a sensitive artist doing a photo-essay, “Countdown to 1997,” who toys with a gangster identity. The photographs Mo-Yung spreads on her bed are as concrete as the drugs Benny’s other girlfriend Mabel cleans on their dining room table. Both serve as visual manifestations of Benny’s character, although it must be granted that the white powder carries more narrative weight than the photographs.

     

    Since the silent era, the gangster has been used in film to concretize and contemplate economic relations. He is an outsider who serves as a mirror for the society he haunts. Like the intellectual, he has been produced by and has arisen out of a certain milieu, but he is deviant, an implicit critic of the society that produced him. At this point in time, the gangster increasingly functions as an emblem of transnational economic relations. In Crossings, the comment is made that Marco Polo brought two elements of Chinese culture to Italy, i.e., pasta and the Mafia. Both food and crime continue to cross borders to exert their influence transnationally. The gangster is a sinister citizen of the world. He has become part of the Diaspora–along with intellectuals, legitimate merchants and business people, students, skilled workers and professionals (particularly in medicine), etc.

     

    Benny is a hybrid, a gangster-intellectual. Like Rubie, he has humble roots in Hong Kong’s underclasses; however, he transcended his origins through the drug trade rather than through painting like John, the medical profession like Tony, or journalism/social work like Rubie. He is a fitting object for Mo-Yung’s “wrong love,” since the uncertainty of his relationship to her finally comes out on the side of genuine emotion. After using her to smuggle drugs and denying any feelings for her to Mabel, he gives up his freedom and takes a police bullet in the back when he realizes Mo-Yung is having a miscarriage because of his reckless attempt to escape from the law. More than the tenderness in his relationship with Mo-Yung elevates him within the narrative, however. Crossings portrays Benny as a pensive gangster who can appreciate African traditional art, who has a certain flair for fashion, and who looks at his trade in historical terms as a response to the British push to sell opium in China that occasioned the Opium Wars. Since America supposedly encouraged the trade further through its involvement in the politics of the Golden Triangle, Benny justifies his trade as a political act of resistance–getting back at American imperialists by poisoning the population through the drug trade. When Rubie meets Benny in prison, however, he has again taken on the persona of the hardened criminal, the face he used in his interactions with Mabel. Aside from a few brief moments with Mo-Yung, Benny never manages to voice a substantial social critique.

     

    Figure 9: Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen) bundled up against the cold in Crossings (production still).

     

    The character of Mo-Yung comes a bit closer. Unlike Benny, Rubie, and her relatives, Mo-Yung was born in Suzhou, in mainland China, into an educated family, descended from unassimilated non-Han invaders centuries ago. Her father, an engineer, was forced to kneel on broken glass during the Cultural Revolution. Taking the family away from the excesses of China’s political campaign, Mo-Yung’s family found itself downwardly mobile in Hong Kong, the father finding work as a carpenter. Mo-Yung’s name marks her as a mainlander, as specifically from Suzhou. When she asked to change it as an adolescent, her father questioned her desire: “Are you so eager to conform? To assimilate?” Thus, even in Hong Kong where she grew up, Mo-Yung is an outsider. The fact that she will leave is taken as a given by most in the film. Her family pushes her to marry a Canadian immigrant to ensure another escape from the People’s Republic after 1997. She has already rejected a plan for her to emigrate as a nurse, since she fears that, as a foreign nurse, she will be required to work exclusively with AIDS patients, under conditions she fears will not preclude her being infected. Finally, following Benny, Mo-Yung becomes an illegal alien in New York, sucked into his world of transnational trafficking in drugs and prostitutes. Mo-Yung is left to drift in New York until she meets her tragic end.

     

    As in To Liv(e), the voice in Crossings is given to Rubie. Divorced now (presumably from John) and with a child left in Hong Kong, Rubie has been severed from her roots in Hong Kong’s lower middle classes to find herself administering to a similar community of overseas Chinese in New York. At one extreme, in her work in a community clinic, Rubie sees illegal immigrant women brought in to work in the sex industry in New York, including some who become infected with AIDS. She also becomes involved in the edges of the illegal drug trade through her relationship with Mo-Yung. At the other extreme, Rubie moves in a very different social sphere represented by one of her close male friends, a Mandarin-speaker. This character is gay, with a white boyfriend. He does experimental dance, dressed as a female character from Beijing opera, to a pop music beat, in a disco frequented by Asian transvestites. He speaks in Mandarin, she responds in Cantonese, and both translate for the American boyfriend in English.
    These two cultural spheres overlap throughout the film, and come together most dramatically at Mo-Yung’s funeral. In this scene, the dancer performs a piece in which his defiantly thrown back shoulders, high aerial kicks, and simple male attire work in concert with wreaths denouncing violence against Asians from various community groups. Looking at this scene in conjunction with the scene featuring a similar dance performance, “Exhausted Silkworms” in To Liv(e), underscores the two extremes used to position the characters and events in both films. “Exhausted Silkworms” reenacts the violence of Tian’anmen and the funeral performance memorializes Mo-Yung, not as a victim of “wrong love,” but as a victim of random anti-Asian violence in the United States.

     

    Here, the position of the global Hong Kong community hits two violent terminal points: one in the political fear prompted by the suppression of the 1989 Tian’anmen demonstrations and the other in the social fear of racial violence in New York City. Caught between these two violent extremes, Rubie tries to sort out her own position and identity. At one point in Crossings, Rubie is on an elevated train platform, putting on lipstick. Taking the position of a stalker, the hand-held camera moves in on Rubie. When she is framed in a close-up, Rubie turns and runs. The camera then turns to reveal Joey (Ted Brunetti), who addresses the camera directly, “Blood must flow. What if I push you on the tracks?” The film cuts away to a street person screaming on the sidewalk as the elevated train screeches in the background. A frightened Rubie is shown escaping on the train; a musical bridge connects this scene with a scene of Rubie writing in her journal in her apartment. She recalls a similar incident that happened the week before. The flashback shows Rubie reading the paper on the elevated platform. In this case, rather than taking the point of view of the stalker, the camera takes Rubie’s perspective as an African American man directly confronts the camera (i.e., Rubie) and lashes out at her, “Man, I hate you Japs….” He rambles on incoherently about a blood reckoning to be paid. Back at her apartment, Rubie continues in her diary: “Would it have helped if I’d told him I’m not Japanese, but a Chinese from the British Crown Colony of Hong Kong? Where would I have felt protected? Britain? China?”

     

    While the cosmopolitan world of Hong Kong or New York promises a certain freedom associated with the hybridity of the metropolitan experience, it also represents a world in which identity is cast adrift and there is no safe haven. Joey’s psychosis, which these parallel scenes show is not uncommon, revolves around a mis-recognition of the Asian woman. This mis-recognition operates on several levels. Joey stalks Rubie, but, under the assumption that any Asian woman would satisfy his blood lust, he kills Mo-Yung. Joey is driven into this delirium by an encounter with an Asian transvestite, whom, in M. Butterfly fashion, he mistakes for a woman. Indeed, Joey mistakes all the Asian women he encounters, from his prostitute girlfriend in Thailand to the newly arrived mainland Chinese prostitute he visits in a New York massage parlor, for his “dream girl,” submissive, compliant, subservient, and posing no threat to his own uncertain sexuality. In his delirium, Joey even mistakes Mo-Yung for a dummy, raving happily about passing the “test” to see if he could tell the difference between a real person and a mannequin. His racism levels all identity, turning all Asian women into objects. When Joey’s sister tries to explain her brother’s mental illness to Rubie at Mo-Yung’s funeral, Rubie’s only response is, “It could have been me! Don’t you see, your brother was stalking me. It could have been me.” Between Trini’s analysis of her position as a “British object” in To Liv(e) and Joey’s interchangeability of Asian women as objects in Crossings, the voice of the diasporic intellectual becomes silent. If Rubie’s role as an intellectual is to listen and speak for her constituency, she (and, perhaps, the filmmaker who created her) ends up silent in between two worlds marked by violence.

     

    It can also be noted that Joey does not inhabit a world totally dissimilar to Rubie’s. As a public school teacher in New York, he is like Rubie part of a class of educators, social workers, media workers, etc., who can be loosely grouped as intellectuals. He has a secure job; the principal of the school laments the fact she cannot fire him, even though he alternately brutalizes and ignores his students, because he has tenure and is “competent until proven incompetent, sane until proven insane.” He has disposable income to travel to Thailand. Also, like Rubie, he seems to be upwardly mobile, living with a sister whose accent and demeanor point to working class roots. If Benny represents the intellectual as gangster and Joey represents the intellectual as madman, Rubie represents the intellectual as something different; i.e., as a woman within the Diaspora.

     

    The Ear Is Attached to a Woman

     

    If, as noted above, Rubie functions in both films as a public, intellectual ear that is able to hear and validate the various voices that present themselves, she also serves as a private, personal ear. In her Crossings diary, she speaks to herself as well as to the film’s spectators. In both films, Rubie listens to an array of personal problems voiced by those in her circle of family, friends, and acquaintances. With few exceptions, all the film’s characters talk to Rubie, and Rubie listens. As this narrative ear, Rubie holds the plots of both films together, giving them a structure, logic, and certain order.

     

    Many directors are known for establishing ongoing relationships with actresses who represent the filmmakers’ concerns and give entree into other realms involving women, the female psyche, and issues concerning feminine subjectivity. Bergman’s relationship with Liv Ullmann comes immediately to mind. In this case, Chan develops a rapport with Lindzay Chan in these two features that allows him to explore not only issues of cultural hybridity but also issues involving women and their concerns. Moving from the textuality of the political discourses of the films to the subjectivity of the “women’s film,” To Liv(e) and Crossings, in their stylistic and generic hybridity, highlight issues that go beyond newspaper headlines and immigration statistics. Although Chan works with a Brechtian/Godardian alienation from his characters, using them often as types to illustrate particular points, the filmmaker also uses these characters in more conventional ways, underscoring their individuality, allowing them to speak as distinct entities as well as representatives of ideological positions and abstract social categories.

     

    To illustrate this point, it might be instructive to look at two parallel scenes, one from To Liv(e) and the other from Crossings. Both scenes involve Rubie having a tête-à-tête with another woman. Each scene points to the intimacy between the women. Each features a discussion of the situation of women drifting between countries, roles, and emotions, adding to narrative information, but also standing alone as discourses separate from the public pronouncements of Rubie’s letters or her appearances on American television.

     

    In To Liv(e), Rubie meets with her brother’s fiancée, Teresa (Josephine Ku), at Victoria Peak, overlooking the Hong Kong skyline. The two are seated near a ledge, on opposite sides of the frame, with the cityscape between them. Teresa voices her concerns about going to Australia. She also talks about her divorce and difficulties maintaining a relationship with her son studying in the United Kingdom. On a short visit to Hong Kong, the son went shopping with his father rather than taking time to see his mother, Teresa. Because of her divorce and the death of her mother, Teresa feels cast adrift emotionally. Rubie listens and sympathizes with Teresa. The sounds of the city below can be heard throughout the scene. Rubie moves from her position screen right to sit close to Teresa; the camera slowly moves in to frame them close together on the ledge. When Rubie tries to reassure Teresa that there will be plenty of Hong Kong emigrants to befriend in Australia, Teresa counters that she and Tony want to escape Hong Kong to get away from its people (i.e., those, like Tony and Rubie’s parents who disapprove of a union between a younger man and a divorced, older woman). The camera moves out again, to show Rubie and Teresa in relation to the city, as the two embrace each other at the scene’s conclusion.

     

    In Crossings, Rubie meets Mo-Yung in a café near Times Square. The camera is positioned outside as the scene begins, then moves inside to frame Rubie and Mo-Yung silhouetted against the café’s window as the traffic of New York passes by outside. Throughout the scene, the camera moves between the two women, using a vase with dried flowers on the table as a pivotal point.

     

    Figure 10: Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen) in Crossings (production still).

     

    Mo-Yung talks about coming from Suzhou; Rubie talks about her features and the imagined Silk Route ancestor. Both laugh that they are “two barbarians invading New York.”

     

    Figure 11: Mo-Yung in Crossings (production still).

     

    The camera cuts away to a shot of Mo-Yung framed through the café window, and the mood changes. They wonder about Mo-Yung’s missing acquaintance, Carmen, who had also been involved with Benny. Rubie fills Mo-Yung in on her own situation, and her desire to get a green card and open America as a possibility for her son. Mo-Yung asks, “What if your son doesn’t like America and blames you?” When Rubie replies that he can always go back, Mo-Yung counters, “Do you think you can recreate the past just like that?” The scene ends on a close shot of Mo-Yung putting out her cigarette in an ashtray near the dried flowers, flanked by the empty coffee cups.

     

    These two scenes highlight elements that move the narratives into the realm of the women’s film. In these scenes, the emphasis is on the relationship between women, their solidarity in the face of the trials of immigration as well as in the face of changing sexual mores and family relationships. Here, as friends, mothers, lovers, ex-wives, fiancées, and confidantes, Rubie, Teresa, and Mo-Yung illustrate the personal dimension of the political concerns of 1997. Women experience a different type of “crossing” than men. Traditional roles for women dissolve in the Diaspora. Families become unhinged, scattered; romantic relationships become more fleeting. Cast adrift by a desire to escape from rigid families, ex-husbands, and the feeling of being alienated from the traditional world in which they were born and bred, these women move off to Australia and New York with a different sense of loss, different fears, and for reasons that go far beyond the political dynamics of 1997. Following Rubie as the “ear,” the camera in both scenes invites the spectator to share these intimate moments.

     

    These two scenes are not unique in either To Liv(e) or Crossings. Rather, they form part of a pattern of scenes in which women’s issues are voiced and Rubie listens to her girlfriends’ concerns. In To Liv(e), for example, Teresa will only discuss her fears of death and abandonment with Rubie; Tony must eavesdrop outside the bedroom door. In Crossings, female characters as diverse as the unnamed, unseen AIDS-infected prostitute at the clinic, Joey’s sister, and a next-door neighbor seek out Rubie as an ear for their stories. Mo-Yung tells the story of her family to Rubie rather than Benny. These acts of speaking and listening among the female characters propel both films out from the orbits of the political essay or the crime story.

     

    Figures 12, 13, and 14: Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen) and Rubie (Lindzay Chan)
    in Central Park in Crossings (production stills).

     

    Looking at the films from this perspective, as love stories and family melodramas, To Liv(e) and Crossings fit within three related subgenres that have become quite popular in Hong Kong after Thatcher’s visit to Beijing. The trend picked up even more after June 4, 1989. One subgenre features romantic entanglements and family problems that arise in Hong Kong around the issue of emigration; e.g., Shu Kei’s Hu Du Men/Stagedoor (1996). To Liv(e) fits squarely in this subgenre. The second subgenre involves the trials and tribulations faced by new immigrants to America, Canada, Australia; some examples include Stanley Kuan’s Full Moon in New York (1990), Peter Chow’s Pickles Make Me Cry (1987), Clara Law’s Floating Life (1996). Crossings tends more toward this subgenre, although, like Allen Fong’s Just Like Weather (1986), it really blends the two. The third subgenre is hinted at through Mo-Yung’s story; it involves mainland Chinese abroad in Hong Kong. Examples include Mabel Cheung’s Illegal Immigrant (1985) and the recent hit, Peter Chan’s Comrades: Almost a Love Story (1996) (see Law Kar.)

     

    In these subgenres, the relationship between stories about the overseas Chinese and stories about Chinese or Asian Americans becomes more problematic. Another set of categories begins to dissolve as filmmakers born in Hong Kong, trained in the United States, living sometimes in Hong Kong, sometimes in America, make films about people who are themselves between Hong Kong and America. Indeed, the Hong Kong/American connection, including figures like Bruce Lee as well as filmmakers as diverse as Tsui Hark and Evans Chan, is not unique along the edges of what is usually described as Asian cinema. Ang Lee, Peter Wang, and Edward Yang represent a Taiwan connection, and Chen Kai-ge is the best known of those from the mainland who have settled in the States. Ho Quang Minh connects Vietnam and Switzerland, while Anh Hung Tran with Scent of Green Papaya (1993) has given the world its most critically acclaimed film in Vietnamese about Vietnam, totally set in Vietnam, without leaving France.

     

    Like the in-between, transnational, transcultural characters they depict, To Liv(e) and Crossings also defy easy classification. However, while identities may be uncertain and fluctuating, the issues these characters embody remain concrete and disturbingly fixed.

     

    Endings

     

    To Liv(e) concludes with cautious optimism on two fronts. In her last letter to Liv Ullmann, Rubie ends with the hope that China, Vietnam, and, by extension, Hong Kong will improve their respective situations so that all, including Rubie and Liv, will be able to meet as friends. Rubie concludes the film on a note of good humor. In fact, she signs her letter, “Love, Rubie.” The last image of the film shows Tony and Teresa, saved from near suicide and break-up, alight from their taxi at the airport, baggage in hand, on their way to Australia.

     

    Crossings, on the other hand, ends on a pessimistic note. Rubie burns incense in memory of Mo-Yung on the subway platform where she was murdered. The last shot shows a graveyard in Hong Kong. Earlier, Benny and Mo-Yung had had a tryst near that graveyard, and Benny told the story of his mother being buried there after working herself to death to support the family. Rubie has promised to return Mo-Yung’s bones to Hong Kong, presumably to that same cemetery.

     

    While To Liv(e) ends with death averted and hope in the future, Crossings concludes with the finality of death and the uncertainty of Rubie’s future. She returns to Hong Kong with Mo-Yung’s bones, but it is not certain whether or not she will return to New York, stay in Hong Kong, or go elsewhere. Since, after death, even bones continue to drift between continents, Rubie’s continued “Crossings” between roles and professions, between nation-states, and between Asia and the West also seem to be one of the few certainties in a very uncertain, fictional world. That global filmmakers themselves will continue to drift and make films about this “floating world” of displacement and hybridity also seems fairly certain. To bring Chan’s pessimism back around to a more hopeful note, we might consider this from Bhabha’s “DissemiNation: Time, Narrative and the Margins of the Modern Nation:”

     

    For it is by living on the borderline of history and language, on the limits of race and gender, that we are in a position to translate the differences between them into a kind of solidarity. (170)

     

    Notes

     

    1. Recently, the term “transcultural” has begun to replace a number of related terms (e.g., “cross-cultural,” “international,” “multicultural”) in a number of disciplines (particularly medicine, psychology, and education). Film studies has begun to follow suit. While following on the widespread use of the concept of “transnationalism” by political economists and sociologists, the use of “transcultural” by scholars in the arts, humanities, social sciences, and cultural studies also seems to point to the inadequacy of these other terms in analyzing the increasing globalization of culture.

     

    2. Plot synposis of To Live: Rubie (Lindzay Chan) lives in Hong Kong with her artist boyfriend, John (Fung Kin Chung). In December 1989, Rubie becomes angered by a statement made by Liv Ullmann about the inhumane treatment of Vietnamese refugees by the Hong Kong authorities. In the wake of the events in Beijing that June, Rubie questions Ullmann’s timing in a letter she composes and addresses to the Scandinavian actress. Passages from the letter punctuate the rest of the film as Rubie must decide, along with members of her family and circle of Hong Kong artists and intellectuals, whether to stay or leave Hong Kong before July 1, 1997. Throughout the film, Rubie talks to a range of people about their feelings regarding the turnover.

     

    Rubie’s brother Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming) prepares to immigrate to Australia with his fiancée, Teresa (Josephine Ku). Teresa, however, has mixed feelings about the departure and about her relationship with Tony. Older, divorced, and estranged from her son, Teresa is prone to morbid thoughts and depression. She is thoroughly disliked by Tony and Rubie’s parents, and she fears loosing the younger Tony to another woman. The stormy relationship comes to a head when Tony threatens suicide after a jealous scene at a party.

     

    3. Plot synopsis of Crossings: A red shoe, symbol of romantic happiness and the joys of marriage in traditional Chinese lore, is all that remains of Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen), a victim of a stalker’s violence on a New York subway platform. Mo-Yung had come to New York, against her parents’ wishes and illegally, to pursue her boyfriend, Benny (Simon Yam). Mo-Yung thinks Benny is a photographer, but he is actually an international drug smuggler. Pursuing Benny, Mo-Yung rubs against the seamier elements of New York as she unsuspectingly plays cat-and-mouse with a shipment of Benny’s contraband. Rubie (Lindzay Chan) is a social worker in New York, who befriends Mo-Yung. Joey (Ted Brunetti) is a psychotic school teacher, who has a fetish for Asian women. Joey stalks Rubie, whom he has seen as a community spokeswoman on television. Mistaking Mo-Yung for Rubie, he kills Mo-Yung on a subway platform.

     

    4. Neither film discussed here makes any pretense at investigating the events in May-June, 1989, in Tian’anmen. For the most insightful treatment to date in any medium, see Carma Hinton’s controversial documentary film and Web site, Gate of Heavenly Peace.

    Works Cited

     

    • Bhabha, Homi. The Location of Culture. London: Routledge, 1994.
    • Chan, Evans. “Forward to To Liv(e).Evans Chan’s To Liv(e): Screenplay and Essays. Ed. Tak-wai Wong. Hong Kong: U of Hong Kong, Department of Comparative Literature, 1996.
    • —. Crossings. Perf. Ted Brunetti, Lindzay Chan, Simon Yam, and Anita Yuen. Riverside Productions, 1994.
    • —. To Liv(e). Perf. Lindzay Chan, Fung Kin Chung, Josephine Ku, and Wong Yiu-Ming. Riverside Productions, 1991.
    • Chen, Kuan-hsing. “The Formation of a Diasporic Intellectual: An Interview with Stuart Hall.” Stuart Hall: Critical Dialogues in Cultural Studies. Ed. David Morley and Kuan-Hsing Chen. NY: Routledge, 1996.
    • Chow, Rey. Woman and Chinese Modernity: The Politics of Reading Between West and East. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • —. Writing Diaspora: Tactics of Intervention in Contemporary Cultural Studies. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1993.
    • Erens, Patricia Brett. “The Aesthetics of Protest: Evans Chan’s To Liv(e).Evans Chan’s To Liv(e): Screenplay and Essays. Ed. Tak-wai Wong. Hong Kong: U of Hong Kong, Department of Comparative Literature, 1996.
    • Francia, Luis. “Asian Cinema and Asian American Cinema: Separated by a Common Language.” Cinemaya 9 (Autumn 1990): 36-39.
    • Fore, Steve. “Golden Harvest Films and the Hong Kong Movie Industry in the Realm of Globalization.” The Velvet Light Trap 34 (Fall 1994): 40-58.
    • Gramsci, Antonio. Selections from the Prison Notebooks. NY: International Publishers Co., 1971.
    • Hall, Stuart. “New Ethnicities.” Stuart Hall: Critical Dialogues in Cultural Studies. Ed. David Morley and Kuan-Hsing Chen. NY: Routledge, 1996.
    • Hinton, Carma. The Gate of Heavenly Peace. http://www.nmis.org/gate/
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Geopolitical Aesthetic: Cinema and Space in the World System. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1995.
    • Kaplan, Caren. “The Politics of Location in Transnational Feminist Practice.” Scattered Hegemonies: Postmodernity and Transnational Feminist Practices. Eds. Inderpal Grewal and Caren Kaplan. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1994.
    • Kar, Law, ed. Overseas Chinese Figures in Cinema. Hong Kong: The 16th Hong Kong International Film Festival, 1992.
    • Kolker, Robert. The Altering Eye: Contemporary International Cinema. NY: Oxford UP, 1983.
    • Lu, Sheldon, ed. Transnational Chinese Cinemas: Indentity, Nationhood, Gender. Honolulu: U of Hawaii P, 1997.
    • Ross, Andrew. No Respect: Intellectuals and Popular Culture. NY: Routledge, 1989.
    • Said, Edward. Culture and Imperialism. NY: Random House, 1994.
    • Shohat, Ella and Robert Stam, “The Politics of Multiculturalism in the Postmodern Age.” Unthinking Eurocentricism: Multiculturalism and the Media. London: Routledge, 1994.” 338-362
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. The Post-Colonial Critic: Interviews, Strategies, Dialogues. Ed. Sarah Horasym. NY: Routledge, 1990.
    • West, Cornel. “The New Cultural Politics of Difference.” The Cultural Studies Reader. Ed. Simon During. NY: Routledge, 1993.
    • Wollen, Peter. “Godard and Counter Cinema: Vent D’est.” Readings and Writings: Semiotic Counter-Strategies. London: Verso, 1982.
    • Wong, Tak-wai, ed. Evans Chan’s To Liv(e): Screenplay and Essays. Hong Kong: U of Hong Kong, Department of Comparative Literature, 1996.

    Related Web Sites

     

     

  • Editor’s Introduction

    Robert Kolker

    University of Maryland
    rk27@umail.umd.edu

     

    This issue of Postmodern Culture grew from a conviction that the critical and scholarly study of film could make more use of computer-based image technologies. In our discipline (as in any other humanities undertaking) quotation and illustration constitute proof and demonstration. In the past, we have been restricted in our ability to quote and illustrate because our source material was limited to (at worst) publicity stills from films and (at best) frame enlargements from the films themselves. In all cases, those illustrations were only stills. We wrote about the moving image and offered only the still image as proof.

     

    The ability to digitize still and moving images has broadened the scope of our work and enabled us to enter an intimate relationship with the images that are the source of our study. We can choose the stills we want and need, and, most importantly, we can show the moving images themselves. This, coupled with networked publication and the hypertext capabilities of the Web, makes possible new kinds of thinking about film, new textualities in which the work of the critic and the work of the film assume different kinds of relationships, new flexibilities of thought, expression, and publication.

     

    The work that appears in this issue represents an extraordinary range of thought and execution. It not only demonstrates how digital technology can be used to open critical perspectives, but how critical thinking about film is changing, with and without technology. In other words, all of the essays advance our thinking about film and culture, and many exist as unique digital events.

     

    Gina Marchetti’s “Transnational Cinema, Hybrid Identities and the Films of Evans Chan” concerns a filmmaker whose work is a meditation on national identity, national boundaries, and their dissolution. Because Chan’s work is rarely seen in commercial venues, the inclusion of stills and moving-image clips not only opens Marchetti’s analysis and anchors it in the work itself, but makes that work visible to the reader perhaps for the first time.

     

    In “Simultaneity and Overlap in Stanley Kubrick’s The Killing,” Stephen Mamber doesn’t use stills from Kubrick’s early gangster film, but creates schematic diagrams and a 3-D fly-through to visualize its complex chronology. Time and space are merged, and The Killing’s mise-en-scène, once thought of as split between what was seen on the screen and heard in the voice-over narration, are understood and visualized as integral.

     

    Dziga Vertov was a revolutionary Russian filmmaker who reflected upon the mechanical nature of his art in his cinema. He adumbrated cyborg theory by understanding that the movie camera was a mechanical, perceptual extension of the political and historical imagination. Joseph Schaub, in his “Presenting the Cyborg’s Futurist Past: An Analysis of Dziga Vertov’s Kino-Eye,” traces lines of development between Vertov, the Italian Futurists, and contemporary cyborg theory, and sees them in gendered contexts.

     

    Jorge Otero-Pailos, in “Casablanca’s Régime: The Shifting Aesthetics of Political Technologies (1907-1943),” examines the city of Casablanca, and the film that most famously represents it to Western eyes. Otero-Pailos sees the city and its history from a political, post-colonial, and architectural perspective. The essay examines the political architecture of the city; the images that accompany the essay help plot the axes of its analysis.

     

    Since the mechanics of perceptual fabrication in early cinema are a central concern of William Routt’s “The Madness of Cinema and of Thinking Images,” it is appropriate in a symbolically symmetrical way that the author employs the mechanics of digital fabrication to visualize his analysis about the image in early cinema. Routt uses digital technology to see the history of the spectacular image from a number of critical perspectives.

     

    Adrian Miles turns an exploration of Singin’ in the Rain into a hypertext of interrelated moving-image clips, critical analyses, thematic and structural associations. This piece rethinks the linearity of critical writing on film and creates a work that can only exist in a digital environment.

     

    So too does Peter Donaldson’s “Digital Archives and Sibylline Fragments: The Tempest and the End of Books.” Working from the base offered by Peter Greenaway’s film Prospero’s Books, Donaldson speculates on the relationship of images and archives, text, countertext, and hypertext.

     

    Speculation is very much the key to all the essays in this issue. The writers want to know about the history, textuality, and culture of the films they write about and how the writing and their analyses are changed through technologies that offer new ways of seeing and (in both senses of the word) reading. The technologies aren’t perfect. Pushing moving-image files across the Internet is still an event that requires much patience. If you read this issue through a 28.8 modem connection, it will take a while to get some of the images downloaded. Perhaps this belies the myth of the instantaneous that is so much a part of Internet culture. Things aren’t always immediately available to the eye, which is one of the things the authors are thinking about.

     

    Many thanks to Stuart Moulthrop and Anne Sussman for the markup and production editing that made this complex issue of Postmodern Culture possible.

     

  • Notices

     

     

    Every issue of Postmodern Culture carries notices of events, calls for papers, and other announcements, free of charge. Advertisements will also be published on an exchange basis. If you respond to one of the ads or announcements below, please mention that you saw the notice in PMC.


    Publication Announcements

    • Year Zero One Forum, Issue #3
    • Hiding, by Mark C. Taylor
    • TechnoSurrealist Manifesto
    • The Almanac of Psychoanalysis
    • Simultaneita
    • South Atlantic Quarterly

    Conferences, Calls for Papers, Invitations to Submit

    • (Re)Visions: Feminist and Gender Theory at the Turn of the Century
    • Feminist Studies Graduate Essay Award
    • International Essay Prize Contest
    • “Self Help” special issue, edited by Cindy Patton

    General Announcements

    • Art and Technology Project
    • Gen Art needs Summer Interns
    • CyberStage Update

     

  • The Cosmic Internet

    Arkady Plotnitsky

    Literature Program
    Duke University
    aplotnit@acpub.duke.edu

     

    Lee Smolin, The Life of the Cosmos.New York: Oxford UP, 1997.

     

    Lee Smolin’s The Life of the Cosmos (hereafter LC) offers its readers ideas, scientific and philosophical, and a vision (based on these ideas) of a possible future physics. These ideas and this vision stem from the author’s assessment of major achievements and some failures of twentieth-century physics, including its most recent developments, to which Smolin himself made significant contributions. At stake in the book is the ultimate physics. Smolin’s question is: “How to construct a theory of the whole universe?” (LC 16; emphasis added). Although, as will be seen, some metaphysics is also at stake, the theory in question is of course understood here in the sense of modern, say, post-Galilean, physics in general and, specifically, the present day quantum cosmology. According to the currently standard view, once developed (it does not exist as a theory at present) quantum cosmology would bring together, in their ultimate cosmological extensions, quantum physics and Einstein’s general relativity (his theory of gravitation), which are incompatible in their present form. Smolin’s conceptual point of departure is a critique of Newton’s absolute space and absolute time, where he follows Leibniz, who famously asked the fundamental (and ultimately in turn cosmological) question of all metaphysics–“Why are there beings rather than nothing?”–and who is the single most important philosophical figure for Smolin. Leibniz leads Smolin to the central philosophical principle and the central concept of his book, which is grounded in this same principle. The principle is that of “relationalism,” which states that the relationships between things are more decisive than things themselves (if the latter can be meaningfully spoken of apart from the relationships between them). The concept is that of the whole universe as the universe of relations. Indeed, if considered as a quantum entity, it is the universe of a total, cosmic entanglement of all its constituents and parts, which is seen by Smolin as a consequence of the so-called quantum entanglement (which I shall explain below). This self-contained entangled cosmos, the universe without the exterior, is, Smolin argues, a problem for modern physics, in particular quantum mechanics (as it is currently constituted), insofar as the latter must approach any object that it investigates from an “outside,” in this case defined by the experimental devices whose role cannot be disregarded in considering the data in question in quantum physics, in the way it can be in classical physics. Such an “outside” position would of course be definitionally unavailable in the case of the whole (self-contained) universe.

     

    From this vantage point, Smolin advances a number of mostly hypothetical arguments and proposals. In particular, the randomness and incompleteness of modern quantum theory arise from the fact that it can only be a theory of “parts,” usually small parts of the universe, while what happens in any given locale (“part”) in fact depends on the interactions and entanglement with quantum objects elsewhere, ultimately throughout the entangled universe. The latter becomes a kind of Cosmic Internet. (I shall explain the role of human observers in this picture below.) Randomness and, from this perspective, the (a-realist) incompleteness of physical description offered by modern quantum theory are merely results of the fact that the latter can only make available to us partial pictures of this cosmic entanglement. Accordingly, there must be (at least one may hope eventually to discover it) a complete–realist and, it appears, for Smolin ultimately deterministic–theory that would describe the whole universe as a Leibnizian universe of relations. This universe has nothing exterior to it and is ultimately defined by or even consists only of relations between “parts,” or what appear as “parts” (especially as “atomistic units,” such as elementary particles) from the limited perspective of present-day physics. Now (skipping for the moment some physics, and some philosophy, accompanying the theories just described) Smolin proposes, as his second central idea, that the mathematical and conceptual structure of this fundamental theory correspond not only to the present spatial relations within the universe but to the history of total (cosmic) interactions among all particles and parts of the universe as it has evolved–to the life of cosmos as an evolutionary process, “the cosmological natural selection,” loosely modelled in Darwin’s evolutionary theory. New cosmology would reflect and must account for the history and evolution–the life–of the cosmos. Indeed this historical, evolutionary account is necessary in order to account for the present state of the cosmos–its (in turn entangled) macro- and micro-economics.

     

    This is an enormous program, and Smolin’s aim–this must be kept in mind throughout–is not to fully enact or spell out this program, even at the hypothetical level. Rather it is to offer a broad general sketch and to conjecture certain key specific ingredients of this program on the basis of where, according to Smolin, physics stands, or falls, today. These ideas would justify both Smolin’s specific conjectures and the program itself. Accordingly, it is the status of Smolin’s assessment of present-day physics and his usage of it as the grounding of his conjectures and of the program in question that becomes subject to a critical examination (by which I mean a rigorous and meaningful engagement with an argument), which I shall attempt here. This examination is, I would argue, essential for assessing Smolin’s argument, perhaps especially for his readers in the humanities, less familiar with arcane and difficult scientific arguments under discussion in the book. Moreover, the stakes and implications of these scientific questions are immense, certainly their philosophical (in particular epistemological) implications; but at least at the limit, their cultural and political implications as well. This makes a critical examination of these questions all the more significant in the current intellectual and cultural scene, to which, as will be seen, Smolin’s argument itself is reciprocally indebted.

     

    I find a number of Smolin’s ideas compelling and suggestive, especially the two main ideas of the book, and their interconnections within the framework proposed by Smolin–the principle of relationalism, inspired by Leibniz, and the application of the Darwinian evolutionary model to the history of the physical universe, conceived by Smolin as “cosmological natural selection.” Smolin imaginatively connects both these ideas. His readers will appreciate this elegant link (and several equally elegant physical and mathematical arguments accompanying it) and the opportunity to contemplate conceptual parallels and interactions between modern physics and biology, both prominent in recent discussions in the humanities. Indeed, both main inspirations behind these ideas, the thinking of Leibniz and Darwin, are compelling in themselves. It is also worth noting, in the second context, Smolin’s apt invocation (beyond more standard references) of Charles S. Peirce on the one hand, and Henri Bergson on the other (LC 16-17). Smolin’s appeal to Leibniz may, however, especially attract his readers in the humanities. Leibniz is emerging as an increasingly important figure in current discussions, in part in the wake of Michel Serres’s and Gilles Deleuze’s engagement with his work. Accordingly, Smolin’s readers in the humanities will find the role of his ideas in modern physics and cosmology of considerable interest, especially in both key contexts of Smolin’s argument: Leibniz’s critique of the Newtonian concepts of absolute space and absolute time, where his contribution (which anticipated some among the key ideas of Einstein’s relativity) is indeed unique, and his role as the originator of the idea of the relational universe. As will be seen, I find Smolin’s own extension of this idea to his own concept of “the whole universe” less compelling. Leibniz’s monads, his great philosophical invention, are a more complex story, too. Leibniz’s concept is richer than, and in some of its aspects resistant to, Smolin’s rendition of it, as Smolin indeed admits (LC 269-70). Leibniz’s preeminence in the history of relationalist concepts is unquestionable, however, and these concepts are significant across the contemporary intellectual landscape.

     

    The features just described make The Life of Cosmos worthwhile reading for those interested in the most advanced and controversial developments of modern physics. Many technical aspects of these developments are difficult for a nonspecialist even in philosophical or semi-popular, let alone technical, literature. Smolin clearly wanted to make these ideas available to the general reader, and has often succeeded, albeit not without a price, as concerns a number of key nuances; although, as will be seen, there may be other reasons for this problem.

     

    In general, there are a number of questions that Smolin’s readers in the humanities might want to keep in mind, both in assessing his argument and claims, and in contemplating the relationships among science, philosophy, and culture. Accordingly, this review is also a reflection on several philosophical issues which are involved in Smolin’s argument and which are significant for modern science and for the contemporary (and indeed long-standing) intellectual debate. As part of this reflection, I shall suggest that contemporary physics, and in particular quantum theory, allows for a view of nature, at any scale, that is epistemologically more radical than Smolin’s, primarily by virtue of questioning the very concept, central to Smolin, of the whole universe, that the universe can be thought of as a whole. This view, however, allows one to absorb and indeed to give a more radical form to relationalism itself. It also enables one to argue for the philosophical significance of the physical theories in question. The interpretation, at least the philosophical interpretation, of these theories will of course be different; and it is always a complex question to what degree such interpretive and philosophical differences affect the practice of physics. The cultural and political questions involved are still more complex matters, and they can only be minimally addressed here, even though the subject is of great importance for the contemporary scene and throughout what may be called scientific modernity, from Kepler and Galileo on. As I have suggested in more general terms earlier, however, well beyond physics itself, the difference between the two views of nature in question has far-reaching implications for the relationships between scientific theories (or the concepts of nature they advance) and other areas of knowledge or culture, whether one speaks of homologies between theories in different domains (or what they describe) or contiguities between science and culture. This is why it is important to consider and contrast these two views. These views and the epistemological configurations they entail can be, and sometimes are here, considered independently of the physical theories with which they are associated. In order to ensure that the argument remains pertinent to and consistent with these theories, a more involved engagement with them is necessary at certain junctures, although no technical knowledge of physics is required at any point. Readers interested primarily in the epistemological content and impact of my argument may skip over such “more involved” elaborations, although part of my overall argument here is that more involved engagements with substantive scientific arguments (this, once again, need not entail technical knowledge of science) is not without benefits for those in the humanities who are interested in modern science.

     

    It may be observed first that Smolin’s presentation of quantum physics is somewhat choppy and, at points not altogether precise, and as such may lead to misconceptions on the part of readers unfamiliar with key questions involved. I find Smolin more effective on relativity and gravitation, although for a comprehensive treatment of these subjects interested readers might want to consult Kip Thorne’s excellent Black Holes and Time Warps: Einstein’s Outrageous Legacy. The constraints of Smolin’s genre may be in part responsible. Most popular expositions share this problem of losing key nuances, and the present review may not avoid it either. It is very difficult and perhaps ultimately impossible to present the theories in question in sufficiently nontechnical terms without losing some of their philosophical (let alone physical) content. Several portions of Smolin’s presentation of key established theoretical and experimental findings may be recommended over many available expositions. The problem is rather in Smolin’s usage and interpretation of these already established findings, and sometimes in his argument concerning what constitutes established findings. As will be seen, certain at best speculative and debatable, and debated, arguments are awarded the status of established fact and theories by Smolin. This affects the status of Smolin’s extrapolations from these established findings and his proposed extensions of current theories. Smolin admits that most of these extensions are speculative. Indeed–and as I said, the reader must keep this in mind throughout–the book presents a speculative proposal for a future physics. In view of the circumstances just indicated, however, some of its ideas and, hence, his overall argument may be even more speculative than Smolin makes them appear, however unintentionally.

     

    My main questions concern Smolin’s ideas regarding the implications and extrapolations of key features of modern quantum theory, most particularly two such features that are crucial to Smolin’s argument and to the scientific and philosophical debates about quantum physics. The first is the relationships between quantum objects and measuring instruments in quantum theory. As was especially stressed by Niels Bohr, in quantum physics the influence of the interaction between measuring instruments and quantum objects under measurement cannot be disregarded, as it can be in classical physics. According to Bohr, this circumstance makes it impossible to speak meaningfully of conventional physical attributes (such as coordinates or momenta), and perhaps any attributes, of quantum objects independently of observation or measurement. This impossibility has radical epistemological consequences and leads to an understanding of the quantum world (including on the scale of the universe) that is quite different from that of Smolin, who, I argue, does not sufficiently take these consequences into account in his argument concerning quantum cosmology. Accordingly, the status of this argument requires a reexamination, which I shall undertake here.

     

    The second feature is the so-called quantum entanglement, which raises the question of a potential nonlocality of quantum theory. Quantum entanglement is, roughly, a peculiar interdependence of or correlation between experimental data concerning certain spatially separated quantum events, as seen in the so-called Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen (EPR) type of experiments (LC 246-50). These correlations may signal a nonlocality of quantum physics. Nonlocality (nonspecialist readers should bear this in mind throughout) here means specifically the presence of instantaneous connections between spatially separated physical objects or events. Such connections are forbidden by Einstein’s relativity, which is an experimentally well-confirmed theory. Some claim that this nonlocality is in fact found in the quantum world in view of the so-called Bell’s theorem and Alan Aspect’s experimental findings (LC 249-52). Smolin subscribes to this claim and to the view (sometimes seen as following from or correlative to quantum nonlocality) that the universe considered as a quantum objects constitutes a whole, all the parts of which are irreducibly entangled. This view is crucial for his cosmological argument. While, however, nonlocality of quantum theory is presented by Smolin as fully grounded in scientifically established facts and theoretical arguments rather than as a hypothesis, the argument for nonlocality is by no means indisputable and is far from accepted within the physics community.

     

    Certainly, at least as possible and arguably more plausible is a different case, stated as follows. There is indeed confirmed evidence of strange correlations between certain (“entangled”) quantum events, or more accurately, between our predictions concerning the physical variables involved in measurements associated with such events. The nature of these correlations is enigmatic, and perhaps ultimately inconceivable–that is, it may be impossible to conceive how the observable data involved comes about. It is certainly far beyond anything one finds in classical physics and, as Bohr would have it, far beyond the reach of pictorial visualizations defining it. In this, quantum entanglement is similar (and in part correlative) to other strange features of quantum physics–the wave-particle duality, Heisenberg’s uncertainty relations, and so forth. There is, however, no uncontested experimental evidence and no established theoretical argument for the nonlocality of quantum physics. At the very least, there is much debate concerning these questions, in contrast to more or less factual claims made by Smolin, at least in the form he makes them (LC 249-54). A collection of essays, Philosophical Consequences of Quantum Theory: Reflections on Bell’s Theorem (edited by James T. Cushing and Ernan McMullen), gives one a good idea of the spectrum of different positions on and the debates around the subject, at least prior to 1990. The subsequent literature appears to confirm my point as well, and Smolin does not appear to have in mind anything beyond Cushing and McMullen’s volume. David Mermin’s essays on the subject in Boojums All the Way Through (1992) offer, arguably, the most balanced accessible account of quantum entanglement. It may be that under the quantum conditions we may meaningfully speak only of relations and correlations between quantum events, but not such events themselves taken in isolation from other events; that is, quantum theory may need to be, and may de facto be, relationalist. On this point many orthodox quantum theorists would agree with Smolin, especially since the outcome of the individual quantum events is in general not comprehended by the laws of quantum physics. (In this sense it is irreducibly statistical.) But that need not mean that quantum physics is nonlocal or that all quantum events are mutually entangled within one whole–the Cosmos–which Smolin claims, problematically, as an established fact (LC 253). Here orthodox theorists and Smolin would part company. In short, quantum entanglement need not entail nonlocality, and there is no incontrovertible argument either for it or for the total cosmic entanglement. Or, if one wants to speak in strictly relationalist terms, not all correlations are themselves correlated.

     

    Smolin’s view of the implications of quantum entanglement appears to be close (although not identical) to that of David Bohm, the inventor of the so-called hidden variables theory, which accounts (differently from the standard quantum theory) for the quantum data responsible for the introduction of quantum mechanics in the mid-1920s. Smolin himself made contributions to the hidden variables program in the 1980s (LC 334). Bohm and his coworkers developed several versions of this theory, all nonlocal. Bohm’s arguably most famous exposition, containing a rather grand philosophical vision (and even some quasi-postmodern resonances), is found in his Wholeness and the Implicate Order. Smolin even argues that Bohmian “additional [hidden?] variables” are a necessary consequence of quantum entanglement (LC 253). Bohm also invokes Leibniz, who is in general a prominent figure among the adherents of Bohm’s theory. The proximity to Bohm is also reflected in Smolin’s realist and causal view of the quantum world. This view entails both physical reality of the classical type (i.e., quantum objects are claimed to possess physical attributes existing independently of observation and measurement) and the underlying global causality and determinism. Both features appear to be germane to Smolin’s picture of the wholeness of the cosmos, bringing it into a conflict with quantum theory in its standard or orthodox interpretation. Smolin is of course aware of this conflict, which is indeed a crucial part of his rationale for his own proposal. The main reason for his argument is that, according to Smolin, the standard quantum mechanics is incompatible with the possibility of the quantum theory of the universe as a whole. This point itself is correct. As will be seen, however, it may entail an argument different from Smolin’s. My point at the moment is Smolin’s claim that key ingredients of his picture of the universe are grounded in the currently established experimental facts and theoretical explanations. This claim is, I argue, problematic. Accordingly, insofar as Smolin’s speculations are shaped by this claim, their status, even as speculations, becomes less convincing and more questionable than it would be otherwise.

     

    This is not to deny the potential significance, in quantum physics or elsewhere, of the relationalist ideas. There is nothing wrong with relationalism as such, and Smolin may well be right to insist on it. As will be seen, contrary to Smolin’s contention, quantum theory as currently constituted allows and perhaps entails a form of relationalism more radical than Smolin’s. There has been significant recent work stressing relations and correlations (rather than relata or correlata) in quantum physics, for example, by Mermin, whose framework, as presented in “What Quantum Mechanics is Trying to Tell Us?”, is based on quantum entanglement. However, while arguing, radically, that “correlations without correlata,” should be seen as the only proper subject of quantum theory, Mermin does not claim the nonlocality of the latter. Nor does his theory aspire to determinism; on the contrary, it sees quantum probabilities as irreducible and central to any future framework. He credits, among others, Smolin and Carlo Rovelli, who in turn figures significantly in Smolin’s book. Most of this work, however, for example by Smolin and Rovelli, aspires to a classical (causal and realist) view close to that of Einstein, who faulted quantum mechanics and its radical epistemology on both counts–realism and causality.

     

    My point instead is that contemporary physics allows for a view of nature at any scale that is very different and epistemologically more radical than that of Smolin’s proposal. This view can be stated as follows. One can think of the quantum world in terms of a combination or, one might say with Bohr and perhaps in his sense, complementarity of relationalism and (in Smolin’s terms) “atomism”–at least a certain atomism in which the only “atoms” are relations. These relations, however, are not always necessarily connected to each other. Accordingly, one must think in terms of both connections (entanglements) and disconnections (separations) between physical objects or events. These can be enacted either on local levels or on the level of the universe, no longer composable into a whole. Such a cosmos or, to use Joyce’s coinage, “chaosmos” (not chaos), would thus be often multiply entangled, but also just as often disentangled. This chaosmos would have connected (sometimes irreducible entangled) and disconnected (sometimes in turn irreducibly disconnected) regions. Some of such networks of connections would extend across any conceivable region and some would be strictly localized, especially if one thinks of this world as allowing only for networks and correlations, rather than isolated elements. The “picture” (and the unpicturability) here proposed would not, however, entail instantaneous connections between distant objects or events, or other violations of currently established features of the physical world, relativistic or quantum. This chaosmic un-universe is entangled in the sense of quantum correlations, but, in contrast to Smolin’s or Bohm’s universe, is first local, and second neither causal nor classically realist, in accordance with quantum physics as currently constituted. Accordingly, it would also disallow a total, all-encompassing nonlocal network or/as entanglement of the type Smolin envisions–either in practice (in the sense of difficulty or even impossibility for us to access this network) or in principle (insofar as such a total network could be postulated as existing while ultimately inaccessible in its totality to any given observer). It is the “in principle” that is most crucial here, although Smolin appears to be more optimistic than most sharing his views as concerns the “in practice” as well.

     

    Nor are quantum objects in this chaosmos endowed with conventional, and perhaps any conceivable, physical attributes–that is, attributes ascribable as independent of observation or measurement. In this sense, following Bohr, as I stressed from the outset and as I shall further discuss presently, one always needs to be “outside” of quantum objects (whatever their scale) in order to investigate them or, more accurately, the effects of their interaction with observational devices, in terms of physics. Accordingly, the physical world just described is more radically “participatory” or “reciprocal” and, as such, more radically “relationalist” than Smolin’s cosmos–defined by partial access, on the part of different observers, to the same whole, as an independently existing world of quantum objects endowed with determinate, even if ultimately inaccessible, physical properties. The difference between these two forms of relationalism is subtle and is sometimes overlooked, but it is epistemologically decisive.

     

    Most crucially, according to the alternative view just presented, there would not be a universe that can ever be seen as a whole, or, conceivably, as otherwise fully figurable, especially if considered as a quantum object, although even the classical (nonquantum) relativistic cosmology poses certain problems for Smolin’s view. For, once the universe is considered as a quantum object, our claims concerning it become as limited as in the case of any quantum system–by virtue of the fact that observation and measurement of quantum objects irreducibly depend on the observational technology involved, a fact, Bohr argues, correlative to uncertainty relations. At the same time, however, quantum interconnections operative or producing effects on any scale (but always compatible with locality) are allowed. Nor does this view prevent unification programs, for example in considering the early universe (where such programs are especially important). It may, of course, change the meaning of (some among) such programs and possibly the character of the physical theories involved in them. A different program for physics may ultimately be at stake.

     

    Smolin never questions the concept of the universe as a whole (which, again, should not be confused with the scale, however large, of physics). Instead Smolin uncritically accepts this concept as a given and as a fundamental ground for his argument against the compatibility of quantum theory, as currently constituted, with quantum cosmology. Smolin claims as the main reason for this argument, jointly, the irreducible role of measurement in quantum physics and quantum entanglement, both defining features of modern-day quantum theory. However, the first may be taken into account differently, namely by questioning the very possibility of considering the universe as an (absolute) whole, and the second need not entail Smolin’s view, at least as it figures in the EPR experiment, Bell’s theorem, and Alan Aspect’s experiments. Smolin discusses these subjects in Chapter 19, “The Meaning of the Quantum” (LC 240-54), but gives them an interpretation which can and in my view must be questioned. Following Leibniz and Einstein, Smolin rightly criticizes the Newtonian concepts of absolute space and absolute time as the absolute, universal background of (and as independent of) physical events. This concept of “background” is related to but should not be identified with Smolin’s more general, and in my view somewhat confusing, usage of “the background” in referring to an exterior of a physical system under description, which notion indeed cannot apply to the universe as a self-contained whole (LC 13-14). Part of my argument is that, in contrast to his Leibnizian critique of Newtonianism, Smolin’s critique of “the background” as the exterior in quantum physics ultimately fails, and the very term “background” is hardly useful and even misleading in the latter case. Beyond its philosophical incongruities, noted already by Leibniz, the Newtonian concepts of absolute space and absolute time are incompatible with the constancy of the speed of light in a vacuum (the absolute limit of propagation of all physical signals and influences) and its independence of the speed of the source or the observer, and, hence, with Einstein’s relativity, which accounts for these experimental facts. While, however, free of this Newtonian problem, Smolin’s own view entails a total universe as the universe of relations, whose nonlocality would ultimately be in turn in conflict with Einstein’s relativity.

     

    The potential presence, within Smolin’s cosmology, of other universes “outside” (and inaccessible to) our universe, while an interesting question in itself, does not change his view, as it could, since Smolin does not consider the differences that the presence of these other universes or black holes, to begin with, make for the universe we live in. Nor does he consider how black holes, as singularities (i.e., points at which no conceivable physical description applies) may “rupture” the wholeness of our universe from within. Smolin only uses this picture for his elegant statistical account of the evolution of the universe and of the emergence of the particular value of certain fundamental parameters of physics. The physics and (in mathematical terms) topology of spaces punctured by black holes are, however, where the possibility of the universe as a whole may be disrupted even at the level of general relativity as a classical theory–that is, without taking the quantum aspects of black holes into account. (Ultimately we must do so, of course.)

     

    Smolin’s conception of the (self-contained) whole universe is, I argue, a reinstatement of a certain form of Newtonianism, via Leibniz and Einstein; and here Leibniz or Einstein (or ultimately Smolin) and Newton are not quite as far apart as they are in their views of the particular nature or structure of the world. Smolin’s program, again following Einstein (and in juxtaposition to Bohr), is of course also Newtonian in its realist (and causal) aspirations, in particular in his at least implicit assumption that nature and at the limit the universe themselves (rather than only the outcomes of certain interactions with them, such as those in quantum measurement) are at least in principle governed by mathematically formalizable laws. On the other hand, Leibniz’s own relationalism may be seen as close, along certain lines, to Bohr’s participatory or reciprocal relationalism as described above (i.e., as predicated on the irreducible relationships between quantum objects and measuring instruments, while without claiming an absolute wholeness of the universe), as it is along other lines to Smolin’s relationalism (predicated on the existence of quantum objects possessing independent physical attributes and the entangled wholeness of the cosmos). Of course in both (or all three) cases, we still observe the universe in a certain sense from within. This point, however, does not change the epistemological differences in question, since at stake is what is claimed concerning the universe in each of these cases. Although there are, of course, no quantum objects in the modern sense in Leibniz, Leibniz’s monads may be seen as representing the Bohrian or proto-Bohrian relationships, while the world is conceived by Leibniz as a whole, as in Smolin. (The status of the attributes of the constitutive parts of this whole in Leibniz is a more complex matter, which I shall leave aside here.) While, that is, there is an all-encompassing wholeness of the cosmos in Leibniz, the nature of the encompassment is different from that envisioned by Smolin. It is closer to Bohr’s participatory or reciprocal physics. The latter, however, against Leibniz’s and Smolin’s pictures alike, prevents us from ascribing an absolute wholeness to the universe, once it is considered as a quantum object. By contrast, Smolin’s quantum cosmos is a relational network totality–a global cosmic Internet, a “World Wide Web” with, at least in principle, instantaneous connections between all of its points and “democratic,” if partial access to the “subscribers”–partial observers of the whole universe, conceived of as a quantum object, here as an entangled quantum network. Chapters 21 and 22, entitled, revealingly, “A Pluralistic Universe” and “The World as a Network of Relations” spell out these concepts.

     

    The Internet, the World Wide Web, and democracy are not accidental or arbitrary metaphors here, although one should not of course fully ground Smolin’s ideas in them, because some of these connections or metaphors also proceed in the opposite direction, or condition each other reciprocally. The cosmic Internet of modern physics (let alone Leibniz’s) has obviously been in place well before the World Wide Web, while the latter, with its (for argument’s sake) “instantaneous” connections and access to the subscribers, appears to shape some aspects of Smolin’s particular vision of the cosmos. Smolin not only acknowledges that the contemporary–postmodern and by now post-postmodern–culture conditions his views, just as their culture conditioned those of Newton or Leibniz, but also directly draws some of his inspirations and ideas from this culture. (Some of these connections are explained in “Notes and Acknowledgments,” LC 324-36). Most of the elements of postmodern culture inspiring Smolin are utopian in nature. They also correspond to his own ethical and political vision, especially pronounced in his “Epilogue,” but apparent throughout. These utopian elements appear to be transferred to and shape his vision of the cosmos, in part by way of related metaphors, such as the contemporary city, and specifically New York. The city metaphor is, however, also due to Leibniz’s metaphorization of monads which Smolin cites as his epigraph to the book: “Just as the same city viewed from different directions appears entirely different and, as it were, multiplied perspectively, in just the same way it happens that, because of the infinite multitude of simple substances, there are, as it were, just as many different universes, which are nevertheless, only perspectives on a single one” (The Monadology #57). The concepts or metaphors of life and evolution play a different role in Smolin’s argument, except to the degree that these concepts are in turn read by Smolin in terms of the utopian models just mentioned. Such concepts as the city or the Internet can obviously be differently configured and may be in turn differently conditioned by (or of course condition) physical ideas, more or less established or more or less hypothetical, such as that of the global cosmic entanglement and/as nonlocality, as in Smolin, or, conversely, by the radical Bohrian epistemology suggested here. These differences in conception and particularly in epistemology may also change our understanding of how such entities as the city and the Internet, or democracy, can, in principle, function and how they, in practice, do or are likely to function. Smolin’s is a metaphysical-idealist vision of the universe as the Leibnizian relationalist wholeness, which, as we have seen, is not to say that it is the same as that of Leibniz himself. Smolin’s is, philosophically, a classical view, in contrast to, say, Bohr’s quantum epistemology (Bohr, it is true, does not deal with cosmological issues) or those of such thinkers as Nietzsche, Bataille, Levinas, and Derrida, or if one wants to proceed via Leibniz, Deleuze. It is of some interest that the authors in the humanities to whom Smolin refers and who inspire him, such as Drucilla Cornell and Roberto M. Ungar, also displace the authors just mentioned and such earlier figures as Hegel into a similarly utopian metaphysical-idealist register. I use the term “idealist” in the sense of the metaphysical structure of one’s theory. This idealism can also be materialist–the idealism of unproblematized materiality, which in Smolin’s book assumes the shape of the wholeness of the (material) universe.

     

    It is clear why Leibniz arrives at a similar (although, again, not identical) type of idealism. The reason is his theological vision, for which monads are crucial, but to which they in turn give extraordinary complexity and richness, brought into the foreground in Serres’s and Deleuze’s work. This work also suggests strong conceptual affinities between the structure of monads–which, we recall, have no windows, but have mirrors, are full of mirrors, and are themselves mirrors–and the quantum-mechanical conceptions of light itself and the participatory relationalism of Bohr’s interpretation, as considered earlier. There remains much to be said in this context about the relationships between “relationalism” and “rationalism” in Leibniz; his sense, mathematical and philosophical, of “ratio” as proportion; or his idea of “preestablished harmony” (which concept is also that of proportion), but these questions cannot be addressed here.

     

    That Smolin’s sense of the contemporary (and some earlier) philosophical ideas and intellectual landscapes is not comprehensive and is at points misconceived does not matter much here, and Smolin acknowledges that his knowledge of these ideas is somewhat superficial. Nor is his own intellectual, cultural, or political sense of the modern and postmodern world–that is, our world–especially significant here either. What matters is his view of the physical world, which is conditioned accordingly, as he admits. It matters especially if physics as such (i.e., the currently available experimental data and experimentally confirmed theories) does not offer any more support for his program than for others. Indeed, as I argue, quantum physics may compel one to take a different and epistemologically more radical view of the cosmos, as the chaosmos, and its life. Such views may, of course, be in turn conditioned by modern culture and shaped by its concepts (albeit different from those shaping Smolin’s view). Let me stress that my point is not to deny the significance of global concepts, the necessity of investigating large-scale relations, and so forth. In question is a different (in this case non-totalizing) repositioning of large-scale configurations, such as those on the scale of the “universe,” and it is conceivable that the latter can be effectively approached only through such a repositioning.

     

    The core of the problem is the character of the universe considered as a quantum object. Smolin recognizes and considers some among the complexities involved, to which his argument is a response. However, he also misses or disregards several key points, in particular as concerns the relationships between quantum objects and measuring instruments in the standard quantum theory, where, in contrast to classical physics, the role of these relationships cannot, as we have seen, be disregarded in describing the observable phenomena in question in quantum physics. At the same time, the presence of the two counterparts involved entails two incompatible theoretical descriptions. Measuring instruments are, as macro-objects, described by means of classical physics, although their ultimate constitution is quantum and although they are capable of quantum interaction with quantum objects. It is the latter that makes possible the observation and measurement of quantum objects, or what is inferred as such on the basis of the results of such measurements–physical marks, “traces,” left on certain parts of measuring instruments, such as photographic plates. These marks themselves are describable by means of classical physics. Their emergence, however, is unexplainable by these means. One needs quantum mechanics, which is irreducibly nonclassical, to explain this emergence. It follows, however, that we can only approach quantum objects, and indeed infer their existence, from an outside, insofar as we are linked to these objects by means of measuring instruments–whatever quantum object is in question. That would include the universe, if it is considered as a quantum object (that is, while immense, as microscopically constituted), if we could observe all of it from an outside. This of course we cannot do. There is no “outside” available to us which would enable us to approach the quantum universe in the way we approach such objects in quantum physics as just described. This point is central for Smolin’s argument, since he sees, correctly, the situation of quantum measurement as defining quantum physics in its present state (LC 260-62). Accordingly, he sees it as fundamentally inhibiting our access to the quantum-entangled universe as a whole. The reason for this inhibition is the one just given: we cannot be outside the whole universe, which would be required for a quantum account of it; we can only be outside a portion of it, which we can consider as a quantum object. This is, of course, correct. Smolin’s critique of the concept of the single privileged outside observer is to the point as well. There can indeed be only particular outside observers, none of whom can have an absolutely privileged observational position. None of this, however, need entail the rest of Smolin’s argument. Quantum theory in its present form may well be incompatible with a quantum theory of the whole universe. This point is not in question. The question is which one of these incompatibles is to be rethought or given up.

     

    It would appear that once two conceptual structures are incompatible one needs to investigate both, which here would involve questioning the concept of the whole universe. Not so to Smolin. Even though he admits that “everything [he] say[s] [at this point] must be [considered as] controversial, as there is no settled opinion about how to extend quantum theory to cosmology” (LC 261; emphasis added), he never considers the possibility that the concept of the whole universe itself may be questionable. Instead, he sees it as more reasonable to suppose that quantum mechanics is an approximation of another theory where the (whole) universe can be considered as quantum in and by itself, while particular observers would have partial access to it (LC 262). He considers several proposals and finally turns to his Leibnizian idea of the total universe, in particular (this is what makes his view necessary, Smolin argues) as a quantum object–a total but “pluralistic universe,” partially knowable to various observers, who as outside observers, would remain subject to the constraints equivalent to those of standard quantum theory (LC 267-72). Quantum entanglement, seen as entailing nonlocality, is Smolin’s other key rationale here (LC 262). As I have indicated at the outset, however, quantum entanglement is accountable, without entailing nonlocality, by means of the standard quantum mechanics. That includes the irreducible and constitutive role of the relationships or, one might in turn say, “entanglement” between quantum objects and the means of observation. This “entanglement” should not be confused with quantum entanglement, although both can be related and may even be mutually constitutive in quantum physics, as Bohr shows, and as Bohm realized, which in part led him to his hidden variables quantum mechanics. Smolin touches upon this point, but in a rather confused and not altogether accurate statement (LC 253).

     

    In view of the considerations given here, however, quantum mechanics allows, perhaps even compels us to turn the question of the mutual compatibility of quantum physics and the concept of the whole universe around. The circumstances of quantum measurement may make impossible any ultimate claim concerning any attributes (certainly all conventional physical attributes) of quantum objects themselves, including the attributes designated as “wholeness” and “object,” or, once everything is quantum, “inside” or “outside,” which, too, may be fundamentally classical attributes. There may be nothing that we may be able to say about them in themselves, but only about certain effects of their interactions with our instruments, which may be seen as corresponding to various parts, at most halves, of the classical physical description. This is what the standard quantum theory describes. According to Bohr, not even a single conventional physical variable of any kind (such as position or momentum) can be meaningfully or unambiguously ascribed to a quantum object itself, outside an interaction with the classicaly configured “exterior” measuring instruments. In such an interaction only one of the two complementary variables, either position or momentum, can be unambiguously associated with a quantum object–still with caution and, in all rigor, only symbolically, by analogy with classical physics. In practice, all we can ascertain concerns measurement of corresponding classical variables describing the macroscopic behavior of measuring instruments, which and only which make any observation of anything microscopic–quantum–possible. We can, thus, ascertain certain effects of quantum objects (for example, the quantum universe), resulting from their interaction with measuring instruments. We cannot, however, make ultimate claims about quantum objects and, accordingly, the universe as quantum, such as that the latter can be constituted as the whole universe, or, conversely, that there are irreducible and distinct multiple parallel universes, in the manner of Hugh Everett’s “many-world interpretation” of quantum mechanics, of which Smolin is suspicious as well (LC 263-65).

     

    The above considerations do not mean that there is nothing we can say about the universe. The situation is the same as in the case of other quantum objects. We can say a great many things about quantum systems, certainly their effects. We must, however, be extremely careful as to what we can or cannot meaningfully say and about what. Nor are the above considerations incompatible with cosmological research, including quantum cosmology. The shape of such theories may be affected, of course; and I would argue that, in terms of their physical and mathematical content, some new theories discussed by Smolin towards the end of the book, such as topological quantum field theories, may be developed without the concept of the whole universe.

     

    Once the universe is considered as classical, the situation changes, and, according to the standard quantum theory, we can only see (classical) traces of a quantum universe, as of any quantum object. In classical physics the question does not arise in this form, since observational or measuring instruments, such as telescopes, do not irreducibly affect the data, in the way they do in quantum physics, and hence, their impact, although present, may be disregarded or compensated for. The universe may even appear, and may have been originally conceived of, in terms of wholeness, because we see it classically (although, as I said, some aspects of the universe, such as black holes, suggest that this wholeness may be ruptured even at the classical level). We do not know what we would see–wholeness, cosmos, chaos, chaosmos (perhaps none of these)–if we could see the universe as quantum. We cannot ascertain any properties of it, on whatever scale, or even claim that it has independent properties as properties, outside their interaction with observational technology (beginning with the human eye), especially properties conceived on the model of classical physics. At the same time, it is this technology that enables us to observe any effects of quantum objects and to argue that we can infer their existence from these effects.

     

    Certainly–this is the meaning of the complementarity of phenomena in quantum physics, according to Bohr–“partial” pictures or more accurately, pictures arising from always mutually exclusive experimental arrangements, do not imply, and in fact prohibit, the classical-like wholeness behind them, whether this wholeness is seen as fully or partially accessible, or inaccessible. These pictures are “partial” only in the sense that they correspond to parts–at most halves–of the classical physical description, and not in the sense of the existence of some wholeness behind complementary phenomena.

     

    Indeed, it can be argued, in fact by using the Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen experiment, quantum entanglement, and Bell’s theorem, that if such a complete classical-like picture had existed behind partial complementary pictures, it would contradict the data either of quantum physics itself or of relativity. Quantum entanglement not only does not change anything here but is germane to this view, as Bohr realized (as early as 1935) in his reply to Einstein’s argument concerning the “problems” of quantum mechanics. Bohr’s view and, accordingly, the view delineated here are not positivist. These and other “strange” aspects of quantum mechanics tell us that something that we can know nothing about–and the very fact that we cannot know anything about it–can make a difference. If we could, in principle (not only in practice) know or indeed define simultaneously both a position and a momentum for a given particle (which we cannot do because of uncertainty relations), the “numbers”–correlations between events–would not come out right. They would be in conflict with what we observe, unless relativity is violated, as in Bohm’s hidden variables theories. This is what Bell’s theorem tells us.

     

    This argument does not imply that “quantum objects,” or, more accurately, something that enables us to infer something like quantum objects (and perhaps the very concept and attribute of “existence”) from the data generated by measuring instruments, do not exist if, say, we are not present to observe the “world” (if this or indeed any term can be applicable in our absence). In this sense, contrary to Smolin’s argument, a comprehensive and, in a certain sense, “objective” description of “the world as it would be independently of whether we were here or not” does not in fact conflict either with “the results of [quantum] experiments” or with quantum theory as currently constituted, although a “complete description of the world” may indeed not be possible in the way Smolin understands it (ultimately on the classical model, however non-Newtonian), especially as a description of a world seen as complete, as an absolute whole (LC 253; emphasis added).

     

    In view of these considerations I am compelled to take issue with some of Smolin’s assertions concerning experimental and theoretical “facts” about quantum physics as currently available. According to Smolin:

     

    Quantum mechanics is not a local theory. As I have described it, it is radically non-local. A very interesting question for those of us who feel uncomfortable with the quantum theory, is whether [if we accept experimental data it accounts for] it could be replaced by any theory that is local.... The answer is no. We know this because of a remarkable piece of work by an Irish physicist named John Bell in the early 1960s. What Bell did was to find a way to test directly the principle of locality. What Bell found was that in certain cases... the prediction of any local theory [compatible with statistical predictions of quantum mechanics] must satisfy certain constraints, which we call the Bell inequalities. Quantum theory, being non-local, must violate these conditions. (LC 251; emphasis added)

     

    This statement requires much qualification and quite a few corrections. First of all, this is not quite what Bell found. What Bell found, at least in his original findings here referred to, is that no local realist theory (a type that includes classical physics) and in particular no hidden variable theory, can be compatible with the statistical predictions of standard quantum mechanics (say, as described by Schrödinger’s equation). According to Bell’s theorem nonlocality would follow only if we had a theory of quantum data like classical physics, a theory allowing for determinable independent properties–overt, such as positions and momenta of the particles involved, or hidden, as in Bohm, which would fully determine the behavior of quantum systems in the way classical physics does; even if we could not fully trace this behavior in practice. Actually, in certain versions of the theory, nonlocality (i.e., a violation of relativity) would not be observable in practice. It is, however, a structural, built-in feature of the theory. It automatically follows from its equations. For Bohm the impossibility of definable independent properties (according to him, found in quantum physics) would entail the so-called hidden variables or parameters which are perhaps (at this point or ever) unobservable in practice, but which make the behavior of quantum systems themselves, in principle, classical-like. Such a theory would be similar to classical statistical physics, where statistics is the result of our insufficient knowledge concerning a system that in itself behaves classically. By contrast, as stressed by Bohr (whose formulations I am adopting here), in quantum mechanics the appeal to statistical considerations has nothing to do with our ignorance of the values of certain physical quantities determining the behavior of quantum systems. It has to do with the impossibility of defining such quantities in an unambiguous way (in part in view of the irreducible role of measuring instruments, as considered earlier), and hence with the fundamental inability of the classical frame of concepts to comprise the peculiar features of quantum mechanics.

     

    The argument of Bohr’s reply to Einstein, Podolsky, and Rosen is based on these considerations. This argument is misread by Smolin in terms of relationality (in his, rather than in Bohr’s sense, as considered earlier) and, it appears, implicitly nonlocality, to which Bohr never subscribed. Bohr’s argument is actually based on the impossibility of unambiguously assigning independent physical properties to quantum objects in the manner of classical physics, on which EPR based their argument. The main reason for Smolin’s misreading is that he disregards the role of measuring instruments in Bohr’s argument, which is decisive and which is stressed by Bohr in the article and in all his writings on quantum physics. This omission, although not uncommon, is curious in this case, since, as we have seen, Smolin realizes the general significance of this role, which is for him negative, of course. Bohr also argues that the quantum-mechanical description is complete, within its scope–as complete as it can be, given quantum data.

     

    These considerations are decisive. They establish that quantum mechanics, which is neither causal nor realist, is local (or at least, cannot be claimed to be nonlocal), and that it cannot be supplemented by a causal or realist theory, without violating locality, and hence relativity. This is also what Alan Aspect’s experiments demonstrated, rather than that quantum theory in its present form is nonlocal, as Smolin contends without any hesitation or qualification, as many of his statements show: any theory of quantum data “must be explicitly and radically non-local” (LC 252); there exists an “experimental disproof of the principle of locality” (253); and “locality is not a principle that is respected by nature” (253). None of these statements can be accepted as referring to established facts. It is true that there have been attempts (mostly motivated by the fact that quantum mechanics violates Bell’s inequalities) to derive nonlocality from within quantum theory as such–without any supplementary features–and that there were some claims for the success. In this sense, Smolin’s formulation cited above gets the case backwards. It is not that “quantum theory, being non-local, must violate these conditions” (the Bell inequalities), as he says, which is simply not the case. Rather, since quantum theory also violates these conditions, it may be, and is by some, suspected to be non-local. One would be hard pressed, however, to see these attempts as conclusive or accepted by the physics community, as, again, a number of essays in Cushing and McMullen’s volume and many other works would show. Certainly Bell’s theorem in itself is insufficient for this claim, and Bell himself never thought so, as his articles on the subject, now assembled in Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics, would testify in direct conflict with Smolin’s claim. Smolin does not differentiate between nuances of nonlocality or entanglement, for example, whether the violation of relativity is seen by him as observable or not (on which issue the reader may, again, consult Cushing and McMullen’s volume). He also does not consider nuances introduced by different Bell-type theorems (there are several), which would complicate the situation but would leave the present argument in place. Nor does Smolin really explain how nonlocality in certain quantum situations, assuming that it exists, leads to the total cosmic nonlocal entanglement. In any event, Smolin’s formulations cited above leave no doubt that he sees nonlocality (entailing an instantaneous connections between distant events and, hence, violating relativity) as an established experimental and theoretical fact of quantum physics. This view, if it can be maintained at all, is far from being undisputed, let alone accepted. Accordingly, Smolin’s contentions, which serve as major and perhaps uniquely significant grounds for his further hypothetical arguments become at best themselves hypothetical. At the very least, many qualifications not offered and, it appears, not entertained by Smolin are necessary. I would strongly contend, however, that there is no proof of and no widely accepted argument for the nonlocality of quantum physics.

     

    While, then, from the perspective of all present day physics, we are always within our universe, in the context of quantum physics, we are always, irreducibly “outside” whatever we can observe, big or small (quantum-ness is not a matter of actual size). Yet, simultaneously, it is never possible in quantum mechanics, in contrast to classical physics, to isolate what we observe from the means of observation (no quantum object can be defined otherwise). It is this joint point, at least in its full significance, that Smolin misses. One can see quantum physics as suggesting something quite different from Smolin’s entangled quantum universe. It is this: however global the scale of quantum “events” may be (and some of them are global), quantum physics disallows claims concerning at least the ultimate (and perhaps any) structure of quantum objects themselves, whatever their scale, from photons to the universe. What matters is their quantum nature, defined by ultimate (micro) constituents of matter and their interactions at various scales. From this point of view, the notion of the ultimate structure of the “universe” becomes suspect. “The universe as a whole,” Newtonian or relational, or “the universe itself,” are all claims of that type. Indeed, as I said, ultimately even the classical general relativity (that is, leaving quantum gravity aside) may entail the ultimate unfigurability of the universe. The latter itself becomes a misguided term under these conditions, as Maurice Blanchot observes, as he invokes the idea of the unfigurable universe and argues rightly that “nothing permits one to exclude the hypothesis of an unfigurable Universe (a term henceforth deceptive); a Universe escaping every optical exigency and also escaping consideration of the whole” (The Infinite Conversation 350). This is not to say (by way of a reverse ultimate claim) that the universe is a chaos, assuming that we have, or even can have, such a concept.

     

    The significance of the considerations just offered is twofold. First, they affect Smolin’s claim concerning the grounding of his speculations, making some of this grounding itself at best hypothetical, which affects the status of his speculative arguments and his overall program. Secondly, certain key areas and debates of modern physics are not presented by Smolin so as to give his readers, especially nonspecialists, an adequate picture. These omissions may lead to much misunderstanding on the part of such readers. It may also lead to questionable extrapolations of modern physics in the humanities, which are often criticized by the members of the scientific community. These critics are not always wrong, but they also do not always stop to consider that one of the sources of these problems is the presentation of modern science in popular writings by scientists themselves. It is true that in Smolin’s book these problems occur at some of the most subtle and complex junctures of modern physics. But then such junctures are also where the most careful and qualified accounts are especially necessary. At stake is an extraordinarily complex picture–and unpicturability–of the physical world, and of the world of physics. In any event, the humanists and other nonscientists should not take physicists’ accounts of physics for granted, especially if they want to use them in their own work. This is not to deny physicists’ abilities, often remarkable, to explain their work and ideas, and, as I said, Smolin often does an excellent job in doing this as well. It may well be, however, that the best reading of Smolin’s book, and the one would do most justice to both its achievements and the questions it poses, is a skeptical (not distrustful) reading–a reading that contests every argument and explores alternatives at each point. This approach entails much and not always easy reading in different areas and genres. The rewards, however, may be considerable. One can certainly learn quite a bit about both the life of cosmos and the life of physics.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bell, John S. Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1987.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Infinite Conversation. Trans. Susan Hanson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Bohm, David. Wholeness and the Implicate Order. London: Routledge, 1980.
    • Bohr, Niels. “Can Quantum-Mechanical Description of Physical Reality be Considered Complete?” Quantum Theory and Measurement. Eds. John A. Wheeler and Wojciech H. Zurek. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1983. 145-51.
    • —. Philosophical Writings of Niels Bohr. 3 vols. Woodbridge, Conn.: Ox Bow Press, 1987.
    • Cushing, James. T. and Ernan McMullen. Philosophical Consequences of Quantum Theory: Reflections on Bell’s Theorem. Notre Dame: U of Notre Dame P, 1989.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • Einstein, Albert, Boris Podolsky, and Nathan Rosen. “Can Quantum-Mechanical Description of Physical Reality be Considered Complete?” Quantum Theory and Measurement. Eds. John A. Wheeler and Wojciech H. Zurek. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1983. 138-43.
    • Leibniz, Gottfried, W. The Monadology. Leibniz: Philosophical Writings. Ed. G.H.R. Parkinson. London: Dent, 1973. 175-194.
    • Mermin, N. David. Boojums All the Way Through: Communicating Science in a Prosaic Age. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1990.
    • —. “What Is Quantum Mechanics Trying to Tell Us?” Notes for a lecture at the Symposium in Honor of Edward M. Purcell, Harvard University, October 18, 1997.
    • Plotnitsky, Arkady. “Complementarity, Idealization, and the Limits of the Classical Conceptions of Reality.” Mathematics, Science and Postclassical Theory. Eds. Barbara H. Smith and Arkady Plotnitsky. Durham: Duke UP, 1997. 134-72.
    • —. “Landscapes of Sibylline Strangeness: Complementarity, Quantum Measurement and Classical Physics.” Metadebates. Eds. G.C. Cornelis, J.P. Van Bendegem, and D. Aerts. Dordrecht, Netherlands: Kluwer, 1998 (forthcoming).
    • Serres, Michel. Le système de Leibniz. 2 vols. Paris: Seuil, 1982.
    • Thorne, Kip. Black Holes and Time Warps: Einstein’s Outrageous Legacy. New York: Oxford UP, 1994.

     

  • Hybrid Bound

    Scott Michaelsen

    Department of English
    Michigan State University
    smichael@pilot.msu.edu

     

    José David Saldívar, Border Matters: Remapping American Cultural Studies.Berkeley: U of California P, 1997.

     

    It was not colorless, nor was it of any one uniform color--presenting to the eye, as it flowed, every possible shade of purple, like the hues of a changeable silk... we perceived that the whole mass of liquid was made up of a number of distinct veins, each of a distinct hue; that these veins did not commingle; and that their cohesion was perfect in regard to their own particles among themselves, and imperfect in regard to neighboring veins. Upon passing the blade of the knife athwart the veins, the water closed over it immediately, as with us, and also, in withdrawing it, all traces of the passage of the knife were instantly obliterated. If, however, the blade was passed down accurately between the two veins, a perfect separation was effected, which the power of cohesion did not immediately rectify. The phenomena of this water formed the first definite link in that vast chain of apparent miracles with which I was destined to be at length encircled. (Poe 194)

     

    This miracle, which takes place at the end of Chapter 18 of Edgar Allan Poe’s racial tale, The Narrative of Arthur Gordon Pym (1838), is perhaps the nineteenth-century analogue for the miracle now taking place in our midst, in the realm of post-colonial criticism. It is the miracle of hybridity. Here is the potentially utopian, boundary-shattering figure of the hybrid: that which is a conjunction of the many makes its appearance as a changing flow, as a swirl of shifting color, such that it is neither “colorless” nor “uniform,” such that it embodies “every possible shade” without being any particular shade. And here is the miracle: that which is so conjoined can always be reduced to “a perfect separation.” Each element of the hybrid can be cut “athwart”; that is, the “veins” of the multiple elements can be cut open, exposed to one another, as indeed they must have been innumerable times before, and yet the singular veins always maintain their essential characters. And the individual veins can be exposed and analyzed in all of their singularity by simply passing a blade “between” them. Which is to suggest, as Poe’s extended metaphor certainly does, that the appearance or the effect of hybridity is phantasmatic–a trick of light and motion which, finally, is founded upon strands each of which is an unchanging essence. This episode in Pym, then, can be read as a polygenist response to the seemingly incontrovertible, visible fact of racial intermixture. The integrity of the individual strands puts the lie to any claim regarding hybridity.

     

    Poe’s brief text, perhaps, should serve as a warning to certain forms of post-colonial criticism concerned with hybridization. The warning takes this complex form: hybridity cannot really be hybridity–cannot really be a mixture and confusion of categories, types, bodies–if it is still possible, in the end, to identify the individual elements that compose the hybrid. If the hybrid were truly a hybrid, it would subvert the possibility of locating its individual parts, of producing an analytic which might chart the contributions of origin. A hybrid which can be disarticulated, then, is a compound without mixture, not a hybrid. When recent post-colonial criticism both marks approvingly the existence of hybrids, as a sign of utopian powers and potentialities, and determines the individual elements which make up the hybrid, it is in danger of fully recapitulating the logic of nineteenth-century racial studies. It falls, in short, into Poe’s trap.

     

    José David Saldívar’s recent volume, Border Matters, is entirely organized around the logic of the hybrid. He contends that “any examination of some of the key theoretical turns in cultural theory has to contend with [Néstor] García Canclini’s Culturas híbridas” (Saldívar 29).1 Hybridity, Saldívar claims, is the large fact of the modern Mexican-U.S. borderlands–a fact pregnant with possibility. “What changes,” he asks, “when culture is understood in terms of material hybridity, not purity?” (19). The answer is at least all of the following: a certain “playfulness of form” is evident (33); a certain subaltern agency is made possible in the “shifting and shifty versions of border culture” thereby produced (35); a certain sort of “deconstruction” takes place, of the “monological desire of cultural nationhood” (5-6)2; a certain “crossing, circulation, material mixing, and resistance” takes place such that contestation of power is possible and the “multiple-voiced” or inherently dialogic emerge (xiii, 13-14). In short, the borderlands is figured as “now only liminal ground, which may prove fertile for some and slimy for others” (21).

     

    Saldívar’s account, then, is one of material fertility, and of the political powers that accrue under such conditions. But Border Matters, at every turn, would be subject to Poe’s critique. To cite just one example, Tish Hinojosa’s music is described as a hybrid music; she “plays an eclectic blend of U.S.-Mexican border styles, mixing elements of corridos, cumbias, folk, rock, and country and western lyrics and lilting melodies” (188). Saldívar’s descriptions of hybridity amount to a taking account of individual cultural elements. To listen to Hinojosa productively is to be able to identify the point of origin of each contribution–to determine cultures and their products. Saldívar writes that Hinojosa’s “simple power” lies in her ability to “disentangle the segregated musical boundaries that divide the mass-mediated music industry,” which is a curious formulation (188): Why is it that hybridic desegregation is premised, then, on the act of disentanglement, rather than an entanglement of that which is culturally segregated? The answer is that the form of hybrid analysis which is practiced by Border Matters is entirely commensurate with Poe’s water streams.

     

    Border Matters occasionally but consistently is organized as an argument with anthropology. In pages on the nineteenth-century “soldier-ethnographer” John Gregory Bourke, for example, Saldívar writes:

     

    Culture in this light is the nimbus perceived by one group when it comes into contact with and observes another one. It is the objectification of everything alien and weird and exotic about the contact group. (166)

     

    This is a rather all-encompassing and generalized critique of anthropology and the anthropological project, and Saldívar sustains it elsewhere–for example: “forms of imperial dominion have often been concretized in the personas and functions of the traveler, especially the missionary and the anthropologist” (139). And yet, of course, Saldívar’s crucial term of art, hybridity, belongs entirely to the history of colonial anthropology–a fact that goes unremarked in Border Matters.

     

    The nineteenth-century concept of the materially fertile hybrid, as the key figure in the wars between racialist monogenists and polygenists, was designed, as Robert J.C. Young reminds, to operate in precisely the manner in which Saldívar forecasts: “Hybridity… is a key term in that wherever it emerges it suggests the impossibility of essentialism” (Young 27). This, perhaps, is now well known. What has gone unnoticed, however, is the strange journey of the hybridity concept in nineteenth-century U.S. thought.3

     

    In the first place, hybridity is advanced by the so-called monogenists, and this “beginning” should give one pause, because if those on the side of hybridity can only announce the existence of hybrids in the name of The Unity of the Human Race, as hybridity theorist John Bachman’s 1850 book title has it, then hybridity can only be the logic of incest; it cannot be the logic of the “heterotopic,” as Saldívar would have it (14), but rather the thought of the singular. When Saldívar announces his intention, at the end of his “Introduction,” “to unify a rhetoric or stylistics of the border” (14), he places himself in line with those nineteenth-century figures who reveal the wild card of hybridity only to always already keep it in its place, to announce a kind of impossibility of hybridization in the face of unification.

     

    The crucial nineteenth-century U.S. debate over hybridity took place between the Reverend Bachman and Samuel Morton in the early 1850s. Bachman was minister of St. John’s Lutheran Church in Charleston, South Carolina. Morton was a medical doctor whose fascination with the measurement of human skull size yielded Crania Americana (1839) and Crania Aegyptiaca (1844)–perhaps the two most crucial American texts for the development of a scientific racist perspective. Bachman’s three works from 1850 on hybridity–each produced as a combination of scholarship and personal attack on Morton–prompted a searching investigation on Morton’s which lasted the whole of the next year, until his death in May of 1851. His contemporaneous biographer Henry S. Patterson comments:

     

    Never had Morton been so busy as in that spring of 1851.... His researches upon Hybridity cost him much labor, in his extended comparison of authorities, and his industrial search for facts bearing on the question. (Nott and Gliddon lvi)

     

    The texts Morton produced in this last year of his life are quite fugitive–stray paragraphs toward a response to Bachman, for example, in the pages of the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, for example, and unfinished pages, or what his literary executors call “inedited manuscripts,” toward a full-scale revision of Crania Americana. What one learns from these pages appears to be counter-intuitive. One learns that Morton, rather than simply rejecting the test of hybridity, or denying its ability to produce non-degenerate persons, incorporated hybridity into his account of the races, incorporated it in such a way that the very idea of distinct races rests upon a foundation of earlier hybridizations of what one might call proto-races. The crucial moment comes on September 10, 1850, when Morton, President of the Academy of Natural Sciences, reads a short paper from the chair to those in attendance “on the value of the word species in Zoology” (Morton 81). While Morton defines “species” as a “primordial organic form” in a perhaps entirely conventional polygenist manner, his further comment, clearly influenced by Bachman’s attack, says otherwise:

     

    It will be justly remarked that a difficulty presents itself, at the outset, in determining what forms are primordial.... My view may be briefly explained by saying, that if certain existing organic types can be traced back into the "night of time," as dissimilar as we see them now, is it not more reasonable to regard them as aboriginal, than to suppose them the mere accidental derivations of an isolated patriarchal stem of which we know nothing? Hence, for example, I believe the dog family not to have originated from one primitive form, but many. Again, what I call a species may be regarded by some naturalists as a primitive variety... (Morton 82)

     

    Here is what Morton has done: Bachman’s evidence of hybridization among what Morton treats as the five basic races has now been taken into account. The possibility of, say, black-white mixtures in the world, does not refute an “aboriginal” racial thesis, but merely demonstrates that at a more “primitive” moment, a much larger and more complex network of “forms” intermingled, producing five distinct races but retaining traces of their interrelationship. Morton therefore does not do battle directly with Hybridity, but rather swallows it whole, adopts it as his foundational historical gesture, uses it to undergird a theory of now relatively stable races that can at least be differentiated in terms of talents and possibilities in the last instance, if not prevented from certain sorts of hybridization given primitive “proximate” or “allied” relations (Morton 82).

     

    One can, of course, read this definition of “species” as “variety” as an act of desperation, of logical confusion, or as a misunderstanding of what hybridity threatens in relation to narratives of racial difference. But it is perhaps best not to move too quickly in adopting this perspective, and to take seriously the fact that 1850 stages the great debate between essence and hybridity, produces a concept of hybridity to undermine essence, then locates hybridity as the ground of essence. The very idea of hybridity undergirds, belatedly, but, finally, in the first place, the idea of different entities–guarantees their space, their properties. Its every attempt to calculate original, non-binary relations produces the conditions for impermeable borders, restructures cultural geography in a manner akin to the “redlining” of real estate districts.

     

    Nothing is quite what it seems in this great hybridity debate. The existence of hybrids is announced in the name of a worldview–monogenism–which seemingly would preclude the possibility of absolute differences among human bodies, of therefore the very possibility of the “hetero.” The announcement is issued from the old slave South, in the pages of the Charleston Medical Journal, in order to do battle with a Northerner who publishes his great works of scientific racialism in Philadelphia, the home of American liberty. And Bachman, finally, sided with the South on the question of secession, a week before South Carolina’s official decision to leave the union: “I must go with my people,” he announced from his pulpit, leaving one to wonder precisely who one’s “people” might be in a world of nothing but kin (qtd. in Shuler 216).

     

    Given this complex and problematic history, one might finally wonder in what way a reinvigorated notion of hybridity might do battle with racial and cultural essentialisms at the end of the millennium. Saldívar’s sixth chapter, “Tijuana Calling,” is useful for such a purpose. It is here that Sald�var surveys a number of commentators on Tijuana as a border flashpoint, as a sign or a token of a new hybrid world being born. Saldívar dismisses New York Times writer Beverley Lowry’s travel writing on Tijuana precisely because it “is [not] sympathetic… to the material hybrid and heteroglossic (sub)cultures of Tijuana” (134); praises Rubén Martínez’s The Other Side (1992) because it can hear Tijuana’s “noisy music of intercultural bricolage” (144); and in general weighs a number of writers by the standard of whether they have managed to attend to the existence of hybrid cultural formations.4 One of the key texts in Saldívar’s account is Richard Rodriguez’s Days of Obligation: An Argument With My Mexican Father (1992). He concludes his Tijuana chapter with Rodriguez (and performance artist and writer Guillermo Gómez-Peña) “because their work provokes both celebration and disdain,” and, indeed, the highly visible Rodriguez for years has been vilified by progressive Chicano studies scholars for writing against such matters as “affirmative action and bilingual education” and for support of the “English-only movement” (146, 151).5 Over five remarkable pages, Saldívar concludes that Rodriguez, in Days of Obligation, has discovered hybridization and that, therefore, Rodriguez has undergone a “sea change”: his “mandarin” views have been transformed, and he has converted into a figure who “seems to want to put behind [him] the earlier polemics” (149, 151). In essence, Saldívar suggests that Richard Rodriguez has moved from an anti-Mexican, anti-Chicano viewpoint to “the Mexican point of view” through acknowledgment of his identity as a gay man and a Mexican man, through acknowledgment that he himself is a hybrid figure shot through with determinations that include both Anglo and Mexican elements (150). Hence Rodriguez’s newfound ability to use hybridity as a weapon against essentialism; Saldívar reads Rodriguez as concluding that “the South is in the North” and that “Mexico… is ready to spill over across the wire into the North and take up the whole enchilada” (149). Saldívar welcomes Rodriguez into the fold of those who have converted to hybridity analysis, to the “undoing [of] hegemonic readings of Baja and Alta California” (150). Rodriguez is now one of us, then, a figure who, through discovery and celebration of the forces of Americas’ hybridity, has re-entered and repositioned himself within the battle over identity politics on the left-progressive side.

     

    To intervene at this moment in Saldívar’s text is, in one sense, easy, and in another, complex. It is relatively easy, for example, to document that Rodriguez himself has undergone no political conversion, has not “put behind” him any of his former political beliefs. Rodriguez in 1998 is giving major public lectures in which he proclaims that “multiculturalism is loony” and that “the ideological premises of affirmative action are dying” (qtd. in Miller 1). The difficult part is the reconciliation of Rodriguez, the public lecturer, with the claims Saldívar makes concerning Days of Obligation. What must first be said is that Rodriguez’s discovery of hybridity–material hybridity–has enabled his polemic against affirmative action, multiculturalism, and the like. The fact that “we are finding more kids like Tiger Woods who don’t identify with a single racial identity,” for example, is a sign of the bankruptcy of claims to particular identities (qtd. in Miller 1). Now that “we” are all hybrids, according to Rodriguez, it is no longer possible to imagine coherent claims to racial-cultural heritages. At the level of the genes, of bodies, Rodriguez has produced an at least coherent (although deeply problematic) narrative of hybridity–one that takes account of Poe’s polemic and suggests that hybridity implies a mixture without recourse to origins and elements.

     

    But when one examines Rodriguez’s Days of Obligation, one is doubly struck by the force of the attack on narratives of racial-cultural persistence (particularly in the opening chapter, “India”), and by the powerful advocacy of persistence narratives of what one might call national-religious cultures. For Rodriguez, America is two stories: Anglo-Puritanism and Spanish-Catholicism. The first is “comedy,” and the second “tragedy” (Rodriguez xvi). The first is hopeful optimism (represented by the dream of Anglo California), and the second tends toward “cynical conclusions” about the world (xvii). The first is maternal and seedy, the second paternal and quasi-fascist.6 When Saldívar highlights Rodriguez’s conversion to the “Mexican point of view,” he highlights a conversion to what Rodriguez calls a truly Augustinian vision of the inevitability of “human unhappiness” (26), of a community of suffering without sentimentalism.7

     

    Saldívar’s dating of Rodriguez’s conversion to his moments of “coming out” as both gay and Mexican misses entirely Rodriguez’s own conversion statement: in the wake of Martin Luther King’s death, the rise of “hack radicals” like Stokely Carmichael and César Chávez (purveyor of pastoral-victimization narratives, and who was and remains “irrelevant to Mexican-American lives”) transformed him from a Protestant optimist to Mexican pessimist (Rodriguez 189, 67, 70). As for Rodriguez’s gay identity, a close reading of Days of Obligation’s key chapter, “Late Victorians,” indicates that Rodriguez seeks to distance himself, at every turn, from the culture of gay life, which he characterizes as fully Protestant or “Victorian” in its quest for wealth, taste, artificiality, and the like. The chapter’s repeated trope has Rodriguez sitting alone in his room, ruminating on gay street life outside his door, and Rodriguez identifies himself not as “gay” (there is no “coming out” in these pages) but as a person with a deep “unwillingness to embrace life” (43). “Late Victorians” tacitly affirms the results of the AIDS epidemic because it potentially will force San Francisco gay men to embrace a Catholic community of resigned suffering.

     

    As a final point, Saldívar has completely misunderstood Rodriguez’s Tijuana chapter, “In Athens Once.” Tijuana, in Rodriguez’s view, is fundamentally an Anglo-Protestant city: an “optimistic city,” a city whose fundamental character is revealed by the supermarket which has “Everything!” (93, 104-5). Rodriguez’s logic is that post-AIDS California is turning Catholic, that North American religion is turning Catholic,8 that border-Mexico has turned Protestant, and his vision, then, of Tijuana invading the North is an image of the re-Protestantization of the North: “silent as a Trojan horse, inevitable as a flotilla of boat people, more confounding in its innocence, in its power of proclamation, than Spielberg’s most pious vision of a flying saucer” (106). Rodriguez’s vision of Tijuana engulfing the North is a deeply ironic one, and hardly celebratory, as Anglo-America uncannily bears witness to a vision of its former self reconquering it in the name of Protestant commerce and individuality.

     

    José David Saldívar, then, has misunderstood everything of importance in his readings of hybridity–absent the bare fact that Rodriguez’s book concerns his own hybridity9–and this must be weighed in all seriousness. One: Rodriguez, on matters of “culture,” is absolutely monolithic and essentialist. His vision of national-religious-cultural hybridization is one that Poe precisely unmasks, but such unmasking is unnecessary because Rodriguez has no interest, here, in an account of hybridization which might be put to work against essentialisms. And Two: Rodriguez, on matters of “culture,” is absolutely not a late convert to liberal politics of inclusion and rights. He remains a bitter foe of liberalism in all of its guises, and advocates, in Days of Obligation, a return to original Catholic “relief from loneliness” in this world through “the Catholic knowledge of union, the mystical body of Christ” (198, 196). “Novelty should not come from within the Church,” Rodriguez warns: “I am not prepared to watch the Catholic Church stumble over a Protestant issue like multiculturalism” (190, 194).

     

    The presumption, then, on the part of Saldívar, that the very recognition of hybridity is inherently democratic, dialogic, subversive, deconstructive, and the like, is what is at stake here. It is that presumption, in virtual reduplication of the strange shape of the nineteenth-century Bachman-Morton debate, which permits Saldívar’s Border Matters to validate Rodriguez’s text and thus affirm the hybrid’s participation in Rodriguez’s Mother Theresa-like rapture over the suffering, failed body. Border Matters, finally, represents a certain crisis of reading in post-colonial, ethnic, and border studies, in which the assumed value of a network of concepts overrides the possibility of seeing what is literally placed right in front of one’s eyes. Border Matters, then, is an act of faith: faith in a deep anthropological vision which has, however, failed “us” at every instance, and in the last instance.

    Notes

     

    1. Originally published in 1990; now translated as Hybrid Cultures: Strategies for Entering and Leaving Modernity, trans. Christopher L. Chiappari and Silvia L. López (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1995).

     

    2. This phrase is Saldívar citing David Lloyd approvingly.

     

    3. Young’s interesting book is the latest attempt to read the epochal debates over race in the nineteenth century. Other important works in this line include Stanton, Gossett, Bieder, and the two works by Horsman. The section of my text which follows is a too-short summarization of a reading of these debates which diverges from this tradition, and which I am preparing for publication.

     

    4. Saldívar, it should be noted, uses other criteria at times to render judgments: often he searches for writers who utilize standpoint theory and reflect critically upon their own social subject positions. Thus, Luis Alberto Urrea’s Across the Wire is “trapped in the antinomy of the missionary and the ethnographer,” and it would have been “conceptually stronger if he [Urrea] had reflected more on the evangelist-anthropological processes themselves” (140, 139). Such standpoint reflection has been criticized on a number of grounds, not least of which because it does nothing but reconstitute a transcendental subject, despite its best efforts.

     

    5. Rodriguez has long courted social conservatives, in the pages of American Scholar magazine, and in his first book, Hunger of Memory.

     

    6. Rodriguez writes, pointedly, “Protestant trains smell better than Catholic trains and they run on time” (183).

     

    7. See, particularly, Chapter 9, “The Latin American Novel.”

     

    8. See page 197: “As Latin America turns Protestant, North America experiences the dawning of a Catholic vision–‘the global village’–an ecology closer to medievalism than to the Industrial Age.”

     

    9. See Rodriguez xvii.

    Works Cited

     

    • Bieder, Robert E. Science Encounters the Indian, 1820-1880: The Early Years of American Ethnology. Norman: U of Oklahoma P, 1986.
    • Gossett, Thomas F. Race: The History of an Idea in America. 1963. New ed. New York: Oxford UP, 1997.
    • Horsman, Reginald. Josiah Nott of Mobile: Southerner, Physician, and Racial Theorist. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State UP, 1987.
    • —. Race and Manifest Destiny: The Origins of American Racial Anglo-Saxonism. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1981.
    • Miller, David. “Author: Multiculturalism ‘looney,’ race irrelevant.” The State News 9 April 1998: 1, 10.
    • Morton, Samuel. “September 10th.” Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 5 (1852): 81-82.
    • Nott, J.C. and Geo. R. Gliddon. Types of Mankind: or, Ethnological Researches, Based Upon the Ancient Monuments, Paintings, Sculptures, and Crania of Races, and Upon Their Natural, Geographical, Philological, and Biblical History, Illustrated by Selections from the Inedited Papers of Samuel George Morton, M.D., (Late President of the Academy of Natural Sciences at Philadelphia,) and by Additional Contributions from Prof. L. Agassiz, LL.D.; W. Usher, M.D.; and Prof. H.S. Patterson, M.D.: 1854. Ninth ed. Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott, 1868.
    • Poe, Edgar Allan. The Narrative of Arthur Gordon Pym of Nantucket. 1838. Ed. Harold Beaver. New York: Penguin, 1975.
    • Rodriguez, Richard. Days of Obligation: An Argument with My Mexican Father. New York: Penguin, 1992.
    • Shuler, Jay. Had I the Wings: The Friendship of Bachman and Audubon. Athens: U of Georgia P, 1995.
    • Stanton, William. The Leopard’s Spots: Scientific Attitudes Toward Race in America 1815-59. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1960.
    • Young, Robert J.C. Colonial Desire: Hybridity in Theory, Culture and Race. New York: Routledge, 1995.

     

  • Culture on Vacation

    Mark Goble

    Department of English
    Stanford University
    m.goble@leland.stanford.edu

     

    James Clifford’s Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1997.

     

    Why is it not surprising that the Oxford English Dictionary locates the word “vacationer” as a term used chiefly in the United States? Across the whole complicated spectrum of U.S. cultures, classes, and ethnic identities, it can be said that practically no one “goes on holiday” and only rarely does someone “travel.” Instead, Americans take vacations. The very locution suggests the intensity with which leisure is pursued and constructed in the U.S., the almost violent attachment to small bits of time away from everyday life here in the industrialized nation that keeps its workers at work–across the class structure–for more hours of more weeks than all but a few Pacific Rim nations, which are then of course demonized for making their workers work too hard. At frequent stops along the various ways through modernity that James Clifford charts in his latest book, Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century, he makes use of his own location as the American “vacationer” to orient himself and us within the many cultures-in-transit with which he is concerned. This is not to say that orientation, once achieved, is readily understood or long maintained. One of the particular strengths of Clifford’s work as “a historical critic of anthropology” (8), whether in Writing Culture: The Poetics and Politics of Ethnography, a collection of essays he edited with George Marcus, or his previous book, The Predicament of Culture: Twentieth-Century Ethnography, Literature, and Art, has always been its willingness to dispense with rigid conclusions in favor of a dialectical flexibility across a heterogeneous landscape that excludes total purity of either theoretical abstraction or empirical experience.

     

    Routes extends and amplifies Clifford’s familiar style of analysis, though sometimes departing from his established topics of interest. “Routes continues an argument with the concept of culture” (2), Clifford writes, but this argument is often carried out on a terrain in which academic argument itself is on a sort of vacation, purposefully avoided in hopes of radically re-creating some of the standard styles of writing in which the study of “culture” is done. As Clifford writes, “Experiments in travel writing and poetic collage are interspersed with formal essays. By combining genres I register, and begin to historicize, the book’s composition–its different audiences and occasions. The point is not to bypass academic rigor…. The book’s mix of styles evokes these multiple and uneven practices of research, making visible the borders of academic work” (12). Routes gives one the sense of critique carried out under conditions of compulsory movement from place to place and from discourse to discourse. And like an American vacation in the strict sense of the term, different historical sites are visited both literally and figuratively. Each of the book’s three sections is loosely organized around standard essays. “Traveling Cultures” and “Spatial Practices” set the terms for the book’s first section, “Travels”; “Museums as Contact Zones” serves as the critical mass for several pieces on “Contacts”; and “Diasporas” outlines what is at stake in the various “Futures” that Clifford investigates in the book’s third and final portion. These “formal essays” inform and contend with other texts that range in styles among the various aforementioned genres. There are several pieces of travel writing that visit such locations as the northwest coast of Canada, the Museum of Man in London, the bustling tourist center of Palenque, Mexico, and Fort Ross, California. And in the practice of “poetic collage,” Clifford visits such texts as John Wesley Powell’s The Exploration of the Colorado River and John Steven’s Incidents of Travel in Central America, Chiapas, and Yucatan, both works of nineteenth century U.S. travel writing; Audre Lorde’s Zami: A New Spelling of my Name; and Freud’s Moses and Monotheism. The diversity of approaches and appropriations is in keeping with Clifford’s conception of the book’s deceptively plain yet formidable goal: “Routes begins with [the] assumption of movement, arguing that travels and contacts are crucial sites for an unfinished modernity…. The essays gathered here aim to make some sense, or senses, of people going places” (2).

     

    “Fort Ross Meditation,” the book’s final chapter, is an exemplary place to begin to understand in more detail Clifford’s project in Routes. It is no accident that Clifford ends a book on “people going places” under the signs of the most global dynamics one can imagine–capitalism, communication technologies, the nation-state–with an essay that examines a place just hours away from Clifford’s home in northern California. The irony speaks to the dialectical complexity of modern “dwelling/traveling.” The most elaborate histories of travel more than likely await us wherever we are in the late twentieth century, and we need barely move in order to witness the mobile narratives of imperial conquest and cultural change that play across the landscape. The first-person plural, however, remains highly conditional in Clifford; he rarely generalizes his investigations in the service of a constructed totality under which the entire chronotope of contemporary life may be situated. The most seductive totality that Clifford avoids in Routes is that of an essentially “deterritorialized” postmodernism of the kind associated with Deleuze and Guattari. Clifford instead devotes himself painstakingly to the project of differentiating between the relative and unstable experiences of mobility and stasis that interact in the countless “contact zones” between and within cultures. Fort Ross, California may represent an upper limit case for the complexity of such encounters. Fort Ross–“Ross” here derived from “Russia”–was a fur-trading outpost of the Russian Empire, its southernmost point of expansion into the Spain’s empire in the Americas. In addition to Russia and Spain, Great Britain and the United States also come into contact at Fort Ross. But the presences of these nations give only the barest sketch of the different communities “located” at Fort Ross: others include the Kayshaya Band of the Pomo Indians, Russian Siberians, Aleutian creoles, and Mormon missionaries. Each of these communities experienced Fort Ross as a different kind of far-flung destination and/or rapidly-changing homeland, and constructed different histories of mercantile dreams, imperial devastation, labor exploitation, postcolonial decline, and international conflict. And these pasts, as Clifford narrates them one after another, were necessarily assembled in dialogue with different presents, depending upon who was doing the work of historical narration.

     

    “Fort Ross Meditation” in many ways recalls “Identity in Mashpee,” the concluding chapter of The Predicament of Culture, but it is in its departures from that earlier piece that we see how Clifford has transformed and refined his project. “Identity in Mashpee” told the story of a New England Indian tribe’s courtroom drama of recognition in the face of a long and bewildering history of resistance, assimilation, reinvention, hybridization, and modernization: “What if identity,” Clifford asked, “is conceived not as a boundary to be maintained but as a nexus of relations and transactions actively engaging a subject?” (Predicament 344). His calculus attempted to track cultural identities over time, and his conclusions were that “culture” as “identity” must always and necessarily fail to account fully for the histories that converge at any one individual, and that neither narratives of total assimilation nor unchanging continuance adequately describe the diverse fates of Indian peoples in the United States.1 In “Fort Ross Meditation,” however, the center of attention is not a people but a place, a construction of both ethnographic and geographic fashioning. This shift in focus is accompanied by a shift in analytic style as well, for if one of the purposes of “Identity in Mashpee” was to show how a kind of anthropological deconstruction could sift out the traces of something called “Mashpee culture” in unlikely histories and practices, then “Fort Ross Meditation” can perhaps be read as a work of polymorphous cartography, a multiplied mapping of a particular place by means of narrative proliferation: the story of Russian discovery written over the story of Kayshaya subjugation, written over the story of Spanish decline, written over the story of U.S. expansion, written over the story of Kayshaya resistance, written over the story of contemporary reconstruction of the story of Russian discovery, and so on. By choosing location itself as the “field” for his investigation, Clifford permits himself to speculate about histories that may exist in relation to a specific ecology of place in which the human is but one variable among many, often the most destructive but not necessarily the most important. The Russians came to Fort Ross because of the sea otter and the lucrative Chinese trade in pelts that made such a far-flung outpost profitable and therefore possible. Thus Clifford suggests the rather eccentric project of a history that not only accounts for the sea otter’s role in the local and international economies that came to a nexus at Fort Ross, but a history which actually belongs to the sea otter.

     

    This makes for a strange moment in the book, for here it becomes necessary to ascertain just how much indulgence Clifford may be permitted in the rhetorical play that comes with any attempt to shift the work of critical analysis into a different register of language. As such, the following passages in “Fort Ross Meditation” suggest themselves as paradigmatic of the book’s larger aims both stylistically and thematically:

     

    A symptom, perhaps, of this uncertainty [about the nature of historical agency and consciousness] is my hankering to ask an absurd question. What does the history of changing environments, including their own near extinction, commodification, and consumption since 1700, look like to sea otters? How might this history appear to them? The arrival of a new predator? Holocaust? The predator's removal? Survival? Can we imagine a nonhuman historical consciousness?... Why this desire to find something like historical consciousness and agency in nonhumans? What temporalities define the consciousness of sea otters? Day and nights? Tides? Seasons and currents? The life cycles of kelp and other food? Reproduction? Birth and death? Perhaps even generations--a sense of living through offspring? None of these temporalities, the feelings, actions, and skills associated with them, come within distant translation-range of 'history' in its human senses.... Why indulge in such speculations? Perhaps to glimpse, from a translated place of animal difference, the enveloping waters in which I myself swim, the environment in which my 'life' unfolds, a habitat called history. (325-326)

     

    This passage brings to mind Thoreau’s Walden and its allegorizing of a battle between two ant colonies to signify across a great many meanings from the most existentially abstract (the futility of human endeavor) to the most historically referenced (the potential for violence in a nation both free and slave). At the same time, Clifford wants to forestall an allegorical interpretation even as he dances across its possibility. There is something corny about all this and Clifford knows it: after an earlier collage on “White Ethnicity” has ironically detailed Clifford’s own formative encounters with bluegrass music and its performance of whiteness, I don’t think it an accident that “hankering” here makes what must be one if its first appearances in a book of cultural theory. The wider latitude of travel writing as a genre brings with it rhetorical dangers. Questions stack up and hover over each other like airplanes in a holding pattern at a busy airport. A down-home kitsch mediates a moment that oscillates between wildly divergent languages: on the one hand, Clifford reaches for a kind of metaphorical excess reminiscent of Benjamin in his phantasmagoric attempts to speak from the soul of the commodity, but on the other hand, he must ward off the kind of didactic sentimentality reminiscent of Charles Kuralt in his syrupy naturalization of history as another consumable for Sunday morning brunch. But no abstract of quotation and comment can stand in for the experience of reading a text like “Fort Ross Meditation.” The critical energies of the essay depend wholly upon the literary performativeness of the writing, a statement which is, I admit, a truism that could be said of any text, but a truism that is brought to the fore and animated by Clifford’s writing in Routes.

     

    “I’m looking for history at Fort Ross,” Clifford begins one section of “Fort Ross Meditation,” “I want to understand my location among others in time and space. Where have we been and where are we going?” (301). The combination of flat tone and big questions would not be out of place on a postcard–though admittedly of a very particular kind. Clifford exploits the conventions of travel writing again in “Palenque Log,” a narrative reconstruction of one day in and around a major site of Mayan ruins in Chiapas. Here, Clifford maintains the form of a diary with exact notations of time and place as a device that both frames and generates the ethnographic discourse of the piece. The sentences are short. The syntax is economical. The text achieves the slightly compromised and degraded status of travel writing while simultaneously commenting on the very conventions it inhabits. Thus the entry for “11:00-1:30” begins “Jungle atmosphere in the hotel restaurant” and develops into a brief moment of reflection on the writings of a previous American tourist in Palenque, the nineteenth-century traveler John Stephens (227). Clifford invites, if not demands, a reckoning of his own travels against those of a predecessor of whose ideological limits he is only too aware. But whereas a conventional essay would extrapolate, evade, or contextualize such a moment of anxious influence, Clifford opts for a dazzling and deflating narrative gesture: he ends the entry by confessing, “I doze off” (228). Yet what sort of confession is this? Is it possible to doze off in the present tense? The present tense signifies a break in narrative time that is impossible to suture shut. No matter what a narrator writes–“I am falling asleep,” “I dozed off”–an implication of constructed discontinuity cannot be dodged, and Clifford makes no effort here or elsewhere to dodge these effects of writing as such.

     

    The more “writerly” chapters in Routes, like “Fort Ross Meditation,” “Palenque Log,” and the fascinating collage “Immigrant” (inspired by a Susan Hiller installation at the Freud Museum in London), all display–and I use this word pointedly, in conversation with Clifford’s own critiques of the display of objects in museums–their hybrid genealogies as interdisciplinary experiments in analysis and language. The less ostentatiously experimental chapters, like “Spatial Practices: Fieldwork, Travel, and the Disciplining of Anthropology” and “Paradise,” a wide-ranging essay that begins as a review of an exhibit on New Guinea at the Museum of Mankind in London and expands into a discussion of how the discourse of cultural hybridity addresses its own potential for hegemony, display the strengths familiar to readers of Clifford’s previous work. Whether writing about the historical construction of the “field” as a site of anthropology’s codification as a discipline, or about the role played by the discourse of diaspora in such works as Paul Gilroy’s Black Atlantic and Jonathan and Daniel Boyarin’s writings on Jewish identity, Clifford is a powerful synthesizer of diverse arguments. Yet even the more traditional essays in Routes eschew the more structurally aggressive kinds of arguments that Clifford made in The Predicament of Culture; for while Routes announces itself as a sequel to its predecessor, the thematics of the new book drive Clifford to more provisional conclusions. In “Traveling Cultures,” for example, Clifford tells how a re-reading of the essay “On Ethnographic Surrealism” led him to imagine an essay of the chronotope–the privileged theoretical figure of The Predicament of Culture–of the hotel in the 1920s and 1930s. “But almost immediately the organizing image, the chronotope, began to break up. And I now find myself embarked on a research project where any condensed epitome or place of survey is questionable. The comparative scope I’m struggling toward is not a form of overview. Rather, I’m working with a notion of comparative knowledge produced through an itinerary, always marked by a ‘way in,’ a history of locations and a location of histories” (31).

     

    The book Clifford produces out of his struggle toward a “comparative scope,” a book in which modern experiences of relative habitation and relative mobility can be understood as mutually constituting one another even as they propel cultures and subjects along different paths through the twentieth century, must of necessity feature more instances of startling insight than comprehensive perspective. The book’s overall shape conforms imperfectly to any available models: too heterogeneous to articulate a single argument, too stylistically diverse for a collection of essays, and yet too rigorous to be considered a work of postmodern travel writing (whatever that might be). And while there is a great deal of autobiographical reflection in Routes, its field of vision is categorically more broad and more historically committed than most of the academic memoirs that have been appearing for the last few years. As Clifford himself notes, of the modern domains of knowledge, anthropology has long been the discipline in which the first-person singular plays the most compelling role in legitimizing the knowledge itself. Anthropologists insist that they were “there” in a way that few literary critics insist they have read the book. It is too soon to know if Routes is to be the first or the last statement Clifford makes within that peculiar tradition of autobiographical anthropology that includes Michel Leiris’s Rules of the Game and Malinowski’s Diary in the Strict Sense of the Term, and that perhaps should cover James’s The American Scene as well. What is certain, however, is that for the time being James Clifford is among the most interesting traveling companions we’re likely to meet on the way to wherever it is we’re going.

     

    Note

     

    1. For an intriguing critique of Clifford, see Walter Benn Michaels, Our America: Nativism, Modernism, and Pluralism (Durham: Duke UP, 1995). In a long and cunning footnote, Michaels pushes at what he sees as the underlying incongruities in Clifford’s attempt to articulate a difference between reinvention and continuity as indicators of cultural presence and identity. Bluntly put, Michaels argues that there is no reinvention without the prior assumption of a continuity that renders a subject already a participant in the “culture” whose activities she pursues. Thus Michaels’s contention that “drumming will make you a Mashpee not because anyone who drums gets to be a Mashpee but because, insofar as your drumming counts as remembering a lost tradition, it shows that you already are a Mashpee” (177). Michaels imagines a laboratory condition in which all the variables of identity are burned away save two: freely chosen material practices and biological phantasms of race. Clifford revisits the predicaments of identity at several points in Routes, most notably in an exchange with Stuart Hall reproduced at the end of the essay “Traveling Cultures.” When pressed by Hall to articulate how “something” of an identity can be carried on through situations of pronounced migration, diaspora, and acculturation, Clifford argues that identity might be better conceived as “something more polythetic, something more like a habitus, a set of practices and dispositions, part of which could be remembered, articulated in specific contexts” (44). And later, Clifford augments this idea by figuring identity as “a processural configuration of historically given elements–including race, culture, class, gender, and sexuality–different combinations of which may be featured in different conjunctures. These elements may, in some conjunctures, cross-cut and bring each other to crisis. What components of identity are ‘deep’ and what ‘superficial’? What ‘central’ and what ‘peripheral’?” (46). I doubt that Michaels would be swayed by these statements either. Michaels’s critique of identity is all but irreconcilable with the most basic assumptions of anthropological discourse, namely that social agents larger than the individual and smaller than discourse itself really do exist.

    Works Cited

     

    • Clifford, James. The Predicament of Culture: Twentieth Century Ethnography, Literature, and Art. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1988.
    • Clifford, James. Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1997.
    • Michaels, Walter Benn. Our America: Nativism, Modernism, and Pluralism. Durham: Duke UP, 1995.

     

  • Too Far In to Be “Out”

    Thomas Lavazzi

    Department of Humanities/English
    Savannah State University
    lavazzit@tigerpaw.ssc.peachnet.edu

     

    Mark Russell, ed. Out of Character: Rants, Raves, and Monologues from Today’s Top Performance Artists.New York: Bantam, 1997.

     

    Out of Character anthologizes the work of thirty-one contemporary performance artists in ten times as many pages, from high poptech artists like Laurie Anderson and big-ticket monologists like Spalding Gray to less well-known ethno rappers like Robbie McCauley and multi-character soloists like Peggy Pettitt. While many of the performance texts are captivating, the collection’s emphasis on the monologue format, its lack of critical apparatus, and the absence of semiotic analysis of the mise en scène of individual performance events produce a limited view of the contemporary Performance Art scene.

     

    Each brief chapter opens with a full-page photo of the performance artist, followed by a “biographical questionnaire” of the Playboy’s-Most-Eligible-Bachelors variety (in addition to basic personal information like Name, Stage Name, and Birthplace, the categories include Favorite Performance Experience, Most Terrifying Performance Experience, Hobbies, Reading List, and Favorite Quote). Following the profile is a brief “Artist’s Notes” section, which usually consists of a first-person commentary (ranging in style from the notorious grant-writer’s “artist statement” to casual self-contemplations) or an excerpt from an interview (conducted by someone other than the editor); this section provides helpful grounding for the scripts (often excepts from larger works) that follow.

     

    Despite the bubble gum and flip card attitude of the setup, which does not always jibe with the slant of the “Artist’s Notes” (“flippant,” as Russell admits in his “Foreword” (xii), without accounting for how such a textual performance relates to his overall project), many of the performance scripts are insightful, witty, and engaging. Marga Gomez, for example, blends stand-up comedy with childhood recollections and incisive socio-cultural commentary (“When did I go from positive and perky to bitter and pathetic? I’m just like the first lesbians I ever saw. I was ten. I saw them on David Susskind’s Open End…” (165)). Penny Arcade deploys stream-of-consciousness personae to generate edgy satire and confront us with voices from “out/over there” that we would rather not hear (“You wanna help me out? With fifty cents or a buck? I can buy lunch with a buck! Shit. My name is Girl! An’ I am homeless!” (22)). Arcade’s troubling voices speak to Eric Bogosian’s dark humor, which brings us to the verge of a self-annihilating otherness. In addition to excerpts from Bogosian’s confrontational solo and ensemble pieces, the selection here includes “The Poem,” from Advocate. A stirring, eerie, and evocative piece, “The Poem” is performed in a dark room at a desk with a gooseneck lamp illuminating the “Narrator’s” face in a “spooky fashion” (“Come here, my little children. Come here, small tender ones. Into my arms. Into my teeth of streets. Run into the midnight traffic. Fall against the hot drops of water from your mother’s tears. Laughing into my teeth….” (46)). Though Bogosian is known popularly as a stand-up comic, the selections here highlight his evocative, provocative use of mise en scène, running performance along the edge of consciousness.

     

    Bogosian is not alone among the artists represented who deploy basic means to create poetic effects. Ishmael Houston-Jones imagines death through the body. In his 1971 piece included here, “Score for Dead,” Jones dances through a litany of prerecorded names of the dead (relatives of friends, celebrities, fictional characters) in a semi-ritualistic event, part homage and part shamanistic transference of the power of death (“When I hear a name that has a particular resonance for me, fall down to the floor in some emblematic way and try to rise again before the next name is called. As the next and the next and then the next names are spoken, repeat the falling… and rising dance… become exhausted with the effort” (195)). Houston-Jones unpacks the mystique of death by embodying–dancing–its relentless rhythm. Houston-Jones is the one of the few artists represented in Out of Character for whom the monologue (in one form or another) is not the primary aesthetic form. At the opposite end of the sensibility spectrum from Houston-Jones is West Coast performance artist Ron Athey, who explores religious fetishism through satirical texts embodied in a tableau-style mise en scène incorporating “medical-based s/m techniques” (34) (he describes Martyrs and Saints, for example, as a “pageant of erotic torture and penance” (34)). While delivering a monologue in 4 Scenes–“a true story from my childhood” (35)–Athey is shackled nude to a column à la St. Sebastian, painfully resplendent with tattoos and kinky body piercings: “From the time I was a baby, my grandma and aunt Vena repeatedly informed me, ‘You’ve been born with the calling on your life’… According to this message from the holiest of holies, I was to sacrifice the playthings of the world in order to fulfill the plans of God” (36).

     

    A riveting narrative excerpt from Gray’s Anatomy, by Spalding Gray, is quite at home in the center of the collection–perhaps as its centerpiece. The relatively detailed and informative note preceding the selection emphasizes the importance of personal presence in performance (“being there is everything” (169)), while revealing a theoretically hip Gray (“an inverted Method actor… I use autobiographic emotional memory to play myself rather than some other character” (171)) who nevertheless has a down-to-earth side (“This is how I work. I keep a journal, a Mead wide-ruled composition notebook” (169)). Gray’s performances coalesce around the personal and memory. For Gray the goal of performance is the “presentation of self in a theatrical setting” (171). The excerpt here demonstrates the sheer force such attention can achieve. Though Gray claims that his monologues are initially improvised in front of a live audience from key word outlines, the writing tightens through successive performances to deliver exquisite moments of narrative suspense, as when Gray describes his visit to a Philippine psychic surgeon for an eye operation. On the day of the operation, Gray tries to postpone the dreaded moment by, uncannily enough, telling stories (“But Pini [the surgeon] didn’t want to hear that story. He wanted to operate, and it was time…. I went into the operation chamber… I stripped to my red underwear… the Japanese began to go up to the table. Out come the bloody grapes again!… My time comes, and I jump on… I’m lying there quaking on the table… ‘It’s my eye! Remember, my left eye!… Don’t pull any meatballs out of me!’… his two fingers are erect bloody penises coming at me” (179)). This blend of humor and suspense, with a symbolic tickle (flitting metonymically through the details) is characteristic of a Gray monologue; the excerpt leaves the reader with a piquantly precise taste of Gray’s art.

     

    On the whole, Out of Character provides a wide, intriguing sampling of monologists, from the outrageously risky, violently self-present, and brilliantly humorous, to the (self-)celebrative and quietly poetic. But as compelling as such scripts are, without description and analysis of actual performances (other than notes provided by the artists themselves, as above), we have only a sketchy sense of the mise en scènes that are the performances. In his foreword, Russell advises his readers that “to actually understand [the work of the artists represented], closer study of each… is required, starting with viewing them live…” (xii) pointing out later that “numerous elements of these live performances… can only be hinted at on the page” (xiii); but a few such semiotically attuned “hints,” supplied from what must be a rich storehouse of his own observations after a decade and a half as artistic director of P.S. (Public School/Performance Space) 122, could have gone a way toward creating a more complex awareness of the material field of the performances.

     

    Nor does the anthology provide evaluative commentary to expand the reader’s understanding of the overall “state” of the art. The entire “critical apparatus” (xi) (other than the artists’ brief self commentaries) is contained in the foreword, in the first page and a half. The remaining six pages primarily narrate the history and social significance of P.S. 122 as a place that allows a “dialogue between a community and its artists” to take shape (i.e., “Public Space”), a place the editor was instrumental in developing: Russell has been artistic director of P.S. 122 since 1983. Certain assumptions, however, about the purpose of Performance Art resound throughout, the bottom line being “to tell one’s story” (vii).

     

    The foreword also takes for granted certain conventions of theater that don’t necessarily hold in experimental theatrical situations: for example, that the performance artist is a storyteller performing “in front of” a “listening, watching” audience (vii). Not only does Russell overlook the altered audience/performer relationship in much performance art (consider, for example, Hanon Resnikov’s breaks in loosely scripted Living Theatre pieces to dialogue directly with his audience–Resnikov is not mentioned in the collection), but also lists several features of postmodern performance as influences on “Performance Art” without noting their differences from–and potential disruption of–his own rather constricted mapping of the terrain. He mentions Elizabeth LeCompte’s experimentation with the “nature of personal theater” without commenting on the Wooster Group’s Brechtian bracketing of the “personal” and denaturalizing of the “dramatic” through collage structure; he vaguely notes the influence of “action performances of visual artists” (vii) without explaining what, exactly, these are or how they might support the concept of Performance Art as dramatized/fictionalized autobiography (does he mean “action painting” of the ’50s? but this falls outside the context of his chronology; certainly he can’t mean ’60s and ’70s happenings by Allan Kaprow, Joseph Beuys, Jack Smith, et al., which dialogize the “personal” as a means of vectoring out of the (ego-bound) self). He acknowledges the impact of technology–“consumer electronics,” “fun tools”–while again taming, containing, and subjectivizing their subject-fracturing potential by reducing them to just another means to “tell your story” (vii).

     

    This sort of “show-and-tell” attitude toward technology does not gel with the work of one of his own featured artists–and the one who kicks the collection off–Laurie Anderson, who Russell claims “can spin a fabulous yarn” and who “cuts through all the state-of-the-art technology” to sit us on the “front porch, telling stories” (xii). Laurie Anderson is a performer, but she is also an installation artist; her personal presence (sometimes in body and voice, sometimes only in voice) is an important part of her performances, but it is exactly that–a part. It is more accurate to say that Anderson incorporates technology into her performances and installations to dialogize (or cut against) the self, rather than cutting through technology to get to the “personal.” Her performances are at their best when she lets technology play through the self and vice versa (as the “live” synthesizing of her own voice in, for example, Home of the Brave). The “personal,” after all, is not a telos, but merely another rhetorical position, one among the flux–and so what is the self? (Think of the mechanical parrot in a recent Anderson installation at the Guggenheim Downtown, NYC–a computerized voice “speaking” fragments of the installator/orchestrator’s “auto”biography collaged with other textual bits/bites). This is the kind of question that Performance Art à la Anderson raises and that Russell’s version of the scene evades. The foreword stages a similar moment of overreading when Russell highlights Tim Miller’s (a founding member of P.S. 122) autobiographical performances “with props collected on the way to the theatre” (ix) and briefly describes some of the open-ended events that P.S. 122 has hosted, such as “twenty-four-hour marathon performances with bad jokes told on the hour” (x), without considering how such aleatoric events and artificially imposed structures question/put on trial conventional concepts of the “self”/subject and its relation to the “other” (animate or inanimate)/outside.

     

    The “Foreword” might have announced its approach to Performance Art a bit more clearly and conscientiously in the larger field of multimedia performance. Like the (formally) monologic gathering of scripts, the foreword’s voice sounds a one-note story about “Performance Art.” Granted anthologies of creative work don’t necessarily have to provide critical apparatus, and all anthologies are selective, but since there are so few gatherings of contemporary performance art, the editor who takes on such a project also takes on a particular responsibility: she or he should be as comprehensive as possible, and at least self-reflexively account for her/his own assumptions about what “Performance Art” is, a kind of editorial reflectiveness that the brief foreword sidesteps. Russell’s disclaimer in the foreword that this is “Not meant to be a comprehensive study” (vii) simply side-steps the issue (“study” is utilized broadly). He goes on to qualify the artists he does include as “some of the most adventurous in the field,” while simultaneously (and arbitrarily) equating “Performance Art” with “solo theatre” (vii).

     

    Do we really need 31 examples of the monologue form? And why limit the collection to solo performers, excluding performance art collectives? The combination of disclaimer and promotion of his own aesthetic agenda with the convenient (re)definition of the field through the mask of an unassuming rhetoric (“what might be called…” (vii)) effectively represses the need–if it be allowed that a reader might have one–for a more comprehensive gathering (moreover, Russell universalizes his own assumptions by devaluing the need for any classification whatsoever: “I don’t like any of those titles. I just call it Performance” (vii)).

     

    “Might” is a key word. The foreword “might” have benefited from a brief consideration of what Performance Art “might” be, before (instead of) hedging so quickly to a reductive definition. Though the foreword begins with a brief, elliptical chronology of how one strand of Performance Art developed out of gestures toward “personal theater” in the ’70s and ’80s, it does not mention the influence of seminal art movements such Happenings/Assemblage and Fluxus, which would have brought another dimension to the present gathering (and perhaps would have encouraged Russell to reconsider his frame). Considering that many of the readers of the anthology probably will not have this more comprehensive knowledge, Russell could have provided a clear and detailed outline of what’s missing and how it relates to what’s there.

     

    And what, for example, is missing? The insularity of the project–most of the performers represented have at one time or another been affiliated with P.S. 122–means that many folks aren’t invited to the party. Notable absences: performance poets such as John Giorno and Armand Schwerner; multimedia artists who feature voice and instrumentation, like Diamanda Galas and Robert Ashley; experimental theater artists like Rachel Rosenthal, Guillermo Gomez-Pena, and Theodora Skipitares who make extensive use of props (and marionettes, in Skipitares’s case); Fluxus-oriented performers like Stewart Sherman, Dick Higgins, Larry Miller, and the Kipper Kid(s); multimedia collectives like the critical art ensemble, V-Girls, Gorilla Girls, and TEZ, who parody academic settings and situations; even including some anti- (or less) dramatically oriented monologists–such as Eileen Myles or “talk poet” David Antin–might have created an insightful (and fruitful) juxtaposition. Some exclusions, of course, such as Karen Finley and Annie Sprinkle, whose shticks have been overplayed/played out, are understandable. In his brief overview of the genre’s development in the beginning of the foreword, Russell does mention Robert Wilson, Trisha Brown, and Meredith Monk (though not Mabou Mines, Yvonne Rainer, or Carolee Schneemann), and groups that work the boundaries between Performance Art and (“just call it” (vii)) Performance, such as Richard Foreman’s Ontological-Hysteric Theatre and the Wooster Group (formerly TPG), but such inclusion is mostly name dropping, as no indication is given of how these works might go beyond the narrow frame he has established.

     

    Near its end, the “Foreword” rhetorically restages a cliché of performance theory–that the theater “asks for participation in the illusion” (in this case, of character) (xiii). In Out of Character, Russell’s highly selective (though provocative) collection of performance scripts and the editor’s embedded assumptions about the nature of Performance Art encourage us to participate in a reductive de(il)lusion about a still emerging and not easily defined or semiotically delimited artistic territory. The job of such an anthology should, more productively, be–in the spirit of its subject matter–to open as fully as possible onto the field, to risk losing (one’s)self within it, rather than to seek a comfortable place/space of recognition and subjectivization–however seductive, aesthetically satisfying, and/or intellectually challenging those locales may be.

     

  • Eve, Not Edie: The Queering of Andy Warhol

     

    Christopher Sieving

    Department of Communication Arts
    University of Wisconsin at Madison
    csieving@students.wisc.edu

     

    Jennifer Doyle, Jonathan Flatley, and José Esteban Muñoz, eds., Pop Out: Queer Warhol. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996.

     

    In a year that marks the eleventh anniversary of his death, Andy Warhol–artist, filmmaker, icon–continues as a cultural force to be reckoned with. His profile within the Pop culture imaginary swelled in 1996 and 1997, fueled by the release of three films: Mary Harron’s I Shot Andy Warhol, Julian Schnabel’s Basquiat, and Susanne Ofteringer’s Nico Icon. (Screen bios of Edie Sedgwick and Holly Woodlawn are also, reportedly, on their way.) Warhol’s celebrated serial-image technique continues to be appropriated in dozens of ways throughout contemporary graphic design. The end of the century will undoubtedly spawn many more testimonials to the Warhol oeuvre, such as the one offered in a 1997 Chicago Tribune piece, which names Warhol as one of the 20th century’s five artists “that anyone seeking an understanding of modern and contemporary art will have to come up against and, if possible, accept” (G5).

     

    Arts scholars and academics have come up against Warhol many, many times prior to the publication of Pop Out: Queer Warhol. Whereas 1996 constituted a mini-revival of popular interest in the artist, 1989 (the year of MoMA’s massive retrospective) represents the most recent revival of widespread critical interest. That year saw an explosion of publications on Warhol: not just the commercially accessible portraits by David Bourdon and Victor Bockris (and Warhol himself, via his Diaries), but critical anthologies from Michael O’Pray, Gary Garrels, and Kynaston McShine. Add the stalwart Warhol texts by John Coplans, Rainer Crone, Peter Gidal, Stephen Koch, Carter Ratcliff, et al., and there can be little doubt as to the sheer tenacity of Warhol scholarship.

     

    So, one may reasonably wonder: do we really need more critical and analytical treatises on the work and world of Andy Warhol? Pop Out answers with a resounding “yes.” The book’s subtitle–Queer Warhol–announces a political agenda made explicit in its introduction: Pop Out‘s collected essays, according to editors Jennifer Doyle, Jonathan Flatley, and José Esteban Muñoz, “call out and combat the degaying of Warhol” (2). The term “degaying” comes from Simon Watney, whose inaugural article “Queer Andy” condemns the critical tradition (exemplified by many of the previously named texts) that “refus[es] to engage with the most glaringly obvious motif in Warhol’s career–his homosexuality” (21). Doyle, Flatley, and Muñoz argue for the recovery of a queer “social or symbolic context” (the context of Pop Art) in order to understand and appropriate Warhol and Popism (7). Recent analyses have largely failed at this task.

     

    Watney perhaps exaggerates the denial of sex (“let alone queer sex”) and sexuality by critics of the Warhol films (20); as Doyle et al. rightly acknowledge, film scholarship has done more to foreground the sexiness of Warhol’s art than any other critical discipline (16n). But Watney’s larger point is well taken by Pop Out‘s twelve contributing essayists, each of whom sets out to reclaim Warhol as a decidedly queer artist and cultural figure.

     

    It would be a mistake, however, to equate a discursive “queer Warhol” with the real-life gay Warhol. While the artist’s homosexuality is the jumping-off point for a number of essays (most notably, Watney’s “Queer Andy,” Thomas Waugh’s “Cockteaser,” and Michael Moon’s “Screen Memories, or Pop Comes from the Outside”), part of Pop Out‘s larger project is to complicate binarisms like “gay/straight.” This point comes through most eloquently in a passage in Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick’s essay “Queer Performativity.” Queerness, for Sedgwick, does not simply equal “gayness,” although there is significant overlap. Rather, it is more productive to think of shyness and shame as primary indicators of queerness–which may or may not later manifest itself with regard to sexual orientation (138). Sedgwick locates the crucial site of the formation of a “shame-delineated place of identity” (138) within childhood; parenthetically, she remarks “on how frequently queer kids are queer before they’re gay” (137; original emphasis). Accordingly, the theme of queer childhood acts as something of a leitmotif in Pop Out: José Muñoz’s vision of “a sickly queer boy who managed to do much more than simply survive” (144) is also taken up by Watney and especially Moon, both of whom are concerned with how young Andy channeled his queerness and, in the words of the editors, “forg[ed] a self from his investments in the mass culture available to him” (10).

     

    According to Sedgwick, once we start thinking of Warhol’s achievements as bound up with–as transformations of–his queerness, then those achievements can serve as models for subaltern persons and communities. The “shame-delineated place of identity” embodied by Warhol can be usefully appropriated by what Muñoz refers to as “minority subjects”; as Sedgwick notes, “race, gender, class, sexuality, appearance, and abledness are only a few of the defining social constructions that will crystallize there” (138). The frequent use of terms like “minority subject” and “survival strategy” (or “tactic”) by Pop Out‘s contributors underscores the political efficacy of Warhol’s brand of Pop appropriation.

     

    Muñoz’s conception (informed by the work of Michel Pecheux and Judith Butler) of “disidentification”–“a strategy that tries to transform a cultural logic from within” (148)–further illuminates this crucial theoretical formulation. The elasticity of the word “queer” in nearly all of these essays enables the authors to draw a variety of disempowered social groups (non-whites, women, the working class) into the Warhol nexus. Sedgwick and Muñoz are forthright in promoting the empowering effects of Warhol’s queer survival tactics; Muñoz even draws an analogy to Michele Wallace’s conception of black female film spectatorship, a process “about problematizing and expanding one’s racial identity instead of abandoning it” (150; original emphasis). However, while the Warhol philosophy may indeed prove liberating for some, to appropriate him as a vanquisher of patriarchy, white supremacy, or capitalistic terrorism is to ignore some unpleasant biographical truths: Warhol was certainly no friend to feminism (his 1972 film Women in Revolt is a bitchy parody of the nascent “Women’s Lib” movement), and examples of his casual racism have been remarked upon in a number of sources.1 By and large Pop Out‘s authors avoid an apologia for Warhol’s misogyny or classism, yet this avoidance might also be construed as an evasion. Only Marcie Frank, in “Popping Off Warhol,” makes a significant attempt to reconcile feminism and Popism (through the unlikely mediating figure of Valerie Solanas, Warhol’s would-be assassin).

     

    Nevertheless, Muñoz’s encouragement of these “theories of revisionary identification” (149) nicely encapsulates the vitality and diversity this project brings to the discipline of media studies. Instead of straining Warhol’s work through the meshes of a single theoretical approach, Pop Out allows for a variety of useful critical frameworks and methodologies. Studies of spectatorship and reception are skillfully employed in two of the anthology’s finest pieces. Waugh’s “Cockteaser” vividly reconstructs the audience for the embryonic gay cinema of the 1960s and positions Warhol’s films (e.g., My Hustler, Lonesome Cowboys) within that “underground” exhibition context, detailing how “censorship and film industry pressures shaped the form of Warhol’s cockteaser-like address to his gay male audiences” (59; original emphasis). Sasha Torres’s “The Caped Crusader of Camp” draws on contemporary press reports on Warhol, Pop Art, and the Batman phenomenon to expose the failure of recent revisionist critiques of 1960s camp to theorize the links between “camp and gay subcultural tastes… between subcultural style and its more ‘mainstream’ appropriations” (246)–i.e., between “gay camp” and “mass camp.”

     

    Elsewhere, Moon and Muñoz apply the methodologies of psychoanalysis and critical race theory, respectively, to analyze Warhol’s (and protégé Jean-Michel Basquiat’s) use of cartoon heroes and comic-book illustrations as subjects for art; Moon’s provocative thesis situates Warhol’s comic-strip painting as a continuation of “his flagrantly homoerotic art of the fifties” (79). Jennifer Doyle in “Tricks of the Trade” locates a multi-layered social critique in Warhol’s exploitation of “work” as “sex” (and vice versa) and offers her own critique of the modernist “figuring [of] Warhol’s relationship to his work as a kind of prostitution” (192); whereas Mandy Merck in “Figuring Out Andy Warhol” perceptively criticizes the rhetoric of transvestism employed by postmodernists (after Jameson and Baudrillard) to marginalize the Warhol silkscreen as, “[l]ike the drag queen, the copy without an original” (235). In addition, a number of essays follow David James’ suggestion and do away with the false opposition posited between Warhol’s celebrated ’60s work (enshrined in POPism, Warhol’s 1980 memoir) and his “denigrated” ’70s and ’80s output (34).

     

    While most of Pop Out‘s flaws are minor, one could take issue with some of the evidence–theoretical and empirical–used to support some of the more contentious claims. When a response to the existing literature seems necessary to bolster a proposition, many of the new scholars bypass the canonical critical takes on Warhol (Coplans, Crone, and Ratcliff don’t even make the bibliography) and go directly to the source himself: the “self-penned” Andy Warhol Diaries (1989), POPism: The Warhol Sixties, and dark horse The Philosophy of Andy Warhol: From A to B and Back Again (1975) emerge in Pop Out as the new source texts for Warhol studies, to be plumbed for textual and subtextual clues. Thus, only a bit of Pop psychoanalysis is required to conjecture a theory of underclass queer attraction to Dick Tracy (Moon)–or an articulation of a chocolate fetish with racial revulsion (Sedgwick)–out of a few phone conversations later transcribed as part of the Andy Warhol Philosophy.

     

    It seems odd that so many of Pop Out‘s contributors embrace these memoirs at face value, as if they presented unmediated access to the mind of the artist: not only is the “author” known to have been notoriously selective about autobiographical details (Stephen Koch has remarked of Warhol and his assistant Paul Morrissey: not “a single statement either one of them made to me… upon examination, turned out to be true” (qtd. in O’Pray 12), but all three books were apparently ghost-written and/or edited by collaborators. And yet I don’t wish to propose Jonathan Flatley’s trotting out of the theoretical big guns (de Man, Marx, Benjamin, Derrida, Butler, Saussure, Lacan, Freud–the last five within a page of each other) in “Warhol Gives Good Face” as a useful corrective, either; surely a middle ground can be attained, even within the solidly academic context of a book in which allusions to “Sedgwick” more often mean Eve, not Edie.

     

    Pop Out would also have profited from a closer look at Warhol’s temporal-based art. If, as Waugh claims, “a frank, intelligent, and materialist questioning of Warhol’s sexual address… and of his relation to erotic and specifically homoerotic mythologies of his day” (52) is to be found in much of the recent writing on the Warhol films, might not it prove fruitful to further expand the consideration of a distinctly “queer Warhol” to his often explicitly gay cinema (and his less explicitly gay TV work)? With the exceptions of Waugh and of Doyle, who cites Warhol and Morrissey’s Flesh (1968) in her analysis of “artistic exchange as the setting for erotic, sexual exchange” (198), most of the Pop Out essayists miss this opportunity. Sedgwick’s fine essay might have further benefited from an analysis of queer performativity in Warhol’s films, following the lead of Doyle, Flatley, and Muñoz’s offhand take on the “bad acting” of Warhol’s Superstars: “the performance that avows its performanceness acknowledges the difficulty of fitting into roles” (15). Flatley’s notion of the “politics of publicity” (103) seems very applicable to Warhol’s celebrity “biopics” of the middle ’60s (Harlot, Hedy, Lupe, and More Milk, Yvette), and Torres’s insights make one ponder how straight audiences and mainstream critics may have used the Pop/camp distinction to make sense of The Chelsea Girls (1966), the underground cinema’s box-office champ.2

     

    Still, the fact that possibilities for further exploration leap easily to mind is an indicator of Pop Out‘s usefulness for film historians, analysts, and theoreticians. A surge of additional scholarly appraisals of the Warhol cinema are in our future, as the long-awaited, long-delayed video releases of Warhol’s films finally become reality. And though future film scholars will have the luxury of access to these primary texts, they will be equally indebted to this book’s multiplicity of vibrant critical approaches. By illuminating methodological and theoretical alternatives like queer studies, feminist theory, and poststructuralism, Pop Out‘s essays have helped free Warhol studies from the dead ends of simplistic textual analysis and auteurism. This represents a significant advance (even at this late date), and it’s bound to be Pop Out‘s legacy for cinema studies.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See, for example, Nat Finkelstein’s account of “Andy in the Slums” in his book Andy Warhol: The Factory Years 1964-1967 (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1989).

    2. In this respect the anonymous Time reviewer’s queer-bashing synopsis of the three-and-a-half hour “very dirty and… very dull peep show” is particularly interesting: “A couple of sacked-out homosexuals in dirty underwear fondle each other incuriously. Another homosexual does a striptease. One lesbian beats another with a big-buckled belt. Another lesbian who is also a junkie jabs herself in the buttock with a hypodermic. A faggot who calls himself ‘the Pope’ advises a lesbian to sneak into church and do something obscene to the figure on the cross–‘It’ll do you good’” (“Nuts From Underground: The Chelsea Girls” 37). One wonders which review–Time‘s or Jack Kroll’s rave in Newsweek–was more influential in building popular enthusiasm for the movie.

    Works Cited

     

    • Artner, Alan G. “Artful Dodgers.” Chicago Tribune 2 March 1997: G5.
    • Doyle, Jennifer, Jonathan Flatley, and José Esteban Muñoz, eds., Pop Out: Queer Warhol. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996.
    • Finkelstein, Nat. Andy Warhol: The Factory Years 1964-1967. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1989.
    • “Nuts From Underground: The Chelsea Girls.” Time 30 December 1966: 37.
    • O’Pray, Michael. “Introduction.” Andy Warhol Film Factory. Ed. Michael O’Pray. London: British Film Institute, 1989.

     

  • “Note on My Writing”: Poetics as Exegesis

    Nicky Marsh

    Department of English
    University of Southampton, UK
    ebpd0@central.susx.ac.uk

     

    Susan Howe, Frame Structures: Early Poems 1974-1979. New York: New Directions, 1996.
    and
    Leslie Scalapino, Green and Black: Selected Writings.Jersey City: Talisman, 1996.

     

    Frame Structures and Green and Black are single-author collections written by two poets associated with the Language movement in American poetry. Leslie Scalapino’s collection gathers together excerpts from a number of her long poems published in the previous eleven years and ends with a new poem that shares the title of the collection, “Green and Black.” Susan Howe’s collection contains unabridged (although slightly altered) versions of her four earliest poems which, in their original form, are no longer in print. The central difference between the two collections, as Howe gathers her earliest work for publication and Scalapino excerpts from her latest, can possibly be explained by the relatively different standing the two poets have accrued within the academy; as Howe is tentatively accepted by the mainstream, Scalapino remains more thoroughly “experimental.” What these two poets share in these texts, however, beyond their imprecise categorization as experimental or Language writers, is an apparent, and for both largely new, desire to locate the significance of these poetics for the reader.

     

    “Note on My Writing” is the promisingly explicatory title of the opening essay in Leslie Scalapino’s latest collection. This title suggests, as do the other three “notes” that interleave the excerpts from Scalapino’s poems, that these short essays offer some process of initiation–that they bring to light how this sometimes unyielding and sometimes dazzling verse should be read, or at least how Scalapino would like it to be read. Susan Howe’s collection is similarly prefaced with a sense of introduction and elucidation. Frame Structures is not only the title of the book but the title of an extended inaugural essay in which Howe in her eclectic chronicling of fragmentary history left by the marginalized, familiar to readers of her other works, now turns to examine her own past and familial genealogy. This sense of literary autobiography/family history opens this collection of Howe’s earliest poems: the “frame structure” this combination delivers, from within which we are reading, seems to be that of the poet herself.

     

    The introductions or explanations with which these two works begin may be part of the acceptance by many of the writers involved in Language writing’s linguistically disruptive and politically skeptical project that they are being published and read as substantial contributors to American poetics. The collections by Howe and Scalapino can be placed alongside the other anthologies and literary histories–Douglas Messerli’s From the Other Side of the Century, Maggie O’Sullivan’s Out of Everywhere, and Bob Perelman’s The Marginalization of Poetry: Language Writing and Literary History–that have emerged in the mid-nineties as testament to the growing significance of Language writing within the mainstream American literary academy. However, these works by Scalapino and Howe also call into question any homogeneity of meaning or intent that Language writing either claimed or received by attribution. Their putative foregrounding of the materiality of language now seems to be a construct that many key participants in the movement are more than willing to deconstruct. Hence, these collections indicate not only the growing popularity of the experimentalism associated with Language writing, but also how complex and varied this writing actually is.

     

    The differences between Susan Howe and Leslie Scalapino are borne out by the stylistically distinct ways in which they locate the significance of their own work. In “Note on My Writing,” Scalapino is tersely explicit about what her writing means to her. The sentences are sharp and blatant: “I intend this work to be the repetition of historically real events the writing of which punches a hole in reality (as if to void them but actively)” (1). The energy that Scalapino suggests her work conveys is coiled up into the spring-like keenness of the writing. Nothing can be wasted when “a segment in the poem is the actual act of event itself” in a poetics that denies the distance between the text and its referents, making the text its own action (1). Scalapino’s writing inverts the insight that social constructions are always necessarily mediated through language (a notion integral to Language writing’s most basic poststructuralist precepts), suggesting instead that these vehicles of mediation are themselves the central constituents of experience–hence the text becomes the act. Scalapino asks that the reader acknowledge that the text doesn’t simply represent reality for us (albeit in an ideologically governed way) but produces a reality on its own terms.

     

    Susan Howe’s Frame Structures does not share either this laconic style or its invocation of text as action. Consistent with much of Howe’s earlier work, the text’s use of narrative shards of “local histories, antiquarian studies, bibliographies” is descriptive, elaborate, and assured (19). “Historical imagination,” the text informs us on the first page, “gathers in the missing,” and as the poem continues we are made aware that Howe’s own sense of the “missing” is being sought not only in historical documents, family letters, and diaries but in personal memories and family anecdotes. The materiality of the physical word (the antiquarian document, the markings in a family book of poetry) becomes prominent in this text because of its apparently stalwart ability to resist the homogenizing implications of what culture sanctions as “history”–because, like memory, texts can hold the eccentric and unsettling truths written out of official history which Howe elsewhere suggests is “the record of winners” (Europe of Trusts 11).

     

    Although both Scalapino and Howe emphasize the materiality of language in these introductions, the corresponding poetics suggested by these collections are quite different. Leslie Scalapino’s foregrounding of language is part of her attempt to overcome the divisions between the internal and external, past and present, that structure our experience. In “Note on My Writing,” Scalapino explains how she uses the comic strip or cartoon form to problematize these divisions: “Cartoons are a self-revealing surface as the comic strip is continuous, multiple, and within it [cartoons] have simultaneous future and past dimensions” (3). The extracts collected in Green and Black suggest how Scalapino makes sense of her relationship with the outside world through the form of comics.

     

    Winos were laying on the sidewalk, 
       it's a warehouse district; I happen 
       to
    be wearing a silk blouse, so it's 
       jealousy, not    
    that they're jealous of me
    necessarily.
    
    They're not receded, and are inert--as 
       it happens are bums (6)

     

    This extract is characteristic of much of the writing in this anthology. Scalapino makes apparent how our possession of mainly metropolitan space is organized around the social politics of class and gender. Moreover, this awareness also embraces the complexities of these categories. The woman narrator’s sensitivity to the “winos” comes not only through her apprehensive vulnerability (because of the sheerness of her clothes) but from her awareness that these same clothes also denote the place of privilege she occupies. The “bums” are visible to her–they are “not receded”–because she is acutely aware of the disparity of her own position, and that they are “static” in contrast to her own movement, that the “bums” lack the mobility that comes with social power.

     

    These twin themes of mobility and visibility, of location and social power, emerge throughout the various poems included in the collection. Indeed, Scalapino intersperses unannounced photographs from her book Crowd and Not Evening or Light within Green and Black almost to emphasize the significance of the landscape–the visible image–to the effect her text is trying to create. Her examination of the way these antagonisms disrupt the easy categories of public and private, class and gender, is extended in her erotic writing where the sex act is often defamiliarized in order to lay these constructions bare.

     

    having  
    swallowed the 
    water
    lily bud--so having
    it in
    him when he'd 
    come on some
    time with her (44)

     

    The motif of the lily is one that recurs in sexual scenarios throughout much of Scalapino’s work. The apparent coyness of the image (with its combination of a phallic stem and a feminine “flowering”) is constantly undercut by lengthy and decidedly unerotic images of the mechanics of sex–of fluid, movements, and deadpan orgasms. These rather estranging sequences seem to remove intercourse from its more customary overdetermined presentation, to deny it romantic, moralizing, or medical discourses and to return it to the everyday.

     

    The last poem in the collection is the previously unpublished “Green and Black.” This poem, like Scalapino’s other work from the mid-nineties such as New Time and Front Matter Dead Souls, attempts to bring Scalapino’s poetics, her resistance to the most foundational of dualities (you/me, inside/outside, then/now), to bear not only upon the public realm but upon specifically named public events. Scalapino’s reach over these events encompasses, and often seems to make no distinction between, the landscape, the economic system, and individual interaction. In all cases she attempts to bring out what we are inoculated against witnessing, what we are encouraged to accept.

     

         Slavery of  people in  events--
            their having
    no entrance--
    as there being no other ground as 
       oneself
         only occurrence there's no 
       observing 
    
         putting people down was the 
       fascist act inherently--in 
    every
    case ? 
         the teachers in my schools 
       created 
         pets--as cowardly groupies
    --and waifs jeered---there (95)

     

    Scalapino problematizes the unity or authenticity of the individual’s view of events, “there being no ground as oneself,” but stresses that domination, be it the play of power within a classroom or an allusion to racial subjugation (although perhaps Scalapino too easily suggests the two are comparable), structures our world, so that new ways have to be found to interpret domination if we would learn to negotiate it.

     

    Although Howe shares Scalapino’s suspicion of a lyrical presence and similarly foregrounds language in place of either self or narrative, the poems collected in Frame Structures explore a very different type of poetics from that which I have ascribed to Scalapino. Although these very early texts are marked by a lack of historical specificity, they do not share the references to “real” documents and voices that have come to characterize Howe’s later poems; they still attempt to make manifest the secrets concealed within language. The poems “Hinge Picture” and “Cabbage Gardens” intermingle snatches of narrative with mesmerizing chains of words and sounds.

     

    Remembered a fragment of the king's 
       face
    remembered a lappet wing
    remembered eunuchs lip to lip in 
       silent profile
    kissing
    remembered pygmies doing battle with 
       the cranes
    remembered bones of an enormous size 
       as proof of 
    the existence of giants   (41)

     

    Howe’s anaphoric “remembered” works as both a verb and a noun: the incredible nature of what is being recalled throws the act of memory, and the limitations of narrative against which it is posited, into relief. The frequent slips into neologism often focus attention more on the visual and aural effect of the words themselves than on any meaning they may lead us to–the sensuality of Howe’s early training as a painter is especially apparent in these early texts.

     

    However, the listing of the fantastic that dominates this work is often structured around a sense of quest. What becomes in Howe’s later work a search for hidden truths and voices here emerges as a much more playful venture. The activities of the various mythical protagonists seem to have no final destination or goal in mind; it is the hazards of the journey that Howe seems most keen to capture.

     

    Zingis filled
    nine sacks 
    with the ears of his enemies
    
    in winter
    the Tartars
    passed the D
    anube on ice (47)

     

    It is only occasionally, as in the poem “Chanting at the Crystal Sea,” that the sense of foreboding that emerges in later work surfaces, a sense that seems rooted in the same anxieties as Howe returns again and again in her work to lost origins that can never be recovered, to losses that are often at once personal and historical.

     

    I left you in a group of grownup 
       children and went in search
    wandered sandhills snowy nights
    calling "Mother, Father"
    
    A Dauphin sat down to dine on dust
    alone in his field of wheat
    
    One war-whoop toppled a State. (63)

     

    “The Secret History of the Dividing Line,” the last and thus most recent poem in this collection, is similarly resonant with the impossibility of the fairy tale. However, in this text Howe is concerned to counter the fantastic with a more specific interrogation of the relationship between language and domination: an interrogation that alludes simultaneously to early America and a more personal sense of past. The word “mark,” for example, is given multiple meanings early on in the poem.

     

    MARK
    border
    bulwark. An object set up to indicate 
       a boundary or
    position
    hence a sign or token
    impression or trace (90)

     

    These composite meanings of the sound are acknowledged to possess some degree of historical specificity; Howe intervenes in the play of signifiers whilst acknowledging it is uncontrollable. The poem’s ostensible concern to narrate the “war whoop in each dusty narrative” begins by focusing on the inequities associated with the claiming–symbolically and literally–of American land (99). Marking territory with “an object set up to indicate a boundary or position,” becomes synonymous with the systems of power and dominance that Howe’s poetry constantly seeks to evade. Like the poems collected in The Singularities anthology, this text is concerned to trace the devastation of native American common land ownership, and consequently culture, caused by the cartographic project inherent in the colonization of America. In the righthand corner of the following page appear the words: “for Mark my father and Mark my son.” The word here also intimates, although with an affection suggestive of the complex qualifications that always mar attempts to map easy political allegiances onto Howe’s work, the system of paternal naming upon which female identity has symbolically foundered. Finally, and crucially, the word centrally refers to the hierarchical project of writing itself, the very project that Howe’s agenda most often attempts to examine and disrupt.

     

    These two collections seem to participate in what the critic Marjorie Perloff has described as Language poetry’s “coming of age,” a newfound maturity she attributes to the re-examination of the principles of Language poetry as discussed by its “New York and San Francisco founding fathers” (558). Crucially, the authors of this examination are a surge of experimental women writers. The publication of these collections by Scalapino and Howe, and their accompanying acts of exegesis, thus suggest not only the slowly increasing readership that this writing has begun to accrue, but also that “this” writing (be it Language, innovative, or avant-garde) has begun to negotiate the issues surrounding politics and representation in new and expansive ways. When placed in contrast, Scalapino’s and Howe’s work most obviously illustrates that an investment in the text, a foregrounding of language as a site of privileged action or insight, can result in a poetics with political agendas and landscapes dramatically different from what has gone before. Howe moves assuredly, and often invisibly, through tracts and traces of early Americana, whereas Scalapino grazes on and against the contemporary urban spaces of this country. What these collections seem to demand above all, however, is a careful and generous reading capable of scrutinizing the assumptions and politics that lie concealed within these written landscapes.

    Works Cited

     

    • Howe, Susan. The Europe of Trusts. Los Angeles: Sun and Moon Press, 1990.
    • —. Singularities. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1990.
    • Messerli, Douglas. From the Other Side of the Century. Los Angeles: Sun and Moon Press, 1994.
    • O’Sullivan, Maggie. Out of Everywhere: Linguistically Innovative Poetry by Women in North America and the UK. London: Reality Street Press, 1996.
    • Perelman, Bob. The Marginalisation of Poetry: Language Writing and Literary History, Princeton: Princeton UP, 1996.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. “The Coming of Age of Language Poetry.” Contemporary Literature 38.3 (1997): 558-567.
    • Scalapino, Leslie. Crowd and Not Evening or Light. San Francisco: O Books, 1992.
    • —. The Front Matter, Dead Souls. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1996.
    • —. New Time. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1996.

     

  • Postmodern Spacings

     

    Mark Nunes et al.

    Department of English
    DeKalb College
    mnunes@dekalb.dc.peachnet.edu

     

    In February of 1997, a dozen individuals began working on a collaborative on-line project entitled “Postmodern Spacings.” We came from various academic and professional fields in North America, Europe, and Australia. Our only initial “guiding principle” was that we were to discuss a variety of understandings of postmodern space. The seminar as a whole would be responsible for drawing up a syllabus and setting the focus. Together, we set up our reading list, held real-time discussions in an on-line meeting space called 1k+1 MOO (hero.village.virginia.edu:7777), carried on conversations via a list-serv, and constructed collaborative, interwoven texts. The hypermedia work we present here is the culmination of that effort.

     

    Postmodern Spacings attempts to address the significance of “space” in contemporary cultural discourse. It looks at manifestations of bodily space, the space of the text, and social spaces, and it attempts to question the current relevance of a philosophy of space. The project also considers the intersection of these domains and the various hybrid spaces produced by these crossings.

     

    Our readings and conversations served as a series of openings to various questions about space and spacing. In our discussions of “postmodern space,” we assume that “space” has a history, and that it is more than a passive container of events. In acknowledging that space can be other than as it is, we were working from the assumption that “space” is something produced by social, cultural, and cognitive arrangements, while at the same time productive of experiential relations.

     

    Our project grew from a general question posed toward contemporary culture: what are the conditions of possibility present in various spacings of the everyday? As early as 1857, Marx described the historical transformation of everyday life in industrial modernity as “the annihilation of space by time.” We find that “space” increasingly appears as a term of interrogation in contemporary discourse.

     

    We discussed the production of sex and gender in relation to that spatial locus called “the body.” We looked toward the concepts of “production” and “poiesis” to explore the experience of “determined” subjectivity. We attempted to rethink urban space, sub-urban spaces, and the varied heterotopias and “non-spaces” of malls, highways, homeless encampments, and college classrooms. We considered the multilinearity of new textual spaces and the production of mediated spaces in on-line environments. Often we found our discussions heading in multiple directions. The weaving of our words into a hypermedia project allowed us to pursue connections that at times seemed aberrant, eccentric, or even monstrous.

     

    We drew from our various technical, academic, and professional backgrounds and attempted to produce a collaborative, coalitional space of our own in which to explore these topographies. Since discussions took place on-line, “the virtual” and “the real” occurred as a motif in various postings and conversations, but by no means was it a limiting topic. We did come to understand that the Postmodern Spacings project itself was an experiment in spaces, making use of several networked environments to encourage collaborative effort between participants. Thus, the project provided a space of sorts for a discussion of the benefits and shortcomings of on-line collaborative work. The Internet did indeed provide us with a profoundly open “supplemental” site of contact for the exchange of ideas and information. But this chaotic space, while wonderful for creating new openings, makes an attempt at “closure” seem somewhat artificial or forced.

     
    Postmodern Spacings is, therefore, a project in the truest sense, opening outward, forward, toward a positive expression. It provides a series of experiments on spatial issues according to various social, cultural, and economic discourses. The material presented “here” is not intended to serve as a finished work, but rather as a set of headings onto the various theoretical and practical issues relating to figurations and configurations of space in the post-industrial late 20th century. Perhaps it is best, then, to consider Postmodern Spacings (both the seminar itself and the work we produced) as a network of experiments and trials–essays–that point in the direction of further collaborative work.

     


    Proceed to Postmodern Spacings…
     

     

  • Welcome to Basementwood: Computer Generated Special Effects and Wired Magazine

    Michele Pierson

    Department of English and Cultural Studies
    University of Melbourne
    m.pierson@pgrad.unimelb.edu.au

     

    The November 1997 issue of Wired magazine featured a special report on the future of Hollywood filmmaking (“Hollywood 2.0 Special Report: The People Who Are Reinventing Entertainment”). In the Hollywood of the future there will be no film. Theatres will not be theatres. And feature films will be created on desktop computers for less than $1,000. The cinema of the future promises at once to deliver filmmaking into the hands of home-computer users and to make actually going to the movies an entertainment experience more akin to a trip to a theme park. Hollywood 2.0 is do-it-yourself cinema and Holodeck Enterprises all rolled into one. The report does not suggest that making movies for CD-ROM, DVD, or on-line delivery is the same thing as having one’s digital creations projected in one of Gerard Howland’s 360-degree, 3-D full-motion theaters. That’s not how things work in the future. Hollywood 2.0 still only offers would-be “creatives” the choice between producing low-resolution “art” films for the small screen, and trying to get a piece of the big-screen action elsewhere. And despite the closing of a number of high-profile special effects houses in 1996-97 (Buena Vista Visual Effects, Warner Digital Studios, and Boss Film Studios), the special effects industry is still the best representative of this fantasy-elsewhere that Hollywood 2.0 has to offer.1

     

    The “Hollywired Index” that accompanies this special report plots the emergence of Hollywood 2.0 in terms of the history of computer generated imagery (or CGI) in Hollywood cinema. A check-list of “firsts” for CGI in feature films lists the first completely computer generated sequence in a feature film (“Genesis effect” in Star Trek II: Wrath of Khan); the first completely computer generated character (“Stained-glass knight” in Young Sherlock Holmes); the first morph (Willow); and the first computer generated main character (“T-1000” in Terminator 2: Judgment Day). Similar lists have been a recurring feature in a magazine that imagines a readership intensely fascinated by the production of computer generated imagery. The very first issue featured an article on the special effects company Pacific Data Images (Quinn, “Beyond The Valley of The Morphs”). Subsequent issues have featured articles on effects house Digital Domain (Rothman, “Digital Deal”); Digital Domain’s co-founder, James Cameron (Parisi, “Cameron Angle”); and ILM’s George Lucas (Kelly and Parisi, “Beyond Star Wars“). Special effects were also the cover story for the December 1995 issue–which featured an article on the history of the Hollywood special effects industry (Parisi, “The New Silicon Stars”), and another on the making of Toy Story (Snider, “The Toy Story Story”).

     

    The regular features on the Hollywood special effects industry, mini-profiles of computer animators, and reviews of entertainment applications for computer graphics-based programs are only the most obvious sites where special effects figure in the magazine as content. In “Fetish” (a regular section that reviews the latest electronic gizmos for self-proclaimed and would-be hardware fetishists), readers are regularly addressed as producers of special effects. This is a trope that also frequently appears in advertising copy for multimedia and special effects hardware and software.

     

    Wired is not the only magazine that features articles, advertising, and artwork that displays computer-enhanced and computer generated images in this way. Mondo 2000 may have seen its heyday, but it was once the lifestyle magazine of choice for the wired-at-heart. And along with the crash courses in “DIY TV” and interviews with the Hollywood digerati, it too has fed readers’ home-production fantasies with sumptuous, digitally enhanced photo-montages and glossy, full-color computer generated images. It is Wired, however, with its saturation level advertising, high-res, digital-art-effects, and extensive coverage of the entertainment and consumer electronics industries, that provides the best site for examining some of the economic, technological, and popular-cultural rationalities that have molded and shaped the look of computer generated imagery (or CGI) in recent years.

     

    This essay looks at some of the ways Wired visualizes, discusses, and alludes to computer generated imagery, focusing in particular on how frequently visual and discursive references to special effects appeal to readers’ fantasies of producing such images themselves. In the early 1990s, computer generated special effects became a major attraction of science fiction cinema. As well as representing the techno-scientific wonders demanded by science fiction narratives, the computer generated images in films like The Abyss (1989), Terminator 2: Judgment Day (1991), Jurassic Park (1993), Stargate (1994), Johnny Mnemonic (1995), and Virtuosity (1995), also presented the techno-scientific achievements of the filmmaking and special effects industries to cinema audiences.

     

    Over the years, film and cultural critics like Vivian Sobchack, Brooks Landon, and Scott Bukatman have offered compelling accounts of the techno-cultural matrix in which computer generated imagery has emerged as a new kind of visual spectacle on the postmodern mediascape. But their work has, on the whole, looked less closely at the popular and sub-cultural resonances of a form of spectacular image production which has also produced a distinctly popular aesthetic. The computer generated imagery featured in the science fiction cinema of the early-to-mid-1990s was bracketed for mainstream cinema audiences–both by the formal organization of the films themselves and by the formal and informal networks of information about special effects that now play such an important role in the contemporary entertainment experience. This imagery was both a techno-scientific tour-de-force for the special effects industry and a new kind of aesthetic object. Mapping some of the cultural contours of this new aesthetic is therefore another project of this essay.

     

    The Consumption Junction

     

    With the exception of the seminal work by Sobchack, Landon, and Bukatman in science fiction studies, critical commentaries on CGI in Hollywood cinema have paid scant attention to aesthetics. Hollywood has typically been seen as a technologically and aesthetically conservative institution–in many ways, a justified perception. But while Hollywood has reacted conservatively to new technologies in some areas of film production, it has also opted in some areas for technical novelty over any strict calculus of risks. To take an example from the early 1950s, the aesthetic project governing Hollywood’s experiments with 3-D formats was arguably conservative, driven by a centuries-old quest for illusionism, realism, and mimesis. However, these experiments also represented a technologically adventurous–if ultimately unsuccessful–bid to bring cinema into the third dimension.

     

    Movies made in 3-D were widely pilloried by critics of the day. They were criticized for being gimmicky and juvenile, or for having stupid stories, or no stories at all. Most of the films made in 3-D between 1952 and 1953 used a dual-strip process that required two strips of film to be simultaneously projected onto the screen. The two images thus produced were meant to be perceived as a single, three-dimensional image when viewed by audiences through special polarized glasses; but if the projectors were not in perfect synchronization and/or correctly separated from each other, the effect would fail. The 3-D process was plagued by technological problems every step of the way: the cameras were bulky, film stock and printing costs were exorbitant, and synchronization was rarely achieved in projection. For a time, however, films made in 3-D formats were also popularly perceived to be the most technologically adventurous movies in theaters. Even after their moment of mass popularity was over, they continued to invite the delight of a new audience demographic: the techno-buffs.

     

    Hollywood’s experiments with 3-D in the 1950s differ in many important respects from its experiments with CGI in the early 1990s. Not only is the structure of the film industry different, so is the context of film reception. 3-D and CGI were also produced by different kinds of technologies. Assessing the cultural implications of these differences requires methodologies capable of identifying them. Philip Hayward and Tana Wollen address this issue in the introduction to Future Visions: New Technologies of the Screen, arguing that new methodologies are needed to deal with the cross-media nature of new computer technologies. Their work points out that developments like CGI are not anchored to cultural institutions in the same way that film is anchored to cinema (4). The fact that the history of CGI spans so many applications has implications for the way that history is written even when it is narrowed down (as it is here) to the history of CGI in Hollywood feature films. This last point is an important one: cultural analyses of new technologies ought to be different from cultural analyses of older technologies just (and not only) because the circumstances of their development, application, and consumption are different.

     

    Like the wide-screen formats that replaced it, 3-D cinema was born out of technological experimentation aimed at creating an immersive experience for spectators. The films that defined the look of CGI in the early 1990s, on the other hand, constructed a very different spectatorial relation to the images projected on the screen. Far from being designed to make spectators feel, as Bukatman once described it, that “[they] are there (even if [they’re] not)” (“The Artificial Infinite” 263) the cinema of this period was designed to focus attention on the disruption of cinematographic space by the insertion and installation of a markedly different technological and aesthetic object.

     

    By 1996, Hollywood science fiction cinema was already moving away from a mode of arts-and-effects direction that put the display of computer generated images at the center of the spectatorial experience. But in these early years, computer generated images became the focus of intense public scrutiny and the site of popular speculation about the aesthetic possibilities of new imaging technologies then coming to market.

     

    A number of factors have contributed to the prominence of consumer fantasies about spectacular image production in the 1990s. It could be argued that such fantasies of production arise inevitably when the interests of powerful industrial sectors converge–in this case, the entertainment, consumer electronics, and information technology industries. But such analysis fails to account for more diffuse processes involved in this phenomenon.2 Writing about the widespread media interest in entertainment applications of virtual reality technologies in the early 1990s, Philip Hayward commented that although much of this coverage suggested that recent innovations had only just burst onto the scene, “[a]nalysis reveals a more gradual pattern of diffusion through a range of (sub)cultural channels whose character and concerns have molded the public image and perception of the phenomenon itself.”3 Much the same might be said of the way the public image and perception of special effects has been shaped over the same period. Indeed, many of the cultural forms that Hayward identifies as having contributed to the popularity of discourses about virtual reality–music videos, rock and fringe culture magazines, computer games, and cyberpunk–have also helped popularize discourses about special effects.

     

    Journalisimo4

     

    Wired’s post-feminist posturing and consistent editorial support for a free-market, techno-libertarian stance on government regulation of information technology and telecommunications have repeatedly been the focus of dissent from readers and critics alike.5 More difficult to pin down, the magazine’s visual gestalt has also captured the attention of cultural critics interested in the ramifications of a design sense that has appeared, to many, to have made of the computer generated image, not so much a new kind of aesthetic object, as a new kind of corporate logo.

     

    This is not the first time that reflection on this aspect of the magazine has centered on, or invoked, computer generated special effects. In “Wired Unplugged“–a revised version of a review which first appeared in Educom Review–Mark Dery begins by imagining that the magazine itself simulates the polymorphous perversity of a computer graphics effect.6 Invoking an already iconic moment in the history of CGI in Hollywood cinema, Dery wonders if Wired isn’t “actually the shape-shifting android from Terminator 2, disguised as a magazine.” In its use of digital production technologies, he likens Wired to “the liquid metal T-1000, whose ‘mimetic polyalloy’ enables it to morph into ‘anything it samples by physical contact.’” Dery is a perspicacious commentator on contemporary technocultures. His analysis in Escape Velocity of the subcultures that have emerged among underground roboticists, cyber-body artists, postmodern primitives, and cyberpunk rockers is happily devoid of the “cyberdrool” that sometimes passes for theoretical reflection at the more ecstatic end of cultural commentary on new technologies. For Dery, these subcultures are appealing because, while they take it as a given that “technology is inextricably woven into the warp and woof of our everyday lives,” they also manage to “short-circuit the technophile-versus-technophobe debate” that tends to follow this assumption (Escape Velocity 15). Some, it would seem, even go so far as to turn a critical eye on that ubiquitous new formation, “the military-industrial-entertainment complex.”

     

    The same, however, cannot be said for the readership that Dery imagines for Wired, this “magazine simulating a simulation” (“Wired Unplugged”). If he chastizes Langdon Winner for taking Wired’s hyperactive visual design as a sign that the magazine lacks substance, it is because Dery is too perceptive a critic not to recognize that Wired’s slippery, refracting visual style reverberates with meanings of its own. Curiously, he posits its “aesthetic of overt manipulation–of ‘overdesign’”–as the graphic equivalent of the opening line of William Gibson’s Neuromancer: “‘The sky above the port was the color of television, tuned to a dead channel’” (3). This seems an odd choice, not least of all because, unless you press your nose to the screen, the flickering fuzz that appears on a television set tuned to a dead channel seems strangely monochrome. It is not an image, one would have thought, that is readily identifiable as the textual equivalent of Wired’s day-glo graphical interface. The point of this reference is to draw a parallel between Gibson’s vision of the future and Wired’s professed desire to produce a magazine that looks “as though it had literally landed at your feet as a messenger from the future.”7 But Dery’s suggestion that “both Gibson’s world and Wired’s remind us that technology is transforming our environment into a profoundly denatured, digitized–and, increasingly, corporate–place” (“Wired Unplugged” 3), only succeeds in foreclosing upon any further speculation about what this future might look like.

     

    In its rhetorical effects, Dery’s writing blurs any distinction between Wired’s visual style and something approximating its world view. On one level, this seems entirely appropriate. For as Dery himself points out, it is not for nothing that Marshall McLuhan is listed as Patron Saint on the magazine’s masthead. The problem with this thinking lies not in trying to ascertain the cultural meaning of Wired’s visual style. Much less does it lie in refusing to separate style from content (or medium from message). For much of this review it lies, rather, in the assumption that Wired’s world is so dominated by the view of “corporate futurists, laissez-faire evangelists, and prophets of privatization,” that no meaning can be imagined for it that does not fit this ideological configuration (2). When it is not being retrofitted as corporate-futurist, Wired’s aesthetic is figured as an attempt to simulate “the sensation of bodily immersion familiar from video games and techno-thrillers, where warp-speed, gravity-defying flights through cyberspace, seen from a computer-generated point of view, offer gamers and moviegoers a taste of cyborg vision” (4). But to the extent that it is really intended to signal a new mode of visualization, the metaphor of “cyborg vision” all too neatly elides important differences between the ways that computer generated images produced for VR, movies, games, and magazines actually circulate in popular culture.

     

    More prosaically, it might be noted that some aspects of Wired’s visual design are tuned into the anti-formalist, cut-and-paste expressionism being explored in fringe culture magazines like Ray Gun and Inside Edge. Much of the layout in these magazines features Barry Deck’s expressionist typefaces (which have names like Caustic Biomorph, Cyberotica, and Template Gothic). The contents pages of each issue of Wired are preceded by a four-page digital art spread that includes quotes from an upcoming article. This regular feature–along with the contents pages themselves–plays with all manner of digital art forms, including those emanating from the cyberdelic end of the techno-fringe. Images and typeface are combined in ways that suggest the editorial brief for these pages is to capture a mood, attitude, or tone. Not fully-formed ideas, but snippets of ideas, float or flash through the magazine at the speed of a turning page.

     

    Despite the fact that Ray Gun’s founder, David Carson, has been commissioned to create ads for Pepsi, Nike, Citibank, and TV Guide, or the fact that still more advertisements have been inspired by Carson’s approach to design, Ray Gun continues to be perceived by many cultural commentators as a new edge publication.8 It would seem that no corporate takeover has yet managed to cast a shadow over its claims to push back the boundaries of conventional design. In reviews of Wired, Ray Gun is also the magazine that most often crops up as a contextual reference for Wired’s own design sense. “Wired,” says Dery, “is the limit case for postmodern technodazzle in graphic design, pushing the eyestrain envelope to just this side of unreadability” (“Wired Unplugged” 1). In parentheses he adds: “It falls to magazines with a younger, fringier demographic, like Ray Gun and Poppin’ Zits, to shatter the legibility barrier into postliterate fragments” (1). For Dery, then, comparisons between Wired and Ray Gun are intended to raise questions about the fate of critical thinking and rationality in a so-called “postliterate” design space. But neither Wired’s broad-bandwidth broadcasting of the corporate-futurist message, nor its simulation of the cyborg’s terminal gaze, allow much room for the fragmentation of meaning that we have been given to understand occurs in this space. As far as critical ciphers go, both suggest the restitution of an organizing rationality that makes it difficult to conceptualize the magazine in any other terms.

     

    It falls to cyber-sceptic Keith White to offer a reading of Wired’s design strategy that resolves some of the discontinuities in Dery’s review. If Dery’s own reading is perhaps best understood as a discontinuous series of short takes on a theme–chosen more for their immediate impact than their relation to each other–White’s review is the monotheistic voice of rationalist indignation. In a review originally published in The Baffler (subtitled “The Journal That Blunts the Cutting Edge”), and currently available on-line, White argues that Wired’s much-touted design sense speaks nothing so much as good marketing: “Don’t be sucked in” is the White message–whatever this packaging owes to publications like Ray Gun, Sassy, and Inside Edge, this material has most certainly been relieved of any genuinely radical edge. According to White, Wired’s co-optation of the radical “look” of these magazines extends the same logic that launched Apple’s Macintosh computer. The famous 1984 Chiat/Day television commercial presented the Macintosh to its Super Bowl audience as a conformity-smashing innovation in computer design. Thereafter, says White, “the course that ideologues of the computer should take” had been set. In putting “together an ideological packaging for information technology that screamed nonconformist,” Wired’s founders simply “picked up where the TV advertising left off” (“The Killer App” 2).

     

    White’s claim that Wired’s vision of the good life is remarkably consistent–“money, power, and a game boy sewn into the palm of your hand”–has real critical bite (3). However, it might also be said of this critique that it fabricates consistency where it might not otherwise exist. Take for example the argument that throughout the 1960s, ’70s, and early ’80s, the computer industry suffered from a massive public relations problem that stemmed from the Cold War. This was a time, according to White, when the counterculture and corporate America shared a suspicion of computer technology. If information technology was “to achieve proper acceptance in the business world,” then it would have to “undergo a gigantic face-lift.” This critical revamp was achieved, says White, by appealing to the business world’s increasing fascination with “notions of chaos, revolution, and disorder” (2).

     

    Here, then, is the missing link between Wired’s chaotic, disorderly–to say nothing of revolutionary–visual style, and its corporate, free-market ideology. The only problem is that this narrative relies on a strange cultural bifurcation. For where do the first technofreaks–with their whole-earth lifestyles, low-tech equipment, and high-tech predilections–fit into this picture? The first communities of computer programmers that sprang up in places like Santa Cruz County in the 1960s and ’70s were an important site for the development of a sensibility –if not yet an aesthetic–fascinated by chaos, disorder, and random phenomena.

     

    The fringe technocultures that clustered around the first bulletin board systems (BBSs) in the mid-1970s did not simply disappear into Start-up Valley ten years later. Indeed, the contemporary “ravers, technopagans, hippie hackers, and other cyberdelic subcultures” that come in for such close critical scrutiny in Dery’s Escape Velocity have their techno-cultural roots in these kinds of communities.9 Dery’s criticism of these subcultures bristles with impatience. His most scathing criticism is reserved for their “techno-transcendentalism” and “high-tech millenarianism”–all that flaky cyberbabble about “consciousness technologies” and “magickal programming” (21-22). As well it might be. Dery fears that “[t]heir siren song of nineties technophilia and sixties transcendentalism seduces the public imagination with the promise of an end-of-the-century deus ex machina at a time when realistic solutions are urgently needed” (49); and this fear may, in fact, turn out to be well-founded. It is worth remembering, however, that the do-it-yourself ethos of the cyberdelic fringe was nourishing future experiments in digital art–fractal art, genetic art, multimedia–well before the PC boom of the mid-1980s.

     

    In “Cyberhype,” a review essay for World Art magazine, the Australian cultural critic McKenzie Wark offers what is perhaps the most persuasive reading of how spectacular image production and the commodity form converge in Wired. As in Dery’s and White’s reviews for Educom Review, it is not Wark’s argument so much as his rhetorical style that proves most persuasive. His avatar for this essay is a “jaded, bloated 30-something former punk” (67) whose street-weary, intellectual cool is reminiscent of science fiction novelist Rudy Rucker’s jaundiced anti-heroes. Wark (it seems reasonable to continue to identify him in this way), casts a disparaging glance at what he sees as being Wired’s corporate-cultural mission: the production of cyberhype.

     

    According to the Wark lexicon, cyberhype is hype about hype: it is hype about multimedia, cyberspace, and virtual reality. It is “the swanky image of nothing but the promise of ever niftier images” (66). And it is virtually indistinguishable from marketing hype. Wired and its sister publication Mondo 2000 emerge from Wark’s review as magazines for the “first off-the-shelf romantic revolution.”10 His reflection on the spectacular imagery in these magazines leads him to speculate that the commodity form and the spectacular image form have, in fact, “become one.”11 What seems to bother him about this fusing of art and advertising is not the idea that it has become impossible to distinguish between the two (although this is bad enough), but rather that anyone with half an idea and access to the right sort of equipment can produce these spectacular image-commodities.

     

    Advertising, he argues, is no longer the sole preserve of the big manufacturers and media outlets: “Now anyone can sell!” And not just classifieds and garage sales: “anyone can make images of themselves and sell themselves as makers of images, and distribute those images through the endless capillaries of the new micromedia: cable TV access channels, do-it-yourself ‘zines, covert and even overt self-promotion on the Internet, info-hucksters puffing each other up on the big cyber-communities like the Well” (69). The more alarmist Wark’s tone becomes, the more one begins to suspect that what he finds most worrisome about this proliferation of images is that it raises the possibility that we now live in an era when art is no longer possible. For Wark, art seems to stand in this instance as the sign of a mode of production that says no to spectacle and to cyberhype.

     

    Wark is no cyber-refusnik, so it is hard to imagine that he really means to signal the impossibility of something called computer, or digital, art. It is even harder to imagine him arguing that the democratization of this technology–the fact that it is within reach of “a great number of the ever expanding info hacking class”– has led, inexorably, to the conflation of image production with something called cyberhype, or the spectacle, or the commodity.12 After all, this claim betrays a sneaking disregard for the desires of the populace that does not sit easily with Wark’s more populist impulses. Again, it is worth remembering that neither Wark’s nor Dery’s reviews of Wired were specifically written for an academic audience. They are tactical pieces: written quickly and designed for maximum impact. But they also raise important questions about some of the ways that computer generated images are being produced, distributed, and above all, consumed.

     

    Just Do-It-Yourself

     

    Although advertising for multimedia technologies in Wired regularly appeals to consumers’ fantasies of becoming image-makers themselves, this advertising tends (interestingly) not to represent this possibility visually. This is especially noticeable in a magazine otherwise filled with images. There are advertising campaigns in Wired that are sites of spectacular image production–the Absolut Vodka campaign is a case in point–but ads that actually advertise computer imaging technologies are more likely to refer to their placement in a magazine already filled with images and high-profile image-makers in order to invoke the imaging capabilities of their products. An ad for Autodesk video editing and animation software, for example, claims that with the company’s vast range of plug-ins, “you’ll not only be doing things typically reserved for high-end workstations today, you’ll be doing the hottest things in this magazine tomorrow” (Wired January 1995, 61). Perhaps the most interesting feature of this advertising, however, is its appeal to consumers not in the market for “high-end workstations.” While the advertised cost of something like Media 100’s video editing system (under $30,000) clearly puts it out of range for the vast majority of home producers of multimedia, much of the advertising for multimedia authoring tools that appears in Wired is pitched to the home producer. In fact, the entire magazine is rather clearly structured to appeal as much to the do-it-yourself fantasies of would-be home producers as to the purchasing power of imagemaking professionals.

     

    Articles like one featuring an interview with the low-budget filmmaker Scott Billups feed consumers’ fantasies of home production in a number of ways (“Shot By An Outlaw”). Most obviously, Billups himself is represented as something of a home producer (in this case of low-budget horror movies). The article is promoted on the front cover with an invitation to “Make Special Effects in Your Basement.” Inside, the title page brazenly declares: “Who needs ILM? Completely digital movies will be made by lone ranger cinemagicians like Scott Billups. Welcome to Basementwood.” As for the article itself, much is made of the fact that Billups performed the duties of producer, director, cinematographer, virtual set designer, computer animator, and digital editor and compositor for his low-budget special effects extravaganza, Pterodactyl Woman of Beverly Hills.

     

    Like articles in other publications that cover special effects and effects-based productions–Cinefex, American Cinematographer, Computer Graphics World–this article contains the usual product reviews. Billups reviews in some detail available graphics platforms (“[p]ound for pound, dollar for dollar, the new 150-Mhz PCIs render at least two times faster than comparable SGIs” (204)) and software packages (ASDG’s Elastic Reality Morphing package gets the thumbs up). Notably, he evaluates these products in terms of affordability and/or user-friendliness. It matters less that the cost of these tools still puts them beyond the reach of the majority of would-be home producers–or that attaining the level of knowledge and proficiency needed to use them may entail long periods of trial and error (not to mention expensive training)–than that their advertised accessibility makes them available as objects for consumer fantasies of home production.

     

    Wired binds the logic of image production to technological consumption through fantasies of home-production. In the magazine’s advertising, special effects frequently figure as metonyms for spectacular image production. Nowhere is the appeal of producing special effects illustrated more clearly than in a long-running advertisement for the Kingston Technology Corporation. The ad, which first appeared in December 1995, features a sepia-tinted photograph of a woman hysterically pulling at her hair. Her hairdo and clothes are circa 1950. The text box beneath the image reads: “You’re creating special effects for the next blockbuster, so why are you using B-movie memory?” (97). In the decision to spectacularize the subject of production (represented as the hysterical, and notably feminine, image-maker), over either the object of production (special effects) or the advertised product (Kingston memory), the ad draws attention to the arbitrary relation between image and product–to the fact that it appeals less to the desirability of the product itself than to the fantasy of spectacular image production.

     

    Undeniably, this fantasy is both consumerist and utopian. Just as clearly, the language and iconography used in much of the advertising and artwork in Wired is at best ambiguously gendered and at worst smugly masculinist. On these grounds alone, more criticism of the magazine should be welcome. Nevertheless, some of Wired’s critics may have moved too quickly to dismiss consumers’ fantasies of home production as unworthy of critical attention. Behind this dismissal lies the assumption that these fantasies only mask the extent to which consumers of new multimedia technologies don’t actually produce anything with them–or at least, nothing worthwhile. But it may just be that it is still too early to tell what effects the utopian fantasies surrounding these technologies will have on the image-making futures being dreamed about in basements, bedrooms, and home studios right now. It may also be too early to determine the extent to which fantasies of home production either facilitate or impede individuals’ abilities to conceptualize collective forms of cultural production. Cultural critics must continue to investigate how these fantasies play out in relation to other cultural activities, other sites of consumption and interactivity, if they wish to find out how the concept of “do-it-yourself” figures in them.

     

    Digital Expressionism

     

    When histories of computer generated imagery in Hollywood science fiction cinema speculate about aesthetic parameters, they almost always describe a quest for simulation.13 There are, however, other ways of understanding this history–ways that do not regard the aesthetic project governing the production of CGI as one that always, or necessarily, values photorealism over visual novelty and experimentation. Where computer generated special effects are concerned, the relation between CGI and simulation is not simply isomorphic.

     

    In “From Abstraction To Simulation: Notes on the History of Computer Imaging,” Andy Darley argues that early interest in the aesthetic possibilities of computer art displayed a modernist preoccupation with visual abstraction and novelty (43-46). In the 1960s and ’70s, artists like John Whitney, Stan Vanderbeek, and Lillian Schwartz produced a number of abstract films using computer graphics. Whitney’s Matrix III (1972) and Arabesque (1975) were concerned, for instance, with the formal arrangement and movement of light, line, and color. But in the history of CGI that Darley later maps out in these “Notes,” any interest in pushing the aesthetic possibilities of computer art in new directions has all but disappeared by the 1970s. By then, he argues, this project had been overtaken by research into “the formidable copying or simulational power of computers”–a project which (unlike “art”) would repay the high levels of capital invested in it by corporate and state-funded R&D bodies with lucrative commercial applications (49). Wrested from the hands of artists, the history of computer generated imaging becomes, at this point, a quest for simulation: or, rather, a drive to produce computer generated images that are indistinguishable from photographs.

     

    But the end-of-art was not yet nigh. In the 1970s, computer animation became the site of renewed interest in research centers like Bell Laboratories, MIT, and the University of Utah. Many of the computer animation techniques that were developed during this period–techniques for achieving motion blur, texture mapping, computer-controlled rotoscoping–were, in fact, designed to facilitate the development of commercial applications for computer simulation such as flight simulation, scientific and medical visualization, and computer-aided-design. However, a number of artists maintained their interest in experimental computer animation. William Moritz is an historian of computer animation and author of a brief history of experimental computer animation included as part of an on-line festival of experimental works produced by Christine Panushka and sponsored by Absolut Vodka (Absolut Panushka). In Moritz’s telling of this story, abstract animation continued to flourish in the 1970s in films produced by artists like Robert Breer and Jules Engel (who also worked on Disney’s Fantasia).

     

    Moritz wants to make the history of experimental animation a history of films which, as he says, have been made by artists who have tried “to make something personal, exploring techniques to find exactly the right look to express it–something new, fresh, imaginative, dealing with significant subject matter, made independently and often single-handedly.” For him, this means excluding cartoons and animated films produced by major studios, as well as short works produced by animators working in the field of computer generated special effects. However, it is impossible to keep these intersecting fields entirely separate. The animation program founded at the California Institute of the Arts by Jules Engel in 1969 not only fostered a number of independent filmmakers, but also provided a training ground for animators who would later continue their work in the Hollywood film industry. Graduates of Cal Arts include people like Tim Burton, Henry Selick, and John Lasseter. But a history of computer animation interested in further teasing out the institutional contexts of experimental research in computer animation would also, of course, include someone like Pixar’s founder, Ed Catmull, a graduate of the University of Utah whose research also led to the development of commercial rendering software (Renderman) while at Lucasfilm.

     

    It could be argued that there have always been continuities, as well as discontinuities, between the kind of computer generated imagery produced for feature film production and the kind of imagery produced by animators working outside of the industry. Interestingly, Moritz himself chose Ed Emshwiller’s Sunstone (1978) as “one of the classic computer graphics images.” Ermshwiller’s luminous, pulsating “happy face” is, indeed, an iconic computer generated image. But a term like “photorealistic” doesn’t describe it any better than it describes any number of other “classic” computer generated images, either those produced as experimental animation, or those produced as special effects for science fiction cinema.

     

    Techno-futurism

     

    Much of the computer generated imagery that found popularity with audiences in the early-to-mid-1990s represents the refinement, not of a realist aesthetic that takes the cinematographic image as its point of reference, but of a hyperreal electronic aesthetic that takes the cinematographic image as its point of departure. For all its ability to produce stunningly plausible objects–solid, textured, light-refracting bodies–computer generated special effects during this period also showed a marked preference for imagery displaying the kind of visual properties that can only be achieved in the hyperreal electronic realm of computer generation. Too bright and shiny by far, the hyper-chrominance and supra-luminosity characteristic of CGI effects in this period imbued the digital artifact with a special visual significance. This significance was augmented by a style of arts-and-effects direction that, by bracketing the computer generated object off from the temporal and narrative flow of the action, offered it to the contemplative gaze of cinema audiences.

     

    In their creation of this imagery, directors, effects designers, and computer animators were also, of course, responding to the knowledge that by the early 1990s, familiarity with new media technologies had altered cinema audiences’ perceptions of the sort of effects that could be achieved with computer generated imagery. This point was illustrated by “lone cinemagician” Scott Billups. Reflecting on the expectations of a generation of moviegoers raised on computer and video games for special effects imagery, Billups suggests that one of the things they want is “high chrominance,” which, as he says, “is not a film attribute: [t]here are colors you can get in the electronic realm that you just can’t get on film” (Parisi 204).

     

    While morphing is now a familiar special effects technique–having been used in countless television commercials, music videos, television programs, and Hollywood films–it might be remembered that it too has been a defining feature of many CGI effects. Morphing is a technique that transforms one image into another by stretching each image sequence and then cross-dissolving between the two distorted images. It endows computer generated and optically-photographed images alike with a hyperreal elasticity. Although the effect is achieved electronically, morphing is also used to create the kinds of visual puns that were so finely honed by traditional cel animation artists for cartoons. Even though the technique has been demonstrated many times over, morphs are still used to create subtle (and not so subtle) visual jokes that, again, draw attention to the synthetic properties of this imagery.

     

    In the introduction to Future Visions, Hayward and Wollen use the term “techno-futurism” to describe the rationale behind the production and marketing of new media and communications technologies (3). Techno-futurism, they argue, works as a classic ideological paradigm: always representing new technologies as an improvement on older ones. But the term techno-futurism might also be re-deployed to describe an aesthetics of CGI effects in Hollywood science fiction cinema which is specifically electronic. For it is the electronic properties of this imagery–as much as the technological wonders that this imagery ostensibly represents–which have come to be figured in popular discourses on computer generated special effects as the very sign of a future in which technology figures as a force to be reckoned with.

     

    Techno-futurism, then, describes an aesthetics which is at once inclined towards simulation and mimesis–and a decidedly synthetic, visibly more plastic, mode of visualisation. Pulled, on the one hand, towards photorealism and, on the other, towards a synthetic hyperrealism, the computer generated imagery in the Hollywood science fiction films of the first half of this decade exhibits an aesthetic that plays across these two poles. And more than anything else, it is this electronic reconfiguring of the cinematographic image which gives key CGI effects in these films their special reflexivity. The drive for simulation–long acknowledged, within the industry, to be something of a digital mantra in the field of CGI effects production–describes but one half of this aesthetic project.

     

    Art-Effects

     

    Wired differs from other publications that regularly report on the special effects industry in being neither a magazine specifically produced for industry professionals (like Cinefex, American Cinematographer, Computer Graphics World), nor a magazine primarily addressed to fans, buffs, and aficionados of the cinematic digital domain (like Cinefantastique, Starlog, Sci-Fi Universe, SFX). But it shares with both types of publications a specifically aesthetic interest in computer generated special effects.

     

    Many of the computer generated images featured in Wired exhibit the recombinant, hyperreal aesthetic characteristic of some of the 3-D imagery being created in this new medium by artists like “demon animator” Steve Speer (“Speer’s Head”) and Australian computer animator and multimedia artist Troy Innocent. In reviewing Innocent’s artwork for PsyVision–a fifty-minute music video made in collaboration with the Australian techno-music label Psy-Harmonics, Darren Tofts describes it as “uncompromisingly synthetic.” The imaginary spaces created for PsyVision’s eleven sections are represented in Tofts’ review as explorations of the limits and possibilities of computer animation. Each section draws “on a succession of symbolic forms and visual dynamisms, ranging from fractal geometries, kaleidoscopic pulses and textural ‘soft spaces’ to fantastic landscapes, info-overload collages and liquid architectures” (31). Some of the images that have been reproduced for the pages of World Art magazine have been taken from Innocent’s interactive database, Idea-ON>!. Innocent’s “rigorous donut” and glistening “iconbods” playfully rework the rod-and-cone candy look of much of the CGI that appears, for instance, in television advertising.

     

    In Wired, an article focusing on the graphical possibilities currently being explored in new on-line environments like “Graphical MUDs”–virtual worlds where animated avatars interact with each other and their environments–comes accompanied by three double-pages of spectacular, and somewhat satirical, visual interpretations of the synthetic inhabitants of these new electronic worlds (“Metaworlds”). Representing the work of three different artists–Steve Speer, Lynda Nye, and Michael Crumpton–this imagery shares with Innocent’s artwork an exploration of the synthetic visual effects that can be achieved in the hyperreal electronic realm of computer generation.

     

    Some of the best examples of imagery featuring the hyperreal, synthetic properties, and visual punning, idiomatic of the work of these contemporary artists, can be found in the TBWA Chiat/Day Absolut Vodka campaign which until 1996 ran on the back cover of Wired. (It has since been replaced by a campaign for Stolichnaya Vodka.) Andy Warhol kicked off the Absolut Vodka campaign in 1985 with his rendition of the absolut vodka bottle (reproduced on the back of Wired October, 1994). Since then, the campaign has featured, and advertised, the work of many painters, sculptors, jewellers, fashion designers, and photographers. Much of the artwork featured at the back of Wired was exclusively “produced by and for” the magazine. Covers by Steve Speer (“Absolut Speer”) and the computer graphics designers and artists at Troon Ltd. (“Absolut Kelly”), exhibit a playful aesthetic that combines an abstract expressionist’s exploration of the technical and aesthetic possibilities of this new synthetic medium with the pop artist’s retro-visionist eye for re-figuration.

     

    On the printed page, these glistening images lack the luminosity and hyper-chrominance they would have in an electronic format like video or CD-ROM. A video signal is comprised of luminance (brightness), chrominance (color, including saturation and hue), and sync (alignment). While all colored signals have both luminance and chrominance, black and white signals lack chrominance. Artists working in the digital realm have looked to exploit the specifically electronic properties of this new medium. At present, however, the printed page still reproduces a more lustrous, higher resolution image than most on-line delivery systems, which tend to deliver grainy, pixelated images that in most instances still take some time to download. The computer generated imagery that glosses the pages of Wired magazine are visually more spectacular than anything that Hotwired–the magazine’s on-line counterpart–has to offer. By comparison, Hotwired’s clunky frames, day-glo wallpaper and occasional animated graphics offer a computer graphics environment lacking in visual effects.

     

    The creation of three-dimensional computer generated imagery is a labor-intensive enterprise which, in addition to involving the long periods of gestation, conceptualization, and experimentation that are familiar to artists working in any medium, also involves long spans of rendering time. As one might expect, rendering time increases exponentially in the case of animated images. Other considerations of application and technique aside, computer generated imagery does not lend itself particularly well to the make-do, fly-by-night ethos of monthly magazine production. This is one reason computer generated images are actually so scarce in Wired. Sprinkled across a design space where collage and photomontage–not even détournement–still define the graphical style of the magazine, these images are designed and placed to arrest the gaze of the magazine browser like so many special effects.

     

    By treating the computer generated special effects produced by computer animators and artists working in the special effects industry as aesthetic objects, by featuring this work alongside the work of other artists working in digital media, and by showcasing the computer generated imagery produced by and for the magazine and its advertisers, Wired blurs the distinctions between special effects and art, commerce and art, and art and advertising–disinctions that critical commentaries on the history of computer generated imagery have so far held apart. No critical consensus has yet emerged to account for the cultural and political valences of this blurring. But rather than interpreting this development as a sign of the end of art, this essay has sought to examine some of the contexts in which CGI has emerged as the site of populist fanasies of home-image production. In Wired, appeals to these fantasies are invariably underwritten by a consumerist imperative to keep up with the very latest in computer imaging technologies.14 However, these appeals are just as regularly staged around special effects. For, more than any other entertainment application for CGI, science fiction cinema has treated the computer generated image as an aesthetic object. Although it is unclear what aesthetic and/or editorial directions Wired will take under its new owners–Condé Nast–it seems certain that the magazine will continue to map contemporary technoculture’s fascination with the computer generated image.

     

    Notes

     

    Thanks to Paulina Borsook for answering my email all the way back in August 1996. We need her, I think, to remain skeptical. Thanks also to the reviewers of an earlier version of this article.

     

    1. For more on the economic state of the special effects industry see Kris Goodfellow, “Mayday! Mayday! We’re leaking Visuals!: A Shakeout of the Special Effects Houses,” New York Times 29 September 1997.

     

    2. For an account of this argument see Herbert I. Schiller, “Media, Technology, and the Market: The Interacting Dynamic.” Schiller argues that although no one factor explains the development of the special effects industry, one contributing stimulus stands out: “the intensifying effort to maintain and extend personal consumption and to develop it abroad” (37).

     

    3. See Philip Hayward, “Situating Cyberspace: The Popularization of Virtual Reality,” in Hayward and Wollen, Future Visions (130).

     

    4. After John Thornton Caldwell, “journalisimo” refers to a mode of discourse characterized by an “excessive style.” See his Televisuality: Style, Crisis, and Authority in American Telivision (360).

     

    5. See Paulina Borsook, “The Memoirs of a Token: An Aging Berkeley Feminist Examines Wired,” in Wired Women.

     

    6. This review is part of a special report titled “Do We Really Want To Be Wired?” It is Scott Bukatman, of course, who coined the term “cyberdrool” in Terminal Identity: The Virtual Subject in Postmodern Science Fiction (189).

     

    7. Dery attributes this quote to Wired’s creative director, John Plunkett, and his collaborator and partner, Barbara Kuhr.

     

    8. For an interview with Carson focusing on Ray Gun’s critical reception see Tom Eslinger and Brian Smith, “American Typo,” World Art.

     

    9. See Dery, “Turn On, Boot Up, Jack In: Cyberdelia”, in Escape Velocity (41). Also see Sandy Stone, The War of Desire and Technology at the Close of the Mechanical Age. According to Stone, these early fringe communities were decidedly counter-cultural in their choice of lifestyle. However, she also points out that the communities of programmers that settled in the hillsides surrounding San Lorenzo Valley only superficially resembled the neighbouring hippies “whose grubby, marginal, and financially precarious lifestyle was not a thin cover over graduate-level degrees and awesome technical proficiencies” (106). She adds that “the depth of this gulf” seems also to have been “oddly invisible to the technofreaks” who, on the whole, preferred to regard their hippy neighbors as fellow-travellers (106). Stone describes the “technosocial context” in which these programmers lived and worked as “a milieu dense and diverse, wild and woolly, a bit crazed in places, and shot through with elements of spirituality and cultural messianism” (108). Her brief cultural history of one of these communities–the ill-fated CommuniTree Group–is the story of how an unprotected and unstructured conference environment was eventually brought down by a small band of teenage hackers who were able to exploit the vulnerability of a system that made itself available to all-comers. The next wave of designers were forced to reckon with the trade-off between the maintenance of social order and their desire to see this equilibrium achieved through the principles of organic regulation and freedom of expression. Suffice it to say that subsequent on-line conferences were considerably more regulated environments.

     

    10. See Wark, page 68. In referring to Mondo 2000 as Wired’s “sister” publication, I do not mean to suggest that this gendering of the magazine is in any way unambiguous. I have used it to mark an ongoing engagement with Scott Bukatman’s analysis of the way the two magazines negotiate gender (both visually and discursively). See his “Mondo Babes & Wired Boys,” Educom Review, available at http://educom.edu/web/pubs/review/reviewArticles/30622.html.

     

    11. Wark writes: “Now that the means of domination, the commodity form, the spectacular image form, have become one and proliferated such that they are obvious to everyone, we choose not to refuse them, but say yes! yes! yes! with deliberate abandon” (“Cyberhype” 69).

     

    12. What Wark actually says is that “[t]he means of domination are not only obvious to all, they are within the reach of the credit cards of, well, not all, but a great number of the ever expanding info hacking class, who make their living driving the economy forward on ever expanding waves of cyberhype” (69).

     

    13. For a wide cross-section of such histories, see Steven R. Holtzman, Paul Virilio, Lev Manovich in Timothy Druckrey, and the catalogue essays accompanying the exhibition in Photography after Photography, eds. Hubertus v. Amelunxen et al.

     

    14. See Simon Penny, “Consumer Culture and the Technological Imperative: The Artist in Dataspace,” in Critical Issues in Electronic Media, 47-73. In this essay, Penny explores “the position of the artist who uses technological tools, with respect to the larger [i.e., economic] formations of technologically mediated culture” (48).

    Works Cited

     

    • Amelunxen, Hubertus v., Stefan Iglhaut and Florian Rötzer, eds. Photography After Photography: Memory and Representation in the Digital Age. Amsterdam: G+B Arts, 1996.
    • Borsook, Paulina. “The Memoirs of a Token: An Aging Berkeley Feminist Examines Wired.” Wired_Women: Gender and New Realities in Cyberspace. Eds. Lynn Cherney and Elizabeth Reba Weise. Seattle: Seal Press, 1996. 24-41.
    • Bukatman, Scott. Terminal Identity: The Virtual Subject in Postmodern Science Fiction. Durham and London: Duke UP, 1993.
    • —. “The Artifical Infinite: On Special Effects and the Sublime.” Visual Display: Culture Beyond Appearances. Seattle: Bay Press, 1995. 255-289.
    • —. “Mondo Babes & Wired Boys,” Educom Review. On-line. Internet. Available: http://www.educom.edu/web/pubs/review/reviewArticles/30622.htm
    • Caldwell, John Thornton. Televisuality: Style, Crisis, and Authority in American Television. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers UP, 1995.
    • Daly, James, ed. “Hollywood 2.0 Special Report: the people who are reinventing entertainment.” Wired November 1997: 200-215.
    • Darley, Andy. “From Abstraction To Simulation: Notes on the History of Computer Imaging.” Culture, Technology & Creativity in the Late Twentieth Century. Ed. Philip Hayward. London, Paris, Rome: John Libbey, 1992. 39-64.
    • Dery, Mark. Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century. London: Hodder & Stroughton, 1996.
    • —. “Wired Unplugged.” On-line. Internet. Available: http://www.t0.or.at/dery/wired.htm”
    • Edwards, Gavin. “Speer’s Head.” Wired April 1997: 136-139, 182-184. Also available on-line. Internet. http://www.wired.com/wired/5.04/speer/ff_spear.html
    • Eslinger, Tom and Brian Smith. “American Typo,” World Art 1 (1995): 72-77.
    • Goodfellow, Kris. “Mayday! Mayday! We’re leaking Visuals!: A Shakeout of the Special Effects Houses.” New York Times 29 September 1997: C5, C8.
    • Hayward, Philip and Tana Wollen, eds. Introduction. Future Visions: New Technologies of the Screen. London: BFI, 1993. 1-9.
    • Holtzman, Steven R. Digital Mantras: The Languages of Abstract and Virtual Worlds. Cambridge, Mass. and London: The MIT Press, 1994.
    • Innocent, Troy. PsyVision. Psy-Harmonics: Melbourne, 1996.
    • —. Idea-ON>!. CD-ROM. place of pub: publisher 1992-4.
    • Kelly, Kevin and Paula Parisi. “Beyond Star Wars.” Wired February 1997: 160-166, 210-217.
    • Landon, Brooks. The Aesthetics of Ambivalence: Re-Thinking Science Fiction Film in the Age of Electronic (Re)production. Westport, Conn. and London: Greenwood Press, 1992.
    • Manovich, Lev. “The Automation of Sight: From Photography to Computer Vision.” Electronic Culture: Technology and Visual Representation. Ed. Timothy Druckrey. New York and London: Aperture Foundation Inc., 1996. 229-239.
    • Moritz, William. “A Brief History of Experimental Animation.” Absolut Panushka: n. pag. On-line. Internet. http://www.absolutvodka.com/panushka/history/bill/index.html
    • —. “In the Abstract.” Absolut Panushka: n. page. On-line. Internet. http://www.absolutvodka.com/panushka/history/storys/1970/ abstract/index.html
    • Parisi, Paula. “Cameron Angle.” Wired April 1996: 130-135, 175-179.
    • —. “The New Hollywood: Silicon Stars.” Wired December 1995: 142-145, 202-210.
    • —. “Shot by an Outlaw,” Wired September 1996: 136-141, 200-206.
    • Penny, Simon. “Consumer Culture and the Technological Imperative: The Artist in Dataspace.” Critical Issues in Electronic Media. Ed. Simon Penny. New York: SUNY Press, 1995. 47-74.
    • Quinn, Michelle. “Beyond The Valley of The Morphs.” Wired January 1993. Also available on-line. Internet. http://www.wired.com/wired/1.1/features/morphs .html
    • Rossney, Robert. “Metaworlds.” Wired June 1996: 140-146, 202-212.
    • Rothman, Matt. “Digital Deal.” Wired March 1993. Also available on-line. Internet. http://www.wired.com/wired/1.3/features/digital.deal.html.
    • Schiller, Herbert I. “Media, Technology, and the Market: The Interacting Dynamic.” Culture on the Brink: Ideologies of Technology. Ed. Gretchen Bender and Timothy Druckrey. Seattle: Bay Press, 1994.
    • Snider, Burr. “The Toy Story Story.” Wired December 1995: 146-150, 212-216
    • Sobchack, Vivian. “Postfuturism.” Screening Space: The American Science Fiction Film. New York: Ungar, 1987.
    • Stone, Allucquére, Rosanne. The War of Desire and Technology at the Close of the Mechanical Age. Cambridge, Mass. and London: The MIT Press, 1995.
    • Tofts, Darren. “Troy Story.” World Art 12 (1997): 28-33.
    • Virilio, Paul. the vision machine. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana UP, 1994.
    • Wark, McKenzie. “Cyberhype,” World Art (Inaugural U.S. Edition) November 1994: 64-69.
    • White, Keith. “The Killer App: Wired Magazine, Voice of the Corporate Revolution.” Voyager. On-line. Internet. Available: http://www.base.com/gordoni/thoughts/wired/revolution.html.

     

  • Ekphrasis, Escape, and Thomas Pynchon’s The Crying of Lot 49

    Stefan Mattessich

    Literature Board
    University of California, Santa Cruz
    hamglik@sirius.com

     

     

    Remedios Varo, “Bordando el Manto Terrestre,” 1961. Reprinted by permission.1

     

    Always follow the rhizome by rupture; lengthen, prolong, and relay the line of flight; make it vary, until you have produced the most abstract and tortuous of lines....
    --Deleuze and Guattari, A Thousand Plateaus (11)

     

    Near the beginning of The Crying of Lot 49, Oedipa Maas recalls a trip to Mexico City with the recently deceased real estate mogul Pierce Inverarity, and in particular an art exhibition she saw there by the Spanish surrealist Remedios Varo. The text, in a moment of ekphrastic digression, describes one painting in detail:

     

    [I]n the central painting of a triptych, titled "Bordando el Manto Terrestre," were a number of frail girls with heart-shaped faces, huge eyes, spun-gold hair, prisoners in the top room of a circular tower, embroidering a kind of tapestry which spilled out the slit windows and into a void, seeking hopelessly to fill the void: for all the other buildings and creatures, all the waves, ships and forests of the earth were contained in this tapestry, and the tapestry was the world. (20-1)

     

    This room in Varo’s tower assumes for Oedipa the fatal and enigmatic attraction of a destiny from which there is no escape, a point of departure and arrival that exposes the illusion of movement between a here and a there, between life “among the pines and salt fogs of Kinneret” (20), California, and the imagined or imaginative freedom of Mexico. Time as both a causal sequence and a signifying chain suffers its catastrophic involution, turns in on itself, immobilizes or suspends the presumption of an animate nature, a substantial self and an autonomous desire. The experience precipitates in Oedipa an immediate paranoia:

     

    Oedipa, perverse, had stood in front of the painting and cried.... She had looked down at her feet and known, then, because of a painting, that what she stood on had only been woven together a couple thousand miles away in her own tower, was only by accident known as Mexico, and so Pierce had taken her away from nothing, there'd been no escape. What did she so desire escape from? Such a captive maiden, having plenty of time to think, soon realizes that her tower, its height and architecture, are like her ego only incidental: that what really keeps her where she is is magic, anonymous and malignant, visited on her from outside and for no reason at all. (21)

     

    If Oedipa’s tower is “only incidental,” however, it is also omnipresent–that is, she finds it everywhere. It is a human condition, the human condition as incidental, as nonessential subordination, remainder, residue or “W.A.S.T.E,” that spectral communication system which Oedipa comes to encounter as a kind of destiny in the novel. Pynchon’s metaphors here signify that displacement or paratactic placement beside or to one side of one’s self that characterizes the feeling of subjection to a fundamentally irrational externality. Oedipa is an incident person, a projection, a kind of hologram whose point of origin, that which “keeps her where she is,” suggests a terrifying complicity between “anonymous” gravitational force and “malignant” social power, between ineluctable physical law and fantasmatic structures actively vitiating (to borrow a Marxian locution) the social field in which self-recognition (as a subject, as a citizen) is possible.2 Oedipa’s imprisonment in the tower, at least on one level of implication, cannot be understood apart from this reified estrangement from a labor that quite literally comes to figure the alien object of paranoid investment, and which the paranoid subject can only reconsummate in a continual fabrication of that external world which “keeps her” in her place. To be “incidental” is therefore to experience alienation in the form of a fantasm installed at the center of being, a fantasm that destabilizes any clear sense of the human or the real. The novel specifies this experience a little later on in the figure of Metzger, who relates to Oedipa his dual career as an actor-lawyer in the following terms:

     

    "But our beauty lies," explained Metzger, "in this extended capacity for convolution. A lawyer in a courtroom, in front of any jury, becomes an actor, right? Raymond Burr is an actor, impersonating a lawyer, who in front of a jury becomes an actor. Me, I'm a former actor who became a lawyer. They've done the pilot film of a TV series, in fact, based loosely on my career, starring my friend Manny Di Presso, a one-time lawyer who quit his firm to become an actor. Who in this pilot plays me, an actor become a lawyer reverting periodically to being an actor. The film is in an air-conditioned vault at one of the Hollywood studios, light can't fatigue it, it can be repeated endlessly." (33)

     

    With this permutative logic, Pynchon weaves a profound textual likeness of life in a differential world of signs, images, filmic doubles, digitized desires, a world effectively transformed into a simulacrum, suspended or orbitalized in the etherous medium of an endless replicability and without any footing in a secured ground. If Oedipa is one of the women in Varo’s tower “embroidering the mantle of the earth,” her peculiar capacity or labor power is limited by this spectrality, transformed into an empty repetition not capable of transcending its own determination from without and so condemned to wallow in a postmodern America generated as if by “magic.” Of course it is not actually generated by magic but, as the text implies, by Oedipa herself in her tower, and the virtuality that Oedipa represents rests upon a simultaneous abstraction from and reduction to material forms of existence that are no less real for the unreality in which they are lived. This is why Oedipa is essentially a machine, a kind of information-processing computer that organizes or links together the elements of the textual world through which “she” seeks answers to the mystery of the Tristero and the underground postal system W.A.S.T.E, much in the same way that Maxwell’s Demon “sorts” molecules and “connects the world of thermodynamics to the world of information flow” (106) for another character in the novel, John Nefastis. In or around Oedipa, that is, the terrifying conspiracy of physis and techne manifests itself, deploys its secret as secret, as the blank and impervious surface of an impossible matter, a matter that does not mean even as it conditions the possibility for signification itself. Submission to gravity, to entropy, to a repetition “automatic as the body itself” (120), to a sign that is pure or unmotivated, constitutes the “destiny” that Oedipa sees figured in Varo’s tower, a destiny so total in its extension that no escape is possible, indeed the desire for escape only apotheosizes the law it seeks to transgress by perfecting the illusion of freedom that supports it.

     

    In their seminal and enigmatic work, Anti-Oedipus, Deleuze and Guattari make a distinction between “technical machines” that are defined extrinsically in terms of their functional use-value or in proportion to how well they work, and “desiring machines” that work only by “continually breaking down” (31). This latter type of machine denotes a structure or system founded upon the internalization of its own difference, an intrinsic boundary or an invaginated contour that makes it no more like a technical machine than it is unlike one. A desiring machine can only oppose its own determination, and this is why it always malfunctions, this is why its fundamental reflex is masochistic, this is why its proper mode is catastrophic or singular, always tending toward its own disappearance. Pynchon’s preoccupation in The Crying of Lot 49 with the process of entropy closely parallels this malfunctioning modality of desiring machines, and suggests a fundamental structural principle of the novel. Oedipa’s attempt at escape through her search for the Tristero (a figure, finally, for the possibility of freedom) enacts a kind of cancer in the body of meaning itself; her “quest” multiplies possible senses of the Tristero and erodes any single truth it might contain. But the “endless, convoluted incest” (14) of repetitious waste generated by the novel cannot be read as a simple neutralization of desire. If this were the case, then The Crying of Lot 49 would only be a technical machine to which the reader/worker is subjected, and not a broken machine that works by metabolizing itself, by becoming a residual supplement within an underground economy of WASTE. The interpretive stakes could not be higher here: one can only read the novel as enacting at the level of expression what it constructs at the level of content by modifying the relation between desire and the machine, by acknowledging an investment of desire in the machine so extreme as to displace the distinction between them (and the category of the human which this distinction supports).

     

    This much needs to be said against any “liberal” interpretation of the novel which would confer upon Oedipa the attribute of freedom or spontaneity, the election of a subjectivity which needs only to overcome the accident of its dehumanization in a late capitalist society: “she” never ceases being that machine, never escapes the quotation marks that underscore “her” intrinsic virtuality, “her” constructed and supplemental nature, “her” status not as character but as caricature. The solidity and force of the paranoid moment in Pynchon’s novel is such that it never yields to reason, to community, or to political effectivity. Quite categorically, I would say, no alternative to social repression as it is analyzed in The Crying of Lot 49 can be thought outside that moment of paranoid apprehension. In a sense the novel itself is woven inside Varo’s tower, a proposition which suggests in turn that Varo’s tower stands in metonymically for the entire text, its description of the painting taking on a function of ekphrasis with respect to its own artistic production. If this is so, and if it is not enough simply to assert a thoroughgoing pessimism (or full-blown paranoia) which the novel does no more than sustain, then the stake of freedom (personal or political) that it raises will be found as well in that ekphrasis, encrypted in the painting which figures that peculiar destiny of making a world or constructing the ground upon which a world can be formed, weaving as well a “mantle” in the sense of a covering, an enveloping skin, that cortical interface between inside and outside that is the place of form or the limit where forms appear, where the “coral-like” genesis of structure occurs.3

     

    Toward the Tower

     

    “Embroidering the Earth’s Mantle” forms the central panel of an autobiographical triptych, and though Pynchon mentions this fact he never expands the allusion or explicitly elaborates on the contextualization it suggests.4 The triptych lies dormant in the text not so much in a mode of figurative connotation as of simple displaced absence, buried there in a kind of ghostly obliquity to its signifying systems. It functions as a supplement without necessity to the text, as the negative space of a reference that needs no other support than itself, but which nonetheless conjures a double dimension, an unconscious of that unconscious formed by the act of reference and accessible only through an intertextual (and cross-generic) digression from the novel proper. What one finds in this double unconscious, in this “other” dimension of reference, is a set of parallel themes centered on the possibility of escape. The first panel, entitled “Toward the Tower,”

     

    Remedios Varo, “Toward the Tower,”
    1961. Reprinted by permission.

     

    introduces the “frail girls with heart-shaped faces, huge eyes, [and] spun-gold hair” of Pynchon’s description emerging from a building of narrow gables set against an umber-colored sky (the same as that identified by Pynchon in the second panel as a “void”). The visual effect of the gables suggests a honeycomb, a fragment of latticework, or more generally a process of algorithmic or polymeric duplication that recurs again in the faces of the young girls, who appear not as individuals but as replicas of each other, a group of identically dressed figures with identically spellbound expressions. Varo’s interest in the triptych is clearly with an automaton-like sameness: the “replicant” girls leave a “replicant” building in a movement toward the tower and the compulsion it represents continually to remake their own oppression. But since the gables also strongly suggest a plurality of towers as the girls’ point of origin, this movement is qualified by an implication of tautology, of a certain motion in place further indicated by the fact that all the girls are riding bicycles, and so evoke in the very act of “cycling” a static immobility.

     

    This condition of arrested or static motion seems universal in the first two panels and clearly expresses the girls’ lack of freedom, their subordination to sinister overseers (the man carrying a bag full of crows, the woman in a nun’s habit, the man in the tower holding an open book over an hourglass-shaped container from which the filaments of thread used by the girls to embroider the earth’s mantle are taken), and their palpable alienation in the work they perform. Conjoined with the visual motif of repetition, then, is a focus on forced labor, on an activity of production or creation subsumed under a requirement of regimentation and panoptic management, of an almost bureaucratic routine extending even into the bodies and minds of the producers. But if the story Varo tells here is about the artist constrained by a uniform and mechanical production, what she means by artistic (or productive) freedom cannot be understood in terms of a simple opposition to that constraint.

     

    The theme of escape is introduced in the first panel by a small detail: one of the girls does not look straight ahead as the others do, but glances to her left out of the painting and back at the viewer in a scarcely perceptible deviation from an almost catatonic norm. This deviation is significant for its very slightness, the fact that it manifests itself in a mode of diminution or subtle variation, not as a constituted difference from the rote repetitiousness of work, but as a difference in repetition or repetition with a difference that becomes the essentially tautological movement of an emancipatory desire. In this light, Varo’s triptych cannot be interpreted solely as a representation of an unfree dissimulation or doubleness characteristic of that political economy of the sign that obtains in modern societies, but rather as inherently dissimulatory and double, inherently catatonic, invested in its own (machinic) repetitiousness as the ground for any escape it might make possible.

     

    To put this another way, escape for Varo will be art as production and as thing produced, as the making of the triptych and as the triptych itself; it will be this glance out of the world of the painting that makes the painting itself worldly or material, only its materiality will consist in elements of simulation or fantasy, in virtual or “as-if” effects that are never “vitiated” even when they become double in their self-conscious apprehension as the necessary conditions for achieving artistic freedom. The triptych dramatizes art as escape, then, only by raising a further question about the nature of fantasy and the simulacral, or only by disrupting the semiotic claim to signify a “real” world which can be felt in meaning itself, in the attribution of truth to a particular event, situation or identity (even when that identity is as an “artist”). It is this complicity between signification and the real, between truth and self-identity or self-presence, that the triptych disrupts in its surreal emphasis upon the girls as replicated or several. If this disruption indeed lets its effects be felt in the paintings, then it leads to a quite different reading of that multiplicity: not only does it reflect their alienated relation to the means of production, but it also expresses an almost schizophrenic subjectivity lived in the ambiguous shifting between “she” and “they.” The girls are all the same girl, that is, they exist only in terms of each other. They constitute holograms repeating the whole in each part, making each part or fragment a totality as such, a complete part or complete incompletion enclosing a process and a result, a processive result, a product that changes or that indexes in itself a motion predicated upon the immobilizing passage within its own object-nature or objectification. The triptych, then, profoundly treats the artist-producer’s relation to a reified and alienated socius not from a place of non-perspectival privilege, but from within the socius’s own deepest tendencies, and this inclusiveness informs a production bearing on the world itself, producing not just particular things, external differences or even simulacra seen as self-contained within a horizon of realistic expectation, but the real as a simulacrum or as the exposure of its own boundary, its own fundamental constructedness.

     

    For this perhaps “convoluted” reading to be persuasive, then, the possibility of escape held out by Varo will have to pass through the world made by the artist-producer or within the woven mantle which serves both as the world’s ground (in its function as an interior layer of the earth) and as its peripheral limit (in its function as a covering or skin). The central panel of the triptych rejoins the thematic of minimal variation or

     

    Detail from
    “Embroidering Earth’s
    Mantle.”

     

    difference in repetition by once again skewing the eyes of the girl farthest to the left of the tower. Her expression, more cunning than her predecessor’s, here registers a consciousness of her overseer and the impassive suppression of guilt. What has she done? In what Varo herself, commenting on the triptych, describes as the girl’s “trick,”5 one fold of the mantle flowing out from the slit window just underneath her station discloses two tiny upside-down figures within the enlacing branches of bare trees, “woven” literally and figuratively together in an attitude of embrace. These two eminently textual and textural lovers become the central figures of the third panel, entitled appropriately enough “The Escape,” which shows them standing in a vehicle of indeterminate type (it resembles in inverted form the umbrella-like rudder controlled by the woman, but also suggests in its hairy texture some kind of vegetal or animal matter) as it conveys them upwards toward mountain peaks and a clearing sky of yellow light.6This line of

     

    Remedios Varo, “The Escape,”
    1961. Reprinted by permission.

     

    flight drawn through the three paintings does not go by way of a simple transcendence any more than it indicates a “real” freedom from a simulacral labor, from repetition or from fantasy. It delineates what Deleuze would call an “abstract line” generated at the point where the tension between form and matter, figure and ground, surface and depth, center and periphery collapses and gives way to a generalized non-distinction, to a formal, figural or structural difference that is internal to itself and so not determinable in an empirical sense.7 For the girl who makes her escape, for the artist who makes her escape, and for the triptych that constitutes their collective escape, this internal difference undermines the self-identity of escape, opens it/her/them to an otherness or to a world from which no escape is possible except through this opening, this singular experience in being, in art, in structure, in meaning, of a fundamental alterity and displacement rendering what is “real” virtual in its essence.8

     

    To account for Varo’s triptych in its molecular details (its repetitions, its multiplicities, its automata, its production of the real or of the ground of the real, its peculiar escape) requires a different understanding of what constitutes being, such that it no longer conditions a simple opposition between a living present and a simulacral or spectral logic.9 It requires that one do without this opposition and grasp the singularity of the “real” in its impossible possibility, as a form of expression that does not signify or presuppose the Saussurean structure of the sign.10 Instead of counterposing to a “transcendent” signifier (whose relation to its signifieds can only be one of dominance) an empirical or imaginary content, Varo’s triptych suggests what Deleuze and Guattari call a “collective assemblage of enunciation” subsuming within its form variables or “flows” of a semiotic, material and social kind no one of which is privileged over the other and no one of which is intelligible in isolation. The “subject” in general becomes this collective assemblage producing a world (in speech, in acts, in art, in writing) that does not differ from that production (i.e., of the world in which “you” appear), or rather from a production of production itself which appears only in a “free” indirect discourse without agency or authorship.11 The “outside,” according to Deleuze and Guattari, “has no image, no signification, no subjectivity” (A Thousand Plateaus 23), only this machinic co-implication or lived displacement in discourse, only this mode of radical becoming which is “imperceptible” precisely in its perceptibility, disappearing in the act of its appearance. This catastrophic ontology (or this catastrophe for ontology) serves as a clear subtext for Varo’s triptych insofar as it relates the making of a world to a virtual contour or intensive trait, and insofar as it implies in its multiplicities an inclusive relation to the world which one becomes. “Becoming everybody/everything (tout le monde),” write Deleuze and Guattari, “is to world (faire monde), to make a world (faire un monde). By process of elimination, one is no longer anything more than an abstract line, or a piece in a puzzle that is itself abstract” (A Thousand Plateaus 280). To make a world is therefore to make the world become, to make it the movement of a free difference or a nun that is always other than itself, but that also is this otherness in its positivity, apart from a negative economy of lack or of the “transcendent” signifier (distributing its effects of meaning from on high, by virtue of its detachment from the signifying chain).

     

    To posit movement in this way, however, also implies a certain immobilization or stasis which Varo’s triptych could be said to thematize in the vehicular nature of the escape it constructs. It implies a formal movement akin to what Deleuze and Guattari call nomadism. “The nomad,” they write, “is…he who does not move,” or rather, “the nomad moves, but while seated, and he is only seated while moving…. Immobility and speed, catatonia and rush, a ‘stationary’ process, station as process–these traits…are eminently those of the nomad” (A Thousand Plateaus 381). Such an arrested movement also expresses a discursive time: the time of a writing that is flush with the real, a writing that materially writes, a writing that writes the real in a book as an “assemblage with the outside” rather than as a representation or “image of the world.”12 The dynamics of Varo’s triptych–tautological or stationary movement, the girl at her station weaving (writing) a mantle or a flow that is the earth–raise as a central issue the relation between art and the world, in particular as it is focalized in the book held up by the man in the tower. This book, it can be inferred, functions as a kind of instructional manual or plan for the process of embroidering the earth’s mantle, and the man appears in this light not simply as a manager or foreman but as a priest interpreting the book by whose representations the world will be formed. The condition of oppression from which the girl desires to escape is coded in terms of a specific model of discourse, a mimesis of the book or labor according to bookish rules which the paintings attempt to disrupt. That this disruption assumes a “nomadic” form, and that its stake is nothing less than a production of the real, indicates not a freedom from the world of the book but the latter’s transformation, its rewriting in terms that include the outside as an internal difference or in its textual/textural singularity.

     

    At stake, in other words, is not a real or living present opposable to representation any more than it is a representation opposed to the present, but an art or a book in whose temporal dimension a “becoming everybody/everything” is played out.13 As a result, the first index of any escape afforded by the book as an assemblage will be its indistinguishability from its condition of servitude, its relative success in passing through the world without distinction, repeating but not simply reproducing the separateness of the individual in his or her essence, in an identity which can only experience itself against an existential ground which is not different from it.14 The nature of escape for Varo (and for Pynchon, as I will shortly argue) hinges upon this desubjectification of art, of the book. It manifests itself not in a detachment from a simulacral labor, or from a “postmodern” human condition, but in a complicity that registers an experience of non-distinction or nomadic spatiality, an in-different freedom in difference itself, an almost masochistic incorporation or encryption of the world that constitutes a refusing desire in the face of social repression.

     

    Oedipa’s Night Journey: Repetition, Language and Desire

     

    This kind of theoretical insight informs a quite different reading of The Crying of Lot 49 than that which starts from a condition of alienation which Oedipa attempts to overcome (even if she does not succeed and even if it is only the reader who experiences “escape” in the form of a catharsis). The novel must first be situated within this logic of the assemblage, of an internal difference, of the displaced opposition between the living present and the simulacral, of a discursive time disclosing in its dimension the abstract lines or intensive traits of a drama about making worlds or about the production of the real. Only in this light can the investments of the novel in its own convolutions, impenetrable enigmas and simulacral effects be seen for the peculiar desire and freedom they evoke. The point, the moral resonance, of Oedipa’s story consists not in a particular content, not in moments of recognition that lay bare (or fail to lay bare) the simulacra that separate her from a genuine relation to her world, but in its parodies of that recognition, its fabulating ironies which always impede communication or ambiguate meanings, its continual reflux back toward its own textuality in a movement itself expressive of the only “human” condition that can be shared in the novel.

     

    This, then, is the central premise I would like to substantiate for The Crying of Lot 49: that the basis for any escape from Oedipa’s tower, for any freedom from the malignancy of social power in a postmodern America, or for any redemption of public space or political agency implied in the novel, is precisely the latter’s refusal to mean, its self-objectification or textual reflexivity as a book that attempts to write the postmodern world in a non-opposable language. Such a refusal governs the ambivalent tension which quite literally holds Pynchon’s words in place, a tension with which one reads statements like this one by Dr. Hilarius, the renegade psychoanalyst turned psycho whom Oedipa had hoped would “talk [her] out of [the] fantasy” of the Tristero. His advice:

     

    "Cherish it!... What else do any of you have? Hold it tightly by its little tentacle, don't let the Freudians coax it away or the pharmacists poison it out of you. Whatever it is, hold it dear, for when you lose it you go over by that much to the others. You begin to cease to be." (138)

     

    Dr. Hilarius can hardly be a less reliable voice in the novel than he is at this point (barricaded in his house, shooting at bystanders, hinting at his sinister role as a psychiatric intern in Nazi death camps), but at the same time his admonition cannot simply be dismissed as yet another symptom of alienation and escapism. The novel acknowledges the power of his contention that fantasy is necessary for being by encasing it in a fantasm of its own, and by deliberately modulating its tone into a farcical register. The value Dr. Hilarius places on fantasy becomes for Oedipa another clue that, far from simplifying her situation or clarifying its mystery, only compounds the problem, knots her deeper into the mystery, and further exacerbates the paralysis which she feels slowly overtaking her (“trapped,” as the text will put it, “at the centre of some intricate crystal” [92]). This means that fantasy works to retard signification in a double sense: as a symptom but also as a breakdown of the symptom, as Pynchon’s diagnosis of postmodern America and as the refusal of diagnosis itself, or of the objectivity claimed by the diagnostician. The subtext of Dr. Hilarius’s insanity is thus this erosion of truth-claims made by the master (analyst or doctor, author or critic) presumed to know, and at the level of expression no less than at the level of content. This is why the text so emphatically highlights its own absurdity: for not only does it represent the absurdity of its culture, it also enacts that absurdity from within. The novel is Dr. Hilarius in this passage, reacting in the modes of violent scandal recapitulated by a tabloid and TV-dominated society (the form would be: “man suddenly goes crazy, arms himself with guns, massacres innocent people, film at 11”) to the alienation that society provokes.

     

    In other words, the novel, in reacting to its own alienation, also compounds it in the same fantasmatic or virtual gesture by which it cogently indicates its escape. The function of paranoia in the novel (Hilarius’s, Oedipa’s, or Pynchon’s) is to ground this double valence in an immanent relation to the world it describes. The text renders its own paranoia schizophrenic, encases it in an inclusive structure of multiple determination and centrifugal effects. This plural dynamic of becoming the world (or, like Mucho Maas on LSD, “a whole roomful of people”) entails not that the schizoid text oppose its own totalizing paranoid moment, but that it take on the external or exclusive difference that denies its own inclusiveness, that it therefore deny itself, submit itself to the “rising” ground of a figure that can only be masochistic and singular, that can only be groundless, turning in an abyssal space of unmotivated signs or paraleptic meanings. This figure is exemplified in The Crying of Lot 49 by the Tristero, or even more concretely by the post horn, insofar as it flashes its signs in a displaced and elliptical phenomenality. What it signifies is a world experienced in a state of displacement that Pynchon in Gravity’s Rainbow will call “preterition,” a “passed over” or dynamically repressed modality of being predicated on an unconscious that belongs to consciousness or that knows no difference between them. This modality exemplifies what Deleuze calls a “second power of consciousness” raised in the act of a repetition which implies “not a second time but the infinite which belongs to a single time, the eternity which belongs to an instant, the unconscious which belongs to consciousness, the ‘nth’ power” (Difference and Repetition 8).15 The preterite tense is “bygone,” archaic, a reference to a dead past, but it is what Oedipa becomes when she “pursu[es] strange words in Jacobean texts” (104), for instance, or when she yields to an aestheticizing hermeneutic desire in her search for the Tristero. She brings the dead to life, as it were, to a “life-death” that is inherently simulacral or textual, a textual mode of living. Deleuze’s work on a repetition of singular or unrepeatable things turns the concept in on itself, makes it intensive, sediments the moment of repetition with “levels” at which the “whole” of time is repeated not successively but “at once” (Difference and Repetition 83) or simultaneously. The “unconscious” is not “below” but “lifted” into the surface, “belonging to consciousness” in the same way that time “inheres” in the moment of repetition (the model for this present moment is a diachronic cone tapering into a synchronic virtual point). The post horn scrawled on latrine walls, doodled on Yoyodyne stationery, inset on rings, printed on stamps, recycled in dreams, graffiteed in a San Francisco bus or tattooed on a sailor’s hand expresses a structure of clandestine communication which is nonetheless omnipresent, everywhere inscribed in the “malignant, deliberate replication” (124) of post horn symbols that dissimulate an underground that may or may not exist, that indeed may be itself dissembling or apocryphal. The post horn is then dissimulation as such, appearance as a weave of ambiguous signs which does not stand over and against the real, but in which the real appears or becomes legible as a text.

     

    There is nothing outside the text in The Crying of Lot 49, and no place in it from which to guarantee an immunity from its mediations or its fantasms. But at the same time that the real is textual, the textual is also real, it “signifies” a condition that every character in the novel shares. They are all triste, all “wretched” and “depraved” (the etymology is given in these terms on page 102), all expressed in the system of simulacra known as the Tristero, so that what Oedipa (and the novel she structures) seeks is finally her (its) own implication in the underground that may not exist, in the world that she (it) projects and that claims her (it) precisely in its uncertainty. The object of this textual desire focalized in Oedipa is Oedipa herself (the novel itself) in her (its) otherness or non-self-identity; it is therefore strangely anoedipal in nature, grasped in its approach to a limit where meanings and bodies break down, where words and things lose the stability of their difference and begin to flow together.16 Pynchon quite literally writes this flow in the long hallucinogenic episode of Oedipa’s night journey through San Francisco, which in the following excerpt becomes a musical “score.”

     

    At some indefinite passage in night's sonorous score, it... came to her that she would be safe, that something, perhaps only her linearly fading drunkenness, would protect her. The city was hers, as, made up and sleeked so with the customary words and images (cosmopolitan, culture, cable cars) it had not been before: she had safe-passage tonight to its far blood's branchings, be they capillaries too small for more than peering into, or vessels mashed together in shameless municipal hickeys, out on the skin for all but the tourists to see. (117-8)

     

    The city described here belongs to Oedipa, it is “hers,” her city, the city ofOedipa, and the consequent sense of “safe-passage” she feels at large in it conditions its transformation into a vast organism, a living thing “made up” of “words and images,” a text-body that is strangely abstract, without affect or impersonal, breathing and pumping blood yet chimerical, a virtual city woven out of repetitious symbols as empty and unreal as Oedipa herself (or the novel itself). The text goes on:

     

    Nothing of the night's could touch her; nothing did. The repetition of [post horn] symbols was to be enough, without trauma as well perhaps to attenuate it or even jar it altogether loose from her memory. She was meant to remember. She faced that possibility as she might the toy street from a high balcony, roller-coaster ride, feeding-time among the beasts in a zoo--any death-wish that can be consummated by some minimum gesture. She touched the edge of its voluptuous field, knowing it would be lovely beyond dreams simply to submit to it; that not gravity's pull, laws of ballistics, feral ravening, promised more delight. (118)

     

    Oedipa’s fugue-like passage within the text-city or within the text-body of herself as city begins with a lack of “touch,” of the skin’s or the hand’s abstraction from the sensuous capacities that indicate an animate nature. The city and Oedipa in it become an inanimate “repetition of symbols” that is not “traumatic,” that is posed not as the extinction of desire but as the ground for a pleasure that is indifferent yet “lovely beyond dreams.” In this way Pynchon describes the allure of an interpretive labor that, as an end in itself, is also immaculate, a pulchritudo vaga that seals Oedipa in an almost psychotic hermeticism. If Oedipa “means” an ability to remember or recognize, then that very ability finds itself assumed into the peculiar lightness of her world, transformed into “toy streets” she sees from the detachment of a “high balcony,” or with the conditioned appetite of animals in a zoo. Oedipa’s desire is caught in “roller coaster” cycles of a culture geared to incite and satisfy a “death-wish” in its subjects, to direct desire toward objects that empty its “consummation” of any substance. To “submit” to the destiny of a remembering that nonetheless cannot remember, or that is infinitely attenuated, implies a movement as or more ineluctable than gravity, an orbitalized desire that immobilizes not only Oedipa but the novel with its own repetition of symbols and its own fascination with the Tristero.

     

    So there is no escape from that repetition, and indeed for Oedipa and for The Crying of Lot 49 it will have “to be enough.” What follows from this is that one must understand the nature and function of repetition more clearly. What the post horns repeat, what Oedipa repeats, what the text repeats, is the empty form desire takes in contemporary culture. But as this repetition approaches the relative limit of a death-wish that must always reconstitute itself (to want again), Pynchon’s text discloses what could be called an absolute or asignifying limit at which grammatic and semantic structure loses its edge or begins to blur. A zero degree can be felt in the language in the same way that the executrix Oedipa, upon first encountering Inverarity’s complex legacy, notices a “sense of buffering, insulation,… an absence of intensity, as if watching a movie just perceptibly out of focus, that the projectionist had refused to fix” (20). The Crying of Lot 49 is also just perceptibly out of focus, slightly approximate in its diction, a feature which can be glimpsed in the above-quoted passage’s occasionally lapsed article or ambiguously deployed pronoun. Language begins to erode its own sense or substantive content as it plays out its submission to the “voluptuous field” of its repetitions, and in the process the text becomes a travesty of its own truth-claims, the warp and woof of potentially empty meanings or of an impenetrably parodic “matter” that always obtains or never changes insofar as it is the static condition for change itself, a textual hyle that bears its determination inside itself, or that appears in an in-differentiated form.

     

    Like Oedipa, then, the novel presents a curious detachment and levity (implied even in her name) that complicates the desire it dramatizes in the Oedipal search for a signifier that is not “transcendent” so much as triste, depraved, low, looked for in undergrounds or in depths that are flat, brought to the surface of a transparent consciousness “meant to remember” the secrets with which it is coextensive. This immanent reading of the object (i.e., language itself, iterative, abstract but isomorphic with the real) taken by desire in the novel suggests even as an imperative that one read escape or freedom from Oedipa’s tower not in contradiction with an alienated socius, but as that socius encased within a form of expression that (re)doubles its alienation, citing or incorporating its orbitalized effects until they metabolize, become residual or excremental signs in an economy of WASTE. Language (or writing) is strung through the body in the process of becoming the alternative or “shadow” system that Oedipa witnesses only in an exacerbated degradation on the streets of San Francisco:

     

    So it went. Oedipa played the voyeur and listener. Among her other encounters were a facially-deformed welder, who cherished his ugliness; a child roaming the night who missed the death before birth as certain outcasts do the dear lulling blankness of the community; a Negro woman with an intricately-marbled scar along the baby-fat of one cheek who kept going through rituals of miscarriage each for a different reason, dedicated not to continuity but to some kind of interregnum; an aging night-watchman, nibbling at a bar of Ivory Soap, who had trained his virtuouso stomach to accept also lotions, air-fresheners, fabrics, tobaccoes and waxes in a hopeless attempt to assimilate it all, all the promise, productivity, betrayal, ulcers, before it was too late; and even another voyeur, who hung outside one of the city's still-lighted windows, searching for who knew what specific image. (123)

     

    In this series of encounters, Oedipa looks and listens for her own belonging to the system of WASTE it implies–not its reality or real support for which she cannot find adequate assurances (but which is really there behind the appearances), but the perverse or denatured “interregnum” that it constitutes for time itself, the discontinuous space or gap in structure that renders it paratactic, displaced in its place, double, spectral or self-parodic. Oedipa takes her place within this series precisely by displacing herself, by loving the repetition of symbols, by desiring texts, and by failing to find any unmediated connection in a common ground or shared public space. What she seeks is not this common ground but the secret of disconnection that nonetheless communicates, the broken machine that links only by unlinking, that posits as the basis for community a reversal of communal values or the “assimilation” of an outside that is absolute and originary. In this light, the welder who “cherishes” his ugliness, the child who “misses” a “death before birth,” the Negro woman “dedicated” to “rituals of miscarriage,” the night-watchman swallowing commodities, and the two voyeurs looking for their “specific images” together indicate a desire not simply trapped in passive cycles of consumption, but actively seeking to undo the structure of repression in which it is caught, indeed from which it is not different. Laid over the “death-wish” implicit in each “species of withdrawal” (123) Pynchon enumerates in Oedipa’s Walpurgisnacht is another theory of the death drive, another kind of repetition compulsion than that which presumes a material model of return to inanimate states.17 Repetition in the above passage abrogates the natural and human functions of sociality, reproduction and digestion; it marks in the text-body a refusal or breakdown of its own organic constitution. But it accomplishes this refusal not through a process of externalization so much as by incorporating, like the night-watchman, the products of a world that reduces desire to its most material (and empty) form. Desire for the inanimate (or as the inanimate) in Pynchon’s novel (and in all his work) has to be seen in this double light to contract two death instincts, two repetitions, two limits, for only in this doubleness can the desire of the text appear in its excessive expenditures, in its masochistic transgressions of its own realism and truth.

     

    Oedipa’s and the novel’s desire is double: it repeats itself, it repeats itself repeating, it repeats repetition. This nomadic movement in place designates the central ekphrastic dynamic of the text, the precise way it feels itself into the world of forever deferred revelation it describes. Freedom from Oedipa’s tower occurs only through this movement, never against it, never in reaction to it, for to do so would be to destroy the implicate and broken structure of the novel which is its critique of contemporary America. Repetition for its own sake, repetition as an end in itself, repetition at the surface of the text in all its slightness, all its insubstantiality, but also all its brutality, expresses a force at the heart of desire that seeks an end to desire itself (understood as captured within a logic of consumption), a neutral or displaceable energy that verges on a digitized automaticity. This is one way to read the “great digital computer” through which Oedipa walks at the novel’s end, sorting Oedipa’s world into ones and zeros:

     

    For it was now like walking among matrices of a great digital computer, the zeros and ones twinned above, hanging like balanced mobiles right and left, ahead, thick, maybe endless. Behind the hieroglyphic streets there would either be a transcendent meaning, or only the earth.... Either Oedipa in the orbiting ecstasy of a true paranoia, or a real Tristero. For there either was some Tristero beyond the appearance of the legacy America, or there was just America and if there was just America then it seemed the only way she could continue, and manage to be relevant to it, was as an alien, unfurrowed, assumed full circle into some paranoia. (181-2)

     

    Oedipa’s conundrum presumes here a digitization at the level of expression, so that the indecision she suffers between “transcendent meanings” and “just America” does not entail a choice between the world as computer or the world as human or public space. The binary choice she faces, in other words, is not between paranoia and something else, since paranoia already figures the ground or frame for choice itself, for any formulation of agency one might attach to her example. The machinic nature of the human precedes any determination of its spontaneity and freedom, and this is why Oedipa’s desire for escape cannot be thought outside or in reaction to her encasement in a machine of generalized communication. On the contrary, this encasement must be seen as the condition for that desire and in two senses: as the cause of her alienation and as the medium for her escape, as the stimulus for an escape from the nexus of power relations that constitutes social repression and an escape in that nexus, within the structures of power from which she is not different. The possibility of freedom held out by the novel hinges on the precise function of this preposition in,or rather on the co-implicate or coincident structure exemplified by the novel itself where it achieves its peculiar effect of orbitalized meanings.

     

    The Crying of Lot 49 does not choose one or the other of the possibilities confronted by Oedipa at the “crying of lot 49”; it chooses the impasse as such, it presents the tautological circle of that double bind as the vehicle for its escape and the condition for any coherent activity of dissent. This elliptical and repetitious textual ambivalence signals a desire that includes the world and that refuses its own exemption or election in it, a preterite desire that takes the world as its object in all its “promise, productivity, betrayal.” By weaving or inscribing in its very texture the empty form of a “wasteful” signification, the novel discloses the incorporating, encrypting link between desire and a masochism that governs the underground or unconscious of the Tristero. This masochistic desire in turn links Oedipa to her world and makes her one of those outsiders who communicate via W.A.S.T.E. The impingement of non-meaning in the text therefore assumes a new insistence or urgency in the allegiance it suggests to an experience which is residual, left over, or paratactically displaced, an experience in which experience itself becomes indeterminate or unlocatable.

     

    To grasp the linkages, the empathic connections, the asymptotic convergences, the calculus of simultaneity that can be observed in Pynchon’s novel is then to center analysis on its disjunctive nature, to underscore the lack of “touch” upon which it everywhere insists as the condition for any “coming together.” It is also to resist recuperative readings that define desire (Oedipa’s and the text’s) as a search for meaning, for identity, or for the recovery of a dispossessed communal space. Oedipa is not a “heroine” in this sense, not the locus of a potential agency capable of wresting her culture from its postmodern catastrophe.18 Or rather, she is this heroine in a parody, and one can only emphasize the heroic aspect of her character in the context of its parodic quotation, for otherwise one misses the very political point about the nature of dispossessed communities and the bonds (bindings, Bindungen) on which they are based. If The Crying of Lot 49 can be said to contribute in its emphasis upon escape to the theorization of political freedom or of a genuinely public space in America today, it does so by giving us a glimpse of what a rhizomatic “experience” might look like. I do not imply by this that Pynchon has embedded in his text some “real” content which the reader might salvage and claim as its political message, but neither do I mean to occlude the “real” behind the signifier, or confer upon language the monolithic character of a metalanguage. Pynchon’s novel is an attempt to write the displacement of the difference between the real and the simulacral, and as such to imagine the world that follows from that displacement both in its vitiating effects and in its desiring modes. The politics of the novel consists in its formal displacement of that difference, for only with it does the “community” of “people” who “communicate” through WASTE come into being.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Each of the four Remedios Varo images in this article is reproduced by permission of Artists Rights Society (ARS). These images are protected by copyright law. The following are prohibited by law: (1) Any theatrical, televised, or public display or performance, including transmission of any Image over a network, excepting a local area network; (2) The preparation of any derivative work, including the whole or in part, of any Images without the permission of ARS.

     

    2. Vitiation describes for Marx the inverse relation under capitalism between the worker and his labor power (expressed both in the product and in the activity of production). “The alienation of the worker in his product means not only that his labor becomes an object, assumes an external existence, but that it exists independently, outside himself, and alien to him, and that it stands opposed to him as an autonomous power. The life which he has given to the object sets itself against him as an alien and hostile force” (134). To the alienation of the thing is added the alienation of the worker from himself or from his “species life” conceived as his implicate relation to the “inorganic” world. Ideally, “[t]he object of labor is… the objectification of man’s species life; for he no longer reproduces himself merely intellectually, as in consciousness, but actively and in a real sense, and he sees his own reflection in a world which he has constructed” (140). Work within a capitalist order, however, “vitiates” this self-reflection in the constructed world by taking away the worker’s species life, his real objectivity as a species-being, his produced and producing relation to an inorganic body, to his “belonging” within an inclusive and interdependent nature.

     

    3. The problem of coral reef formation confronted by biologists up to Charles Darwin centered on the fact that corals, in Darwin’s terms, “require for their growth a solid foundation within a few fathoms of the surface” of the sea (Coral Reefs 128). Since the likelihood of geologic foundations as uniformly present at or near the ocean’s surface as the global distribution of reefs would indicate is scant, Darwin proposed a correlation between reef growth and a rising sea level, arguing that coral grows at a limited depth, dies as the sea rises, and so provides its own foundation. This coral-like production of the foundation at the surface is suggestive for the kind of structure I am interested in here, which supposes a non-distinction between ground and figure, inside and outside, as its basis. Deleuze refers this figure internal to its own ground to the concept of “difference in itself,” a difference grasped not as a displacement in space (i.e., external or extensive in nature), but intensively and inclusively, opening the figure up to an intensive field of variable and differential relations which serves as an abyssal ground isomorphic to its own limit (Difference and Repetition 21-2). Deleuze and Guattari’s work on acentered or rhizomatic systems not defined “by a set of points and positions, with binary relations between the points and bi-univocal relations between the positions” (A Thousand Plateaus 21), rests upon the concept of an intensive field that renders a system simultaneous with each of its parts, multi-levelled or multi-dimensional, and expressed in the singular movement of an absolute or “free” difference.

     

    4. See Kaplan, Unexpected Journeys (20-3), for an account of the triptych in relation to Varo’s life as an artist.

     

    5. This is quoted in the book Remedios Varo by Octavio Paz; cited in Kaplan (21).

     

    6. This vehicle is one of many fascinating machines that recur in Varo’s work, and that conspicuously offer a means of conveyance which leaves its passengers in a state of suspension (they are often standing or sitting as they move, float or hover through a painting), and sometimes they even include towers or (usually circular) domiciles in their construction.

     

    7. I am attempting here an economic formulation of Kant’s paradox of internal sense, inflected through Deleuze’s reading of difference in itself. For him, difference as such can be understood as a form differentiated from a ground that does not in turn differentiate itself from the form, with the result that the ground “rises” to the surface and “dissolves” the form’s empirical and symbolic content, rendering it empty. Difference is no longer grasped “between” two things in a classificatory manner, but in the “autonomous existence” of the rising ground that comprehends its own limit (Difference and Repetition 21-2). With this displacement, forms (whether of matters, substances, subjects or objects, of meanings in the broadest sense) assume a certain concrete abstraction or intensive nature apprehensible only as that internal difference which articulates into the structure of being an originary otherness or alterity. An “abstract line” (referred to by Deleuze in conjunction with a brief discussion of Odilon Redon, whose work intersects Varo’s in thematic as well as technical ways) would be the contour of this singular form or of the intensive trait which it becomes once it is no longer opposable to other forms. The object so defined, whether it be of thought, of desire, or of labor–the materiality of things in themselves–assumes a virtual or subtle being which Deleuze and Guattari conceptualize in terms of differential forces, intensive fields and bodies without organs.

     

    8. Varo evokes this singular experience or “abstract line” through techniques, first innovated by Surrealist artists like Max Ernst and Varo’s friend Oscar Dominguez, of decalcomania, which entails blowing and blotting paint on the canvas in such a way that color intensifies and contours assume an ambiguous definition (Kaplan 122). This effect is prominent in the texture of yellow, foliage-like fog on which the lovers rise in “The Escape.”

     

    9. Derrida writes in Specters of Marx that a political being or political event (his example is the fall of the Soviet Union in 1989) cannot be understood today “as long as one relies on the simple (ideal, mechanical, or dialectical) opposition of the real presence of the real present or the living present to its ghostly simulacrum, the opposition of the effective or actual to the non-effective, inactual, which is also to say, as long as one relies on a general temporality or an historical temporality made of the successive linking of presents identical to themselves…” (70). For Derrida in this text, ontology can no longer be thought in adequately historicized terms as referring to determined contents, but must be grasped in a self-reflexive temporal and discursive dimension that he links to ghosts, specters, the work of mourning, etc.

     

    10. Deleuze and Guattari’s polemic against the signifier’s “arbitrary” and biunivocal relation to its signifieds rests upon their contention that the (Saussurean) sign cements an idealist system of representation. They identify two “dimensions” in the work of Saussure: “one horizontal, where the signified is reduced to the value of coexisting minimal terms into which the signifier decomposes; the other vertical, where the signifier is elevated to the concept corresponding to the acoustic image–that is, to the voice, taken in its maximum extension, which recomposes the signifier” (emphasis mine) (Anti-Oedipus 207). In the grid formed by the two axes of value and concept, “the signifier appears twice, once in the chain of elements in relation to which the signified is always a signifier for another signifier, and a second time in the detached object on which the whole chain depends, and that spreads over the chain the effects of signification.” This “detached object” gaurantees the meanings it organizes in virtue of its absence from the signifying chain, and so introduces a second order sign, a “sign of the sign” that can be grasped only in terms of an idealist or metalinguistic domination. It is in this sense that Deleuze and Guattari speak of the signifier as “transcendent,” a usage I am following here.

     

    11. In Deleuze and Guattari’s words, “The social character of enunciation is intrinsically founded only if one succeeds in demonstrating how enunciation in itself implies collective assemblages. It then become clear that the statement is individuated, and enunciation subjectified, only to the extent that an impersonal collective assemblage requires it and determines it to be so. It is for this reason that indirect discourse, especially ‘free’ indirect discourse, is of exemplary value; there are no clear, distinctive contours; what comes first is not an insertion of variously individuated statements, or an interlocking of different subjects of enunciation, but a collective assemblage resulting in the determination of relative subjectification proceedings, or assignations of individuality and their shifting distributions within discourse. Indirect discourse is not explained by the distinction between subjects; rather, it is the assemblage, as it freely appears in this discourse, that explains all the voices present within a single voice…” (A Thousand Plateaus 80). This formulation of an enunciative “assemblage” resonates in The Crying of Lot 49 with Mucho Maas’s LSD-inspired “spectrum” (or immanent plane of movement) on which being becomes a matter of multiplicities (or “whole roomfuls of people” [143]). More formally, it works itself out in the novel’s intertextual excesses, exemplified by Oedipa’s reading excursions through “The Courier’s Tragedy,” the text’s propensity for breaking out into parodic song, or its punning word-play around, for instance, names like “Oedipa Maas,” “Dr. Hilarius,” “Mike Fallopian,” “Pierce Inverarity,” etc.

     

    12. The difference between the book and the assemblage-as-book is analagous to that more celebrated difference between arborescent and rhizomatic systems. For Deleuze and Guattari, “The first type of book is the root-book: the tree is already the image of the world, or the root the image of the world-tree. This is the classical book, as noble, as signifying and subjective organic interiority….” (5). The “fascicular root” proceeds, by contrast, to “abort” the “principal root” and graft onto it an “indefinite multiplicity of secondary roots” that grow rhizomorphically, and support a “modern” text that is asignifying, asubjective, and anorganic (5).

     

    13. For Deleuze and Guattari, this process entails a “transparency” in the world that makes being a matter of passing or impersonation. “Animal elegance, the camouflage fish, the clandestine: this fish is crisscrossed by abstract lines that resemble nothing, that do not even follow its organic divisions; but thus disorganized, disarticulated, it worlds with the lines of a rock, sand, and plants, becoming imperceptible” (280).

     

    14. This is a restatement in other terms of the Deleuzian paradox of a rising ground. A subject experiences the uniqueness of its “essence” only in terms of an existence that is that essence, or only in the empty form of an indifferent existence which invades the autonomy of the “I” and articulates it through time. This point is made forcefully by Jean-Luc Nancy in The Experience of Freedom. Man’s egocentrism, Nancy maintains, entails a “concentration in itself” of being and a setting apart of the subject’s essence in what Hegel calls “a hatred of existence” (14). This unfreedom or “evil,” however, is the “first discernible positivity”of freedom and can only be understood in a co-implicate or “masochistic” relation that renders the “experience” of freedom singular or imperceptible, not a constituted difference, attribute or mode but an internal difference calling forth a particular kind of deconstructive apprehension. Experience for Nancy, indeed, needs to be defined in its “nomadic” singularity or imperceptibility, not in extension but intensively and according to a differential logic (145).

     

    15. Pynchon uses the word preterition in its Puritan sense to refer to the “damned” as opposed to the elect members of a community (204 and passim). Like the “wretched” of the Tristero, the preterite characters of Gravity’s Rainbow are living repression at an elliptical surface, strangely flush with the real from which they are displaced. Preterition for Pynchon is analogous, I think, to repetition for Deleuze, since both concepts bear on the past, on history as contemporaneous with the present in a discursive temporal dimension.

     

    16. Deleuze writes in Difference and Repetition of a reflux of libido upon the self in narcissism which suggests for Freud the formation of a “desexualized, neutral and displaceable energy” (112). Deleuze isolates in this energy a function of emptying subjectivity, of hollowing out the space of the self, of rendering its body virtual. What this energy precipitates in its immateriality is what Deleuze and Guattari call the “pure continuity that any one sort of matter ideally possesses” (Anti-Oedipus 36) or the “unformed, unorganized, nonstratified or destratified body and all its flows: subatomic and submolecular particles, pure intensities, prevital and prephysical free singularities” (A Thousand Plateaus 43). The underlying idea here is similar to an infinite substance in Spinoza’s sense, matter as intensive rather than extensive, differential rather than substantial. My own use of this idea emphasizes the relation of this “empty” desire to language and textuality, echoing a Derridean formulation of a heterological drive or “force” of “disappropriation” (The Postcard 352) that cannot be defined (as self-identical or present to itself) and that therefore manifests itself in an always interpretive textual mode. See Derrida’s analysis of Beyond the Pleasure Principle in “To Speculate–on ‘Freud’” in The Postcard.

     

    17. Deleuze’s reading of Freud in Difference and Repetition and Masochism focuses on the nature of the death instinct. For Deleuze, “Death does not appear in the objective model of an indifferent matter to which the living would ‘return’; it is present in the living in the form of a subjective and differential experience endowed with its prototype. It is not a material state; on the contrary, having renounced all matter, it corresponds to a pure form: the empty form of time” (Difference and Repetition 113). This death instinct is also linked by Deleuze to the desexualized energy discussed in footnote 15.

     

    18. See Peter Euben’s analysis of The Crying of Lot 49 in The Tragedy of Political Theory for an example of the recuperative reading I have in mind. Euben compares Oedipa’s story to Oedipus’s “search for meaning and identity” (284) and claims for her a power of mediation between opposites (male and female, difference and sameness, low and high cultures, “exile” and “incest”) which signify the two limit-cases between which a political identity and community can be founded. She functions as a kind of Hermes-like messenger and so as a figure for analogy itself, for the linking or structural principle of an alternative social and political system symbolized by the Tristero. But for Oedipa to be the “founding mother who can save America” (303), for her to be the linchpin of an alternative social, political, sexual and psychological structure not undone by the simulacra of contemporary society, she must be “real,” just as the Tristero and the WASTEful system it signifies must be a “genuine society of communicants in which real information is exchanged and real diversity sustained” (303). That is, the kind of alternative system Euben has in mind cannot tolerate the ambivalence that nonetheless marks the novel throughout and expresses its economy of waste (which is precisely suspended between the real and the unreal, between fact and fiction, between presence and spectrality). As a result, the only way he can locate political agency in the text is by negating the very implicated structure I have been attempting to analyze here–and therefore cancelling, in the name of a political freedom, the very possibility of freedom held out by the novel.

    Works Cited

     

    • Bataille, Georges. The Accursed Share: Volume 1. Trans. R. Hurley. New York: Zone Books, 1988.
    • Darwin, Charles. The Structure and Distribution of Coral Reefs. New York: D. Appleton and Company, 1889.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Difference and Repetition. Trans. P. Patton. New York: Columbia UP, 1994.
    • Deleuze, G. and F. Guattari. Anti-Oedipus. Trans. R. Hurley, M. Seem, H. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • —. A Thousand Plateaus. Trans. B. Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Derrida, Jacques. The Postcard. Trans. A. Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • —. The Specters of Marx. Trans. P. Kamuf. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Euben, Peter. The Tragedy of Political Theory. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1990.
    • Kaplan, Janet. Unexpected Journeys: the Art and Life of Remedios Varo. New York: Abbeville Press, 1988.
    • Marx, Karl. “Alienated Labor.” The Portable Marx. Ed. E. Kamenka. New York: Penguin, 1983.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Experience of Freedom. Trans. Bridget McDonald. Stanford UP: Stanford, 1993.
    • Pynchon, Thomas. The Crying of Lot 49. New York: Perennial Fiction, 1966.
    • —. Gravity’s Rainbow. New York: Penguin Books, 1973.

     

  • Sylvia Plath, Emmanuel Levinas, and the Aesthetics of Pathos

    Scott DeShong

    Department of English
    Quinebaug Valley Community-Technical College
    spdes@conncoll.edu

     

    In the following essay, I will read certain poems by Sylvia Plath to demonstrate a way of reading that derives from the ethics of Emmanuel Levinas. According to Levinas, ethics requires one to face others in such a way that the incommensurable weight of the other’s lived existence is primary: the affective dimension of the other is primary to discernible contours or articulable characteristics of the other. This basic move–to apprehension prior to comprehension of the other–provides a new basis for philosophy, Levinas says, as ethics becomes first philosophy, prior even to ontology. To put Levinas’s move in the language of literary criticism and rhetoric, pathos (apprehension of feeling) comes prior to ethos (judgment of character) in a reader’s or audience’s apprehension of alterity. With this connection, I imply an aesthetic aspect to Levinas’s ethics, while at the same time I suggest that the way of reading I will demonstrate has an ethical dimension. But I do not claim that my reading involves an approach to the good. Indeed, insofar as it involves ethics, my essay deals with the difficulty of being ethical.

     

    Considering Levinas’s focus on the affect of the other as an aesthetic move provides a way of handling a key problem that various critics have found in his work: a genuine move to the affective ruptures any determination of the move as ethical. To say this involves recognizing ethics as philosophical discourse, metaphysically centered on the objective of what is defined to be good. Levinas is correct in showing that the affect of the other must be the primary emphasis of ethics, for without it ethics remains an abstract totality; it follows that his emphasis on affect deconstructs ethics. But in retaining the word “ethics,” Levinas obscures the deconstruction. Focusing on a desire to approach the other’s affect, he focuses on desire that in philosophical terms would have been called ethical, but a desire that by its own application–by exceeding the metaphysics of the good–invalidates the name of ethics.1

     

    My emphasis on affect can work within aesthetics in a way that Levinas’s emphasis cannot work in ethics, because aesthetics may be decentered as ethics cannot be. By reading in such a way that the affective dimensions of texts disrupt the intellectual activity of judgment in aesthetics, I develop an untotalized, denatured aesthetics. One may argue that like ethics, aesthetics must be centered and develop a sense of the good; the argument would be long, and I will simply indicate that I follow Georges Bataille and others who claim an untotalized aesthetics. As my readings emphasize a desire to face the affect of the other, they emphasize that desire which Levinas shows to be mandatory for ethics but which disrupts ethics as such. The desire I emphasize lacks naturalization and totalization, falling outside anthropology as well as philosophy, driving an aesthetics of the feeling of the other which–following literary and rhetorical traditions, albeit loosely–I call the aesthetics of pathos.2 Levinas writes of the “restlessness” of consciousness that is open to the other, thus capturing the insecurity of moving outside philosophy; this restlessness should extend into the instability of determining a name for the act of encountering the other (Otherwise than Being 153-62).

     

    The emphasis on an untotalizing approach to the other’s affect, for Levinas, includes focusing on the singularity of the encounter with the other. Reading provides an appropriate occasion for exploring such an encounter, and what follows in this essay–although it will iterate theoretical concerns of the introduction–is not a philosophical treatise, but a performative work of criticism. The first-person voice of the essay (even in its plural manifestations) is a phenomenon of subjectivity, not a voice of definitive truth. Similarly, the reading does not definitively impute characteristics to Sylvia Plath or to an oeuvre, style, or technique that is attributable to her (although my references to other critics are suggestive in this respect, beginning to knit a fabric of literary-critical conversation).3 Although the following readings say more about aesthetics than ethics, they say more about Levinas’s work than Plath’s, more about reading than either, and more about a specific encounter with particular texts than about reading in general or about a particular type of discourse (the essay focuses mainly on poems, but neither exclusively nor necessarily). With the deconstruction of ethics and philosophical aesthetics foregone, my reading primarily develops a singular exposition of desire and judgment in dialogue, amid an aesthetics whose desired focus is affective alterity.

     

    Imagery as a Locus of Pathos

     

    My attraction to the poetry of Sylvia Plath is based in the feeling I find in reading many of her poems, the kind of access to feeling I achieve. In the poems, I read feeling I cannot name, and which seems masked, although I read feeling I am compelled to recognize. There is substantial feeling in “Apprehensions,” for instance, that I find indissociable from the images in which moments of feeling emerge.4 The persona faces a wall that is, through metamorphosing descriptions, the main locus of feeling in the poem: changing from “this white wall” to “A gray wall now, clawed and bloody” and then “This red wall” which “winces continually,” it becomes finally a “black wall” on which “unidentifiable birds / Swivel their heads and cry” (195-96). There is more here, and indeed less, than an association of images with particular emotions; the words contain, represent, or transmit feelings less than they serve as a dwelling place for them. In considering uncontained feeling in imagery, we may recognize how poetry may fundamentally concern what is felt as living: an apprehension of substantial experience can occur at a level more fundamental than articulation or communication.

     

    When I confront affective material in “Apprehensions,” I do not find myself engaging with a persona who contains emotions or whose feelings I can accurately articulate in terms of the persona’s situation, thoughts, or actions (although it is possible to make conjectures about such matters). Although I am little tempted to construe details as integrated moments of a psychology, I find palpable the feelings per se. Feelings appear as substantial moments, which as such do not automatically integrate into personality or subjectivity. I do attribute feeling to a voice, which is how I mark the feeling’s otherness: the notion of the voice mediates my apprehension of feeling, raising a disjunction that marks what is not my own feeling. Yet the voice’s otherness does not in itself bring a person present, seeming rather to dwell prior to any notion of a consistent humanity. I do not obtain a sense of naturalized humanity when confronted in such a way by the affective dimensions of a voice, while I may recognize something undeniably living and compelling in the voice’s feelings, particularly in the suffering to which the voice seems subject. Through the recognition of its suffering, a voice’s feeling can register for a reader as affective substance.

     

    What mainly attracts me to Plath’s voices is their pathos; what makes her voices compelling is their apprehensible capacity for suffering. This would appear to be an ethical compulsion, involving attention that is commonly considered an essential component of ethics. This point can help explain a reader’s attraction to the voice of Plath’s “Morning Song,” the voice of a disaffected mother for whom her newborn is “like a fat gold watch,” opaque and inhuman. This is a mother for whom the baby’s mouth, “clean as a cat’s,” in the unfolding of the imagery opens and transforms into the “window square” that “Whitens and swallows its dull stars”: the baby’s organ of nourishment and expression turns, for the mother, into an empty, unsympathetic eternity, revealing the blankness of one of an endless series of mornings (156-57). There is pathos in the mother’s voice that evokes solicitude, however counter this pathos may be to an ethos of motherhood that might be normalized as productive and healthy.5 Yet the feeling in the voice is largely opaque, too much so for me to say I can share it. What predominates is the inescapability of the voice’s suffering.

     

    I focus here on the moment of affect’s compulsion, on an aesthetic moment in which affect may be for a reader a substantiality that is excessive of subjectivity, character, ethos, or any similar idea that entails human consistency or integrity. In the vagueness of what we perceive to be an imagistic moment that yet feels substantial–in the incomprehensibility of something tangible–we may recognize an unmanageable excess that convinces us that another’s feeling is real. As Levinas details in the first section of Totality and Infinity, we apprehend moments of affect before comprehension. Levinas’s thought engages us to dwell on the affect as such: as the affect stands out, not drawn into determinate relations that reduce it. Thus, we may apprehend what Levinas refers to as the “infinity” of feeling, which I see as an excess that disrupts the idea of the human as a natural totality. A glimpse of infinite affect in imagery may make that imagery our dwelling place with concrete feeling. Dwelling so with what we recognize as another life, we take the other’s existence even prior to understanding what it is. Levinas thus brackets the trappings of subjectivity and intersubjective communication in a phenomenological reduction upon the affective existence of the other. By this approach to feeling, there can be no knowing an other without dwelling with the other on the terms of the other’s unreduced affect; anything like knowing remains something beyond epistemology, something more tactile.

     

    In Plath’s voices, there is suffering with which I must dwell or which I must dismiss, suffering I must apprehend or reject–which I must take, if I take it, with its obscurity. In “Little Fugue,” for example, images of clouds and other opacities gather in a nebulous blankness, a whiteness in which the affect of the persona largely resides amid the events of its life. A pathos emerges in and as the blankness, dwelling there with the “deafness” and “silence” that interrelate in a “fugue” of imagistic feeling, as the blankness overwhelms the colors of the poem. Imagery comes somewhat at the expense of syntax in this fugal playing of feeling into blank space. The blankness may be among other things the absence of the father, of the law or logos, of the object of love, or the self (I present this poem unbroken, as much as possible to avoid mediating the experience of it):

     

    The yew's black fingers wag;
    Cold clouds go over.
    So the deaf and dumb
    Signal the blind, and are ignored.
    
    I like black statements.
    The featurelessness of that cloud, now!
    White as an eye all over!
    The eye of the blind pianist
    
    At my table on the ship.
    He felt for his food.
    His fingers had the noses of weasels.
    I couldn't stop looking.
    
    He could hear Beethoven:
    Black yew, white cloud,
    The horrific complications.
    Finger-traps--a tumult of keys.
    
    Empty and silly as plates,
    So the blind smile.
    I envy the big noises,
    The yew hedge of the Grosse Fuge.
    
    Deafness is something else.
    Such a dark funnel, my father!
    I see your voice
    Black and leafy, as in my childhood,
    
    A yew hedge of orders,
    Gothic and barbarous, pure German.
    Dead men cry from it.
    I am guilty of nothing.
    
    The yew my Christ, then.
    Is it not as tortured?
    And you, during the Great War
    In the California delicatessen
    
    Lopping the sausages!
    They color my sleep,
    Red, mottled, like cut necks.
    There was a silence!
    
    Great silence of another order.
    I was seven, I knew nothing.
    The world occurred.
    You had one leg, and a Prussian mind.
    
    Now similar clouds
    Are spreading their vacuous sheets.
    Do you say nothing?
    I am lame in the memory.
    
    I remember a blue eye,
    A briefcase of tangerines.
    This was a man, then!
    Death opened, like a black tree, blackly.
    
    I survive the while,
    Arranging my morning.
    These are my fingers, this my baby.
    The clouds are a marriage dress, of that pallor. 
                                         (187-89)

     

    Similarly, the whiteness of the hospital room in “Tulips” becomes a repository for pathos, a space for the suffering of a voice that recognizes itself as stripped of the trappings of character, that at one level desires to be so stripped. As in “Little Fugue,” the deictics “this” and “these” emphasize anemic features of the flesh and of the world, making blankness what is most directly and centrally indicated:

     

    The tulips are too excitable, it is winter here.
    Look how white everything is, how quiet, how 
       snowed-in.
    I am learning peacefulness, lying by myself quietly
    As the light lies on these white walls, this bed, 
       these hands.
    I am nobody; I have nothing to do with explosions.
    I have given my name and my day-clothes up to the   
       nurses
    And my history to the anesthetist and my body to   
       surgeons.
    
    They have propped my head between the pillow and 
       the sheet-cuff
    Like an eye between two white lids that will not 
       shut.
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
    
    I didn't want any flowers, I only wanted
    To lie with my hands turned up and be utterly empty.
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    
    The tulips are too red in the first place, they 
       hurt me.
    Even through the gift paper I could hear them 
       breathe
    Lightly, through their white swaddlings, like an 
       awful baby.
    Their redness talks to my wound, it corresponds.
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
    
    Nobody watched me before, now I am watched.
    The tulips turn to me, and the window behind me
    Where once a day the light slowly widens and 
       slowly thins,
    And I see myself, flat, ridiculous, a cut-paper 
       shadow
    Between the eye of the sun and the eyes of the 
       tulips,
    And I have no face, I have wanted to efface myself.
                                              (160-61)

     

    An opaque pathos persists in the whiteness of “Tulips,” in contrast to the encroaching redness of a gift of red flowers, which is an additional otherness and also a new locus of pathos (marking an affective shift as occurs in the images of the wall in “Apprehensions”), a new locus that struggles with the voice’s preference to suffer only the vacuous pathos of the whiteness.6 Later in “Tulips,” the air “snags and eddies round” the flowers. Read as the voice’s feeling–or perhaps as self, or as language or meaning that would bring the presence of character–the air is a liquid that is equivalent to absence in terms of any possibility of coherence or centrality: the whiteness synesthetically merges with the tactile indeterminacy of air.

     

    I find the whiteness in these poems and others among the most abject and most terrifying imagery in Plath’s writing.7 The whiteness is a palpable presence of absence, so I sense in it the force of absence, including the absence of cause, effect, and correlations of psychological elements. But as it marks the absence of determinations, it is also whiteness as a trace of other whiteness elsewhere. It is not only aesthetic but anesthetic, and the lack in it seems never quite chosen; if the poem articulates a death-wish, it seems death suffered to take place, although without determinable reasons: there is not mere annihilation but suffered annihilation. It is indeed the obscurity of this imagery of whiteness that makes the voice’s vulnerability concrete. Through the whiteness I touch the suffered existence of the voice, and thereby I know what I can of the vulnerability of that existence.

     

    Such vacuous pathos in images of whiteness is pathos not only nearer to me than the character or subjectivity of the other, but nearer than the question of being, the question of the nature of the other.8 It is nearer, indeed, than even the famous ontological question of Heidegger: “The other person is closer to me than is knowledge or ontology,” says Charles William Reed in summarizing Levinas’s critique of Heidegger (80). Levinas says Heidegger’s radical question still assumes too much concerning living existence, or in other words accounts for too much, by focusing on being and putting the question in such a way that being itself remains at the center of the question, such that we would expect nothing to exceed being (Totality and Infinity 42-48). For Levinas, as we face what we recognize as the substance of otherness, we move to a moment prior to the question of what is (and prior to the question of this question), moving to the moment that we are affected. Only in recognition of the radical alterity of living otherness, Levinas says, might we try to get beyond the tyranny of ontology, beyond the centripetal force that will obtain for any thinking that fails to move anterior to ontology. Thus we move prior to philosophy–and indeed ethics–in an aesthetics that seeks the infinite excess of alterity, that seeks the proximate, palpable excess of otherness through imagery.

     

    Alterity, Infinity, and Abjection in Pathos

     

    I have discussed how reading the pathos of the other leads us toward an infinity of affect; such reading leads into an infinity of complexity in the excess that is affect. We can follow Plath’s poems into such complexity. Most notably, amid the unreduced affective dimensions of her work, voices often reveal their own others, sometimes as alterity internal to themselves. The imagery of the wall in “Apprehensions,” simultaneously with the internal shifts that yield dimensions of feeling (as discussed above), depicts the wall in its more literal role of incarcerating the persona, as the wall is “clawed and bloody,” an insurmountable otherness for the voice. And the image of the wall becomes an explicit psychological figure, as the voice presents the image of the bloody wall and asks, “Is there no way out of the mind?” (195). Thus the alterity and multiple dimensions of the wall emerge as part of the “mind” the voice appears to inhabit, implicating the externality of the wall with the interior of the voice. The imagery suggests a splitting by which alterity begins to proliferate among figural and imagistic renderings of the voice’s feeling.

     

    As a further example, alterity emerges in the voice’s depiction of its feelings in “The Great Carbuncle.” The poem reflects an experience shared by a group of people walking at night. Describing a landscape revealed by “light neither of dawn / Nor nightfall,” light “Other than noon, than moon, stars,” the persona speaks of altered vision, a sort of dream-vision in which familiar details, such as “The once-known way,” become “Wholly other, and ourselves / Estranged, changed.” The persona’s first-person plurality indicates, first, a unity in the ethereal altered light. The result of this early imagery is exhilaration, as the voice observes

     

                  ...our hands, faces
    Lucent as porcelain, the earth's
    Claim and weight gone out of them.

     

    But upon reaching a destination–as “nearing means distancing”–the “Light withdraws” and “the body weighs like stone” (72-73). The pathos of the poem emerges at the end as a suffering of the weight of the body’s alterity, a weight against the feel of the vision. Indeed, the ethereal vision has an imagistic palpability, and both the opposing moments of “light” and “stone” transcend any restriction into determinate contours of human being. That is, while both moments are irreducibly substantial in the poem, both are transcendent for the voice, as for each other. The irreducibility of these alterities thwarts any sublimation that would bear them toward totality. These moments of transcendence remain incommensurate with each other and, as complex moments felt in and by the voice, they emphasize the incommensurability of the affectively revealed existence of the persona.

     

    To return to “Apprehensions,” images of alterity internal to affect emerge in the “Cold blanks” that “approach us.” The blanks suggest a multiplication of the apprehensiveness embodied in the wall, an unending multiplication as “They move in a hurry” (196). The proliferation of and in alterity occurs in various moments of repetition and recursivity in Plath’s imagery. An example is the image in “Little Fugue” of the cloud “White as an eye all over!”–white as the eye of the blind pianist (187). The white, imagistic locus of pathos becomes the feeling of the other in the simile, the feeling of the blind eye that is other, the tactility of which (itself multiple: the other’s tactile mode of apprehending as well as the perceiver’s tactile apprehension of the other) is palpable in the image of the non-transparent and non-seeing organ. It is the absence of vision that emphasizes the tactility, the multiple bareness of the eye that suffers a lack of vision. In this image, I feel the living eye more in the absence of vision than I would in a depiction of vision’s presence. This tactility of the eye’s suffering depends on my awareness of vision’s recursive trace, as I glimpse a trace that makes present the pathos of its own lack.

     

    There is further recursivity in the punning of “I” and “eye” in “Little Fugue,” by which the complexity of the fleshy imagery of the eye crosses into the domain of the pronoun, inscribing its substantial alterity within the more abstract problematic of the subject’s attempted self-establishment through its own, figural vision. A correlative pun concerns the other that the persona apostrophizes: “you” becomes the black yew tree. As “you” is the voice’s “father,” his voice is visible, “Black and leafy,… A yew hedge of orders” standing against the whiteness of the persona’s pathos. Yet the black/white contrast itself is so vague, dark, and tangled–in the literal images, and by suggestions of sleep, silence, and memory–that the supposed opposites interpenetrate (187-89).9 The “you” in “Little Fugue” is similar to the absent loved/hated other of “Daddy,” an other apostrophized and incantatorily referred to as “you” and associated with images of blackness (222-24). As the voices of both “Daddy” and “Little Fugue” engage the absent presence of the other they suffer under, they suffer their uncertain incorporation of the other. At a physiological level, the voiced “you” merges with the persona as it gains palpability when its sound tends to draw the open mouth into a curved space, a fleshed absence at the heart of the poems’ sounds–particularly in “Daddy,” with the help of the German du and other assonant syllables. The voices of both poems suffer a transcending absence that becomes partially absorbed by the voice, emerging in the curved mouth: in speaking flesh, my own voice apprehends these others as recursive parts of itself.10

     

    Some of Plath’s images of flesh yield affect that similarly emerges as recursive trace. When imagery presents flesh as mundane or denatured, there can persist a recursivity in the absent tactility that is like the pathetic trace of absent vision in the all-white eye. Plath’s poems contain a number of such instances of ostensibly inert flesh. Many of the images relate to the topic of birth, suggesting subtensive dimensions of affect that exceed naturalized maternal intimacy, as noted above in the description of the baby in “Morning Song.” For the second voice in “Three Women”–the most bitter of three would-be mothers, the one who has miscarried–affect lingers as an absence in her own opaque flesh: “I am bled white as wax, I have no attachments. / I am flat and virginal” (184). Opening affective dimensions in a similar way, through the trace of a touch that is pathetically absent in the presentation of its own lack, the voice of “The Disquieting Muses” develops a sense of the inertia of the flesh it has touched in its own infancy, becoming the baby of “Morning Song”: the voice remarks that its “traveling companions,” who “stand their vigil in gowns of stone,” have “Faces blank as the day I was born” (74-76).

     

    Plath’s Holocaust imagery concerns the issue of denatured tactility. Arguably, such imagery could be exemplary for yielding a sense of infinite pathos through the logic of the recursive trace of touch. But as many critics have discussed, Plath’s use of Holocaust imagery problematically determines and manages the pathos of that imagery. Among various examples of her Holocaust imagery is that of flesh as equipment in “Lady Lazarus,” including the images of “my skin / Bright as a Nazi lampshade” and the “cake of soap” made of ash following cremation, plus references to “Herr Doktor,” for whom the persona comes to “turn and burn” (244-47). Among instances in other poems, there is the apocalyptic imagery of “Mary’s Song”:

     

    The Sunday lamb cracks in its fat.
    The fat
    Sacrifices its opacity....
    
    A window, holy gold.
    The fire makes it precious,
    The same fire
    
    Melting the tallow heretics,
    Ousting the Jews.
    Their thick palls float
    
    Over the cicatrix of Poland, burnt-out
    Germany.
    They do not die.
    
    Gray birds obsess my heart,
    Mouth-ash, ash of eye.
    They settle.  On the high
    
    Precipice
    That emptied one man into space
    The ovens glowed like heavens, incandescent.
    
    It is a heart,
    This holocaust I walk in,
    O golden child the world will kill and eat. (257)

     

    The affect in such Holocaust imagery could lie in the trace of touch I read in the body’s reduction in death, like the pathos of vision as trace in the all-white eye. In “Mary’s Song,” the image of the body as “tallow”–in the manufacture of wax or soap–could lead toward the excess of pathos through the trace of life of what is now flat and mundane substance. But the imagery of denatured flesh in these poems fails to approach the infinity of affect insofar as the poems appropriate their imagery for the ethos of the voice. The pathos in imagery of flesh made ash and equipment recedes as the imagery helps articulate an ethos that establishes the voice’s character.11

     

    Adapting the pathos of its Holocaust images, “Lady Lazarus” stages a phoenix-like resurrection for the persona, in a quest for what Steven Gould Axelrod calls “self-legitimation” (159-61). Similarly, “Mary’s Song” sublimates the pathos of its historical images for the sake of the character of its voice. The poem neglects the abject pathos of the flesh in favor of a relatively simple affective presence, a moment of sublime, clarifying pathos, figurally that of the mother of god or of sacrifice (quite in contrast to the pathos of the mother in “Morning Song”). With its contemplation of the “incandescence” of the scene, from a level above the “Precipice” of civilization (where space exploration and the Holocaust are co-implicated, with “The same fire” as sacrifice), “Mary’s Song” subsumes the images’ pathetic trace of touch in a manipulation of pathos that functions to establish the power of the persona’s ethos. James E. Young notes that this use of Holocaust imagery submits the images to typology, in Aristotelian fashion, wherein an emphasis on categories of use takes over the substance of affect and overpowers the more complex dimensions of the discourse of suffering (139-40).12 Indeed, as ethos ascends in such an aesthetic operation, it tends to govern a reader’s relationship to a characterized voice and draw the pathos of the images toward catharsis. Insofar as Plath succeeds in reducing the excessiveness of affect in the images by submitting them to ethos, she reiterates the abuse of affect that the historical images reflect. Her management of feeling works to disengage the weight of otherness and to obliterate the palpable sense of vulnerability that the images of the Holocaust yield.

     

    Yet, in the aesthetics of concrete pain and vulnerability that I have been developing, I must attend to the otherness in the images that persists in, and is recognizable primarily through the desperation of, Plath’s own alterity to the material she takes from history. Her voices remain rich with affect that I need to address per se, beyond the ways she tries to subsume, erase, or sublimate the excess and alterity of pathos. Even as they appear managed in a pathos tethered to character, Plath’s references to the Holocaust resonate at another level of incommensurate, imagistic rendering of affect. The challenge here is to dwell with the affect of another otherness, also closer to me than my comprehension of ethos, character, or subjectivity. That is, the otherness of Plath’s Holocaust imagery involves various moments of alterity I must take care not to manage with an ontological aesthetics of ethos, so that I do not abuse the suffering of the other, both the suffering Plath has aesthetically manipulated and the suffering that obtains for Plath herself (which she herself manipulates). It is key for an aesthetics of pathos that we seek in textuality the proliferation of moments of affective alterity, so that instead of subsuming pathos under any ethos, we allow pathos to retain its always excessive pressure on any moment of ethos and thereby keep us dwelling, ever incompletely, on substantial feeling. Indeed, suffering in Plath’s poems usually leads only to more suffering, without catharsis–as Jon Rosenblatt notes (163)–without bringing the infinite alterity of substantial suffering under control. Her imagery usually lends itself to reading that finds affect so complex and weighty it averts any resolution, so that irresolvable affect can persist–as it does for Levinas–prior to being.

     

    Authorial Ethos and the Pathos of Voice

     

    Concerning the poems of Plath, an aesthetics of pathos might be liable to take the name of an aesthetics of the abject.13 Indeed, her imagery opens onto feeling in a way that challenges me to find an aesthetics that is not at some level manipulative. That is, there may be slim odds in favor of my avoiding the trap of an ontological aesthetics at some level when reading her poetry. Plath’s public comments could take me off the track of an aesthetics of abjection and indeed away from the aesthetics of pathos. In a BBC interview, she tries to bring the feeling of her poems under the management of ethos, where she claims to be:

     

    I think my poems come immediately out of the sensuous and emotional experiences I have, but I must say I cannot sympathize with these "cries from the heart" that are informed by nothing except, you know, a needle or knife, or whatever it is. I believe that one should be able to control and manipulate experiences, even the most terrifying, like madness, being tortured, this sort of experience; and one should be able to manipulate these experiences with an informed and intelligent mind.

     

    By such remarks, I can see how she favors an aesthetic manipulation of imagery that would involve a sublimating aesthetics and a sublimating ethics, even as she continues by noting that she means to turn felt experience to “larger” issues:

     

    I think that personal experience is very important, but certainly it shouldn't be a kind of shut box, and sort of mirror-looking, narcissistic experience. I believe it should be relevant, and relevant to the larger things, the bigger things, such as Hiroshima and Dachau and so on.14

     

    Reading this excerpt for its pathos takes me quickly beyond the surface of Plath’s claim for a “larger” aesthetic and ethical emphasis. Various affective tensions emerge in the passage: for example, between the callousness of manipulating “these experiences with an informed and intelligent mind”–experiences such as “being tortured”–and the more heated, perhaps defensive tone of her “I cannot sympathize.” Plath indicates a suffering beneath the surface of her own ethos particularly in her trivialization of “needle or the knife,” examples of what may inform what she calls “cries from the heart”: her “you know” and “whatever it is” are not only belittling but flippant, revealing an acting out in the ethos, an excess of the establishment of ethos that thus does not help stabilize ethos but rather exposes affect that disrupts the attempted constitution of ethos. In short, rather than presenting ethos, control, or agency, the passage tends to reveal vulnerability and powerlessness. It is in Plath’s taking the position of the manipulative aesthete that she most presents victimhood, albeit a victimhood for which there is no clear sense of any perpetrator. In this, the passage is similar to “Daddy,” with its postulated perpetrator, the poem revealing its voice’s desperation to locate some language, imagery, or agency by which to articulate a logic of pathos, by which in turn to claim she is “through” with suffering (224). The result is the same for the passage as for “Daddy,” as many readers of the poem have found: the claim of resolution is weak beside the reading that the voice dwells in pathos it cannot escape.

     

    Thus despite Plath’s apparent effort to consolidate ethos, feeling in her poems tends to emerge disruptively in the affective dimensions of the image, as affect retains its alterity to reading and exceeds attempts to determine articulations of ethos or character. In her poems, I find no character to comprehend, but rather an inassimilable substance of affect that always exceeds contours of personality. Indeed, I cannot exactly achieve compassion with Plath’s voices, because I lack specific articulations of their affect–articulations that would organize feeling in comprehensible structures of character: her voices do not provide me with objective determinations of feeling, so they ultimately fail to establish communication or even emotions I can share. Thus I cannot have sympathy, properly, but empathy: I cannot achieve a synthesis of feelings whose parameters can be determined. I dwell with the problematics of empathy, wherein the excess of alterity merges with my own feeling, and determinate ethical motivations and goals do not materialize.

     

    The indeterminacy of empathy is at the heart of the aesthetic problematics of Levinasian ethics, where ethos does not rule over pathos, but rather lives implicated with the force of pathos. In the aesthetic experience of reading, we may meet the tactile challenge to dwell with the unmitigated affect of the other, to stay with what Levinas describes as the infinite alterity of affect. This engagement of poetry and philosophy prompts the realization that the compulsion to meet such a challenge is as close as we can come to a motive for ethics–a motive, it seems, that can only be articulated without the sense of hope or even goodness with which the name of ethics is habitually invoked.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See John D. Caputo, Against Ethics (1-19), Simon Critchley, The Ethics of Deconstruction, and Jacques Derrida, “Violence and Metaphysics.”

     

    2. Although some blurring between the meanings of “pathos” and “affect” may be unavoidable and even appropriate for my topic, the distinction between the terms remains important. “Affect” usually refers to felt material that is not definable or representable, that resists typology or systemization (see Campbell or Laplanche and Pontalis). So it is the more appropriate term for what Levinas emphasizes as substantial feeling, although a claim to practice an “aesthetics of affect” would imply that one could directly get at the substantiality. To approach pathos instead–which, as conceived in aesthetics, is more patent and determinate than affect–is to approach the problem of seeking affect: a problem of seeking substantial feeling amid the inevitable making and suppression of judgments and naturalizations that the more determinate term tends to entail. An aesthetics of pathos, then, for which affect remains the desired emphasis, avoids making the extravagant promise of an “aesthetics of affect.”

     

    3. Along with disrupting any ethical totalization of reading, my approach to aesthetics is meant to disrupt totalizing tendencies that may emerge in historicism, insofar as historicization may reify anthropological categories and, indeed, may depend on naturalizations inherited from a dependence on philosophical ethics. Following Levinas, I seek to maintain a “restlessness” regarding the privileging of categories and regarding the motives and goals of any desire toward otherness.

     

    4. There is not much published commentary on “Apprehensions.” Mary Lynn Broe draws connections between the poem and the emotional focus of others in the same collection (Winter Trees) and some of Plath’s later poetry (128-29).

     

    5. A feminist reading emphasizing affect would focus on the mother’s postpartum feeling in order to put in question the ethos by which the mother would be adversely judged.

     

    6. Also, the flowers may represent the mouth, the vulva, and explicitly the “wound,” in any case creating resonance between a pair of edges or lips and the pair of “eyelids” or pillows cradling the dulled head of the persona, an eye “that will not shut,” similar to the “eyes” of the tulips and the sun. The organ of vision is tactile, while the sense of effacement and incoherence persists: disorganized palpability replaces psychic or visual organization. See also my remarks below on the eye in “Little Fugue” and the mouth in “Little Fugue” and “Daddy.”

     

    7. Such an effect occurs in many of the more than two hundred references to whiteness in The Collected Poems (Matovich s.v. “white” ff). For comparison of color imagery in Plath–perhaps suggesting the importance of contrasts in her work–according to Matovich, “black” or a version thereof appears about 190 times in The Collected Poems, “red,” “green,” and “blue” each a little over a hundred, “yellow,” “gray” (or “grey”), and “orange” about 30 each, and “violet” and “purple” combined about fifteen.

     

    8. In Sylvia Plath: Poetry and Existence, David Holbrook develops in psychoanalytic and existentialist terms the point that Plath’s work functions at a level prior to being: he notes that “being has not come first to Sylvia Plath” (156).

     

    9. Jacqueline Rose notes a corresponding moment of recursivity involving images of black and white in Plath’s novel: “On the back of the first draft [of ‘Little Fugue’] is the passage from The Bell Jar in which Esther Greenwood is almost raped. The typescript has this line–‘In that light, the blood looked black’–crossed out and replaced with this one written by hand: ‘Blackness, like ink, spread over the white handkerchief.’ Underneath the poem to the father, a violence of writing–the poem’s writing (the ink on the page), but equally his own” (231).

     

    10. Plath’s poems alluding to her father have often been read as elegies. Jahan Ramazani maintains that these poems belong to a tradition of the emotionally ambivalent elegy, wherein anger and other emotions challenge the pathos that is proper to a tradition of the more refined elegy; the ambivalent elegy shows the truly “irresolvable” nature of “bereavement” (1143-44). The refined tradition manages pathos, whereas the emotional material emphasized in the ambivalent tradition resembles the unregulated material that I, drawing upon Levinas, discuss as infinite affect.

     

    11. My uses of “ethos” and “character” tend to distinguish between the terms by emphasizing “character” as the delineation of a specific, subjective voice and freighting “ethos” with the sense of “character” that emphasizes a subject’s or voice’s cultural or moral power. Each term is of course complex, as is their relationship, which involves the substitution of “character” for the Greek ethos in English translations since the Renaissance of relevant works such as Aristotle’s Poetics. The ancient meaning of ethos involves “use,” “habit,” or “custom.” Besides the Oxford English Dictionary, see Kittel and Friedrich, Theological Dictionary of the New Testament (2:372-73).

     

    12. Young notes that the resulting typology might serve an articulation of ethos for the Holocaust, beyond the ethos that emerges for the personae of Plath’s poems. But the significant question for him is whether the poems are indeed “about the Holocaust,” and he decides that essentially they are not (133). Since Plath wrote the poems when the Eichmann trial had brought the Holocaust to public awareness in greater detail than ever before, Young considers how her use of the images represents her way of dealing with the historical Holocaust; he speculates about the extent to which such imagery produced for her a trauma with which she was forced to deal and which led to an intensification of her personal suffering. He concludes his essay, “Better abused memory in this case, which might then be critically qualified, than no memory at all” (146).

     

    13. See Rose for a discussion of Plath as a “writer of abjection” (37). On the theory of abjection and differences between the abject and the sublime, see Julia Kristeva, Powers of Horror: An Essay on Abjection. Insofar as the issue of form is significant for aesthetic sublimation, we may consider how Plath fails to control formally the affective material of her works; on this, see Mutlu Konuk Blasing, American Poetry: The Rhetoric of Its Forms (55-56) and Hugh Kenner, “Sincerity Kills.”

     

    14. This is my own transcription of the recorded interview from The Poet Speaks.

    Works Cited

     

    • Axelrod, Steven Gould. Sylvia Plath: The Wound and the Cure of Words. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1990.
    • Blasing, Mutlu Konuk. American Poetry: The Rhetoric of Its Forms. New Haven: Yale UP, 1987.
    • Broe, Mary Lynn. Protean Poetic: The Poetry of Sylvia Plath. Columbia: U of Missouri P, 1980.
    • Campbell, Robert Jean. Psychiatric Dictionary. 5th ed. New York: Oxford UP, 1981.
    • Caputo, John D. Against Ethics: Contributions to a Poetics of Obligation with Constant Reference to Deconstruction. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1993.
    • Critchley, Simon. The Ethics of Deconstruction: Derrida and Levinas. Oxford: Blackwell, 1992.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Violence and Metaphysics: An Essay on the Thought of Emmanuel Levinas.” Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978. 79-153.
    • Holbrook, David. Sylvia Plath: Poetry and Existence. N.p.: Humanities 1979.
    • Kenner, Hugh. “Sincerity Kills.” Sylvia Plath: New Views on the Poetry. Ed. Gary Lane. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1979. 33-44.
    • Kittel, Gerhard and Gerhard Friedrich, eds. Theological Dictionary of the New Testament. Trans. Geoffrey W. Bromiley. 10 vols. Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 1964.
    • Kristeva, Julia. Powers of Horror: An Essay on Abjection. Trans. Leon S. Roudiez. New York: Columbia UP, 1982.
    • Laplanche, J[ean]. and J.-B. Pontalis. The Language of Psycho-Analysis. Trans. Donald Nicholson-Smith. New York: Norton, 1973.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. Otherwise than Being: Or, Beyond Essence. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. The Hague: Nijhoff, 1981.
    • —. Totality and Infinity: An Essay in Exteriority. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1969.
    • Matovich, Richard M. A Concordance to the Collected Poems of Sylvia Plath. New York: Garland, 1986.
    • Plath, Sylvia. The Collected Poems. Ed. Ted Hughes. New York: Perennial-Harper, 1981.
    • —. Interview. The Poet Speaks. Ed. Peter Orr. Argo, RG455, 1965. Record Five.
    • Ramazani, Jahan. “‘Daddy, I Have Had to Kill You’: Plath, Rage, and the Modern Elegy.” PMLA 108.5 (Oct. 1993): 1142-56.
    • Reed, Charles William. “Levinas’ Question.” Face to Face with Levinas. Ed. Richard A. Cohen. Albany: SUNY P, 1986. 73-82.
    • Rose, Jacqueline. The Haunting of Sylvia Plath. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1992.
    • Rosenblatt, Jon. Sylvia Plath: The Poetry of Initiation. Chapel Hill: U of North Carolina P, 1979.
    • Young, James E. “‘I may be a bit of a Jew”: The Holocaust Confessions of Sylvia Plath.” Philological Quarterly 66.1 (1987): 127-47.

     

  • On the Uses and Abuses of Literature for Life: Gilles Deleuze and the Literary Clinic

    Gregg Lambert

    Department of English and Textual Studies
    Syracuse University
    glambert@syr.edu

     

    One day, perhaps, there will no longer be any such thing as Art, only Medicine.

     

    –Le Clézio

     

    Introduction to the Literary Clinic

     

    The title of this essay recalls an earlier question from Nietszche’s famous “On the Uses and Abuses of History for Life,” which I would like to take up in asking what are the uses and abuses of literature for life and, recalling Nietzche’s guiding question, what kind of health it may promote for “an individual, a people, a culture” (Nietzsche 63). In the various essays assembled around the “problem of writing” in his final work, Critique et Clinique, Gilles Deleuze responds to this question by outlining some of the components of a clinical as well as a critical use of literature, which we might summarize along the following lines. First, certain writers have invented concrete semiotic practices that may prove more effective than psychoanalytic discourse in diagnosing the constellation of mute forces that always accompany life and threaten it from within. Second, as a result of this diagnostic and critical function, certain works of modern literature can be understood to produce a kind of “symptomatology” that may prove to be more effective than political critique in discerning the signs that correspond to the new arrangements of “language, labor, and life” (to cite Foucault’s abbreviated formula for the grand institutions of instinct or habit); third, perhaps most importantly, literature offers a manner of diagramming the potential forms of resistance, or “lines of flight,” which may be virtual to these new arrangements.1

     

    Taken together, these tasks must be understood as creative and even “vitalist” in the sense that Bergson had earlier employed this notion; or as Deleuze writes, “there is a ‘use’ of representation, without which representation would remain lifeless and senseless” (LS 146). The realization of this “use,” however, may require that we approach the question of writing from a point outside the critical representation this question receives in the institutions of literary study today. In fact, I would like to suggest that a clinical usage may radically alter the conditions of the practice of literature and emerge as a kind of Deleuzian “war machine” against how the uses of literature have been determined by the dominance of institutional criticism in the modern period. Is it simply a question of “style,” in other words, that Deleuze’s own commentaries on writers seem to pay no attention or even tribute to the field of criticism, but rather approach always from a point external to the historical representation of an author or given body of work? Moreover, could we imagine something like a “Deleuzian school of literary theory,” understood as one approach among others in a pluralism of critical styles and methodologies, preserving the relative stability of the field of literary objects and the integrity of “a set of individuals who are recognized and identify themselves practitioners of the discipline” (Godzich 275) of literature?2

     

    For anyone familiar with Deleuze’s writings, and especially those works written in collaboration with Guattari, the response to the above questions might seem an obvious “no”; however, in the academy today where the principle of “marketing” is fast becoming an efficient cause determining the uses of theory, we must always hold out the possibility that anything can be perverted against its own nature. Yet, rather than speculating on the fortunate and unfortunate actualities that might flow from the proclamation, “one day this century will be known as Deleuzian” (Foucault), in what follows I offer a more preliminary discussion of some of the principles we might draw from Deleuze’s own manner of treating literary expression and, in particular, the questions and problems of writing that have been associated with the works by the modern writers who occupy a central role in his own writings, as well as in the works written with Guattari. This discussion represents my own attempt to come to terms with what might be formulated as the characteristic marks of what Deleuze had early on proposed as a generalized “literary clinic.” I hope to provoke creative dialogue about the very conditions that would make a Deleuzian pragmatics distinct in the belief that such a dialogue should occur at this critical juncture as Deleuze’s writings are being increasingly taken up by institutions of literary and cultural studies today.3

     

    The Critical and The Clinical

     

    Foucault’s famous statement in “What is an Author?” that we have passed through the age of the “great writer” and the “universal intellectual” has too often been understood to mean that we can now simply reject the notion of literature itself. Indeed this statement has been generally understood to vindicate the “specialist” or the academic subject of knowledge, who were the objects of an even more severe attack by Foucault as exemplars of merely “bad literature.” On the contrary, Foucault’s statement concerns a change in the conditions of discourse in which the writer function now appears, designating a new arrangement of statements caused by the entrance of a new subject that succeeds what he calls the “Man-Form.” The appearance of the universal intellectual was conditioned by the alliance between literature and the law, as the relationship between universal or general expression and its species or variables. Moreover, the universal man-of-letters was the double of the jurist (e.g., Zola, Dickens) and often appeared speaking the juridical language of being. He was decisive, a moralist. Extending Foucault’s observation to the contemporary period, we can define the subject of modern criticism as a final avatar of the subject who judges, the subject of the statement “I judge”: that is, the subject of certainty whose historical emergence is closely allied to the juridico-legal function of judgment one finds at the basis of what Foucault has called disciplinary societies (a social arrangement which, according to Deleuze, we are now in the process of “quitting”).4

     

    The appearance of the “critic,” in other words, is the result of a historical process that has bound the reflective character of judgment to the civil and juridical functions of modern institution. Deleuze and Guattari write that “in so-called modern philosophy, and in the so-called modern or rational State, everything revolves around the legislator and the subject” (TP 376). This is no less true for the subject of literature, for which we have the personages of the critic and his or her double, the “theorist,” both of whom have emerged today as “the only true legislators” of literature and culture. Therefore, the modern critic occupies an intermediary position between, on the one hand, the apparatus of the state and its systems of majority (the school, the press, or modern media) and, on the other, the fragmented (or molecular) body of collective enunciation that circulates at the base of every socius. Because of this relationship, we might discern that the range of issues and problems (pragma) that have frequented literary criticism for the past several decades, and even before, are codeterminous with changes and fluctuations that have taken place in mediums of civil and juridical identity where conflicting moralities and sovereign discursive agents clash over the cultural reproduction of the institutions of “civil morality”: problems of national canon formation, the status of minority expression in a dominant cultural sphere, the conflicts over the ideological mechanisms of “taste” in dominant aesthetic judgments. However, despite their efforts to liberate themselves from this function, modern critics have become so entangled in the disciplinary apparatus that determines their official function in schools and the public press that they find it difficult, if not impossible, to “deterritorialize” their statements from the mechanisms of power and systems of majority they serve.

     

    In Kafka: Toward a Minor Literature, Deleuze and Guattari note the critic’s predisposition, even within minority struggles, “to reterritorialize, to redo the photos, to remake power and law, to also remake a ‘great literature’” (K 86). To illustrate this problematic alliance between modern criticism and the disciplinary organization of social strata, we might briefly refer to the comparison made in A Thousand Plateaus, “Treatise on Nomadology–The War Machine” between the games of chess and Go. Following this analogy, criticism can be likened to the game of chess; that is, it can be understood as a “striated space,” or a discursive grid made up of “positions” and “theories” (Marxism, deconstruction, feminism, new historicism, post-colonial theory, queer theory, cultural studies) whose subjects are coded, each bearing intrinsic properties “from which their movements, situations, and confrontations derive” (TP 352). A “marxist” confronts a “deconstructionist”; a “feminist” becomes a “post-colonial critic”; a “third-world post-colonial theorist” check-mates a “white first-world feminist.” As in chess, for an emerging theory or school of criticism “it is a question of arranging a closed space… thus of going from one point to another (TP 353) in a manner that closely resembles passing through territories,” even though these territories are composed of theorems, schools, subjects, and authorities. Those who enter the game of theory are constrained by the axiomatic values that determine the intrinsic properties of the position they have selected; each is like a subject of the statement endowed with a relative power, and these relative powers combine in a subject of enunciation”(TP 352).5 This constitutes a form of interiority that is specific to a theoretical movement, or school of critics. It is only the “Queen” (i.e., the Master Theorist) who lawfully combines within herself all possible moves, and thus has the greatest latitude and mobility–that of a ‘Subject au large’–who can surpass the relative powers of the other players, who seems to fly over the entire discursive plane to magically capture the scepter of the King.

     

    The above analogy between the institutionalization of “criticism” and “theory” in the modern period and what Deleuze calls a “State-form” of knowledge is striking and this is not accidental. The analogy confirms that the relations between different theories and the kind of conflict that ensues between particular subjects are inherently conditioned by a disciplinary model of organization that subordinates thought to a model of Truth (Cogitatio Universalis), revealing the underlying “striated” space that conditions their distribution and even orders the modes of actualization and points of conflict between different subjects. For Deleuze, on the other hand, the only means of subtracting thought from its disciplinary organization is to subtract it from its images, since to offer another “image of thought” only amounts to the magical return of the mythical foundation of “the State-form.” The theorist who believes she can leap outside this magical circle by offering a “true” image only ends up becoming the another cog in the machinery of an infinite revolution of disciplinary order. As an antidote to this situation, we might propose what Deleuze and Guattari call “outside thought” according to the analogy of Go, where rather than arranging a closed space and subordinating thought to a model or theorem, it would be a question of “arraying oneself in an open space” and maintaining a form of exteriority that enters in to confront criticism as “a form of interiority we habitually take as a model, or according to which we are in the habit of thinking” (TP 353). Such an “outside thought” must be conceived in terms that are purely strategic:

     

    A thought grappling with exterior forces instead of being gathered up in an interior form, operating by relays instead of forming an image; an event-thought, a haecceity, instead of a subject-thought; a problem-thought instead of an essence-thought or theorem; a thought that appeals to the people instead of taking itself for a government ministry. (TP 378)

     

    For the new subject of knowledge, according to Deleuze and Guattari, the earlier alliance with the Law (“the moral criteria of judgment”) is no longer possible, since the subject of enunciation that underlines juridical language has been “de-ranged” by the entrance of new technologies and bio-physical forces that are taking place on a plane of immanence. In response, according to Deleuze, “the intellectual or writer becomes adept at speaking the language of life, rather than of law” (F 91). Consequently, this new subject attempts to develop the cases of exception and to invent a form of language that allies itself with the forces that arrive from “the outside,” (e.g., madness, sexuality, power, death, etc.), interrupting the notions of good and common sense which belong to the classical language-subject, and exposing the history of violence which founded the Cogitatio Universalis. Contrary to the classical subject of knowledge (savoir), whose conceptual personages are the philosopher (“the Man of the State”), the literary critic (“the prince of the Republic of letters”) and the psychoanalyst (“the model detective of polis”), the new subject corresponds to the personages of the “diagrammatician” (the cartographer or genealogist) and the “symptomatologist” (or diagnostic novelist).

     

    Although the institution of psychoanalysis in the modern period constitutes the dominant representation of the conditions whereby the critical function of knowledge is given a clinical or diagnostic usage, the critique Deleuze and Guattari launch against this representation in Anti-Oedipus (1972) is well known. In A Thousand Plateaus (1980), they write that “[e]ven today, psychoanalysis lays claim to the role of Cogitatio Universalis as the thought of the Law, in a magical return” (TP 376). In Deleuze’s later writings, Foucault himself becomes the “conceptual persona” of the figure who stands for a new arrangement of critical and clinical. Much has already been said of Deleuze’s praise and recognition of Foucault’s later work as nothing less than “diagnostic” novels of the micro-disciplinary regimes of power that have replaced the State-form, regimes whose operations no longer “correspond” to the classical concepts of “truth,” “freedom,” “the good,” etc., that occur in the wake of philosophy and explain the decline of the philosopher’s discourse as the natural expression of the State-form. For Deleuze, the name Foucault designates less the author, or the body of work, than a mode of discourse whose subject no longer corresponds to that of the classical philosopher, but rather to a clinical practitioner who invents a new form of knowledge that corresponds to the problem of how to live a non-fascist life.6

     

    This may help clarify why the relationship between critical and clinical is somewhat complex and not always clear, since the clinical can always be too much of a dominant “method” and may threaten to obscure the critical, and, as I will argue in the case of literature today, the opposite may also be true as well. Here, we might recall an earlier example that Deleuze himself uses to interrogate this relationship between critical and clinical: the example of Sacher-Masoch. First addressing the question of the clinical determination of literary work in his introductory essay to Masoch, Coldness and Cruelty (1967), Deleuze writes that, like the physician, the works of Sade and Masoch can be seen to have constituted a profoundly original clinical tableau by disassociating symptoms that were previously confused and grouping together symptoms that were previously disassociated and unperceived. Sade links the order of reason with the sadistic arrangement of the drives from the position of Law, or absolute right; Masoch links together the status of minorities and women and the position of law arranged through the privileged instrument of the contract–the masochist draws up contracts while the sadist abominates and destroys them” (M 13). In the psychoanalytic treatment of both writers, however, Deleuze discerns that the extraction of the “clinical entities” of sadism and masochism from the work of Sade and Masoch results in an evacuation of the descriptions offered by these works themselves. There is a reduction of the language that was specific to Sade and Masoch in which symptoms later associated with the psychoanalytic terms that bear their names were first arranged together and displayed upon a critical tableau indistinguishable from the art of Sade and of Masoch. As Deleuze writes, “symptomatology is always an affair of art…” and, moreover, “the specificities of sadism and masochism are not separable from the literary values proper to the works of Sade and Masoch” (M 10).

     

    In other words, it was the “critical” creation of Sade and Masoch to have first raised these obscure affections, passions, and perceptions to the status of what Deleuze and Guattari will later call affects and percepts. Through this process of creation, their literary works caused what was formerly unperceived, imperceptible, and “outside of language” to pass into language where these percepts and affects become “signs” that will henceforth bear a certain visibility, and, as Deleuze writes, “a tendency toward greater specificity [which] indicates a refinement of symptomatology” (M 13). If we are to regard Sade and Masoch as “true artists and ‘symptomatogologists,’” something curious happens when psychoanalysis appropriates their clinical discoveries: their own proper names are employed to designate the “syndromes” they themselves first brought to light. The critical is obscured by the clinical even as Sade and Masoch are separated from their own language. Sade and Masoch are reduced to “a clinical state” of illness, rather than the critical diagnosis of health. At this point, Deleuze’s accusation of the “Oedipal” function of psychoanalysis, after Krafft-Ebing, becomes clear: First, psychoanalysis was not specifically attentive enough to the works of Sade and Masoch, and consequently, it botched the accuracy of its own clinical conception of sadism and masochism in misinterpreting the symptomatology they had originally created. Second, when the symptoms were separated from their original contexts, they lost the critical force that was specific to their literary production. This led to the subsequent confusion of sado-masochism as a set of complementary and reversible structures, which Deleuze’s essay goes on to separate and clarify as distinct and irreversible. Therefore, Deleuze’s early work functions as both an introduction and a critical recovery of Masoch’s own language in the edition of Venus in Furs. In the title under which this work appears in French, Présentation de Sacher-Masoch, the term “présentation” assumes the juridico-technical meaning of a legal process of “discovery,” the stage in which evidence is gathered from an opposing party in the initial phase of a juridicial proceeding. Therefore, Deleuze’s critique of the clinical appropriation of Masoch can be understood precisely as pleading for the defense in a proceeding against psychoanalysis, a proceeding that would finally come to trial in Anti-Oedipus (1972).

     

    This is why Deleuze writes that, in the case of the psychoanalytic appropriation of Masoch and Sade, because the clinical judgment is too full of prejudices, “it is now necessary to begin again with an approach situated outside the clinic, a literary approach, from which these perversions originally received their names” (M 10). In an interview that took place about the same time he wrote the preface to Masoch’s novel, Deleuze described this point outside as the place where “the problem of symptomatology” must also be situated: “at a neutral point, almost zero-degree, where artists and philosophers and doctors and patients can encounter one another” (CC 177, n.25). Both these remarks correspond to a strategy one can find throughout Deleuze’s writings, from Difference and Repetition, where this point is “difference” (i.e., the repetition of the variable, the “new”) that must be located outside the Western philosophical tradition; to the Foucault, where Deleuze even formulates this strategy in the chapter of “Strategies and the Non-Stratified”; and finally, to the writings with Guattari where this point of “the outside” (le dehors) is expressed in several different ways and itself becomes multiple points each inserted or discovered to be emerging within their own assemblage or plateau (e.g., “the war-machine,” “the nomad,” “smooth space,” “the line of flight,” “deterritorialization,” etc.).

     

    Of course, this strategy no doubt receives its most forceful articulation in the following passage from Anti-Oedipus, where it is applied to the re-configuration of the relationship of critical and clinical, which necessarily entails the destruction of the previous relationship operated by psychoanalysis, as one of the primary tasks of what they call “schizoanalysis”:

     

    [T]he problem [of Oedipus] is not resolved until we do away with both the problem and the solution. It is not the purpose of schizoanalysis to resolve Oedipus, it does not intend to resolve it better than Oedipal psychoanalysis does. Its aim is to de-oedipalize the unconscious in order to reach [from a point almost outside] the real problems. Schizoanalysis proposes to reach those regions of the orphan unconscious--indeed "beyond all law"--where the problem of Oedipus can no longer be raised. (81-82)

     

    As Deleuze and Guattari explain in the next statement, this point outside is not necessarily outside psychoanalysis itself (for example, another discourse or branch of knowledge such as philosophy or political science) as it is the “outside of” psychoanalysis–“the schizo,” a figure which must be sharply distinguished from the clinical entity of the schizophrenic, since many of its representatives are drawn primarily from literature (Artaud, Beckett, Nijiinsky, Rimbaud, etc.)–and which can only be revealed through an internal reversal of the analytical apparatus. Consequently, this strategy is one of reversing the institutional priority between the two functions, critical and clinical, either by investing the clinical object with a critical function, or the critical with a clinical determination, and thereby folding one operation onto the other.

     

    Applying this example to our situation today, the critical institution of literature in the university, we might suggest that certain literary works bear a critical activity that is proper to their own creation, which occurs before or even without its representation by “criticism” or “theory.” We might ask how this activity has often become obscured by the institutional consolidation of criticism in the university so that, today, the problems of literature are separated from their own expressions. In response, we could suggest an analogy with the situation of the schizophrenic within psychoanalytic discourse, who becomes subject to the analytic and clinical form of interpretation which strips this subject of his or her own language and, in turn, makes him or her the “object” of another system of classification and knowledge. Like the clinical subject, literature today is often stripped of any enunciatory power of its own, and lately, often appears so helpless that its very representation predisposes it to the critic’s ideological rectification or discourse of truth. As in the description of Sade and Masoch above, perhaps, like psychoanalysis and its regime of “interpretation,” the critical representation of literature may also be full of too many prejudices to be of use any longer, and it is now necessary to begin all over again, as if to begin once more from a point “outside.” Therefore, we must ask in response to our own situation, how we might begin “as if” from a point outside, that is, to recommence on a plane that is immanent to the expression of “the critical” invented by writers themselves.7

     

    The Four Criteria

     

    In the introductory essay of his last work, Critique et Clinique (1993), the plane of immanence upon which the question of literature is unfolded is “Life.” More specifically, Deleuze defines literature as “the passage of life within language that constitutes Ideas (CC 5), somewhat in the same manner that Whitehead had earlier spoken of Ideas themselves as the “passage of Nature” into a place (Fold 73). Recalling the above strategy announced in the preface to Présentation de Sacher-Masoch, it is only on the plane of immanence, that is “Life,” where we can discover a point that is situated outside the (critical) representation of literature, and we can begin to pose again the question(s) proper to literature itself. Yet this statement must be understood precisely and without leaving “Life” as a pure abstraction or metaphysical expression of vitalism. Keeping in mind the strategic necessity of situating the question the critical from a point “outside” its historical representation (or representative discourse), I would like to turn to this introductory essay in order to interrogate the above passage, since it is from this point that Deleuze describes what happens when the questions of living are bound up with “the problems of writing.” In this essay, Deleuze outlines what could be called four criteria for defining the relationship of literature to life. Because these criteria may give a good approximation of the re-configuration of critical and clinical–that is, on the “uses of literature for life”–in the sections that follow I will comment on each one.

     

    I. “Literature is a passage of life that traverses outside the lived and the livable” (CC 1).

     

    This is what Deleuze means by the first sentence that begins the leading essay of Critique et Clinique, “Literature and Life”: “To write is certainly not to impose a form of expression on the matter of lived experience” (1). This statement recalls a question first posed by Proust: “If art was indeed but a prolongation of life, was it worth while to sacrifice anything to it? Was it not as unreal as life itself?” (The Captive 339). Before Deleuze, Proust is probably the greatest apologist for the “duty” of literature. How many have turned aside from its task, he asked, lacking the instinct for it, which is nothing less than the instinct for life itself. “Real life,” on the other hand, “life at last laid bare and illuminated–the only life in consequence to which can be said to be really lived–is literature, and life thus defined is in a sense all the time immanent in ordinary men no less than in the artist” (Time Regained 298). For Proust, therefore, literature is the most “real” of all things, since the ideas formed by pure intelligence may be logical, but are not necessary; moreover, perception or knowledge which is common or general is likewise not necessary, because it has not been deciphered, developed, worked-over, that is, created. (In a famous description, Proust writes that for most people memory is a darkroom containing many negatives that have not been “developed.”) Therefore, literature is life:

     

    remote from our daily preoccupations, [the life] we separate from ourselves by an ever greater gulf as the conventional knowledge we substitute for it grows thicker and more impermeable, that reality which it is very easy for us to die without ever having known and which is, quite simply, our life. (Time Regained 298-299)

     

    According to this principle, certain literary works often take the opposite path: to discern beneath the merely personal the power of the impersonal. Thus, literature sometimes concerns the question of living in the sense that the writer struggles with the problem of life in order to extract movements and becomings that are inseparable from the question of “style.” However, “style,” in this sense, does not reflect the individuated expression or personality of the artist or writer; as Proust wrote:

     

    [A]rt, if it means awareness of our own life, means also the awareness of the lives of other people--style for the writer, no less than color for the painter, is not a question of technique but of vision: it is the revelation, which by direct and conscious methods would be impossible, of the qualitative difference, the uniqueness in which the world appears to each one of us, a difference which, were it not for art, would remain the secret of every individual. (Time Regained 299)

     

    In the passage that traverses both the lived and the livable, the identities of the terms do not remain the same, but enter into a process of mutual becoming; Deleuze calls this process a “capture,” a kind of repetition that causes both to become unequal to their former definitions, and enter into a relation of becoming. Such a becoming, however, concerns the immanence of a life, and only in certain cases does it emerge to touch upon the immanence of a life that is lived and livable by others. We might ask then, what makes the life posed by literature exemplary; in other words, what causes its critical expression to pass over to the side of the clinical? It is upon this question that the value of the literary enterprise is posed, whether it receives justification and a “use” or falls into a miserable state of its own univocity. This is where the question of “passage” receives a definite qualification: literature concerns the passage of a life into language. It is only through this passage that Life itself can achieve the repetition of a higher power, and the personal can be raised to the condition of a language.

     

    Deleuze often remarks that the plane of life surpasses both the lived and the livable; the writer’s encounter often proceeds from an encounter when life, defined in terms of the lived and the livable, becomes impossible, or, when this encounter concerns something that is “too powerful, or too painful, too beautiful” (N 51) when defined in terms to of experience. Accordingly, the writer often returns from the land of the dead and is himself or herself “a stranger to life” (TI 208). In other words, the writer does not simply write from experience or memory, but also from something too painful for memory or too light for experience, perhaps even “an unbearable lightness” as in Kundera. It is for this reason, second, that the act of writing and the figure of the writer always entertain a relationship with a fundamental stupidity (betisse), which is not simply a lack of experience as the fictionalizing factor, as well as with a fundamental amnesia or “forgetting,” which is not simply a weak memory as the factor of an overly active imagination. (The récits of Marguerite Duras are exemplary in this regard). Both stupidity and forgetting are the forces that define the writer’s strangeness and estrangement from the “lived and the livable.” For example, is there not a stupidity proper to Kafka’s relationship with women that initiated the desire of the bachelor (hence, his famous statement, “Prometheus was a bachelor”), or a forgetting that one finds in Artaud, Beckett, and Joyce? As in the famous case of the “jeune homme schizophrene” (an earlier essay of which is included in Critique et Clinique), the relationship to a maternal language has undergone a fundamental trauma and dispossession and must either be invented anew (as in the case of Joyce and Proust) or pushed to its extreme limit to the point where Language itself confronts its impossibility (impouvoir, using Blanchot’s term) and comes into contact with its own outside. The latter can find its various strategies in Artaud (where the outside is the cry beyond words), or in Beckett, who pushed the language of the novel to an extreme repetition that unravels into tortured fragments at the same time that his characters devolve into partial objects (e.g., a mouth, a head, an eye, a torso, a stomach, an anus).

     

    Perhaps we can illustrate the immanence of a life with the following statement which implicitly points to the example of Kafka: “The shame of being a man–is there any better reason to write?” (CC 1). Here, “shame” defines the fundamental trait of a life that is not simply the life of Kafka, but of a “situation” particular to his case. For Kafka, therefore, the problem of writing is posed within an immanent relation to the escape from a “situation” of shame. Benjamin had earlier perceived this shame as an “elemental purity of feeling” that is fundamental to Kafka’s writings and, consequently, “Kafka’s strongest gesture [gestus]” (Benjamin 25). What is the “shame of being human?” For Benjamin, shame is primarily a social feeling: it is something one feels in the presence of others, something one feels for others. Because of this origin, the individual is innocent and cannot be found to be its cause. Consequently, in Benjamin’s reading, the situation of shame always returns to the character of the Law and its officers (the judge, the father, the mother, even the son and the daughter, or sister); the character of law is that of an incredible filth that covers everything and everyone–a defilement of being. The father in “The Judgment” wears a dirty nightshirt; in “The Metamorphosis,” the father’s uniform is covered in filth; in the Trial, the Examining Magistrate pages through a dusty volume of the Law which, when K. discovers its contents, is filled with dirty pictures. One might think this is a characteristic particular to the fathers and the officials only; however, nothing could be further from the truth. In fact, the son has become the embodiment of filth, he is vermin. Neither does woman escape, since as many have noticed, she is touched with the filth of the Law that defiles her own sex, and appears as a slut, a court prostitute, or a hunchback among the assembly of harpies who assemble on the stairs outside the painter Titorelli’s studio. Shame–i.e., the shame of being human–is nothing “personal,” but rather belongs to an unknown “family” which includes both humans and animals alike. And Kafka writes concerning his indefinite relationship to this family: “He feels as though he were living and thinking under the constraint of a family…. Because of this family… he cannot be released” (qtd. in Benjamin 25).

     

    II. “To write is not to recount one’s memories and travels, one’s loves and griefs, one’s dreams and fantasies; neither do we write with our neuroses, which do not constitute ‘passages,’ but rather those states into which we fall when our desire is blocked or plugged-up”–consequently, “literature then appears as an enterprise of health.” (CC 2-3)

     

    We might ask why Deleuze seems to love children and writers so much. Or rather, why are writers so often described in the process of “becoming-child?” Kafka’s letters often demonstrate this directly, particularly those to Felice where he takes a child’s point-of-view in talking about her “teeth” or in day-dreaming over the idea of curling up in her dresser drawer next to her “private articles,” or, finally, in the passages where he describes a thousand agitated hands fluttering and out of reach, which can be understood as prefiguring of Gregor Samsa’s thousand tiny legs waving helplessly in front of him. In addition to Kafka, we might think of Beckett as well, particularly the trilogy, where the transformation of the characters–Molloy, Malone, Jacques, Mahood, the Unnameable–all undergoing incredible and hilarious journeys and transmigrations, are haunted by endoscopic perceptions. The answer, it seems, would be simple enough: because the child knows how to play (to experiment), and the writer in the process of “becoming-child” does not imitate children but repeats a block of childhood and allows it to pass through language. However, to avoid allowing the notion of “play” to remain too simplistic (since most will say they know what “playing” is), we should turn back to Freud who entertained an original intuition of the child-at-play in his “Creative Writers and Day-Dreaming.”

     

    There Freud noticed that the child, contrary to the adult, plays in the full light of day, plays openly, and even causes his or her creations to transform the external world of perception. By way of contrast, the adult can only play in secret, and often actively hides his or her creative activities (perhaps even from himself). Adults are, first and foremost, guilty; consequently, they have lost the innocence of play, have repressed it, meaning that they aggressively prohibit all “public displays” of such an activity, transforming the nature of play itself into an unconscious source of pleasure. Freud used this distinction primarily to distinguish the play of child from the fantasy life of the adult; to show the origin of the phantasm itself has this sense of “hiding,” a guilty source of satisfaction for the adult who can only play in secret (and alone). At the same time, even Freud noticed that the artist constitutes the exceptional case to this internalization and continues to play out in the open. What’s more, Freud exclaims with a certain amount of surprise, that society allows it! Even if the artist must usually pay the price in terms of a suffering that compensates for the artist’s enjoyment and seems to satisfy the cruelty of society itself toward the artist for enjoying too much and in a manner that civilization first of all demands to be sacrificed, cut-off. This economic arrangement of cruelty and pleasure, according to Freud, is the guarantee that the creative writer and artist have to exist.

     

    Returning now to emphasize that the writer, like the child, plays openly and in the full light of day, this would seem to imply that the nature of of the activity cannot find its source in the secret, internalized, and guilty affects of the adult. As Deleuze writes, “we do not write with our neuroses” (CC 3). Wouldn’t this imply that we should look for the sense of the process on the surface of the writer’s activity, for a process that seeks to hide nothing? It seems odd, then, that often the function of interpretation is to reveal or to expose a “secret” behind the appearance of the literary effect, underneath the more overt and all-too-evident transformations: to locate the “figure in the carpet” or the figure of ideology. Is there any difference? Moreover, couldn’t this activity be seen as an extension of the earlier repression: to transform what is out in the open, on the surface, to what is hidden and secret? Wouldn’t this transform the very intentionality of the writer, so that the figure itself would appear to have been ferreted away, and desire become the desire of the phantasm? This is why interpretations of ideology begin with a false premise: that the writer was hiding anything to begin with. Perhaps this is why Deleuze-Guattari choose to highlight the most problematic of writers from the perspective of an adult-morality (Carroll and his love for little girls, Faulkner and Melville’s racism, or that of Celine, the misogyny of Miller and Burroughs, Proust’s “closeted” homosexuality, Artaud’s mania and crypto-fascism, Kafka’s bachelor-desire, Woolf’s frigidity, etc.), as if to say, “Well now, there’s nothing hidden here!” “All perverts–everyone of them!” Or perhaps, “If we are to judge, if we must arrive at a judgment, then we must find a better evidence; but at least, we must find something more interesting to say.” But then “perversion” may not be the right word. Again, this evokes the sense of symptomatology, since the writer “plays”–openly, without shame, or guilt–with what the adult chooses to keep “secret,” even though secrecy makes these symptoms no less determining of a life and perhaps even more so. How many times lately have we had to suffer the moralism of perverts, racists, misogynists, and pederasts who choose to persecute others for their own most secretive desires? Thus, the publicity with which the writer plays with his or her desires is not perverse in the least; rather, the function of “perversion” describes the position of a normative morality under the condition that enjoyment either remains “a dirty little secret” of the individual, or undergoes a strange reversal into sadism and cruelty.

     

    III. “Health as literature,” as writing, consists in fabulation, which Deleuze defines as “the invention of a people who is missing”; thus, “the ultimate aim of literature is to set free, in the delirium, in this creation of a health, in this invention of a people, the possibility of a life.”

     

    Under this criterion, we should recall the three characteristics that belong to the concept of “minor literature”: first, a certain situation occurs when a major language is affected with a high co-efficient of deterritorialization; second, everything is political and the “individual concern” or “private interest” disappears or serves as a mere environment or background; third, everything takes on a collective value. From these three criteria, we can locate the specific conditions that give rise to what Deleuze calls “fabulation.” The concept of “fabulation” first appears in Bergsonism (1966) and then disappears almost entirely until it is highlighted in the later writings, particularly in The Time Image (1985) and again in the interviews conducted between 1972-1990 that appear in Negotiations (1990), where Deleuze makes the following pronouncement: “Utopia is not a good concept, but rather a “fabulation” common to people and to art. We should return to the Bergsonian notion of fabulation to provide it with a political sense” (N 174). In light of our effort to understand this concept in view of a generalized literary clinic, we might understand the concept of fabulation as having two sides: creation and prognosis. Fabulation is the art of invention as well as a conceptual avatar of a “problem solving” instinct that remedies an unbearable situation–particularly with regard to the situation of “the people who are missing” (CC 4). The goal of fabulation, understood as a process, is where the writer and the people go toward one another (see TI 153ff); in this sense they share a common function. Deleuze writes, “To write for this people who are missing… (‘for’ means less ‘in place of’ than ‘for the benefit of’)” (CC 4). That is, they share a process, a vision beyond words, a language beyond sounds. In this sense, fabulation could be said to resemble the function of dream work and, by extension, the moments of selective rearrangement that mark historical discontinuities. What is power unleashed in revolution but the ideal game deployed within what is essentially a fiction; that is, the power to select and re-order the objects, artifacts, and meanings that belong to a previous world? Utopia, then, rather than designating a static representation of the ideal place, or topos, is rather the power of the “ideal” itself which can bifurcate time and create possible worlds. This is why Deleuze calls “fabulation” a better concept than “utopia,” since it designates a power or a vital process rather than representing a static genre–an ideal form of repetition rather than the repetition of an ideal form.

     

    Fabulation entails a “becoming” that happens from both directions–it is both the becoming-popular of the creator or intellectual, and the becoming-creative of a people. In many ways, this movement echoes the description of the cultural process of nationalist or post-colonialist art first examined by Frantz Fanon in The Wretched of the Earth (1963), which can be used to illustrate the concept of fabulation.8 First, in Fanon’s analysis, the function of fabulation that determines the writer’s cultural presence in colonial culture and the forms of “socialization” and identification that underlie the perspective of the modern “creator” are both explicitly developed:

     

    At the very moment when the native intellectual is anxiously trying to create a cultural work he fails to realize that he is utilizing techniques and language which are borrowed from the stranger in his country. He contents himself with stamping these instruments with a hallmark he wishes to be national, but which is strangely reminiscent of exoticism. The native intellectual who comes back to his people [as Fanon previously qualifies, "whatever they were or whatever they were or whatever they are" (222)] by way of culture behaves in fact like the foreigner. Sometimes he shows no hesitation in using a dialect in order to show his will to be as near as possible to the people; but the ideas he expresses and the preoccupations he is taken up with have no common yardstick to measure the real situation which the men and women of his country know. (223)

     

    The incommensurability that underlines the initial appearance of the colonized intellectual also belongs to a preliminary phase in the creation of national conscience of culture in Fanon’s reading. It must be followed by other phases which re-configure the attributes (or “property”) of culture between its contingent and exterior genres and its interior collective expression of “inner truth” (Fanon 225). (Fanon articulates the latter as culture’s muscularity, in relation to political action, and rhythm, in relation to ethnic and regional identities). In a post-colonial culture’s incipient phase, however, these attributes are uncoordinated and this non-coordination can be seen to inform the very appearance of hybridity in the image of the cultural producer and his or her creative work. From the perspective of the post-colonial “people”–who, at this stage, “are still missing”– the initial schizoid image of culture which is also manifested in the appearance of the colonized intellectual is the result of the mutilating psychological effects and de-humanization of the colonizing situation. This addresses the problem of becoming from the perspective of the native intellectual and writer, where “going back to your own people means to become a dirty wog, to go native as much as possible, to become unrecognizeable, and to cut off those wings that before you had allowed to grow (Fanon 221). Part native and part stranger, near and distant at the same time, the creator only “appears” to manifest a characteristic of proximity by imitating native dialects and speech patterns; however, this creator’s “ideas” are at first both unfamiliar and strangely distant from a people’s perception of their own image.

     

    Fanon himself accounts for this hybridity by assigning it two causes. First, hybridity results from an appearance of “culture” itself that is uncoordinated with political and national conscience (i.e., a direct consequence of the colonial process that “alienated” and even “negated” any relationship between these two sites of mentality). Second, this appearance of the indigenous cultural producer and national conscience of culture precedes the actualization of political revolt. This peremptory and premature appearance gives the creator and the cultural work the characteristics of “a-temporality” and “affective remoteness” in the minds of the people themselves:

     

    The artist who has decided to illustrate the truths of the nation turns paradoxically toward the past and away from actual events. What he ultimately intends to embrace are in fact the castoffs of thought, its shells and corpses, a knowledge which has been stabilized once and for all. But the native intellectual who wishes to create the authentic work of art must realize that the truths of a nation are in the first place its realities. He must go on until he has found the seething pot out of which the learning of the future will emerge. (Fanon 225)

     

    This diagnostic and therapeutic narrative structures the dialectical stages that the creator (and the “people”) must pass through in order to arrive at the synthesis of collective political and cultural expression. Fanon traces these stages from alienation of an interiorized cultural identification with the colonizer; to the spark of an original memory (which Fanon compares to the return of infantile and maternal associations); to a period of malaise, nausea, and convulsion (expressions of “vomiting out” the poison of the earlier cultural identification); and at last to the final stage of combat in the martyrological expression of a true popular culture, where the writer becomes “the mouth-piece of a new reality in action” (Fanon 223). Thus there is a deep analogy between the ethnography of a “people” and the story of the coming-to-conscience of the creator’s voice, the manifestation of a culture’s essential “property” and authentic expression of its innermost nature. At the end of the dialectic of culture outlined by Fanon, the “mental space of a people” that had been distorted by the instruments of colonization gradually draws close to itself in the image of the creator and remembers in the voice of the poet the sound of its own voice. The final image of proximity occurs when the creator and the people become one mentality in which culture thinks itself in–and as–the substance of its own ideational life. The “organic coordination” between the poet’s plastic expression and the people’s inner thought achieves such a synthesis of muscularity and natural rhythm that those who before would never thought to compose a literary work “find themselves in exceptional circumstances… [and]… feel the need to speak to their nation, to compose a sentence which expresses the heart of the people, and to become the mouth-piece of a new reality in action” (Fanon 223).

     

    We could see here in Fanon’s description of the process between the marginalized writer and “a people who are missing,” an echo of a lesson from Kafka that Deleuze often emphasizes in the context of his discussion of fabulation:

     

    The author can be marginalized or separate from his more or less illiterate community as much as you like; this condition puts him all the more in a position to express potential forces and, in his very solitude, to be a true collective agent, a collective leaven, a catalyst. (TI 221-222)

     

    This is the solitude that Kafka addressed in terms of impossibility, where the “problem of writing” is fundamentally related to a collective impossibility: the situation of a people who either live in a language that is not their own, or who no longer even know their own and know poorly the major language they are forced to serve (K 19). To use an expression that is invoked throughout Deleuze’s work, and is principally inspired from Blanchot’s writings, the writer’s solitude cannot be reduced to a normal situation of solitude in the world, to an experience of being-alone and apart from others; this is because the figures above do not experience their aloneness from the perspective of this world, or of this society, or from the presence of others who exist, but rather from the perspective of another possible world or another community that these figures anticipate even though the conditions for this community are still lacking. Often this desire or longing which brings about the condition of solitude is expressed in the discourse of love as in the case of Kierkegaard with Regina, or of Proust with Albertine. In the latter case, Marcel is haunted by the fact that no matter how close he comes to Albertine, or no matter how he draws her near him even to the point of holding her hostage, he is always haunted by the fact that behind the face of Albertine, there always lies another Albertine, a thousand other Albertines each breaking upon one another like waves of an infinite ocean. Thus, it is this experience of solitude that burns into his mind the impossible and delirious desire of capturing each one, of “knowing” all the possible Albertines, as the highest goal of Love.

     

    Returning to the case of Kafka, according to Deleuze, the solitude of the writer is related most profoundly to the situation of the people who are missing. This is why the solitude of certain writers is in no way a private affair for Deleuze, and why the concept of “solitude” must be qualified to evoke the uncanny experience of inhabiting a strange language, a language that is not and may never be one’s own, where the very act of speaking brings with it the feeling of self-betrayal, or of “falsifying oneself,” and where the alternative of remaining silent bears the threat of extinction. It is in this sense that the position of the writer is virtual to that of the collective, and, therefore, the so-called “private” is immediately collective as well, that is, “less a concern of literary history than of a people” (Diaries 149). Deleuze writes concerning this situation which was specific to Kafka’s predicament, but which can describe the situation of other writers as well (such as Melville or Woolf), that “the most individual enunciation is a particular case of the collective enunciation” (K 84). Moreover, “this is even a definition: a statement is literary when it is ‘taken up’ by a bachelor who precedes the collective conditions of enunciation” (K 84). This last definition appears to re-classify the entire sense of the literary as emerging from “a bachelor-machine,” a concept that Deleuze draws from the figure of Kafka but that also can be found to refer to the figure of Proust; however, the condition of a “bachelor” can be redefined, outside its gendered determination, to describe or refer to a situation in which one prefers the state of being alone (i.e., exceptional, singular, anonymous) than to “take on” the identity of a subject one is assigned by the majority. The situation of preferring to remain a bachelor can find affinities, for example, with the situation of a Jew in 18th century Europe, with that of a woman in 19th and 20th century societies, or with the situation of minorities in America today.

     

    IV. Finally, literature opens up a kind of foreign language within language.” (CC 5)

     

    This invention has three aspects: a) through syntax, the destruction of the maternal language; b) through delirium, the invention of a new language which carries the first outside its usual furrows (habitus), and which, in turn, entails a second destruction: the clichés of visibilities and statements which, although not completely reducible to language, are nevertheless inseparable from it, being the “ideas” and “habits” that determine the forms of seeing and saying; c) in the third aspect, as a result of the destruction of the maternal language and of the clichéd statements and stock visibilities (which are like its ghosts), the literary process bears the former language to its limit, turning it toward its own “outside,” which Deleuze describes as its inverse or reverse side made up of visions and auditions, which “are not outside language, but the outside of language” (CC 5). The final aim of these three aspects, according to Deleuze, is the concept of literature defined “the passage of life within language that constitutes ideas” (CC 5).

     

    Taking up the first aspect, through the destruction of the maternal language, literature functions as a war machine. “The only way to defend language is to attack it” (Proust, qtd. in CC 4). This could be the principle of much of modern literature and capture the sense of process that aims beyond the limit of language. As noted above, however, this limit beyond which the outside of language appears is not outside language, but appears in its points of rupture, in the gaps, or tears, in the interstices between words, or between one word and the next. The examples of writers who define their relationship to language under the heading of this principle are too numerous to recount, although I will provide a few significant examples for the purposes of illustration. First, we might point to the poet Paul Celan, for example, whose poetry is precisely defined as the systematic destruction of the language of Goethe and Rilke in the sense that the poem itself expresses a word that no German mouth can speak (the deterritorialization of language from the teeth and the lips). In Celan, the poem itself is nothing less than a materialization of the mother’s corpse that is gradually interned within the German language and given a specific place of mourning; thus, the image of the mother is a shadow of the lost object by which Celan draws the entire German language into a process of mourning. This is Celan’s process: the “passage” of the Mother’s death into the German language; the passage of the living German language into an encounter with his Mother’s death and, by extension, with the murder of his maternal race. The use of color in Celan’s poetry gives us a vivid illustration of the Deleuzian and Proustean notion of vision. The poet is a true colorist who causes colors to appear as nearly hallucinatory visions in the language of the poem; however, in Celan’s poems, the descriptive and neutral function of color is poetically transformed into the attributes of his mother’s body–her hair, or her skin, her eyes; the green of a decaying corpse. It is as if each enunciation of each color will henceforth bear a reference to his mother’s body, that the German language is modified to incorporate this cryptic reference into its poetic and descriptive functions. Thus, the green is the color of summer grass, but it is also the color of my mother’s decaying shadow; blue is the color of the sky, but it is also the color of the sky the day it wore my mother’s hair; red is the color of the tulip, but it is also the color of the one who that day “when the silent one comes to behead the tulips” (Poems 53); finally, yellow is the hair of Marguerite, but it is also the color of my mother’s star, the star that marked her for extinction.

     

    Kafka also approaches the German language with the statement of his swimming champion, “I speak the same language as you, but don’t understand a single word you’re saying” (qtd. in CC 5), and at the same time draws on the resources of the all too vernacular and deterritorialized Czech-German and the all too symbolic and allegorical Yiddish (“a language of the heart” [Diaries 151]) in order to purify the German language and the syntax of Goethe from its own cultural signification. In other words, as Deleuze often recounts, Kafka “creates a kind of foreign language within language” (CC 5) that, although it bears an uncanny and perfect resemblance to the major language, no longer bears the significance for German culture and emerges as a kind of war machine within its majoritarian sense. As Deleuze and Guattari write, by a kind of schizo-politeness hidden beneath an almost too-perfect German syntax, “he will make the German take flight on a line of escape… he will tear out Prague German all the qualities of underdevelopment it has tried to hide; he will make it cry with an extremely sober and rigorous cry… to bring language slowly and progressively to the desert… to give syntax to the cry” (K 26). This marks the importance of animals in Kafka’s shorter works–the musical dogs that appear in “Investigations of a Dog,” the singing mouse-folk in “Josephine, the Mouse-Singer,” the song of the Ape in “Report to the Academy,” the low-cry of the Jackals in “The Jackals and Arabs”–but also the musical auditions of the other fabulous creatures that Kafka creates, such as Odradek in “Cares of a Family Man” whose laughter bears the airy sound of dried leaves, or the silence of the Sirens in the tale of the same name. In all these cases, we have examples of pure sonorous auditions that are introduced into the German language. It is through the deterritorialization of the human that the German language passes through a becoming-animal, that animals introduce the notes of a strange music that has never been heard before in German literature, that Kafka introduces new possibilities into German tongue, “a music made up of deterritorialized sounds” (K 26). In themselves, as pure sonorous material, these sounds may have already been possible: the melody of a dog’s howl, the shrill silence of a mouse, the low moan of the jackal. However, in the form they take in Kafka’s language–for example, the first song that the Ape learns from a drunken sailor, which becomes his primitive language lesson–becomes an “idea” in its passage through language, an “audition” of a cry of humiliation and oppression that Kafka first introduces as such into the German ear. It is in this manner that he both escapes the oppressive, classical harmonies of the German language and, at the same time, institutes a pedagogy of syntax in which he teaches the German language to cry.

     

    Taking up the second aspect, the invention of “a delirium, which forces it out of its usual furrows” (CC 5), we should recall one of the principle axioms of Anti-Oedipus which is that desire always invests or is immanent to the social field of production, in order to apply this axiom to “the desire to write.” The desire to write, at one level, is a delirium which is immediately social. How could we otherwise explain the institution of criticism that has secreted around the work in the modern societies based upon writing if not as an effort to submit this delirium to the identifiable categories of a “proper delirium” that functions as the basis of the group? At the same time, if we were to attempt to grasp “the desire to write” from its immanent perspective within the socius, we would need to conceive of the function of writing in all its occasions: from the legal or juridical and the legislative, to the hermeneutic and confessional modes of writing. Perhaps, then, the figure of the writer emerges to “represent” this delirium and, thereby, to isolate the “problem of writing” to a rare and exceptional cases we call “writers,” almost in the same manner that Derrida had illustrated around the function of the pharmakon. It is as if society, which itself is constructed by and from writing, must also produce a being who embodies in order to protect itself from the madness that belongs to its own order of possibility. Is there any wonder then why the writer has so often been defined by the attributes of illness or bad health? Again, this may explain Deleuze and Guattari’s selection of the series of problematic writers to combat this definition. To close the work off by applying these symptoms to the ethical or psychological character of an author, and thereby to “psychologize” or to “impeach” the writer, is to alienate the critical function of these writers–that is, the “lens” they offer to perceive what otherwise remains obscure and misapprehended by its individuated or psychological forms. Recalling again the second criteria, the principle distinction is the “openness” these symptoms receive in the writing must be set against the usual secret forms that determine the expression of the unconscious phantasies, or individual symptoms.9

     

    In Anti-Oedipus, it is with the discovery of the production proper to the schizophrenic that Deleuze-Guattari find a degree-zero of the delirium that the schizophrenic shares with society: “he hallucinates and raves universal history, and proliferates the races” (AO 85). Thus, the schizo refers to the function of a delirium as the principle of “desiring-production” that society itself uses to “distribute races, cultures, and gods”–in short, to “make itself obeyed”–on the body without organs (the full body of the earth) (A0 84). In Deleuze and Guattari’s use of the concept of delirium we might detect a certain cosmological theory of madness (i.e., the thesis of madness as oeuvre which they share in some ways with Foucault), which was first presented by Freud in his famous commentary on Daniel Schreber, who created a universe with his delirium and then proceeded to populate it with gods, demi-gods (or demons), as well as with new races and sexes. These were the personages of Schreber’s fabulous delirium; however, the structure of this delirium also describes the origin of the prohibitive mechanisms that society itself produces. In other words, the language of madness simply locates in the “story-telling function” of figures like Schreber the very same mechanisms that society itself uses to engender a world populated with gods, cultures, races, and peoples. Given the conservative function of this “myth-making” faculty, we might ask how, according to the major thesis of Anti-Oedipus, the delirium proper to schizophrenic production and social production can lead to the potential of fabulation as a relay to revolutionary force. This is the point around which many commentaries on Deleuze-Guattari’s use of the schizo fall into error by taking the clinical entity of the schizophrenic as a kind of model creator, a turn to romanticism. However, the equation of the fabulation of the clinical schizophrenic with social fabulation has the subtle effect of rendering social production the truth of the clinical equation, since the clinical personage of the schizophrenic constitutes that point where desiring-production is blocked, falls into an impasse, becomes reactive or sick. If the clinical entity of the schizophrenic is identical with society, then we find the true subject of schizoanalysis, which is social production. Therefore, within the literary process delirium undergoes a positive “transvaluation” (Nietzsche) which differentiates it from its repressive or conservative functions in madness and society. That is, if the world itself “is the set of symptoms whose illness merges with man,” it is by means of this process that “literature is a health” (CC iv).

     

    Finally, concerning the third aspect of these criteria, Deleuze writes that “…the final aim of literature… is the passage of life within language that constitutes ideas” (CC 5, emphasis mine). In Foucault (1990), Deleuze situates this aspect that belongs to modern literature in what is essentially a psychology of the fold, whereby language is disarticulated from the “grand unities of discourse” (Foucault) which structure the possibilities of enunciation. In Critique et Clinique, Deleuze recalls the above formulation when he describes the event of literature as, “in effect, when another language is created within language, it is a language in its entirety that tends toward an ‘asyntactic,’ ‘agramatical’ limit, or that communicates with its own outside (CC iv). Deleuze locates this aspect of modern literary practices in an analysis that owes much to Foucault’s stubborn persistence to privilege the question of literature in a time when it was being subordinated to the forces of negative (work, communication, information, identity), particularly to privilege the possibilities of resistance that are potential in the recent and overt tendency of modern writers to uncover a strange language within language. Accordingly, modern literature creates within language a non-linguistic stammering that inclines towards “a-typical expression” and “a-grammatical effects” (e.g., Berryman, Celan, Queneau, Cummings, Mallarmé).

     

    As a result of this process, ideas emerge from the process as what Deleuze calls visions and auditions–these are the forms of seeing and hearing that are specific to the literary process in its passage within Language. As Deleuze further describes, however, these ideas appear only when the literary process achieves its aim and breaks through the limit of language, a limit that is not outside language, but rather the outside of language which language alone makes possible. “These visions are not fantasies, but veritable Ideas that the writer sees or hears in the interstices of language, in its intervals” (CC 5). Although they bear a certain hallucinatory quality specific to the literary effect (e.g., Proust’s “madelaine,” Gombrowizc’s “hanged-sparrow,” Melville’s “white whale,” Silko’s “spider-web”), they cannot be reduced to the psychological fantasies of the author nor to “ideologemes” of a collective unconscious, since they take place, as Kafka said, “in the full light of day” and not “down below in the cellar of structure” (Diaries 1910-13 197). Consequently, it is often through words or between words that is the implicit aim of the literary process; this desire on the part of the writer is accompanied by a certain destruction of the stock forms of visibilities and statements, of linguistic and syntactical habits, clichés of the quotidian and common utterances, stock and made-to-order descriptions and categorical prescriptions that all too often imprison what is seen and heard in a fog of nothingness.

     

    This labor of the artist, this struggle to discern beneath matter, beneath experience, beneath words, something that is different from them, is a process exactly the reverse of that which, in our everyday lives in which we live avoiding our own gaze, is at every moment satisfied by vanity and passion, intellect and habit, extinguishing our true impressions that are entirely concealed from us, buried underneath a junk heap of verbal concepts and practical goals that we falsely call 'life.' (Time Regained 299-300)

     

    In a certain sense, then, we might say that modern literature creates the conditions for “good habits” of language use. “What are we but habits of saying ‘I’?” Deleuze first proposes this question in his study of Hume (ES x). The question of language that both philosophy and literature expound upon in different manners, therefore, is one of developing and promoting “good habits” of language usage and diagnosing “bad or destructive” habits. Philosophy has always concerned itself with the “uses and abuses” of language for the purpose of living (and dying) well; however, this image of good sense is not an object of logic, but of ethics or even etiquette. Nietzsche understood this as the essence of logic, as well as an image of philosophy as “the transvaluation of values” which, first of all include linguistic values, or “signs,” whose proper sense can only be the object of a genealogical study, such as Foucault later described in his essay “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History.” Consequently, we find in Foucault’s work an original relationship of language to the “body” (the materiality of the self), a relationship which is given an historical and diagnostic expression. Habits (habitus), understood as the modern form of repetition, stand for those institutions of the statements that interpellate us and which define us by determining the possible attributes that can belong to the “I.” As a certain species of repetition, moreover, habits achieve a degree zero of memory (where the particular equals the universal), producing the condition in which “what we do not remember, we repeat.” (DR 19). Thus, certain uses of language can be defined as the cause of our illness, since they lead to a botched form of life, self, individuality, power, etc. We must recognize the effects of these “habits” upon the process of thinking as well, particularly in the sense that the “interiority of thought” (the grand circuit of associations, signs, concepts, memory, and feeling) is “limited” (contracted or disciplined) by the external forms of discourse and language. It is not a question of thought that is without language, but rather of thinking which appears in its most extended circuit which enters into combinations with the elements of seeing and speaking which are “exterior” to a language defined by formed statements and the visibility of objects. Consequently, we can define this problematic as a part of the Deleuzian critique of repetition since our repetitions, or habits of language use, determine the unconscious of our representations.

     

    On the other hand, certain modern literary practices, rather than being founded by their representational function, can be understood as a profound experimentation that reveals the positivity and the limits of our language-habits (our addiction to saying “I”). In the statement “I love you,” for example, why is the “I” meaningless, as well as “love”? Perhaps one might attempt to explain the first by the power of the shifter and the second by the privilege of the performative statement. On the other hand, we can understand this as a particular species of repetition which has become abstract and too general, in the case of the first, and meaningless and too particular in the case of the second. What Deleuze praises as “the curve of the sentence” can be understood as a profound experimentation that reveals the limits of certain expressions, negates their abstractness for a “new” positivity of language. Deleuze writes as early as Difference and Repetition that the event of positivity occurs necessarily in the advent of the “new” that introduces variables into a previous repetition. Statements such as Kafka’s “I am a bug” or Fitzgerald’s “I am a giraffe” lead to the discovery of the non-sense that belongs to the statement “I am a man” (TP 377). Consequently, the first two statements repeat the last one and at the same time introduce a new predicate, causing the statement “I am a man” to be lacking definition and, in a certain sense, in need of rectification. In other words, the statement “I am a man” leads to nothing and can be criticized as a bad use of definition. It defines no one and, thus, makes the “abstract” predicate of man possible as a real relationship. Rather than representing, Kafka’s proposition “selects” and corrects the imperfections of the former definition. It reveals the limits of the statement as well as the visibility of the language-predicate; it introduces new variables into old habits of being, new possibilities, clearer and more definite articulations, new possibilities for the passage of a life into language.

     

    Epilogue: The Question “What is Minor Literature” Today?

     

    In conclusion, we should return again to situate the question of literature as one of the principle themes of the two volumes of Capitalism and Schizophrenia. In order to do so, it would be necessary to pay more specific attention to the status of the literary which occurs in the work of Deleuze-Guattari. When and in what manner is it evoked? For example, in the cries of poor A.A., the stroll of Lenz, the sucking-stones of Molloy, Kleist’s Marionettes or Michael-Kolhaus on his horse. In each case, literature is allied to a “war machine,” which means it draws its force directly from “the outside.” Deleuze and Guattari constantly pit this condition of literary enunciation against any representation that subjugates it to a form of interiority (whether that of the subject-author, the private individual, a culture, or even of a race). It is not by accident that the lines from Nijinsky are always recited like the lyrics of a favorite song: “I am a bastard, a beast, a negro.” The relationship of the concept of literature to a war machine is essential, and we should note that many of the examples of the war machine are drawn from writers (Artaud, Buchner, Kafka, Kleist), as well as philosopher-artists such as Nietzsche and Kiekegaard. In A Thousand Plateaus, the conflict between the literary war machine and the critic as “man of the state” is first attested to by the confrontation between Artaud and Jacques Riviere (although not a man of the state, he was according to Deleuze, not the first or last critic to mistake himself for “a prince in the republic of letters”), who found Artaud incomprehensible and poorly organized and he made no hesitation in giving his advice to “pauvre A.A.”–“Work! work! If you revise, then soon you will arrive at a method (Cogitatio Universalis) to express your thoughts more directly!” (TP 377). Next, the literary war machine is attested to by Kleist’s conflict with Goethe (“truly a man of the State among all literary figures”). In the case of the figures like Nietzsche and Kierkegaard, there is the conflict between the “public professor” and the “private thinker,” although Deleuze qualifies the latter notion in order to argue that, in fact, the “private thinker” may not be a good term, since it closes around too reductive a notion of the “private individual,” and too simple of a form of interiority where the so-called spontaneity of thought is said to occur. Instead, Deleuze argues that the “solitude” one approaches in the writings of Nietzsche, or in Kafka, is a solitude that is extremely “populated” (TI 467).

     

    The concept of literature we have been discussing fundamentally invokes a situation of language where the collective subject of enunciation (different from the official enunciation a “people,” or of a “national consciousness”) exists only in a latent or virtual state that cannot be located in the civil and juridical language of statutes and laws, the “paper language” of bureaucracy, the technocratic and vehicular language of administrators, entrepreneurs, and capitalists. It would not be an exaggeration to assert that most technical and administrative language, even in the first world, bears an historical relationship to the early techniques invented by colonial administrations–a language composed purely of “order-words” (les mots d’ordre), or a language of command in which the law finds its purest expression, just as Sade discovered the essence of Enlightenment reason in the categorical imperatives of pornographic speech: “Do this!” “Submit!” “Obey!” Concerning the status of this language, as Fanon asserts, we have every reason to believe the colonizer when he says, “the colonized, I know them!” since he has created the categories that were installed at the deepest point of their interiority by the colonizing process, categories which continue to legislate their own knowledge of themselves as “a subjected people.” Moreover, Fanon writes, “colonialism is not satisfied merely with holding a people in its grip and emptying the native’s brain of all form and content. By a kind of perverted logic, it turns out to be the past of the oppressed people, and distorts, disfigures, and destroys it” (Fanon 210). Deleuze refers to this as the condition by which a “people as Subject” falls to the condition of a “people-subjected” (TI 164ff). As we have witnessed many times, the question of “identity” is always a dizzying and even treacherous problem from the position of the colonized, leading often to the very “impasse” from which this category was created, underscoring an “intolerable situation,” since the identity they assume in speaking, in saying “I (the colonized)” has been essentially fabulated and only serves to subject them further. This intolerable condition of enunciation is a condition that is specific to the concept of “minor literature.” At the same time, we must take inventory of the fact that the history of literature in the West is full of examples of this impossible situation; for example: Hippolytus and Phaedra, Antigone; Kafka’s “metamorphosis,” there is Gregor who cannot speak, but rather emits a shrill note that can barely be discerned; but also in Melville, we have the character of Babo in “Benito Cereno” who refuses to speak “as the accused” and chooses to remain silent (therefore, in full possession of his speech), but also in the figure of Bartleby with his “I would prefer not to…. ”

     

    Why does this situation appear as a fundamental problematic, if not to signal something genetic to the literary enunciation: the problem and the power of “falsehood,” of the fictional status of the enunciation that essentially haunts the situation of writing? Taking up the notion of the “public sphere,” such a concept already refers to the particularly “striated openness” (Offendlichkeit) which is established when the dominant institutions of language and culture reflect the pre-conscious interests of the nation-state or class. In such condition, the literary machine itself has already been “reterritorialized” and now functions to reflect the genius of the national character or the spirit of Culture. Thus, we might refer to this moment, one that has prepared the way for the strictly ideological representation of literature in the academy today, which is reduced to a sub-compartment of the “political unconscious” or to the poetics of the State-form. This representation of literature is necessarily one-dimensional, and must sacrifice the variable relationships that originally belonged to the production of the art-work, and above all, must repress the whole question of art often by reducing it to the category of aesthetics which can, in turn, be prosecuted for its falsifying production. Here we might refer to the process of this reterritorialization, again using the analysis of the relationship between the “war machine” and the “State-form” outlined earlier. When a literary machine is captured by the State-form and provided an end, what is that end except a war directed against “the people” in the form of national memory and an official story-telling function? Recalling the problems of criticism we raised in the beginning of this discussion, the very taxonomy and organization of literature soon repeats the rank-and-file order of major and minor tastes, as well as the striated organization of the story-telling function into a form of Canon. On the contrary, the writer does not often seek to represent the truth since, as Deleuze remarks, the “truth” is often the category invented by the colonizer and the oppressor. Rather, citing another anecdotal phrase that Deleuze often employs, the writer seeks to raise the false to a higher power, that is, beyond the moral-juridical opposition of true-false that is maintained by the model of truth. To raise the false to a higher power is to discover the principle of fabulation that governs even truthful representation, to turn this principle into a critical force which addresses the intolerable situation of “a people who is missing.” Accordingly, literature bears within its fragmented body–scattered, torn to pieces, or ‘dispersed on the four winds”–the seeds of a people to come. These seeds are the germs of a “collective assemblage of enunciation,” which as Deleuze often declares, are real without necessarily being actual and ideal without necessarily being abstract (TI 147ff).

     

    Today, Deleuze and Guattari situate the conditions for the emergence of minor literature in a world where the forms of collective enunciation and national consciousness are breaking down on several fronts, as a result of the immigration patterns and displacement of national labor forces, and the decline of the “State-form” itself.

     

    How many people today live in a language that is not their own? Or no longer, not yet, even know their own and know poorly the major language that they are forced to serve? This is a problem of immigrants, and especially of their children, the problem of minorities, the problem of minor literature, but also a problem for all of us: how to tear a minor literature away from its own language, allowing it to challenge the language and making it follow a sober revolutionary path? How to become a nomad and an immigrant and a gypsy in relation to one's own language? (K 19)

     

    In understanding the above passage, in order to determine the status of the “literary,” the primary emphasis must fall upon the absence of a particular collective enunciation from official and public institutions of language and national culture. In the absence of a distinct majoritarian formation of the “public sphere,” which gives enunciations weight and reference–which “orders reality,” in so many words–a body of literature assumes the shadowy and non-essential region of a collective enunciation, a “minor public” whose existence is always haunted by the “imaginary” (or fabulous) nature of its agora (its open space). But, as Deleuze and Guattari write,

     

    the literary machine thus becomes the relay for a revolutionary machine-to-come, not at all for ideological reasons but because the literary machine alone is determined to fill the conditions of collective enunciation that is lacking elsewhere in the mileau: literature is the people's concern. (K 17-18)

     

    In order to strip this last statement of any romanticism in association with the nationalist or ethnic entity of a people invented during the 19th century, I should stress that without specific attention to the position of enunciation that is evoked here, we lose both the status of what Deleuze-Guattari call the “literary machine” and the specific relationship that is being drawn up between a collective enunciation and the concept of minor literature. Here, the status of a minor literature is the problem of its multiple forms and locations, since it does not have an institution that organizes and disciplines its forms. This does not mean that it is formless, but rather its organization of collective enunciations is dispersed across several registers of the major language it inhabits (legends, private letters, songs, heated conversations, stories, fables, etc.) and has the character of dream-language in the various operations it performs upon the form of visibilities and on the organization of statements. Finally, only when these criteria of minor literature are fulfilled can we begin to understand the statement that “literature is a concern of the people,” perhaps even a vital concern of public health–a concern that may demand both a clinical and a critical approach to the uses (and the abuses) of the question of literature for life.

     

    Notes

     

    1. C.f., “Appendix,” Foucault, p. 131ff. Some of the examples Deleuze gives of these new arrangements are “the foldings proper to the chains of a genetic sequence, a new form of life based on the potential of silicon in third generation machines,” the political and economic stratification of the earth under the final stages of capitalism. The description of a vital logic (or “radical empiricism”) echoes the fabulous “problem-solving” instinct of Life first defined in Bergsonism. (C.f., “Élan Vital as a Movement of Differentiation,” pp. 91-113.) Hereafter, all parenthetical citations will refer to the following works; the most frequently cited references will be indicated parenthetically by the following abbreviations:

     

        • Anti-Oedipus: AO
        • Bergsonism: B
        • Difference and Repetition: DR
        • Empiricism and Subjectivity: H
        • Essays Critical and Clinical (Critique et Clinique): CC
        • Kafka: Toward a Minor Literature: K
        • Logic of Sense: LS
        • Cinema I: The Movement Image: MI
        • Cinema II: The Time Image: TI
        • Foucault F
        • Negotiations: N
        • Présentation de Sacher-Masoch (Coldness and Cruelty): M
        • A Thousand Plateaus: TP.
        • What is Philosophy?: WP

     

    2. Wlad Godzich, “Emergent Literature and Comparative Literature,” in The Culture of Literacy (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1994), 275.

     

    3. At times the reader may notice a certain unapologetic Nietzschean tone–as Deleuze himself describes, “becoming a bit of a guerrilla” (LS 158)–in my characterization of the current critical approach to the question of literature. This is not accidental. In my view, there is a weakness inherent in those commentators today who want to appropriate Deleuze’s writings without also appropriating what is dangerous in it as well. It is to raise the possibility of something dangerous or inherently risky that I have alluded to Nietzsche�’s essay “The Uses and Abuses of History for Life,” which itself concerns a similar set of problems and issues that surrounded the dominant epistemological orientation of his age. Although my implicit aim is to cause the current critical image of literature to “explode,” this objective is justified by the belief that only what is worthy of being valued can be submitted to destruction with the faith that this “will promote rather than injure the general propriety” of its uses for life (Nietzsche 86).

     

    4. For a very brief and preliminary discussion of the concept of “disciplinary societies,” see “Postscript on Control Societies,” Negotiations, trans. Martin Joughlin (New York: Columbia UP, 1995), pages 177-182. Concerning the present moment, Deleuze comments that “discipline would in its turn begin to break down as new forces slowly moved into place, then made rapid advances after the Second World War: [from that point] we were no longer in disciplinary societies, we were leaving them behind” (N 178).

     

    5. This is most evident today in marxist or feminist theories, for example, where each statement must refer back to the subject of enunciation in order retain its representative function. Elizabeth Grosz’s writings, for example, bear all the characteristics of a good chess game, in which she must first lay out the positions between orthodox and radical feminism on one side, and the writings of Deleuze and Guattari on the other; surveying which moves are possible and which are not, referring back to the subject of enunciation to discover which statements can be employed to further the game for feminists. Her thinking always moves forward under the condition, even the mandate, that she cannot lose her subject (even if she wanted to) without also losing the representative function of her discourse; consequently, her writing moves constantly “between” feminist subject and the philosophy of Deleuze, proposing an implacable “becoming” which never achieves identification of closure on either end. This constitutes her strategy, since after mapping the board and studying the intrinsic attributes of every piece, Grosz begins the process of redefining the intrinsic characteristics of each concept and thereby injecting new statements into the discourse of feminism that have a potential for collective enuncation.

     

    6. By this statement, I am suggesting a mirror reflection of Foucault’s own commentary on the philosophy of Deleuze-Guattari in the preface to Anti-Oedipus. From as early as Présentation de Sacher-Masoch (1967), Deleuze has identified a certain “clinical” resemblance of a uses of literature or the taxonomy of the “literary sign” that resembles the construction of the proper name (i.e., Parkinson’s, Roger’s) that is made to diagnose symptoms that were previously grouped together and links them up with others that were dissociated. Here, we see a very different conception to the “uses of literature,” one which corresponds in the Deleuzian oeuvre to two important figures: Nietzsche and Spinoza. The figure of Nietzsche has evolved in Deleuze�s thought from its earlier role as the double of Klossowski’s “Baphomet” (i.e., prince of modifications, doctor of the Eternal Return); more recently, his enthusiasm for the “ideal game” has been replaced by another no less profound Nietzsche who resembles less the Nietzsche of Klossowski (or Mallarmé) than the Nietzsche of Foucault: the psychologist of forces and forms that constitute “modernity,” author of the genealogy and the Will to Power, distant cousin to Zarathustra and the writer of Ecce Homo (who were, after all, literary types). Therefore, Deleuze’s remarks concern less an evaluation of “Foucault,” the man and thinker, than a new figure that completes and synthesizes a Nietzschean psychology with a Spinozist ethics.

     

    7. This is to say that in each case the writer herself begins from “a point outside” the critical determination or representation of literature; she begins always–or, at least, in most cases–with the question “what is literature?” Or rather, she begins with a certain series of problematics: “What is…” A narrative? A story? A character? A language? In each case, her answers are always temporary and take the form of a story or narrative, a certain tale or novella, this or that character. This corresponds to a fundamental axiom in Deleuze’s philosophy, often described as his “radical empiricism” or even “pragmatism.” That is, the condition of a statement on literature is at the same time a condition of literary enunciation itself; the criteria by which literature appears as an object of real experience are at the same time the condition of expression or enunciation. It is for this reason that a critical cannot take on a major form without invoking a transcendental function, or without appealing to certain categories that would each time function as constants whether that of the “author,” “narrator,” the “text,” “genre,” or “narrative mode.” The entry of structuralist categories into the study of language and literature after the 1950s marks a certain scientific function which has dominated the major movements of literary criticism from that period onward; however, the need to guarantee a constancy of the object of knowledge, which is a major trait of structurist and narratological theories (like those of Genette, in particular, but also Prince and even Iser in his earlier writings) may, in fact, share the attributes of what Deleuze-Guattari describe as “Royal Science” in their Treatise on Nomadology, and indirectly serve to inscribe the value of literary expression within an apparatus of specialization that also bears a political function consonant with the institutional determination of its subject (which could be invoked as an aspect of reterritorialization).

     

    8. See Frantz Fanon, The Wretched of the Earth, trans. Constance Farrington (New York: Grove Press, 1963).

     

    9. Here, the Borgesian formula of “Fang has a secret” often recounted by Deleuze can be used paradigmatically of this moment of turning, or decision, in which nothing is guaranteed. That is, “Fang has a secret” and “there is a stranger at the door.” In order to illustrate the paradigmatic value of this formula, we could substitute for the nameless identity of the stranger the forces signaled by the emergence of a life based on silicon, the formation of the capitalist in the final stages of planetary deployment, the deterritorialization and crisis of disciplinary regimes and their reterritorialization by mechanisms of the “control society,” the emergence of racialized identities and new fascisms of the flesh. In turn, each of these “strangers” marks turning points for the human form, as well as a fullness of time, a time pregnant with possibility, the moment of a “dice-throw.” (These are the somber precursors spoken of in Difference and Repetition.) That is, each arrangement presents us with diverse possibilities, with possible futures that bifurcate, tracing the curve of the present that goes toward the future announced by the new assemblage of Life that appears on the horizon. Borges, for example, discovered a possible means of escaping a colonizing relationship with the past through a comic procedure of overturning the European library and parodying the God of European history in its colonial situation. Kafka discovered through the fictional personage of “K.” a manner to research the diabolical assemblage of law and the institution of the state-form. Burroughs diagnosed the secret filiation of the alien, the homosexual, the junkie as victims the paranoia unleashed by the “bio-power” of modern state which defines its internal enemies in terms of a virus. And there are countless more examples of these “somber precursors” in Deleuze’s work (Buchner’s Lenz, Nietzsche’s Zarathustra, Well’s Cane, Melville’s Ahab or Benito Cereno, Duras and Resnais’s Hiroshima). For a fuller discussion, see my “Deleuzian Critique of Pure Fiction,” Sub-Stance 84 (Vol. 26, n. 3, 1997), 128-152.

    Works Cited

     

    • Benjamin, Walter. Illuminations. Forward by Hannah Arendt. New York: Schocken, 1968.
    • Celan, Paul. Poems of Paul Celan. Trans. Michael Hamburger. New York: Persea Books, 1972.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Bergsonism. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. New York: Zone Books, 1988.
    • —. Cinema II: The Time Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.
    • —. Coldness and Cruelty. New York: Zone Books, 1991.
    • —. Empiricism and Subjectivity: An Essay on Hume’s Theory of Human Nature. Trans. Constantin V. Boundas. New York: Columbia UP 1991.
    • —. Essays Critical and Clinical. Trans. Daniel W. Smith and Michael Greco. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1997.
    • —. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • —. Foucault. Trans. Sean Hand. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • —. The Logic of Sense. Trans. Constantin Boundas. New York: Columbia UP, 1995.
    • —. Prisentation de Sacher-Masoch: le froid et le cruel. Paris: Minuit, 1967.
    • — and Guattari, Felix. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • —. Kafka: Toward a Minor Literature. Trans. Dana Polan. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1986.
    • —. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Masumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • —. What is Philosophy? Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Graham Burchell. New York: Columbia UP, 1994.
    • Fanon, Frantz. The Wretched fo the Earth. Trans. Constance Farrington. New York: Grove Press, 1963.
    • Foucault, Michel. “What is an Author?” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice: Selected Essays and Interviews. Trans. Donald Bouchard and Sherry Simon. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1977. 117-138.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Creative Writers and Day-Dreaming.” S.E. Volume IX: 143-153.
    • Godzich, Wlad. The Culture of Literacy. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1994.
    • Kafka, Franz. Diaries. Ed. Max Brod. New York: Shocken Books, 1948.
    • Lambert, Gregg. “The Deleuzean Critique of Pure Fiction.” Sub-Stance 84 Vol. 26, n. 3, 1997: 128-152.
    • Nietzsche, Fredrick. “On the Advantages and Disadvantages of History for Life.” Untimely Meditations. Trans. R.J. Hollingdale. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1997: 57-124.
    • Proust, Marcel. In Search of Lost Time. Volume V: The Captive and the Fugitive. Trans. C.K. Scott Montcrieff and Terrance Kilmartin. Revised by D.J. Enright. New York: The Modern Library, 1993.
    • —. In Search of Lost Time. Volume VI: Time Regained. Trans. Andreas Mayor and Terrance Kilmartin. New York: The Modern Library, 1993.

     

  • Ordering the New World: Violence and its Re/Presentation in the Gulf War and Beyond

    Simon Chesterman

    Magdalen College–Oxford University
    simon.chesterman@magdalen.oxford.ac.uk

     

    Overture: The Gulf War Did Not Take Place

    Since this war was won in advance, we will never know what it would have been like had it existed. We will never know what an Iraqi taking part with a chance of fighting would have been like. We will never know what an American taking part with a chance of being beaten would have been like. We have seen what an ultra-modern process of electrocution is like, a process of paralysis or lobotomy of an experimental enemy away from the field of battle with no possibility of reaction. But this is not a war, any more than 10,000 tons of bombs per day is sufficient to make it a war. Any more than the direct transmission by CNN of real time information is sufficient to authenticate a war.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 61) War is peace.
    Freedom is slavery.
    Ignorance is strength.–Nineteen Eighty-Four
    Be it thy course to busy giddy minds
    With foreign quarrels. --Henry IV, Part 2
    Less than two weeks before the American and British air attack on Baghdad and Iraqi positions in Kuwait in January 1991, Jean Baudrillard published an article in Libération entitled “The Gulf War Will Not Take Place” in which he wrote that this war would never happen.1Baudrillard argued that war as a deterrent in the traditional sense had been internalised by the Western powers, producing a form of self-deterrence that left them incapable of realising their own power through the expressive medium of force. The unreal build-up, the asymptotic prelude that would allow a brush with war but no encounter, was symptomatic of hostilities in which it is the virtual that functions to deter the real event. In such a régime, all that is left is the simulacrum2 of war:

     

    We are no longer in a logic of the passage from virtual to actual but in a hyperrealist logic of the deterrence of the real by the virtual. (27)

     

    Among the calamities of war may be jointly numbered the diminution of the love of truth by the falsehoods which interest dictates and credulity encourages. –Samuel Johnson

     

    With the passage of war into the virtual, the potentiality of the Gulf War was said to exist ultimately as a figment of mass-media simulation, war-games rhetoric, or imaginary scenarios. In no “real” sense could these virtual preparations manifest in war. Like the political leaders, military personnel knew not what to make of their function of death and destruction: “They are pledged to the decoy of war as the others are to the decoy of power” (The Gulf War 28).

     

    Surely, as diverse critics pointed out, Baudrillard was directly contradicted by the facts.3 Surely the massive aerial bombardment of Iraqi military and civil infrastructure, the ensuing air and land assault, the “turkey shoot” (Freedman and Karsh 402-03)4 of the retreating troops on the road to Basra which left in the order of 100,000 Iraqi casualties demonstrated that there had, in fact, been a war. Surely Baudrillard could not have been more wrong.
     

    The surgical strikes against Iraq engendered a running sore which, though contained, continues to be picked at by a Western coalition resentful of Saddam’s failure to “play ball.” The sterilised images of video war in the Gulf were succeeded by the orgiastic fury of Bosnia and its eroticisation of atrocity. And crisis in the Gulf has given rise to a crisis of sorts in postmodern theory.

     

    This paper takes Baudrillard’s discussion of the Gulf War qua non-event as the departure point for a consideration of the presentation and representation of violence in the post-Cold War era. I argue that although the deployment of violence has been transformed, as Baudrillard argues, this (re)formation is meaningless absent a conception of the space violence occupies in the hypothesis of international order. In this way, my interrogation of the face of violence merges into a critique of violence as such–a dynamic whose relationship to order is at once antagonistic and symbiotic.

     

    This critique has implications for the analysis of international relations, but may also open up a more productive engagement between international relations and international law. In distinct ways, each discourse holds statism as axiomatic–as the unitary locus of power and legitimacy respectively. A critique of violence may provoke a doctrinal reassessment of the a priori equation of order and law that presently legitimates the realist presumptions of international relations and forecloses an interrogation of the theoretical bases of international law.
     


     

    The Clean War: A Just War or Just a Game?

     

    Was this a just war or just a game? For the winners, both: for the losers, neither. To suggest… that it could be both or neither simultaneously is to challenge the US effort to construct out of this war a new world order based on one truth, one winner, one loser…. [T]his cyberwar is the result of the US effort to fill and to delimit the new void left by the end of the Cold War, the end of the old order, the ‘end of history’. While the architecture of the new world order may be built of simulations, its hegemonic effect will be all too real for those nation-states that have little to gain from it. (Der Derian 196-7)

     

    [T]he brutal aggression of Saddam Hussein . . . . It’s black and white. The facts are clear. The choice unambiguous. Right vs wrong.
    –George Bush, the morning after (qtd. in Yant 54)By God, we’ve kicked the Vietnam Syndrome once and for all.–George Bush, the morning after (qtd. in Der Derian 9)

     

    The Gulf War was the archetypal authorised expression of force designed to usher in a New World Order.5 The logic of deterrence (Desert Shield) gave way to a righteous vengeance (Desert Storm) presaged and pursued by a logic of representation that came to define the ‘war’ itself. More than any other conflict in human history, this authorised bloodshed was scripted for consumption by a willing global audience.

     

    The defining images of the Gulf War remain those viewed through the cross-hairs of a smart bomb’s targeting system: the New World Order was to be established by precision violence that could follow street maps to a target and enter an underground bunker through the front door (Freedman and Karsh 312). It was a perverse postlude to the sepia-toned horror of the Second World War and the sprawling realism of Vietnam–a knowing prelude to the prime time marine landing in Somalia.

     

     

    Cokie Roberts (ABC): "You see a building in a sight--it looks more like a video game than anything else. Is there any sort of danger that we don't have any sense of the horrors of war--that it's all a game?" Gen Norman Schwarzkopf: "You don't see me treating it like a game. And you didn't see me laughing and joking while it was going on. There are human lives being lost, and at this stage of the game [sic] this is not a time for frivolity on the part of anybody."This Week with David Brinkley (qtd. in Der Derian 183)

     

    But the 43-day Gulf War was “clean” only in terms of the images that constituted it. Former U.S. Secretary of Defense Richard Cheney has stated that the U.S.-led international military assault was spearheaded by “the most successful air-campaign in the history of the world” (Middle East Watch 1). In terms of the coalition’s strategic interests this claim is perhaps justified.

     

    Should we consider multiplying clean wars in order to reduce the murderous death toll of peacetime? –Baudrillard (The Gulf War 69)

    Airborne superiority was quickly and easily established with more tonnage of high explosive being dropped on Iraq during the first month of the conflict than was used the entire Second World War (Gerbner 252).

     

    The result was that coalition casualties in the eventual ground war were low, with official figures listing 240 dead and 776 wounded (U.S. Department of Defense 411). Of these, a quarter of the American deaths and more than half the British were caused by “friendly fire” (Triumph Without Victory 373). If such deaths are subtracted from the total, there were more casualties in the war exercises leading up to “G-Day” (the beginning of the ground war) than during the war itself (Der Derian 196). As Baudrillard wryly points out, it seems probable that of the half a million American forces involved in seven months of operations in the Gulf, three times as many would have died in road accidents had they remained in civilian life (The Gulf War 69).

     

    It is instructive that in a “war” characterised by its precision and detail, the only aspect of the conflict over which much serious doubt remains is the number of Iraqi forces and civilians who perished or were wounded. In his postwar briefing (quickly renamed by the wags in the press “the mother of all press briefings”), General Schwarzkopf told reporters that “there were a very, very large number of dead in these [front line combat] units, a very, very large number of dead” (qtd. in “The Persian Gulf War” A36). When pressed, the U.S. Central Command plucked the figure of 100,000 out of the air, with a margin of error of 50 per cent (Freedman and Karsh 408). While the Pentagon subsequently released exact numbers of Iraqi military hardware destroyed down to the last tank, the calculation of Iraqi casualties was said to remain “impossible” (Freedman and Karsh 408). When the three-volume, 1300-page official history of the Gulf War was published, it made no mention of Iraqi deaths and a draft chapter on casualties is reported to have been deleted (Baker 13).6
     

    We believe that they immorally pervert images. Not so. They alone are conscious of the profound immorality of images. –Baudrillard (The Gulf War 47)

     

    In the following sections, I consider the implications of this successful transposition of images during the war, a transposition that reduced public perception of the conflict to a black and white morality play, enacted on a two-dimensional representation of distant “other” lands (Link 55).
     


     

    Burying the Dead

     

    [F]ormer Secretary of Defense Richard Cheney hid behind the law when confronted with reports that United States and Saudi forces used combat earthmovers and tanks fitted with plows to bury alive thousands of Iraqi soldiers, asserting that such tactics were not illegal unless the Iraqi troops formally surrendered. (Normand and af Jochnick 387)

     

    I have absolutely no idea what the Iraqi casualties are, and I tell you, if I have anything to say about it, we’re never going to get into the body-count business.–Gen. Schwarzkopf (NY times article name, page)

     

    A central point of concern for the Pentagon during the Gulf War was what may be appropriately euphemised as “necrology.” The Pentagon’s suppression of the “body count” was part of a broader projection of the military as possessing the technology to win war without killing, with minimal killing, or with visually innocuous killing (Margot Norris 228-30). The ground attack, which began with the unprecedented tactic of ploughing live Iraqi soldiers into trenches in the desert, provides a grim metaphor for the results.7

     

    The generally high approval of the Gulf War seems clearly linked to the success of the military’s censorship of its human cost (Margot Norris 231). Apparently simple language games in the reportage of the war were seen to be disturbingly effective in blunting public sentiment for Iraqi civilian dead. An American poll found that only 21% of those polled were “very concerned” about the amount of “collateral damage” produced by the war. By contrast, 49% were “very concerned” about “the number of civilian casualties and other unintended damage” in Iraq (Rosenstiel A9).

    [Y]ou avoid talking about lives lost, and that serves both an esthetic and a practical purpose.–Loren Thompson (NYTimes article name, 10)Unlike the war in Vietnam, progress in the Gulf war can be clearly measured as the front lines move forward or retreat, and body count will fade into the oblivion it so richly deserves.–Col Harry Summers, Jr (Ret) (A5, A13)

     

    Those dead whom the U.S. military did allow the press to see were often placed in carefully scripted scenes. The soldiers killed while retreating from Kuwait City had been travelling in Iraq vehicles packed with loot–reporters obediently criminalised the dead as burglars, thieves, and thugs (Margot Norris 235). News reports of this, the major story of the ground war, gave as much space to inventories of the plundered goods as descriptions of the human carnage (Margot Norris 243).8

     

    This muted representation–the war won without death–seems at odds with the essentially symbolic function of the dead body in warfare, a material fact that is needed to realise the discourse of military conquest:

     

    [T]he outcome of war has its substantiation not in an absolute inability of the defeated to contest the outcome but in a process of perception that allows extreme attributes of the body to be translated into another language, to be broken away from the body and relocated elsewhere at the very moment that the body itself is disowned.... The force of the material world is separated from the fifty-seven thousand or fifty million bodies and conferred not only on issues and ideologies that have as a result of the first function been designated the winner, but also on the idea of winning itself. (Scarry 124)

     

    The gradual shrinking of the destructive part of smart bombs was not done for humanitarian purposes. Planners simply calculated that pound for pound, computers, sensors, and fuel were often worth more to overall effectiveness than blast power.The New Republic (Easterbrook 17-18)It is the unreality of anywhere outside the U.S., in the eyes of its citizens, which must frighten any foreigner. Like an infant who has yet to learn there are other centres of self, this culture sees others merely as fodder for its dreams and nightmares.–The Guardian (Williamson 21)

    In this way, the corpse as sign has traditionally served to mediate between the perception and the reality of winning.

     

    In the Gulf War, the corpse was used in ever more subtle ways; the “veiled, vague, but indisputable Iraqi dead served the substantiation of pure U.S. power” (Margot Norris 239), but it was a power that lacked instrumentality except in its own symbolic supererogation. The control over violence was thus augmented by control over its representation; crucially, it enabled a double victory that demonstrated virtually unlimited U.S. power to produce death, while escaping its political and moral consequences.

     

    This was the expiation of America’s “Vietnam syndrome,” a condition that makes no sense without seeing Vietnam as a defeat on both military and moral fronts. Herman and Chomsky describe earlier U.S. attempts to reconstruct ideology and overcome “what Norman Podhoretz, echoing Goebbels, calls ‘the sickly inhibitions against the use of military force’” (Manufacturing Consent 236-37),9 but it was the Gulf War that “revived [the] self-confidence of Americans,” who felt “relief and pride–relief at remarkably few U.S. casualties and pride in the brilliant performance of the allied forces” (“Gulf War, and Peace” A26). Chilling words in an editorial of the New York Times.
     


     

    Virtual War

     

    The real warmongers are those who live on the ideology of the veracity of this war, while the war itself wreaks its havoc at another level by trickery, hyperreality, simulacra, and by the entire mental strategy of deterrence which is played out in the facts and in the images, in the anticipation of the real by the virtual, of the event by virtual time, and in the inexorable confusion of the two. All those who understand nothing of this involuntarily reinforce this halo of bluff which surrounds us. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 67)

     

    Gradually the images of the bombs more smart than their Iraqi targets blur into one another.
    The ghostly green images of night-vision technology introduced a Manichean quality to the opening scenes of the attack (Der Derian 180). Similarly, the tracking cameras of smart bombs presented the war as a voyeuristic fantasy: a sick parody of “America’s Funniest Home Video.” But the more closely we examine the images of this “war,” we realise that there is nothing but the image. And if we look closer still, the image itself begins to dissolve into pixels of light and dark–a pixelated/pixilated (literally “pixie-led”) bastard child of the “mother of all wars.”
    What are the implications of taking Baudrillard’s thesis seriously?
     

    One is reminded of Capricorn One, in which the flight of a manned rocket to Mars, which only took place in a desert studio, was relayed live to all the television stations in the world.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 61)

     

    This is not, of course, to suggest that he should be taken literally. His argument is not that nothing took place in January and February 1991, but that it was unlike any war that had gone before, and that in a very real sense we are unable to verify precisely what took place–direct transmission by CNN of real time information notwithstanding (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 61).

     

    Thus far, his argument finds much support. Chomsky, for example, also questions the use of the term “war” to describe events, because “there never was a war, at least, if the concept involves two sides in combat. That didn’t happen in the Gulf” (Deterring Democracy 409).10 Even official reports ultimately acknowledged that the size of the Iraqi army had been overestimated,11 and that the eventual battle was one-sided (Freedman and Karsh 407-9).

     

    There is also widespread acknowledgment of the limitations of media reports at the time. In addition to the wealth of U.S. law review articles undertaking a First Amendment analysis of media access to the conflict12 (an endearingly isolationist response), only the most devoted CNN correspondent would deny that military censorship and the concentration of sources distorted the information that was ultimately published.13 This ranged from the strategic to the absurd. At one extreme, media reports of U.S.

     

    Marines on the Saudi border and on amphibious ships off the coast were part of a calculated (and effective) strategy to deceive Iraqi intelligence as to the likely direction of the attack (Taylor and Blackwell 234). At the other, the charade of media hegemony nearly collapsed in those moments when the CNN cameras crossed live to a group of reporters assembled “somewhere in the Gulf”–only to have them confess that they too were sitting around watching CNN to find out what was happening.14 Other studies have detailed the use of propaganda in the conflict: a falsified eye-witness account of Iraqi soldiers removing babies from incubators and leaving them to die;15 uncritical CNN footage of a “bombed baby milk factory” that boasted a camouflaged roof, high-security fence, and armed guards (Rennie 17).
     

    All political and ideological speculations fall under mental deterrence (stupidity). By virtue of their immediate consensus on the evidence they feed the unreality of this war, they reinforce its bluff by their unconscious dupery.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 67)

     

    But Baudrillard goes much further than this. He argues that more than simply questioning the nature of this war and the media’s complicity in its exposition, there is a need to interrogate the very notion of truth qua simulacrum itself. Assuming a position for or against the war denies inquiry into “the very probability of the war, its credibility or degree of reality” (The Gulf War 67). Rather, it is necessary to resist the probability of the image (26-7, 66).

     

    It is this argument that provoked a book-length response from Christopher Norris.16 He argues that Baudrillard’s essays constitute a definitive exposure of the political bankruptcy of postmodern scholarship and “the depth of ideological complicity that exists between such forms of extreme anti-realist or irrationalist doctrine and the crisis of moral and political nerve” that presently afflicts Western intellectuals (27). Attacking the “frivolous” exercise of making the Gulf War into a pretext for arcane disputes about the “politics of theory,” he links such theoretical exercises to a prevailing mood of “cynical acquiescence” that fails to contest the official version of events (29).

     

    Norris’s warnings as to the dangers of dissociating theory from praxis are, of course, important. But his reading of Baudrillard’s scepticism as demonstrative of moral and political nihilism (194) assumes an opponent of straw. For the challenge that Baudrillard presents is not the rejection of political purchase, but a rigorous resistance to the acceptance of the virtual as or in place of the real:

     

    Resist the probability of any image or information whatever. Be more virtual than events themselves, do not seek to re-establish the truth, we do not have the means, but do not be duped, and to that end re-immerse the war and all information in the virtuality from whence they come. Turn deterrence back against itself. Be meteorologically sensitive to stupidity. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 66-67)

     

    If Mattel brought out a doe-eyed doll called Iraqi Baby, it could be guaranteed to evoke pity. Meanwhile on the national news, shots of birds caught in ‘Saddam’s oil slick’ have been presented more poignantly than the human victims of our bombing. The Guardian (Williamson 43)17It is not for lack of brandishing the threat of a chemical war, a bloody war, a world war–everyone had their say–as though it were necessary to give ourselves a fright, to maintain everyone in a state of erection for fear of seeing the flaccid member of war fall down. This futile masturbation was the delight of all the TVs.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 74)

     

    Norris reads this reference to “stupidity” as denying any “operative difference between truth and falsehood, veridical knowledge and its semblance” (12), and precluding any form of ethico-political accountability that depends upon a notion of the “real” (194). Nevertheless, Baudrillard’s position is more properly seen as denoting a profound and abiding suspicion of a “reality” whose primary referent is the simulations of American war games.

     

    Moreover, the tone of Baudrillard’s essays is far from equivocal. At times his writing exhibits a very black reductio ad absurdum humour: So you say this was a clean, minimalist war with little “collateral damage”? Why stop there–war? what war? (Patton 7). The prevailing tone is ironic, however. The logic of deterrence (the sustained denial of the possibility of war) has come to supplant the actuality of war; violence can only take place as a sterilised simulation of itself.18 In an extended sexual metaphor, the military–which thrives on particular forms of male sexuality–is emasculated by its dependence on virtual pornography.19

     

    Baudrillard also appears to be aware of these criticisms. In stating, as he did just a few weeks before the UN deadline expired, that the proposed war would not take place, he acknowledged the dangers of such an approach in a postscriptum:

     

    To demonstrate the impossibility of war just at the moment when it must take place, when the signs of its occurrence are accumulating, is a stupid gamble. But it would have been even more stupid not to seize the opportunity. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 28)

     

    In pursuing such a “fatal strategy,” Baudrillard plays upon his own belief that writing should be less a representation of reality than its transfiguration (Patton 6). He has subsequently suggested that in time and with a little imagination, it may be possible to read The Gulf War Did Not Take Place as if it were a science fiction novel (qtd. in Gane 203).
     

    [A]rmchair strategists can now fly over the virtual battlefield. . . during any moment of the battle. They can even change the parameters–give the Iraqis infrared targeting scopes, for instance, which they lacked at the time.Wired (Sterling 95-96)20

     

    James Der Derian, by contrast, argues that such an approach may be more effective than that presented by the modernist school of criticism. Der Derian states that theorists who attempted to construct a critical and universal counter-memory were easily isolated as anti-American and dismissed as utopian (177). Adopting a poststructuralist approach to such political encounters may well bring with it the danger that no new pragmatic basis for justice and truth will emerge. Nevertheless, he argues,

     

    ...better strategically to play with apt critiques of the powerful new forces unleashed by cyberwar than to hold positions with antiquated tactics and nostalgic unities. (178)

     

    But just how new is this notion of a “cyberwar”? And what implications does it have today, now that the smart bombs are yesterday’s toys and the rhetoric of the New World Order lies in the ruins of Somalia, Bosnia, and Rwanda?
     


     

    Virtual Order

     

    The first and most obvious lesson of the Gulf War to
    date is that technology works.
    
                            --Naval Institute Proceedings
    			  (qtd. in Margot Norris 232)

     

    Buck Rogers or Luke Skywalker would be at home in the Gulf War.Naval Institute Proceedings (qtd. in Margot Norris 232)[M]odern war is a cyborg orgy.–Haraway (66)

     

    Margot Norris considers the Gulf War-inspired thesis that “technology works” as inaugurating an Enlightenment fascination with the progressive rationalism of smart weaponry. Coupled with a corresponding apathy and disavowal of human suffering, she argues that death at the hands of such “modern” tools of destruction takes on the pornographic contours of de Sade (232).21

     

    If the distinctive characteristics of the Gulf War were (merely) improved killing capacity and public apathy, however, the only novel aspect would be the scale on which it was conducted. It is precisely this modernist conception of order through technology that has long dominated international relations theory. Among other things, it underpinned the arms race, plaything of the (ana)logic of game theory.22 Similarly, the scientific use of propaganda has played a significant role in armed hostilities since at least the First World War.23

     

    But it is the deeper critique in Baudrillard’s analysis that isolates the peculiarities of the Gulf War as a “postmodern” conflict.24 Here it is important to read his work in the context of an international system that had only recently passed from “dualistic (East and West) deterrence” (The Gulf War 84), and in which a pax Americana seemed to be a distinct possibility. The truth claim that Baudrillard contests is that which would posit the “war” as “the first consensual war, the first war conducted legally and globally with a view to putting an end to war” (The Gulf War 83).25 In this light, far from being apolitical, his work can be read as a challenge to the view that the world can be reduced to the global common denominator of democracy, with the lowest common multiplier being information in all its forms:

     

    [I]n this electronic war there is no longer an enemy, there is only a refractory element which must be neutralised and consensualised. This is what the Americans seek to do, these missionary people bearing electroshocks which will shepherd everybody towards democracy. (The Gulf War 84)

     

    This argument flies in the face of the shibboleth that America cannot be the world’s policeman [sic]. In truth, it must be more than that. A policeman gets his [sic] assignments from higher authority, but in the community of nations there is no authority higher than America. . . . America is akin to the philosopher in Plato’s parable of the cave. Only the man who has achieved philosophic knowledge is truly fit to rule, said Plato, but having achieved it, he will resist being drawn back down to the mundane tasks of ruling.–Muravchik (1-2)We may have won the Cold War, which is nice–it’s more than nice, it’s wonderful. But this means that now the enemy is us, not them.–Kristol (28)

     

    This of course rails against conservative reactions to the end of the Cold War, most notably the “unabashed victory of economic and political liberalism” posited by Francis Fukuyama in his “End of History” thesis (3).26 In more explicitly populist terms, the way “we won the Cold War”27 has reinforced what “we” knew all along: that Western domination of the world was historically necessary and morally justified.28

     

    Unlike critics of the Left who attack the political hegemony of the U.S.,29 however, Baudrillard’s approach is to focus on the informational hegemony that he sees as legitimating and to some extent making this political dominion inevitable. This approach in particular casts a critical light on contemporary movements within international relations theory. Much of the current literature on the present “crisis” of theory in the discourse points to the intellectual poverty of realism and the precarious position of the state as founding myth of international order.30 Broadly speaking, these tend to focus on the globalising and fragmenting trends in international relations that challenge the position of the state as a unitary body whose territorial borders remain as inviolable as the abstract notion of sovereignty that legitimises them.31 However, while these analyses are instructive in so far as they open up the discipline of international relations to factors other than documenting the behaviour of states, they ultimately retain the perceptions of order and power that tied realism to the level of diplomatic history, working within the modernist epistemology whose political manifestations they seek to challenge.32

     

    In this way, these approaches may be compared to two other attempts to “displace” the realist paradigm while explicitly working within the same conceptual framework: Kenneth Waltz’s “neorealist” structural theory of world politics in the late 1970s33 and Samuel Huntington’s facile “Clash of Civilizations” thesis (Huntington 22). What these approaches have in common is the assumption that the contemporary problems faced by international relations are empirical rather than theoretical,34 a trend that finds its epitome in the much-heralded arrival of neorealism as presenting a more “scientific” approach to politics–that is, an approach that is more “operationalizable.”35 In the case of neorealism, the answer was seen in increasing abstraction of the state as actor; in Huntington’s “Clash of Civilizations” it was the search for a definitive and static paradigm to end the uncertainty left by the post-Cold War world:

     

    In class and ideological conflicts, the key question was "Which side are you on?" and people could and did choose sides and change sides. In conflicts between civilizations, the question is "What are you?" That is a given that cannot be changed.36

     

    Only in the state does man have a rational existence…. Man owes his entire existence to the state, and his being within it alone. Whatever worth and spiritual reality he possesses are solely by virtue of the state.–Hegel (94) (emphasis added)[T]his relationship between law and violence–the continued impossibility of law’s premised alterity to violence–focuses our attention upon the terrain of law’s struggle–a struggle which we might better think of as a struggle with itself. Moreover… this terrain is institutional–the state in international society.
     
    –Kennedy (283)
     
     
    Islam has bloody borders.
     
    –Huntington (35)
     
     
    Muslims contrasted Western actions against Iraq with the West’s failure to protect Bosnians against Serbs. . . . A world of clashing civilizations, however, is inevitably a world of double standards: people apply one standard to their kin-countries and a different standard to others.
     
    –Huntington (36)

     

    This desire to replace the state and sovereignty (taking form in the balance of power) as the ordering principle of international relations with another structural determinant fundamentally misses the point of current uncertainties, merely re-placing new currency into an old economy.37 The “interpretative crisis” recognised by many analysts is not a problem to be solved simply by finding “a new paradigm that accounts for… facts in a more satisfactory fashion” (Huntington 27). Rather, it represents a challenge to the discipline itself, demanding a re-presentation not merely of the state and its anarchical society, but of subject and order.38
     
    Baudrillard’s questioning of the reality of the Gulf War can be read as an ironic challenge to such conceptions of order. In particular, he offers a critique of the political project of theorists such as Fukuyama and Huntington, who in distinct ways posit a new post-Cold War order that is ultimately reducible to an opposition of the West against Islam (Huntington 35-36, 49).39

     

    Baudrillard notes, however, that this is an opposition that will not be fought even in a “cold” war. Western hegemony has gone far beyond that. Instead, as the Gulf War illustrated,

     

    [t]he crucial stake, the decisive stake in this whole affair is the consensual reduction of Islam to the global order. Not to destroy but to domesticate it, by whatever means: modernisation, even military, politicisation, nationalism, democracy, the Rights of Man, anything at all to electrocute the resistances and the symbolic challenge that Islam represents for the entire West. (The Gulf War 85; emphasis added)

     

    In such a régime, war is less a confrontation of warriors than the domestication of refractory forces on the planet. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 86)
     
    War, as Baudrillard observes, is no longer what it used to be.
     


     

    Reprise: The Gulf War Did Not Take Place (Again)

     

    It was, from the American point of view, a lovely crisis. It had the deep-dyed and familiar villain, Saddam Hussein. It had bold and decisive military action from Commander Clinton, without a single American life put at risk. It featured a reliable supporting actor, Great Britain, playing “loyal little ally”. The U.S. Air Force and the Navy both got leading parts. And it quite knocked out of the national mind any scurrilous gossip about the presidential political consultant Dick Morris. All that, and the missile strikes won 81 per cent approval ratings in the first ABC poll. (Walker 6)

     

    Admittedly, military violence is in the first place used quite directly, as predatory violence, toward its ends. Yet it is very striking that even–or, rather, precisely–in primitive conditions that know hardly the beginnings of constitutional relations, and even in cases where the victor has established himself in invulnerable possession, a peace ceremony is entirely necessary. Indeed, the word “peace,” in the sense in which it is the correlative to the word “war” (for there is also a quite different meaning, similarly unmeta-phorical and political, the one used by Kant in talking of “Eternal Peace”), denotes this a priori, necessary sanctioning, regardless of all other legal conditions, of every victory. This sanction consists precisely in recognizing the new conditions as a new “law,” quite regardless of whether they need de facto any guarantee of their continuation. If, therefore, conclusions can be drawn from military violence, as being primordial and paradigmatic of all violence used for natural ends, there is inherent in all such violence a lawmaking character. –Benjamin (283)

     

    Perhaps the greatest irony of the Gulf War lies in the different fates of its two main characters. Saddam Hussein remains in power, while George Bush was defeated in an election where his rival directly challenged his approach to foreign policy issues. In late 1996 Americans went to the polls once more, with Bill Clinton trumpeting the same slogans as Bush did four years earlier, “Commander Clinton” at the helm of the new world order.

     

    The moral issues that had seemed so black and white to President Bush40–the just war of freedom against tyranny–soon dissolved into the post-conflict dilemmas presented by the Kurds. As the Iraqi régime recovered its strength (despite sanctions that continue to claim civilian lives), it was no longer clear what had been gained from the sacrifice of so many lives. A perfect semblance of victory was exchanged for a perfect semblance of defeat (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 71).
     
    In a very “real” sense, then, the Gulf War did not take place.

     

    Even the last phase of this armed mystification will have changed nothing, for the 100,000 Iraqi dead will only have been the final decoy that Saddam will have sacrificed, the blood money paid... to conserve his power. What is worse is that these dead still serve as an alibi for those who do not want to have been excited for nothing:... at least the dead would prove that this war was indeed a war and not a shameful and pointless hoax (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 72).

     

    Clearly, the Gulf War did not mark the end of war as such. Bosnia and Rwanda are stark reminders that history has not ended, and that the same rages of old are manifest in our New World Order. But the ambiguous start to the New World Order did herald the emergence of a new form of violence. Violence that is unrecognisably sterilised or distorted to serve other ends. Violence justified by reference to a consensus reducible to a single voice. Violence that derives meaning only from representation, which perfect representation emerges as the ordering principle of a world rendered pure through the disavowal of reality beyond the borders of the image.

     

    Notes

    I would like to thank Wayne Morgan for his comments on earlier drafts of this article.

     

    1. This article is reprinted in Baudrillard, The Gulf War Did Not Take Place (1995): all subsequent citations from the article will be from this edition. The essay also appeared in an early translation entitled “The Reality Gulf” in The Guardian, 11 Jan. 1991.

     

    2. See generally Jean Baudrillard, Simulations.

     

    3. See, for example, Christopher Norris, Uncritical Theory: Postmodernism, Intellectuals, and the Gulf War 11.

     

    4. Cf. Noam Chomsky, Deterring Democracy 410.

     

    5. See, for example, George Bush, “The Possibility of a New World Order,” Speech at Maxwell Air Force Base, Montgomery, Alabama. Cf. Oscar Schachter, “United Nations Law in the Gulf Conflict” 452, 472.

     

    6. In January 1992, Beth Osborne Daponte, a demographer with the United States Census Bureau, publicly released unclassified estimates that a total of 86,194 men, 39,612 women, and 32,195 children died as a direct resu lt of the Gulf War. Daponte estimated that 13,000 civilians had been killed during the Coalition’s air and land campaigns, with other deaths attributable to the post-war Kurd and Shi’ite rebellions and to disease and malnutrition caused by the war (Jones 12). She claimed that her report on casualties had been rewritten, with the death toll lowered and data on women and children removed. The Census Bureau fired Daponte, claiming that her figures had not received “proper peer review.” She was reinstated a fter alleging in a lawsuit that her dismissal was politically motivated (see “Agency Reinstates Tabulator of Iraqi War Deaths” A14 and Gellman A5). Daponte later published a more comprehensive study, in which she estimated that 110,000 Iraqi civilian dea ths resulted from war-induced health effects (Daponte 57, 62)

     

    7. See Patrick Sloyan, “Buried Alive: US Tanks Used Plows to Kill Thousands in Gulf War Trenches” 1, and Chomsky, Deterring Democracy 410-11. In its final report, the Pentagon justified this action at some length, arguing not only that “there is a gap in the law of war defining precisely when surrender takes effect or how it may be accomplished in practical terms,” but also that “military necessity required that the assault through the forward Iraqi defens ive line be conducted with maximum speed and violence” (Conduct of the Persian Gulf War 629-30). A similar legal rationale was used to justify the slaughter of thousands of Iraqi soldiers attempting to flee from Kuwait City to Basra along the Matla Ridge during the ground assault without formally surrendering (631-32).

     

    8. See, for example, Laurie Becklund and Stephen Braun, “A Rallying Point for Iraqi Exiles.”

     

    9. See also Chomsky, Deterring Democracy 148.

     

    10. Cf. Chomsky, “The Media and the War: What War?” in Mowlana et al. 51.

     

    11. General Schwarzkopf had stated that the Coalition strategy for the ground war was to achieve an “end run” around Iraqi troop concentrations in order to overcome a two-to-three disadvantage in manpower (“The Persi an Gulf War” A36). By contrast, a congressional report released in April 1991 concluded that due to depleted units, desertions, and casualties from the air war, Iraq actually had fewer than 183,000 soldiers in the Kuwaiti theater of operations compared t o 800,000 military personnel from 36 nations in the Coalition at the start of the ground assault (See Draper 38, 43 and Sachs 17).

     

    12. See, for example, Mark Radhert, “The First Amendment and Media Rights During Wartime: Some Thoughts After Operation Desert Storm” 1513; “Lost Testimony: The Gulf War, Restricted Access, and the First Amendment” 26 1; “Press Censorship and Access Restrictions During the Persian Gulf War: A First Amendment Analysis” 1073.

     

    13. Cf. Begleiter, “The Impact of the Media on International Law and Relations” 119-23. (Begleiter was an international affairs correspondent with CNN.)

     

    14. Cf. Paul Patton, ‘Introduction’ in Baudrillard, The Gulf War 2.

     

    15. It was later revealed that the witness, who testified before a Congressional Human Rights Caucus, was the daughter of the Kuwaiti ambassador to the U.S. and that she had been coached by a public relations firm hi red by the Kuwaiti government (Kellner 67-8).

     

    16. Christopher Norris, Uncritical Theory.

     

    17. In another layer of irony, this oil slick was subsequently determined to have been caused by Allied bombing of inshore installations (Christopher Norris 24).

     

    18. This is perhaps the logical extreme of Vegetius’ dictum, “Qui desiderat pacem, praeparet bellum” [Let him who desires peace, prepare for war] (Flavius Vegetius Renatus, Epitoma Rei Militaris, book 3).

     

    19. See Baudrillard, The Gulf War 62, 74-5, 77.

     

    20. Sterling discusses a gaming simulation of one of the tank battles from the closing stages of the conflict, produced by army historians and simulation modelers.

     

    21. Curiously, Norris suggests that this sadism lacks erotic content and imagery (232-3).

     

    22. See, for example, Alexander Wendt, “Anarchy Is What States Make of It: The Social Construction of Power Politics” 391; Robert Keohane, “International Institutions: Two Approaches” (1988) 379; Charles Lipson, “Int ernational Cooperation in Economic and Security Affairs” 69-70.

     

    23. See Lasswell, Propaganda Technique in the World War (1927). On the use of rape for propaganda purposes in war, see Brownmiller, Against Our Will: Men, Women and Rape 40-58. Cf. Mackenz ie, Propaganda and Empire.

     

    24. See above paragraphs 25-31.

     

    25. On the Great-Power pressure diplomacy that achieved “consensus” on Security Council Resolution 678 (authorising the use of “all necessary means to uphold and implement resolution 660 (1990) and all subsequent rel evant resolutions”), see Weston, “Security Council Resolution 678 and Persian Gulf Decision Making: Precarious Legitimacy” 516, 523-5.

     

    26. Fukuyama was a deputy director of the U.S. State Department’s policy planning staff at the time that this article was published; it has since been expanded into a book: Francis Fukuyama, The End of History an d the Last Man (1992).

     

    27. Cf. Noam Chomsky, Year 501: The Conquest Continues 61-4.

     

    28. Cf. Edward Said, Culture and Imperialism 313.

     

    29. See, for example, Tom Mayer, “Imperialism and the Gulf War” 1, and Booker, Background to the Gulf War.

     

    30. Cast from the failure of liberalism to prevent the Second World War and tempered by the exigencies of Cold War bipolarity, realism eschewed Wilsonian utopianism in favour of Machiavellian pragmatism–less a Kantia n theory of peace, it was a theory of Realpolitik. Axiomatic to this conception of international order-through-disorder was the population of international society by unitary, rational and power-seeking actors: states.

     

    See generally Hans Morgenthau, Politics Among Nations: The Struggle for Power and Peace, and Kenneth Waltz, Theory of International Politics. Cf. John Mearsheimer’s discussion of realism’s five assumptions about the internationa l system: (i) the international system is anarchic; (ii) states inherently possess some offensive military capability, making them potentially dangerous to each other; (iii) no state can ever be completely certain about the intentions of other states; (iv ) the most basic motive driving states is survival; and (v) states think strategically–that is, they are instrumentally rational (Mearsheimer 9-10). For a critical analysis of this paradigm, see James Der Derian, “Introduction: Critical Investigations” i n James Der Derian (ed), International Theory: Critical Investigations (1995). Cf. Rob Walker’s discussion of realism’s “parasitic” relation to idealism in Inside/Outside: International Relations as Political Theory.

     

    31. See, for example, Joseph Camilleri and Jim Falk, The End of Sovereignty? The Politics of a Shrinking and Fragmenting World.

     

    32. See Simon Chesterman, “Review Essay: The Politics of Sovereignty” 175. The project of opening up international relations to meaningful interrogation requires an exploration of the self-evident divide between the “political” and the “international” that led to a history, rather than a theory, of international relations: see Hans Morgenthau’s response to Wight’s essay, “The Intellectual and Political Functions of Theory” Morgenthau, Truth and Power: Essays o f a Decade, 1960-1970 (1248-61), listing the reasons for this as being (i) the presumed self-evidence of the state as a natural form beyond human control; (ii) the ‘reformist orientation that characterized theoretical thinking’ of Wilsonian liberal ism and its ilk–the aim being “not in understanding the operation of the balance of power but in getting rid of it”; and (iii) the contingency of all political analysis that obviates the possibility of theoretical understanding.

     

    33. Neo-realism describes the international system through two constants and one variable. The constants are the existence of an anarchical system of horizontally distributed power (as opposed to ver tical distribution within a state), and the population of that system by similarly functioning units (states) whose behaviour is determined according to that system (much the way that diverse corporations function similarly within an economic market). The variable is the distribution of power capabilities across the system, and much has been written concerning the inevitability (and, indeed, desirability) of a bipolar system epitomised by the Cold War. See generally, Waltz, Theory of International Politics. For a critique of neorealism’s un- or anti-historical approach, see Paul Schroeder, “Historical Reality vs. Neo-realist Theory.”

     

    34. Cf. Janice Thomson, “State Sovereignty in International Relations: Bridging the Gap Between Theory and Empirical Research” 213, 217.

     

    35. Waltz argued that neorealism represents an advance of scientific rigour vis-à-vis the older realism, measured by the ability of a theoretical approach to generate propositions or predictions that are empir ically testable in such a way that the tests and their results may be replicated: see Steven Forde, “International Realism and the Science of Politics: Thucydides, Machiavelli, and Neorealism” 141, 142. The intellectual barrenness of this approach has be en attacked at length by various authors: see, for example, Fred Halliday’s description of the “parsimonious and atemporal maxims of Waltz’s neo-realism, “The Cold War and its Conclusion: Consequences for International Relations Theory” (12). See also t he collections of essays in Robert Keohane, ed., Neorealism and Its Critics and Baldwin, Neorealism and Neoliberalism: The Contemporary Debate.

     

    36. See also Huntington’s analysis of his contribution to the discipline in terms of Thomas Kuhn’s Structure of Scientific Revolutions, “If Not Civilizations, What?”

     

    37. Cf. Fouad Ajami’s response to Huntington, ‘The Summoning’ 2, 9: “let us be clear: civilizations do not control states, states control civilizations.” See also the other critiques of Huntington’s thesis published in volume 72, number 4 of Foreign Affairs. Cf. Adam Tarock, “Civilisational Conflict? Fighting the Enemy Under a New Banner,” and Jacinta O’Hagan, “Civilisational Conflict? Looking for Cultural Enemies.”

     

    38. See Simon Chesterman, “Law, Subject and Subjectivity in International Relations: International Law and the Postcolony.” Dianne Otto makes an allied point when she notes that a crucial step towards realising the possibilities of new forms of international community is “unlearning” the view that multiplicity is incommensurable with order, and that order depends on force and discipline (“Subalternity and International Law: The Problems of Global Community and the I ncommensurability of Difference” 337).

     

    39. Cf. Fukuyama 14.

     

    40. See Yant, Desert Mirage: The True Story of the Gulf War 54.

    Works Cited

     

    • “Agency Reinstates Tabulator of Iraqi War Deaths.” New York Times 13 April 1992: A14.
    • Ajami, Fouad. “The Summoning.” Foreign Affairs 72.4 (1993): 2-9.
    • Baker, Mark. “U.S. Buries the Human Cost of Victory over Iraq.” The Age 15 May 1992: 13.
    • Baldwin, David, ed. Neorealism and Neoliberalism: The Contemporary Debate. New York: Columbia UP, 1993.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. The Gulf War Did Not Take Place. Sydney: Power Publications, 1995.
    • —. “The Gulf War Will Not Take Place.” Libération 4 Jan. 1991.
    • — . Simulations. New York: Semiotext(e), 1983.
    • Becklund, Laurie and Stephen Braun. “A Rallying Point for Iraqi Exiles. Los Angeles Times 2 March 1991: A17. Benjamin, Walter. “Critique of Violence.” Reflections: Essays, Aphorisms, Autobiographical Writings. 1921. New York and London: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1979.
    • Booker, Malcolm. Background to the Gulf War. Sydney: Left Book Club, 1991.
    • Boydston, Michelle D. “Press Censorship and Access Restrictions During the Persian Gulf War: A First Amendment Analysis.” Editorial Note. Loyola of Los Angeles Law Review 25.3 (1992): 1073-1106.
    • Brownmiller, Susan. Against Our Will: Men, Women and Rape. London: Secker & Warburg, 1975.
    • Camilleri, Joseph and Jim Falk. The End of Sovereignty? The Politics of a Shrinking and Fragmenting World. Aldershot: Edward Elgar, 1992.
    • Chesterman, Simon. “Review Essay: The Politics of Sovereignty.” Melbourne Journal of Politics 23 (1995/96): 175.
    • —. “Law, Subject and Subjectivity in International Relations: International Law and the Postcolony” Melbourne University Law Review 20 (1996): 979.
    • Chomsky, Noam. Deterring Democracy. London: Vintage, 1992.
    • —. Year 501: The Conquest Continues. London: Verso, 1993.
    • Cushman, John H., Jr. “War in the Gulf: The Casualties.” New York Times 3 Feb. 1991: 10.
    • Daponte, Beth Osborne. “A Case Study in Estimating Casualties from War and Its Aftermath: The 1991 Persian Gulf War.” Physicians for Social Responsibility Quarterly (June 1993): 57.
    • Der Derian, James. Antidiplomacy: Spies, Speed, Terror, War. Oxford: Blackwell, 1992.
    • —, ed. Introduction. International Theory: Critical Investigations. New York: NYUP, 1995.
    • Draper, Theodore. “The True History of the Gulf War.” New York Review of Books 30 Jan. 1992: 38.
    • Forde, Steven. “International Realism and the Science of Politics: Thucydides, Machiavelli, and Neorealism.” International Studies Quarterly 39 (1995): 141-142.
    • Freedman, Lawrence and Efraim Karsh. The Gulf Conflict 1990-1991: Diplomacy and War in the New World Order. London: Faber and Faber, 1993.
    • Fukuyama, Francis. “The End of History?” The National Interest Summer 1989: 3-18.
    • —. The End of History and the Last Man. New York: Free Press, 1992.
    • Gane, Mike, ed. Baudrillard Live: Selected Interviews. London: Routledge, 1993.
    • Gellman, Barton. “Census Bureau Retracts Firing of Researcher: Flap Over Release of Iraqi Toll Ends” Washington Post 12 April 1992: A5.
    • Gerbner, George. “Persian Gulf War, The Movie.” Triumph of the Image: The Media’s War in the Persian Gulf A Global Perspective. Eds. H. Mowlana, G. Gerbner, and H.I. Schiller. Boulder: Westview Press, 1992. 11-28.
    • “Gulf War, and Peace, Revisited.” Editorial. New York Times 2 Aug. 1991: A26.
    • Halliday, Fred. “The Cold War and its Conclusion: Consequences for International Relations Theory.” Charting the Post-Cold War Order. Eds. Richard Leaver and James Richardson. Boulder: Westview Press, 1993. 243-65.
    • Haraway, Donna. “A Manifesto for Cyborgs: Science, Technology, and Socialist Feminism in the 1980’s.” Socialist Review 80 (1985): 65-66.
    • Hegel, G.W.F. Lectures on the Philosophy of World History: Introduction. 1830. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1975.
    • Herman, Edward and Noam Chomsky. Manufacturing Consent: The Political Economy of the Mass Media. NY: Pantheon Books, 1988.
    • Huntington, Samuel. “The Clash of Civilizations?” Foreign Affairs 72.3 (1993): 22.
    • —. “If Not Civilizations, What?” Foreign Affairs 72.5 (1993): 186.
    • Johnson, Samuel. The Idler 11 Nov. 1758: 45-9.
    • Jones, Simon. “Freedom of Speech U.S. Demographer Sacked for Exposing Iraqi Civilian Deaths.” Independent 23 April 1992: 12.
    • Kennedy, David. International Legal Structures. Baden-Baden: Nomos, 1987.
    • Keohane, Robert, ed. Neorealism and Its Critics. New York: Columbia UP, 1986.
    • —.”International Institutions: Two Approaches.” International Studies Quarterly 32 (1988): 379.
    • Kristol, Irving. “Responses to Fukuyama.” The National Interest Summer 1989: 19, 28.
    • Lasswell, Harold. Propaganda Technique in the World War. New York: Knopf, 1927.
    • Link, Jürgen. “Maintaining Normality: On the Strategic Function of the Media in Wars of Extermination.” Cultural Critique (Fall 1991): 55.
    • Lipson, Charles. “International Cooperation in Economic and Security Affairs.” Neorealism and Neoliberalism: The Contemporary Debate. Ed. David Baldwin. New York: Columbia UP, 1993. 69.
    • “Lost Testimony: The Gulf War, Restricted Access, and the First Amendment.” Editorial Note. Cardozo Studies in Law and Literature 3.2(1991): 261.
    • Mearsheimer, John. “The False Promise of International Institutions” International Security 19.3 (1994): 5-49.
    • Mackenzie, John. Propaganda and Empire. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1984.
    • Mayer, Tom. “Imperialism and the Gulf War.” Monthly Review 42.11 (1991): 1-11.
    • Middle East Watch. Needless Deaths in the Gulf War: Civilian Casualties During the Air Campaign and Violations of the Laws of War. New York: Middle East Watch, 1991.
    • Morgenthau, Hans. Politics Among Nations: The Struggle for Power and Peace. 5th ed. New York: Knopf, 1973.
    • —. Truth and Power: Essays of a Decade, 1960-1970. New York: Praeger, 1970.
    • Muravchik, Joshua. The Imperative of American Leadership: A Challenge to Neo-Isolationism. Washington: AEI Press, 1996.
    • Normand, Roger and Chris af Jochnick. “The Legitimation of Violence: A Critical Analysis of the Gulf War.” Harvard International Law Journal 35.2 (1994): 387-416.
    • Norris, Christopher. Uncritical Theory: Postmodernism, Intellectuals, and the Gulf War. Amherst: U of Massachusetts P, 1992.
    • Norris, Margot. “Military Censorship and the Body Count in the Persian Gulf War.” Cultural Critique (Fall 1991): 223.
    • O’Hagan, Jacinta. “Civilisational Conflict? Looking for Cultural Enemies.” Third World Quarterly 16.1 (1995): 19-38.
    • Otto, Dianne. “Subalternity and International Law: The Problems of Global Community and the Incommensurability of Difference.” Social and Legal Studies 5.3 (1996): 337-364.
    • “The Persian Gulf War: Schwarzkopf Answers Reporters’ Questions.” Washington Post 28 February 1991: A36.
    • Radhert, Mark. “The First Amendment and Media Rights During Wartime: Some Thoughts After Operation Desert Storm.” Villanova Law Review 36.6 (1991): 1513-1558.
    • Rosenstiel, Thomas B. “Americans Praise Media But Still Back Censorship, Postwar Poll Says.” Los Angeles Times 25 March 1991: A9
    • Sachs, Susan. “End of the War: Allies Faced Ghost Army.” Newsday 1 March 1991: 17.
    • Said, Edward. Culture and Imperialism. London: Vintage, 1994.
    • Scarry, Elaine. The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1985.
    • Schroeder, Paul. “Historial Reality vs. Neo-Realist Theory.” International Security 19.1 (1994): 108-148.
    • Sloyan, Patrick. “Buried Alive: U.S. Tanks Used Plows to Kill Thousands in Gulf War Trenches.” Newsday 12 September 1991: 1.
    • Sterling, Bruce. “War is Virtual Hell.” Wired 1 (1993): 95-6.
    • Summers, Col. Harry, Jr. (Retired). “Body Count Proved to Be a False Prophet.” Los Angeles Times 9 Feb. 1991: A5, A13.
    • Tarock, Adam. “Civilisational Conflict? Fighting the Enemy Under a New Banner.” Third World Quarterly 16.1 (1995): 5-18.
    • Thomson, Janice. “State Sovereignty in International Relations: Bridging the Gap Between Theory and Empirical Research.” International Studies Quarterly 39 (1995): 213, 217.
    • U.S. Department of Defense. Conduct of the Persian Gulf War: Final Report to Congress (Final Pentagon Report). Washington D.C.: U.S Department of Defense, 1992.
    • U.S. News and World Report. Triumph Without Victory: The Unreported History of the Persian Gulf War. New York: New York Times Books, 1992.
    • Walker, Martin. “Dole Inspects Life Rafts While Clinton Cruises.” The Guardian Weekly [London] 15 September 1996: 6.
    • Walker, R.B.J. Inside/Outside: International Relations as Political Theory. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1993.
    • Waltz, Kenneth. Theory of International Politics. Reading, Mass: Addison-Wesley, 1979.
    • Wendt, Alexander. “Anarchy is What States Make of It: The Social Construction of Power Politics.” International Organization 46.2 (1992): 391-426.
    • Weston, Burns. “Security Council Resolution 678 and Persian Gulf Decision Making: Precarious Legitimacy.” American Journal of International Law 85.3 (1991): 516-535.
    • Williamson, Judith. “It’s Mad Bad Saddam vs. the Scudbusters.” The Guardian [London] 31 Jan. 1991: 21.
    • Yant, Martin. Desert Mirage: The True Story of the Gulf War. Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books, 1991.

     

  • Selected Letters from Readers

     

     

     

    The following responses were submitted by PMC readers using regular e-mail or the PMC Reader’s Report form. Not all letters received are published, and published letters may have been edited.

     

    Copyright (c) 1998 by the authors, all rights reserved. This text may be used and shared in accordance with the fair-use provisions of U.S. copyright law, and it may be archived and redistributed in electronic form, provided that the editors are notified and no fee is charged for access. Archiving, redistribution, or republication of this text on other terms, in any medium, requires the consent of the authors and the notification of the publisher, the Johns Hopkins University Press.

     


     

    Reader’s Report on Simon Chesterman, “Ordering the New World: Violence and its Re/Presentation in the Gulf War and Beyond” (PMC 8.3)

     

    In Simon Chesterman’s article, Ordering the New World…, I couldn’t help but have memories in the back of my mind come back to me. During the Gulf War, about a third of my unit was posted to ships to provide air defence to ships because the dingnies in the Canadian Navy are outdated and could not provide their own air defense at that Tea Social in the gulf, so my army unit was given the task. I truly believe the reason for Canada to participate in the war, at least in part, was that it didn’t want t o miss the comming out ball of the ’90s and feel left out by its more influencial neighbors–another example of the keeping up with Jonses Syndrom. The event that followed was nothing less than absurd.

     

    I remember clearly the video cameras with their news crews in the hangar waiting for the soldiers to get off of the bus returning from ‘active’ duty in the gulf. I watched the wonderful spectacle that followed, almost wanting to take part in the produ ction myself. As the soldiers got off the bus and were interviewed one by one it seemed like they were talking a language I could not understand, but everyone around me, including my parents, could which left me a little baffled looking back in retrospec t. My generation, the tv generation that is, have intuitively developed the skill of being amateur spin doctors knowing exactly what the press wants to hear and happilly obligeing–for one must never speak the truth because people prefer to be conforted and lied to, it is just easier to accept.

     

    My personal interactions with these returning people was much different that what was seen on the tube of course. I mostly heard stories of shopping trips and the difficulty of finding alcohol in the arab country of Bahrain. It goes without saying tha t when they had a Scud alert they were legitametly scared, but looking back there was no reason to be frightened they were further from the pesty Scuds than I was from the Great Hanshin Earthquake in Kobe,Japan in 1995.These war vetrans, as they are calle d, spent all their time safely in the rear ranks and never exposed to any real threat from the so called enemy. War has become savy. The news sets have become made for tv movie sets.

     

    We take a reletively small event at its origin, then with a little help from the politicians with the press(always looking to increase their ratings) with a crowd looking for spectacle, we are able to produce great events out of non-events. Like the p hotographs of the Crimean War taken by Roger Fenton which have no nobody(no-bodies) in them we in the late 20th century have also been able to produce a war without any ‘real’casualties, or at least ones that to matter to us anyway.

     

    These comments are from: Rene Bouchard
    reneb@hotmail.com

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Nicky Marsh, “‘Note on My Writing’: Poetics as Exegesis” (PMC 8.3)

     

    Nicky Marsh beautifully puts her finger on what needs to be done now that language poetry is twenty years old: actual reading of specific texts and differentiation of individual poets. Her readings of Scalapino and Howe are really excellent. I hope many people read this review!

     

    These comments are from: Marjorie Perloff
    MPerloff@earthlink.net

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Nicky Marsh, “‘Note on My Writing’: Poetics as Exegesis” (PMC 8.3)

     

    More & more, I find reviews, especially reviews on so-called L-A-N-G-U-A-G-E poetry to be far more interesting, informative and entertaining than the poems themselves.

     

    These comments are from: Lenny DellaRocca
    dellarocca@earthlink.net

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Nicky Marsh, “‘Note on My Writing’: Poetics as Exegesis” (PMC 8.3)

     

    A lucid, engaging discussion about two of the best language poets. Although most of my work is more traditionally narrative in form, I have long admired Howe’s work. This review is a delight to find online.

     

    These comments are from: Linda Lee Harper
    lleeharper@aol.com

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Scott DeShong, “Sylvia Plath, Emmanuel Levinas, and the Aesthetics of Pathos” (PMC 8.3)

     

    I had had “Morning Song”, “Tulips” read to me in high school by a very important teacher. Hence, when I became aware of the plathian myth, doing the plathian thing, reading, the bigraphys’s, and particualry Birthday letter, I was struch by my inabilit y to like anything else, other than those poems. It is not that they have an amazing quality or perfection, as many critics say, but rather that capability to feel, or a particular quality of what you call pathis. I was amazed becuase you reflected on the se two poems. Of particular note, I hope you respond to this point, is the use of “And” in Plaths Poetry (sorry about formate..oops). And is always used when Plath says exactly how she feels This to me implies in every sense her pathos. Plath , for example says “and my heart…(in tulips) In morning song, she says (and now you try your handful of notes, their vowles like balloons) I know i have not busted any feats of great knowledge, but I have never heard anyboy talk about his point, I hope it is of some use… it was fantastic article.

     

    These comments are from: Daniel Groenewald
    danymail@altavista.ne

     


    Scott DeShong replies:

     

    Thanks for your response to my article, and sorry for the long delay in replying to you; I haven’t been around this summer (and won’t be much for the rest of it, either). I understand your appreciation for Plath’s poems, although I must admit that I hadn’t considered her use of “and.” Before coming to terms with this usage, I’d have to study a number of poets to articulate comparisons between variations in their usage of the word. Perhaps what you’re observing has to do with a rhythmic or metric placement of the word by Plath, which helps her acheive a particular tone of voice that, as you read her, embodies pathos. Thanks again, with best wishes,

     

    Scott DeShong

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Adrian Miles, Singin in the Rain: A Hypertextual Reading” (PMC 8.2)

     

    This is a fascinating article. I want to point out one factor I didn’t see mentioned, at least in language I am familiar with–what the hell does diegetic mean anyway?–that those who create products, such as books or movies have always one major obsta cle to overcome in order to garner the audience’s hypnotic engagement (and thus engender “catharsis”). This factor is “believability”, or, at least, the suspension of disbelief. The frame, or “film-in-itself” is merely a narrative method to achieve, in th is case, a rather cozy, insulated environment for the story-telling. The writers have merely set up what they perhaps feared to be a sophisticated audience’s dismissal of smarm. The truest “reading” of any text, I think, has become one which deconstructs the commercial aim–target audience/present future venues, production cost, revenue prospects, etc.–of an commercial endeavor. Having said this, the article is excellent, and has given more “food for thawt” than just about anything I’ve read in the crit ique genre. Thanks!

     

    These comments are from: johnny lite
    lite@mailexcite.com

     

  • IMAGING EmerAgency: A Conversation with Gregory Ulmer

    Joel Weishaus

    Center for Southwest Research
    University of New Mexico
    reality@unm.edu

     

    The following conversation took place over email. Along with discussing aspects of our respective biographies, we focus in on “Imaging Florida,” a project that Gregory Ulmer is working on with colleagues in the Florida Research Ensemble at the University of Florida. Imaging Florida is a collaborative Internet project, including a Web site and email listserv, for the design of a new role for the arts and education in community policy formation and problem solving. The project aims to explore: the analysis of a cross-section of attractions in Florida, leading to a poetics for world wide web design; the analysis of one on-going state of affairs recognized as a public problem in Florida; the design of a Web site that creates a new understanding of a community problem reconfigured as a virtual tourist attraction; collaboration with colleagues at other institutions across the levels of schooling to test the Web site as a resource for relating education to public policy formation. “Imaging Florida’s” web address is http://www.elf.ufl.edu.

     

    Gregory L. Ulmer: What I would like us to do is to depart a bit from the conventional interview, and get a little more into a consultancy relationship. I conceive of this relationship not as two interviewers, nor as two interviewees (you are still interviewing me, so I have more responsibility in that regard). Rather, we would be writing in a rhizomatic way, as I understand that term. Deleuze’s example that I like best is wasp and orchid. This is the saprophytic (vs. parasitic) relation that I discussed in “The Object of Post-Criticism.” Meaning that you have your track and trajectory, and I have mine, and for some reason we have met at a crossroads, our tracks have converged just now.

     

    We start writing back and forth: my goal is to explain a current project of mine, “Imaging Florida,” and your immediate goal is to help me do that, with the understanding that I don’t know what it is exactly. The interview is a collaboration: we both write our way together for a certain sequence of posts.

     

    If this plan sounds OK, let me know, and I will start, assuming that you have asked me: “Tell me about your project called Imaging Florida.”

     

    Joel Weishaus: You bring up “The Object of Post-Criticism,” which was my introduction to your writing. In it you quote John Cage: “art changes because science changes–changes in science give artists different understandings about how nature works.” It seems to me that this relationship between art and science is truer today than when Cage expressed it, some 35 years ago. Thus, from this site (and the way the word can play), tell me about the project you call Imaging Florida.

     

    GLU: Imaging Florida is a contribution to a virtual organization called the emerAgency, which is an experimental consulting group. In trying to show you something about this organization I hope to figure out what it is myself. Its purpose is to improve the world, or if not improve the world, then at least to exist as itself, to come into being or into conversation if not into being. Some day, in the context of problem solving, someone will say: We have tried everything and nothing works very well. It is time to consult with the emerAgency.

     

    One way to understand this organization is to consider its genealogy in applied grammatology (as Europeans say: the AMERICAN version). Why do I insist upon applying to practical states of affairs discipline materials that are conventionally associated with the “pure” arts and sciences? The reason must have something to do with my father. This feeling I have of needing to “pay for my space” (his motto) was inherited: a piece of North Dakota winter carried in my spirit like an inoperable bit of shrapnel from the wars of growing up.

     

    My father, Walt, was born in 1916. After his mother (a German immigrant) died in the great flu epidemic of 1918-1919, Walt and his sister, Bernice, lived with their aunt for six years, until “Boss” (a nickname my grandfather was known by since he was four years old) remarried. Dad was raised Lutheran, but was a Presbyterian in his adult years, serving as an elder and lay minister. He was a veteran of the Depression and World War II. He owned his own business–sand and gravel, and concrete products–in a small town in eastern Montana, which he also served as representative to the state legislature for ten years, and county commissioner for another six. Then he died at age 67.

     

    Walt exemplified the work ethic, self-sacrifice, public service, and a general righteousness. As much as I admired Dad’s integrity, the righteousness was a bit hard to take, and I assumed for a long time that after I left home, got an education, that I had put all that Protestant Republican asceticism behind me. After all, Walt (like so many other in our anti-intellectual culture) believed that teachers were those who couldn’t do anything; and that the arts were parasitical. I recognize now that my desire for an applied grammatology constitutes in part an attempt to prove to Dad that he was wrong about the arts. I know that his criteria were irrelevant to the arts; this irrelevance is just the point of contact or disjunction between what the emerAgency has to offer and practical states of affairs.

     

    In short, the first principle of the new consultancy when confronting an intractable problem is: bring to bear irrelevant criteria.

     

    JW: When it comes to the work-ethic, and self-sacrifice, you could just as well be talking about my father, who died a few years ago, in South Florida. He was an aircraft mechanic during World War II, then an automobile salesman for the balance of his working life.

     

    Even the artists of those days, before the 1950s, had to be practical to survive. Many worked for the WPA. The nuts and bolts of Abstract Expressionism, that most socially irrelevant of schools, were forged in public art, only to revolt against its propagandistic themes. Yet there remained the tendency toward large artworks.

     

    Does this tend toward what is presently perceived as an emerAgency in Florida, that the largest sector of public art is advertising–billboards and the like?

     

    GLU: The emerAgency is concerned not only with the commercialization of the public sphere, but even more with the opening of the border between the public and private spheres that is one effect of the emergence of Entertainment as the principal institutionalization of electronic technology. To explore this aspect of the emerAgency I want to think about why such a project appeals to me in the first place. A thread running through much of my work has to do with creativity. After an early interest in writing creatively I got sidetracked into studying about the creative process. Now I am trying to connect that detour back into some kind of action.

     

    The detour might have to do with my ambivalence toward the “world” that I felt obliged to improve. My remarks here are guided by the categories that showed up in my research into breakthrough inventors–their imaginations tended to be composite assemblages of cultural materials drawn from family experience, entertainment or popular culture materials, schooling background, and a particular community history. I am thinking of investigations by Holton or Gruber that characterize how innovators draw upon an image of wide scope–an aesthetic embodiment of their attunement with the world (what the philosophical tradition referred to as Stimmung).

     

    My pedagogy aims at helping students notice, map, and enhance their own image of wide scope (their own learning style–with the term style marking the aesthetic quality of the thinking).

     

    Given the heuretic principle that requires me to try out for myself whatever poetics my students are using, I have been exploring my own wide image. Perhaps I can get you to test this idea on yourself as well? You will recognize that the method of inquiry into Stimmung is what I have called mystorical. It starts with finding a memory associated with family (my memories of my father, for example, and I might have to come back to those again later). In the institution of Family we are introduced into our native language, and develop for a brief time an oral culture.

     

    Very soon in our civilization the child begins to acquire an entertainment or popular culture as well, through television being present in the home. In analyzing my experience of entertainment discourse I recognize the ambivalence that I mentioned, toward having to pay for my space (as my father put it). To get an idea of what my high school experience was like, think of a synthesis of the films American Graffiti and The Last Picture Show. American Graffiti is an inventory of the mythology and urban legends of teen life. The figure I like best in that film is the “hood with a heart of gold,” but that is not who I was when I was that age. There was a split between my behavior, which conformed in nearly every respect with the norms of the 1950s, and my attitude or feeling about those demands.

     

    The hood type identifies the alienation of my position, but The Last Picture Show gets at the emotional quality of this alienation. The one scene that best evokes the memory of my own alienation is the accident–when the mentally handicapped boy who was always sweeping the street is struck and killed by the cattle truck. This scene so hit me as a moment of recognition (in that Greek sense of anagnorisis) that I remembered it as being much longer. When I saw the film again after some time (on TV) I thought it was a bowdlerized version, since the scene is so short. It is just a brief shot, when the protagonist’s glance takes in the cattle packed into the semi trailer, their frothing snouts pressed against the slatted sides of the truck, on their way to the slaughterhouse. A very existential moment (life–an abattoir).

     

    I investigated this feeling mystorically, using my (or my father’s) identification with Gary Cooper (noted in Heuretics). I continued this inquiry in a Web site project, working with High Noon rather than Beau Geste as I had in Heuretics. The result of this inquiry, called “Noon Star,” is posted on my Web site (http://web.nwe.ufl.edu/~gulmer/star/star1.html). I won’t go into it now other than to say that High Noon is about a hypocritical town–a town that does not support its sheriff in his showdown with the thugs who have come to kill him. I identified with Will Kane’s (Cooper’s) dilemma–the imperative to do his duty despite his disillusionment with his fellow citizens.

     

    The dilemma–the divide between the demands of principle and those of the community or state–shows one of the categorical borders of the human subject; it is the border that Greek tragedy first mapped out. The relevance to the emerAgency project is this ambivalence of wanting to improve a world that might not deserve improvement.

     

    JW: Actually, I was thinking about High Noon recently, when finishing the paratext for my recent Artist’s Book, Threading the Petrified Glyph. The text reads, “Almost noon, Sunday. Tree-mottled shadows spread over the pebbled pavement, as the sun begins to heat my back.” I associated this, and wrote, “Ex-Marshal, Will Kane, his new wife pleading with him for non-violence, must face four outlaws in the center of town, at high noon, as one by one, the townspeople excuse themselves from helping him. Thus, Gary Cooper plays the lone hero with no backup, in High Noon (1952).”

     

    So that my thoughts, first, were of his pacifist wife, and that, even though he loves her, he must face these men. But maybe this had to do more with self-respect than with duty to community. After all, these men were primarily after him. As Sherman Paul says in his essay, “Poetry and Old Age,” “I think that perhaps fidelity to one’s own life is the only wisdom.” I would add: If this life has a wide scope.

     

    When you speak in terms of “wanting to improve a world,” the last lines of William Bronk’s poem, “At Tikal,” come to mind:

     

    to go to the far edge
    apart and imagine, to wall whether in
    or out. To build a kind of cage for the sake
    of feeling the bars around us, to give
    shape to a  world.
    And oh, it is always a world and not the
    world. (ll. 29-35)

     

    Unlike the ancient Mayans, we have access to mountains of information, both verbal and visual, on the worlds of other cultures. We should, then, be able to envision a bigger world than our own. But can we?

     

    GLU: We are experiencing an information explosion, certainly. There are books about everything, and if you live long enough you will discover that someone has written a book about your life. Not a biography, of course, but a book more in the style of “Know Your 3-Year-Old”–a generic report that nonetheless is uncannily close on most points. That I have come across so many books that document what I thought, felt, and said should not surprise me, since the theory I work with says that the greater part of thought takes place outside the individual, in the network of institutional behaviors and processes that organize society (the symbolic order). Identification (productive of the experience of being a self) at a deep level amounts to the taking up of a position already prepared in advance, but with the illusion that one has chosen to be a certain way (such is the effect of ideology).

     

    Anyway, while thinking about the genealogy of my ambivalent desire to improve the world, I happened upon some books that were about the two books that most influenced me while I was in high school. Reading these studies cast some light on the generic character of my experience. I have mentioned already two of the institutions of the popcycle Family and Entertainment that interpellate the individual into an order. The third such institution is School, which interpellates us into literacy. The first book that had a really major impact on my thinking was The Ugly American. I read it as part of my preparations for a debate club speech competition.

     

    I now understand more my response to this book after reading John Hellmann’s American Myth and the Legacy of Vietnam. It turns out that Ugly is one of the biggest sellers of that era (over 4 million copies sold), and that it anticipates and even shapes the policy vision of Kennedy’s New Frontier. Ugly was published in 1958, the year I started high school. The context for me was eastern Montana, a place that does not believe that the old frontier is done with. Jordan, where the militia were put under siege recently, is just north of Miles City, my home town. In my day it was the John Birch Society that was active in those parts. The Cold War was quite real to me and Lederer and Burdick helped me crystallize my feelings into an understanding. As I recall, the speech I gave imitated their jeremiad style, except that I called for saving Latin America from communism, whereas they were concerned with Asia. This influence lasted through my freshman year in college. I had planned to major in political science and economics with a minor in Spanish, to prepare me for my “mission.” Then I took an economics course.

     

    One of the strongest moments of recognition for me in reading Hellmann’s account of my era was his description of the young American type, the American hero, the ideal (as opposed to the ugly Americans who had fallen away from this ideal). The modern version of the type (Hellmann explains) is actually captured in its essence in Graham Greene’s The Quiet American as one determined to do good, not to any individual person but to a country, a world. This hero is earnest and involved, but also ignorant and silly. In the mythology traced by Hellmann, the hero (whether in the more jaundiced version seen from the outside, or the true frontier hero on his errand into the wilderness) is contrasted with the ugly American who has fallen under the spell of European decadence and corruption, preferring the city over the wilderness, personal pleasure over self-sacrifice.

     

    The moment of recognition–what made the recognition something like the anagnorisis of tragedy–was not just this belief on the part of the hero in the mission or destiny of America to improve the world, but also its antithesis–the French! What I had forgotten was that while I identified with the hero, my behavior actually imitated that of the ugly American. A Frenchman is cast as the embodiment of everything the American hero despises (in conflict with my own Francophilia). This place of the French in American mythology pinpoints my ambivalence, made concrete in the fact that the only other book to have an impact on me in high school comparable to The Ugly American was The Fall, by Camus. It still amazes me that I read The Fall back then. In my high school we did not have literature in our English classes until senior year, and then only for honors or college bound seniors. The teacher had a long list of books from which we were to choose one for an outside report. I did not read much at that time and did not recognize many of the names on the list, so I picked Camus at random. It was a revelation to me, my first encounter with anything that could be described as philosophical. The closest I had come to anything like the experience was the first time I read a work of science fiction (in middle school).

     

    Again, I now have some perspective on that event, not only from the retrospect of having read a lot of existentialism specifically, but from a book edited by Shoshana Felman and Dori Laub, Testimony, that includes Felman’s discussion of The Fall in the context of Camus’s other work and his falling out with Sartre over the question of the concentration-camp universe. I wonder if my report I wrote for Mr. Boe’s class is preserved in the boxes of my stuff still in my mother’s garage in Miles City. I would love to see what I made of Camus in 1961-62. In terms of my genealogy, taking my cue from Felman’s reading, it had something to do with this portrayal of a missed encounter, a failure to act, to save the woman from suicide, and the reflection on the possibility of getting a second chance to complete this unfinished experience. Felman cites the concluding paragraphs:

     

    'O young woman, throw yourself into the water again so that I may a second time have the chance of saving both of us!' A second time, eh, what a risky suggestion! But let's not worry. It's too late now. It will always be too late. Fortunately. (147)

     

    This opposition between Leatherstocking and Jean-Baptiste traces the outline of my ambivalence; I live this aporia: I am stuck. Perhaps I am more of a skeptic than I realized–deferring action until I am sure what the consequences of my act will be. Lederer and Burdick’s jeremiad called for a generation of engineer saints. That character is too close to my father’s (who had a degree in civil engineering). In any case, what actually happened after college is that rather than going to Latin America to save it from the communists, I went to graduate school in Comparative Literature, seduced it would seem by European decadence, since my choice of fields was motivated in part by the desire to avoid reading American literature. To the extent that I recalled my desire to improve the world, the practical life-world, it was to be by means of the humanities. Unfortunately, I had no idea how this project might be accomplished. Now, at last, I am proposing the emerAgency as the vehicle for action–a hybrid, a syncretism of the opposite poles of my aporia.

     

    JW: There is an information explosion, as you say; but whose information is it? To be in-formed, to shape oneself inwardly, is a particular and dangerous undertaking, feeding a homunculus, a “new man,” or “new woman.” What excitement! Until one, by degrees, forces open reality’s cover.

     

    We’ve been tracking someone to a hill. It is dark, and the top of the hill (actually a mound) is obscured. I sense that it is a place of forbidden power. My partner (we are detectives) wants to continue, but I caution him that we will die up there.

     

    Suddenly there is a ditch which three of us are digging. We find a yellow-tinted plastic windshield, which seems significant.

     

    Then one of us discovers a round manhole cover. Beneath it is a deep chamber, into which two of us descend, while my dream-ego stays behind.

     

    However, there are fleeting images and intonations that I actually went both to the top of the hill and to the bottom of the hole.

     

    The book that surged my interest in things literary was Homer’s Odyssey, which I read on my own, after being introduced to it in a high school class. The king went off to war, and in his arrogance offends the very god on whom he was most dependent to return safely home! However, it is because of this that he has his adventure. When he finally returned home his son has become a young man, and his young wife is decades older. Was he too late? Not for himself; but maybe for others.

     

    From this admittedly self-centered point of view, one from which we all begin, and end, our odyssey, how do we improve the world “by means of the humanities”? Or do the humanities embrace a larger agon than defined by our institutions?

     

    GLU: Although I want to improve the world, I fear that I will only make things worse (to continue the paraphrase of John Cage).

     

    Odysseus at least had a name for the forces at work in his life (the gods). Psychoanalysis supplies a different set of terms (the unconscious, the drive, desire). My experience is of an imperative: I do not know how, why, or in what way I might accomplish something with my life, but this ignorance never seemed very important. Instead there was this feeling of wanting or needing to say something, anything, it did not matter what. Was it perhaps not an initiative on my part but an emulation?

     

    The earliest memory of wanting to imitate an incomprehensible outpouring of voice was when my father read me bedtime stories. The ability to look at a book and produce fascinating stories seemed like magic, a great power. Before I could read I pretended to be able to read. This trick fooled a few of my friends’ mothers, who marveled at my precociousness and asked me to read to their children (why? to model this behavior?). The first time this happened (as I remember it; we are talking about preschool years) I had a moment of panic, then the realization once I opened the book that the pictures were all I needed. Between the pictures as prompts and my memory of hearing the story, I was able to reproduce the basic plot line for my equally illiterate and captive audience.

     

    The moment of emulation occurred early in high school when I got the idea that the ability to speak a foreign language was supremely desirable. From where did this idea come? In Miles City, Montana, I doubt if I ever encountered a role model for this kind of behavior. Some of the beet farmers in the area did import migrant workers from Mexico during harvest season, but I do not recall associating them with the people I intended to save from communism.

     

    The next example to which I transferred this desire to fill the air with mysterious speech was in college when I changed my major to creative writing after hearing a reading by a real poet (Richard Hugo). In graduate school the equivalent event was reading theory: I wanted to be a theorist. In every case the pattern is similar: first I encounter the exemplar–the production of utterance that is amazingly beyond my own ability to produce and from a source whose nature is a mystery. The desire never settled with any particular content, mode, form, but always with the utterance of a sort not necessarily understood but whose significance was acknowledged.

     

    When I think how much work and energy I have put into theory (the utterance I settled on) I have to wonder; it is as if a person who loved to cut ribbons went around building monumental hospitals, civic centers and the like just to be able to be at the opening ceremony. The psychoanalytic theory of the part-object is one version of an explanation (the voice as a part-object, naming that which cannot be assimilated into a subject’s narcissistic illusion of completeness). Language in this sense is the cause of my desire. Theory aside, the feeling of disproportion could relate to the belated realization that what I was after was not knowledge but (ahem) wisdom. Not the utterance after all but the wisdom of which I took the utterance as an index was the fetish. Not the stream of words itself nor the content and effect but the reserve that was their source, the reservoir, the fountain, the understanding that caused this flow that was what I desired.

     

    It so happens that while my mind was engaged on its fool’s errand my body was taking care of matters on its own! “Better to be lucky than good,” my wrestling coach used to say (to me, at least). What happened was that some years ago I started to resemble a certain stereotype of the wise old man. My hair started turning silver and falling out in my early thirties, and I have had a beard since 1965. 1965 was the turning point when my body started going its own way. Until then I had fit the stereotype of the All-American boy (in the WASP “typage”). I spent that academic year in Spain, and when I returned home in August of 1966 my own mother did not recognize me, literally. When I got off the bus (cross country from New York) I walked up to my mother who was waiting for me and she pushed past me looking for her son. “Ma! It’s me!” I had become a bohemian. Or rather, I looked like what I thought bohemians looked like (as best a person from Montana could tell).

     

    Still, I have had some trouble with my look. A few years ago I was to be met at an airport baggage carousel by a person responsible for driving me to a workshop on the mystory. It was for an Art College. I stood there for quite some time and then finally paged the party meeting Ulmer. A woman came up to the desk quite flustered. She had overlooked me since she was expecting an artist. Not long after that I was doing a weekend conference sponsored by a city arts project and they had put me up in housing normally reserved for artists in residence. No artist was in town at the time. I tried to get the gallery to notarize a statement confirming that Ulmer had been housed in artists’ quarters, to anchor this aspect of my identity. The principle was similar to Duchamp’s urinal–its sheer presence in the gallery made it art.

     

    I place my hopes now in this accident of nature and culture that has cast me in a role in which this look may be functional. Method actors are expert in creating or finding physical gestures or expressions that then generate the emotion they need for the part. Perhaps looking wise might lead to wisdom, if not for me, then for those who are taken in by this illusion.

     

    We all know that when Einstein did his great work he did not look like “Einstein.” But the link between his accomplishments and his celebrity image (the old man) is fixed in our mythology.

     

    Lacanian analysis, however, warns against this kind of transference–allowing the subject who is supposed to know to stand in as a model, as a prop, for the ego of the patient. I will say more later (perhaps) about how I try to play across the type casting (even if education and therapy are different projects). For now, to complete the thought about this split between my mistaking knowledge for wisdom intellectually, and my body going for its stereotype of the wise look, I should say that I have shifted from hoping to utter anything important myself, to wanting to help students accomplish something creative in their lives. Not my creativity but the creativity of my students has become the mode of action for improving the world (or to beg the question).

     

    JW: The year after you grew your beard, I sprouted mine. Since then I have only been without it once, when the American union boss in the Port of Yokohama wouldn’t let me ship out unless I was clean-shaven. Especially because they couldn’t readily grow facial hair, my Japanese friends took this as an incestuous twist on the Ugly American syndrome: Americans playing power games with each other. One’s beard then–the country trying to save face in Vietnam–to the union boss, was synonymous with flying the Jolly Roger.

     

    Three years before, after leaving my last job in advertising–I had been a Junior Executive on Madison Avenue while still a teenager–I enrolled in UC Berkeley’s Department of Oriental Languages. But I didn’t stay long, as more and more of my time went to being Literary Editor of the school’s newspaper, which was in the fray of the Free Speech Movement and Anti-War protests. There I found the ire of rejected writers more threatening than facing police batons!

     

    To be a poet was all I wanted. I remember the model that was prevalent at that time and location. Many of the poets whom Donald Allen anthologized in his classic, The New American Poetry, were, like the early rock bands, on the streets, in the coffee houses, bars, pool halls. It was the spirit of being a poet–living out of, and trusting in, one’s creativity, living without a net–that captured me. For example, in 1972, with the wind picking up, three of us briskly walked Bolinas’s fog-shrouded beach, Robert Creeley striding between Joanne Kyger and me, mumbling what was mostly inaudible. Yet I distinctly heard “Olson,” several times, over the wailing ocean. Was he transmitting something to us? A tradition, maybe?

     

    A few years later I ran into Bob, and he said to me, “Remember that day on the beach?” As if something had happened!

     

    In a country grown to respect not its artists but its entertainers (a threshold, I suggest, that needs to be re-marked), I often ask myself whether I made a terrible mistake. Have I wasted my life for the fetish of enthusiasm, a corban impossible to create? But of course it’s always been already too late. As Merleau-Ponty said, “We live the life we must live in order to do the work we must do.”

     

    That you no longer hope to utter anything important seems to me to be not only after the fact, but in order to teach on the level you propose, heuretics, as you know, must be your fulcrum. What, then, is the nature of the creative actions, the eurekas you hope your students will accomplish with their lives?

     

    GLU: Perhaps the lesson of our experience is the obvious point that to become something one must first desire it, and that this desire must be directly a part of education. My pedagogy is an attempt to model my eureka experience as a relay the students may use to get to their own similar experience. Eureka has to be learned, the same as anything else. I recognize in myself then at least two desires: to improve the world; to say something (something important or beautiful–or both). Presumably the two are not incompatible: I would say in a beautiful way how to improve the world! To accomplish this goal (but how much of this account is really a narrative–told in the past tense, with benefit of hindsight?) I entered the academy.

     

    Thirty years have passed since I started graduate school (1967-1997), enough to make me wonder about the nature of time or my inability to experience it as such. It has something of the feel of The Fugitive, but with none of the drama: a “wrong man” story. In this story I am on the lam, hiding out, in disguise, except that I am not being pursued. If there is a list somewhere of the ten least wanted criminals, I am on it. The part of The Fugitive with which I identify has little to do actually with the criminal part of the story–the chase business–and everything to do with the doctor’s power to do good anonymously. Perhaps it is an image of a certain kind of alienation, this chain of random, anonymous acts by which the protagonist helps strangers with their problems and then moves on? The popularity of the series indicates that this desire is widely felt, and the people responsible for the cinema version missed the point of the series.

     

    I have been underground (or at least ignoring the call to public service), grading papers, for thirty years, and also learning how to say something. I did not learn what to say, but how to say it, how to invent or create or discover a way to improve the world. I do not know how to improve the world myself, but I have a way to come up with a proposal to do so, which is why I say that my interest has shifted from my own utterance to that of my students. The problems associated with this discovery are, first, how to teach someone to use the creative method, and second, the nature of what is created (there is no guarantee of the outcome). About the teaching, I learned that I cannot simply tell students what the method is: they have to discover it for themselves. Not from scratch, of course, but I have to create an environment, a situation, in which the students have a Eureka experience.

     

    The relation between me and my students is that of a donor to a hero in a folk tale. The teacher is not a mentor but a donor (to use the term from formalist and structuralist narrative theory back to Vladimir Propp). Perhaps in person I am still too much of a mentor for the students’ own good, but on-line a teacher needs to be a donor. A mentor is part of the ordinary world, but the donor is the helper figure the heroes meet in some way-station once they have entered the special world of the adventure. In this way-station (most often some kind of bar in American movies) the heroes learn the rules of the special world, and they encounter the donor who puts them to a series of tests to measure their worthiness for the coming confrontation with the villain, the obstacle, the force that resists their desires. The donor figure comes in many guises and its attitude may range from friendly through reluctance to hostility. If the heroes pass the tests they receive from the donor a magic device that later will be used to overcome the obstacles and acquire the elixir, the object of the quest. The art of teaching is in this process of giving the students the magic tool (the method of invention).

     

    JW: Ah. The Grail is not Knowledge (Gnosis), but holds the elixir of Invention. Its value lies not in its battered integument, in its emptiness. When you’re in the Maverick Bar, and some stranger hands you an empty glass and says, “Blood of Christ,” you’ve met a donor. It’s the difference between invention and re-invention, which is downing the hemlock twice.

     

    Based on Fritjof Capra’s book, The Turning Point, the screenplay also written by him, Mindwalk, is a dialogue between a reclusive physicist, an expatriate poet, and an ambitious politician, as they stroll around a medieval castle.

     

    The physicist reveals the universe as it indeterminately plays on the subatomic level, a fetching view of the interconnectivity of all things. A world wide web is, after all, nature’s oldest trope.

     

    The politician accepts this holism as fact, but he interrogates the physicist as to how these insights can pragmatically better the lives of his constituents. While the poet–his ex-speechwriter–is cynical, especially when it comes to political “solutions,” even as he is eloquent in his oneiric abstractions.

     

    Two reclusive dreamers from, according to Plato, contending fields of endeavor, who have moved to relative anonymity; and a third protagonist, struggling to wed the chaos behind reality to the civics of his calling. A cause for EmerAgency?

     

    GLU: The third party in our conversation, Joel, is no person but the symbolic order itself, represented by the institutional discourse within which our dialogue takes place. One goal of the emerAgency is to address this collective dimension, or to use the prosthesis of digital technologies to help us grasp this new location of thinking as our civilization moves into a new apparatus (the social machine of electracy). Most of my study of the oral apparatus has been concerned with Native American culture in general, and the shamanism of the Plains tribes in particular–a figure such as Black Elk for example. Literate people experience thought as located in our heads. The Ancient Greeks experienced thought in the chest or stomach. For Black Elk, serious thinking was associated with the wind, the four winds that gave voice to the spirit of the Grandfathers. In electracy the location of thought is moving again, in relation to a new subjectivation, a new experience of identity, so that thought now is happening outside our bodies once again, or in the relation of our bodies to the infrastructure. We have to invent a practice for the interactive, collaborative, collective capabilities of the Internet.

     

    I ought to open a parenthesis here about Black Elk, to bring you up to date on a line of inquiry that I opened in Derrida at the Little Bighorn. Producing that mystory showed me that my superego (my personal Mount Rushmore, the authority figures who interpellated me or with whom I identified) consisted of Walt Ulmer, Gary Cooper, George Armstrong Custer, and Jacques Derrida. The mystory further produced an operator that could be used to loosen the binds of duty imposed by this composite authority.

     

    The operator was the term ficelle, the personal message that appeared (using the paranoid critical method) on the battlefield map marking the site of the Last Stand with the letters naming the five companies that fell with Custer (F, I, C, E, and L). Ficelle among other things was a term Henry James used to name secondary characters whose function was to further the form of a novel. I interpreted the message as: look to the ficelles of your mystory (characters assigned a supporting role in the narrative of my superego). The ficelle of Custer, for example, is Chief Gall (in my mystory). The thread (another meaning of ficelle) Gall led eventually to Black Elk, whom I now think of as being from my home town, since he reported in his life story that he camped near the mouth of the Tongue River (the site of Miles City).

     

    I did some research on Native American shamanism, then, especially that of the Plains, the Lakota–a line of research doubly motivated by the importance of shamanism in Applied Grammatology (in Beuys and Lacan). A feature that recurred in various accounts by individual healers was how early they were first called or contacted by the Spirits–often as early as age four or five. Wallace Black Elk, a 20th-century figure who was called at this early age, was thankful that he never attended school, since he had observed that formal schooling cut off his people from access to these spirit voices. Now the importance of this information for me is that it finally provides an interpretation for an odd event in my experience. A running joke in my family is my memory of what I now understand as a contact with the Spirits described by the two Black Elks (and many others). The summer of my fourth year, when we were still living in North Dakota.

     

    I was in the backyard of our house, which was on the outskirts of town at that time, and two creatures appeared to me that I recognized as Shmoos. Shmoos, you know, the cartoon characters drawn by Al Capp. We stared at each other for some time: they just stood there, smiling happily, beaming, as Shmoos do. Finally I ran inside to tell my mother, insisted that she come outside to see. Nothing was there, of course.

     

    My theoretically informed self knows that this event must be a screen memory. The relevance in our context is the surprise I got when I found out more about Shmoos (since I had no recollection of their role in the comic strip). According to one history, “Shmoos are the world’s most amiable creatures, supplying all man’s needs: They lay bottled grade-A milk and packaged fresh eggs; when broiled, they taste like sirloin steak and, when fried, like chicken. As in a fertility myth gone berserk, the Shmoos reproduced so prodigiously they threatened to wreck the economy.”

     

    As one character smothered in Shmoos complains: “It’s the worst tragedy that ever hit hoomanity!! Bein’ overwhelmed by pure unadulterated goodness!!” I started school that fall and never received a visit from the Shmoos again. How should I take this unexpected completion of one of my oldest and oddest memories? Is it a warning about the dire consequences of my desire to improve the world?

     

    In any case, the first project of the emerAgency, undertaken this year in my graduate seminar, was to develop a prototype for an electronic practice. The relay we used to guide the design was Greek tragedy. Tragedy is a transitional invention, part ritual and part writing (part oral and part literate) that helped the Greeks reimagine themselves as citizens of Athens rather than as members of separate tribes. Theater as a space focused the collective attention in a new way, and demonstrated the interconnection between individual folly and collective disaster–the two kinds of blindness (ATH, or ate). This relay (using a feature of the transition from orality to literacy to imagine what is happening in our own transition from literacy to electracy) suggests that our practice similarly could use the internet to focus collective attention on our contemporary version of ATH. What is our own understanding of the link between individual and collective blindness? How do we account for the persistence of error in our lifeworld even after centuries of adopting scientific method as the dominant mode of collective reason? In this context we might see that Hamlet acts in a scientific manner by refusing to act until he knew for sure what was the case (rather than just accepting the spirit world at face value, without questioning its claims).

     

    There are several different schools of thought, no doubt, about why we find it impossible to avoid error and folly in our individual and collective experience. Until recently science remained committed to a belief in progress (perhaps this belief is still the official one), but such a view is difficult to sustain at this point in the late twentieth century. Religion holds on to its view that this world is an illusion, one way or another. The epistemology of critique, which is at least within the division of knowledge relevant to the emerAgency, seems to be somewhere in between these extremes, with its ideological account of illusion. The ideological explanation for folly and calamity (ATH) was at first that people did not know what they were doing. When the enlightenment method of criticism–exposing the scene of power behind the appearance of belief failed to heal the blindness, the reason given was cynicism–they knew what they were doing was an error, but they did it anyway. The theoretical position adopted by the emerAgency, finally, is that of poststructuralism, especially in its French version. Psychoanalysis is relevant in the context of our relay, in any case, since it is an updating of Greek tragedy (thinking of Freud’s retelling of Oedipus). The unconscious is a literate concept of ATH. One of the most interesting notions within French psychoanalysis for our purposes is Lacan’s concept of the extime–a neologism combining external and intimate, that is just what we need to name this relocation of thought into a multibodied infrastructure. Lacan used the figure of the moebius strip, among a variety of other topological shapes, to evoke the simultaneously inside-outside quality of experience.

     

    The point of departure for the emerAgency practice is this theoretical account of the extimatic nature of experience. Again we are dealing with a literate remake of an ancient notion of correspondence between the macrocosm and microcosm: as above, so below. As you might expect, the modern correspondence is based on difference as a relationship rather than similarity, if that makes any sense. What is inside and what is outside, the border between the inside and the outside at the individual and collective levels across the categories of identity (me and not-me, self and other) is disjunctive, non-similar but systematically so (the legacy of literacy that reduced identity to the border of my physical body, to individualism). In any case, working as we are with the humanities, with the specialized discipline of arts and letters, the emerAgency recognizes in the cosmology of the extime the most basic quality of language understood in aesthetic terms. If a law, principle, or axiom could be generalized from a composite of statements made by artists about creativity, it might come down to a saying such as the outside is inside.

     

    Wallace Stevens shows us a blackbird thirteen ways but the effect has little to do with birds and everything to do with what it feels like to be human. Such is the grounding insight of the emerAgency project for a new consultancy, in this match between the structure of a lyric figure and a theory of reality as extimatic.

     

    JW: Can this also be enunciated as “ex-time”? The brain, remember, stripped of its processes, has no self-awareness. No inside; no outside. No-Mind, as Buddhists say. Weird that it should have evolved this way! And fortunate, as it feeds us the meaty conundrum on which humans have been dining, like vultures on road kill, for at least 100,000 years.

     

    Steven Mithen (in The Prehistory of the Mind) points out how Supernatural Beings who announce themselves to humanity always have two things in common. They are different enough from us to be able to violate natural laws, while delineating themselves enough for us to be able to grasp their presence, even while sustaining a distal immutability. In other words, they can fall into time, into our perception, into the circumstances of tragedy (the rituals of, and the epics about), without their essence deserting the timeless realm from which they generate.

     

    As you say, there is this dichotomy, one that is always already everywhere. Yet the border between inside and outside is not merely disjunctive, but eruptive. It is always moving, assessing, theoretically repositioning itself. It is always–as Deleuze, who leaped out, points out–becoming-us.

     

    Mindful of this dynamic, and dropping, for a moment, into electracy’s current lingo, can you launch a specific avatar that emerAgency may encounter with reference to your imaging of Florida?

     

    GLU: Imaging Florida is an experiment with the Copernican revolution in consulting proposed by the emerAgency. Conventional consulting, based on the positivist preconceptions about utility, addresses a middle dimension of problems: things are going wrong, how can we fix them. The history of these fixes is not impressive, with each new solution producing further problems, as if entropy itself were the “problem” consulting was trying to fix. A shorthand version of this view would point out that the Holocaust, after all, was a solution (the final solution). The point of evoking this context is not to discredit rational problem-solving as such, but to call attention to a feature of it that is never absent from the process, no matter in how benign a form. The Copernican revolution in consulting is to step back from this direct approach to problem-solving in public policy formation (for example, “throwing money” at a problem).

     

    The new consultancy attempted in Imaging Florida proposes that instead of the idea that the consultants’ knowledge explains the problem, it is the case that the problem explains the consultant: a reversal of the hierarchy, similar to the shift of point of view from the geocentric to the heliocentric theory of the solar system. The phenomena look the same from either perspective, but the understanding of the situation is radically different between the two positions.

     

    Here is the point of intervention for arts and letters. The entire modernist project in poetry, for example, beginning at least with Baudelaire, has worked with the premise that the outer material world may serve as a metaphor or figure for the internal or spiritual experience of a person. The tradition of correspondences is a principal part of the Western tradition in general, of course, all the way back to the Pythagorean music of the spheres. I could cite Walt Whitman here, but Rilke’s “Spanish Trilogy” comes to mind as just one example:

     

    From me and every candle flickering
    in the dimness of the many houses, Lord:
    to make one Thing; from strangers, for I know
    no one here, Lord, and from me, from me,
    to make one Thing; from sleepers in these 
      houses,
    from old men left alone at the asylum
    who cough in bed, importantly, from children
    drunk with sleep upon the breasts of 
      strangers,
    from so much that is uncertain and from me,
    from  me alone and from what I do not know,
    to make the Thing, Lord Lord Lord, the Thing
    which, earthly  and  cosmic, like a meteor
    gathers within its heaviness no more than
    the sum of flight: and weighs nothing but 
      arrival. (ll. 7-24)

     

    Consultants who have not made one Thing out of themselves and the life situation they are attempting to understand will never know what they are doing (are blind, suffer ATH). This lyrical practice does not replace the empirical but supplements it, to produce a hybrid (the emplyrical).

     

    The new consultants ask what disaster might reveal about us individually and collectively. What tragedy brings into intelligibility or at least into representation is that folly in individuals, mistakes, errors, magnified collectively, produce historical disaster. The timing of the remake of the Titanic disaster is significant for us, carrying as it does a lesson similar to that of the tower of Babel. Commentators point to the Titanic as exemplary for what it reveals about the limitations of human efforts to master nature and life itself. The theory guiding the emerAgency is that the problems addressed by conventional consulting are only one dimension of what in fact is a three dimensional phenomenon. Every problem coexists with a potential disaster (the limit of human power that marks the borders of the Real) and with the trauma that founds human identity. This way of characterizing identity formation as traumatic signals the psychoanalytic theory we are using (an explanation of which is beyond the scope of our conversation; the psychoanalytic metaphor for it is “castration” anxiety).

     

    The upshot of this understanding of the tripartite character of problems is the recognition in our method that we ourselves are part of the problem, and our blindness (ATH) about the true nature of this participation accounts for why we are unable to make good on the Enlightenment goal of putting an end to error. Our method is to study problems with the same analytical care of conventional consultants, but with the motive of seeking in this information possible correspondences for the feeling we have about the world to find out our disposition, our attunement, to bring into understanding the state of mind, individual and collectively, that is complicit with the forces that resist us. We do not expect utilitarian consultants to take this reversal of the explanatory direction very seriously; it is aimed at education, the public schools, as a practice that might be able to bring institutionalized learning into the process of making public policy. One important reason why collectively we allow ourselves to cooperate so much with the forces of entropy is because the people responsible for it work anonymously. If the emplyrical study of disaster were a feature of the standard curriculum, a great many people in positions of authority would come under a new kind of scrutiny, not after the fact (what did you do in the war, Daddy?) but during the process.

     

    At the heart of the pedagogy is a certain view of human motivation: a young person might be more interested in investigating the superfund cleanup in her community if she recognized the lyrical principle that the details about the dangers to the environment provided a complex expression of her own sense of being. I hesitate to call the kind of writing or production such a student might undertake “poetry” or “art,” but there is no doubt that these aesthetic practices must be combined with the empirical ones before we are able to grasp holistically the true condition of our problematic world.

     

    A number of faculty and students at the University of Florida are now at work on Imaging Florida for the emerAgency. “Florida” here just means “wherever you are; in your own locale,” which is what Florida is for us. The Florida Research Ensemble is designing a prototype for a Web site that may be used by anyone as a point of departure for developing their own version of the new consultancy. The slogan we are field-testing is Problems B Us. We would like to hear from anyone interested in testing the effects of this point of view.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Allen, Donald Merriam. The New American Poetry, 1945-1960. New York: Grove Press, Inc.; London: Evergreen Books Ltd., 1960.
    • American Graffiti. Universal Pictures, 1973.
    • Beau Geste. Paramount Pictures, 1939.
    • Bronk, William. “At Tikal.” Light and Dark. New Rochelle, NY: Elizabeth Press, 1975.
    • Camus, Albert. The Fall. New York: Vintage Books, 1956.
    • Capra, Fritjof. Mindwalk. Paramount Pictures, 1990.
    • —. The Turning Point: Science, Society, and the Rising Culture. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1982.
    • Felman, Shoshana and Dori Laub. Testimony: Crises of Witnessing in Literature, Psychoanalysis, and History. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • The Fugitive. Warner Bros., 1993.
    • Greene, Grahame. The Quiet American. New York: Viking Press, 1956.
    • Hellmann, John. American Myth and the Legacy of Vietnam. New York: Columbia UP, 1986.
    • High Noon. Dir. Fred Zinnemann. United Artists, 1952.
    • The Last Picture Show. Columbia Pictures, 1971.
    • Mithen, Steven. The Prehistory of the Mind. London: Thames & Hudson, 1996.
    • Paul, Sherman. “Poetry and Old Age.” Hewing to Experience. Iowa City: U of Iowa P, 1989.
    • Rilke, Rainer Maria. “Spanish Trilogy.” Selected Poetry of Rainer Maria rilke. Ed. and trans. Stephen Mitchell. New York: Random House, 1982.
    • Ulmer, Gregory. “Derrida at the Little Bighorn.” Teletheory. New York: Routledge, 1989.
    • —. Heuretics. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins UP, 1994.
    • —. “The Object of Post-Criticism.” The Anti-Aesthetic: Essays on Postmodern Culture. Ed. Hal Foster. Port Townsend, WA.: Bay Press, 1983.
    • Weishaus, Joel. Threading the Petrified Glyph. Special Collections, Fine Arts Library, University of New Mexico.

     

  • The Therapeutic Stage/Page: Facts and Fictions about the Dead to Stir the Living

    Theresa Smalec

    Department of Performance Studies
    New York University
    tks201@is9.nyu.edu

     

    Peggy Phelan, Mourning Sex: Performing Public Memories. London and New York: Routledge, 1997.

     
    In Mourning Sex: Performing Public Memories, Peggy Phelan takes performance and performative writing as bases from which to probe the relationship between private and public grief, and particularly the question of whether there is political agency in public mourning for women. Her introduction makes it clear that she hopes to answer this question in the affirmative; “This Book’s Body” outlines the author’s hypothesis that certain forms of live drama respond to our postmodern society’s need to “rehearse for loss, and especially for death” (3). She begins with the broad propositions that we are currently ensnared in what D.A. Miller has called “morbidity culture,” and that “theatre and performance have especially potent lessons for those interested in reassessing our relations to mourning, grief, and loss” (3). Near the end of the chapter, however, Phelan engages in a detailed discussion of the socio-sexual barriers preventing Sophocles’ grief-stricken sisters, Antigone and Ismene, from honoring their bond to each other even as they mourn the loss of their brother. This section is pivotal in that it reflects her more specific project–namely, to explore various manifestations of “theatrical behavior” as political tools with which women might challenge the repressive conventions and disturbing omissions that presently vex their relations to a patriarchal culture’s sanctioned rites of bereavement.

     

    Reflecting her primary interest in peoples’ embodied attempts to expand North American culture’s restrictive customs of grief, Phelan titles the book’s eight sections after different parts of the human anatomy. A short list of the unorthodox losses mourned by this volume includes “Bloody Nose,” a chapter concerned with the contradictory, even hostile relationship between legal and psychoanalytic notions of sexual injury; “Infected Eyes,” a scrutiny of Tom Joslin’s Silverlake Life which uses the gay artist’s video diary about living with and dying of AIDS as a vehicle through which to (re)view the psychic substitutions at the heart of cinematic and sexual difference; and “Shattered Skulls,” an essay combining straightforward commentary on Holbein’s famous painting, The Ambassadors, with a personal “fiction” told in the voice of a neurotic narrator.

     

    The self-consciously unstable speaker in “Shattered Skulls” deftly enacts Phelan’s project not only to theorize, but also to dramatize–in writing–the psychic effects of trauma. Here, the textual page becomes a theatrical and therapeutic stage for a woman whose relation to the world has been jarred by several blows, including the brutal riots ensuing from the Rodney King verdict. As the chapter unfolds, readers find themselves caught up in a complex “acting out” of the disjointed yet fiercely overlapping nature of certain culturally troubling events:

     

    Martin Luther King was assassinated for trying to live his dream. Maybe I wanted too much with you: maybe you were shot because you would not stay in "your place." A black man moving faster than they liked. Rodney King was beaten for moving too fast--speeding too fast from drugs, from a heavy accelerator, from the thud of a police stick. Martin Luther King. Rodney King. King Henry VIII executed Anne Boleyn because she could not reproduce sons and the Pope told him no divorce. Henry wanted a copy, a way to reproduce himself to maintain succession as King. That was his dream. (121)

     

    This essay’s citation, amalgamation, and subsequent transformation of several historical traumas may be of interest to postmodern readers and performers on several grounds. The inventive distortions that Phelan effects here, however, strike me as troubling for reasons that I outline below. Moreover, the public performance of private grief staged in “Shattered Skulls” is reflective of the methodological approach of other key sections of Mourning Sex, in which Phelan seems to forfeit clarity of argument in order to achieve a certain performative force.

     

    The speaker recalls as fragments, rather than as complete, culturally-specific events, an allusive series of names and incidents. Her nostalgic evocation of these well-known remnants of sorrow brings them into the present with a poignant sense of pertinence. Yet the narrator’s traumatized acts of re-membering function slowly to merge and confuse the roles of Martin Luther King, Rodney King, King Henry VIII, and other Kings throughout history:

     

    Why did Luther want to shorten those commandments? Why did King want to dream out loud? Was King your peaceful Ambassador? King, Martin Luther. Martin Luther King, Junior. Hans Holbein the Younger. I hunger for you still. (121)

     

    Phelan portrays the enigmatic triggering of an earlier trauma, as well as the warped, seemingly “irrational” associations that often haunt the one who remembers; the result of this performative playing on words is a disturbing sense of randomness. “Shattered Skulls” not only intermingles private and public traumas, but also several temporal and cultural specificities. This creative fusion and surrogation of certain figures of crisis serves to subsume the different social values that, through time, become fastened to particular names, thus securing them as the markers of distinctly weighted acts of violence. In short, it becomes increasingly hard to identify any one of these racial, sexual, and socio-economic traumas as more worthy of public grief and redress than the rest, since they all blur together as the narrative moves on.

     

    Phelan’s narrator seems aware of the palimpsest of erasures that she forges: “Holbein painted The Ambassadors in 1533. It seems I’ve been staring at it ever since. I know too much about the painting. Kafka said he wrote to forget. Am I forgetting you? Painting you over?” (121). Nevertheless, this realization that she writes in order to retouch, alter, and thus survive a personal loss does not alter the way the narrative itself performs, and thus reveals, the violence of this “therapeutic” mis-remembering. The substantive differences between Rodney King and King Henry VIII are collapsed.

     

    At one point in this challenging chapter, the speaker recalls the loss of her lover at the hands of a deranged neighbor; she incorporates this desolating, personal blow into the far more public memories of the outrage that erupted after the racist ruling in Rodney King’s case:

     

    I was getting over you. I could tell. I finished things, started others. I hardly ever thought of Holbein's painting. It had become a "hollow bone" in my memory. But recently, since the police in Los Angeles were found not guilty of beating Rodney King, I started thinking about Martin Luther King and Martin Luther and the painting. I started dreaming of you and my professor friend in London. I wanted to be an ambassador for the new state. (124)

     

    Desperate to restage, and thus come to terms with her own, little-known loss, Phelan’s narrator uses the notoriety of King’s injuries in order to mourn several more obscure yet equally hate-incited forms of shattering. Her appropriation of a black man’s trauma at the hands of America’s predominantly white legal system in order to make visible her own wounds reveals the complex structure and ambiguous power of trauma as a form of social agency; nevertheless, the metonymic logic underlying this piece of theatre, this “critical fiction” (18), suggests a provisional strategy by which women can make their private losses intelligible to a male-centered, mainstream audience. North American culture has, in general, come to avow the significance of the victimization endured by men such as Martin Luther King and Rodney King; meanwhile, the state’s shameful abuse of women like Susan Smith and Aileen Wornos still goes unmarked.

     

    Departing from conventional scholarship’s clinical approach to trauma, the organs comprising Mourning Sex mark the author’s concern, at a dramatic level, with how queer (racially, sexually, and/or financially disenfranchised) subjects perform their bereavement: how they recover from loss. By enacting, through a medley of critical and creative prose, the gaps and distortions that often attend socially-unpalatable memories, Phelan shows how both live performance and performative writing may serve as political tools with which stigmatized groups can turn private pain, rage, and terror into collective discourses of healing. Significantly, she defines “trauma” as wounds to both the body and psyche. Furthermore, in proposing a way to redress these linked yet distinct forms of damage, she posits “rehearsal” as the material and mental work of repetition: restaging, revising, and even misrepresenting the past so as to cope with the damage incurred at an earlier time. Through this sophisticated approach to what acts of rehearsal can teach us about the mutable, partly reparable factors of time and remembrance, her book diverges usefully from a recent wave of studies on the relevance of theatre to grief. For once, the dramas of forgetfulness and of “getting it wrong” acquire a theory of value: “truth is what we can make from what we’ve missed” (7).

     

    Chapter four contains a potent example of how postmodern subjects use the traces of an obscure past in order to claim legitimacy for their vested interests in the present. Here, Phelan probes the curious fact that one of the most dramatic plots in Renaissance theatre unfolded in London during the unlikely year of 1989: “In a six month dig in Southwark, archaeologists unearthed the startingly well preserved remains of the Rose Theatre, the first home of Christopher Marlowe’s dramatic plays” (73). The surprising twist to this discovery, however, is that it “was surrounded by the prospect of loss” (74). For, rather than bestowing the site with the customary honors of state-funded excavation and memorialization, the fate of the Rose was governed by heterosexist politics and capitalist economics.

     

    As Phelan examines the public and private records attending the controversy, she argues that a central albeit tacit reason for the British government’s reluctance to salvage this particular playhouse lies in the decidedly queer racial/sexual interests of its champion dramatist: “The Rose was Marlowe’s stage, not Shakespeare’s. Marlowe wrote plays about a man who consorted with devils, about a homosexual King, about the persecution of a Jew; he also allegedly wrote ‘all they that love not tobacco and boys were fools’” (79). The rest of her essay examines the Rose as a deeply haunting and consistently mutating theatrical “body.” After positing this site as a crucible for multiple cultural anxieties, she endeavors to show how the invention of history “springs from a dense nexus of competing and often contradictory moral, nationalistic, economic and unconscious factors” (78).

     

    Throughout Mourning Sex, the author struggles to write “with and toward a theatre of affect” (18). In practice, this emotive writing style makes for a daring mode of analysis. Most of Phelan’s essays unite linear, fiercely coherent critiques of disturbing cultural moments with the meandering, melodramatic, even hysterical narratives that bring these traumas to life in the minds and bodies of readers. “Whole Wounds: Bodies at the Vanishing Point” probes the potential for redemption in our postmodern age of despair by linking a concept derived from Renaissance painting, that of perspective, to current technologies of theatre. Here, she fosters performance theory’s dialogue with art history and theology by claiming that the cathartic value of theatre, like Caravaggio’s classical painting, The Incredulity of St. Thomas, hinges on witnessing: “Western theatre is itself predicated on the belief that there is an audience, an other willing to be cast into the role of the auditor” (31). Working with the problem of how to secure external response to injuries that are internal and often empirically unverifiable, this ground-breaking artist/critic goes on to uncover theatrical strategies that help women forge embodied form–hence credibility–for that which is no longer present.

     

    Chapter two, “Immobile Legs, Stalled Words: Psychoanalysis and Moving Deaths,” couples the voice of a rigorous female academic with that of an injured dancer who once had an illustrious career as a member of the New York City Ballet. By retracing, literally and metaphorically, the mis-steps that marred both the dancer’s ties to her academy and the analyst/analysand relations informing the history of psychoanalysis, this stirring movement of voices acts out the “talking cure” that lies at the heart of Mourning Sex. Chapter five, “Bloody Nose,” explores the temporal nature of memory, and specifically sexual memory. Here, Phelan traces a pivotal distinction between legal and psychoanalytic notions of sexual injury, arguing that the liminal forum of the Anita Hill-Clarence Thomas hearings offers a fascinating stage on which to assess the political stakes of this contrast: “Precisely because they were not conducted in a court of law nor on a psychoanalytic couch, the hearings can illuminate how each system of understanding has both perils and possibilities for redressing sexual injury” (95).

     

    Chapter seven marks what for me is the most problematic member of this insightful body of losses and injuries. Moving from public traumas to what Phelan cites, in her introduction, as a more personal one, “Failed Live(r)s: Whatever Happened to Her Public Grief?” enacts a performance of citation, repetition, and mimicry in which feminist scholarship, psychoanalysis, and performance appear as analogous, and analogously troubling, activities. One layer of the labyrinthine mourning staged in this section is an effort to reread and make sense of several academic women’s wounded identifications with the university and one another. Here, the identity of the performing and performative “I” of the narrative becomes most complex, most unreliable (and most troubling) as Phelan’s narrator incorporates, into her own text, the more troubling sections of essays written by three female scholars, one of whom the narrator claims to have treated in the intimate context of psychoanalysis. Chapter seven begins with a personal retrospective about a nun who taught the narrator, in high school, how to (mis)read Gerard Manley Hopkins’ poems of loss. The narrative moves from this seemingly autobiographical account to relay a “critical fiction” involving Rena Grant and Echo. Yet Phelan’s text does not mark this shift in narrative perspective; it never indicates that Phelan herself is not the same person as the analyst/narrator who recounts and interprets the women’s tales. This particular blurring of genres (personal retrospective and public performance) raises some distressing questions about the practical value of both performative writing and pyschoanlaysis as the essay moves on. She dubs her former patient “Echo” because this woman displayed an amazing ability to emulate the actions, thoughts, and physical gestures of those with whom she had contact:

     

    In all respects save one, the patient I'd like to describe here appeared to be well adjusted and psychically robust... Her mimicry was responsible for much of her professional success as a critical writer, but it also led to personal unhappiness. In the course of the analysis, she began to mimic me so completely that I was forced to suspend our investigations. In the three years since, I have spent considerable time reflecting on her quite remarkable case. (132)

     

    The effect of this unmarked movement from the autobiographical to fictional is disturbing: one is left feeling that one is privy to documents and insights too personal to be made public. Here, the public performance of grief becomes an invasion of privacy as the writers being diagnosed are either dead or rendered as anonymous patients.

     

    Echo’s case is particularly vexing because her vulnerable writings seem to be used here without the woman’s knowledge or consent; as the essay unfolds, it seems the friendly and therapeutic relations between Echo and Phelan’s narrator no longer exist. The narrator draws attention to the instability in her role as therapist as she admits that psychoanalysis traditionally tries to remedy distress through a verbal mode of inquiry, namely the “talking cure.” Contrary to this approach, her own dealings with Echo were marred by a focus on what Echo (re)produced textually, rather than on what she actually said:

     

    To an extraordinary degree her unconscious controlled her critical writing and thus early in the analysis we decided to use her critical writings as our "text." Under normal circumstances, I would not use a patient's work in this manner, but I believed it would save us time and allow us to isolate her relation to mimicry. (133)

     

    Throughout “Failed Live(r)s,” Phelan’s narrator assumes the authoritative roles of the stable survivor and sane-minded analyst. In the course of re-reading her dead and live (albeit lost) colleagues’ critical essays, she scrutinizes their authors’ innermost feelings of guilt, inadequacy, and fraud. One of her most disturbing yet astute conclusions is that white academic women, as victims of patriarchy, masquerade “as” feminine: “As among those who contribute to and benefit from racism, they masquerade as non-complicit and individually benign–purely ‘white’” (140). Another compelling inference pertains to the nature of Echo’s grief for her dead colleague: the “failed liver,” Rena Grant. Echo’s need to mourn for (and possibly mimic) other white, female scholars is rooted not only in the loss of a friendship, but also the loss of a kind of partner in crime:

     

    Recognizing their complicity with this system complicated Echo's and Grant's pleasure in their professional lives; further discovering that they saw each other's complicity led them to form a kind of hysterical identification with one another. Their shame and guilt gave them an odd kind of bond. (140)

     

    Though intimate and at times rawly moving, the author defines (and perhaps renders as manageable) the private grief fueling this analysis in starkly clinical terms: “a case history of a patient called Echo who grieves over the death of her colleague, Rena Grant, a critic and assistant professor at the time of her death” (20).

     

    The narrator’s extensive, pseudo-Freudian bid to cast herself as the accomplished interpreter of another’s neurosis is revealed as increasingly impoverished, as the roles of doctor and patient, as well as the symptoms of blindness and insight mapped by this script, grow increasingly blurred. The closing gambit to justify why she published such a highly allusive memorial seems as prone to guilty repressions and enabling distortions as the public negotiations of trauma assessed in the rest of the book. Even as she cites from Echo’s private and public manuscripts, Phelan’s narrator excludes certain passages; she too pieces together the past differently, in order to “forget” her own embarrassing misrecognitions and thus move on.

     

    Keenly aware of the diverse and deeply conflicted investments that subjects of the present make in restaging the past, Mourning Sex speaks for rousing and somehow healing the memories of injury that linger in the cultural unconscious of contemporary Europe and North America. From Antigone to Anita Hill, from Renaissance plagues to the pandemic of AIDS, from theory to practice, this volume’s performative engagement with the losses that haunt postmodern culture is valuable reading for scholars and practitioners of theatre alike. The author succeeds in her bid to forge a different formal relation between the critical thinker and reader, and in her wish to suggest a different way of doing–of performing–critical scholarship. The multiple voices animated within Mourning Sex moved me; they stirred my grief and hope in ways that I did not expect from an “academic” text. Aspiring to extend Phelan’s (en)trails of mimicry, I end this review by citing and retouching a line: “I can still hear her voice with my partial ear” (151).

     

  • The Dyer Straits of Whiteness

    Todd M. Kuchta

    Department of English
    Indiana University
    tkuchta@indiana.edu

     

    Richard Dyer, White. London and New York: Routledge, 1997.

     

    “White people create the dominant images of the world and don’t quite see that they thus construct the world in their image” (9). This premise drives Richard Dyer’s White, “a study of the representation of white people in Western culture” (xii), with particular emphasis on the media of photography and film. Dyer’s premise is also resonant of much recent work in the emergent field of “White Studies”–or what one of its practitioners, Mike Hill, has called “critical ethnography’s next-big-thing” (“What” 1). Though a nascent interest in whiteness goes at least as far back as James Baldwin and Ralph Ellison, the more recent genealogy of White Studies can be traced to the work of contemporary non-white cultural critics like bell hooks, Cornel West, and Stuart Hall.1 Among the first sustained inquiries into the ubiquitous yet invisible character of whiteness, however, was Dyer’s own essay “White,” published in a 1988 issue of the British film journal Screen. That essay, which includes many of the ideas given fuller shape in his book, provided an innovative reading of the depiction of white characters in the films Simba, Jezebel, and Night of the Living Dead. According to Isaac Julien and Kobena Mercer, Dyer’s essay “inaugurate[d] a paradigmatic shift” in film and cultural studies “by precisely registering the re-orientation of ethnicity” called for by Stuart Hall (6). Perhaps more importantly, “White” offered the theoretical ground for interrogating whiteness in other areas of cultural inquiry. Often cited in work far removed from film studies, Dyer’s essay was a driving force behind white critique’s “first wave” (Hill, “Introduction” 2).

     

    In the nine years between Dyer’s essay and book, there has been a proliferation of works addressing the production, representation, deconstruction, and transformation of white culture in literature, history, pedagogy, television, and film.2 Overall, White benefits greatly from its engagement with the debates surrounding white critique. For example, Dyer takes issue with Toni Morrison’s Playing in the Dark and Edward Said’s Orientalism, both of which argue that white Western culture defined itself in contrast to its non-white others. “This function,” Dyer suggests, “is indeed characteristic of white culture, but it is not the whole story and may reinforce the notion that whiteness is only racial when it is ‘marked’ by the presence of the truly raced, that is, the non-white subject” (14). Unlike his essay, then, which emphasized the role of blackness in demarcating whiteness, Dyer’s study uses a wide range of visual texts–mostly films and film stills, but also magazine ads and illustrations, oil paintings, daguerreotypes, movie posters, and novel covers–to call attention to “whiteness qua whiteness,” for the purpose of “making whiteness strange” (4, emphasis mine). Yet Dyer also complicates monolithic understandings of whiteness which focus solely on race by providing nuanced readings of its articulation through gender and class. Moreover, he cogently frames these readings within insightful analyses of the historical, cultural, and technological conditions that have made whiteness the ostensible standard of power, reason, and beauty within Western codes of representation.

     

    When bell hooks first suggested the possibility of white critique, she wanted “all those white folks who are giving blacks their take on blackness to let them know what’s going on with whiteness” (Yearning 54). For better or worse, hooks’s wish has come true. As Peter Erickson notes, “the exploration of white identity is increasingly the purview of whites themselves” (171), a tendency which E. Ann Kaplan suggests might keep whiteness “at the center where it has always been” (328). Dyer, himself white, is conscious of this danger, which he refers to as the “green light problem” (giving whites the go-ahead to remain focused on themselves); likewise, he recognizes in White Studies the risks of “me-too-ism” (whites can join in a multicultural world, even claim victimization and guilt) (10-11). But Dyer hardly threatens to succumb to these problems, given that the impulse behind his study is to deconstruct white hegemony. “The point of seeing the racing of whites is to dislodge them/us from the position of power… by undercutting the authority with which they/we speak and act in and on the world” (2).3 By seeking the abolition of whiteness and remaining within the agenda of white critique’s first wave, however, Dyer fails to distinguish between negative and positive manifestations of whiteness, implying that it must be deconstructed tout court rather than interrogated and transformed. Not only does this wholesale abolition of whiteness seem untenable (if white people remain, won’t some form of whiteness as well?), but it risks immobilizing whites themselves–those perhaps most capable of change, if only for the positions of power they inhabit in the world. What is to be done, Dyer leaves us wondering, once we see that with or without his clothes, the emperor is still white?

     

    Dyer’s disrobing of whiteness, however, is lucid and deft. For him, whiteness is fraught with paradox. As a hue, white is both the combination of all colors and no color at all. As a racial designation, white describes people whose skin color is not literally white–and because “white” skin presumes the absence of ethnicity, whites rarely consider themselves racially marked. Since “whites are everywhere in representation… they seem not to be represented to themselves as whites” (3). Rather than its weakness, however, Dyer claims such paradoxes offer whiteness its representational power, inoculating it against stereotypes by suggesting that whites are both infinite in variety yet representative of humanity per se. “At the level of racial representation, in other words, whites are not of a certain race, they’re just the human race” (3). Unlike individuals of other ethnicities, a white person need never fear representing all whites. Moreover, the paradoxes of whiteness enable it “to be presented as an apparently attainable, flexible, varied category, while setting up an always movable criterion of inclusion, the ascribed whiteness of your skin” (57). But within the fluid boundaries of whiteness lies its ultimate contradiction: “Whiteness as ideal can never be attained, not only because white skin can never be hue white, but because ideally white is absence: to be really, absolutely white is to be nothing” (78).

     

    Dyer’s recognition of the impossibility of pure whiteness not only unveils its mythic quality, but also emphasizes the paradoxical struggle between body and spirit which, for him, is central to the history of white representation. Dyer argues that Europeans constructed whiteness via Christianity, racial discourse, and imperialism as a spirit “that is in but not of the body” (14). While Christianity struggles to deny the body’s urges, for example, it emphasizes “the spirit that is ‘in’ the body” (16). Mary’s immaculate conception and Christ’s transcendence of his human appetites both reflect the Christian ideal of attaining the spirit by denying the body in which the spirit resides. As the dominant religion of Europe, Christianity’s ideal of bodily transcendence became synonymous with the ideal of whiteness itself, in turn shaping the European discourse on race throughout the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Dyer argues that by applying both genealogical accounts of lineage and biological analyses of individual bodies to the study of other races, whites largely avoided biological self-analysis which might have rendered them, “like non-whites, no more than their bodies” (23). Only in the late nineteenth and twentieth centuries did whites attempt to justify their biological superiority–and then by recourse to blood and genes, which like spirit were hidden from plain sight.

     

    As in Christianity, then, the European discourse on race imagined the invisible spirit which defined whiteness–its virtue, aspiration, intelligence, refinement–as something that “could both master and transcend the white body” even while inside it (23). This paradox of white embodiment is also evident among European and American imperialists who set out to remake the world in their own image, but passed themselves off as “subjects without properties,” making their own interests seem the natural order of things. Where others were “particular, marked, raced,” the white man was “without properties, unmarked, universal, just human” (38). Dyer contends that this position of apparent disinterest (“abstraction, distance, separation, objectivity”) has been more important to the construction of whiteness than racial distinctions themselves (38-39). Thus, like Christianity and the discourse of race, imperialism offered a terrain upon which to negotiate the contradictory character of white embodiment–that is, its drive to be truly disembodied.

     

    While emphasizing race, Dyer’s genealogy of whiteness frequently turns to gender. Dyer argues, for example, that in epitomizing the ideal of bodily transcendence, Christ and Mary provide gendered models of white behavior. White women are held to Mary’s “passivity, expectancy, receptivity… [and] sacred readiness” in regard to motherhood, while Christ’s struggle between body and spirit projects suffering on white men “as the supreme expression of both spiritual and physical striving” (17). This ideal of transcendence is challenged, however, by the need to reproduce white bodies. As such, race and heterosexuality are inextricable–but sex itself, the very means of reproducing whiteness, involves a carnality associated with darkness, and hence with non-white others. European sexual roles thus projected racial difference upon the Christian contrast between body and spirit for both white males (who struggle like Christ to overcome their dark bodily urges) and white females (who, like Mary, are supposed to be pure white and without such urges in the first place).

     

    In addition to gender analysis, Dyer also shows how the body-spirit paradox of whiteness has been central to the technology of photography and cinema. Reminiscent of John Berger’s claims that oil painting provided the visual medium par excellence for an emerging bourgeoisie, and Laura Mulvey’s argument that the cinematic apparatus reproduces the heterosexual male gaze, Dyer maintains that as media of light, photography and film were designed to depict the spirit of the white body, to make whites look ideal, bright, and in some cases, literally white. The white, often female face was not only the litmus test by which the proper coloring in photography and cinema was gauged, but also the benchmark when experimenting with new techniques and equipment. Though “photographing non-white people is typically construed as a problem,” Dyer shows that alternatives to “white-centric” technology have always been available. “It may be–certainly was–true that photo and film apparatuses have seemed to work better with light-skinned peoples, but that is because they were made that way, not because there was no other way” (89-90). However, since “the photographic media hold together translucence and materiality,” they offer the consummate means of representing the supposed ideals of whiteness: “it is the mix, in the very medi[a themselves], of light and substance that is central to the conception of white humanity” (115). At the same time, Dyer emphasizes the consistency with which men and the lower classes are depicted in darker, hard-edged tones than women and the upper classes, who are usually rendered in gauzy translucence. Though this finding is somewhat predictable, and Dyer’s overview of different lighting techniques risks tedium, the chapter provides a thorough and stunning corrective to the notion that the use of technology is neutral to matters of race.

     

    All in all, then, Dyer skillfully illuminates the paradoxes of white embodiment within analyses of technology and cultural history that concern race, as well as gender and class. The cumulative strength of this framework is especially evident in his chapter on films starring white bodybuilders. The tendency to associate bodybuilding with whiteness originates, for Dyer, in the cultural genealogy of the sport’s modern iconography–a mix of Greek and Roman classicism, Californian health and leisure, comic book barbarianism, and crucifixion imagery. As in Christianity, racial discourse, and imperialism, the white man’s trained body displays the victory of spirit over flesh, or to be more precise, the spirit’s transformation of the flesh. “The built white body is not the body that white men are born with,” but rather “made possible by their natural mental superiority…. a product of the application of thought and planning” (164). Not surprisingly, then, “the built body and the imperial enterprise are analogous” (165). Dyer reads the Tarzan films and bodybuilder action movies like Stallone’s Rambo series as articulations of white masculinity that justify American foreign policy by equating the hero’s trained muscles with the spirit needed to discipline the “enfeebled or raw” body of colonial lands (165). Dyer concludes the chapter with an analysis of the popular cycle of Italian peplum films made between 1957-1965. The peplum, Dyer argues, celebrated the white man’s muscles at a historical moment when their value was diminished by Italy’s shift away from both manual labor and fascist ideology. Though explicit references to fascism are hostile in the peplum, Dyer argues that the films employ fascistic structures of feeling by providing the working class with mythical heroes they can both associate with and–like the American bodybuilder stars or il Duce himself–bow down to.

     

    The 1984 British TV miniseries The Jewel in the Crown serves as Dyer’s case study for representations of female whiteness. Noting the centrality of women to narratives of imperial decline, Dyer links this story of the final days of British India to texts like A Passage to India and The Raj Quartet which blame the empire’s fall on a female presence. Though women are the central protagonists of Jewel, and female modes of address predominate throughout, women’s action repeatedly fails, and the series’ narrative organization creates a sense of torpor and fixity–all of which together emphasize the helplessness and impotence of white women in the face of historical change. While the chapter contributes to the book’s general concerns by distinguishing between male and female versions of whiteness, its lack of reference to the body-spirit dynamic leaves it somewhat out of touch with the rest of the study. Moreover, as in the chapter on technology, Dyer’s pace drops considerably here. Nevertheless, the chapter convincingly illustrates how Jewel, and by extension, other imperial narratives, allow white women to “take the blame, and provide the spectacle of moral suffering, for the loss of empire” (206).

     

    This spectacle of suffering and loss is echoed by the recurrent association between whiteness and death that is the focus of Dyer’s final chapter. If the history of white representation is a recurrent struggle to become disembodied, then death is the extreme version of whiteness. Horror films like Dracula and Night of the Living Dead emphasize the terrors of extreme whiteness, and science fiction movies such as Alien and Blade Runner depict the extreme whiteness of androids as the unattainable–if not ultimately undesirable–height of human perfection. But certain films also temper their apparent critiques of extreme whiteness by recourse to ordinary whiteness. In Blade Runner, the bleached, Aryan features of replicants played by Daryl Hannah and Rutger Hauer contrast with the ordinary whiteness of Harrison Ford, the cop who “retires” them. Likewise, Falling Down, a parable of the death of the modern white male, juxtaposes the extreme whiteness of an angry Michael Douglas with the warmth and tenderness of Robert Duvall. Both Blade Runner and Falling Down thus recontain a dangerous whiteness gone overboard with exemplars of white commonness and invisibility. As such, extreme whiteness is a distraction from the hegemony of ordinary whiteness. “The combination of extreme whiteness with plain, unwhite whiteness means that white people can both lay claim to the spirit that aspires to the heights of humanity and yet supposedly speak and act disinterestedly as humanity’s most average and unremarkable representatives” (223). The death of extreme whiteness only keeps ordinary whiteness alive.

     

    Dyer ultimately hopes that “if the white association with death is the logical outcome of the way in which whites have had power, then perhaps recognition of our deathliness may be the one thing that will make us relinquish it” (208). As he does repeatedly throughout his study, Dyer here emphasizes his desire for white critique to undermine white authority and dislodge whites from positions of power. But must all whiteness be bad, or incapable of good? AnnLouise Keating has noted the problematic tendency among some scholars to conflate whiteness and white people–a gesture which “implies that all human beings classified as ‘white’ automatically exhibit the traits associated with ‘whiteness’: they are, by nature, insidious, superior, empty, terrible, terrifying, and so on” (907). Dyer does not go quite so far. After all, he emphasizes the construction of whiteness, and his definition of it is far from reductive; moreover, by emphasizing its articulation through gender and class, Dyer challenges superficial conceptions of whiteness that focus on race alone.

     

    At the same time, Dyer’s goal to eliminate whiteness altogether risks undermining the transformative power he seeks. Of course, white critique makes visible the power that even the most progressive and antiracist white people consciously or unconsciously exert upon the world simply by being white. It shows that asymmetrical relations of power obtain within Western culture regardless of intent. But this must not resign whites to complete inaction or renunciation of authority as such. Rather, White Studies must work in tandem with other forms of critique–racial as well as gender and class–to disengage that which inhibits equality from that which advances it. White Studies, in other words, must make whites more–not less–responsible for positive social (inter)action. As Peter Erickson suggests, “whiteness will not go away tomorrow; what we need is a theory and a practice that will make possible living with whiteness today” (185). Or as Henry Giroux puts it: “A critical analysis of whiteness should address its historical legacy and existing complicity with racist exclusion and oppression, but it is equally important that such an examination distinguish between whiteness as a racial practice that is antiracist and those aspects of whiteness that are racist” (“Racial” 310). Such a distinction is necessary, Giroux believes, in order to “challenge the conventional leftist analysis of whiteness as a space between guilt and denial, a space that offers limited forms of resistance and engagement” (“Racial” 313). Despite its clarity, coherence, and power, Dyer limits White to such a space–leaving whiteness of any kind in dire straits.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Baldwin’s Notes of a Native Son, particularly the essay “Stranger in the Village,” is often cited as an early inquiry into whiteness, as is Ellison’s “Change the Joke and Slip the Yoke,” first published in the Partisan Review in 1958 and later included in Shadow and Act (Fishkin 428). David Roediger has recently edited an anthology entitled Black on White, consisting of writings about white people by African Americans from the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. More recent calls to interrogate whiteness began in the late eighties and early nineties. In her 1990 book Yearning, for example, bell hooks claimed “a discourse on race that interrogates whiteness” could serve as an antidote to the problematic assumption that race is “always an issue of Otherness that is not white” (54). The same year, Cornel West wrote that “one cannot deconstruct the binary oppositional logic of images of Blackness without extending it to the contrary condition of… Whiteness itself” (212). During this time, Stuart Hall was in the midst of publishing a series of essays proposing to rehabilitate the term “ethnicity.” Like hooks and West, Hall’s goal was to emphasize the situated and highly disparate forms of all racial identities. This “new ethnicity” sought “the displacement of the ‘centered’ discourses of the West” by “putting into question its universalist character and transcendent claims to speak for everyone, while itself being everywhere and nowhere” (“New Ethnicities” 446). See also Hall, “Cultural Identity and Diaspora,” “Ethnicity and Difference,” and “Old and New Identities, Old and New Ethnicities.”

     

    2. On the construction of whiteness in South African and American literature respectively, see Coetzee and Morrison; on its historical and cultural significance in nineteenth- and twentieth-century America, particularly for the working classes, see Ignatiev, Lott, and Roediger; on the relation between whiteness and gender, see Frankenberg and Ware; on the pedagogical advantages and problems of interrogating whiteness, see Giroux and Keating; for the dynamics of whiteness on late-eighties television, see Fiske; and on its relation to film, see Gaines, Kaplan, and, of course, Dyer.

     

    3. Dyer’s claim echoes hooks’s famous essay on “Representations of Whiteness in the Black Imagination,” in which she claims that critiquing whiteness could “deconstruct practices of racism and make possible the dissociation of whiteness with terror in the black imagination,” so that “whiteness no longer signifies the right to dominate. It truly becomes a benevolent absence” (179). According to West, however, “a mere dismantling” of whiteness “will not do–for the very notion of a deconstructive social theory is oxymoronic” (212). These divergent agendas are reflected in Peter Erickson’s claim that there currently exist “two basic approaches to the issue of what form a political critique of white privilege should take.” While one seeks the abolition and erasure of whiteness, the other “imagines a redefinition or reconstitution, a transformation even, of whiteness, with the aim of establishing new, critical, white identities” which “at no point engage in a denial of whiteness” (184). This difference corresponds roughly, though not completely, to Mike Hill’s distinction between a first wave of white critique which emphasizes the “invisibility and impermanence” of whiteness, and a second wave which addresses “the epistemological stickiness and ontological wiggling immanent” in the work of white critics who must acknowledge their whiteness while attempting to distance themselves from it–without disavowing it (“Introduction” 2-3).

    Works Cited

     

    • Berger, John. Ways of Seeing. London: BBC and Penguin, 1972.
    • Coetzee, J. M. White Writing: On the Culture of Letters in South Africa. New Haven and London: Yale UP, 1988.
    • Dyer, Richard. “White.” Screen 29.4 (Autumn 1988): 44-64.
    • —. White. London and New York: Routledge, 1997.
    • Erickson, Peter. “Seeing White.” Transition 67 (Fall 1995): 166-85.
    • Fishkin, Shelley Fisher. “Interrogating ‘Whiteness,’ Complicating ‘Blackness’: Remapping American Culture.” American Quarterly 47.3 (September 1995): 428-66.
    • Fiske, John. Media Matters: Everyday Culture and Political Change. Minneapolis and London: U of Minnesota P, 1994.
    • Frankenberg, Ruth. White Women, Race Matters: The Social Construction of Whiteness. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1994.
    • Gaines, Jane. “White Privilege and Looking Relations: Race and Gender in Feminist Film Theory.” Screen 29.4 (Autumn 1988): 12-26.
    • Giroux, Henry A. Fugitive Cultures: Race, Violence, and Youth. New York: Routledge, 1996.
    • —. “Racial Politics and the Pedagogy of Whiteness.” Whiteness: A Critical Reader. Ed. Mike Hill. New York and London: New York UP, 1997. 294-315.
    • Hall, Stuart. “Cultural Identity and Diaspora.” Identity, Community, Culture, Difference. Ed. Jonathan Rutherford. London: Lawrence and Wishart, 1990. 222-37.
    • —. “Ethnicity: Identity and Difference.” Radical America 13 (June 1991): 9-20.
    • —. “New Ethnicities.” 1988. Stuart Hall: Critical Dialogues in Cultural Studies. Ed. David Morley and Kuan-Hsing Chen. London and New York: Routledge, 1996. 441-49.
    • —. “Old and New Identities, Old and New Ethnicities.” Culture, Globalization, and the World System. Binghamton: SUNY Press, 1991. 41-68.
    • Hill, Mike. “Introduction: Vipers in Shangri-La.” Whiteness: A Critical Reader. Ed. Mike Hill. New York and London: New York UP, 1997. 1-18.
    • —. “What Was (the White) Race? Memory, Categories, Change.” Postmodern Culture 7.2 (1997).
    • hooks, bell. “Representations of Whiteness in the Black Imagination.” Black Looks: Race and Representation. Boston: South End Press, 1992. 165-78.
    • —. Yearning: Race, Gender, and Cultural Politics. Boston: South End Press, 1990.
    • Ignatiev, Noel. How the Irish Became White. New York and London: Routledge, 1995.
    • Julien, Isaac, and Kobena Mercer. “Introduction: De Margin and De Centre.” Screen 29.4 (Autumn 1988): 2-10.
    • Kaplan, E. Ann. “The ‘Look’ Returned: Knowledge Production and Constructions of ‘Whiteness’ in Humanities Scholarship and Independent Film.” Whiteness: A Critical Reader. Ed. Mike Hill. New York and London: New York UP, 1997. 316-28.
    • Keating, AnnLouise. “Interrogating ‘Whiteness,’ (De)Constructing ‘Race.’” College English 57.8 (December 1995): 901-18.
    • Lott, Eric. Love and Theft: Blackface Minstrelsy and the American Working Class. New York: Oxford UP, 1993.
    • Morrison, Toni. Playing in the Dark: Whiteness and the Literary Imagination. New York: Vintage, 1993.
    • Mulvey, Laura. Visual and Other Pleasures. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1989.
    • Roediger, David R., ed. Black on White: Black Writers on What It Means To Be White. New York: Schocken, 1998.
    • —. Towards the Abolition of Whiteness. London: Verso, 1994.
    • —. The Wages of Whiteness: Race and the Making of the American Working Class. London: Verso, 1991.
    • Said, Edward. Orientalism. New York: Vintage, 1979.
    • Ware, Vron. Beyond the Pale: White Women, Racism, and History. London: Verso, 1992.
    • West, Cornel. “The New Cultural Politics of Difference.” October 53 (Summer 1990). Rpt. in The Cultural Studies Reader. Ed. Simon During. London and New York: Routledge, 1993. 203-17.

     

  • Real Virtuality: Slavoj Zizek and “Post-Ideological” Ideology

    James S. Hurley

    Department of English
    University of Richmond
    jhurley@richmond.edu

     

    Slavoj Zizek, The Plague of Fantasies. London: Verso, 1997.

     

    Richard Rorty has for the last several years been advising intellectuals on the left to “start talking about greed and selfishness rather than about bourgeois ideology, about starvation wages and layoffs rather than about the commodification of labor, and about differential per-pupil expenditure on schools and differential access to health care rather than about the division of society into classes” (229). All of those old Marxist buzz-phrases on the back-end of Rorty’s parallelisms are, he argues, the unfortunate baggage of the revolutionary romanticism attached to Marx-Leninism, and speak, more than anything else, to a delusional self-importance on the part of leftists who have wanted to cast themselves as heroic players on the world-historical stage. For Rorty, this kind of discourse was never very good at achieving what it ostensibly wanted to in the first place; now that Marxism has been universally discredited, this discourse is less useful and more masturbatory than ever. But do progressive critics and theorists really have to make Rorty’s severe amputational choice? And indeed, might such a choice finally be less a pragmatic, smell-the-coffee adjustment to present-day political realities, enabling the left to further its goals more effectively, than it is the carrying out of a sort of Solomonic chop, sundered progressive baby going out with the bloody bath water?

     

    Slavoj Zizek insists on speaking in much of the Marxist language Rorty repudiates. Beginning with his 1989 book The Sublime Object of Ideology, Zizek has produced a large and remarkable body of work, arguing (among other things) that in order for the left really to address the kinds of social inequities that Rorty enumerates, it must take into account the ways in which capitalism and its current political support system (a.k.a. “liberal democracy”) attempt to maintain their smooth functioning by constructing self-naturalizing horizons of belief and practice. Whereas thinkers such as Rorty and Jürgen Habermas pin their egalitarian social/political hopes on a view of language as a relatively unproblematic instrument that merely needs to be put to the right (which is to say, left) uses,1 Zizek, following Jacques Lacan, sees language as necessarily partial, occlusive, deformed by some “pathological twist.” These deformations and blockages are for Zizek ideological, are indeed the very logic and structure of ideology, in that they obscure the antagonisms and contradictions that systems of power both require and yet cannot truly acknowledge if they are to operate successfully.

     

    Zizek’s most recent book, The Plague of Fantasies, takes its title from a line in Petrarch, and refers, as Zizek puts it, to “images which blur one’s clear reasoning”; this plague, he says, “is brought to its extreme in today’s audiovisual media” (1). According to Zizek, his new book “approaches systematically, from a Lacanian viewpoint, the presuppositions of this ‘plague of fantasies’” (1), but I suspect that we encounter in this last claim some of the impish wit that is part of what makes his work so enjoyable. Zizek has said elsewhere that his books operate along the lines of CD-ROMs: “click here, go there, use this fragment, that story or scene.”2 This dislocative approach was evident in even his earliest work; in his more recent books, however–those following 1993’s Tarrying with the Negative–Zizek’s mode of theorizing has grown increasingly urgent and frenetic, the collage-like argumentational strategies of the earlier books becoming in the later well-nigh kaleidoscopic. In The Plague of Fantasies, this freneticism and urgency take their most pronounced form to date; his argumentational zigzags and narratological discontinuities here become positively vertiginous, to the point where the text effectively forestalls accurate or even adequate summary, snaking away from all attempts at a synoptic grasp. If this book is systematic, it is so according to a rather eccentric systemic logic. In reviewing Plague of Fantasies, then, I don’t want to offer a strict explication of the text’s highly intricate theoretical apparatus (although this very intricacy means that some explication is in order); rather, I wish to place its theoretical insights in the context of the urgency I’ve described above, whose concomitant is the text’s seeming self-discombobulation. Plague of Fantasies, I will argue, shows Zizek in something of a theoretical deadlock: he unfolds in this text a theory of the workings of postmodern ideology that is often breathtaking in its scope and acuity; but his theory also constructs for itself what may be its own greatest stumbling block, causing it to fall into a logic uncomfortably close to that of the ideology he critiques.

     

    Within Plague of Fantasies’ argumentational vortex, I want to isolate three points to which Zizek recurs in various and entangling ways, momentarily disentangling them here for purposes of clarity. First, the collapse of the Stalinist Eastern bloc has brought with it the apparently across-the-board disabling of Marxism as a viable geopolitical force. Zizek suggests that this has eliminated for the capitalist West its only competing, full-scale politico-economic model of modernization, leaving it instead with a number of less monolithic adversaries it can characterize as atavistically “premodern”–the multiple fundamentalisms, nationalisms, “tribalisms,” and their metonymically associated “terrorist” groups and movements–and thus demonize as wholly external forces of irrationality. The supposedly bounded liberal-democratic “inside” of the capitalist socius is then in contrast presented as a space of unambiguous progress, pragmatic reason, and “common sense”–as a “non-ideological” or “post-ideological” zone. It should go without saying that for Zizek this zone is as ideological as ever (if not more so).

     

    Second, accompanying this collapse of Marxism as active geopolitical presence and the concomitant move in the West to a post-ideological self-representation has been the implicit or explicit abandonment of ideology as a tool for cultural analysis by progressive Western critics (especially those in Anglo-American humanities departments). In place of ideology critique, many left cultural critics have turned to one or another spin on Gramsci’s notion of hegemony (e.g., Laclau and Mouffe; the legatees of the Birmingham school) or Foucault’s of micropolitics (as in much queer theory, somatic theory, etc.). In Zizek’s view, these are modes of critique that, however well intentioned, finally work in the service of capitalist liberal democracy rather than in opposition to it.

     

    Finally, this ostensibly post-ideological moment is also, for Zizek, a charged economico-technological one in which new mediatic spaces and practices such as the Internet enable the Symbolic Order–i.e., ideology–to inscribe itself isotopically on and in subjects’ most intimate bodily zones and deepest libidinal recesses. But this facilitation of the Symbolic Order’s full colonization of the subject opens up a paradoxical problem, in that these postmodern technologies also bring the subject into dangerously close proximity to objet a, the “sublime object” that is ideology’s phantasmatic place-holder, thus threatening to collapse the distance between the subject and the sublime object that ideology requires in order to maintain itself as a frame within which the subject’s psychosocial fantasies are organized and managed.

     

    Of these three points, it is the first that is most familiar to us from Zizek’s other work (this is one of the reasons he so often returns to the military conflicts in the Balkans as a tribalistic fantasy for the West), and it is the third that he addresses at greatest length in Plague of Fantasies. But it is the second that is most surprising, and perhaps finally most pivotal, in that Zizek, while never a neo-Gramscian, has typically (and often voluntarily) been associated with the post-Marxism whose great avatars are Laclau and Mouffe.3 In his recent work, however, Zizek has been increasingly prone to talk in a theoretical language largely alien to post-Marxism, a language of “totality,” “late capitalism,” and “class antagonism” which seems much more consonant with that of, say, Fredric Jameson than it does with that of Laclau, Mouffe, Tony Bennett, Michele Barrett, et al. Indeed, in Plague of Fantasies, Zizek emphasizes late capitalism’s status as “global system,” and its predication on economic struggle–and the need for left critics in general to do likewise–with a frequency and specificity we have not seen matched in his earlier work,4 and it is worth looking at his treatment of this problematic at some length. Zizek writes that,

     

    according to Hegel, the inherent structural dynamic of civil society necessarily gives rise to a class which is excluded from its benefits (work, personal dignity, etc.)--a class deprived of elementary human rights, and therefore also exempt from duties towards society, an element within civil society which negates its universal principle, a kind of "non-Reason inherent in Reason itself"--in short, its symptom. Do we not witness the same phenomenon in today's growth of the underclass which is excluded, sometimes even for generations, from the benefits of liberal-democratic affluent society? Today's "exceptions" (the homeless, the ghettoized, the permanent unemployed) are the symptom of the late-capitalist universal system, the permanent reminder of how the immanent logic of late capitalism works. (127)

     

    Zizek goes on to say that capitalist liberal democracy addresses its own structurally necessary inequities by positing patently insufficient solutions: in the United States, for example, conservatives typically claim that such gross inequities would be abolished through the assumption by these social “exceptions” of greater responsibility for themselves and through stronger adherence to “traditional values”; liberals, for their part, argue that such inequities would be remedied through appropriate welfare-statist moves. Both “solutions,” of course, are doomed to fail and thus guaranteed to maintain these economic imbalances, in that, whatever their superficial differences, both look to the symptom rather than to “the inherent structural dynamic” itself. Moreover, Zizek sees left coalition politics, its radical ambitions notwithstanding, as informed by this same logic:

     

    it is not simply that, because of the empirical complexity of the [socio-economic] situation, all particular progressive fights will never be united, that "wrong" chains of equivalences will always occur (say, the enchainment of the fight for African-American ethnic identity with patriarchal and homophobic attitudes), but rather that occurrences of "wrong" enchainments are grounded in the very structuring principle of today's progressive politics of establishing "chains of equivalences": the very domain of the multitude of particular struggles, with their continuously shifting displacements and condensations, is sustained by the "repression" of the key role of economic struggle. The leftist politics of the "chains of equivalences" among the plurality of struggles is strictly correlative to the abandonment of capitalism as a global economic system--that is, to the tacit acceptance of capitalist economic relations and liberal-democratic politics as the unquestioned framework of our social life. (128)

     

    These comments have a striking, literal centrality to Zizek’s text that underscores their significance, appearing at almost precisely Plague of Fantasies’ mid-point, and they give us, I think, a clue to the synoptic difficulty of Zizek’s later work, and to that of Plague of Fantasies in particular. Like Jameson, whose theorizations often similarly resist summary, Zizek is attempting to think the global system of postmodern capitalism even as it necessarily outruns and outflanks his thinking (we meet here, of course, our old friend, cognitive mapping and its discontents), but he is doing so in a way that takes the system’s elusiveness into account by writing it, in a kind of invisible ink, into his own theoretical dislocations and interstices. This is to say that we can view the nearly hypomanic discursive and argumentational approach of Plague of Fantasies as a strategy that mimetically internalizes what Zizek wants to see as the absent cause–i.e., the Real–in the structure of late capitalist societies: the totality of late capital itself.

     

    Indeed, looked at even more specifically in terms of their placement in the text, the passages I’ve quoted above take on greater importance still: They introduce Zizek’s chapter on cyberspace, in which he charts the effects on postmodern subjectivities of the new technologies of postmodernity, and directly follow his chapter “Fetishism and its Vicissitudes,” in which he examines the historically distinct workings of commodity fetishism in the postmodern moment. They then act as a hinge between–and, I would argue, theoretico-political frame for–Zizek’s most sustained discussions of late capitalism’s vastly expanded reification of contemporary life, and of the material instrumentalities–the hardware and the software–that have facilitated that reification.

     

    In “Fetishism and its Vicissitudes,” Zizek returns to and then significantly extends some territory he has covered in previous works. Postmodernity, he argues, is a moment of “cynical reason” in which subjects no longer believe the official line delivered by society’s authorizing institutions; it is now taken for granted that governments routinely dissemble and that advertisers perpetrate shams. But this disbelief does not bring with it a freeing from or resistance to ideology. Instead subjects respond according to the fetishistic logic of disavowal: “I know what I’m doing is meaningless, but I do it nonetheless.” Zizek argues that postmodern ideology’s crucial mystifying move is its own “demystification”–that ideology paradoxically maintains its misrecognizing force over subjects by exposing its own operations. In one of the book’s most concise yet far-reaching sentences he writes, “The central paradox (and perhaps the most succinct definition) of postmodernity is that the very process of production, the laying-bare of its mechanism, functions as the fetish which conceals the crucial dimension of the form, that is of the social mode of production” (102). Zizek addresses here a number of contemporary cultural phenomena, such as self-lampooning advertisements that call attention to their own hyperbole, and the “bloopers” and “behind-the-scenes” television shows that reveal the artifice of culture-industry productions, the laying-bare of such mechanisms in no way endangering the commodity status of the advertised product or the movie or TV show whose seams and imperfections have been opened to view. What happens in these cases, according to Zizek, is a kind of double disavowal: the disavowal by the cynical postmodern subject I’ve mentioned above, but also a disavowal by the Symbolic Order, by ideology itself. Zizek follows Lacan, of course, in seeing the Symbolic Order’s existence as predicated on a castrating cut which forever separates it from the Real; however, the Symbolic Order arrogates authority to itself by bandaging this cut with the objet petit a, the “sublime object” which “hold[s] the place of some structural impossibility, while simultaneously disavowing this impossibility” (76). In revealing its own processes of production, the Symbolic Order, like Dirk Diggler at the end of Boogie Nights, in effect whips it out–the Symbolic Order demonstrates that it isn’t castrated, that it does possess the phallus (“I have nothing to hide! Come and watch the messy procreative reality that is at work in the production of the commodity!”). But again like Boogie Nights’ Dirk (although we should now say Mark Wahlberg), the phallus flaunted here is a fake, a prosthesis, another sublime object set into place to occlude ideology’s unsymbolizable Real, the total system itself.5 As Zizek writes, “the postmodern transparency of the process of production is false in so far as it obfuscates the immaterial virtual order which runs the show” (103).

     

    Zizek’s language here–“immaterial virtual order”–immediately begs some serious materialist questions: how can an ostensibly Marxist theory of ideology have as its linchpin something virtual and immaterial? Is not this total system a vast, fantastically complicated, yet finally and irreducibly material network of economic mechanisms and political switch-points?6 One of Zizek’s most important moves in Plague of Fantasies is to go some way towards answering such questions. The Real for Zizek is immaterial in the sense that it is inaccessible to and thus unknowable by the Symbolic–the Symbolic can only “virtualize” the Real, can only posit an inadequate simulacrum of it. And the Real is transhistorical in that it has a purely “formal” existence apart from and parallel to any symbolization, whatever its historical site. Crucial to keep in mind, however, is that the Real does not pre-exist the Symbolic, but comes into being at the same time as the Symbolic: the subject does not leave upon entry into the Symbolic some discrete psychic space that had been and continues to be the Real; rather, the subject leaves a space that upon entry into the Symbolic retroactively becomes the Real. We can then think of the Real as both transhistorical and historically contingent, that is to say, as something that inevitably exists as long as the Symbolic Order does, but that exists differently for different Symbolic Orders–each historically specific articulation of the Symbolic brings into being its own historically specific Real. Zizek points to exactly this in Plague of Fantasies, and moreover points to the historical specificity of our own current, “post-ideological” Real when he writes that

     

    [o]ne of the commonplaces of the contemporary 'post-ideological' attitude is that today, we have more or less outgrown divisive political fictions (of class struggle, etc.) and reached political maturity, which enables us to focus on real problems (ecology, economic growth, etc.) relieved of their ideological ballast.... One could... claim that what the 'post-ideological' attitude of the sober, pragmatic approach to reality excludes as 'old ideological fictions' of class antagonisms, as the domain of 'political passions' which no longer have any place in today's rational social administration, is the historical Real itself. (163)

     

    There are then two valences to this charged, idealist terminology upon which Zizek’s discussion hangs. The order which runs the show is virtual because in its ideological casting of itself it follows the logic of the fetish, constructing a fantasy frame that “possiblizes” an impossible structure. And it is further virtual in that the sheer immensity of this order as global system overwhelms attempts to accurately trace or even adequately imagine its operations–to return to Jameson’s term, it defies cognitive mapping–so that it can only be thought or imaged (Jameson would say allegorized) as impoverishing simulacrum or, alternatively, amorphous, God-like force.7

     

    But in his chapter “Cyberspace, Or, The Unbearable Closure of Being,” Zizek develops a third valence for this terminology, suggesting that, through its deployment of the new technologies of postmodernity, this order realizes the oxymoron of being actually virtual–that these technologies materialize virtuality. Zizek is quick to acknowledge the benefits offered by cybertechnologies: they create new modalities for the performing of certain tasks, facilitate the enjoyment of powerful pleasures, etc. But against postmodern celebrants of the liberatory potential of cyberspace, Zizek urges that we take a “conservative” position towards it; cyberspace, he argues, is an unheimlich place in which we should resist making ourselves too readily at home. This is so not because virtual reality differs radically from social reality, but because virtual reality carries the phantasmatic logic of social reality to its extreme (in this way cyberspace is literally unheimlich, simultaneously familiar and unfamiliar). For Zizek, cyberspace “radicalizes the gap” that is constitutive of subjectivity, externally materializing in the VR universe the subject’s ego, which in the Lacanian formulation functions for the subject as an intrapsychic alterity, the ego existing as the “self” from which the subject is internally split. VR’s radicalization/externalization of this gap replicates and displaces the subject’s ego–with all of its apparent Cartesian self-consistency–into the symbolic regime outside the subject proper, producing a kind of doppelgänger effect: the subject at once has a detachable, surrogate self, able to engage in all manner of activities unavailable to the subject in the non-virtual world; but the freeing-up of this externalized alter-ego has the consequence of locating agency outside the subject itself, in this way situating the subject so that it is vulnerable to control or manipulation from its own exteriorized self, this a result of the exteriorized self’s vulnerability to manipulation or control within the virtual universe. As Zizek puts it, “Since my cyberspace agent is an external program which acts on my behalf, decides what information I will see and read, and so on, it is easy to imagine the paranoiac possibility of another computer program controlling and directing my agent unbeknownst to me–if this happens, I am, as it were, dominated from within; my own ego is no longer mine” (142).

     

    Cyberspace thus presents a heightened version of what Zizek sees as a key tendential shift characterizing the logic and life-world of postmodernity: the greatly increased handing-over of the subject’s “self” to the Symbolic Order, which virtualizes/realizes that self in the subject’s stead. Zizek argues that what is often viewed as the most emancipating aspect of postmodern technologies–their seemingly bi-lateral, interactive relation with the subject–must also be seen as the very opposite: the liberating interactivity subjects experience with postmodern technologies is at the same time a troubling “interpassivity.” The ability of postmodern technologies to construct and mobilize a surrogate self for the subject means that even as the subject is “active” in ways previously unimaginable, its capacity to “passively enjoy” its widened field of experiences resides in this surrogate self, in the Symbolic Order–the Symbolic Order finally “enjoys” for and in place of the subject. In an example that will resonate with any serious movie fan, Zizek describes a common dilemma: there is never enough time to watch all the movies one tapes off of cable television; week after week the movie-lover tapes more films than he or she can possibly see, to the point that stacks of unwatched videos come to fill the movie-lover’s living space (and yet the taping continues). But these stacks of unviewed tapes are themselves a source of enjoyment, in that the film fan takes satisfaction in his/her mere possession of and proximity to this largely unseen archive of movie classics. For Zizek, the true locus of enjoyment here is in the VCR itself, stand-in for the Symbolic Order, which has “watched” the films for a subject who is too busy to do so. The consequences drawn from this apparently inconsequential sliver of postmodern life are crucial. “In the case of interpassivity,” writes Zizek, “I am passive through the other–that is, I accede to the other the passive aspect (of enjoying), while I can remain actively engaged (I can continue to work in the evening while the VCR passively enjoys for me…)…. [T]he so-called threat of the new media lies in the fact that they deprive us of our passivity, of our authentic passive experience, and thus prepare us for… mindless frenetic activity” (115, 122, original emphasis).

     

    When boosters of cyberspace enthuse over its radical unburdening of the subject through the interactive technologies coming soon to a virtual universe near you, they obscure this forfeiture and relocation of the subject’s self, agency, and enjoyment. In so doing they are complicit with (or are unabashedly promoting) postmodern capitalism’s ideological self-projection as an absolutely open space of interchange among identically able and valued subjects, as a socio-economic order undarkened by conflicts or blockages; cyberspace becomes, in this rendering, the model–the attainable ideal–for what Bill Gates has called “friction-free capitalism.” Zizek cites this phrase from Gates to great effect, extrapolating from it a devastating critique of the ideological operations it embeds and enacts:

     

    the "friction" we get rid of in the fantasy of "friction-free capitalism" does not only refer to the reality of material obstacles which sustain any exchange process but, above all, to the Real of the traumatic social antagonisms, power relations, and so on which brand the space of social exchange with a pathological twist. In his Grundrisse manuscript, Marx pointed out how the very material mechanism of a nineteenth-century industrial production site directly materializes the capitalist relationship of domination (the worker as a mere appendix subordinated to the machinery which is owned by the capitalist); mutatis mutandis, the very same goes for cyberspace: in the social conditions of late capitalism, the very materiality of cyberspace automatically generates the illusory abstract space of "friction-free" exchange in which the particularity of the participants' social position is obliterated. (156)

     

    Zizek presents a gloomy prospect here of a massive phantasmatic externalization of an always already phantasmatic subjectivity, a shift from an intra-virtualized subjectivity to an extra-virtualized one that is effectively bereft of self-hood or agency. The Gatesian promise of postmodern capitalism would seem for Zizek to leave just the faintest trace of subjectivity, subjectivity existing, if at all, as a virtual image of a virtual image, a simulacral remnant kept in place only to maintain the smooth running of the system.8

     

    Zizek, however, concludes this chapter on cyberspace–which is “officially” Plague of Fantasies’ final chapter (three appendices follow)–by posing a surprisingly hopeful question. “Perhaps,” he asks,

     

    radical virtualization--the fact that the whole of reality will soon be "digitalized," transcribed, redoubled in the "Big Other" of cyberspace--will somehow redeem "real life," opening it up to a new perception, just as Hegel already had the presentiment that the end of art (as the "sensible appearing of the Idea"), which occurs when the Idea withdraws from the sensible medium into its more direct conceptual expression, simultaneously liberates sensibility from the constraints of Idea? (164)

     

    In order to understand this unexpectedly optimistic note, we might keep in mind the Nietzschean/Derridean axiom that “truths are fictions whose fictionality has been forgotten.”9 For Zizek, we are in the transitional moment of “forgetting” the virtuality of cyberspace: the continuing novelty of cyberspace reminds us of its virtual status; but users’ growing familarity with cyberspace, and the promotional discourses of its celebrants and gatekeepers, threaten to routinize it to the point that its self-evident virtuality will recede–virtual reality will come to seem as commonplace and “natural” as social reality. When Zizek argues that our attitude toward cyberspace should be conservative, it is because we are currently in a position in which we can observe a Symbolic Order in its making; by focusing on the nascency and incompletion of the virtual universe, we sustain our own awareness of its phantasmatic constructedness. And by seeing the virtual universe as a Symbolic Order that is in process, not yet fully set into place, we can read virtual reality back onto our own social reality, and see that it, too, is a Symbolic Order that shares this same virtual logic, but a Symbolic Order whose virtuality has been heretofore forgotten.

     

    This virtualization of the Symbolic, though, poses its own hazards, for if on the one hand it can show the fictionality (i.e., ideological constructedness) of social reality, and point subjects to the historical Real post-ideological ideology represses, on the other it can move subjects into overclose proximity to the formal Real, the unsymbolizable swirl of pulsions that subjectivity must foreclose if it is to remain ontologically consistent. For Zizek, the key dilemma of postmodernity might be expressed as follows: the ongoing virtualization of reality allows subjects to see the sublime object as arbitrary ideological place-holder bearing no intrinsic value or meaning; but having lost the object which kept the Symbolic Order intact, the potential is then opened up for the subject to fully accede to the Real–a “hole” now appears in the fabric of the subject’s reality that threatens to precipitate its whole-cloth unraveling. Postmodern subjects therefore find themselves in a situation that is simultaneously promising and imperiling. Promising, in that subjects have the foregrounded possibility of negotiating an appropriate distance from the sublime object and the Real it occludes, one that will allow them to see the ideological contours of their social reality, and thus allow them to intervene in that reality in ways they otherwise could not, but that will also permit accession to the virtuality of their own subjectivity, to the truth of self-hood being its orchestration through a fantasy frame. Imperiling, because at the same time, subjects stand a heightened chance for the disintegration of subjectivity, the virtualization of their reality causing the fantasy frame that sustains them as subjects to collapse, leaving them in the incoherent and paralyzing space of the Real.

     

    Zizek argues that the question of the subject’s appropriate position in relation to Symbolic versus Real is finally one of ethical choice. In the final section of Plague of Fantasies, the appendix entitled, “The Unconscious Law: Beyond an Ethics of the Good,” Zizek, in order to establish the conceptual framework and psychic economy within which such a choice must take place, turns to Kant’s theory of radical evil and Hegel’s “corrective” reading of that theory. In what is, to the best of my recall, the most compressed twenty-eight pages in his corpus, Zizek relentlessly reads Kant and Hegel against each other, augmenting this reading with brief side-trips into Pascal, Arendt, Lacan, Deleuze, Laclau, and even John Silber. I will not attempt, in this limited space, to unpack Zizek’s argument in “The Unconscious Law,” (although I will return to the tortuousness of its articulation, in that here we see the “urgency” and “freneticism” I’ve remarked in this text taken to near-scarifying extreme), except to note that it hinges on where for Kant and Hegel the line between subject and object should be drawn, where it is that the Law thus resides, and what is therefore the subject’s proper relation to the Law. Although it is an appendix, and therefore implicitly given a “semi-autonomous” status in relation to the main body of the text, in which is ostensibly contained Zizek’s argument per se, “The Unconscious Law” is where he comes closest to attempting to resolve the multiple dilemmas, paradoxes, and contradictions he has unspooled throughout Plague of Fantasies. But despite its obligatory examination of the Holocaust and the evil of the ideology that produced it, this appendix plays out largely at the level of the individual subject. That is to say that while the pressing issues for postmodernity Zizek addresses in Plague of Fantasies are structural and even global in nature (class struggle, capitalism as total system, the ideological configuring of cyberspace, postmodernity’s cynical transparency, hegemony as model for social critique, etc.) he moves at the book’s conclusion to a privativistic theoretical space: the subject’s ethical self-positioning in relation to Symbolic and Real–and thus to the virtual order running the postmodern show–becomes here a kind of higher-stakes lifestyle choice.

     

    My objection to this final move in Plague of Fantasies is not that Zizek insists on addressing the ways in which ideological forces operate at the level of the intrapsychic; Zizek’s tracing of these operations is in fact one of the appeals of his theory, providing a component that is missing from, say, Foucault’s theory of power, in which the subject’s interior life is elided almost entirely. What bothers me about this move, and in this it is rather typical of Zizek’s work, is its implication that it is ultimately the intrapsychic where the ideological action is, including, presumably, the action that can problematize and constructively modify ideology’s interpellative precepts. In reframing the larger structural questions he has so frequently and provocatively raised in Plague of Fantasies in terms of the individual subject’s ethical choice, Zizek achieves a position at the end of the book that is, curiously, a kind of “Lacanized” existentialism: what is imperative for the subject is a self-constitutive choice in the face of a spiritually impoverished and politically disempowering life-world; but unlike the autonomous, self-identical subjectivity that is the Sartrean ideal, the Zizekian subject’s self-constitution results from an act of willing self-destitution, an acceptance of the primordial splitting that is subjectivity’s necessary condition of existence. In the context of the dropping from Zizek’s discussion of the “global” issues he has raised, the famous Lacanian symbol for this split subjectivity–$–seems, unfortunately, all too appropriate: Zizek’s theorization of postmodern subjectivity may finally accord even better with the privatizing logic of postmodern capitalism and liberal democracy than does the neo-Gramscian model of left-alliance politics he criticizes.

     

    But as problematic and disappointing as this position may be, Plague of Fantasies, through its very formal (dis)organization, complicates our seeing it as Zizek’s final and finalizing word. I return again to the extraordinary compression I’ve noted in this appendix: one of the reasons it is so dense is that Zizek insists, to an almost feverish degree, on rephrasing, reframing, and repositioning virtually every point in his argument; favorite Zizekian tropes that are by now familiar to us from earlier works–“that is to say,” “in other words,” “to put this another way,” “to put this in yet another way”–are piled atop each other here until they reach, like the bowling-shoe monolith in The Big Lebowski, higher than the eye can see. It is in “The Unconscious Law” that Zizek seems most driven in this book to get his theory precisely right–and where getting it right proves most elusive. In this respect, the operational logic of “The Unconscious Law” parallels that of the Symbolic Order itself as Zizek has so often described it, the Symbolic perpetually scrambling to get to the Real, but forever doomed to under- or overshoot it. The Real that Zizek is missing in the argumentational fury of this appendix is the one he has pointed to earlier in the book, the post-ideological Real of capitalism’s totality and class antagonism. This is a Real that works with especially disruptive force here, as though exacting payback from Zizek for his privatizing theoretical turn.

     

    Ernesto Laclau has recently written that “the end of the Cold War has also been the end of the globalizing ideologies that had dominated the critical arena since 1945. These ideologies, however, have not been replaced by others that play the same structural function; instead their collapse has been accompanied by a general decline of ideological politics” (1). That such a claim can come from one of the seminal left thinkers of our time speaks to the urgent necessity of Zizek’s ongoing project: whether or not we want to accept all of his theoretical specifics, I think we must pay close attention to his charting of the presence and force of postmodernity’s “ideological politics”–Zizek consistently provides remarkable insight into the ways in which liberal democracy is working to naturalize itself, effacing in the process its own corrosive economic energies, and forestalling our ability to imagine social and political alternatives. But I also think we must take Zizek’s insights further than he does, unfolding them from the level of the intrapsychic, where in Plague of Fantasies they come to a rest, and out onto the social; however well-aimed is his criticism that left-coalitionism is trapped in the logic of “capitalist economic relations and liberal-democratic politics,” at least left-coalitionism is a politics. This is not something we can readily say about the theory Zizek offers in its stead. Although this is obviously not the place where such an unfolding can be properly considered, it does seem to me that we might think of ways of joining Zizek’s theory of ideology, with its focus on postmodern capitalism’s historically particular Real, to contemporary theorizations of hegemony. This would mean, of course, that theories of hegemony would have to engage more directly with late capitalism’s globalizing dynamics–that, in other words, hegemony would be thought in terms less neo- and more Gramscian, taking better into account “the necessary reciprocity between structure and superstructures, a reciprocity which is nothing other than the real dialectical process” (Gramsci 366).

     

    Notes

     

    1. I am, for purposes of brevity, being somewhat reductive here when I refer to Habermas’s “view of language as a relatively unproblematic instrument,” and overly generous to Rorty when I associate him with the left.

     

    2. See Lovink, http://www.ctheory.com/a37-society_fan.html.

     

    3. Laclau, for example, wrote the preface to Sublime Object of Ideology; Zizek the appendix to Laclau’s New Reflections on the Revolution of Our Time.

     

    4. I am excluding here Zizek’s introduction to the collection he edited, Mapping Ideologies, a brief but remarkable piece that explicitly adumbrates a number of the concerns I have been tracing above.

     

    5. Zizek writes that “Crucial for the fetish-object is that it emerges at the intersection of the two lacks: the subject’s own lack as well as the lack of his big Other…. [W]ithin the symbolic order… the positivity of an object occurs not when the lack is filled, but, on the contrary, when two lacks overlap. The fetish functions simultaneously as the representative of the Other’s inaccessible depth and as its exact opposite, as the stand-in for that which the Other itself lacks (‘mother’s phallus’)” (Zizek, The Plague of Fantasies 103).

     

    6. Although they haven’t couched the problematic in precisely these terms, critics such as Mark Seltzer and Judith Butler have asked similar questions of Zizek’s use of the Lacanian psychic topology as model for the workings of ideology, suggesting that Zizek’s theory, as Seltzer puts it, “stalls” on what is finally its non-material, transhistorical assumptions. As I will argue below, Zizek’s theory does indeed stall on itself, but not quite for these reasons. (See Butler 187-222 and Seltzer 175-6.)

     

    7. These two alternatives are often merged into each other, of course. An example would be The X Files, in which power of a preternatural order of magnitude is attributed to, as an article in The New York Times Magazine has recently put it, “nameless middle-aged men who not only manipulate our Government but also in effect run the solar system from a mysterious, dark-paneled club on West 46th Street (it looks a lot like the Council on Foreign Relations, actually)…” (McGrath 58).

     

    8. A general objection we can raise about Zizek’s theorization of the subject–that it is inattentive to specificities of, for starters, class, gender, and race–seems to come into especial prominence here; Zizek writes as though cyberspace opens itself up equally to all subjects, rather than giving privileged access to the better-educated, relatively affluent computer users/owners who are in fact its denizens (in this Zizek inadvertently rehearses Gates’s own “friction-free” ideology). While I obviously think this objection is merited, I also think we can see the implications of Zizek’s claims about the virtualization of subjectivity as going beyond the immediate boundaries of the cyber universe per se. Journalist William Greider, for example, reports the following scene involving workers in a Malaysian electronics plant owned by Motorola:

     

    Once inside [the operations room], the women in space suits began the exacting daily routines of manufacturing semiconductor chips. They worked in a realm of submicrons, attaching leads too small to be seen without the aid of electronic monitors. Watching the women through an observation window, Bartelson [the American manager of the plant] remarked, "She doesn't really do it. The machine does it." (Greider 83)

     

    9. This pithy line is Jonathan Culler’s (181).

    Works Cited

     

    • Butler, Judith. Bodies that Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex.” New York and London: Routledge, 1993.
    • Culler, Jonathan. On Deconstruction. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1982.
    • Gramsci, Antonio. Selections from the Prison Notebooks. Trans. Quintin Hoare and Geoffrey Nowell Smith. New York: International Publishers, 1971.
    • Greider, William. One World, Ready or Not: The Manic Logic of Global Capitalism. New York: Touchstone, 1997.
    • Laclau, Ernesto. “Introduction.” The Making of Political Identities. Ed. Ernesto Laclau. London: Verso, 1994. 1-8.
    • Lovink, Geert. “Civil Society, Fanaticism, and Digital Reality: A Conversation with Slavoj Zizek.” C-Theory Feb. 21, 1996. http://www.ctheory.com/a37-society_fan.htm.
    • McGrath, Charles. “It Just Looks Paranoid.” The New York Times Magazine June 14, 1998: 56-9.
    • Rorty, Richard. Truth and Progress: Philosophical Papers, Volume 3. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998.
    • Seltzer, Mark. Serial Killers: Death and Life in America’s Wound Culture. New York and London: Routledge, 1998.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “Introduction: The Spectre of Ideology.” Mapping Ideology. Ed. Slavoj Zizek. London: Verso, 1994. 1-33.
    • —. The Plague of Fantasies. London: Verso, 1997.

     

  • Shaping an African American Literary Canon

    Robert Elliot Fox

    Department of English
    Southern Illinois University
    bfox@siu.edu

     

    The Norton Anthology of African American Literature.Henry Louis Gates, Jr. and Nellie Y. McKay, general editors. New York: W. W. Norton, 1997. Includes an audio companion compact disc with 21 selections.

     

    Call and Response: The Riverside Anthology of the African American Literary Tradition. Patricia Liggins Hill, general editor. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1998. Includes an audio companion compact disc with 26 selections.

     

    The publication of these two massive anthologies–each is over 2,000 pages long–is a milestone in the history of African American Studies and testifies to the significance and strength of the African American tradition of literature.

     

    Many of us long have been aware of the Norton anthology project, initiated by Henry Louis Gates, Jr., which was in the works for a decade and was eagerly, even impatiently, awaited by those who recognized the importance of the venture. I first learned of the Riverside project, however, when I received an advertising flier about the book early in 1997. Though there inevitably is a good deal of overlap in terms of authors and works, it would be wrong to see the existence of these two anthologies as a case of redundancy. (Indeed, these are not the only African American literature anthologies currently available, but they are, by a longshot, the most formidable.) Certain ongoing skirmishes notwithstanding, by now there is widespread agreement on the merits of many of the works chosen or proposed for inclusion in the African American literary canon, but there is not the same sort of consensus regarding the inner dynamics of that canon, the logics of its unfolding, its possible unifying principles. We have here two lengthy takes on the very important and surely controversial topic of what we might term the shape (and the shaping forces) of the canon.

     

    For those who wish to keep score, the Norton anthology contains the work of 120 writers, of whom 52 are women. The Riverside anthology features over 150 authors, including more than 70 women. There will be (there already have been) complaints about the exclusion or inclusion of particular authors or works, a controversy of tastes, temperaments and allegiances that no anthology or anthology-makers can hope to avoid. (I’ll toss a few cowries of my own into this debate later in this review.) But this is a battleground for critics and partisans. Strictly from a pedagogical perspective, there’s little to detain us, since the two collections are, on the whole, so extremely rich. In any event, time constraints in courses in which these texts are likely to be utilized unavoidably require a good deal of selectivity, and many teachers will want to supplement any sweeping anthology with additional materials of their own choosing, so debates over what’s in and what’s out in the end have more to do with the politics of canon formation than they have to do with the practical business of conducting a course.

     

    The Norton anthology is organized rather straightforwardly into seven periods: The Vernacular Tradition; The Literature of Slavery and Freedom: 1746-1865; Literature of the Reconstruction to the New Negro Renaissance: 1865-1919; Harlem Renaissance: 1919-1940; Realism, Naturalism, Modernism: 1940-1960; The Black Arts Movement: 1960-1970; Literature Since 1970.

     

    The Riverside anthology is divided into six major periods of “African American History and Culture”: 1619-1808, 1808-1865, 1865-1915, 1915-1945, 1945-1960, 1960 to the Present. In keeping with the volume’s title, the internal organization of each of these divisions reflects the call and response patterns that the editors see as characterizing, not just black performance modes, but the evolution of African American tradition itself. For example, the second period has the heading, “Tell Ole Pharaoh, Let My People Go,” and is structured around a “Southern Folk Call for Resistance” and a “Northern Literary Response: Rights for Blacks, Rights for Women,” while the last section, dealing with literature since 1960, is called “Cross Road Blues,” and is structured around a “Folk Call for Social Revolution and Political Strategy” and a “Call for Critical Debate,” answered by “Voices of the New Black Renaissance, Women’s Voice’s of Self-Definition, Voices of the New Wave.” (Those wishing to view the entire list of contents for this anthology should go to the Houghton Mifflin Web site at

     

    http://www.hmco.com/cgi-bin/college/catalog_1999_4/
    college.cgi?FNC=GetTitleDesc_Atitle_html_241.0
    .)

     

    The musical allusions in the section titles in the Riverside anthology recall the musical phrases, taken from what he calls the sorrow songs, which W.E.B. DuBois sets at the head of each chapter of his monumental text The Souls of Black Folk (three chapters of which are to be found in the Riverside, whereas the work is included in its entirety in the Norton anthology). These quotes from the spirituals serve as a powerful reminder of the extent to which oral/aural expression animates black aesthetics and is embodied in the tradition of black writing. The Norton anthology gathers its vernacular selections (spirituals, gospel, rap, etc.) together at the beginning, before the literature sections. The Riverside, too, puts a variety of vernacular materials at the front of the book, including some African examples; but in addition, the Riverside situates vernacular elements throughout the text, so that, for example, blues lyrics, worksongs, etc. precede the Harlem Renaissance writers, and contemporary folktales and rap lyrics (including a rap from John Edgar Wideman’s novel Philadelphia Fire [1990]) lead off the section dealing with the contemporary period. The black vernacular tradition in its fullness has had much to do with the freedom of black writing, and with the depths of our understanding as readers of the greater African American cultural text of which black literary texts are but one mode of expression, and the Riverside anthology does a better job of highlighting these crucial intersections.

     

    In the opinion of Vince Passaro, who reviewed it along with Gates’s Colored People and Thirteen Ways of Looking at a Black Man, one transgression of the Norton anthology is that “the theme of ‘the vernacular tradition’ [is] abused in service of a favorite social theory of contemporary academics: a denial of the efficacy of actual individual authorship and a new definition of literature as a form of cultural production, the result of ‘call and response’ between speaker and listener, the expression of whole communities” (73-4). (One can only imagine Passaro’s reaction to the Riverside anthology!) Passaro goes on to say, “I, for one, have always preferred the late Harold Brodkey’s definition of literature, pure and explicit in its hegemonic tendencies: ‘I speak, you listen’” (74). Given the extent to which African Americans were for so long forced to attend silently to their putative masters’ voices, one certainly could sympathize with any black author who finally demanded an opportunity to be heard uninterruptedly (it’s “our turn,” as Ishmael Reed once avowed); yet deep within the black vernacular tradition, the notion of “I speak, you participate” is not an academic theory but an actuality. Furthermore, the extent to which early African American texts were necessarily representative texts made them, their individual authorship notwithstanding, expressions “of whole communities.” This is a circumstance the Black Arts Movement sought to underscore and also to exploit, though its chief polemicists erred in the prescriptiveness of their approach and in their unwillingness to take sufficiently into account the changed condition of “the changing same” one century down the road from slavery.

     

    Passaro informs us that The Norton Anthology of African American Literature became the fastest-selling of Norton’s numerous anthologies, with more than 30,000 sold in the first month of publication. (I tried to get sales figures for the Riverside anthology from the publisher, Houghton Mifflin, but was informed, not too surprisingly, that this information was “proprietary.”) One reason for the terrific success of the Norton, in Passaro’s judgment, is that African American studies is “the most popular academic subject of our time” (70-71). If this is true (and it is an assertion that could be debated), such a triumph did not come easily. To begin with, African American literature entered the academy in the 1960s as a result of the struggle to implement Black Studies in America’s colleges and universities. But the victories achieved in these battles were never total. As Nellie McKay reminds us in her guest column in the May 1998 issue of PMLA, “From the mid-1970s through the mid-1980s, adversaries dismissed African American literature as a fad, warned interested white graduate students away from the courses, and discouraged and sometimes even refused to supervise Ph.D. dissertations that focused on black writers” (361). Nevertheless, Passaro is correct in his claim that African American studies has been “enormously influential” within the U.S. academy and in “the culture at large” (70). This is true in part because Black Studies blew down the doors, so to speak, that kept academia largely monocultural (not long ago, we would have said “white,” but whiteness, too, now has its studies, which are beginning to reveal its complexity as they unravel its construction).

     

    Anthologies of African American literature have a genealogy that predates the Civil War. In an interview with Nicholas A. Basbanes, Gates notes that altogether there have been “perhaps as many as 160 anthologies of African American literature.” Those interested in a detailed survey of the most significant of these texts should consult Keneth Kinnamon’s informative article, “Anthologies of African-American Literature from 1845 to 1994,” in Callaloo 20.2 (1997). Although he begins by examining two collections from the nineteenth century, Kinnamon argues that the “pioneer general anthology in the field” is the Anthology of American Negro Literature (1929) compiled by V. F. Calverton, “a white Marxist critic” (461). But “[n]o single work has had greater influence in establishing the canon of African-American literature” than The Negro Caravan (1941), edited by Sterling A. Brown, Arthur P. Davis, and Ulysses Lee, a text Kinnamon refers to as “a true classic” (462). In a related essay in the same issue of Callaloo, “Arthur P. Davis: Forging the Way for the Formation of the Canon,” Jennifer Jordan writes that Davis, Brown and Lee “were engaged in a war to establish a literary tradition and to prevent its perversion by either cultural provincialism or racist distortion” (450). Many things occurred over the intervening half century that prevented the African American literary tradition from becoming established in a safe and settled manner, some of the most significant being desegregation and the more or less simultaneous advent of black power/cultural nationalism, Black Studies, and the Black Arts Movement. This is why, in a discussion which he and co-editor Nellie McKay had with David Gergen on The NewsHour on Public Television on March 7, 1997, Gates emphasized that “we are re-assembling the tradition” (my emphasis), thus underscoring the fluid and dialogical nature of both “the tradition” and the effort to claim it, shape it, understand it.

     

    McKay, in her PMLA piece, also refers to The Negro Caravan as “splendid,” and goes on to cite Kinnamon’s own Black Writers of America (1972), co-edited with Richard Barksdale, as “[a]mong the best of the comprehensive texts,” arguing that it “has only been superseded in importance by the new anthologies of the 1990s” (367). Kinnamon himself states that Black Writers of America “has sold well over 70,000 copies” (“Anthologies” 464), presumably a respectable figure; but contrasting this number of 70,000 sold over a quarter of a century with the 30,000 copies of the Norton anthology sold in one month (the latest figures I have are 50,000 copies in print by early 1998), one gains some sense of the heightened “charge” that has gathered around the field of African American letters and the broader discipline of Africana studies (which includes Africa and the Caribbean). Nobel prizes for literature awarded to Wole Soyinka (Nigeria) in 1986, Derek Walcott (St. Lucia) in 1992, and Toni Morrison (United States) in 1993 have been acknowledgements of the superlative degree of achievement of authors across the African continuum. (It might have been expected that the first black author to win a Nobel prize would be an American, given the “press” of American influence on the global scene and the importance of the black presence in America, but there is more than poetic justice in the fact that, coincidentally or not, the order of the awards followed the historical trajectory of the black experience, from Africa to the Caribbean to the United States.) At the same time, these awards (and others, including various Pulitzers, National Book Awards, and MacArthurs) clearly have helped to elevate the stock of black writing to a heretofore unprecedented level.

     

    The individual most responsible for helping to bring African American Studies more into the foreground of public consciousness is the aforementioned Henry Louis Gates, Jr., who, between the time he first conceived the Norton anthology project and its actual appearance more than ten years later, has seen his own intellectual stock skyrocket dramatically, from ivory tower stardom to international eminence. Gates has brought an entrepreneurial energy and zeal to the field of African American studies (Cheryl Bentsen, author of the controversial profile of Gates in the April 1998 issue of Boston magazine, titled “Head Negro in Charge,” calls him “[a]rguably the foremost intellectual entrepreneur in the world”) but he has always combined it with terrific natural insight and brilliant scholarship. Gates’s agenda is foundational and comprehensive. As he put it in his May 1997 interview with Harvey Blume in The Boston Book Review, “We need to consolidate and codify the intellectual attainments of our people–encyclopedias, dictionaries, concordances, bibliographies, works of scholarship–so that they stand next to the attainments of other people. That, at least, is how I interpret my role.”

     

    One obvious result of Gates’s celebrity and corresponding clout is that the Norton anthology has been guaranteed plenty of publicity, while the Riverside anthology apparently has had very little. The Norton also has been far more widely reviewed. I did find a review of both books in the Spring 1998 issue of the journal Crosscurrents that had good things to say about each of them, though the author, Alfred E. Prettyman, concluded that “for now I’ll probably refer to the Riverside anthology more often.” His preference for the Riverside is significant because, given the lopsidedness of the attention being paid to these texts, it is likely that the Norton will become the anthology of choice by default. This possibility concerns me, not because I have any serious problems with the Norton, but because I think it is a very good thing that there be competition and continued struggle in the canon formation arena, and having two collections with differing approaches to the unfolding of the African American literary tradition helps to facilitate this.

     

    Despite the Norton’s unquestionable success in the market and despite Gates’s eminence–or possibly because of these factors–the anthology has not been received with complete deference by all critics. Passaro, for instance, believes that the Norton exhibits “a suffusion of editorial sentimentality and weak politics” (72). In fact, a number of reviewers have judged the Norton to be conservative in its content and presentation. This is interesting, since there are some who still would see the making of an African American canon–or any “minority” canon, for that matter–as a radical undertaking. Others may view it primarily as a commerical enterprise designed to exploit a “moment” of multicultural fervor. In any event, a canon formation project is necessarily conservative in the best sense of the term, since it is an effort to consolidate and preserve “the best” works and to delineate (contain) a tradition. A number of the complaints about the Norton seem predicated on a notion that an African American literary canon is required to be politically combative, a documentary of suffering and resistance–which for a long time was the dominant perception and expectation of black writing. Approaching it from such an angle, one might argue that the Riverside anthology is more “militant” than the Norton, though I think it is more accurate to read it as just paying closer attention to that old bugaboo of New Criticism, context.

     

    In the Spring 1998 issue of Wasafiri, Julian Murphet takes issue with what he calls “Gates’ tone… of implacable certainty” that “this is it” (49), the African American canon for our time. (Note that what is being referred to here is not the canon, period, but the canon as it is, or ought to be, now. Extricating the canon from eternity by recognizing the politics and the temporality of its formation has only intensified the debate over whose interests the canon should serve; thus the canon of the moment may be the focus of more contention than the very idea of a canon itself.) Given the extent of their effort and expertise, Gates and his co-editors are entitled to feel reasonably confident that they have put together a workable canon, whether or not it proves durable over the long haul; still, one guesses that none of them displays the kind of “implacable certainty” of definitiveness that Harold Bloom (a notorious basher of “minority” canons) exhibited with regard to his own single-handed version of The Western Canon.

     

    Murphet bemoans the fact that Richard Wright’s Native Son is not found in the Norton, “whereas ‘minor’ writers like Charles Johnson and David Bradley are amply represented” (49). (Native Son isn’t to be found in the Riverside, either. There, Wright is represented by a single selection, “Long Black Song,” which also is included in the Norton; but the Norton has, in addition, Wright’s important “Blueprint for Negro Writing,” two chapters from his autobiography Black Boy, the story “The Man Who Lived Underground,” and “The Ethics of Living Jim Crow.”) Despite the quotation marks around the word, I certainly wouldn’t consider National Book Award winner and recent MacArthur Fellow Charles Johnson to be a minor writer, nor would I put him in exactly the same bag as David Bradley, who has written one very good book (The Chaneysville Incident, excerpted in the Norton) and one pedestrian one (South Street). But designating Native Son as “the greatest black novel of the twentieth century” gives us a strong clue to Murphet’s ideological allegiances. My choice for the Great African American Novel would be Invisible Man (whose prologue is included in the Riverside; the prologue, first chapter, and the epilogue are in the Norton), which should offer a clue to my own allegiances. (Another way to designate these differences is to propose that Murphet is aligned with Franz Fanon, while I’m aligned with Albert Murray [for those unfamiliar with the latter, see The Omni-Americans (1970) and Conversations with Albert Murray (1997)].) One suspects Murphet would be comfortable with a book like Addison Gayle, Jr.’s The Way of the New World: The Black Novel in America (1976), a product of the Black Arts Movement (so wondrously inciteful and so frequently wrongheaded), which argues that the “true” trajectory of African American fiction is (politically, but not especially aesthetically) a “revolutionary” one. In Gayle’s book, Ellison is little more than a (mishandled) footnote; yet though he has been reviled by Marxists as well as BAMers (with Larry Neal’s famous recantation and subsequent embrace of Ellison providing a most instructive exception [see “Ellison’s Zoot Suit” in Visions of a Liberated Future]), Ellison’s profound cultural/spiritual depth has always trumped more reductive pronouncements about what shall constitute “the people’s” “authentic” voice.

     

    Murphet makes another questionable gesture when he asks what it means to put W.E.B. DuBois “in the same volume with such lamentable stylists as Terry McMillan and Gloria Naylor” (49). DuBois emphatically is a towering figure, and if he is the standard by which we measure who is major, then most people are going to appear to be minor, and our anthology (and perhaps our canon) is going to be a much leaner one. But to compare two present day fiction writers with DuBois, who did produce creative work but whose true greatness for the most part lies elsewhere, isn’t very kosher; and in my estimation, the differences between McMillan, whose work has more surface than depth, and Naylor, a novelist of much greater gravity, are far more substantial than the distinctions that could be drawn between Johnson and Bradley, both of whom are serious writers, but whose bodies of work do differ widely in their formidability. Here we have a failure to draw fine discriminations between writers who happen to be on a critic’s hit-list. (For the record, Bradley doesn’t appear in the Riverside collection. McMillan, Naylor and Johnson all do, though the selections from their work are different from those that appear in the Norton.)

     

    How inclusive need a canon be? In the May 12, 1997 issue of The Nation, Kevin Meehan provides a list of fifty African American writers who are not included in the Norton anthology. Some of these are important: Alexander Crummell, Martin R. Delany, J. Saunders Redding, Henry Dumas, Gayl Jones (all but Redding are included in the Riverside anthology); others are quite obscure: B. K. Bruce, John Matheus, Cecil Blue (the Riverside includes Bruce). Altogether, eighteen of the authors Meehan cites as missing from the Norton are in the Riverside. One writer Meehan doesn’t mention who is not in the Norton but who has a story included in the Riverside anthology is William Melvin Kelley, who wrote some of the most interesting and innovative black fiction of the 1960s. (At the same time, Meehan notes the absence of Frank Yerby, whose work primarily lies outside the tradition of African American letters.) Obviously, every anthology project of serious scope requires an often painful exercise of selectivity, and there are times, too, when permissions can’t be obtained for works one badly wants. But Meehan scores a point when he observes that “often it is the voices left out of the canon-making text that have been most responsible… for generally doing the most to create conditions that make possible the emergence of a document like The Norton Anthology of African American Literature” (46).

     

    In the end, even the best anthology is a convenience, a portable version of a discipline, a tradition, that in its fullness inevitably possesses a great deal of baggage. Within that baggage, for those willing to search deeper, are to be found, along with much dross, various overlooked riches, instructive “mysteries,” tangled threads waiting to be unknotted. Nevertheless, I’m happy these anthologies exist. Even if, from the most rigorous perspective, they are not sufficient unto themselves, they are badly needed. They should not be our only tools, but they can serve as very useful ones.

     

    With the exception of the so-called new literatures, most canonical anthologies seem based on an assumption of the greatness of previous writings to which we are perpetually appending footnotes and an occasional new monument. But if Gates is correct in his conviction that the Golden Age of black writing is in the present, not the past, then there are certain to be some dramatic displacements and reconfigurations in the future with regard to the African American literary canon. With the publication of these two anthologies we are witnessing not the battle’s conclusion, but the bringing on of the first really heavy artillery.

    Works Cited

     

    • Basbanes, Nicholas A. “Henry Louis Gates Jr. Plumbs African-American Heritage.” george jr. Feb. 1998. http://www.georgejr.com/feb98/gates.html.
    • Bentsen, Cheryl. “Head Negro in Charge.” Boston Apr. 1998. http://www.bostonmagazine.com/highlights/gates.shtml
    • Bloom, Harold. The Western Canon. NY: Harcourt Brace, 1994.
    • Blume, Harvey. “Applying the Corrective: Henry Louis Gates, Jr.” The Boston Book Review May 1997. http://www.bookwire.com/bbr/bbrinterviews.article$2970.
    • Gayle, Addison Jr. The Way of the New World: The Black Novel in America. Garden City, NY: Anchor Press, 1975.
    • Jordan, Jennifer. “Arthur P. Davis: Forging the Way for the Formation of the Canon.” Callaloo 20.2 (1997): 450-460.
    • Kinnamon, Keneth. “Anthologies of African-American Literature from 1845 to 1994. Callaloo 20.2 (1997): 461-481.
    • McKay, Nellie. “Naming the Problem That Led to the Question ‘Who Shall Teach African American Literature?’: or, Are We Ready to Disband the Wheatley Court?” PMLA (May 1998): 359-69.
    • Meehan, Kevin. “Spiking Canons.” The Nation 12 May 1997: 42-44, 46.
    • Murphet, Julian. Wasafiri Spring 1998: 48-49.
    • Murray, Albert. Conversations with Albert Murray. Ed. Roberta S. Maguire. Jackson: UP of Mississippi, 1997.
    • —. The Omni-Americans. New York: Outerbridge & Dienstfrey, 1970.
    • Neal, Larry. “Ellison’s Zoot Suit.” Visions of a Liberated Future. Ed. Michael Scwhartz. New York: Thunder’s Mouth, 1989: 30-56
    • The NewsHour. PBS. 7 March 1997.
    • Pasaro, Vince. “Black Letters on a White Page.” Harper’s July 1997: 70-75.
    • Prettyman, Alfred E. “Ways to African American Literature.” Crosscurrents (Spring 1998). http://www.crosscurrents.org/bookss98b.htm#prettyman.

     

  • Another Country: Amnesia and Memory in Contemporary South Africa

    Rita Barnard

    Comparative Literature and Literary Theory
    University of Pennsylvania
    rbarnard@dept.english.upenn.edu

     

    Jeremy Cronin, Even the Dead: Poems, Parables, and a Jeremiad.Cape Town: David Philip, 1997.

     

    Sarah Nuttall and Carli Coetzee, eds. Negotiating the Past: The Making of Memory in South Africa. Oxford UP, 1998.

     

    In 1995, American Vogue published a fashion article cum travelogue under the rubric “South Africa Now.” Offered as a celebration of the country’s recent democratic elections, it featured the Somali supermodel Iman and her husband David Bowie visiting sites in and around Cape Town–dressed, of course, in fabulously expensive designer clothes. The article opens impressively, with a picture of Iman shaking hands with Nelson Mandela (“an historic meeting,” we are told). This dignified image is followed by a series of joyous fashion pics: Iman dancing on the streets of Guguletu township in a Jil Sander suit and Mandela T-shirt, posing at a Cape Town high school in a Gucci skirt, kissing on the beach in a Chanel ballgown, and striding past bright graffiti in a Gaultier frock. Facing this last image, we encounter–and perhaps we should have seen something like this coming–a shot of Archbishop Tutu working out on his treadmill, looking both sporty and meditative in a Duke University sweatsuit. The article ends with a black-and-white photograph of a zebra running along a deserted roadway towards a mountainous horizon: an emblem, clearly, of the multiracial nation, moving towards what Vogue calls “an exciting future.”

     

    The article displays (with considerable panache) a mythic and newly consumable South Africa. The “now” announced in its title effects, as it were, an erasure of the whole history of violence and injustice. In these images the Cape becomes an austral playground, where the past is redeemed by the click of a fashion photographer’s shutter. The sites, the icons and the grass-roots agents of the anti-apartheid struggle–so often a war waged by school children–all become colorfully exotic, chic, even cute: suitable background for the antics of multicultural celebrities. The differences in the experiences and achievements of the photos’ various subjects–president, cleric, fashion model, and rock star–are visually irrelevant: Mandela, Tutu, Iman, and Bowie are all equated as Beautiful People in a world of pure appearances. The nation itself is magically transformed–figured as an elegant thing of nature, instantly unified in its coat of harmonious black-and-white stripes.1

     

    Vogue‘s visual indulgence in the “South African miracle” is neither unique nor really reprehensible: there was, after all, much reason to celebrate in 1994 and to take considerable aesthetic pleasure, after years of seeing the Old Crocodile and his cronies in office, in a president who was not only a man of moral stature, but of a certain physical grace. Four years down the line, however, a fixation on “Madiba magic” and an exclusive concern with “now” and the “future” seem somewhat more problematic. With the ANC’s apparent adoption of all the orthodoxies of globalization, it has come to seem as though the hard-fought liberation struggle was only about winning a larger share of the pie (for some) and achieving a redeemed visibility in the global public sphere. The past and its lessons too often appear to have been forgotten. Even the Truth and Reconciliation Commission’s task of exhuming the grim secrets of the apartheid régime has occasionally generated what the poet Ingrid de Kok terms “a rhetoric of amnesia”: its work has been associated, even by the commissioners themselves, with “a clean break,” a “new chapter,” “getting the past out of the way,” and so forth.2

     

    It is against this rhetoric of amnesia that Jeremy Cronin’s long-awaited second collection of poetry, Even the Dead: Poems, Parables, and a Jeremiad, is pitched. The collection is offered as wake-up call (“Art is the struggle to stay awake” [40] is one of its memorable lines). In the “jeremiad” of the title, Cronin mercilessly and sometimes wittily diagnoses the nation’s pervasive amnesia; he laments the country’s entry into the postmodern world:

     

    It's amnesia when the SATV launches itself into  
      the new South 
    Africa and lands
         In Las Vegas
              (Ongoing, chronic, paradigmatic 
                 amnesia)
    ...............................................
    
    CNN is globalized amnesia
    
    The Gulf War--lobotomised amnesia
    
    Santa Barbara, the Bold and the Beautiful, 
      Restless Years--the 
    milk of amnesia
    ...............................................
    
    There is upwardly mobile amnesia
         Affirmative action amnesia
              Black economic empowerment, the world 
    	    owes 
    me one, Dr Motlana, give a slice of it amnesia
         (syntagmatic amnesia--an elite for the 
           whole)
    
    There is winning-nation amnesia
         It puts in Olympic bids
    
         It summits Everest and forgets to name all 
           but one
         Of the sherpas who carried us up. (42-43)

     

    But in other poems, Cronin recalls the ideals, the language, the anxieties, and even the dramatis personaeof the liberation struggle. The stalwart Slovo is paid humorous homage in “Joe Slovo’s Favorite Joke”; and in “Poem for Mandela” the “crunched-up / One-time boxer’s knuckles” (30)–the great man’s hands, marked by personal history and experience–are brought to mind, rather than his all-too-photogenic media icon’s face.

     

    The title of this collection is taken from Walter Benjamin’s “Theses on the Philosophy of History”:

     

    There is a secret agreement between past generations and the present one. Our coming was expected on earth. Like every generation that preceded us, we have been endowed with a form of Messianic power, a power to which the past has a claim. That claim cannot be settled cheaply. (39)

     

    Benjamin here dramatically infuses what one might think of as the dusty task of the historian with a peculiar, messianic revolutionary mysticism: a sentiment that might surprise some, coming from a Communist Party official like Cronin. But in this case it should not. Cronin’s celebrated first collection, Inside (written while he was a political prisoner from 1976-1983), was animated by a revolutionary nationalism rather a revolutionary messianism; but it nevertheless contained many poems in which the poet reaches out to find a “secret agreement” with figures from the past, with his father, with his grandparents, with the novelist Olive Schreiner, and with more distant and imagined ancestors: KhoiSan warriors and cave painters–aboriginal figures of resistance and creativity. Traces of such poetic commerce between the “past generations and the present one” still remain in Even the Dead; but, in some instances, these negotiations are satirically transformed. In a series of ironic epitaphs, Cronin salutes the recently deceased: various contemporary political types who have lost their sense of community and connection with their compatriots. One of the sharpest epitaphs reads:

     

    For a recently Departed Soul from the new Patriotic Bourgeoisie
    Hey, man, don't weep
    I can't take your call presently
    As I'm upwardly mobile
    
    Please leave your prayer
    After the beep (35)

     

    This is obviously a poem about forgetting; but it is also a poem that remembers a revolutionary ancestor: Franz Fanon, whose cautionary chapter on the problem of the patriotic bourgeoisie, “The Pitfalls of National Consciousness,” is alluded to in the poem’s title.

     

    Another reminder of the claims of the past is offered in the disturbing and impressive poem “Running Towards Us.” Dated 1986-1997, the poem strives to bridge the temporal gap between the anti-apartheid struggle and the present. It recalls an incident witnessed in the aftermath of the brutal fighting at the Crossroads squatter camp in 1986: a failed execution, viewed from a distance across a strip of empty veld. The poet and his companions look on in horror as people pour gasoline over an apparently dead or wounded man, and as they unhurriedly bring sticks and tires to fuel the flames. All of a sudden, the man gets up and, still soaked in fuel, runs towards the watchers. In the poem’s final lines, this figure is transformed into a troubling emblem of the recent past:

     

    He is running towards us. Into our exile. Into the return of exiles. Running towards the negotiated settlement. Towards the democratic elections. He is running, sore, into the new South Africa. Into our rainbow nation, in desperation, one shoe on, one shoe off. Into our midst. Running. (4)

     

    This image of this nightmarish compatriot–a victim, betrayer, who knows?–may be set against Vogue‘s reassuring image of the zebra running towards the scenic horizon. It raises profound and unsettling questions about how the “rainbow nation” will accomodate the memories of the traumatized and often morally dubious citizens. The costly claims of the past, Cronin suggests, will not be dodged.

     

     

    Even the Dead will inevitably be compared to Inside (perhaps the most celebrated collection of poetry to come out of South Africa in the last two decades), and many will find the slim new volume lacking–lacking, at least, in the quality of stirring lyricism which marked the most celebrated of Cronin’s prison poems. Compared to poems like “Plato’s Cave” or “To learn how to speak,” or even the more narrative “Walking on Air,” the new work sounds distinctly prosy, as in the following lines from “Running Towards Us”:

     

    In those three days the apartheid police and army have destroyed an entire shanty-town, unleasing black vigilates (witdoeke), victims themselves turned perpetrators, to perform much of the dirty work. (2)

     

    It is as though the contextualizing information (which in Insidewas provided in effective mini-essays interspersed among the various sets of poems) has now moved into the bodies of the poems themselves. Cronin (who is, among other things, an excellent literary critic) offers a justification of sorts for this change in one of the opening poems:

     

    Between, let's say, May 1984 and May 1986
    (Speaking from my own limited, personal 
      experience of course)
    There was a shift out there
    From lyric to epic. (1)

     

    But one cannot help wondering whether the reportorial and pedagogical quality of the lines I cited may not in some measure derive from Cronin’s work as the public spokesman for a political party. Poems like “Running Towards Us” seem to be projected beyond the circle of committed comrades–beyond the solidarity of “our people’s unbreakable resolve,” that is invoked in Inside–to what Lewis Nkosi has called the “cross-border” reader: the reader outside the group, for whom things have to be explained and defined.3

     

    This is not to say that Even the Dead is without power or integrity. On the contrary: the volume introduces fresh poetic modes (fragment, aphorism, collage, parable, and mock epitaphs) suitable for a complicated time–a historical moment in which the earlier poems’ proleptic invocations of revolutionary nationalism might well seem dated, in which such poems would serve an official, rather than their former performative and incantatory function. Yet it is clear that for Cronin the revolutionary struggle is not won, and cannot be equated with the victories of the patriotic bourgeoisie. The last word in the volume is therefore again Walter Benjamin’s:

     

    In every era the attempt must be made anew to wrest tradition away from a conformism that is about to overwhelm it.... Only that historian will have the gift of fanning some sparks of hope in the past who is firmly convinced that even the dead will not be safe from the enemy if he wins. And this enemy has not ceased to be victorious. (44, Cronin's emphasis)

     

    This quotation would make an appropriate epigraph for Negotiating the Past: The Making of Memory in South Africa, edited by Sarah Nuttall and Carli Coetzee. This new collection of essays on the problematic politics of national remembrance includes contributions from an array of South African academics, three of whom are also acclaimed creative writers (Njabulo Ndebele, Andre Brink, and the younger poet, Ingrid de Kok). In their introduction the editors present their collection of essays in dramatic fashion as standing at an important threshold in South African history: a moment defined equally by the adoption of a new constitution (a forward-looking document, concerned to ensure a future of freedom and equality) and by the work of the Truth and Reconciliation Committee (a backward-looking project, concerned with the excavation of apartheid’s most heinous crimes). The contents are arranged under four headings: the first section (“Truth, Memory, and Narrative”) includes essays on the meaning and practice of the Truth and Reconciliation Committee (the TRC); the second section (“The Remembered Self”) explores personal narrative in contemporary South Africa: it highlights the tension between individual memories and the shapes imposed on such recollections by various genres, ranging from autobiography to oral history. The third section (“Museums, Memorials, and Public Memory”) considers various projects and institutions that have attempted to intervene in the reshaping of public recollection and national history. The final section (“Inscribing the Past”) explores a set of documents and discursive forms (advertising, linguistics and language policy, and the new constitution itself) that are likely to have an ongoing and determining effect on the nation’s sense of its past.

     

    The timeliness and political importance of the issues raised in Negotiating the Past seems particularly apparent when one sets the volume in dialogue with Cronin’s Even the Dead. Most closely akin in spirit to Cronin’s satiric diagnosis of South African society is Eve Bertelsen’s essay, “Ads and amnesia: black advertising in the new South Africa.” Bertelsen notes the disappointment felt by many South Africans at the ANC’s rapid embrace of the late-capitalist free market and an official policy of privatization. This volte face, she argues, requires from the population an equally rapid “unremembering” of the ideals and values that animated the anti-apartheid struggle.4 Her essay suggests that the ideological work required to induce this amnesia–to effect a redeployment of the promises and ideals of the mass democratic movement–is essentially being performed for the government by the institution of advertising, especially advertising directed at black South Africans. Her point is well made by a number of outrageous examples. A 1994 ad for Bonnita milk, for instance, depicted an opened milk carton, spilling a white cross against a black background. The slogan, worthy of inclusion in Cronin’s jeremiad, read as follows: “Why cry over spilt milk, when we can build a healthy nation? The past is just that… past. It’s the future that’s important” (226-27). Thus apartheid’s history, as Bertelsen notes, is written off with a reassuring cliché: consumer goods will effectively mop up such insignificant slips and spills as have occurred. This strategic unremembering allows for revolutionary concepts like “freedom” to be redefined in the interests of the market. The point is readily made in a slogan for the clothing company Foschini: “You’ve won your freedom. Now use it. Get a Foschini’s credit card today” (233).

     

    Most of the essays in Negotiating the Past, however, are concerned not so much with what Bertelson calls the “key dynamic of forgetting” as with the complicated dynamics of memory, the ongoing process of making tradition to which Cronin draws our attention. In her essay on recent South African autobiography, Sarah Nuttall describes two modes of remembering, especially remembering in the wake of trauma. The first is a traditional mode, in which memory brings consolation: it operates by imposing a narrative continuity and redemptive interpretation on catastrophic experience in order to provide a sense of wholeness and healing. The second is a modernist mode, which she associates with Walter Benjamin: it operates by eschewing consolation, by insisting that the shattering effects of trauma can only be respected by preserving–in their fragmentary state–the irredeemable shards of historical catastophe. It is fair to say that the entire collection oscillates between the two modes of memory outlined here. There is, it seems to me, a divide of sorts between the fiction writers writers Ndebele and Brink (who tend to validate the work of the imagination and narrative as well as the revelatory work of the TRC) and the academics of various stripes (who tend, on the whole, to be suspicious of totalizing narratives and to worry about the erasures that the dominant modes of truth-telling might impose). The split is not a radical one, for neither Brink nor Ndebele believe naively that the Truth Commission will reveal a whole truth or that narratives are necessarily seamless. But still, one senses a certain faith in narration in Ndebele’s call for the “revelation of meaning through the imaginative combination of [the] facts” (21) and Brink’s insistence that the inquiries of the TRC be “extended… in the imaginings of literature” (30) that seems to be lacking, say, in the reflections of Gary Minkley and Ciraj Rassool, who fret over the way in which South African oral historians have folded the personal memories of their interviewees into narratives of national liberation.

     

    The anthropologist Steven Robins’s essay, “The Silence in my Father’s House: Memory, Nationalism, and Narratives of the Body,” though somewhat experimental in its use of personal materials, may serve here as representative, in that it reflects in some detail on both of the modes of memory described above. Like Rassool and Minkley, Robins is suspicious of master narratives. A descendent of Holocaust victims, he is well aware of the danger of nationalist reclamations of victimization, such as the Zionist reading of the history of the Holocaust and the Afrikaner’s reading of the history of the concentration camps in the Boer War. The work of the TRC, he points out, has not yet settled into a coherent narrative of any sort. The dirty secrets, the memories of dismembered and abused bodies, were experienced by the nation in a fragmentary way: the victims’ “rivers of tears” were relayed night after night in grisly installments and soundbites. But Robins wonders, as do several of the other contributors, whether the spectacular sufferings revealed in this testimony might not in the end serve to displace the memory of the more banal sufferings of ordinary folks. A vivid anecdote suggests that this kind of displacement may already be taking place. Robins describes the way in which the gruesome testimony of Evelyn Maloko before the TRC–an account of how her sister, Maki Skosana, was necklaced and tortured as an informer by an angry mob–was presented to the nation. In the televised report of the testimony, Maloko’s description of her sister’s mutilated remains was cut short by the call of one of the commissioners for a minute of silence to salute Maki’s heroism and martyrdom.5 In this version of the event, Robins argues, the individual’s painful and choking recollection is cut short and the complicated circumstances and motivations surrounding the death of a possible betrayer are subsumed into a seamless and consoling narrative of national sacrifice and eventual triumph. The troubling figure of Maki Skosana calls to mind the ambiguous figure of the petrol-soaked runner in the scruffy veld at Crossroads. The violent past, as both Cronin and Robins suggest, will not–without distortion–settle into a triumphalist, “winning-nation” narrative.

     

    At the end of his essay Robins remains unsettled about whether an “abused memory” is better than no memory at all; and the only solution he offers is the personal testimony (the dominant genre, perhaps, of this moment in South African culture) of how he learnt to live with the fragments of his family’s traumatic Holocaust experience: by recognizing its very fragmentary character, the silences of his father, as an authentic mode of memory. But this “insoluble solution,” as he calls it, may finally be no solution at all–at least not one that South African politicians or museum curators will find easy to live with. A telling case in point here is the controversial exhibition entitled “Miscast: Negotiating KhoiSan History and Material Culture,” held at the South African National Gallery in April 1996 (an event to which several essays, including two fine pieces by Martin Hall and Patricia Davison, refer). The intention of the show was precisely to raise questions about the representation of these aboriginal inhabitants of the Cape (as timeless though sadly extinct examples of the primitive or as objects of disinterested scientific curiosity) and to bring the actual history of genocide to which they were subjected back into view. The exhibition, Davison notes, contained “harrowing images and artefacts of human suffering” (158). At its center, for instance, was a ring of scattered body casts–severed heads, fragmented body parts, and naked torsos–around a grim brick cenotaph and a pyramid of rifles. It was one, might say, a ruinous, Benjaminian memorial.6 But while whites, as Robins notes, experienced “Miscast” as similar in its emotional effect to the work of the TRC, KhoiSan activists missed the exhibition’s ironic intent: they read the dismembered bodies not as a ironic allegory–as authentically mournful fragments–but literally, as an continuation of colonial violence (159). Needless to say, the fact that the curator, Pippa Skotnes, was a white woman, was not lost on these protestors. The whole exhibition thus raised questions about how memory is constructed, and by whom.

     

    If Negotiating the Past offers any resolution of the tension between the two modes of memory it describes–both problematic, as we have seen–it is only a metaphorical one: Ingrid de Kok’s image of the “cracked heirloom,” painstakingly glued together, an image of unity, certainly, but a unity that does not hide away the broken shards of grief and loss. But while De Kok’s essay does attempt to offer examples of this kind of memorial (most notably the District Six Museum in Cape Town, which commemorates the old mixed-race township, razed under the Groups Areas Act), it still remains to be seen how often and how readily her complicated metaphor will prove translatable into practice. Coetzee and Nuttall’s volume, for its part, is perhaps less of a unity than one might like to see. While it does include some discussion of the importance of coherent narratives of consolation and healing, its form leans towards the fragmentary and the discontinuous. This is perhaps inevitably the case with an essay collection, but the sense of discontinuity is here increased by the fact that the essays are drawn from an unsually wide range of disciplines and are highly uneven in quality (several are quite unmemorable as academic performances). The introductory essay (probably deliberately) offers no strong synthetic argument; but it (probably inadvertently) points to one of the collection’s signal weaknesses. Emphasizing the importance of landscape and place in the construction of memory, the editors mention mining as the practice which most signally destroyed people’s connection to their ancestors, their mnemonic connection to the land. This collection of essays, unfortunately, never goes near South Africa’s mines: in all the articles concerned with the sites of memory, the key examples are without exception located in the former Cape Province.7 (Moreover, with the exception of Ndebele, all the contributors are Cape Town-based.) This distinct regional bias is regrettable and occasionally raises uncomfortable questions. E.g., was it really because of “almost incredible political amnesia” (12), as the editors claim, that the Cape “Coloureds” voted for the National Party in the 1994 election–or was the vote, at least in part, based on a regionalism unseen by these commentators, because shared?

     

    Negotiating the Past is then in certain respects disappointing; yet it is saved by its compelling subject matter and timeliness, by its frank admission that the processes of memory are complex and ongoing, and by its generous sense of the multiple forms in which memory may reside: histories, stories, testimony, films, exhibitions, objects, bodies, places, etc. In this last respect it opens up possibilities for interdisciplinary work and suggests something of the richness of contemporary South Africa as a site for critical cultural studies.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The use of the zebra as an emblem for the South African nation in fact dates back to the early 1970s, when it was invented by the apartheid government’s combative foreign minister, R. W. (Pik) Botha; it was frequently recycled thereafter, especially in the government’s anti-sanctions campaign in the mid-1980s. The Vogue photograph, insofar as it works iconically, is thus a visual updating (or, more positively, a reappropriation) of an apartheid era cliché. For a discussion of another instance of the zebra image, see my essay, “The Final Safari: On Nature, Myth and the Literature of the Emergency,” in Derek Attridge and Rosemary Jolly, eds., Writing South Africa: Literature Apartheid, and Democracy, 1970-1995 (Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998): 123.

     

    2. “Getting the past out of the way” was the phrase used by Danie Schutte, the leader of the National Party’s justice committee (qtd. in De Kok, “Cracked Heirlooms = Memory on Exhibition,” in Nutall and Coetze 59).

     

    3. Cronin, “To learn how to speak…,” Inside (London: Jonathan Cape, 1987), 64; Nkosi, “Constructing the ‘Cross-Border’ Reader,” in Elleke Boehmer, Laura Chrisman, and Kenneth Parker, eds., Altered State? Writing and South Africa (Sydney: Dangaroo Press, 1994).

     

    4. The term “unremembering”–emphasizing the fact that we are dealing here with an active process–is favored by the linguist Sinfree Makoni, another contributor to Negotiating the Past (244).

     

    5. Robins does not mention the fact that the apartheid government put Maki Skosana’s story to much more sinister uses than the Truth Commissioner could possibly be said to have done. The brutal circumstances of her death were televised both at home and abroad, causing considerable damage to the image of the liberation movement. Subsequent testimony at the TRC indicated the involvement of Eugene de Kock and the Vlakplaas assassins in the events leading up to this outburst of collective fury, thus complicating questions of guilt even further.

     

    6. At one point visitors were even forced to walk over images of KhoiSan people: an installation reminiscent of Benjamin’s notion of the culture as a triumphal parade in which victors of history trample over the vanquished.

     

    7. Davison mentions in passing the site museum at Tswaing north of Pretoria and the restoration of the stone-walled capital at Thulamela in the northern part of the Kruger National Park.

    Works Cited

     

    • Barnard, Rita. “The Final Safari: On Nature, Myth and the Literature of the Emergency,” in Derek Attridge and Rosemary Jolly, eds., Writing South Africa: Literature Apartheid, and Democracy, 1970-1995. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998. 123-140.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “Theses on the Philosophy of History.” Illuminations: Essays and Reflections. New York: Schocken, 1969. 253-264.
    • Cronin, Jeremy. Inside. London: Jonathan Cape, 1987.
    • Nkosi, Lewis. “Constructing the `Cross-Border’ Reader.” Eds. Elleke Boehmer, Laura Chrisman, and Kenneth Parker, Altered State? Writing and South Africa. Sydney: Dangaroo Press, 1994.
    • “South Africa Now.” Vogue June 1995. 159-179.

     

  • What We Talk About When We Talk About Poetry: A Recent View from St. Petersburg A Translation of Arkadii Dragomoshchenko’s “On the Superfluous”

    Evgeny Pavlov

    Department of Comparative Literature
    Princeton University
    evpavlov@princeton.edu

    Translator’s Preface

     

    “All this is familiar; still it needs to be repeated. In its very essence the decorative grid of the Chinese interior is inexhaustible. Repetitions do not exist as long as there is time. Thus non-coincidence, deviation, residue, all requiring a different approach” (“Syn/Opsis/Tax” 5). These words of the Russian poet Arkadii Dragomoshchenko (iguana@comset.spb.ru) that open what may very well be considered his poetic manifesto1 would also make an excellent epigraph to the text that follows here. It has been five years since his work was introduced to PMC readers in the 1993 Symposium on Russian Postmodernism (PMC 3:2).2 The brief essay in the present issue is in many ways a repetition of what was then said by and about him. Yet the non-coincidence is apparent. Five years ago Russian postmodern poetry was too much of a conceptual curiosity to be dealt with entirely on its own terms. In 1992, after a bilingual reading by Arkadii in Charles Bernstein’s poetics seminar at SUNY-Buffalo, where he was then a visiting fellow and I a graduate student, I remember being asked how his work sounded to a Russian ear–whether its ostensible affinity with American Language poetry did not make for a certain foreignness, constructedness, a certain out-of-the-test-tube quality.3 At the time, I was unsure. His poetry was certainly most unlike anything I had ever heard or read in my native tongue. As Barrett Watten put it in his contribution to the PMC symposium, Dragomoshchenko’s poetry “rips a hole in the lyrical fabric of [Russian] tradition’s… authority” by resolutely breaking with the “overdeterminations of sound and sense that have provided the standard for Russian verse” (Watten 2). The question of influence, of tradition and innovation, of “lineages and cultural formations” (Perloff 13) thus suggested itself before any other. It was an obvious one. It remains to be explored further.

     

    Today, however, new lines of questioning can also be pursued, or at least invoked. Now that “the momentum that has brought the [“Third Wave” of Russian literature] brilliantly crashing on our shore” (Perloff 13) has somewhat subsided, other approaches seem possible. One of them is to imagine what it would be like to view post-Soviet poetry as something other than a representational practice specific to a given context, and thus, as something not always already determined by, or reducible to, a habitual set of national attributes current at a given moment. This possibility is not easily recognized simply because it appears to have few immediate uses.

     

    Consider the history of Dragomoshchenko’s essay “On the Superfluous.” The piece was commissioned by a small British journal as a commentary on the contemporary state of poetry in Russia. Yet the text Arkadii wrote and asked me to translate was flatly rejected as it contained no actual information about the specifics of the poetry scene. The editor was in fact puzzled and, I think, slightly insulted. He was clearly expecting a straightforward report on the latest poetic trends but instead received a dense paratactic rumination that mentioned Russia only in passing and was mostly concerned with poetry as “something superfluous” to what we generally talk about when we talk about poetry. In other words, Dragomoshchenko’s reflections offered a view of poetry and its scene that was not centered on any particular historical, political, cultural, or literary developments, links or connections other than those poetry itself projects “in its constant self-questioning.” The view of poetry presented in his essay was, to be sure, poetic. For that very reason it was deemed redundant, gratuitous, self-indulgent–superfluous, as it were.

     

    Which, of course, illustrates Arkadii’s point only too well, even though one cannot but sympathize with the British editor’s frustration. Dragomoshchenko’s own frustration, however, is also understandable given the context out of which he is writing–the context on whose framing we always rely so heavily in our discussions of Russian poetry. What happened to poetry in that context is succinctly described in the first two paragraphs of “On the Superfluous.” But the framing and the framed keep changing places. Poetry, Dragomoshchenko insists, is “always something else;” it is “that state of language which in its workings constantly exceeds the actual order of truth” (“Syn/Opsis/Tax” 7). It exceeds its context as easily as it exceeds its poet.

     

    Without asking the poet anything, they ask, is it possible to ask about that to which no answer is possible; not asking, they ask: does such a question exist, whose absence gives birth to the same irresistible anxiety which quite naturally excites doubt about many things, and first about the fascination of the paternalistic relations between the holder of truth and its user... And what answer might it be, this pearl, locked around its shell? ("Syn/Opsis/Tax" 7)

     

    “On the Superfluous” does not provide an answer to that impossible question; it fails to describe contemporary Russian poetry or its scene. What it does describe, however, is a “four-dimensional landscape of an impeccable action” where every step is in the right direction, where “having begun in one thing,” one finishes “in another without having moved at all” (Xenia 66).

     

    Translator’s Notes

     

    1. “Syn/Opsis/Tax” (Konspekt-kontekst in the original) is the author’s preface to Description, his first collection of poems translated into English. It also opens his prose volume Phosphor and is included in The Third Wave: The New Russian Poetry. The complete Russian-language archive of Dragomoshchenko’s works is located at www.vavilon.ru/texts/dragomo0.html.

     

    2. A text-only version of the Septmember 1993 issue of Postmodern Culture, including the Symposium on Russian Postmodernism, is available at http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issue.193/contents.193.html. The full hypertext version of this issue is available at http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/postmodern_culture/toc/pmcv003.html#v003.2 (Please note that only paid subscribers to PMC at Johns Hopkins’ Project MUSE have access to this site. Information on subscribing to Project MUSE is available at http://muse.jhu.edu/ordering.)

     

    3. Dragomoshchenko’s long-time friendship, engagement, and collaboration with Language poets, first and foremost Lyn Hejinian, whose brilliant translations of his work brought him wide recognition in the West, partially explain why the initial American response to his poetry was so comparative. Marjorie Perloff’s contribution to the 1993 PMC symposium, for example, focuses, more than anything else, on Dragomoshchenko’s position vis-à-vis his American counterparts.

     

    4. I wish to thank Amy Billone for invaluable help with editing this translation.

     

    5. Konstantin Vaginov (1899-1934), a member of the Leningrad literary group OBERIU, whose work is still largely untranslated into English. The quote is from Trudy i dni Svistonova (Labors and Days of Svistonov), a metafictional novel that constructs complex allegorical figurations of Russia’s literary modernity. On some echoes of OBERIU poetics and philosophy in Dragomoshchenko’s work, see Molnar.

     

    6. Protection against the undead used by the philosophy student Khoma Brut, main character of Nikolai Gogol’s Viy.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Dragomoshchenko, Arkadii. Description. Trans. Lyn Hejinian and Elena Balashova. Los Angeles: Sun and Moon, 1990.
    • —. “Syn/Opsis/Tax.” Trans. Lyn Hejinian and Elena Balashova. Poetics Journal 9 (June 1991): 5-10.
    • —. Xenia. Trans. Lyn Hejinian and Elena Balashova. Los Angeles: Sun and Moon, 1994.
    • —. Phosphor. St. Petersburg: Severo-zapad, 1994.
    • Etkind, Alexander. Eros of the Impossible: The History of Psychoanalysis in Russia. Trans. Noah and Maria Rubins. Boulder, CO: Westview Press, 1997.
    • Johnson, Kent and Stephen M. Ashby, eds. The Third Wave: The New Russian Poetry. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1992.
    • Molnar, Michael. “The Vagaries of Description: the Poetry of Arkadii Dragomoshchenko.” Essays in Poetics 14:1 (April 1989): 76-98.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. “Russian Postmodernism: An Oxymoron?” Postmodern Culture 3:2 (January 1993).
    • Watten, Barrett. “Post-Soviet Subjectivity in Arkadii Dragomoshchenko and Ilya Kabakov.” Postmodern Culture 3:2 (January 1993).

     

  • A.R. Ammons and “the only terrible health” of Poetics

    Kevin McGuirk

    Department of English
    University of Waterloo
    kmcguirk@watarts.uwatxerloo.ca

     

                 I'm glad the emphasis these days
    is off dying beautifully and more on light-minded 
      living with 
    the real things--soap, spray-ons, soda, paper 
      towels, etc.
                (Ammons, Sphere 55)
    
    
    It was when my little brother, who was two and 
    a half years younger than I, died at eighteen 
    months.  My mother some days later found his 
    footprint in the yard and tried to build 
    something over it to keep the wind from 
    blowing it away.  That's the most powerful 
    image I've ever known.
                (Ammons, in interview, Walsh 117)

     
    This essay is about a problem in the work of A.R. Ammons, a problem worth study because it also concerns the reading of the postmodern in poetry. The problem is this: what are we to make of the contemporary lyric’s continuing advertisement of presence when postmodernism elsewhere celebrates surface, difference, and alterity? In Ammons’s writings, these conflicting and incommensurable epistemologies and ontologies engage one another, creating a space for thinking about this problem even if, or rather because, Ammons himself leaves the issue undecided. From the mid-60s to the early ’70s, after Ammons published a number of mid-length poems outlining a poetics of process–“Corsons Inlet” is the best-known–the body of his poetry divides between what John Ashbery called in his review of the Collected Poems (1972) a “swarming profusion” (59) of lyrics and a half dozen long poems culminating in Sphere: the Form of a Motion (1974). Ammons is an obsessively dialectical thinker, so the handiest way to account for this divide is to say that the two modes are complementary, much as high/low, center/periphery, one/many are complementary figures of thought throughout his work. But interesting continuities and discontinuities are revealed when we line up these modes, which I’ll call post-romantic lyric and postmodern long poem, not against Ammons’s own thematics but against various discourses of postwar culture, including the poetic. To begin with, while discussions of postmodernism in poetry have typically exercised an opposition between the lyric and varieties of “anti-absorptive” modes (life/long poem, “poet’s prose,” collage, etc.), Ammons has been working both sides of the opposition without any apparent sense of inappropriateness or debility.1 His critics, however, (led by Bloom and Vendler) have busied themselves almost entirely with the lyrics and a set of traditional questions associated with poetry (crisis of the self, mind-nature relations, poetic language), while a few isolatos (Wolfe, Jarraway) have belatedly addressed the different operational procedures of the longer poems. Though he won the National Book Award for Garbage in 1993, Ammons criticism hasn’t been conspicuous lately because, I suspect, his celebrity of the ’70s identified him with an early postmodernism that seems safely humanistic compared to subsequent developments in both the theory and practice of the postmodern.2 As I read it, literary critics of the ’70s could find in the lyrics a reflection of their own ambivalence between a will to idealization, precariously articulated in lyric epiphanies, and an emerging imperative to politicize, deconstruct, or otherwise materialize privilege of all kinds. His lyrics embodied a growing tension within criticism between “experience” and “discourse.3

     

    I begin by looking at the lyrics in relation to a persistent bias in American poetics against formal and epistemological closure in favour of open-ended longer poems, proposing that Ammons’s proliferating lyrics ultimately constitute a kind of ongoing environment, a long poem rather than a collection of “works.” The lyrics typically entertain then deny the lure of epiphanic closure that defines post-romantic lyric, promoting a repeated unmaking rather than the development of a body of work. I go on to consider affinities between the long poems and popular modes examined not in literary criticism but in some recent work in cultural studies. I refer to what Margaret Morse calls an “ontology of everyday distraction” (193) epitomized by television, and banality, a term whose deployment in cultural studies has been examined by Meaghan Morris. Whether the contemporary long poem feeds off or into the mainstream of postwar popular culture, the literally ambi-valent term banality speaks to much postmodern poetic practice in its various transactions with the newly interesting phenomenon of noise.4 Cybernetics, the science of information as a signal-to-noise ratio, speaks to postmodern epistemologies, Ammons’s own thinking, and the growth of media environments in the postwar U.S., and I draw on it to address the problem of presence. The interest of Ammons’s writing of this period, then, is not just literary, or even literary-theoretical, but broadly cultural. I conclude by setting these terms against those of a later elegy, with its centering and re-membering procedures.

     

    The difference I’m concerned with might be further defined on one side by an aesthetic practice of the self based on privileged, inward experience, and on the other by a more discursive and exteriorizing mode. It’s the difference between classical values like contemplation, subjective depth or verticality (metaphor), transcendental knowing–with poetry serving as a defense of subjectivity against objective circumstance (Koethe 72, 75)–and postmodern “values” like distraction, horizontality (metonymy), and materialist understanding.5 This suggests that something more than generic difference defines the terrain of Ammons’s work. If the “manyness” of his lyrics produces a long poem manqué, then the divide lies not between the long poems and lyrics but between those together on the one hand and the autotelic “works”–the anthology pieces, the major poems that have won Ammons’s place in what Jed Rasula calls “the poetry wax museum”–on the other.6 But maybe Rasula’s phrase is too reductive applied here. In thinking about the noise of the long poems, and of the postmodern long poem generally, their rejection of gestures towards depth and containment of meaning, I’m brought up short by the gesture of the poet’s mother on the death of his younger brother, and by his own delayed poem of grief, “Easter Morning” (1981). The problem, again, is this: to preserve or restore the imprint of lost others (including the natural world) we have built lyric poems;7 but the lyric poem, which is by definition anti-banal since it is structured by privileged moments, appears to have been disqualified as a vehicle of the postmodern. So what do we do that is both poetic and postmodern with grief like the poet’s mother’s or the poet’s own?8

     

    Substance and motion

     

    We might advance the task of articulating the difference in Ammons’s work, this generic divide–comparing, say, “Dark Song” (“Sorrow how… deep / it is”),9 a lyric singled out by Denis Donoghue for approval, and certain blandly speculative passages of the very lengthy “Hibernaculum”–by suggesting that it is like the difference “between regret and assay” (Lyotard 80). If Ammons’s poetry manifests a traditionally lyric self regardless of whether one views him as a postmodern and American epistemologist–centrifugal rather then centripetal in his discursive movements, decentered and relational in his forms (“riding horseback between / the obscure beginning and the unformulated conclusion” [“Essay” 35]), a poet pursuing logics shared with television–“Easter Morning” (SP 106-08). The poet returns to his homeplace to “stand on the stump / of a child…. whether myself or my brother,” a deep subjectivity constituted through the work of elegy. This return finds some resonance in the popcult-romanticism of the recovery movement, with its portrait of the “inner child” and its project to recover wholeness for the self cut off from itself in childhood.10 In this context, regret is clearly the term of retrospection and centering (lyric), assay the term of onwardness and expansion (long poem). Regret demands psychologistic understanding; it proposes metaphorical relations with otherness, a selfhood structured by a correspondence between the living, in-process social self and an authentic deep self. Assay is the mode of a fluid, unmoored subject, constructed from the multiple and shifting discourses accumulated through its life “experience.” Its self-structuring relations are metonymic, proposing contiguities rather than identities. The subject has access to no correspondent, transcendently present other, within or without.

     

    Ammons has made motion his master trope, a concept linked neatly with assay, with ’60s “open” form and quasi-organic notions of process, epistemologies of relational knowledge like cybernetics, as well as the ontology of distraction Morse identifies with TV. Kenneth Burke’s observation that “a key strategy in Western materialism has been the reduction of consciousness to ‘motion’” (506) is suggestive here. He links motion with science (correlations and processes) and substance with human relations (“the ‘is’ of being” [505]). For any discourse observing the implications of such a strategy, depth–the dimension of subjectivity addressed both in the recovery movement and in the elegy–is a certain casualty. Yet the condition of postmodernity includes both a defining gesture and its retraction: both the travels of the virtual subject in the information age (the latest phase of Western materialism) and the drama of the inner child that reconstitutes romantic pathos.11

     

    Ammons’s brother’s death at eighteen months, when Ammons was four years old, is the signal biographical event in his work, though it appears only twice in the whole ouevre: first in the later pages of Sphere when he compares “the long, empty, freezing gulfs of / darkness” with the gulf that opened “when / the younger brother sickened and then moved no more” (72-73), and finally in “Easter Morning.” I would claim that this event organizes the swarming profusion of his work around something like a repressed content, so that a negative psychodrama can be read throughout.12 While Ammons’s materialist strategies (“what is saving” [Sphere 34, 41] is transposed to “can we make a home of motion” [76]) are productive of many, as Ammons himself would say, “interesting” configurings of the relations of mind and nature, they do not account for the deep subjectivity produced by the special form of regret called grief. It is as if neither the force of motion, nor the imperatives of a postmodern epistemology, can de-realize the stubborn substance of self, the “child” arrested in unresolved grief.

     

    Lyric?

     

    At one point in “Hibernaculum,” Ammons itemizes the cost of a recent repair job on his car, noting that “one thing interesting / is that Ned’s Corners Station is at 909 Hanshaw Road / and I’m at 606 Hanshaw Road: that’s configuration” (75). Helen Vendler complains of this passage: “Only if you think it is, is it configuration, and for all Ammons’s jauntiness, he carries this Wordsworthian notion of everything adding up to an extreme” (Vendler 75). As her further remarks on the exemplary sanity of Wordsworth indicate,13 configuration for her is unreflexively psychologistic and conventionally romantic: the subject is the deep centre to which all experience is referred. Hence, her privileging of Ammons’s lyrics.

     

    Cary Wolfe offers a brilliant counter-reading of Ammons’s long poems in relation to information theory, but he relies on a simplistic representation of Ammons as an anti-lyric writer who has moved beyond the “talking wind and mountains” of the “early” poems, a glancing allusion that seems a willful distortion. When Ammons makes mountains talk he’s obviously playing an ironic game, not naively committing a pathetic fallacy:

     

    I was going along a dusty highroad
    when the mountain
    across the way
    turned me to its silence:
    oh I said how come
    I don't know your
    massive symmetry and rest:
    nevertheless, said the mountain,
    would you want
    to be
    lodged here with
    a changeless prospect, risen
    to an unalterable view:
    so I went on
    counting my numberless fingers. (SP 55)

     

    This lyric is practically an allegory of Wolfe’s own argument that Ammons works with a new organic which “opens outward, is centrifugal rather than the centripetal ‘innate’ form of Coleridge” (80). The lyrics, then, do not propose to “add up,” to use Vendler’s phrase (that is metaphor’s job). Indeed, when the poet begins to count, he discovers that his fingers are “numberless”: numberless are the indices, or counters, for a world the configurations of which are numberless.

     

    Any (lyric) investment in singular meaning, then, is quickly withdrawn to keep poetic discourse truly current. As a gesture in language, each lyric is a kind of violation that threatens both reality, language, and performer with stasis by proposing a literal carrying-over (meta-phor) from one to the other. Thus not recovery, but “abandonment,” Ammons declares,

     

    is the only terrible health and a return to 
       bits, re-trials 
    of lofty configurations ("Essay" 32-33)

     

    What is salient about Ammons’s lyrics is not the climb to unitary perspective, but the act of withdrawal and unmaking: he posits only a center where “nothing at all gets, / nothing gets / caught at all” (“Center” SP 52). Lyric, then, may be conceptualized as a trial: an assay compatible with the longer “assayistic” poems.

     

    Motion?

     

    I want to complicate this claim by considering a few notions from Stephen Fredman’s books on “poet’s prose” and the “grounding” of American poetry. Lyric has never been well-theorized in American poetics, and Fredman’s brief for poetries evolving on the margins of verse culture, and indeed of verse itself, does not take up genre as a category of reading. Fredman elaborates the ways in which American poets, lacking the cultural grounding European writing took for granted, have been compelled to write into the open, on the one hand, and to practice various provisional, idiosyncratic, and paradoxical authorizing activities in the place of that grounding, on the other. These remain, however, compensations for the defining act of American poetry, which is abandonment.14 Not to abandon, it is implied, produces a groundedness something like “false consciousness,” or something like mere regret: the refusal both of abandonment and of the peculiar grounding activities described by Fredman.

     

    Lyric makes a strange object for these tendencies. With modernity, lyric lost its rhetorical ground in occasion (see Bender and Wellberry), establishing a primary deixis in the empty “I” of the poet, a “shifter,” which is void of specific referential content. And it is perhaps because of this groundlessness and the pathos of that defining but empty “I” that post-romantic lyric has actively and anxiously presumed and affirmed “presence” as normative, repressing its rhetorical character and severing its connection to positive cultural work in favour of retrospective, “regretful” inward vision.

     

    This begins to explain why writing like Ammons’s, which would seem to be in a line with the poets read in Fredman’s books in its ambivalent, nervous committment to abandonment, is absent from such studies. The difference from those poets springs in part from the choice of a master concept, motion, that is, on the one hand, radically physical, and on the other, entirely abstract and metaphorical. In other words, oscillating between the concrete and the abstract, Ammons eschews easy affirmations of presence but also the more difficult, mediate, rhetorical activity of culture. In deploying a concept like motion, which comes from the vocabulary of physics, Ammons cannot produce complex, rhetorical frameworks for cultural practice. The problem is displayed most clearly in “Cascadilla Falls.” “Thinking” the motions of the universe (“800 mph earth spin, the 190-million-mile yearly / displacement around the sun, / the overriding / grand / haul / of the galaxy”) “into” the merest “handsized stone” which he picks up by the creek, the poet experiences by proxy the vertiginous effects of a universe in motion, effects which leave him “shelterless.” So, he concludes,

     

    I turned
    to the sky and stood still:
    oh 
    I do 
    not know where I am going
    that I can live my life 
    by this single creek.  (SP 62)

     

    In the dedication to the long poem Sphere, Ammons suggests that nature offers correspondences to the words “tree” and “rock” but not to the human word “longing” (5): the world is not present to desire. The dialectic represented in “Cascadilla Falls is between absolute motion that destabilizes the psyche, and the stabilizing, self-constructing gesture of apostrophe, a rhetorical move typical of post-romantic lyric that grounds the empty “I” by setting it in relationship with some naturalized concrete externality (the sky).15

     

    Given such poles as the only possible “grounds,” the lyric can be nothing more than a trial, turning and turning from a ground rejected as false to a vertiginous groundlessness and back to a momentary ground; from violation to abandonment to “re-trials of lofty configuration.” Without a ground, unable to posit the last word of a metaphor that breaks across linguistic barriers, the poet writes assay after assay, each a gesture of assertion and abandonment at once. The problem is that such a pattern may amount to mere turning and turning–lyric as tropism. In the long poem “Essay on Poetics,” Ammons calls the procedure that makes “whole” lyrics repeatable a “mechanism,” since “wholeness… is a condition of existence” (30-31), not essence (Wolfe 81). Does such a procedure simply produce, in Meaghan Morris’s paraphrase of Baudrillard, a “vast banality machine” (21)? Here we come to a crux in Ammons’s practice: once you reject essence, and you accept mechanism, you court the banality of the mass producing machine. Turning and turning may simply massage and exacerbate the essential pathos and alienation of the lyric poem’s “I.”

     

    Romantic lyric is a naive or even paranoid investment strategy based on a theory of scarcity, not plenitude, of meaning. With his long poems–pure expenditure–Ammons appears to reject that model; when capital’s kept out of circulation, there’s no cash flow. Yet he keeps going back to the bank, only to withdraw with his left hand every investment in lyric meaning made with his right–to keep meaning current. What’s the point of that currency? Motion? The lyric “work” is a sound investment, bound to increase the capital of a poetic career (as the anthologies suggest). But “Easter Morning” shouldn’t be accounted for as simply capital (psychic or poetic), ballast against a wave of paranoia. It appears in the economy of Ammons’s poetry as a singular confrontation with the existential scarcity proposed by death. One might speculate that this return of depth, like the return of the repressed, is inevitable in such an insistently dispersed and impersonal poetics as Ammons has pursued. But how can grief, with its powerful subjectivizing force, be articulated within Ammons’s hyper-dynamic of grounding and abandonment?

     

    Banality

     

    I want to start to answer this question with another question. Does Ammons qualify as what Morris calls “a distracted media baby” of the postliterate world? More questions follow. Can a media baby be a lyric poet? Can banality be “poetic”? “I’m glad,” Ammons confides in Sphere,

     

                 the emphasis these days 
    is off dying beautifully and more on 
       light-minded living with 
    the real things--soap, spray-ons, soda, paper 
       towels, etc.

     

    –though, he adds, “I expect to die in terror” (55). In “Hibernaculum” he discovers an exemplum in what “somebody said” “the other night on Hee-Haw” (101). Ammons exploits postmodern vernaculars not for images for poetry, in Yeats’s phrase, but demonstrations of knowledge and value. More to my point, though, is the ontology of the form of television–the epitome, for Morse, of a new “ontology of distraction.” TV presentation is segmented, but moves so rapidly that it leaves the impression of flow rather than step by step movement. In motion, the distracted subject, surfing channels, or simply following shifts between program and commercial, takes in data from various planes of representation as his horizon of sensory comprehension expands, contracts, leaps, dawdles, etc. The colon is the dominant form of punctuation in all Ammons’s poetry, but in the longer poems the absence of marked points of rest enacts and typifies the ontology of the work.16 The poems shift rapidly in their attentions, breaking at any colon without the kinds of formal signaling (stanza break) normative in post-romantic texts. The horizon of attention expands and contracts at the poet’s whim, or at points of distraction, his attention caught by something else. It’s clear that Ammons’s longer poems elaborate an ontology of everyday distraction, rather than, say, classic and humanistic value like contemplation. Ammons might well be aiming to refit poetry for the list that forms Morse’s subtitle: “The Freeway, the Mall, [Poetry], and Television.” For TV as for poetry, “the problem is,” in Ammons’s words, “how / to keep shape and flow” (“Summer Session” 17).

     

    Speaking more generally, the long poem aspires to exist in a manner much like that of what we call the media, changing all its absorbed contents into second-order phenomena. Wolfe’s essay on Ammons is important in its elaboration of Ammons’s use of cybernetics, particularly in his poems’ treatment of nature not as primary otherness but as information. Cybernetics describes a relational and formal universe; meaning is differential, existing in the spaces between objects, or between words and words, or words and referents. Such a relation constitutes a redundancy. Information then is not substantial. “All that is not information, not redundancy, not form and not restraints–is noise, the only possible source of new patterns” (Bateson 410). If, according to a cybernetic model, meaning depends on a signal-to-noise ratio, in the modern context what becomes important in art is not the elimination of stray material (noise) in the process of shaping the art-object; instead, it is art’s repeated transactions with noise, the only source of the new. In these terms, the contrasting assumption of romantic lyric poetic is that meaning is immanent within an arrangement of signals. When Vendler, a lyric critic, suggests in reference to Ammons’s long poems that “Never has there been a poetry so sublimely above the possible appetite of its potential readers” (76), this is to say, there’s too much noise. In Poe’s romantic view, the long makes no sense because it’s mostly noise; only its lyrical moments–moments with very high signal-to-noise ratio–can properly be called poetry. Letting in low-level material, the accidental, the misfits, and moving without apparent narrative intention breaks the repetitive signal of the anti-banal lyric, and poetry cedes itself to the entropic tendency in discourse towards banality.17

     

    As Meaghan Morris notes, “banality” is a classic term of dismissal for popular forms, which has recently has taken on an odd double valence or literal ambivalence in some recent writing in cultural studies. Such ambivalence is crucial to the experience of reading postmodern long poems generally, and particulary a striking feature of Ammons’s work. Its anti-absorptive qualities, interestingly, come not from radical formal strategies employed, for example, by Language writers, but from the banality and seeming disorder or noisiness of its progress. The poems seem merely to accumulate. The banal is the common, the everyday: on the one hand, the wellspring both of post-romantic poetic value and of political value for cultural studies; on the other, merely the dull and ubiquitous, the disorganized–noise. In Ammons I think it’s important to understand banality as a kind of stylistic limit-point, much like periphery stands metonymically for the limit-point of thought. Both are played dialectically off centres. Both contribute to an environment of surfeit, of an excess of bytes of information. The poem, then, is a media rather than a linear progression, a totality or sphere lying alongside the other totality called the world. Given that the world is, for Ammons, a kind of popular (banal, common) culture, we read the poem, like the world, like TV, not from start to conclusion, but cut in and out at various indeterminate places, distractedly or purposefully.

     

    Such dispersed, formal, and uninsistent epistemologies offer advantages over humanist ones–most obviously their mimesis of contemporary forms of noise and banality–but they beg the question of how to comprehend the insistent, focused experience of a beloved other’s death. In a recent issue of Cultural Critique on “The Politics of Systems,” Wolfe argues for the adequacy of cybernetics as a posthumanist epistemology, basing his position mainly on the second-order cybernetics of Varela and Maturana. But the final emphasis of his discussion is a trenchant critique of those writers’ humanistic plea for an ethic of love. Wolfe reads this plea as a call for ethics to do the work of politics and a disavowal of the “internal limit” of the subject psychoanalytically conceived, a disavowal born of “the need to repress the Thing at the heart of the subject” (65). The Thing in the modern west, Wolfe notes, is the animal. Death, our limit, I would add, is the sign of our animal nature. This argument, I think, has some bearing on the practice of elegy.

     

    Elegy

     

    Wolfe quotes Zizek on “this internal impossibility of the Other, of the ‘substance.’ The subject,” Zizek writes,

     

    is a paradoxical entity which is so to speak its own negative, i.e. which persists only insofar as its full realization is blocked--the fully realized subject would be no longer subject but substance." (qtd. in Wolfe 64-65)

     

    What drives post-romantic elegy, if not most post-romantic culture, is the desire for substance, for substantial union with nature, self, other–a crossing over, achieved symbolically through metaphor. But the elegiac subject is contradictory: it’s the poignancy of encountering the blockage and longing to overcome it that produces its peculiar character. Varela’s invocation of Buddhist compassion, situated beyond desire, is, for one thing, a gesture against the continuing waste of romantic selfhood trapped in that stasis. (If this is transcendence, it’s a paradoxical one since its goal, having nothing to do with a romantic crisis of the self but with continuing biological co-existence, is entirely pragmatic.)

     

    In Zizek’s terms, what cybernetics proposes is difference at every level as a proliferated form of blockage. There is no place of oneness to get to; indeed, there is no “inside” and “outside,” self and other, only differentiation. This seems, however, inadequate to address the grief arising from the death of an other since it brackets not only what is experienced as singular and focused, but also the centering and holding force of romantic subjectivity more generally. Varela’s gesture, like Ammons’s elegy, might in fact be an inevitable eruption of the informal in cybernetics’ formalized universe, a gesture determined not by theorized intellection but by the notion of subjectivity most readily available to its maker. Indeed, in Ammons’s case, romantic subjectivity kicks in as the poetic default mode in the face of a crisis his poetics cannot account for.18

     

    Elegy, unlike merely elegiac lyric, of which “Dark Song” is an example, responds to an occasion. (Generically, the elegist confronts the limit of the occasion, and produces a subjectivity in relation to it). Death, then, offers a paradoxical occasion to modern poets, the one event that cannot be gainsaid by western technology, epistemology, or aesthetics. “Easter Morning” is not just an elegy, however, but a poem of the “adult child.” Ammons returns to the spot where his brother died and where, he suggests, some aspect of his own emotional development was arrested. It is a return above all to his childhood place and a return to a life enmeshed in familial and communal rites and relations, material that’s absent from his typical work.19 “I have a life,” he begins, “that did not become,”

     

    that turned aside and stopped,
    astonished:
    I hold it in me like a pregnancy or
    as on my lap a child
    not to grow or grow old but dwell on

     

    As we discover, if Ammons returns to an actual ground, the family culture there is literally dead since they are “all in the graveyard, / assembled, done for, the world they / used to wield, have trouble and joy / in, gone.” And in the absence of human collectivity, of a “world,” he is compelled to enact a different, lyric form of mourning. Here the formal play of the long poems and proliferating lyrics gives way to a conventional lyric discourse of re-membering:

     

    it is to his grave I most
    frequently return and return
    to ask what is wrong, what was
    to see it all by
    the light of a different necessity
    but the grave will not heal
    ..................................
    the child in me that could not become
    was not ready for others to go,
    to go on into change, blessings and
    horrors, but stands there by the road
    where the mishap occurred

     

    The stalled deep self so remote from most of Ammons’s work is precisely what he has been unable to abandon and what he regrets. If Ammons comes home to address this resistance of the re-membering subject, is it then the case that “abandonment” is not, after all, the “only terrible health”? If the poetry is a displaced form of subjectivation, a means to integrate all that’s given into a world of meaning, his brother’s death and his own arrested self are hidden correlates of his own subjectivity because they cannot fit into the “objective” world he has discursively created. The arrested inner child is projected as the stubborn substance of self, the positive to which the adult subject is Zizek’s paradoxical negative.

     

    “Easter Morning” is striking, singular–and it is poetically terminal because the re-membered world serves Ammons as a metaphorical passage back out to the parallel world of objective natural forms, not a cultural or familial enstructuring he has to negotiate. Curiously, it’s also more psychologistic: catharsis is transposed by an aesthetic practice of the self using nature as a transcendent, metaphorical double of that self. The poem clarifies the relations of the dual inner child, “myself or my brother,” leaving the home space for inhabitation by the dead. But it “abandons” only by investing the self metaphorically in enduring natural (permanent not provisional) forms like the flight paths of birds the poet observes this Easter morning: the birds move apart, then together, promising reconciliation for himself and his brother:

     

          it was a sight of bountiful
    majesty and integrity: the having
    patterns and routes, breaking
    from them to explore other patterns or
    better ways to routes, and then the
    return

     

    The elegy defends the subject against objective circumstances (Koethe) by positing something greater (more bountiful, majestic, and integrated) than those circumstances with which the self is then identified–by revealing, in other words, a correspondence, a substance for the human word, “longing.” understanding rather than a means to cultural engagement. In poetry, the right metaphor makes it all “add up.”

     

    Ammons’s poetry proposes two healths, two fatalities: the fatality of death (and the solace of the elegiac “work”); and “the only terrible health” of banality, which is, in Baudrillard’s sense, a continuing fatality. In the first, the object is the subject’s mirror; it has a certain fatefulness about it, the “inevitability” of the art work: it’s an end, even when, like “Corsons Inlet,” like “Easter Morning,” it declares continuance. In the second, the object is not the subject’s mirror and so the poet must abandon both the object and the poem of the object. The long poem cuts and extends. The lyric as repeatable trial, unlike the lyric as “work,” evades lyric fatality; it’s not a stay against confusion but a moving target, a subject conducting evasive maneuvers. “Easter Morning” promises to resolve the problem of the whole work, but it does so only by being incommensurable with it.

     

    Notes

     

    I would like to acknowledge the support of a post-doctoral fellowship from the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada, which helped me get this essay in motion several years ago.

     

    1. A signal instance of such discussion is Marjorie Perloff’s essay, “Postmodernism and the Impasse of Lyric,” which endorses postmodernism in poetry in explictly anti-lyric terms. “Postmodernism in poetry,” she writes,

     

    begins in the urge to return those materials so rigidly excluded--political, ethical, historical, philosophical--to the domain of poetry, which is to say that the Romantic lyric, the poem as expression of a moment of absolute insight, of emotion crystallized into timeless patterns, gives way to a poetry that can, once again, accommodate narrative and didacticism, the serious and the comic, verse and prose. (180-81)

     

    More recently, Hank Lazer noted in a review-essay on a clutch of critical books (1990) that the thrust of postmodern criticism would appear to demand the elimination or the radical refiguring of the lyric.

     

    The issue of what postmodernism in poetry is remains, of course, a complex one. I should make clear from the outset that I do not address the apparent gulf between postmodernism as it’s discussed in academic circles and postmodernism as it’s discussed in “the writing community”–meaning a group of writers, usually identified as poets, from Jackson Mac Low to Ron Silliman. In this essay, I’m interested neither in a postmodernist program, nor in the ways in which a poet’s articulated postmodernism (such as Silliman’s) relates to that poet’s work. Rather, I’m interested in the ways in which Ammons work registers or exemplifies features of a more general discursive field that includes popular culture, cultural studies, (now) mainstream theories of the postmodern, post-romantic lyric poetry, and academic literary criticism, as well as poetic departures from humanistic representationalism–especially of the self in lyric. Unlike many postmodern writers, Ammons remains a lyric poet; his commitment to a materialist poetics is not radical. See for example, Patrick Deane on Ammons’s early long poem “Tape for the Turn of the Year” (1965), which starts as a materialist exercise (writing a poem on a roll of adding machine tape) and ends by making of the material a figure for a transcendent condition. What I set out here, then, is Ammons’s undecideable relation to two orientations, an undecideability often present in mainstream discussions of the postmodern, and absent from discussions by avant-garde writers committed to materialist, anti-humanist procedures. (This difference may explain in part why there’s almost no dialogue across the gulf and indeed why only writers and critics conversant with the work of Mac Low et al. appear to be aware of the gulf–though the increasing visibility of Language writing will increase awareness on the side of the mainstream).

     

    2. See, for example, Charles Altieri’s early essay on “immanentist” poetics in Boundary 2, later revised as the introduction to Enlarging the Temple (1978).

     

    3. I’m invoking Altieri’s formulation in his 1980 essay on poetry and poetics of the ’70s, “From Experience to Discourse.”

     

    4. Since the ’60s noise has been theorized in discourses drawing on cybernetics, but also in works as various as Jacques Attali’s Noise: the Political Economy of Music and Public Enemy’s rap “Bring the Noise.”

     

    5. Iain Chambers describes the difference helpfully in slightly different terms:

     

    Official culture, preserved in art galleries, museums, and university courses, demands cultivated tastes and a formally imparted knowledge. It demands moments of attention that are separated from the run of daily life. Popular culture, meanwhile, mobilizes the tactile, the incidental, the transitory, the expendable; the visceral. It does not involve an abstract aesthetic research amongst privileged objects of attention, but invokes mobile orders or sense, taste and desire. Popular culture is not appreciated through the apparatus of contemplation; but as Walter Benjamin once put it, through 'distracted reception.' The 'public is an examiner, but an absent-minded one.' (12)

     

    See Benjamin’s “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.”

     

    6. I would include here “Corsons Inlet,” “The City Limits,” “The Arc Inside and Out,” “For Harold Bloom,” and “Easter Morning.”

     

    7. As Jan Zwicky puts it, “Lyric springs from the desire to recapture the intuited wholeness of the non-linguistic world, to heal the slash in the mind that is the capacity for language.” The recognition of the impossibility of that fulfillment “is the source of lyric’s poignancy” (230).

     

    8. In 1985 Peter Sacks summarized the obstacles placed before elegy in the postmodern context:

     

    Although the paradoxical "presence" in language of absent things has been renewed with unprecedented force in recent years, this renewal has been marked by a disconcerting tendency to deprive literature of much of that combination of strength and pathos so characteristically stressed by Wordsworth. For recent critics have not only undermined assumptions about the presentational powers of language, they have diminished the subjective pathos that attends those absences which the use of language may seek to redress or appease. (xi)

     

    9.

    Sorrow how high it is
    that no wall holds it
    back: deep
    
    it is that no dam undermines
    it: wide that it
    comes on as up a strand
    
    multiple and relentless:
    the young that are
    beautiful must die: the
    
    old, departing,
    can confer
    nothing.  (Corsons Inlet 9)

     

    10. See Jed Rasula’s interesting discussion of the coincident dominance of the workshop lyric and emergence in the late 1970s of various self-help theories and associations, including the notion of the “inner child” (421-25).

     

    11. On this contradiction see Andrew Ross’s related discussion, “New Age Technoculture”:

     

    There is a world of difference between the sort of holistic, or completist sense of identity espoused in New Age, and the sort of fragmentary identity that intellectual fractions in this society have become accustomed to talking about.... And I agree that the liberatory fantasies of many postmodern theorists... have little in common with the utopian fantasies of groups with less cultural capital--fantasies that are solidly tied to the hunger for completion, or self-transcendence. (554)

     

    There’s little in common between Ammons’s positions as well. His work should be generally characterized as postmodern: it rejects the romantic project to “save the phenomenon” called the self. If it is to sustain a human subject this must be done according to materialist (or “scientific”) criteria rather than humanist accounts of experience. “What is saving,” he asks in Sphere (34, 41), then transposes the question to a materialist register: “can we make a home of motion” (76). But he oscillates between the two formulations; questions of motion frequently get transposed back into the “saving” mode which is, I think, the default mode for post-romantic poetry.

     

    12. Ammons alludes to his brother’s death in various interviews, but see especially the statement, “`I Couldn’t Wait to Say the Word’” (1982), collected in Set in Motion. He notes that after his brother’s death,

     

    I must have felt guilty for living and also endangered, as the only one left to be next. Mourning the loss of life, in life and in death, has been the undercurrent of much of my verse and accounts for tone of constraint that my attempts at wit, prolixity, and transcendence merely underscore. (35)

     

    13. “In Wordsworth,” Vendler writes, “it sounds rather saner”:

     

                            How strange, that all
    The terrors, pains, and early miseries,
    Regrets, vexations, lassitudes interfused
    Within my mind, should e'er have born a part,
    And that a needful part, in making up
    The calm existence that is mine when I
    Am worthy of myself?  (Vendler 75)

     

    14. Fredman takes this term from an essay by Stanley Cavell on Emerson and Thoreau though he doesn’t cite the resonant concluding passage in which Cavell contrasts Heidegger’s notion of poetic “dwelling” with the ideology implicit in the work of the Americans:

     

    The substantive disagreement with Heidegger, shared by Emerson and Thoreau, is that the achievement of the human requires not inhabitation and settlement but abandonment, leaving. Then everything depends upon your realization of abandonment. For the significance of leaving lies in its discovery that you have settled something, that you have felt enthusiastically what there is to abandon yourself to, that you can treat the others there are as those to whom the inhabitation of the world can now be left. (138)

     

    The enthusiasm of abandonment is the antidote to the despair of groundlessness. It ensures the work of assay.

     

    15. In poetry, the crisis of subjectivity appears in the ungrounded poet’s attempts to constitute himself according to his own lights resulting in a neurotic oscillation between power and pathos. Positing tradition is a complex form of resistance to the vertigo realized by romanticism and conventionally resisted by apostrophe. Eliot’s famous insistence on impersonality is a polemical refusal of this dialectic (a dialectic which later became characteristically American), a refusal supported by the (European) tradition he projected through his career. Tradition functions like a scientific paradigm that allows “normal science” to be carried on; it “saves the phenomena”–poetry–and allows normal poetry (and criticism) to be carried on.

     

    16. Wolfe explains this difference usefully in terms of the difference between analogue and digital representation.

     

    17. Nature in this scheme suffers a kind of de-realization–no longer the transcendent medium for romantic disourse, not a metaphorical site whose remove from language enables poetic metaphor-making–becoming a series or web of changing relations which we know only as information. It, too, depending on our own knowledge and interpetive abilities, maintains a signal-to-noise ratio; but all encounters are contextualized by noise. Knowledge is not a matter of making other same, but a temporalized process or exchange taking place in a context that is partially known (signal) and partially not-known (noise). The long poem, ongoing, seems the only mode adequate to representing or participating in a cybernetic universe.

     

    It is essential to note that a full account of cybernetics would demonstrate its links with practical strategies of government and industry. As its etymology indicates, cybernetics is about steering, about control. Specifically, it proposes strategies for maintaining control in open environments. I don’t have scope to show how a poem like Sphere diverges from “Essay on Poetics” as a cybernetic poem/system. Enough to say here that it finally emphasizes steering as it proceeds from the “sexual basis of all things” (first line of the poem) and local and mortal contexts to the motion of planet earth through the universe, ending with a rather totalizing anti-banal epiphany: “we’re ourselves: we’re sailing.” In its deliberate attempt to “be” a sphere the poem confuses being and representing, thus it ends on a point above rather than in the world, imagining a totality rather than ceaselessly producing one. Problems arise in Sphere for two reasons. First, cybernetic steering reaches a kind of outer limit of systems, and looks back at totality: the earth viewed as a metaphor for “human life,” a figure of extreme pathos: the earth as the inner child of humanity. Second, the void encountered beyond the earth-system recalls for Ammons the more personal void created by his brother’s death, an absolute event that refuses to “turn” along with the troping/turning of Motion. See McGuirk, “A.R. Ammons and the Whole Earth” for a more complete discussion of these questions. Cultural Critique 37 (Fall 1997): 131-58.

     

    18. It might be said simply, that grief produces depth. A locus for this is Joyce’s “The Dead,” in which Gretta’s greater depth and superiority of character are significantly linked to her grief for Michael Furey. Her grief is the correlate of her deep self, hidden from Gabriel till the final scene of the story because it has not been assimilated into the world of meaning in which she lives. Its effect is to produce this subterranean world.

     

    19. John Bradshaw, one of the best-know recovery theorists, writes in Homecoming: Reclaiming and Championing Your Inner Child (1990) that mourning

     

    is the only way to heal the hole in the cup of your soul. Since we cannot go back in time and be children and get our needs met from our very own parents, we must grieve the loss of our childhood self and our childhood dependency needs. (211-12)

    Works Cited

     

    • Altieri, Charles. Enlarging the Temple: New Directions in American Poetry During the 1960’s. Lewisburg, Pa.: Bucknell UP, 1979.
    • —. “From Experience to Discourse: American Poetry and Poetics in the Seventies.” Contemporary Literature 21.2 (Spring 1980): 191-224.
    • —. “From Symbolist Thought to Immanence: The Ground of Postmodern Poetics.” boundary 21.3 (Spring 1973): 605-42.
    • Ammons, A.R. Corson’s Inlet. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1965.
    • —. “Essay on Poetics.” Selected Longer Poems. New York: Norton, 1980. 30-54.
    • —. “Extremes and Moderations.” Selected Longer Poems 55-66.
    • —. “Hibernaculum.” Selected Longer Poems 67-104.
    • —. Selected Poems: Expanded Edition. New York: Norton, 1986.
    • —. Set in Motion: Essays, Interviews, & Dialogues. Ed. Zofia Burr. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1996.
    • —. Sphere: the Form of a Motion. New York: Norton, 1974.
    • —. “Summer Session.” Selected Longer Poems 16-29.
    • Ashbery, John. “In the American Grain.” Bloom 57-62.
    • Attali, Jacques. Noise: The Political Economy of Music. 1977. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1985.
    • Bateson, Gregory. Steps to an Ecology of Mind. New York: Ballantine, 1972.
    • Bender, John and David E. Wellbery. “Rhetoricality: On the Modernist Return of Rhetoric.” The Ends of Rhetoric: History, Theory, Practice. Eds. Bender and Wellbery. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard UP, 1990. 3-39.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Illuminations. New York: Schocken, 1968. 217-51.
    • Bernstein, Charles. “Artifice of Absorption.” A Poetics. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1992. 9-89.
    • Bloom, Harold, ed. A.R. Ammons. New York: Chelsea House, 1986.
    • Bradshaw, John. Homecoming: Reclaiming and Championing Your Inner Child. New York: Bantam, 1990.
    • Burke, Kenneth. A Grammar of Motives. 1945. Berkeley: U of California P, 1969. 503-17.
    • Cavell, Stanley. “Thinking of Emerson.” 1978. The Senses of Walden. Expanded edition. Chicago: Chicago UP, 1981. 123-38.
    • Chambers, Iain. Popular Culture: The Metropolitan Experience. London: Methuen, 1986.
    • Deane, Patrick. “Justified Radicalism: A.R. Ammons with a Glance at John Cage.” PLL 28.2 (Spring 1992): 206-22.
    • Donoghue, Dennis. “More Poetry than Poems.” The New York Times Book Review 6 Sept. 1981: 5.
    • Fredman, Stephen. The Grounding of American Poetry: Charles Olson and the Emersonian Tradition. New York: Cambridge UP, 1993.
    • —. Poet’s Prose: The Crisis in American Verse. 1983. 2nd ed. New York: Cambridge UP, 1990.
    • Jarraway, David R. “Ammons Beside Himself: Poetics of the `Bleak Periphery.’” Arizona Quarterly 49.4 (Winter 1993): 99-116.
    • Koethe, John. “Contrary Impulses: The Tension between Poetry and Theory.” Critical Inquiry 18 (Autumn 1991): 64-75.
    • Lazer, Hank. “The Politics of Form and Poetry’s Other Subjects: Reading Contemporary American Poetry.” American Literary History 2 (Fall 1990): 503-27.
    • Lyotard, Jean-Francois. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. 1979. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Mellencamp, Patricia, ed. Logics of Television: Essays in Cultural Criticism. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1990.
    • Morse, Margaret. “An Ontology of Everyday Distraction: The Freeway, the Mall, and Television.” Mellencamp 193-221.
    • Morris, Meaghan. “Banality in Cultural Studies.” Mellencamp 14-43.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. “Postmodernism and the Impasse of Lyric.” The Dance of the Intellect: Studies in the Poetry of the Pound Tradition. New York: Cambridge UP, 1985. 172-200.
    • Rasula, Jed. The American Poetry Wax Museum: Reality Effects, 1940-1990. Urbana, Ill.: NCTE, 1996.
    • Ross, Andrew. “New Age Technoculture.” Cultural Studies. Eds. Lawrence Grossberg et al. London: Routledge, 1992. 531-55.
    • Sacks, Peter. The English Elegy: Studies in the Genre from Spenser to Yeats. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1985.
    • Vendler, Helen. “Ammons.” Bloom 73-80.
    • Walsh, William. “An Interview with A.R. Ammons.” Michigan Quarterly Review. 28.1 (Winter 1989): 105-17.
    • Wolfe, Cary. “In Search of Post-Humanist Theory: The Second-Order Cybernetics of Maturana and Varela.” Cultural Critique (Spring 1995): 33-70.
    • —. “Symbol Plural: The Later Long Poems of A.R. Ammons.” Contemporary Literature 30.1 (Spring 1989): 78-94.
    • Zwicky, Jan. Lyric Philosophy. Toronto: U of Toronto P, 1992.

     

  • Poetics, Polemic, and the Question of Intelligibility

    Benjamin Friedlander

    Department of English
    State University of New York at Buffalo
    bef@acsu.buffalo.edu

     

    Why does a poet write a statement of poetics? What can readers learn from reading such statements? Rather than answer directly, I would like to turn my attention to “Wild Form”1 by Ron Silliman, a brief essay (1200 words) currently available on-line at SUNY-Buffalo’s Electronic Poetry Center.

     

    Silliman’s title comes from a letter Jack Kerouac wrote to John Clellon Holmes, cited by Michael Davidson in The San Francisco Renaissance. A portion of this letter stands as the epigraph to Silliman’s essay:

     

    What I'm beginning to discover now is something beyond the novel and beyond the arbitrary confines of the story... into realms of revealed Picture... wild form, man, wild form. Wild form's the only form holds what I have to say--my mind is exploding to say something about every image and every memory.... I have an irrational lust to set down everything I know.

     

    Strangely, while Silliman does discuss, briefly, Kerouac’s phrase “revealed Picture,” he never again refers to the term “Wild Form.” Instead, shearing away the ragged word “Wild,” he focuses on “form as such,” beginning his account with the following statement:

     

    Form is of interest only to the extent that it empowers liberation.

     

    There are thus two openings to the essay–the epigraph from Kerouac (which gives a basis for the title), and Silliman’s own definition (which narrows the focus from “wild form” to “form as such”). In what follows, I want to address the connection between these two openings, in order to show how writers demonstrate as well as state their aims–in order to show, that is, the important role formal pattern and characteristic gestures play in the writing of poetics.

     

    Silliman’s first paragraph, a single sentence, is direct and clear:

     

    Form is of interest only to the extent that it empowers liberation.

     

    Later statements elaborate on this notion. “Form is social,” we read, and also, “The purpose of the poem… is to change the world.” To some extent, these ideas echo Kerouac, who expresses a desire to escape “the arbitrary confines of the story.” Kerouac’s interest in form, like Silliman’s, is liberation, “an irrational lust to set down everything I know.” For Kerouac, however, at least as quoted in the epigraph, liberation occurs through the practice of writing–is aesthetic liberation. Silliman, though he never says so directly, appears to mean political liberation. Playing on a famous phrase of Marx, he enjoins poetry “to change the world.”2 Focusing on form as a social rather than an aesthetic phenomenon, he defines the poet as an agent of social change–a definition made plainer in Silliman’s 1989 response to Jean Baudrillard, “What Do Cyborgs Want?”:

     

    The question confronting poetry is not what is the best poem, nor even the best poetry, but what are the social roles of the poem and how can these be raised to the level of consciousness so that the power relations upon which poetry itself is constituted become perceptible and vulnerable to challenge. (36)

     

    As a consequence of these intimations, the undefined connection between Silliman’s epigraph and first sentence partly resolves into an unspoken connection between two forms of liberation–one centered on writing as aesthetic object, the other on writing as socio-political act.

     

    Adapting Silliman’s later comment on Louis Zukofsky, we might say that he begins the essay by offering two distinct interpretations of the meaning of the word liberation–liberation as “suggestion of possibility” (art), and liberation as “horizon or limit” (politics). Of course, in adapting this distinction between “suggestion of possibility” and “horizon or limit” to the opening of Silliman’s essay, I’ve overturned the priority Silliman himself assigns these terms. For Silliman, “suggestion of possibility” is clearly preferable to “horizon or limit,” at least as regards the work of Louis Zukofsky. As we shall see, however, this overturning of received hierarchies of value is one of Silliman’s most characteristic rhetorical effects. Indeed, more than a mere effect, this process of transformation is itself a value–perhaps the one underlying value of Silliman’s work.

     

    For Kerouac, “form” is linked to discovery; the “irrational lust to set down everything I know” leads to a new and freer approach to writing. Only this new approach, Kerouac declares, will be able to “hold” what his “mind” is now “exploding to say.” The paradoxical combination of freedom (“exploding”) and boundedness (“holds”) results in a somewhat oxymoronic coinage,” wild form,” italicized by Kerouac as if to emphasize the improbability of the linkage. Improbable or not, however, the doubleness is essential. Assisted by “wild form,” the author would journey “beyond the arbitrary confines” of art into “realms of revealed Picture.” Writing (placed under the rubric of “Wild Form”) becomes both verb (journey) and noun (realm). Silliman’s definition likewise shows two aspects. For Silliman too, writing is both noun and verb, object and act. Placing writing under the rubric of “form as such,” Silliman notes:

     

    The term form is often misused. What people often mean by it is not form as such--structure that proves generative and inherent--but pattern, exoskeletal reiteration.

     

    Form is at once inherent “structure” (object), and a force that “proves generative” (act). But a shift has occurred; if Kerouac’s goal is discovery, Silliman’s is growth. The metaphor of realm and journey has given way to a subtle organicism. At the same time, the person who takes the journey, the discoverer, has disappeared, and has been replaced in a ghostly manner by the work itself. In other words, in Silliman’s poetics it is not the artist who “proves generative,” but the artist’s work. The artist exploding to speak has now become a form that speaks by exploding.

     

    Silliman’s first sentence asserts a causal link between “Form” and “liberation”: the one is said to further the aims of the other. How? This we aren’t told. Nor are we told if different kinds of form are required for different kinds of liberation. But then, the essay doesn’t speak of liberation in the plural; the distinction between political and aesthetic freedom–freedom in the world and freedom in writing–is at best implicit. Nonetheless, toward the end of his essay, in a passage of peculiar intricacy, Silliman does allude to this difference between aesthetics and politics– an allusion set off in quotation marks, disguised as a self-rebuke. Without actually addressing liberation, focusing instead on form (form which “empowers” liberation), he declares:

     

    The relation of the poem to the world is not simply accumulative, any more than it is reflective or expressive. The perfection of new forms as interventions to nature. The purpose of the poem, like that of any act, is to change the world.

     

    "The sort of person who could confuse the fibonacci number system with class struggle." Rather conjoin, to contrast, contest, and compare.

     

    The intricacy of the passage is partly due to its odd construction–five sentences incorporating an unattributed quote and a transition between two paragraphs. Who speaks the quoted sentence? Why is it cited? And how do the two paragraphs relate to one another? Does the space between them indicate a shift in focus? Or is this paragraph break a graphic iteration of the uncertain connection between “poem” and “world”?

     

    The fulcrum of the passage is Silliman’s assertion that “The purpose of the poem… is to change the world.” On either side of that assertion we are offered two opposing opinions, almost as if two see-saws were balanced on the opposite ends of a third. On one side of the fulcrum, addressing a famous dictum by William Carlos Williams, Silliman writes:

     

    WCW: "The perfection of new forms as additions to nature." This axiom, which I once felt close to in my own writing, seems too passive to me now. The relation of the poem to the world is not simply accumulative.... The perfection of new forms as interventions to nature.

     

    This is see-saw one, “accumulation” vs. “intervention.” On the other side of the fulcrum, describing see-saw two (“confuse” vs. “conjoin“), Silliman addresses the dictum of someone unknown:

     

    "The sort of person who could confuse the fibonacci number system with class struggle." Rather conjoin, to contrast, contest, and compare.

     

    The symmetry is especially important because it helps to establish a link between the two paragraphs; allows us to read the two paragraphs as a single utterance. Ignoring the symmetry, the two paragraphs are simply two separate chains of assertions; taken together, they constitute a form (Figure A).

     

                          Theory
                      (see-saw three)
                             .
                             .          "intervention"
                             .           (see-saw one,
                             .              upside)
                             .      ---
                             . ---
                         --- .
                    ---      .
    "accumulation"           .
     (see-saw one,           .
       downside)             .
                             .
                         (fulcrum)
                             .
                             .           "conjoin"
                             .            (see-saw two,
                             .               upside)
                             .       ---
                             . ---
                         --- .
                    ---      .
      "confuse"              .
    (see-saw two,            .
      downside)              .
                             .
                          Practice
                       (see-saw three)
    
                          Figure A

     

    I noted before that Kerouac’s metaphor of journey becomes, in Silliman’s poetics, a subtle organicism. On first reading, therefore, it might seem that Silliman is becoming inconsistent. Superficially, “accumulation” appears the more “generative” option; “intervention,” by contrast, recalls Kerouac’s movement “beyond… arbitrary confines.” But the inconsistency is only apparent. The original definition reads:

     

    The term form is often misused. What people often mean by it is not form as such--structure that proves generative and inherent--but pattern, exoskeletal reiteration.

     

    Accumulation–what William Carlos Williams calls “additions to nature”–appears “generative” but in fact is mere “reiteration”; is “exoskeletal,” not “inherent.” Somehow, then, the “inherent” form “proves generative,” not as “accumulation,” but as an “intervention.” On see-saw one, Silliman is counterposing two distinct notions of nature and form. There, on that side, he places “pattern,” “exoskeletal reiteration,” “accumulation”; here, on this side, “structure”–“inherent” and “generative”–and “intervention.” Describing the passage in this way, of course, as a kind of see-saw, we are responding to Silliman’s representations about nature and form as precisely that–representations, a form of debate in which argument as such gives way to contrasting chains of words. In this context, moreover, it is worth noting the political connotations of two of these words: “Intervention” suggests political intervention; “accumulation” suggests accumulation of capital.

     

    Let us now look at the other side of the fulcrum, the second see-saw:

     

    "The sort of person who could confuse the fibonacci number system with class struggle." Rather conjoin, to contrast, contest, and compare.

     

    At issue here is the connection between art and politics–between the fibonacci number system (used by Silliman to compose his long poem Tjanting) and class struggle. Silliman has discussed this matter in an interview with Tom Beckett, published in 1985 in The Difficulties:

     

    With Tjanting, it took me more than eight months to go from my first rough sketches of what a piece built on the concept of the Fibonacci number series might look like to the composition of a two-word first sentence….

     

    What factors enter into a decision to use a given procedure?

     

    ...Again to use Tjanting as case in point, the original impulse there was a question that had been recurring to me for at least 5 years: what would class struggle look like, viewed as a form? (35)

     

    As Silliman goes on to note, the Fibonacci number series is a sequence in which “each term is the sum of the two previous terms: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34,” and so on ad infinitum (35). Because Silliman proposed in Tjanting to write a poem shaped, dialectically, as a sequence of alternating, opposed paragraphs, “the most important aspect of the Fibonacci series turned out to be… the fact that it begins with two ones” (36).3 That quirk, along with the fact that the numbers increase asymmetrically, “not only permitted the parallel articulation of two sequences of paragraphs, but also determined that their development would be uneven, punning back to the general theory of class struggle” (36). In Tjanting, the number of sentences in each paragraph matches in sequence the numbers of the Fibonacci series; beginning with two one-sentence paragraphs (“Not this” and “What then?”), the poem proceeds through to two final paragraphs of 2,584 and 4,181 sentences each. The sense of alternation and opposition is maintained by a mathematically plotted repetition of sentences–the repetitions “rewritten so as to reveal their constructedness, their artificiality as elements of meaning, their otherness” (36). As the poem proceeds and the paragraphs grow longer, the repeated sentences all but disappear, ghostly echoes of history giving circumspect coherence to a world of rapidly exploding language.

     

    According to Silliman’s comments in his Difficulties interview, the relationship between art and politics in Tjanting is principally a matter of analogy–or more accurately, representation. The poem (Tjanting) is an attempt to show what one particular aesthetic form (the Fibonacci number series) “might look like” as text; the aesthetic form is in turn an attempt to show what one particular political content (class struggle) “would… look like, viewed as a form.” The phrase “look like” is important: we are dealing here with analogies, with mimetological constructs. Whether one really does resemble the other is of secondary importance. The emphasis, fundamentally, is on the general schematic correlation Silliman proposes to explore between aesthetic form and political content. The goal of the project, its “original impulse,” is speculative: to put into play one particular representation of the relationship between art and politics. The resulting work (Tjanting) may well fail to bear out the assumptions underlying the proposed schema. This doesn’t mean, however, that the underlying “impulse” is faulty. Nor does it mean, necessarily, that the work itself is without interest. The real question, therefore, is not the reliability of the specific representation (“fibonacci” as “class struggle”) but the usefulness of the general correlation proposed between art and politics. In “Wild Form,” the quoted remark (“‘The sort of person who could confuse…’”) is focused on the specific mode of representation enacted in Tjanting, but Silliman is quick to appreciate the applicability of this rebuke to his schema’s underlying assumptions. Indeed, while the humor of the rebuke lies in its implausibility (no one would ever confuse “fibonacci” and “class struggle”), the sting derives from a less literal reading: that Silliman is confused about the difference between aesthetics and politics; that the poem Tjanting papers-over a nonrelation between political content and aesthetic form. Silliman’s inclusion of the rebuke–and his rejoinder–is therefore an important clue to his views on the connection between the two kinds of liberation (aesthetic, political) alluded to in his essay’s opening. In a sense, the see-saw between “confuse” and “conflate” represents in miniature a kind of politico-aesthetic disputation. Its subject: the relation or nonrelation between the freedom of writing and the writing of freedom.

     

    Silliman’s rejoinder takes the form of a substitution. “Confuse” becomes “conjoin,” and then (in a chain of substitutions) “contrast,” “contest,” and “compare.” Taking this “form,” the rejoinder illustrates one of Silliman’s central ideas: that the poem is an “act” and that the poem’s goal is “change.” Elaborating on this notion, I would say that the poem, for Silliman, being principally an act, is only secondarily a statement. This is Silliman’s most important difference from Kerouac, who describes himself to John Clellon Holmes as “exploding to say something,” “to set down everything I know.” Charged with the crime of confusion, Silliman’s response is better described as a counter-action than a counter-statement. True to the poem’s purpose as act, he changes the word.

     

    Such a response may not satisfy the one who makes the rebuke (the original charge, after all, was Silliman’s ostensibly illegitimate substitution of “fibonacci” for “class struggle”); the response is nonetheless a consistent extension of Silliman’s form (a chain of possible substitutions entered into an ever-widening context) from the realm of art into the world contextualizing art. Like “Wild Form” as a whole, the rejoinder is a moment of polemic. For despite the welter of definitions and asides, Silliman’s “Wild Form” is less an accumulation of positions than an intervention in the world where positions accumulate.

     

    Earlier in “Wild Form,” having discussed the importance of context, form’s “situational specificity,” Silliman makes brief reference to another literary intervention, another moment of polemic:

     

    Here we discover in part the confusion that caused the first battle of the San Francisco poetry wars to become so intense: the meaning of Robert Duncan’s “problem” with Barrett Watten’s schematic representation of Zukofsky’s form differed from that of David Levi Strauss….

     

    But there have always been two possible readings of Zukofsky--Zukofsky as suggestion of possibility and Zukofsky as horizon or limit.

     

    Despite the importance Silliman ascribes to this moment in contemporary literary history–he calls it the first battle of a war–he offers no narrative account of what transpired and no summation of the positions taken by the various combatants. For the moment, therefore, let us look at this passage solely as a formal pattern, a structural model for discussing poetry’s intervention in the world. Viewed solely as a model, the similarity of this structure to the pattern of Silliman’s discussion of Tjanting becomes evident. As before, we see a set of see-saws (“Duncan” and “Strauss” vs. “Watten,” “suggestion of possibility” vs. “horizon or limit”) set into motion on the opposite ends of another fulcrum. Again, the cue is confusion–the word Silliman cites in rebuke to himself in the passage concerning fibonacci and class struggle. There, the confusion is due, ostensibly, to Silliman’s innovative conception of form–a conception which creatively seeks to link aesthetic form and political content. In the passage concerning “the first battle of the San Francisco Poetry Wars,” the confusion also has something to do with form–more specifically, the representation of form, “Barrett Watten’s schematic representation of Zukofsky’s form,” a representation problematic for two different poets for two different reasons. (The earlier confusion also has to do with representation–Silliman’s use of fibonacci to represent class struggle.) In the conflict between Duncan/Strauss and Watten we therefore discover a polemic analogous to that between Silliman and the unnamed critic who faults Tjanting‘s discontinuous leap from art into politics.

     

    What to make of this symmetrical set of references to confusion? And what of the parallel Silliman draws between the two controversial notions of form (Silliman’s and Watten’s)? A closer look at the second passage as a whole only amplifies the mystery:

     

    The meaning of any second generation is always the reification of the past, even if only to stabilize a sense of the present in order to render it less threatening and chaotic.

     

    Here we discover in part the confusion that caused the first battle of the San Francisco poetry wars to become so intense: the meaning of Robert Duncan’s “problem” with Barrett Watten’s schematic representation of Zukofsky’s form differed from that of David Levi Strauss. While both Duncan and Levi Strauss were committed to a fundamentalist reduction of Zukofsky’s work, their relationship to the sacred text was substantially different.

     

    But there have always been two possible readings of Zukofsky--Zukofsky as suggestion of possibility and Zukofsky as horizon or limit.

     

    We begin with an assertion about the “meaning of any second generation.” Since Silliman’s definition of form privileges the “generative,” we might expect “second generation” to stand as proof of success. But success, apparently, leads ineluctably to stabilization, to “reification” (a kind of “exoskeletal reiteration”), to frightened retreat. The “meaning” of success is “always” failure. In this dialectical formulation “we discover,” writes Silliman, “the confusion that caused the… poetry wars to become so intense.” But do we? What has the difference between Robert Duncan and David Levi Strauss got to do with the “meaning” of each’s “‘problem’” with Barrett Watten? And what has this “‘problem’” to do with the “two possible readings of Zukofsky”? More to the point, where exactly does the confusion lie? Whose confusion? About what?

     

    Both Duncan and Strauss, writes Silliman, “were committed to a fundamentalist reduction of Zukofsky’s work,” yet “their relationship to the sacred text was substantially different.” Since Silliman describes both poets (Duncan and Strauss) as readers of Zukofsky, it’s difficult to see how their “substantially different” forms of reading bear out the earlier claim about the difference between first and second generation. With regard to Zukofsky, wouldn’t both poets be “second” generation? Wouldn’t Watten too? (Further, is “reification” the same thing as “fundamentalist reduction”? What about Watten’s “schematic representation”?) Complicating our reading of this passage is Silliman’s decision not to make explicit his generational distinctions, or even his understanding of the word “generation.” Presumably, he means to say that Zukofsky (b. 1904), Duncan (b. 1919), and Watten (b. 1948) are all equally innovators, and thus all equally members of a “first” generation; Strauss (b. 1954) would consequently stand as the lone example of “second.” Stated in this manner, it becomes clear that Silliman’s use of the word “generation” is itself a reification; in the end, what substantiates his distinction between “first” and “second” is not an empirical relation (like that between older and younger poet, originator and elaborator, master and apprentice), but rather, the nature of a poet’s accommodation to a “threatening and chaotic” present. Generation as such is irrelevant. The latecomers are those whose attunement to the present falls under the heading of “reification of the past”–those whose strategy of intervention takes the form of stabilization.

     

    “To reify” means, among other things, to render abstractions in concrete terms–a process of transformation which inevitably tends toward distortion. To be sure, the result of this process isn’t simply distortion; nor is this distortion an entirely useless phenomenon. As Silliman’s own attempt to render “class struggle” as “fibonacci” indicates, the process of reification–even when ending in “confusion”–often leads to the discovery of entirely new abstractions. The problem, apparently, with “reification of the past” is not so much the distortion which results from rendering abstract concepts concrete as the fact that this process is focused on the past. Of course, as Silliman himself notes, this “reification of the past” is itself a form of focus on the present–an attempt “to stabilize a sense of the present in order to render it less threatening and chaotic.” Viewed from this perspective, the difference between “first” and “second” generation–no longer an empirical designation–is not even a matter of whether or not a given poet remains fixed on the past or present. In the end, the principal basis for assigning a poet to one generation or another is the value ascribed to that fixity by the one who does the assigning. By declaring a poet engaged in “reification of the past”–even if this “reification” is a strategy of relation to the present–Silliman defines the poet, ipso facto, as the member of a “second” generation. Presumably, by declaring this same poet attuned to the present–even if this attunement remains a strategy of relation to the past–Silliman would be able to raise him or her to the status of “first.” The difficulty we have getting a handle on this definition may be partly due to a slight misstatement in Silliman’s original formulation:

     

    The meaning of any second generation is always the reification of the past, even if only to stabilize a sense of the present in order to render it less threatening and chaotic.

     

    The qualification “even if” suggests that stabilization is a reasonable basis for reification–a form of self-preservation against threat and chaos–but reading this passage within the context of “Wild Form” as a whole, it’s clear that this reasonable desire for stability is precisely the problem. In Kerouac’s terms, stabilization of the present means settling for “the arbitrary confines of the story” rather than risking a journey through threat and chaos into “realms of revealed Picture.” For Silliman, the intelligibility of “story” is decidedly “second”; “first” comes apparent “confusion,” “threatening and chaotic,” what Kerouac calls “wild.”4

     

    According to Silliman, both Duncan and Strauss, despite their shared “‘problem’” with Watten’s “schematic representation of Zukofsky’s form,” each maintained a “substantially different” relation to “the sacred text.” Further, he tells us that this difference helps to explain why “the first battle of the San Francisco poetry wars” became “so intense.” The suggestion is that the war was fought between Duncan and Strauss over Watten’s Zukofsky, but this is not the case. What Silliman calls “the first battle” is in fact a compression of two separate conflicts: the earlier was instigated by Duncan and waged against Watten over Zukofsky (1978); the later was begun by Strauss and waged by Watten’s and Duncan’s friends over a recapitulation of the Duncan/Watten episode of 1978 (1984).5 Collapsing these two occasions into one, the serial nature of Duncan’s and Strauss’s problems with Watten falls away. That is, in Silliman’s account the actual object of aggression (“Barrett Watten’s schematic representation of Zukofsky’s form”) drops from the picture, replaced by the difference between Duncan and Strauss.

     

    The nature of this substantial difference between Duncan and Strauss remains unclear. Unclear also is the importance of this difference for Silliman’s essay as a whole. Here again is the relevant passage:

     

    [T]he meaning of Robert Duncan’s “problem” with Barrett Watten… differed from that of David Levi Strauss. While both Duncan and Levi Strauss were committed to a fundamentalist reduction of Zukofsky’s work, their relationship to the sacred text was substantially different.

     

    But there have always been two possible readings of Zukofsky--Zukofsky as suggestion of possibility and Zukofsky as horizon or limit.

     

    Reading these lines in ignorance of the so-called “first battle of the San Francisco poetry wars,” one might easily assume that the “two possible readings of Zukofsky” Silliman has in mind are Duncan’s and Strauss’s. Knowing some of the history involved makes it likely, of course, that Silliman associates Watten (who wrote the introduction to Tjanting) with the first type of reading (“Zukofsky as suggestion of possibility”), and Duncan and Strauss (each “committed to a fundamentalist reduction”) with the second (“Zukofsky as horizon or limit”).6 Why Watten’s “schematic representation” should correspond to “possibility” nonetheless remains unclear–unclear because, as noted above, Silliman never develops a characterization of Watten’s reading; Watten has fallen away, as has the promise of explaining the “intensity” of the war which erupted around his reading. The problem, apparently, is the inapplicability of Silliman’s binary constructions (of which there are two: the first involving generation, the second involving styles of reading) to his three-fold example, his three readers of Zukofsky (Duncan, Watten, and Strauss).

     

    Silliman proposes in this passage to explain why a battle became “intense.” He proposes also to help us discover an important confusion. Unfortunately, if we follow Silliman through in these two proposals, we discover a different sort of confusion altogether–one that is strangely reminiscent of the rebuke Silliman cites with regard to Tjanting, the claim that he has confused “fibonacci” and “class struggle.” In both instances, Silliman conflates two incommensurate terms of debate. In the case of “fibonacci” and “class struggle,” the terms are incommensurate because they derive from the supposedly discrete worlds of art and politics. Here, in the case of “the first battle of the San Francisco poetry wars,” the incommensurability between the two parts of the argument (reading, generation) derives instead from a slippage, a shift in Silliman’s attention from the unexplained “problem” between Duncan/Strauss and Watten, to the unexplained difference between Duncan and Strauss. More accurately, of course, the former case discusses a slippage while the latter enacts one; the analogy, qua analogy, nonetheless holds. In the case of “the first battle of the San Francisco poetry wars,” Silliman’s argument moves (Figure B) in a manner structurally analogous to that of the passage where he discusses “fibonacci” and “class struggle”–as a set of see-saws, each balanced on the opposite ends of yet another see-saw. (If the third see-saw were to then become the first see-saw in a new set, the structure would assume the classic Marxist form of historical progress.) The chief difference between the two cases lies in the nature of the underlying relation, the third see-saw. In Figure A, this third see-saw marks out a relationship between theory (see-saw one) and practice (see-saw two). In Figure B, the purpose of the third see-saw remains unintelligible. Earlier, in commenting on the unattributed critique of Tjanting, I noted that Silliman’s general insight about the correlation of aesthetic form and political content retains intellectual force quite apart from the success or failure of any specific text. Another way of putting this would be to say that the architectural plan remains sound even if the building erected on that plan’s basis fails to meet code. The two passages sketched in Figures A and B bear this contention out, if indirectly, by utilizing the same formal pattern in successful and unsuccessful manners, respectively.7

     

                              ?
                       (see-saw three)
                              .
                              .              Watten
                              .           (see-saw one,
                              .              upside)
                              .      ---
                              . ---
                          --- .
                     ---      .
    Duncan/Strauss            .
     (see-saw one,            .
       downside)              .
                              .
                              .
                          (fulcrum)
                              .
                              .               Duncan
                              .            (see-saw two,
                              .               upside)
                              .       ---
                              . ---
                          --- .
                      ---     .
        Strauss               .
     (see-saw two,            .
       downside)              .
                              .
                       (see-saw three)
                              ?
    
                           Figure B

     

    Let us now return to the unexplained matter of Silliman’s double opening, the discontinuity between Silliman’s epigraph (from Kerouac) and his first lines (which replace Kerouac’s definition of form with Silliman’s own). The oblique oddness of this opening resolves into two questions: On one hand, why cite Kerouac if Kerouac’s definition of form is faulty? On the other hand, why alter the definition if Kerouac’s intuitions remain fundamentally correct? The answer to this pair of questions lies in the underlying meaning of Silliman’s characteristic gesture–a transformation of meaning enacted through conscious and unconscious slippage, through the overturning of received hierarchies of value, through the construction of chains of substitution. To accept Kerouac’s definition of “Wild Form” without alteration would be tantamount to a self-suppression of this gesture–would mean, in Kerouac’s own terms, remaining stuck in “the arbitrary confines of the story” instead of risking the journey “into realms of revealed Picture.” In order for Silliman’s appreciation of Kerouac to remain true to the source, to be a journey, he must follow his own insights beyond the now “arbitrary confines” of Kerouac’s discovery, “Wild Form.” This Silliman does by immediately shifting the focus from aesthetics to politics, from the freedom of writing to the writing of freedom. At the same time, following the characteristic path of his own thought, Silliman subjects his own insights to a process of transformation in which the ultimate meaning of his statement remains in doubt.

     

    Silliman’s characteristic gesture is to avoid the risk of stabilizing his own position by setting in motion a see-saw of contrasting stances (his own and another’s) and then abandoning the see-saw in toto for a second see-saw whose relation to the first remains largely unspoken. For this reason, however intelligible Silliman’s writing may be sentence by sentence, the text as a whole aspires to a state beyond intelligibility, a paratactic state of signification in which the relations between sentences bear much of the burden of meaning. Is Silliman successful in this aspiration? Probably not. The particular positions adopted along the way–on see-saw one and see-saw two–tend to linger in memory, resisting the text’s overall resistance to stabilization, falling prey, at last, to the arbitrary confines of intelligibility. Sometimes, too, parataxis fails to lend coherence and the text falls prey to mere confusion. Still, the effort involved is remarkable, and retains intellectual force on a global scale despite the local failure of this or that attempt at transformation.

     

    I began this essay by asking why poets write statements of poetics. An answer particular to Silliman might begin by asserting that the very phrase “Statement of Poetics” embodies a contradiction, that statements offer refuge from the risk of confusion, while poetics offer refuge from the risk of intelligibility. Yoking the two aims together suggests something like a desire to confront–and so transcend–the contradiction outright. Silliman’s succinct articulation of this desire in Tjanting–the twin, repeated sentences “Not this. What then?”–provides the structural model for this movement of transcendence:

     

    Not this.

     

    What then?

     

    I started over & over. Not this.

     

    Last week I wrote “the muscles in my palm so sore from halving the rump roast I cld barely grip the pen.” What then? This morning my lip is blisterd.

     

    Of about to within which. Again & again I began. The gray light of day fills the yellow room in a way wch is somber. Not this. Hot grease had spilld on the stove top.

     

    Nor that either. Last week I wrote “the muscle at thumb’s root so taut from carving that beef I thought it wld cramp.” Not so. What then? Wld I begin? This morning my lip is tender, disfigurd. I sat in an old chair out behind the anise. I cld have gone about this some other way.

     

    Wld it be different with a different pen? Of about to within which what. Poppies grew out of the pile of old broken-up cement. I began again & again. These clouds are not apt to burn off. The yellow room has a sober hue. Each sentence accounts for its place. Not this. Old chairs in the back yard rotting from winter. Grease on the stove top sizzled & spat. It's the same, only different. Ammonia's odor hangs in the air. Not not this. (11-12)

     

    In these first seven paragraphs of Tjanting (corresponding to the 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 and 13 of the Fibonacci series), Silliman’s oblique observations and repetitions seem to share very little, both formally and in their content, with the pointed pronouncements of “Wild Form.” Note, however, the conjunction of writing and meat-cutting, a conjunction which proposes the “carving” of a “beef” (i.e., polemic) as Silliman’s model for the composition of poetry. Note too the Duncan-like contractions of “blisterd,” “spilld” and “disfigurd,” a poetic allusion which highlights just the sort of generational debt Silliman explores more prosaically in “Wild Form.” “It’s the same, only different.” Like the rewritten sentences of Tjanting–mathematically plotted repetitions aspiring in their totality to a condition beyond that of mere form: aspiring, that is, to a condition of “class struggle”–so too the underlying see-saw structure of “Wild Form,” a characteristic formal pattern which reveals more vividly than Silliman’s direct statements the transcendent aspirations animating his work as a whole.

     

    A text that moves forward–in the manner of Silliman’s “Not this. What then?”–with an eye toward escaping its own “arbitrary confines” is like a see-saw on a see-saw, always in motion, unable to keep balance except by setting more see-saws in motion on the further ends of newly discovered fulcrums. Caught between confusion and intelligibility, such a text will speak most authoritatively–in Silliman’s terms, “empower liberation” most directly–in its underlying formal patterns. To read such a text will therefore require, first and foremost, a careful attending to these formal patterns, a decipherment of their meaning and a weighing of their efficacy. This is what Silliman has in mind when he notes that the structure of his work, however obscure, is not “hidden,” but rather “available through the process of reading the text.” Visual and musical patterns such as those which structure the sonnet are discernible to the eye and ear; not so the numerically plotted repetitions of Tjanting, and not so the triple see-saw form of “Wild Form.” The discovery of Tjanting‘s form and the form of “Wild Form” is only possible through a reading of the text. Further, to read those texts without attending to their underlying structures would be to miss the point entirely. As Silliman himself notes at the end of the essay “Of Theory, to Practice”:

     

    Every mode of poem is the manifestation of some set of assumptions. It's no more foolish to be conscious of them--and their implications extending into the daily life of the real world--than it is to actually have some idea how to drive before getting behind the wheel of a car. (The New Sentence 62)

     

    In order to understand what the poet is driving at, one needs to know what and how he or she is driving–an appropriately automotive metaphor given the genealogy of Silliman’s thinking in the work of Kerouac.

     

    Notes

     

    1. All quotations lacking specific page numbers refer to this electronic text.

     

    2. See, e.g., the last of Marx’s “Theses on Feuerbach”: “The philosophers have only interpreted the world, in various ways; the point, however, is to change it” (145).

     

    3. I say that the poem is shaped dialectically, but insofar as Tjanting‘s interchange of ideas occurs formally and not as a mode of argumentation, it is far from certain whether the resulting work is itself dialectical. Borrowing a motif from deconstruction, it may be more accurate to describe Silliman’s poetic adaptations of Marxist-Hegelian structures as a “quasi-dialectic.” (See, e.g., Geoffrey Bennington’s comments on “the prefix ‘quasi-‘ or the adverb ‘quasiment’” in Jacques Derrida [268].) Silliman himself has spoken of poetic structure as a matter of “syllogistic flow,” but here too there is a lingering analogical reference to class struggle (and thus dialectical materialism) as Silliman’s notion of “syllogistic movement” is based on the work of Ferruccio Rossi-Landi, whose “Linguistics and Economics argues that language-use arises from the need to divide labor in the community, and that the elaboration of language-systems and of labor production, up to and including all social production, follow parallel paths” (The New Sentence, 178, 90, 78). My reliance in the present essay on the metaphorical term “see-saw” is thus partly a consequence of my dissatisfaction with both “dialectics” and “syllogism” as descriptions of the logic underlying Silliman’s critical and poetic writings.

     

    4. This theoretical privileging of confusion over intelligibility is hinted at in “The Chinese Notebooks,” a Wittgensteinian investigation from the 1970s where Silliman asks, in entry no. 123, “What is the creative role of confusion in any work?” (The Age of Huts 55). “Wild Form” suggests an answer to this question, namely, that confusion is a calculated risk essential to the work’s function as a journey of discovery beyond the so-called “arbitrary confines” of any given set of ideas or ideology.

     

    5. After a brief respite, a second “battle” erupted in 1985. Watten was once again the focus of antagonism, but this time the instigator was Tom Clark. For an account of the 1984 events, see De Villo Sloan, “‘Crude Mechanical Access’ or ‘Crude Personism’: A Chronicle of One San Francisco Bay Area Poetry War.” Nils Ya analyzes the 1978 confrontation in I Am a Child: Poetry after Bruce Andrews and Robert Duncan.

     

    6. See, e.g., “Negative Solidarity: Revisionism and ‘New American’ Poetics,” where Silliman speaks of the “vociferous and hostile… reaction” to Language Poetry by writers “associated within or relatively close to the older New American project” (171). In a footnote, he specifically names Duncan and Strauss, including them in a list of critics “who commented upon ‘language poetry’ in terms that echo Norman Podhoretz’ dismissal of the ‘Know-Nothing Bohemians’” (176 n. 10). For a brief response, see David Levi Strauss, “A Note on Us & Them.”

     

    7. I say “successful” and “unsuccessful,” but insofar as Silliman, at strategic moments, privileges confusion over intelligibility, the valuations I apply to these two instances of argumentation might well be reversed. In this respect, entry number 120 in “The Chinese Notebooks” provides a useful reminder of the central issue at stake in my reading of “Wild Form”: “Only esthetic consistency constitutes content…. Applied to writing one arrives at the possibility of a ‘meaningful’ poetry as the sum of ‘meaningless’ poems” (The Age of Huts 55).

    Works Cited

     

    • Bennington, Geoffrey and Jacques Derrida. Jacques Derrida. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993.
    • Davidson, Michael. The San Francisco Renaissance: Poetics and Community at Mid-Century. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1989.
    • Marx, Karl. “Theses on Feuerbach.” The Marx-Engels Reader. Ed. Robert C. Tucker. New York: W.W. Norton, 1978.
    • Silliman, Ron. The Age of Huts. New York: Roof Books, 1986.
    • —. “Interview” [with Tom Beckett]. The Difficulties 2:2 (1985): 34-46.
    • —. “Negative Solidarity: Revisionism and ‘New American’ Poetics.” Sulfur 22 (Spring 1988): 169-76.
    • —. The New Sentence. New York: Roof Books, 1987.
    • —. Tjanting. Berkeley: The Figures, 1981.
    • —. “What Do Cyborgs Want? (Paris, Suburb of the Twentieth Century).” Jean Baudrillard: The Disappearance of Art and Politics. Ed. William Stearns and William Chaloupka. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1992.
    • —. “Wild Form.” Electronic Poetry Center. http://wings.buffalo.edu/epc/authors/silliman/wildform.
    • Sloan, De Villo. “‘Crude Mechanical Access’ or ‘Crude Personism’: A Chronicle of One San Francisco Bay Area Poetry War.” Sagetrieb 4:2-3 (Fall-Winter 1985): 241- 54.
    • Strauss, David Levi. “A Note on Us & Them.” Temblor 9 (1989): 121.
    • Ya, Nils. “I Am a Child.” I Am a Child: Poetry after Bruce Andrews and Robert Duncan. Ed. William R. Howe and Benjamin Friedlander. Buffalo: Tailspin Press, 1994. 43-57.

     

  • Cybernetymology and ~ethics

    Alec McHoul

    Media Communication and Culture
    Murdoch University
    mchoul@central.murdoch.edu.au

    “Norbert’s Crossing”
    ©1997, Alec McHoul

     

    It may very well be a good thing for humanity to have the machine remove from it the need of menial and disagreeable tasks. I do not know.

     

    –Norbert Wiener, 1947 (27)

    Steed: I’m playing it as a journalist, getting gen on “automation in modern society,” “will the machine supplant man?”–or woman, for that matter.

     

    Peel: And will it?

     

    Steed: Not if I have anything to do with it.

     

    –“The Cybernauts,” 1965

    And, finally, whether it has essential limits or not, the entire field covered by the cybernetic program will be the field of writing. If the theory of cybernetics is by itself to oust all metaphysical concepts–including the concepts of the soul, of life, of value, of choice, of memory–which until recently served to separate the machine from man, it must conserve the notion of writing, trace, grammë or grapheme, until its own historico-metaphysical character is also exposed.

     

    –Jacques Derrida, 1967 (9)

    “You me.” The stranger used Cobb’s own tight little smile on him. “I’m a mechanical copy of your body.”

     

    The face seemed right and there was even the scar from the heart transplant. The only difference between them was how alert and healthy the copy looked. Call him Cobb Anderson2. Cobb2 didn’t drink. Cobb envied him. He hadn’t had a completely sober day since he had the operation and left his wife.

     

    --Rudy Rucker, 1982 (5)1

     

    They are all more or less agreed then–all, perhaps, except Wiener, and he should know. The cyber (or more correctly, as we shall see, the kybern) is the figure that, rightly or wrongly, has come to stand for the end of the humanistic ideal of man. The only disagreement is over whether this figure is good (Rucker) or bad (Steed) or, indeed, whether such a judgment need be made at all (Derrida). The meaning of the cyber appears secure, then; its ethics uncertain. Is it possible that these are connected; that the uncertain ethics stems from a false security about the meaning of the term? If so, this can open on to two related questions about the term and its values: cybern~etymology and cybern~ethics.

     

    In this essay, then, I will be attempting to follow on from the grounds established in an earlier paper in Postmodern Culture, “Cyberbeing and ~space,”2 and so to mobilise a Heideggerian method (an etymology) in order to begin to open up an altered understanding of the technological domain of the cyber and, in particular, its ethics. As Heidegger shows throughout his work, early and late, it is only our modern (that is, Cartesian and post-Cartesian) assumption that language is a mere representation of beings (for example of “objects,” “nature,” or “culture”) that holds us back from seeing how the very language we speak and write is the dwelling place of our fundamental connection to Being as such. In language, for Heidegger, the fundamental event of appropriation (Ereignis), the letting-belong-together of man and Being, occurs. Language, in this view, is not the world in code, mediating “objects” to man-as-“subject,” but the house of Being wherein man also dwells as the only possible guardian of Being.3 If Heidegger’s counter-representationalist argument is correct (and this is something I have examined in more detail elsewhere),4 then taking an etymological path is no merely arcane or technical (for example, semantic, linguistic or lexicographical) measure. Still less is it a game with words. Instead, it should be a journey of thinking towards what most concerns us, as Heidegger says, “in its essence.”

     

    But to say that this present investigation tries to open upon the cyber “in its essence” does not entail an essentialism in the crude sense. Rather, and the importance of this will become clearer as we proceed, Heidegger’s term for “essence,” das Wesen, is meant to emphasize “the verbal sense of wesen as ‘governing’ or ‘effecting,’ while retaining the fundamental reference to ‘presencing’”.5 Accordingly, a counter-representational attention to the details of cyber-language (to how, for example, the cyber is fundamentally implicated in the very idea of governing just mentioned by Heidegger and his English editor) ought to take us towards the Wesen (or, as I prefer to say, after Deleuze and Spinoza, the ethos) of all things cybernetic. And it ought to do so in a way (or via a way or path) that steers us around the currently fraught questions of the mere morality of the cyber. Wherever we look today, that is, whether in popular or in more scholarly accounts of cybernetics, it is a rare text that does not (as our initial epigrams indicate) raise the issue of whether the field and the objects it contains are Good or Evil for something called “humanity.” This, as Heidegger would say, can only reduce an otherwise important field of inquiry to “idle chatter.” In its place (or more strictly, in a quite different place altogether) I want at least to begin to open–and this is my only goal in this essay–the possibility of a glimpse into the ethos of the cyber in strictly non-moral terms.

     

    In such Heideggerian-Nietzschean terms, as we will see, the power of the cyber is much more fundamental than just a question of the morality of a few quite recent technological changes (such as computers and robots); it has to do with the very question of our ethos, today, as Dasein. As Joan Stambaugh realised as early as 1969, “Technology isn’t just something man has acquired as an accessory. Right now it is what he is” (13). It is the ethos of this “is” that this essay tries, albeit sketchily, to realise.

     

    Making~beings

     

    The main point of this investigation is, then, to find an ethics for the cyber. Essentially, it must be an ethics for something only very slightly other than–perhaps more than, perhaps less than–the human: an ethics for some of the things that we have given ourselves over to–to a slight extent and with particular relevance to our current historical moment. But still, the “giving over,” no matter how slight, is crucial. That is, for a long time, we, as a particular kind of being, as Dasein, were equipmental; we were the ones who manipulated equipment.6 And we made the world precisely through our manipulations of equipment, perhaps so much so that we subsequently mistook our makings for entities beyond our grasp. That has certainly been our predominant attitude towards history: the array of things outside us that appear to determine our being but which, in fact, are our makings.

     

    And that, I venture, is a bad mistake. It’s a mistake because it rethinks our own artefacts as natural. And it’s bad because it overly delimits our future capacity for making as techne. It sometimes even makes the giving-over of our makings seem almost naturally bad. But, in fact, that giving over might be revalued as something we have done all along, from the most ancient of times. Even more to the point, the giving over or deferral may have been our strength in the first place. That is, in being equipmental, we deferred to things outside and beyond us: the fishing hook, the steam turbine, the computer. This giving-controlling, this making-and-being-made-by, may then be critical to the very constitution of Dasein itself.

     

    As the central condition of our being, we are the only things that can make the things that also make us. We are, always already, feedback-like in this respect. But then we mistakenly bring the things we have made (art, economies, technologies, and so on) into such a peculiar position that they can take on the character of “objectess” or “otherness.” In Marxist terms, we are those who essentially and utterly “alienate” ourselves from what we make. In deferring to our products we differ from them.

     

    In the Marxist tradition, this looks like a mistake in history (the history of capitalism), such that we have to correct the error and either forge or return to some purer state in which our differences from what we make are utterly deleted. But instead of this compelling (if unsatisfiable) thought, we may have to say that this is what beings of our ontological kind have always done, without fail: bring things forth that, on their achievement of “objective” status, appear, compellingly, to control us, to govern us, to steer us, to replace our “souls,” or whatever it is we hold most dear as the mythical foundations of our being. But we are in fact the ones who bring about these myths, the very gods and devils we would live without, if only we lived more “authentically.” So if we are actually constituted such that our difference from what we make (art, myth, culture, history, and the rest) cannot be deleted or bypassed, such that there is no possibility of “purely human” or “pre-technological” production, then another story altogether has to be told. A recent chapter in this story concerns all things cyber.

     

    The crucial question of the cyber is this: why is it that we tug ourselves back to an authenticity that predates (so the many stories go) our giving over (our deferral) to our own creations when, in fact, what makes us “authentic” (if anything does, and if the word “authentic” is to have any meaning) is precisely our utterly unique capacity to give over, to differ and defer?7 If this is the case, then the cyber-instance of giving-making and making-giving (such that there is no real priority between these) is just one instance of what it is we are and do–once we realise that what we are and what we do (with equipment) are not distinguishable in any compelling way.

     

    Cyber-entities are, in this basic sense, no different from primitive or industrial equipments. But the way they operate in relation to us (and this is the only way they can operate) also has its own distinct inflexion. That inflexion, however, is not necessarily new. Its roots are deep and have to do with much earlier forms of the making of technologies of control, and the giving over of those same technologies to what the technologies themselves create.

     

    Imagine this: a fishing hook is designed to catch a known fish on a particular stretch of coastline. It’s designed to fit under a particular lip formation, to pull a particular weight, and so on. After being used in this way for a while, it also starts to bring in a different species, a species unknown to the hook’s designers. Is that new kind of fish an aberration, a monster? Or is it a boon? We can never say in advance. All we know is that the hook-makers built differently than they knew–neither better nor worse, until the fuller story unfolds.

     

    Our current technological metaphor for this same, and enduring, process is the cyber. We could have taken many word formations to capture this–but it turns out that some events around 1947 or 1948 led “cyber” to become the predominant term.8 That was itself an accident, as our four epigrams show: an effect of a technology of words working back into our ways of everyday life, and so producing more than was first bargained for. Still, we are stuck, more or less, with that term, the “cyber.” What is this new metaphor?

     

    Cybern~et~ics

     

    The current variety of words that begin with “cyber-” derive from the Greek word kybernetes, a steersman. In its turn, this noun is formed from the verb kybernao, to steer. Latin takes up the Greek kybernetes quite straightforwardly as gubernator, again a steersman–and hence the rare or archaic use of “gubernator” in English (meaning a governor) and its variants, “gubernation” and “gubernatorial,” a term that can still occasionally be heard in American English today.

     

    This is related to a metaphorical sense in which the original Greek word itself could refer to a governor (of a city, for example). He is the one who, as it were, steers the city, takes it along its path. This tells us something about both cybernetics and governance. Cybernetics is always imbued with a sense of command, making things happen from a control-point at a distance, in the domain of otherness. It’s about the giving over of control to an entity for which (or whom) that control function is its primary purpose. And governance is always, and equally, imbricated in remoteness and the machinic. All governance is, by this definition, at a distance. If it were not, it would simply rejoin the action that it governed, making it indistinguishable from what is governed. The two come together in that unique space where distance and control, the human-complex and the machine-simplex, come into new configurations. The space of the cyber is both the most enabling and exciting region of conditions (in terms of human technological development) and the most restricting and reduplicative region (in terms of the almost eternal ends of the machine). The distinction depends on a very old question perhaps: who pays the ferryman? And, in passing perhaps, we should also note that in addition to this strict etymology and its spawn, there is also a more obscure and distant tangent to explore: for there is the slightly related Latin word gubernaculum, used in medical and biological English to mean the cord that holds the testicles together in the scrotum.

     

    So “cybernet-ic” can refer to anything that is steersman-like. But, at the same time, it carries with it a double and possibly contradictory sense of both governing and being governed. And it may have barely discernible connotations of the reproductive organs. The ethics of the cyber therefore conflates a number of basic questions: Is the steersman governor or governed? Is it positively (re)productive or negatively demonic? Or else, is it in command or commanded? Is the governor self-appointed or elected? Does it self-reproduce utterly, or is even its self-reproductive capacity ultimately a product of what produces it?

     

    Returning to etymology for now, though, the term “cyber” is always a truncation of a broader term. And it’s normally used to expand other truncated terms so as to make words like “cybernetics,” “cybernation,” “cyberspace,” “cyborg” (“cyber” + “organism”), “cybernaut,” “cyberpunk,” “cyberia” and so on. So it’s an abbreviation that adds itself to other abbreviations to concoct a variety of hybrids. Or perhaps, borrowing from biology again, we should say “cybrids”; for cybrids, unlike hybrids, borrow different parts of the genome from each of their parent plants and are, in this sense even more radically intra-differentiated than mere hybrids.9

     

    Most dictionaries and textbooks, however, agree that the fullest and most original form, in English, is “cybernetics,” a term coined by Norbert Wiener in 1947 from “cybern-” (kybernao?) and “-etics.” In Wiener’s sense, which we will return to later, the term referred to a discipline that would study the kinds of control systems that use feedback so as to generate automatic processes. Since then, it has taken on much broader definitions ranging from computing in general to the study of any systems of control, organisation and regulation, and particularly to those systems that use self-control, self-organisation, and self-regulation. It is this capacity that apparently gives such systems at least one feature in common with living biological systems. Hence, by extension, they are sometimes thought to have intelligence, to learn, develop, and grow. In this broader sense, then, cybern-etics might be said to model itself on gen-etics.

     

    As a form of study or a method of investigation, cybern-etics is an “etics” (as in both “genetics” and “phonetics”). “Etic” (as opposed to “emic”) studies engage their objects from the outside. Hence there is, contrastively, a “phonemics,” if not a “genemics.” Etic investigations do not ask how what it is they study understand themselves. Rather they ask how they can be analysed from outside. To use another distinction, they are nomothetic rather than ideographic. So most sciences, by definition, are etic–for the simple reason that the things they study are not normally considered able to understand themselves.

     

    “Cybernetics,” then, is the investigation of steering from a position other than that of the steersman himself (or perhaps the steering gear itself). And yet, it also seems, in popular conceptions of the cyber, that almost everything is given over to the steering technologies themselves. What is it to stand outside this conglomeration?–to do meta-cybernetics as the “the giving over of our governance and steering to another of our own making”? Might this be cybernethics? But we are getting ahead of ourselves.

     

    Returning again to etymology, we truncate the Greek term kybernao by taking the kyber double-syllable on its own. The reason why we get cybernetics as a discipline is the practical, technological attempt to find an other-than-us that steers and guides. The pilot determines our path–but it may be that we nevertheless give the orders regarding the termini–the start and finish points. On this view, the kybernetes merely takes us between those determined points. But what are they? What is particular and unique to the path of cyber-technology?

     

    Elsewhere, I have begun to describe cyberbeing (and ~space) as a relatively unique figuration of the equipmental being of everydayness.10 The argument there runs roughly as follows. In so far as Dasein (our ontological condition as beings of a quite particular kind) is constituted by an as-structure–that is, in so far as it understands as (in the counter-mentalistic sense of grasping-as, or holding-as, having-to-hand-as)–we are also able to imagine a less definite and embodied form of an as-if-structure. This would be the virtual inflexion of the as-structure’s actual. In the space of the as-if, we would only virtually grasp or hold or orient to. Such a space would be particular to all imaginary makings: the literary, the meditative, the artistic, and so on. Importantly, the cyber is not strictly limited to the domain of the as-if. It is not purely virtual. Rather, it is constituted by a movement or a motion that navigates (very quickly, almost instantaneously) between the “as” (our everyday capacity for being ) and the “as if” (our imaginary capacity). It is actual-virtual: not in synthesis or combination, but in terms of motion and movement. It hovers or flickers between these termini.

     

    Steering, or being cyber, then, is the movement or motion between these points. But another variation on the etymology of “cybernetic” comes into play here. To this point, for the most part, we have thought of it as “cybern-” (from the verb kybernao) and “-etic.” However, we have also seen that it’s possible to imagine the term as beginning instead with the noun, kybernetes, and to configure it as “cybernet-” and “-ic.” Then, in superadding the “ic,” to the “cybernet,” we appear to re-engage a peculiarly English suffix. This is the Anglo-Saxon “-lic” which approximates to the Modern English word (or suffix) “(-)like.” In fact, in Anglo-Saxon, “-lic” is important enough to be declined–hence “-licost” is “-likest” or “most like,” as in “fugle gelicost“: most like a bird or very bird-like.11 The “-ic” is already a marker of simulation; of something being like another thing. (In the above case a ship is described as bird-like-est.) And who can say whether it gains or loses power from the comparison? The “-ic” says that what the cyber is steersman-lic.

     

    Today we use the suffix “ish” to express almost (but not quite) the same modality or metaphoric relation. But this newer locution seems to diminish what arises from the metaphorical connection. (Cf. “goodish,” “Marxish,” “feminish,” and so forth.) Why is such a connection almost always viewed negatively? Nothing in its own constitution seems to merit this. What is the ultimately authentic that allows the authentic-ish (“like,” “as”) to become a less valuable way of moving? For if we are right in estimating the termini and trajectories of the cyber’s movements, the “as” or “like” is essential to it, just as it is essential to all inflexions of Dasein, for which everything begins with grasping as rather than with simple and mere grasping. So it is no wonder that cyber-phenomena are among today’s candidates for the ultra-inauthentic: not only do they openly wear the “as,” “like,” or “ish-ness” of everyday coping, they supplement this with a further tendentiousness, the as-if terminus. And, at the same time, as hybrids between other forms of prior equipmentality (engineering, the chemistry of silicon, and binary mathematics), they include such things as artificial limbs, self-programming computers, “virtual” reality devices and remote-controlled vehicles for exploring the surfaces of other planets.

     

    “Cybernetics,” then, is a truncated form of the Greek, but the truncation always carries with it (a) the name of a discipline, an “etics,” that must, therefore, work from the outside, and (b) a “like-ness,” a form of analogy. An exterior discipline of necessary like-ness. So cybernetics is a discipline formed on a metaphor–or else the cyber-forms are metaphors that lead to a discipline. Or else both.

     

    As such cybern-et-ics is the discipline that asks about how being human gives itself over to a steering that is not “its own”: and has never been purely its own. We (as such) were always other-wise: in other ways. It is therefore, essentially, the discipline of the prosthetic, the supplemental, the equipmental. It looks at whatever we use to extend ourselves, to get from here to there–trafficking, for example. It investigates how we use the steersman–with all of the contradictions that such a project(ion) implies. For is it not the case that the steersman takes us? Yes, true, but we also instruct the steersman in the matter of where it is we want to go. In this case, all we leave to the kybernetes is the path. And still, the path is not unimportant.12

     

    In this way, we give over our path of, say, thinking, to the kybernetes–perhaps in return for a better guarantee of our arrival. Though it’s always a risk. Because of the risk, giving over the path makes some people (like Steed) feel uncomfortable. It makes them feel dispossessed of their own destiny, their own (re)productive capacities. They feel as if they are not being steersmen in their own right, having given up this capacity to a demonic force. So it can make them feel what many have felt in (what they think of as) the “grip” of technology–out of control, unable to steer for themselves. It’s as if they have become an other’s equipment. But there is ultimately no “other” that has equipment.

     

    So can we give over our entire equipmental being to the cyber? Isn’t it rather that we only give over the means of travelling between the points we pre-specify to it? The kybernetes, on this reading, is a travel agent. And why would this kind of steering be different from, say, looking up an index in a book in order to find a certain passage, as opposed to reading the whole book in order to find it? The index, in this very ordinary case, is a kind of steersman. It helps us reach our destination; but it does not determine the destination. The same applies with more force to electronic search facilities. Or to raise a more technologically apposite example, think of net surfing: we set out to search for something but are led elsewhere along the way, perhaps never arriving at the point we originally set out to find. Is the net itself in control of this? Is it not, rather, that we make a decision at each turn?

     

    If so, then everything we call a technology (from the fishing hook to the supercomputer) only aids the end or project (Entwurf) that we make of ourselves (and by which we make/create ourselves).13 The mistake is to think that the end/project is (and always has been) ours alone–in some purely “human” state; that it was never “assisted” by (or dependent on) technologies. And are technologies anything more than our own previously-generated ends, our completions, former completions now enlisted towards further completions still?14

     

    As soon as there is an end (a human end), there is already a technology for making it, realising it. And, of course, any technology can be made from previous ends re-realised as means. To be human is, among other things, to have an end; and that end is a project to be realised by equipment. And then, “other” things have to be brought to bear to realise that end. But they could never be “other” in any essential sense. This has never not been true for human beings. We were never purely free of equipment.

     

    In this way of looking at things, the kybernetes is by no means a strange or new figure. It is by no means a sudden technological flash. It has always been there–steering–as soon as any thing ever used any other thing; as soon as it had equipment. And we are probably the only things that ever had steering equipment.

     

    To be sure, there are changes in what the equipment is–from memorising to writing things down; from writing-down to printing; from printing to computing; from computing to the more recent cyber-forms. But these do not change the fundamentals of our being. Those remain more or less the same. The basic components–readiness-to-hand (equipmentality), presence-to-hand (equipment condensed into “nature” or “objectivity”), Dasein (ourselves)–remain the same–but in, as it happens, currently altered configurations. So we rarely simply steer, rather we tend to organise the steering. What else, what other kind of being, could be like this?

     

    We give over the routine management of movement to pieces of wood (rudders and oars), to pieces of metal (ailerons), to pieces of plastic and rubber (steering wheels and tyres), to pieces of paper (indexes), to pieces of silicon (search engines). There is nothing strange or different about this. Our difference from nature (a classification that we have also invented, as it turns out) is that we, unlike our imaginary idea of “pure” nature, are always and utterly the makers of our steering devices. We were never not steered by the devices that we invented for steering (and, to mention a minor example, philosophy is only one such device). The cyber, then, is nothing new. As soon as there is substance or material (hyle), there is a technique for handling it.

     

    The cyber, in this sense, is very old. 1947 seems a very recent date for its discovery, its uncovering. But that recency is only one more testament to our inability to reflect on what we have made as what we have made. This is comparable with the incredibly late arrival of the first self-propelling vehicle: the bicycle. We almost want to ask, “How could we have been so uninventive for so long?”

     

    The notion of the cyber, we could argue, is a better metaphor for our way of being than many so far. It’s better than the idea of the “polis” as our natural environment. It’s better than the idea of our having non-material “forms” beyond (and determining) our mortal existence. It’s better than the idea of a pool of the unconscious that every conscious entity must follow (or dip into). It’s better than the idea that we are the mere effects of the economic formations that obtain during our lives. It’s better than what goes by the name of “identity politics.” By comparison, these ideas are almost nothing or close to nonsense. For how could we ever have been non-technological? And why are the “humanities” constantly involved in the search for an authenticity outside technologies? We would have died on a remote beach a long time ago without this capacity. Without it, those particular and ultra-recent technologies known collectively as “the humanities” could never have emerged to make such a peculiarly critical demand.

     

    To be technological is the same thing as to appoint, find or make a steering device. The cybern-et-(l)ic is by no means the antithesis of the “human.” What we (perhaps for some odd reason of anthropologistic purity) call “the human” has always been what it is because of its unique capacity to make other things work for it: such things as, for example, steering devices.

     

    The only difference today is that we can make things act like this–like a steerer (cybernet-lic). What we don’t see yet is that this relatively new ability (the double motion towards and from the “as if”) is not the whole of our present condition. For now, and perhaps for a long time, we will be in the condition of flick(er)ing, hovering, switching, between the old reliable helmsman called “As” and the slightly newer one called “As if.” The differences between the two, though, are minimal. Still, we must expect quibbles from the appointed guardians of “culture.”

     

    Cybern~ethics

     

    Our etymology to this point has been general rather than historically specific. It has tried to steer around the field (or waters) of the cyber-in-general rather than confining itself to cybernetics in the narrow sense. But what was the historical impetus for this etymological derivation, as it turned out, in the particular event of Norbert Wiener’s in(ter)vention? Wiener writes:

     

    We have decided to call the entire field of control and communication theory, whether in the machine or in the animal, by the name Cybernetics, which we form from the Greek               or steersman. In choosing this term, we wish to recognize that the first significant paper on feedback mechanisms is an article on governors, which was published by Clark Maxwell in 1868, and that governor is derived from a Latin corruption of
             . We also wish to refer to the fact that the steering engines of a ship are indeed one of the earliest and best-developed forms of feedback mechanisms. 15

     

    There are a number of interesting features of this almost originary moment–“almost” because Wiener himself gives the first date of use as 1947, the year in which he wrote his “Introduction” to Cybernetics, the year before the publication of the book containing this definition; and also because there is always the ghost or demon of Maxwell haunting and perhaps even governing this new arrival. The first noticeable feature is Wiener’s original spelling (probably a mis-spelling) in which the initial is substituted by . This may be insignificant; but it may also mark the first sign of the steersman as the chi, the physical symbol of magnetic susceptibility, hence marking the attraction of cyber technologies. Otherwise–though Charon, another chi-character, must not be ruled out in this context either–it may mark the chiasma (crossing over) as the primary act of the steersman; both in the sense of crossing over a stretch of water and of crossing over from “as” to “as if” or from human to machine, and vice versa. It might also indicate the rhetorical figure of the chiasmus in which contrasting phrases cross over one another: “Do not steer in order to arrive, but arrive in order to steer.” And finally, Wiener’s substitution of the aspirated “k” (chi) for the unaspirated form (kappa), may be among the reasons for us referring today to the “cyber” rather than the more correct, if harsher, “kyber.”

     

    The second, and for us most important, feature is that, as Wiener plans it, cybernetics is not simply a matter of dealing with communication and control as such. Rather, the discipline of cybernetics (as cybern-etics) will only deal with what, in the field of communication and control is cybernet-ic, steersman-like. Here the two possible derivations that we considered above cross over. And the feature of the steersman that is in question, that comes, as it were, to narrow the field, to say what kind of sub-discipline of communication studies cybernetics will be, is the steersman’s practice. That is, cybernetics will study what the actions of the steerer, the governor, and so on have in common. And the common feature of their practices is that they all involve feedback mechanisms.

     

    We could put this another way. Wiener identifies the steering engines in a ship as an instance of feedback mechanisms. But this is equally true of more primitive equipment such as the tiller. As the steersman stands in the stern, overlooking the crew, his decisions as to how to move the tiller depend on the conditions he sees and feels around him. And those conditions have come about not simply from a brute environment (the sea, the topology, the weather, and so on), but also from the previous steering activities of the helmsman himself. He has governed the ship into any present state of governability. In this sense, even the tiller arrangement is a feedback mechanism. The steering is dependent on a feeling of the sea as it presents itself at a given moment in the very process of steering.

     

    Accordingly, what is crucial to the field of cybernetics–what marks out its distinct objects–is the feedback that produces recursion. State s’ becomes state s” by virtue of an operation which (in either an identical or a modified form) is reapplied to s” to generate s”’, and so on. In this case, the act of steering oneself is a case of governing and being governed, reflexively, in the same instant. There is no strict active-passive distinction in a situation of feedback, recursion, or re-iteration. This is part of the usual definition of a reflexive verb. The cybernetic is, then, in its brutest form, the field of self-governance.

     

    This is what cybernetic machines have in common with cybernetic organisms (and all organisms, on this, Wiener’s, definition, must be cybernetic in so far as they are self-governing in their self-propulsion): they govern themselves (and are governed) reflexively. And here the term “reflexive” (as in “reflexive verb”) is intended to capture all the properties of self-re-iteration, feedback, recursivity, and self-governing self-propulsion. This, we might say, is the ethos of organisms. And, with the advent of cybernetic machines, we now have to say that there are some machines that share this ethos.

     

    If we look at matters in this way, we begin to see that the various public moralities about the cyber are utterly misplaced. I mean, for example, cyberphobic reactions (such as Steed’s) to the idea that machines might replace people or their functions–a deep and abiding fear of a necessary equipmentality, supplementality, or prosthesis. While we can hear this lament everywhere today, one lasting monument to it is E.M. Forster’s short story, “The Machine Stops.”16 Here, the machine comes to remove that most apparently human need, to see the sky. In cyberphobic texts, it is either this, the relation of the organism to nature, or else its relation to an inner psyche or soul, or both, that is apparently removed by the machine. The same reception has greeted handwriting, the printing press, street lighting, television, and now, among other things, computers.

     

    On the other hand, the public morality of cyberphilia (such as Rucker’s) simply reverses these values. We can find this in such places as the stories of H.G. Wells, Wired magazine or in thousands of sites on the Internet. In this idealistic inversion of cyberphobia, all things cyber are thought to enhance natural or psychological human capacities: the sky becomes clearer as it is digitised, the workings of the mind become more open and available as they become “artificial,” and so on and so forth. The picture is well known today.

     

    Both these positions mistake precisely what we have called the very ethos of organisms: reflexivity. This, as we have seen, is neither a natural nor a mental capacity. That is, it is not constituted out of a relation between the organism and nature, or a relation between it and its putative department of internal affairs (the ghost in the machine, perhaps). Rather the ethos is the self-organising and self-governing self-propulsion that is reflexivity in our sense of this term.

     

    Now, if this is the ethos of organisms and also of cyber-phenomena, then it is here that we will find their ethics. As Deleuze, after Spinoza, has pointed out, ethics (as opposed to mere morality or moral judgmentalism) is a matter of ethology (27, 125). It is a matter of what a body can do; its affects. That is, it is not as if a body acted and then, upon a later consultation of its internal states, its “intentions,” it decided whether or not the action was good or bad. And, a fortiori, the ethical cannot be a matter of absolute values of Good and Evil. These pertain only to moralisms such as cyberphobia and cyberphilia themselves. Cybern-ethics, then, does not come super-added to cyber-bodies. What a self-organising/self-governing/self-propelling (that is reflexive) body does is its ethos, its ethics. What is good for a body is whatever it does to enhance its powers of self-organising and self-governing self-propulsion. The good is an increase in reflexivity. And the bad, again following Deleuze-Spinoza, is whatever it is that a body does that decreases its reflexive capacity. All of this has to do with the field of bodily movement or motion–hence ethology.

     

    Moreover, as Deleuze points out on several occasions, Spinoza’s ethology is extremely close to that of Nietzsche, who also separated the “bad” Good and Evil of morality from the “good” good and bad of ethics. To this extent, cybernethics may also point to the centrality of power(s) as the capacity or capacities of Dasein to self-regulate. All of this is redolent not only of Nietzsche’s will to power, especially as it is mediated by Heidegger’s reading of that concept–as the principle of Nietzsche’s new ethical re-valuation–but also of Foucault’s uptake of Nietzsche and his view of ethics as arts or techniques of the self.17 And while this connection opens up another field of inquiry in its own right, what might concern us here is the interesting possibility of deriving a non-moral ethics of power that is co-extensive with the cyber as Dasein‘s fundamental equipmentality, regardless of the specific technologies that it so happens, at any given historical point, to use as concrete manifestations of that fundamental equipmentality. I have taken this question up elsewhere in another series of articles on Heidegger, culture, and technology.18

     

    And finally, a particular property of human reflexive organisms is that they are, in the strictest sense, accountably reflexive. An increase in reflexivity, in our case, is an increase in accountability. As a human reflexive organism (dare I say, “as Dasein“?), I display in and as my own motion how it is that that motion is to be taken by others. This is how the “social order” so crucial to human self-organisation is possible. Or rather, this is what social order, fundamentally, is. A good instance is mentioned by Wes Sharrock:

     

    Social order is easy to find because it's put there to be found. When you go about your actions [...] you do them so that (or in ways that) other people can see what you're doing. You do your actions to have them recognized as the actions that they are. When you stand at the bus stop, you stand in such a way that you can be seen to be waiting for a bus. People across the street can see what you're doing, according to where and how you're standing.... [Y]ou're standing at a bus stop and somebody comes and stands next to you and they stand in such a way that eventually you can see that these people are standing in a line and that one person's the first and another is the second, and some person's at the end. People stand around at bus stops in ways they can be seen to be waiting for a bus. (4)

     

    That is, human social order is not just self-organising; it is not just cybernetic. It is also, and utterly, in the business of displaying its self-organisation. That is, it is accountable. The way I stand by a particular pole, perhaps under a particular shelter, so that what I’m doing is visible to everyone as “waiting for a bus” (rather than, say, loitering) is an instance of accountability. With or without words, I am, in the very doing of waiting for a bus, accounting for what I’m doing as waiting for a bus (as opposed to, for example, using the bus shelter to keep out of the rain for a while). The verbal form of this accounting is only one such kind of accountability–though it is, by and large, how we do it.

     

    Sharrock’s point cannot be over-emphasised: it is not as if there is the movement, motion, or action and then the accounting (organised, for example, intentionally). Rather the two–the specific properties of human self-organising organisms–and the self-organisation that is called, in general, “society”–are indistinguishable. This is what is particular to us, to our ethos. It is unique to our ethical positioning that we are accountable in this sense. And, as a matter of sheer principle, there is no reason why cybernetic machines should not have (though they presently do not have, as a matter of fact) exactly this ethics. The question would be: when will a prosthetic device put itself in motion in such a way that anyone (including any other cybernetic machine) will be able recognise what it is doing because it has designed its motion to be (not only self-governing but also) accountably that (self-governed) action? A cybernetic machine can build, say, a car. When will it do so accountably–such that what it is doing is indeed building a car but, above all, such that it is doing so in such a way that it displays its motions as designed to be specifically that action for anyone to see?

     

    It will be at that point that a sheer coincidence of cybernetic properties held in common by some machines and all organisms (including human organisms) will have become an ethical identity between cybernetic machines and ourselves. That, if ever, is how the Turing test will be passed.

     

    Way~markers

     

    Where we have arrived along our path of thinking is not at a final destination. Not by a long chalk yet. In fact only a few steps have been taken. All we have seen is that beginning with the “usual story” of man and technology–the idea that technology is “what man makes” and his plans for so-making–we started with only part of the picture. As we ventured just a little further into the details of that story, we began to notice it to be fraught with troubles; troubles with no easy solutions. But something of a new understanding of cyber-technologies did occasionally present itself along these culs-de-sac, albeit as a fleeting glimpse. We can only guess what this may be once further pursued. At least, however, we now have a blurry outline of our alternative: that the ethics of today’s technological world is different from, and more than, simply a series of “critical intellectual” worries about machine morality. Rather, that ethics is an ethos: as much an ethos of man and Being as of technology.

     

    Is it possible, then, that we have been, despite our sense of a journey, back home in language, the house of Being, all along? Perhaps. But if so, we may have recognised some of those who dwell there: man, Being, and the appropriative event (Ereignis) that lets them belong there together. So at least we know this much: it is to the relations between these inhabitants that we must look to find the essence of technology. No amount of chatter about machines and their relations will get us there. As Heidegger puts it: “Today, the computer calculates thousands of relationships in one second. Despite their technical uses, they are inessential.” Now we know that this “inessential” is far from being a form of technophobia. For, aptly summarising any journey this essay may have taken into thoughts of a more essential ethos of technology, he also says the following:

     

    Technology, conceived in the broadest sense and in its manifold manifestations, is taken for the plan which man projects, the plan which finally compels man to decide whether he will become the servant of his plan or will remain its master. (Identity and Difference 41)

     

    By this conception of the totality of the technological world, we reduce everything... to man, and at best come to the point of calling for an ethics of the technological world. Caught up in this conception, we confirm our own opinion that technology is of man's making alone. We fail to hear the claim of Being which speaks the essence of technology. (Identity and Difference 34)

     

    Notes

     

    Thanks to Karen M. Strom for the Greek symbols. Her symbol fonts can be downloaded from the Symbols Bonanza Web site

     

    1. The critical text, here, might be “The Cybernauts,” an Avengers episode that is possibly the first popularisation of the “cyber” as an inhuman and anti-human force. It precedes Dr Who‘s cybermen by a year.

     

    2. A text-only version of “Cyberbeing and ~space” is available at http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc/text-only/issue.997/mchoul.997. The full hypertext version of the article is available at http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/postmodern_culture/v008/8.1mchoul.html (Please note that only paid subscribers to PMC at Johns Hopkins’ Project MUSE have access to this site. Information on subscribing to Project MUSE is available at http://muse.jhu.edu/ordering.)

     

    3. On language as the house of Being, see Martin Heidegger, “The Way to Language,” 111-136. The phrase is repeated in Identity and Difference and brought into conjunction with the “event of appropriation” (Ereignis).

     

    4. This is in a book called Culture and Representation, currently under consideration by Cassell, London, with a view to publication in 1999. Electronic copies are available on request from mchoul@murdoch.edu.au.

     

    5. See David Farrell Krell’s footnote on das Wesen in Martin Heidegger, Nietzsche Vol. IV: Nihilism (140).

     

    6. Here and throughout this essay, I work with a number of basic concepts derived from Heideggerian philosophy. Most of these stem from Division I of Being and Time. In particular, my reading of Heidegger is most influenced by the “pragmatic” Heideggerians. See, for example, Mark Okrent, Heidegger’s Pragmatism: Understanding, Being, and the Critique of Metaphysics.

     

    7. “Authenticity” might be read, here, as “own-ness,” the collective capacity for self-organisation of/as equipment.

     

    8. A few sources suggest that the term “cybernetics” may first have been used by Ampëre in the early 19th century to refer to the scientific control of society.

     

    9. Chambers dictionary has the following entry for “cybrid”: “(biol) n a cell, plant, etc. possessing the nuclear genome of one plant with at least some part of the chloroplastal or mitochondrial genome of the other, as opposed to a hybrid in which some parts of both parental nuclear genomes are present.” A more technical definition is: “Cybrid (Bunn et al. 1974)–the fusion product of an enucleated cytoplast with an intact (nucleated) cell (–> protoplast). In cybridization, the nuclear genome of one parent is combined with the organelles of a second parent. Sendai virus or polyethylene glycol may be used as fusing agents” (Reiger et al.). The bracketed reference is to “Bunn CL, Wallace DC, Einstadt JM (1974) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 71: 1681.”

     

    10. See “Cyberbeing and ~space,” paragraphs 1-23.

     

    11. The words “fugle gelicost” are used in line 218 of the Anglo-Saxon epic poem Beowulf to describe the hero’s ship as it sails.

     

    12. What this may show–although the matter obviously requires closer investigation–is that the logic of the supplement (in Derrida) and the logic of governmentality (in Foucault) are conceptually related. It is also possible that their conceptual relation stems from their common relation to Heidegger and his thinking of equipmentality.

     

    13. Entwurf is the term Heidegger uses in many of his works for “projection.” The full ramifications of this for our understanding of cyber-technologies, the digital and the virtual are explored in Phil Roe’s forthcoming Ph.D. thesis, “Of Hologrammatology: The Politics of Virtual Writing.”

     

    14. One possible symptom of the error in question is that we have now come to use words like “perfect” and “perfection” to refer to an utterly ideal state of being. But strictly, what is perfect is simply completed, over and done with (cf. the perfect tense).

     

    15. See Wiener 11-12. Wiener’s reference to the Maxwell paper is as follows: “Maxwell, J.C., Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), 16, 270-283, (1868).”

     

    16. Although the story itself is earlier, this popular collection was first published in 1947, the same year, as it happens, that Wiener coined the term “cybernetics.”

     

    17. See Heidegger, Nietzsche Volume III: The Will to Power as Knowledge and Metaphysics; Foucault, Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977; and Foucault, The Use of Pleasure: The History of Sexuality Volume Two.

     

    18. See my “The Being of Culture,” to appear in Continuum: A Journal of Media and Culture; “‘The Twisted Handiwork of Egypt’: Heidegger’s Question Concerning Culture,” submitted to Epochë; “Five Theses on Culture,” submitted to Research in Phenomenology; “Revolution • Resolution • Pathmaking • Technology,” submitted to Tekhema: Journal of Philosphy and Technology. Drafts of these essays are available on request from mchoul@murdoch.edu.au.

    Works Cited

     

    • “The Cybernauts.” By Philip Levene. Dir. Sidney Hayers. The Avengers. ABC Television Limited. 1965.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Spinoza: Practical Philosophy. Trans. R. Hurley, San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1988.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. 1967. Trans. G.C. Spivak. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins UP, 1974.
    • Forster, E.M. “The Machine Stops.” Collected Short Stories. London: Penguin, 1954. 109-146.
    • Foucault, Michel. Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977. London: Harvester Press, 1980.
    • —. The Use of Pleasure: The History of Sexuality Volume Two. 1984. London: Viking, 1986,
    • Heidegger, Martin. Being and Time. Trans. J. Macquarrie and E. Robinson. Oxford: Blackwell, 1962.
    • —. Identity and Difference. Ed. Joan Stambaugh. New York: Harper and Row, 1969.
    • —. Nietzsche Volume III: The Will to Power as Knowledge and Metaphysics, Ed. D. Farrell Krell. San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1987.
    • —. Nietzsche Vol. IV: Nihilism. Ed. D. Farrell Krell. San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1982.
    • —. “The Way to Language.” On the Way to Language. Trans. P. D. Hertz. San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1971.
    • McHoul, Alec. “Cyberbeing and ~space.” Postmodern Culture 8.1 (1997). http://www.iath.virginia.edu/pmc.
    • Okrent, Mark. Heidegger’s Pragmatism: Understanding, Being, and the Critique of Metaphysics. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1988.
    • Rieger, R., A. Michaelis and M. M. Green. Glossary of Genetics: Classical and Molecular. 5th edition. Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 1991.
    • Roe, Phil. “Of Hologrammatology: The Politics of Virtual Writing.” Diss. Murdoch U, forthcoming 1998.
    • Rucker, Rudy. “Software.” Live Robots. 1982. New York: Avon 1994.
    • Sharrock, Wes. “Ethnographic Work.” The Discourse Analysis Research Group Newsletter 11.1 (1995): 3-8.
    • Joan Stambaugh. “Introduction.” Identity and Difference. By Martin Heidegger. New York: Harper and Row, 1969. 7-18.
    • Wiener, Norbert. Cybernetics: Or Control and Communication in the Animal and the Machine. Cambridge: MIT P, 1961.

     

  • The Postcolonial Bazaar: Thoughts on Teaching the Market in Postcolonial Objects

    Bishnupriya Ghosh

    Department of English
    Utah State University
    bishnu@cc.usu.edu

     

    What seems an eternity ago, Kwame Appiah argued that the “post” in post-colonial was a theoretical space-clearing gesture.1 His critique of the use of neotraditional artifacts in a globalized late capitalist economy has been addressed, extended, and reframed by almost all major postcolonial critics from the early 1990s. Vijay Mishra and Bob Hodge, among others, suggest that the postmodern emerges as a western strategy of absorbing, organizing, and consuming all “othernesses” (“native,” “ethnic,” “non-western”) that once signaled the fall of modernist epistemologies.2 In their view, the postcolonial actually precedesthe postmodern, but functioning within a global cultural economy–a bazaar for non-western artifacts–the category panders to the needs of that global market, producing ever more reified versions of “other” worlds. Amid the clamor of these debates on the correlations and intersections between the postcolonial and the postmodern, departments made way; niches and nests were set up to accommodate the field, and badges of diversity were donned. And then the inevitable: a market for postcolonial texts providing a sampling of a world honed to the fashionable emphases on postmodern hybrids (on the left) and on globalized cultures or villages (on the right).

     

    In this essay, I attempt to envision an interventionist postcolonial pedagogy through the advocacy of an international cultural studies, a praxis that would position classroom knowledge and skills within the demands and constraints of transnational cultural economies. While my own position in the First World academy, complete with its institutional and economic ramifications, clearly enables even this occasion to speak, here I am less preoccupied with theorizing the politics of my self-location. My primary focus will be the pedagogic imperative: a teacher’s analysis of the practices and objects that demarcate postcolonial studies, a field well-suited to “preparing” students in the American academy for their future, and almost inevitable, participation in global exchanges. But as a postcolonial critic, given the complex and contentious issues in the field, I feel that it is crucial to first chart out the theoretical space that frames and constitutes the kinds of praxes envisioned here.

     

    Certainly, much of the contemporary soul-searching by postcolonial intellectuals living and teaching in First World locations has circulated around the question: does the institutionalization of the postcolonial evacuate it as a form of resistance to continuing western imperialism? Carol Breckenridge and Peter van der Veer, in an anthology devoted to the problem of knowledge-construction in postcolonial studies, characterize the “growing awareness of the role of academic disciplines in the reproduction of patterns of domination” as the central “predicament” of the postcolonial intellectual (1). A more vigorous critique based on a reading of global markets in the postmodern era is undertaken by Arif Dirlik in his attempt to locate the itinerary of the postcolonial in First World epistemologies and institutions.3 Delving into the postmodernity of critical discourse itself, Dirlik suggests that the emergence of the category “postcolonial” should be understood as a First World response to the conceptual needs generated by the rapid transformations of a world capitalist order; in the changing relationships within the world market, “Third World” intellectuals “arrived” in the First World academy, and serviced that First World through their various forms of crisis-management. As early as 1988, Gayatri Spivak had moved toward a similar reading of the economy of postcolonial studies, by suggesting that First World intellectuals do not recognize to what extent the U.S. academy is sustained by the manipulation of Third World labor: “it is possible to suggest to the so-called ‘Third World’ that it produces the wealth and the possibility of cultural self-representation of the ‘First World’” (“Practical Politics” 96). My point here is that these conversations should find articulation beyond scholarly exchanges: that is, the questions of value and labor (raised by Spivak and Dirlik) as they overdetermine epistemological necessities (the very “need” to learn about the postcolonies) should become a crucial part of any course in postcolonial studies, so that students can reflect on the conditions that make possible the very objects they study, the practices they undertake, and their teacher’s position as an authority.

     

    But this can only be achieved if postcolonial theorists can bracket their angst and hunker down to make decisions and compromises on what kinds of political responsibilities one can bring into discussion or contention in the classroom. Such pedagogic matters have elicited some critical attention in recent years. For instance, Gauri Viswanathan, best known for her exemplary work on English Studies in India, Masks of Conquest, captures the field of pedagogic problems in postcolonial studies in the following comment:

     

    Of course, the easiest way of diluting the radical force of a text is to co-opt it into the mainstream curriculum, and to some extent the steady inclusion of so-called minority literatures in the mainstream English literature curriculum has reduced their oppositional force. But I see no reason to be negative about the inclusion of multicultural literature if it has forced the field of "English" to rethink its accepted parameters. "English literature" is increasingly being rewritten as "Literature in English," and the change is a healthy one. It deterritorializes the national implications of English literature, and it refocuses attention on language rather than the nation as the creative principle of literature. I'm wary of having "postcolonial literature" in English departments without defining what postcolonial literature is in the first place. "Literature in English" is a much more satisfactory term for me, at least if such literature is studied across cultures and territorial boundaries. ("Pedagogical Alternatives" 57-58)

     

    Viswanathan’s comments foreground the problematic inherent in choosing representative postcolonial texts, and the choices raise a host of questions: what is the purchase of the “postcolonial” in the American academy? How is literary value assigned to these texts? In my view, such queries dovetail into the larger task of understanding the objects and practices of the classroom in terms of transnational epistemologies and systems of production, consumption and distribution, and then envisioning a transnational public sphere within which one must speak, write, and act. This is suggested in the hope that the insistence on transnationality would imbue students in the First World with a political responsibility not only to their own national public sphere, but to the greater circuits which determine and are determined by their actions.

     

    An International Cultural Studies: Public Spheres, Mass Media, Praxis

     

    In the following section, I propose an international model of cultural studies that could reinstate the political value of the postcolonial in transnational public spheres. In a seminal moment, Stuart Hall identified cultural studies as a response to “social and cultural change in postwar Britain”:

     

    An attempt to address the manifest break-up of traditional culture, especially traditional class cultures, it set about registering the impact of new forms of affluence and consumer society on the very hierarchical and pyramidal structure of British society. Trying to come to terms with the fluidity and undermining impact of mass media and of an emerging mass society on this old European class society, it registered the cultural impact of the long-delayed entry of the United Kingdom into the modern world. (12)

     

    Here Hall marks cultural studies as a response to a changing public sphere, a practice committed to examining and charting the ensemble of symbolic practices in that sphere. Tracing a history of cultural studies, Hall locates its beginnings in the Leavisite project of “tending the health” of a “national culture” (13); but cultural studies takes upon itself the task of “unmasking” the “unstated presuppositions of the humanist traditions,” its “regulative” cultural role (15). My arguments in this essay draw on Hall’s vision of demystifying the literary, and of charting the cultural spheres that shape all forms of political praxis. The postcolonial as praxis in a globalizing world can only be theorized in terms of an internationalized cultural studies.< sup>4

     

    In an essay that seeks to document a shift in conceptions of civil spheres, from the modernist location of that sphere as a corollary to the nation-state to the postmodern challenge to the territorialization and rationalization of this space, Nicholas Garnham argues for the centrality of the mass media to this debate. The role of formulating cultural and social identities unlinked to nation-states questions the possible co-existence of several democratic polities (255). Garnham argues that the reconceptualization of public spheres within which global citizenships are envisaged is the only democratic option left in the contemporary world. This reconceptualization involves sustained education in the circuits and role of the mass media. Teaching the market and reinstating the relationship of the postcolonial to transnational public spheres depend upon cultural analyses of the mass media.

     

    It is not enough, then, to be self-reflexive about the formulation of the literary, but to re-situate literature’s regulative function by placing it in the context of popular public discursive realms. More often than not, the seams and sutures between academic and the public discourses remain hidden, partly to preserve the sacrosanct apolity of academia. In 1992, The Chicago Cultural Studies Group described the clash between the two discursive realms in the following way:

     

    Under the weight of such seemingly endless diversity of empirical concerns, multiculturalism as a social movement gets its critical purchase because it intrinsically challenges established norms, and can link together identity struggles with a common rhetoric of difference and resistance. In distinction, cultural studies as a critical movement proposes to reorder the world of expert knowledge, recasting method and pedagogy as elements of public culture. When newspapers and magazines amalgamate multiculturalism and cultural studies as a two-pronged drive to install political correctness, these utopian projects are the sprawling trouble-makers the media describe. (531)

     

    Postcolonial discourse, as a part of the larger work of identity politics that opens intellectuals to the non-academic realm, has ever been in danger of being a kind of “academic neocolonialism” that bypasses central public discourses of resistance in the post-colony. Vinay Dharwadker, for instance, has criticized the Subaltern Studies group for failing to include within its corpus any work by the “subalterns” in question; part of this omission lies in the focus on texts in English. Thus the group virtually ignores, for instance, the self-analytic discourse produced by six million Dalit speakers of Marathi who have an independent body of work (Chicago Cultural Studies Group 541-42). The inwardness of academic discourse, then, precisely removes the critical potential of postcolonial theory from public discourses. George Yúdice takes a similar stance in criticizing “multicultural” rhetoric for having little effect on the identity politics of the public sphere:

     

    While it is true that identity politics and its dominant ideology--multiculturalism--have achieved a relative democratization of some institutions (some school systems and universities, museums and exhibition spaces, certain foundations, and even certain business settings, as demonstrated by the adoption of "corporate multiculturalism"), the fact is that these openings have not had the slightest impact on the conduct of macropolitics of the economy, foreign relations, the armed forces, scientific research, and so on. Such an impact is made even more difficult by the weak linkages among "identity groups." ("Cultural Studies" 58).

     

    In many ways it was the Satanic Verses debacle that shocked postcolonial academics into confronting the strength of popular discourses over cultural productions–particularly, the production of “authors” in conflicting discourses of nationality, citizenship, property, and selfhood. One contemporary example of the “scripting” of postcolonial authors is the case of Taslima Nasreen, a Bangladeshi author whose escape to the West became an international incident in Europe in 1994, and a national embarrassment for Bangladesh. Early in those events, she was nicknamed “the female Rushdie” on an NPR Show, “All Things Considered”; very few of the commentaries on her work in the West (and she has been available in translation) focus on the novel Lajja for which she had a fatwa issued against her. Her status as a victim of Islamic religious intolerance has dominated all conversations on Nasreen. Descriptions of her escape present the West as coolly rational–the free democratic spheres of speech and action–and the Third world as a chaotic tropical realm: for instance, an article in the Financial Times, titled “Safe from Screams of Intolerance,” tells of Nasreen’s escape from the “steamy streets of Dhaka” to her new hideout in “cool Swedish forests” (29). In an essay on the “Nasreen Affair,” I argue that Third World authors are often consumed as “subalterns” in a historical script shared by the reading publics in the First and Third Worlds; authors have becomes free-floating signifiers who are placed within pre-existent Western scripts of freedom, progress and the expression of individuality.5

     

    In an issue of Socialist Review on South Asian postcolonial theory and writing, Inderpal Grewal (1994) reinforces the argument that the scripting of authors depends on the public discourses that interpellate our interpretation of literary texts.6 Grewal criticizes the canonization of authors such as Bharati Mukherjee, whose fiction reiterates the discourse of freedom from (Eastern) oppression so essential for the consolidation of Euro-American feminist liberatory agendas. Mukherjee’s work is typically taught as immigrant literature and women’s literature; her narrative of escape from India, a place of tradition and backwardness, finds reverberations in the American rhetoric of citizenship and the New World. The back cover of Jasmine includes a blurb from The Baltimore Sun that bears witness to the text’s popularity: “Poignant… heart-rending…. This is the story of the transformation of an Indian village girl, whose grandmother wants to marry her off at 11, into an American woman who finally thinks for herself” (59). The spurious connections between Euro-American feminism and colonial modernity makes it possible for such a text, argues Grewal, to gain “literary value” over texts such as Meena Alexander’s Nampally Road, a work trenchant in its criticism of the nightmare of immigrant existence. Perhaps it is important to read authors like Mukherjee–on whom there is a volume of critical essays–in context of her production as author so that her “insider’s knowledge” may be framed by the public sphere in which she is consumed. In the “Introduction” to the essays on Mukherjee, the editor, Emmanuel Nelson, in fact ascribes Mukherjee’s importance in part to her celebration of her new immigrant status: “What is fascinating, however, is Mukherjee’s determined rejection of the emotional paralysis of exile and her enthusiastic affirmation of the immigrant condition…” (x). Such frames for authors reinforce dominant ideologies of freedom and escape scripted in First World-Third World exchanges.

     

    In the recent volume dedicated to configuring an international cultural studies, On Edge: The Crisis of Contemporary Latin American Culture, George Yúdice raises some important questions regarding the relationship of cultural analysis to the reconception of an effective public sphere. He suggests the conception of “transnational public spheres” where the needs and dimensions of societies across nations may be discussed together. With reference to Gramsci, Yúdice characterizes the civil sphere as an “ensemble of symbolic practices” where a “discursive consensus” is struck and an image of a socius is constituted therein; but, Yúdice asks, under powerful deterritorializations can a socius be possible (51)? One has to imagine transnational public spheres where issues such as urban violence, poverty, labor forces, and so forth are discussed with the possibility of consensus; cultural studies can contribute to this exchange of symbolic data by recording, analyzing, and criticizing that data (63). Certainly, such a model of transnational analysis and exchange becomes particularly relevant in articulating the practices that constitute the “literary text,” its use and value as postcolonial literature read within the American academy.

     

    In the same volume, the editors, Henry Schwarz and Richard Dienst, preoccupy themselves with the penetration of public spheres by electronic media and reproduction. A globalizing media creates a mass of cultural transmissions (financial, military, institutional) that cognitively “map” or order the world in a certain way. Others, such as George Yúdice, Kumkum Sangari, and Meenakshi Mukherjee, critique the new political and cultural terrains constituted by the global media: they insist on reading the postcolonial in context of civil spheres completely saturated with mass electronic reproduction, originating in the First World and harnessed to the logics of transnational capital.7 Mukherjee notes that, in the case of India, the cultural amnesia generated by the infiltration of STAR TV, MTV, and CNN into homes, obliterates local and regional cultures unless they are brought back as “planned authenticities” (2,608); a globalized media interpenetrating the so-far state-run Doordarshan (television) beams messages of conspicuous consumption to remote villages, and people in the survival sector dream of washing machines and microwaves.

     

    But this scenario is not as apocalyptic as it sounds: Dienst and Schwarz, for instance, theorize resistance–a key issue in postcolonial theory–in terms of “countertransmissions” drawn from “diverse imaginary resources” that “interrupt” these “circuits of control”; cross-cultural analysis involves the record and examination of these interruptions and reformulations of mass media transmissions harnessed to dominant political and financial interests. This perception of “countertransmissions” can be deployed to reconstitute the “postcolonial” as resistance, a challenge to dominant ideologies transacted across public spheres; but without looking at the globalizing force and circuits of mass media and electronic reproductions originating in the First World the counteractivity of the postcolonial cannot be harnessed for decolonizing political effects. An international conception of cultural studies is necessary for cultural studies not to be completely removed from notions of political solidarity (its initial impetus)–not to be “Cocacolonized” in Yúdice’s terms (52)–and for postcolonial literature to be politically effective.

     

    I emphasize a cultural studies praxis for teaching postcolonial literature because for postcolonial critics, participating in and attempting to resist a homogenizing global cultural economy, mass-produced images that create global imaginaries are a problem. Gauri Viswanathan (1996) points to the fact that communities outside academia–her example consists of South Asian communities in the United States–often collude with Western representations, uncritically Orientalizing themselves in the media and celebrating things that are a part of the history of domination:

     

    There is so little communication between these communities, one so critical and the others so complicit. The latter continue to represent themselves through film and journalistic media as the exotic East; one instance of this is travel ads. To what extent does the failure of communication between these groups, in fact, nullify the critical activity South Asian academics are producing? (qtd. in Katrak 157).

     

    This failure of communication was earlier noted in Ketu Katrak’s work on postcolonial women’s texts, where she argued that postcolonial theorists and critics, unlike writers, often fail to engage seriously with the “many urgent issues in their societies” (157). In fact the epigraph to her essay is culled from Wole Soyinka’s diatribe against criticism that produces, with “remorseless exclusivity” and “incestuous productivity,” limited “academic, bourgeois-situated literature” (qtd. in Katrak 157). Such allegations are particularly pertinent to my argument for re-locating postcolonial literature in terms of other cultural transmissions in transnational public spheres.

     

    One only needs to look at recent films such as Kamasutra or Indian MTV’s version of “Indianess” (marketable ethnic clothes, artifacts, erotic temple architecture, etc.) to know that Indians play a great part in exoticizing themselves. An example to which we can all relate is perhaps the popularity of the goddess Kali in Western countercultures, as the fount of unrestrained female energy and sexuality. A student recently gave me an excerpt from a story by David James Duncan, from River Teeth, titled “Kali Personal.” The narrative frame describes the arrival of a personal ad from an anonymous sender from Calcutta, India, mailed to a Seattle daily; the envelope containing the ad allegedly smelt “funky,” and included fifteen thousand Indian rupees. The rest of the tale recounts the editor’s bizarre experience with the ad (which included barbecuing the rupees); it finally was stolen and ended up on rock concert posters and phone poles. The ad reads something like this: “Single Asian female; ageless; nonprofessional; new to america; searching for virile, confident, ambitious young males of any caste, color or physical description to whom to bare my perfect breasts and shining body and give ecstacies that leave you gasping for more. I never lie. From the moment you see me, you will burn for me…” (A smattering of Sanskrit in the two-page-long erotica lends colorful authenticity.) (39). This is a particularly interesting example because several feminist, and particularly lesbian South Asian communities, actually use Kali’s symbolic value in a very similar way. Advertisements in lesbian popular journals in Britain and Los Angeles that construct female sexual energy in the name of Kali also record such passages. My point here is that we must teach such mass and popular cultural texts alongside our postcolonial novels, prose, and poetry so that the “communication” that Viswanathan talks of–the interchange between the mass-produced transmissions and their concomitant counter-transmissions–can begin at the level of pedagogy. This would reinstate the postcolonial as a counter-hegemonic strategy aimed both at demystification and the historical recording of counter-transmissions.

     

    As a prerequisite to a postcolonial cultural studies praxis that prepares the ground for students to locate themselves in a transnational public sphere, I emphasize “teaching the market” (to spin off of Gerald Graff’s exhortation to “teach the debate” in the classroom) in postcolonial objects and practices. In the balance of this essay, I will outline the ways in which the postcolonial critic can situate texts, courses, requirements, and university policies within a larger understanding of transnational exchanges.

     

    Teaching the Market: Academia, Pedagogy, Literary Markets, and Value

     

    Academia and the publishing industries of both the First and Third Worlds constitute the economy that most directly affects our choice of postcolonial objects and practices. This is a nexus that includes teachers, university administrators, critics, writers, publishers, distributors, advertisers, journal editors, and others who are responsible for regulating academic resources–for publication, research time, conferences, curriculum, and so forth–and for formulating pedagogic policy. As Dirlik and so many others have pointed out, the academy fulfills an economic need: we prepare students to participate/partake in a global economy by introducing them to “better” understanding of contemporary cultures, politics, and history. I attempt to chart the different aspects of the “market” that one can logistically include in discussions stretching over ten to sixteen weeks.

     

    In examining Third World publishing and distribution, and its relation to the industrial production and consumption of texts, Philip Altbach notes the centrality of the economic motivations for the continuing dependence on First World publishing and critical facilities (454). Others, such as Ali Mazrui, argue for larger stakes: that the history of this market dependency lies in colonial systems of education, charting for African universities what Viswanathan did for Indian colonial education. Mazrui argues that the impact of colonial education in Africa has created postcolonial universities designed to “transform the African self into a neo-Western other” (334). He details the cultural dependency of postcolonial African universities (such as universities at Ibadan, Ghana at Legon, Dakar, and the old Makerere in Uganda)–their language of instruction, library holdings, faculty, curricular structure, and pedagogic requirements–which perceive themselves often as “extensions” of major European universities (334). Mazrui’s point is that it is not so much academic dependency that is worrisome, but the fact that the “cultural self” is at stake, as it is increasingly organized into a neo-colonial object. Investigations such as these suggest that the category of postcolonial literature should not be operable without adequate attention to the spheres of knowledge transaction (First and Third World universities and publishing industries) and the related questions of cultural dependency. For it is the shared transnational public spheres within which the problems and possibilities of the postcolonial take shape; it is here that postcolonial cultural artifacts are produced, distributed, and consumed.

     

    Altbach and Mazrui provide important insights into the transnational structures of publishing industries and education systems; both draw our attention to the historical distributions of economic and cultural power. Certainly, the visibility of certain postcolonial objects in the First World has much to do with the cultural capital of the ex-colonial West. In demystifying systems of rewards and punishments, Graham Huggan examines the neocolonialism of literary prizes–the Booker prize, in particular–that offer symbolic sanctions (he quotes Bourdieu) to postcolonial writers. Huggan’s point is that literature is not the locus of immanent value” but “a site of contestation between different discursive regimes” (412); if one adds po stcoloniality to this, the condition implies a “contradiction between anti-colonial ideologies and neo-colonial market schemes” (413). Offering a history of the Booker McConnell company, a corporation that profited from the harshest of colonial regimes in the 1830s, Huggan goes to lengths to show how the Booker awards still attempt to contain postcolonial resistance or cultural critique by promoting English as a common or shared fund. This liberal view “avoids confronting structural differences in conditions of literary production and consumption across the English-speaking world” (417). Analyses such as Huggan’s work on the assigning of literary value are valuable components of teaching the market for postcolonial texts. In teaching a postcolonial literary text one could start from the point of consumption–the contrasting reception-contexts for a single work, the gaps, tensions and commonalities would prove instructive in understanding the global market structures–and then move to a history of production and distribution.

     

    The Booker prize example points to an important dimension to teaching the market: the feedback effect of the “world market” in postcolonial literatures, as most recently evidenced in the hullabaloo over Arundhati Roy’s God of Small Things, coinciding as it did with the celebrations of India’s fifty years of independence. In the Indian newspapers and journals, money was the first item of interest: every article that appeared in those first few weeks commented on the 3.5 lakh (88,000) copies worldwide, earning Rs.5 crore ($1,250,000). A blurb in India Today, October 27th, 1997, summed things up well: “Arundhati Roy opens up the global market for Indian writing in English” (23). This was followed by a description: “Slim-hipped Roy, her carelessly curled hair cascading over her face, her nose-ring twinkling with naughtiness, and her language flapping with originality, excited the stodgy English literary establishment” (23). On the one hand, this loaded sentence echoes gestures of exoticization extended to South Asian women in the West, and on the other, reads Roy as a manipulator of the market–someone who triumphs over the “stodgy English establishment.” Other articles gloated: “Where is the British Novel now?” (says a reporter for the Calcutta daily, The Statesman). He continues: “If the Booker is a mirror in which contemporary literary culture may glimpse a reflection of its own worth, then one ought to look elsewhere–to the USA or India. I once again congratulate Roy for winning; but where are the new British writers?” (1). Again, a double-edged sentence in which the anti-colonial nonetheless reflects a culture that continues to look at itself, via satellite as it were, through British and American ratification.

     

    The question of constructing the cultural object as literary, or the awarding of literary value, becomes an important part of teaching the market. This has a special valence in context of colonial constructions of other literatures which was the core of many Orientalist projects: for instance, Gauri Viswanathan examines the ideological fabric of such Orientalist constructions in Masks of Conquest, while Vinay Dharwadkar explores the European legacies behind the cataloging of Indian literatures–“Sanskrit literature which has a strong philological base, was characterized as a part of ancient and classical India, in opposition to other “modern vernacular literatures” (168).

     

    It is an easy move from including popular discourses on particular postcolonial texts to the subsequent introduction of epistemological debates. Theoretical discourses that are self-reflexive about their own cultural and epistemological dependencies are integral complements to teaching the market. For example, if one’s subject is the global cultural economy, one can fold in George Yúdice’s critiques (1992) of the Western appropriations of Latin American cultural forms as examples of postmodernism. Yúdice advocates a better understanding of postmodernisms operating in postcolonial contexts: he finds the occurrence of the experiences and aesthetics in Latin America that Western critics group under the term postmodern long before the visibility of the Euro-American varieties, arguing that the heterogenous character of Latin American social and cultural formations made it possible for these “discontinuous, alternative, and hybrid forms to emerge” with ease (2). Kumkum Sangari (1987) makes a similar argument, articulating the danger of reading context-specific postcolonial cultural forms as variants of Western postmodernism: for instance, she proposes that, in the hybrid syncretic of Latin American life, “magic realism” must be understood as a “strategy for living” and not a “formal literary reflex”; non-mimetic or marvelous ways of seeing have a social relevance to Gabriel Garcia Márquez’s world, and this non-mimetism is not the same as the anti-mimetism of Western postmodernism (164).

     

    In fact, the acknowledged failures of critical theory can be cautionary tales for students learning to map a global cultural economy. Since the mid-eighties, postcolonial theorists have been coming to terms with the postcolonial as a rubric; many seem unified in their commitment to rescuing the category “postcolonial” from becoming a historical abstraction that overlooks contemporary power axes (Mishra & Hodge, 1991; Deepika Bahri, 1996; Anne McClintock, 1992; Ella Shohat, 1992; Arif Dirlik, 1994; Gayatri Spivak, 1993, etc.). Certainly, the “postcolonial” skews temporality by reducing everything that came before the colonial period into the blandly utopian “precolonial”; only artifacts that contain whiffs of colonial contamination are subject to avid scrutiny. Anne McClintock, in cataloging the issues elided in contemporary formulations of the term, writes: “If the theory promises a decentering of history in hybridity, syncreticism, multi-dimensional time, and so forth, the singularity of the term effects a re-centering of global history around the single rubric of European time” (86). Arif Dirlik, citing McClintock, argues in the same vein: that postcolonial studies has generated a “universalizing historicism” that “projects globally what are but local experiences” (345). The temporal and spatial problematics of the term are further emphasized and rethought in Santiago Colás’s work on postcolonialism in the Latin American context: “What can the term postcolonial contribute to an understanding of the culture of Latin America?” Citing Edward Said’s articulation of the “heart” of decolonization as the slow recovery of territory after World War II, Colás notes that “8 million square miles and 29 million inhabitants of Latin America were decolonized by 1826 (with the signal exceptions of Cuba and Puerto Rico). Postcolonial critics and theorists have failed to examine the difference of Latin America” (383); then, using Slavoj Zizek’s theories of ideology and political subjecthood, Colás goes on to demonstrate a different understanding of the term postcolonial in its function of a “self-styled” illusion (392).

     

    I categorize these critical narratives as useful cautionary tales because they all draw attention to the easy commodification of the postcolonial or the non-western, often neatly packaged into anthologies that stretch liberal arms toward a post-statist consciousness. The classroom should be a place where the implications of market operations on knowledges and skills acquired can be argued, contested, and understood on different terms by students belonging to varying imagined communities.

     

    What are some of these implications that can be addressed in the classroom? Transnational capital, as it transcends nation-states and permeates local corners, generates a perceived intellectual need to comprehend and cognitively “manage” the plenitude of a global culture’s politics and history. Cultural artifacts become commodities that facilitate such comprehension. University programs such as Ethnic Studies, Cultural Studies, English and Comparative Literature departments with multicultural, world, and commonwealth literature courses struggle to contain and represent the “other” within and the “other” outside of the United States. The question posed in the classroom may well be: What purchase does the postcolonial have with these other courses and programs?

     

    The most common and dangerous inclusion of the postcolonial into the academy has been its ghettoization in one department (and often a single course). Sometimes one course fills in several needs: for example, a course in postcolonial literature focusing on South Asian female diaspora may fulfill student requirements for courses in Women’s Studies, Ethnic Studies, Commonwealth, World, and Multicultural literature requirements. This overdetermination of texts give students a token glimpse of the “other,” quickly and deftly managed within the curriculum. Commenting on “minority discourse,” Sylvia Wynter offers an insight that further exposes the issue of crisis-management tied in with curricular structures:

     

    [if] the category of minority includes the sub-category "women," then we are here confronted with the anomaly that it is we who constitute the numerical majority. Yet such is the force of the shared semantic charter through which we interdepend, that we all know what we mean when we use the category minority to apply to an empirical majority. (433)

     

    The dizzying concept of “special interest” groups who must share one segment of the pie–more concretely thought of as teaching the non-western world’s literature in ten weeks–is seen by Gayatri Spivak as a political strategy of crisis-management in the global economy (“Practical Politics” 111).

     

    While efforts such as re-designing requirements on a course-by-course or institutional basis and the emphasis on transmitting discussions of the postcolonial across the curriculum unquestionably comprise the most integral parts of larger ongoing struggles, in the current ghettoized situation, one of the options for postcolonial studies courses is simply to teach the market. To teach the market in such a scenario would be to highlight the “semantic” character of the category under which a particular text is taught, and then to make visible the parameters of the disciplines that govern the inclusion of such as text in the course; one could teach only two or three novels in a semester, but the students would learn about the relationship of, for example, a critical multiculturalism to women’s studies and how these relationships carve out institutional space and the assignment of value.

     

    In describing the World Literature and Cultural Studies Program at the University of California at Santa Cruz, Kristin Ross suggests that we make available our acts of worlding in the course, by identifying the negative or empty spaces around the texts that we teach–“world” should be most of all a “refusal” of a naturalized category (671); she therefore insists on the need to teach the motors of our curricular choices alongside the representative cultures and societies under perusal. I would imagine that this would entail making available to one’s students the political, pragmatic, and personal decisions behind course designs and the choice of texts. In the interview alluded to above, Viswanathan suggests that the “curriculum battle is less about what books to read than how to reflect an increasingly complicated society with different class and ethnic compositions. The language of contemporary curricular restructuring has not changed all that much from the discourse of empire through which English literature was universalized” (60). Ross’s emphasis on revealing the world as absence rather than presence changes the universalizing gestures Viswanathan sees as dangerous; furthermore, such an act refocuses attention wasted on divvying up the pie to the impossibility of full representation in an increasingly complex set of domestic and international relationships.

     

    In the same essay, Ross points to another effect of institutional ghettos: the severe disjuncture between domestic (American) and international “multicultural” courses. “Melting-pot” classes in American pluralism encourage a kind of “provincial nesting” that blocks connections between the students’ own particular experiences and those of other people. This leaves “disadvantaged groups eddying in self-referential circles on the periphery of academic life” (669), disconnected from counterpart cultures in world literature courses. The parochialism of American Studies has much to do with this divorce in the sharing of resources and programs. Such institutional divorces further lead to an epistemological gap between philosophically-based courses with a political edge (“postcolonial literature” courses or Ethnic studies) and other programs in the university geared to study other cultures (such as Asian Studies). Referring to marginalizations within Asian studies and Asian literatures, Rey Chow explores how Asian classicists often see culture as a general literacy that comes before periodization and specialization; the farther one is removed from centralized or canonical Asian texts, the more “dubious” one’s claim to the culture. Chow recounts one occasion on which she “told a senior Chinese classicist that [she] was going to a conference on contemporary Hong Kong literature, for instance, [and] the response… was: ‘Oh, is there such a thing?’” (125). It is unlikely that Chow is alone in her experience of being marginalized in Asian Studies programs, often Orientalist in their lack of attention to the historical production of the object of study as an object of study. Asian Studies programs fulfill a requirement of preparing students for participation in a global economy; resistance to this effort calls into question the balances and resources in the university. Certainly, one could hope for more interdisciplinary transmissions of postcolonial debates, not only across English, History, and Anthropology departments, but in disciplines that participate vigorously in the global economy (economics, the languages, and political science) and parley in culture (Folklore programs, Asian Studies, Art History, Music, Language departments, etc.).

     

    Besides the structure and resources of American universities, the pedagogies of the postcolonial leave much to be desired. One seldom comes across a sustained reading of the postcolonial in most courses in British and American literature, in the way do we do nowadays with gender. What Said has done with Jane Austen is precisely what Gauri Viswanathan, in her interview with Mary Vasudeva and Deepika Bahri, suggests that we should do with several other canonical texts. In her words:

     

    Dickens' Barnaby Rudge, for instance, which is about mass mobilization and the horrific effects of militant Protestantism, shocks someone into the recognition that what seem to be exclusively problems of Third World society are, in fact, problems you could find in English society. That makes us rethink the problems of the Third World and consider that these difficulties have become a part of an international, global history. (59)

     

    It is understandable that we choose English and European texts written or translated into English when teaching in the Euro-American academy, but need we be obsessed with texts that refer only to other English texts? One only needs to look at the immense attention paid to writers such as Jean Rhys (revising Brontë), Derek Walcott (rewriting Homer), Coetzee (redoing Defoe), and so forth, in postcolonial studies conferences and seminars, to become aware of this attachment to colonial texts. As a character in Upamanyu Chatterjee’s parodic English, August (1988), puts it with a great deal of irony: “Dr.Prem Krishen of Meerut University has written a book on E.M. Forster, India’s darling Englishman–most of us seem so grateful that he wrote a novel about India. Dr. Prem Krishen holds a Ph.D. on Jane Austen from Meerut University. Have you ever been to Meerut? A vile place, but comfortably Indian. What is Jane Austen doing in Meerut?” (170). The epistemological parameters of the Anglo-American canon seem to have been reexamined, but not sufficiently.

     

    Therefore critics such as Hodge and Mishra talk about the need to pay equal importance to vernacular and supplemental knowledges that were also a part of postcolonial resistances. Situated knowledges of the sort that Salman Rushdie’s work demands–Mishra and Hodge unpack the density and importance of the Shri 420 citation in The Satanic Verses to make their point–are essential to prevent complete commodification of the postcolonial into European cultural rubrics.8 So instead of simply teaching a canonical nationalist text such as Tagore’s Ghare Baire (with the added convenience of a film version for our visually-inclined generation) with his lectures on “Nationalism” or “Personality,”9 which were published in English by Macmillian, one could supplement the novel with the Bengali nationalistic popular verse, folk rhymes, songs, slogans, letters, and so forth, written in the first decades of the 1900s, which fill out the context of production.10 While there are enough people who have access to Tagore and are interested in translating him, much of this other material will be lost unless postcolonial critics pay attention to small acts of research and translation as everyday pedagogic practice. This everyday practice is perhaps best characterized as the “tactics” that Rey Chow demarcates as the postcolonial gesture of resistance; while a “strategy” involves sustaining and demarcating one’s place or “field” of power, “tactical interventions” are calculated actions that “are determined by the absence of a proper locus”–they are transitory, contingent, and fragmented, but they take over the field by eroding it “slowly” and “tactically (17). This seems to me a particularly good description of what I am suggesting here: the inclusion of vernacular and supplemental materials that are not tied to European colonial texts or frameworks or rubrics, but whose translated presence will “rethink the parameters” (Viswanathan 58) of those fields.

     

    The interaction of postcolonial texts written in English with vernacular and popular cultural texts also circumvents the critical aporia that seems to enter any conversation on world literatures in English–the old question of authenticity versus hybridity; a question that leads to part-defensive pompous claims of the sort Rushdie made in his much vilified New Yorker essay–that Indian writing in English far surpasses the vibrancy and innovation of writing in the other eighteen Indian vernaculars (Rushdie 38). His insistence of the importance of Indian writing in English can be seen as a reaction to the modernist polemics in the critical discourses on the Indian novel in English, always pitted against its vernacular–and more authentic–other. As Meenakshi Mukherjee (1993), a veteran critic of the Indian novel in English, observes: there seems to always be an “anxiety of Indianess” in the novel in English, a sensibility not integral to prose fiction in the Indian vernaculars (the bhasha novels). Writers in English always create a unified imaginative topos out of Indian heterogeneity, while bhasha writers are more tuned to local and regional specificities. Perhaps, she concludes, English has fewer registers than the vernaculars which draw on folk tales, films, riddles, nonsense verse, nursery rhymes, slogans, and street corner culture (2608). While it is certainly true that English continues to be the language of power and privilege in India, I would argue that the cultural anxiety that Mukherjee locates in the Indian novel in English, and the essentializing and homogenizing gestures she reads there, describe the genre between 1930-1980–a span that corresponds to the Nehruvian vision of a modern progressive India when there was a dire need to establish common national registers and field of communication. R.K.Narayan, Mulk Raj Anand, Raja Rao, Kamala Markandaya, and Anita Desai all fit Mukherjee’s paradigm. In post-Emergency postmodern India, the new novelists do not even attempt to capture the whole Indian reality. Arundhati Roy, whose recent novel God of Small Things (1997) has received international critical acclaim, claims to dream in English, and her novel intersperses English with untranslated Malayalam, an idiomatic mix that has–to return to Mukherjee–a very specific regional location in India.11 My point here is that new Englishes are increasingly inextricable from their cultural contexts, and a postcolonial praxis must include adequate attention to the kinds of vernacular and supplemental knowledges that Mishra and Hodge theorize in their essay.

     

    Of course, this idea of opening up the postcolonial to contextual and supplemental knowledges dovetails into the politics of translation in academia and in the publishing industry. Whenever possible we should address the politics and economics of the translations taught in class insofar as they determine the “literary” worth and “marketability” of a piece; but the concern most central to my project is the way in which the star-system within the academy regulates who gets translated and, therefore, taught. The example that comes most readily to mind is Mahasweta Devi, who has been translated by Gayatri Spivak. Spivak, of course, is eminently aware of such politics, particularly when she cautions us against producing “translatese” in Outside in the Teaching Machine:12

     

    In the act of wholesale translation into English there can be a betrayal of the democratic ideal into the law of the strongest. This happens when all the literatures of the Third World get translated into a sort of with-it translatese, so that the literature by a woman in Palestine begins to resemble, in the feel of its prose, something by a man in Taiwan. (182)

     

    But while the awareness of the “law of the strongest” is necessary, critics such as Rey Chow have cautioned against not translating Third World texts, with special reference to Asian literature:

     

    Unlike the teacher of French and German, the Asian literature teacher would almost guarantee her inaudibility if she were to insist on using the original language in a public setting. The problem she faces can be stated in this way: Does she sacrifice the specificities of language in order to generalize, so that she can put Asian literatures in a "cross-cultural" framework, or does she continue to teach untranslated texts with expertise--and remain ghettoized? (128)

     

    There are, of course, no easy answers; but a way to address both Spivak’s epistemological problem and Rey Chow’s institutional concerns is to translate performatively, so that a single text may have different variants in different acts of translation. In such a scenario, one could teach “cross culturally” (not that this is not fraught with problems!) and avoid the specialized space of Asian literature or postcolonial literature. Of course, this performative translation presupposes vernacular knowledge, a severe difficulty in teaching national literatures in several vernaculars. The radical step here would be to resist national labels such as “a specialist in Indian literature,” and to begin to understand oneself as–and train oneself to be–a teacher of more local vernaculars. The other option would be to use the translations that are readily available, in which case the translator’s position in the academy or in literary circles (whenever possible), should also be a part of the course. Students then become aware of the market that imparts literary value to a text: thus, Devi’s work is not simply treated as a “window” into the world of Indian subalterns.

     

    These issues of pedagogy, then, lead inevitably to the broader questions of ascribing literary value to a text, as well as the value of the literary itself. Rey Chow draws our attention to the status of literature in the age of cultural studies: she argues that one of the most “devastating aspects” of new technological organizations of knowledge is the “marginalization” of literature within cultural studies (132). Literature becomes “information,” and literatures from other cultures stand in the greatest danger of being commodified as reflections of other worlds. Placing literature in context of the discourses that characterize literariness, and also alongside all other cultural transmissions that relativize its value as information or great art, can circumvent some of the problems that Chow alludes to in her analysis.

     

    In Conclusion

     

    Teaching the politics of the academy, pedagogy, and the publishing industry, the relationship of academia to international public spheres, and the intersections of all kinds of cultural work with critical theory, along with our choice of postcolonial texts, offers ways to recuperate the postcolonial as cultural and political resistance. While as critics we take on an immense task of cultural imagination that charts, analyzes, critiques, and catalogs, as teachers we must hunker down to a set of strategies that combat institutional and market constraints. For instance, one option would be to conceptualize a “deep structure” to a course in which only one or two literary texts are taught, and more attention is paid to the various nodes (vernacular and supplemental knowledges, the position of writer, critic, translator, contrasting reception-contexts, and so forth) that I have outlined above. “Survey” course structures tend to hide acts of worlding. In this information age, rather than be disseminators of information, we need to teach modes of organizing that information by offering a range of tools that students can deploy to map their world. The classroom can remain a local counterpoint to global hegemonies only if we can create a place where students can debate over the cognitive matrices that will regulate their participation in a global economy.

    Notes

     

    1. See Appiah, “Is the Post- in Postmodernism the Post- in Postcolonial?”

     

    2. See Mishra and Hodge, “What is Post(-)Colonialism?”

     

    3. See Dirlik, “The Postcolonial Aura: Third World Criticism in the Age of Global Capitalism.”

     

    4. Of course, there may be an infinite number of alternative sites of cultural resistance to globalizing economies; furthermore, the classroom may be “used” in many ways other than those suggested here–e.g., outreach programs, performative self-expression, etc.–in order to become a site of resistance. My project here, however, is limited to the exploration of pedagogic imperatives as they govern the choice and inclusion of postcolonial objects and practices.

     

    5. In an address to a conference, “Writing and Thinking at the End of an Epoch,” Elke Schmitter makes a similar point in drawing our attention to the postmodern global production of literary publicity; she argues that the worlds that the authors mediate have become less relevant than the author-as-text.

     

    6. Others in this collection, Jasbar Puar, Amarpal Dhaliwal, and Anuradha Dingwaney Needham, add to the surge of critical commentary on the politics of location, diaspora, and displacement in the 1990s.

     

    7. See George Yúdice, “Postmodernity and Transnational Capitalism in Latin America”; Kumkum Sangari, “The Politics of the Possible”; and Meenakshi Mukherjee, “The Anxiety of Indianess: Our Novels in English.” For a further analysis of global interpenetration in the Indian context see Bishnupriya Ghosh and Bhaskar Sarkar, “Diaspora and Postmodern Fecundity.”

     

    8. Mishra and Hodge cite S. Aravamudan’s analysis of the 420 motif in The Satanic Verses to show how Rushdie deploys that reference to effect a critique of Islam.

     

    9. See, for example, material drawn from these lectures in Michael Sprinker’s analysis of the text, “Homeboys: Nationalism, Colonialism, and Gender in Rabindranath Tagore’s The Home and the World.”

     

    10. See Sugata Bose, “Nation as Mother: Representations and Contestations of ‘India’ in Bengali Literature and Culture.” Bose presents an account of nationalist aspirations in Bengali literature–the dominant symbols, myths, motifs, and tropes. He records how Bankimchandra Chattapadhyay’s hymn to the motherland, Bande Mataram, originally written as a filler for his journal Bangadarshan and later inserted into his nationalistic novel Anandamath (1882), was set to music by Tagore and sung at the Calcutta session of the Indian National Congress in 1896. Such vernacular cultural material fleshes out the nationalist aspirations of the Tagore text.

     

    11. For a further development of the vernacular-English debate see my essay, “An Invitation to Indian Postmodernity: Salman Rushdie’s Situated Cultural Hybridity,” forthcoming in Keith Booker, ed., Critical Essays on Salman Rushdie.

     

    12. For more on translation and postcolonial cultures see Gordon Collier, Us/Them: Translation, Transcription, and Identity in Post-Colonial Literary Cultures.

    Works Cited

     

    • “All Things Considered.” NPR. 14 June 1994.
    • “Arundhati Roy gets Booker for First Novel.” The Statesman 6 Oct. 1997: 1.
    • Altbach, Philip. “Education and NeoColonialism.” Teacher’s College Record 72.1 (May 1971): 543-558.
    • Appiah, Kwame. “Is the Post- in Postmodernism the Post- in Postcolonial?” Critical Inquiry 17.2 (1991): 41-72.
    • Bahri, Deepika. “Coming to Terms with the ‘Postcolonial.’” Between the Lines: South Asians and Postcoloniality Eds. Deepika Bahri and Mary Vasudeva. Philadelphia: Temple UP, 1996. 137-166.
    • Bose, Sugata. “Nation as Mother: Representations and Contestations of ‘India’ in Bengali Literature and Culture.” Nationalism, Democracy and Development: State and Politics in India. Eds. Sugata Bose and Ayesha Jalal. New Delhi: Oxford UP, 1997. 50-75.
    • Breckenridge, Carol A., and Peter van der Veer. “Orientalism and the Postcolonial Predicament.” Orientalism and the Postcolonial Predicament: Perspectives on South Asia. Eds. Breckenridge & van der Veer. Philadelphia: U of Pennsylvania P, 1993. 1-19.
    • Chatterjee, Upamanyu. English, August. Calcutta: Rupa & Co., 1989.
    • Chicago Cultural Studies Group. “Critical Multiculturalism.” Critical Inquiry 18 (Spring 1992). 530-562.
    • Chow, Rey. Writing Diaspora: Tactics of Intervention in Contemporary Cultural Studies. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1993.
    • Colás, Santiago. “Of Creole Symptoms, Cuban Fantasies, and Other Latin American Postcolonial Ideologies.” PMLA 110.3 (May 1995): 382-396.
    • Collier, Gordon. Us/Them: Translation, Transcription, and Identity in Post-Colonial Literary Cultures. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1992.
    • Dharwadker, Vinay. “Orientalism and the Study of Indian Literatures.” Breckenridge and Van der Deer 158-188.
    • Dirlik, Arif. “The Postcolonial Aura: Third World Criticism in the Age of Global Capitalism.” Critical Inquiry 20 (Winter 1994): 328-356.
    • Duncan, David James. “Kali Personal.” River Teeth. New York: Doubleday, 1995. 37-42.
    • Garnham, Nicholas. “The Mass Media, Cultural Identity, and the Public Sphere in the Modern World.” Public Culture 5 (1993): 251-265.
    • Ghosh, Bishnupriya. “An Affair to Remember: Scripted Performances in the ‘Nasreen Affair.” The Politics of Reception: Women in Transnational Frames. Eds. Amal Amireh and Lisa Majaj. New York: Garland Publishing, forthcoming 1999.
    • —, and Bhaskar Sarkar. “Diaspora and Postmodern Fecundity.” Communicare 16.1 (June 1997): 19-48.
    • —. “An Invitation to Indian Postmodernity: Salman Rushdie’s Situated Cultural Hybridity.” Critical Essays on Salman Rushdie. Ed. Keith Booker. New York: Twayne Publishers, forthcoming 1999.
    • Graff, Gerald. Professing Literature. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • Grewal, Inderpal. “The Postcolonial, Ethnic Studies and the Diaspora.” Socialist Review 24.4 (1994): 45-74.
    • Hall, Stuart. “The Emergence of Cultural Studies and the Crisis of the Humanities.” October 53 (Summer 1990): 11-23.
    • Huggan, Graham. “Prizing “Otherness”: A Short History of the Booker” Studies in the Novel XXIX.3 (Fall 1997): 412-433.
    • John, Binoo K. “The New Deity of Prose.” India Today 27 Oct. 1997: 23-25.
    • Katrak, Ketu. “Decolonizing Culture: Toward a Theory for Postcolonial Women’s Texts.” Modern Fiction Studies 35.1 (Spring 1989): 157-179.
    • Mazrui, Ali. A. “The “Other” as the “Self” under Cultural Dependency: the Impact of the Postcolonial University.” Encountering the Other(s). Ed. Gisela Brinker-Gabler. Albany: SUNY P, 1995. 333-362.
    • McClintock, Anne. “The Angel of Progress: The Pitfalls of the term ‘Post-Colonial.’” Social Text 31-32 (1992) 84-98.
    • Mishra, Vijay and Bob Hodge. “Salman Rushdie’s The Satanic Verses.” Diacritics 19.2 (Summer 1989): 3-20.
    • —. “What is Post(-)Colonialism?” Textual Practice 5.3 (1991): 399-414.
    • Mukherjee, Meenakshi. “The Anxiety of Indianess: Our Novels in English.” The Economic and Political Weekly 27 Nov. 1993: 2607-2611.
    • Nelson, Emmanuel S. Introduction. Bharati Mukherjee: Critical Perspectives. New York: Garland Publishing, 1993. ix-xvii.
    • Ross, Kristin. “The World Literature and Cultural Studies Program.” Critical Inquiry (Summer 1993): 666-676.
    • Roy, Arundhati. God of Small Things. New Delhi: India Ink, 1997.
    • Rushdie, Salman. “Damme, this is the Oriental scene for you!” The New Yorker 23 June 1997: 50.
    • Sangari, Kumkum. “The Politics of the Possible.” Cultural Critique. (Fall 1987): 157-186.
    • Schmitter, Elke. “Boycott Lufthansa: literature and publicity today–a few ruminations and a suggestion.” Trans. Wilhem Werthern. TriQuarterly 94 (Fall 1995): 155-60.
    • Schwarz, Henry, and Richard Dienst. “Introduction: Warning! Cautious Readers!” Schwarz and Dienst 1-14.
    • —, eds. Reading the Shape of the World: Towards an International Cultural Studies. Oxford: Westview P, 1996.
    • Shohat, Ella. “Notes on the Post-Colonial.” Social Text 31-32 (1992): 93-11.
    • Spivak, Gayatri. Outside in the Teaching Machine. New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • —. “Practical Politics of The Open End.” The Post-Colonial Critic: Interviews, Strategies, Dialogues. Ed. Sarah Harasym. New York: Routledge, 1990. 95-112.
    • Sprinker, Michael. “Homeboys: Nationalism, Colonialism, and Gender in Rabindranath Tagore’s The Home and the World.” Schwarz and Dienst 202-223.
    • Viswanathan, Gauri. Masks of Conquest: Literary Study and British Rule in India. New York: Columbia UP, 1989.
    • —. “Pedagogical Alternatives: Issues in Postcolonial Studies.” Interview. Between the Lines. Eds. Bahri and Vasudeva. 54-63.
    • “Woman in the News: Safe from Screams of Intolerance.” The Financial Times 14 August 1994.
    • Wynter, Sylvia. “On Disenchanting Discourse: ‘Minority’ Literary Criticism And Beyond.” The Nature and Context of Minority Discourse. Eds. Abdul JanMohamed and David Lloyd. London: Oxford UP, 1990. 432-469.
    • Yúdice, George. “Cultural Studies and Civil Society.” Schwarz and Dienst 50-66.
    • —. “Postmodernity and Transnational Capitalism in Latin America.” On Edge: The Crisis of Contemporary Latin American Culture. Eds. George Yúdice et al. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1992. 1-22.

     

  • Editors’ Note

    Lisa Brawley
    Stuart Moulthrop

    Co-editors

     

    With this first issue of volume nine, we introduce a new section of Postmodern Culture expressly addressed to the relay between new media technologies and cultural practice. We’ve called this section “Traffic.” To be sure, the intersection of technology, media, and cultural theory remains a central concern of the journal as a whole, but this section is reserved for work that does not conform to the conventional structure of a critical essay. Something like field notes in global information culture, Traffic will make use of the multimedia capacities of the journal to comment on technoculture in its own idiom. We invite interviews, illustrations, brief commentary, collaborative web projects, interactive syllabi, animation, and video scripts. We are especially interested in work that queries the force of new media technologies on the practices of scholarship and teaching.

     

    Also with this issue we announce the return of the PMC prize. Each June, the editorial board of Postmodern Culture will choose an outstanding critical and/or creative work published in the journal during the previous volume year. The author of this work will receive $500 and special billing on our main page.

     

     

  • The Couch Poetato: Poetry and Television in David McGimpsey’s Lardcake

    Jason Evan Camlot

    Department of English
    Stanford University
    gazon@leland.stanford.edu

     

    David McGimpsey, Lardcake.Toronto: ECW, 1997.

     

    Twenty years ago–when an attempt to critically disassemble television still seemed like a viable project–social critic Jerry Mander pointed out that this “delivery system of co mmodity life” works exclusively in one direction: “These are not metaphors. There is a concentrated passage of energy from machine to you, and none in the reverse. In this sense, the machine is literally dominant, and you are passive” (171). David McG impsey’s recent book of poems entitled Lardcake may stand as an informal rebuttal to Mander’s Four Arguments for the Elimination of Television, or as proof that on at least one occasion the ingestion of artificial light has not f ollowed the dominating process that Mander claims to be unavoidable in TV-viewing. You don’t need a Ph.D. to know not to believe everything you see on television, but McGimpsey’s doctoral work in American literature and popular culture adds an interestin g twist to his collection of poems about our most vapid obsessions. It suggests, in addition to an obvious over-exposure to television light (in McGimpsey’s house the TV must always be on), a perhaps equally “unhealthy” immersion in the institution that, traditionally, most disdains the effects of the mass media, even as it inevitably succumbs to certain elements of the logic of mass culture.

     

    As Mark Edmundson has put it in his description of the current use of liberal education “as lite entertainment for bored college students”: “University culture, like American cul ture writ large, is ever more devoted to consumption and entertainment, to the using and using up of goods and images” (40). To a new Ph.D. recipient and veteran TV-watcher like McGimpsey, the manifest ironies that emerge from this relationship between e ducation and television are useful for making insightful poetry about the most unsightly effects of our tabloid technologies. Poems that appear late in the book address the ironies directly, for instance, Master Po’s advice to Little Grasshopper–“Kill a prince & fly to USA, grasshopper / It will appear as incomplete on your transcript” (“Master Po” 72)–or the transcription of the first valedictory address at Oprah State University, in which the top graduate expounds her new learning:

     

    Now as we head out into the world
    I can look an employer square and say
    don't believe the Enquirer, feel 
       good about yourself!
    
    Next fall, I will sit down
    in my XXL OSU sweats
    and laugh at all the ridiculous headlines.
    ("Oprah State University" 73)

     

    McGimpsey’s work clearly aims at something other than an acquired knowledge of how to laugh at the headlines and the accompanying sense of empowering distance from the “ridiculou s” tabloid world. Rather, these poems reveal the overwhelming ignorance and self-deception of such a “distanced” position, and, further, how this ignorance that we all occasionally share can be emotionally poignant. A recent poetic precedent to McGimpse y’s project might be Lynn Crosbie’s Miss Pamela’s Mercy, which contains the monologue “Love Letter from Gary Coleman” and a piece called “Sabrina” about “the smart one” in Charlie’s Angels. These poems begin to sketch out the p ossibility of a serious language with which to express our experience of the purest television trash. McGimpsey’s book expands upon this possibility and actually realizes it, showing us that it is possible to speak about our lives with television in a la nguage that is crisp, elegant, and often very sad. The sadness I refer to results from the gradual revelation of the depth of our investment in the icons and images of entertainment we so casually dismiss.

     

    The book’s first section establishes the parameters of the world of Lardcake. It is a world of black humor, white enriched flour, and especially of the myriad shade s of gray that complicate the space between what we really want and what we know is “bad” for us. To weigh the value and effect of the images we consume is ultimately to put ourselves on the scale, complete with the knowledge that our taste for crap may be one of our most engrossing characteristics. How to write intelligently about our very real desire for brain candy? To begin his exploration of this ethical dilemma, the author develops a voice that provides an immanent account (perhaps a bit too imma nent to function as critique) of the intimate relationships a viewer can cultivate with the “stars” of Marshall McLuhan’s “cool” medium of television. We are given voices that morph the televised and the human in ways that suggest a new species, or, more appropriately phrased, a new brand of media consumer: the couch poet-ato.

     

    These initial poetic personae are reminiscent of the pathetic Ratso Rizzo played by Dustin Hoffman in the film Midnight Cowboy. The fantasizing poet becomes king of the Hollywood (Florida) pool-side buffet, seeking the love and recognition of those who have never really deserved to be recognized themselves. This undeserving recognition, “television success,” to use a phrase from the book, fuels McGimpsey’s own deta iled exploration of narcissism, that process by which we privately love ourselves while looking at broadcast light. The narcissism is that of the prime-time viewer and of the prime-time poet at once, and the question of the day, both in terms of why we w rite this and why we watch that, is stated concisely: “If it doesn’t appeal to narcissism / is it appealing at all?” (“Jurassic Dave” 22). In the comfort of television solitude, turned away from the peopled world, the couch poetato revels in affect and f inds a virtual community, a kind of social separation that is akin to the fantasy of canonization that fuels a community of never-to-be-discovered writers:

     

    In Aphelia House I lunge at my TV-friends
    when they say things that let me down;
    I'm less demonstrative with real people,
    preferring to avoid their meaningful 
       comparisons.
    
    .........................................
    
    There's no tragedy in Burgerworld tonight
    no woebegotten talent undiscovered;
    the world has done its work in forgetting
    Jennifer Plath, T.P. Eliot and Dave Joyce.
    ("Roger Clintonesqueria" 16-17)

     

    The meaningful comparisons of real people soon fall away even as a context that the resident of Aphelia House would hope to avoid. The second section of the book further collaps es the distance between poet-viewer and TV-friend, providing a series of monologues delivered by the protagonists of “classic” television. Here we find Charlie contemplating life with his Angels, Howard dreaming of happier days with his wife Marion, and Darrin articulating his urge for less witchcraft and more secretarial banality. Compared to the television-monologues that appear later in the volume, which are somewhat more contemporary, this cluster may be called historical or archival, and evokes a k ind of insipid, entropic aura that is perfectly appropriate to the perpetually re-run characters. These characters divulge the deep dissatisfactions that lie behind their shallow manifestations of personality. They are hungry for change, speaking repeat edly from the end of their ropes. As Charlie explains his “Reality” in one of the poems just mentioned:

     

    I am a hungry man
    I will eat my hand one day
    to calm my feelings of failure
    ("Charlie's Reality" 25)

     

    Here McGimpsey develops a thesis that suggests that the poet and his work are analogous to the life of a minor sit-com character after the show has had its first run. These unreal people–“my TV-friends”–must continue to live, no? to do somet hing. Similarly, the writer must continue to watch and attempt to show something for all that time seated and staring at rapid bits of light. He proceeds to prove that he is not impassive to television icons generally deemed meaningless, by ide ntifying the inflected opinions of these icons. The form of the dramatic monologue serves this purpose well, bringing concrete immediacy to what might previously have been approached only as, well, pre-recorded television.

     

    In one such monologue, for instance (the second in the section about Charlie’s Angels), Kelley turns to the touchstones of literature in her attempt to compose a let ter of resignation from the notorious detective agency:

     

    I've been thumbing through the book of 
       quotations
    trying to find the right way to say fuck you
    a way to slam the door like a teenaged Zeus
    
    all silver with precious hurt & insight;
    the grease of the bards is used and tasty
    & made for situations just like this.
    ("Kelly Leaves the Charles Townsend 
    Detective Agency" 33)

     

    The poetic irony (concerning poetry) is perfect; the fictional television character flipping through the “poetry listings” for a pre-cooked morsel of “used and tasty” expression, so that she might leave her own inane “situation” (comedy) behind. In Mc Gimpsey’s world, television becomes fodder for poetry, which in turn becomes the pre-fabricated means of escape from the predictability of television. The only element that is truly absent from the cycle played out in these shorter television monologues is an emotional attention span protracted and resilien t enough to tolerate the disturbing intricacies of an actual human confrontation. All of the monologues in this section are organized in three line stanzas, perhaps mimicking the diminutive capacities of the “us” of the book–we who find ourselves thumbi ng through the TV-guide so as to avoid finding “the right way to say fuck you” to our various situations.

     

    The longer poems of the third section gravitate away from the clipped stanza toward the linear density of the tightly spun yarn, and the sense of trapped urgency is consequently replaced by a more elaborate field of exploration. Still, even the long poems of the book are lean (“fat free, better for you,” McGimpsey might say), and the line becomes the crucial unit for holding the expanded world together with hard precision–like the toughness of Bukowski, but without the toughness. For although these poems are populated with important figures of white masculinity–Babe Ruth, Hank Williams–their goal is as much to penetrate the heart of white-trash sensitivity and mortality as i t is to canonize the glorious inaccessibility of the interior of such male heroes. For instance, the legend of “Babe Ruth, Yankee slugger extraordinaire, / … just another who didn’t really die,” is advanced by imagining the moment that “Babe Ruth… th roat cancer victim” checked out of the hospital:

     

    Friends, he just excused himself from the 
       hospital bed,
    too scrawny for pinstripes,
    his face drooping, badly ravaged,
    & wandered out under the weary stars
    & went somewhere altogether Ruthian
    & picked himself up a brontosaurus bone.
    ("Babe Ruth in Love" 51)

     

    This passage stands as but one example of how McGimpsey more generally convinces us of the materiality of popular legend and media fluff by bringing it all under a knife. Thus, in addition to Babe Ruth, “throat cancer victim,” we have Dr. Huxtable’s graphic back surgery, “a mysterious virus” in the neck of Bill Stedman (of Hawaii Five-O), and bits of the dying thirtysomething characters being taken by t he river “under the ice to a Delaware beach” (“All the thirtysomething Characters Die” 69). This interest in the deteriorating bodies of the stars is another means of exploring the narcissism of our love for the comfort of h eadline gossip. While tabloids help us to obsess about the gravitational status of Oprah (and ourselves), McGimpsey helps us to recognize the narcissism and the selflessness that exist simultaneously in our concern for a famous stranger’s body. As the b ook’s thirtysomething poem states, “what sells isn’t sex or product performance / but bittersweet emotion” (69). This is the challenge that McGimpsey takes upon himself: to write effectively about the sentimental glue that holds our prime-ti me world together without succumbing to saccharinity, but without denying the sweetness of saccharin, either. Remarkably, he achieves this difficult balance with consistent success.

     

    My favorite poem of the book, “In Memoriam: A.H. Jr.,” provides an excellent example of how McGimpsey succeeds in corporealizing the immaterial cliché of sit-com personali ty. While the Tennysonian title and pretense of this homage to the actor Alan Hale, who played the Skipper on Gilligan’s Island, suggest parody, the result is startlingly the opposite, an account of a television personality in his final days of cancer and chemotherapy that integrates motifs from the “show” and “real life” in such a way that the physical reality of what we watch comes through with remarkable effect.

     

    He'd say "when I get back to civilization
    I'll tell you exactly what I'm going to do:
    I'm going to have a tall glass of cold beer
    & I won't spill a drop.
    I'm going to order a steak, New York cut,
    medium rare & two inches thick."
    How thick?  "Two inches thick!"
    In the plate will rest the slightest residue:
    blood, spice & fat
    agents of flavor after the meat is gone.
    ("In Memoriam: A.H. Jr." 50)

     

    But what are we to make of all of this graphic bodily decrepitude in a book of poems about television? Even the Lynn Crosbie piece mentioned earlier has Gary Coleman “hooked up to a machine” (probably for treatment of his kidney disorder). Most likely it comes from the natural realization that, in the end, the emotional sustenance we acquire from television–and in this sense we are all hooked up to machines, in palliative care –resides purely in the “agents of flavor” because “the meat” is always already gone. Thus, to give a body to an ephemeron from television, and then to watch it waste away, is ultimately to give the medium the dignity of death, something that, in my pre- Lardcake experience, it had never had. Previously in my mind shows were simply canceled. Now I begin to understand a more significant mourning, one that may be embarrassing to admit. What is so admirable about McGimpsey’s articulation of su ch mourning is that it is completely remorseless. Don’t bother trying to remind me now that television is an inherently “cool” medium:

     

    Saying it was only a TV show
    is like saying it was only a friend,
    only my brother, only my father.
    ("In Memoriam: A.H. Jr." 49)

    Works Cited

     

    • Crosbie, Lynn. Miss Pamela’s Mercy. Toronto: Coach House Press, 1992.
    • Edmundson, Mark. “On the Uses of a Liberal Education: I. As lite entertainment for bored college students.” Harper’s Magazine 295 (September 1997): 39-49.
    • Mander, Jerry. Four Arguments for the Elimination of Television. New York: Morrow, 1978.
    • McGimpsey, David. Lardcake. Toronto: ECW, 1997.

     

  • Living Writing: The Poethics of Hélène Cixous

    Adele Parker

    Department of Comparative Literature
    SUNY Binghamton
    74613.1577@compuserve.com

     

    Hélène Cixous and Mireille Calle-Gruber, Hélène Cixous, Rootprints: Memory and Life Writing.Trans. Eric Prenowitz. London: Routledge, 1997.

     

    Mireille Calle-Gruber laments that Cixous is primarily known in this country for her essays in feminist theory, when many readers who most appreciate her have come to her through her fiction. Rootprints is a look at the roots of Cixous’s writing process and the ways in which her fiction embodies the concerns of her theory: sexual difference, alterity and exchange, the unstable play of signifiers and the multiple subjectivities found within the human body. This book serves as a useful introduction to Cixous, but is also rewarding for those already familiar with her work.

     

    A straightforward (auto)biography would never do; instead we have seven sections written by four people, befitting Cixous’s pluralistic project. In addition to interview-like pieces written by Cixous and Calle-Gruber, Derrida has written an essay, and Eric Prenowitz, Cixous’s translator, offers an afterword. While knowledge of French renders the lexical lability more pleasurable to the reader, Prenowitz’s meticulous annotated translation minimizes loss of meaning.

     

    The meat of the book is in the first piece, “Inter Views,” a discussion between Calle-Gruber and Cixous that delves into many of her important themes: love, mourning, desire and jouissance, time and writing. Boxes of text placed throughout are windows onto Cixous’s notebooks. Cixous states that her best-known essays were deliberately didactic and meant only to mark a particular ideological moment, to clarify a position; to do that she “left her own ground,” sat down, stopped textual movement. Poetic imagination is her true ethical responsibility.

     

    What is most true is poetic because it is not 
       stopped-stoppable.
    All that is stopped, grasped, all that is 
       subjugated, easily transmitted,
    easily picked up, all that comes under the word 
       concept, which is to say all that is taken, 
       caged, is less true. (4)

     

    True reading and writing always move ahead, they do not sit and wait to be appropriated; she suggests this is why people often have difficulty engaging with her work. We desire to use language for closure, for exclusion and repression; to define and contain. This is not to say that Cixous is careless, passive in letting speech speak. One can only write in being “carried away on the back of these funny horses that are metaphor” (28); but she holds the reins. She trains the many shoots of her words to take different paths, like vines. Writing, like loving, is powerful, it dictates, but it is also an action, something that we do, that we risk, that is presence itself and yet never present, never known:

     

    ...the factor of instability, the factor of uncertainty, or what Derrida calls the undecidable, is indissociable from human life. This ought to oblige us to have an attitude that is at once rigorous and tolerant and doubly so on each side: all the more rigorous than open, all the more demanding since it must lead to openness, leave passage; all the more mobile and rapid as the ground will always give way, always. (52)

     

    Writing for Cixous is indissociable from reading, from living, and from her body. She wants to write on her own insides, on her skin as Stendhal wrote on his waistband. Yet she does not write to know herself–although one can come to a re-cognition of self through writing–rather she writes to know a particular instant. Her passion for theater lies in the fact that a staged play is always in the moment. She tries to write the present, which is an impossibility; yet in the trying, writing is transformed.

     

    Her writing always reconfigures intersubjectivity, with her “further-than-myself in myself” (56) and “myself as the first other” (90); “the other in all his or her forms gives me I” (13). We live always as various people, in a variety of times; life is lived in multiple registers. As breathing on a mirror blurs one’s own image, so the f/act of living prevents one from seeing oneself clearly. “It is the other who makes my portrait” (13). Yet writing begins not just with thinking closely but looking closely, a metaphor for which is Cixous’s own extreme nearsightedness (which gives her such a dreamy look in photographs): she does not see the world as it is “supposed” to be seen; she must concentrate on details and use her other senses fully.

     

    At times in these essays, the remarks of interviewer and interviewee elicit appreciation from the other; at other times disagreement or confusion. The very linguistic opacity they are discussing is illustrated by this seemingly abrupt appearance of language at the moment of misunderstanding. At one point, Calle-Gruber describes the “shock of the other” as a break, a point of rupture, while Cixous experiences it as a membrane or a wound. For Cixous, the shock of the other is not a site of disconnection but an event: “either I die, or a kind of work takes place” (16). The scar is the story that results. Where Calle-Gruber perceives an irreparable breach, Cixous sees a “fruitful mishap.” They play out the encounter with the other. Calle-Gruber is as eloquent as Cixous; they flex and fashion language between them.

     

    The section termed “Appendices” consists of two short pieces. The first is by Derrida on the dream of an ant that Cixous recounted to him over the phone, which leads him into a meditation on difference, fable and gift, and movements of separation and reparation, or séparéunion, in her work. Cixous and Derrida grew up near each other in Algeria, although they did not meet until 1962, and there are many similarities in their philosophical projects. As an example of how she uses the idiom to pick language apart Derrida looks at the phrase tous les deux–an idiom that means “both” but that literally translates as “all the twos.” Cixous elsewhere uses this phrase to take issue with the term bisexuality, which she used in the well-known essay “The Laugh of the Medusa.” Why only two, she asks, why not “all the twos”–all the dualities, all the oppositions, as well as the entredeux, the in-betweens. In the second piece in this section, Cixous speaks of her vision of Derrida and his writing with his body, dipping his pen in his own blood, and about Stendhal and growing older (turning 60) while attempting to see the color of one’s own mind with one’s own eyes.

     

    There follow three essays by Calle-Gruber, grouped under the title “Portrait of the Writing,” on particular works of fiction and what is at stake in them. The first, “Writing-thinking” discusses FirstDays of the Year (Minnesota, 1997). Calle-Gruber discusses Cixous’s rule of uncertainty, of deferral of meaning, “and this, so that writing should return from afar, from nothing, from before the History of every story… in order that… it should strike us with the surprise of a book” (139). Calle-Gruber suggests that the Cixousian book is “mourning and gift” (140), mourning for all the unwritten books that this written book has displaced. Nothing is ever what we think it is; writing never begins or ends or succeeds in its attempts. Writing is an attempt itself, a matter of “weak force” (141), never mastery; the body and not the head.

     

    Calle-Gruber’s essay “Cixous Genre Outlaw” poses the question of genre, which in French refers to gender and genus as well as genre, literary or otherwise. And of course “it’s all genres in Cixous’s works. And then some” (149). The adverbial pronoun “Y,” generally meaning “there,” is the sign her writing “attempts to compose-invent” (149). “Y” is neither one nor two. It has meaning but not in itself; it is a sign of a crossroads, of parting, of growth. Calle-Gruber looks at three works, Neutre, Déluge, and On ne part pas, on ne revient pas, to find the interplay of gender that is so pervasive and important in Cixous’s work. Switching masculine and feminine articles is not simply a game but a systematic opening of doors, of passages between the two. Changing a letter (un to une, la to le) or a colon changes meaning, and opens it up to infinity: “Loving not knowing. Loving: not knowing” (17).

     

    The third essay, “Hélène Cixous’s Book of Hours, Book of Fortune,” looks at time and at the making of time by narrative, by the happening of meaning: the instant. It addresses the contradictions of being human, and of living to be a better human: open to, not closed to. It addresses language as un-naming and re-connection; it addresses art and fear and risk. Finally, it addresses love that is “the mainspring of writing… the secret of her art’s vitality” (174). Love is a scale Cixous plays in the constantly changing key of living and writing the moment. “To be in the depths of anguish, ready to die and to say to oneself: and what’s more, tomorrow I’m going to have puffy eyes, this is us” (20). Calle-Gruber seems to watch all this and then offer a view from the margin, wherever the margin is. The impossibility of knowing or speaking the other adds surplus to the already overflowing text.

     

    Compelling memories and associations form the piece of lifewriting entitled “Albums and Legends,” wherein Cixous recounts details of her childhood and family, and includes photographs and a family tree that is haunted by many deaths in concentration camps. Speaking of a photo of her grandfather’s grave next to a photo of him in uniform, she tells us to read it as Hebrew, from right to left: first the soldier, then the grave. This passage enriches our knowledge of the very real roots of Cixous’s multiplicitous approach in the plural genealogies of family, neighborhood, city. Born in Oran to a Spanish/Arab father and a German mother (from Osnabrück), she lives with a strong Nordic presence within her Mediterranean body. Her own childhood was “accompanied and illustrated” (181) by the Northern childhood of her mother (a midwife), as well as of her grandmother Omi (anagram of moi). She lived masculine possibility as well, always close to her slightly younger brother, her other: “Hélène-and-Pierre” (208). The double of that relation is found in her own daughter and son. She felt when her father died that she had to become the father, for family survival and honor, a “mutilating mutation of identity”(197). A doctor with tuberculosis–illness inscribed in the healer himself, a “veiled death,”–he kept a physical distance from his beloved children while engaging in Joycean word play that set Cixous down in the midst of language at an early age. Having recounted her experiences of exclusion and exile, as foreign, as Jewish, as female, she states clearly what runs through all of her texts: “I adopted an imaginary nationality which is literary nationality” (204).

     

    The chronology begins not with Cixous’s birth (5 June 1937) but with her father’s death (12 February 1948), the moment when she was thrown into writing (not daring actively to write until she was 27). She has explored/imagined a relationship with her father in depth in a recent text Or: les lettres de mon père (des Femmes, 1997), and in a shorter piece, “Job the Dog,” reveals the discrimination her family experienced in Algeria after his death and its terrible effects. Instances of her political activism are here–although she says the political comes last for her–including starting the first doctoral women’s studies program in Europe, which would have been a program in sexual difference if she had had her say. She has worked closely with Lacan–beginning in the early sixties when he wanted to learn about Joyce–and with many of her fellow leading intellectuals.

     

    Not only her prolific output is documented in the bibliography, but the impressive range of her reading and knowledge: the dissertation on Joyce; her kinship with the work of Clarice Lispector; articles on Henry James, Iris Murdoch, Genet, Lewis Carroll, and many on theater, as well as those on politics and art. Numerous writers serve as constant reference points throughout her work: Shakespeare, Montaigne, Kleist, Dostoevsky, Tsvetaeva, among others. She has been translated into at least a dozen languages.

     

    In “Aftermaths,” Eric Prenowitz approaches Cixous’s approach, follows her following the movement of writing. Her thinking and observation form a science, a “cixouscience,” though the observer and observed will always be called into question, “aware that the unknown is on both sides of the quest to know” (243). And we don’t know which side is which, or where the boundary is, we don’t know where the limits are. That there are limits somewhere is what allows hope: we fill them in with hope. At the limit is exchange itself, what passes continuously between differences, the passage between others, between two impossibilities. Rather than being an epicenter of displaced meaning, translation here is one more movement in the continuous textual activity of deferral and disruption. Prenowitz describes Rootprints as “opening a new trail through a remarkable archive of dated phenomena” (247).

     

    Any woman writing “from the body” will be accused of essentialism, no matter that she points out examples of “écriture féminine” in the works of male authors. This is a concern many readers of Cixous have expressed over the years; does she propose a totalizing view of the body, demonstrate a lack of awareness of cultural, historical, economic impact on woman’s relation to her self? Does she over-emphasize the nurturing feminine, the maternal? Perhaps; at the same time she recognizes the body as a cliché like any other. Rootprints does not clear up these questions. What we can take away from it is another perspective from which to view Cixous’s immense capacity for life, as well as her rigorous writing-thinking process.

     

    There are many gems to be found here. Cixous’s courage and generosity inform her words, and encourage those who have not yet tried (or have tried unsuccessfully) to tackle her longer texts.

     

  • Post-Mortem Photography: Gilles Peress and the Taxonomy of Death

    Francois Debrix

    Department of International Relations
    Florida International University
    debrixf@fiu.edu

     

    Gilles Peress, Farewell to Bosnia. New York: Scalo, 1994; and The Silence. New York: Scalo, 1995.

     

    Gilles Peress and Eric Stover, The Graves: Srebrenica and Vukovar. New York: Scalo, 1998.

     

    You’re like a living tentacle that’s lifting, reaching around all this death, trying to pull it out.

     

    –William Haglund, forensic anthropologist (1998)

     

    The postmortem condition describes a situation where even the uncivilized productions of unscheduled catastrophe become perversely elaborated objects of spectatorship.

     

    –Gregory Whitehead (1993)

     

    Photojournalism has traditionally thrived on the representation of human destruction and death. Since 1855 when Roger Fenton was dispatched to the Crimean War by the British government to “take photographs that would reassure the public,” documentary photography has been a booming industry (Price 1963). Throughout the 20th century, governments, research institutes, and print and/or visual media have perfected this visual practice with the hope that it would not simply “reassure the public,” but also, and more importantly, provide both authentic knowledge and an endless source of spectacularity. Through the years, photojournalistic displays have owed their success to visual curiosity as a mode of inquiry or, simply, as a form of voyeuristic enjoyment.

     

    Photographic journalist Gilles Peress has situated his work in this long tradition of visual representation of war and death. His early works on Iran and Northern Ireland were fairly typical photo-journalistic renditions of social life, human struggle, and political conflict in not-so-far-removed lands. Like most documentary photography, Peress’s work (his early reports and his more recent ones) is intended to awaken the curiosity of the Western viewer. For the Western viewer who consumes documentary photography in the safe confines of his/her late-twentieth century domestic comfort, the snapshots of war, drama, and human survival are always about “strangers,” some nameless or otherwise all-too famous “others,” whose reality can be perceived only through the photograph. Not unlike the work of his photojournalistic colleagues in other parts of the world, Peress’s early visions of Iran and Northern Ireland easily found their way to the pages of popular news periodicals such as Time, Newsweek, or Paris-Match where they were treated by the general public as common household items, shocking and yet familiar.

     

    Peress’s recent work in Bosnia and Rwanda marks a crucial change both in his aesthetic approach to photojournalism and in the meaning of this visual medium. Starting with Farewell to Bosnia, a visual travel-log of war and its effects in the early years of the Bosnian conflict, and continuing with his latest photographic narratives of death and forensic archeology in both Rwanda and Bosnia, Peress adds to the realism of his images a moral message and a political positioning on the issue of brutal violence, gratuitous death, and genocide. Peress does not simply bombard the viewer with arresting photos. He now embeds his snapshots in written texts: letters he wrote to friends while in Bosnia; a chronology of events and specific UN documents about Rwanda; a text by human rights scholar Eric Stover in the last volume, The Graves. These texts are not intended to offer a deciphering key to the photos displayed in these three volumes. Rather, the texts and the images can be taken as a whole. The aesthetic product is different from typical photojournalistic collections as we now have a dialogue between two modes of communication, a combination of verbal and visual signification which seeks to exacerbate the feeling of moral outrage and intensifies the power of the political message: namely, something must be done to stop genocide. Peress’s new approach to photography seeks to open up the photo-journalistic medium by rendering it less realistically superficial (a moment frozen in time with no story to tell) and making it more emotionally engaged and humanly engaging. For Peress, photography is not an exercise of visual production and/or consumption anymore. It is not simply a technology that potentially gives rise to sensationalistic visions. It is also an instrument which facilitates the deployment of ethico-political positions for the artist involved with this technical medium. As such, photo-journali sm becomes an invitation to share, partake, empathize. By making documentary photography into a more ethically and emotionally involved technique, Peress also seeks to direct the perception of the viewer. In an attempt to contain casual, prurient, or voyeuristic uses of his images of death, Peress’s new photographic genre–his embedding of documentary photos with strategically chosen texts–conditions and constrains the reading that one might perform from his visual records alone. But as I’ll discuss below, his use of text has an ironic effect; it gets no closer to representing death in its horrible finality; it simply installs death in a more complex set of representations equally open to refusal and misrepresentation. The documents that result from this pairing of text with image are no more adequate than classic photojournalism to the task of representing that which defies representation.

     

    One may speculate at length on the strategic reasons for this change of aesthetic perspective.1 It seems more interesting, however, to examine and question the choice of this new photojournalistic method and assess the effects that it seeks to produce on the part of potential viewers/readers. Again, the photography of death is not a new enterprise, but Peress has certainly turned it into a different artistic practice. Peress’s novel approach to war photojournalism (or post-war as the case may be) has important consequences for visual curiosity as both a method of knowledge and a mode of spectacularity. I believe that the signification of this photographic practice is intricately related to what can be called a “visual taxonomy of death.” As literary critic and poet Susan Stewart has explained, taxonomy can be seen as “an antidote to emotion and surplus meaning” (37). The taxonomy of death is what Peress’s post-mortem photography is all about: the carefully staged re-organization of death and its image in a system of meaning that can attempt to account for, if not precisely to comprehend, the forms of dying that most defy comprehension. As a form of taxonomic organization, the photography of death and war (and death in war) is not only reassuring for the general public, but, more revealingly, comforting for the photographer/artist himself and those for whom he operates (governments, research institutes, art galleries and museums, print and visual media).

     

    Farewell to Bosnia is a collection of photos to which texts and letters have been added toward the end. Before being turned into a book, Farewell to Bosnia was a touring visual exhibit which was displayed in museums and galleries in Europe and North America.2 The photos were taken during the first years of the conflict in Bosnia and they represent scenes of “daily life” under war conditions. As Peress travels inside Bosnia from Tuzla to Sarajevo, he takes devastating, shocking, and heart-rending pictures of what he witnesses: mutilated bodies; endless lines of displaced people; mothers, sisters, and wives crying over the inanimate bodies of their loved ones; urban destruction beyond repair…. Again, these photos, as visual testimonies of destruction and death as it takes place, need to be “read” in conjunction with the written texts that accompany them. In one of these texts, a letter to a friend back home, Peress writes: “I remembered my father, his amputated arm and his pain, his descriptions of addiction to morphine, of World War II, the German occupation and the concentration camps” (161). For Peress, the scenes of death and destruction that he captured with his camera are not proper to Bosnia. They do not tell the story of Bosnia. They are the product of another, larger narrative of death and destruction of which Bosnia is no doubt part. The visions of Bosnia’s human suffering and anguish remind him of the universality of war and death. The images of Bosnia are thus repackaged, reinterpreted. The work of photojournalism is no longer, can no longer be a matter of “objective reality.”3 Bosnia’s visions of death are part of Peress’s memory (that of his father with his World War II stories) and of everyone’s memories too. In fact, Peress suggests, in all its gruesomeness, there is nothing unique about death as it occurs in Bosnia. What Bosnia evokes, rather, is the sound of “distant echoes of a recent past” (161).

     

    Peress’s Farewell to Bosnia opens up a narrative of death and destruction to which his subsequent books, The Silence and The Graves, try to bring closure. Yet, taken together, the three produce what I’m calling a taxonomy of death, a taxonomy in which Farewell to Bosnia occupies a central place. Death is introduced, yet disavowed. It is visually depicted, yet reduced to an exercise of memorization, of historical recollection (it is all about the memories of the past, the memories of a past that always returns). Death, as Peress would have it, cannot be recognized as a fateful/fatal natural phenomenon (even when and if it is caused by man-made forces). It has to be tied to and explained by human practices, social struggles, and war. Without these, the anxiety of death would not exist. This work of disavowal, the beginning of the process of visual taxonomy, is what Susan Stewart refers to as a “work of mourning.” Using Freud’s seminal work on the psychological responses to death, Stewart explains that the natural inevitability of death is replaced by a series of mental, rational, or scientific operations that deny death, and thus seek to reactivate life by situating death in a larger historico-temporal process, such as the universality of the human species, the continuity of scientific research which seeks to reduce the causes of death, the eternity of life on another metaphysical plane of existence, and so on. In her reading of early American painter Charles Willson Peale’s life and art, Stewart explains that Peale’s anxiety over death and its occurrence was covered by a visual support (namely painting) which he used as a way of expressing animation, motion, that which survives and endures. As an anecdote, she recounts the fact that the only time Peale painted death (a painting titled “Rachel Weeping” which shows a mother crying over the bed of her dead child), he could never show the painting in the open. He always kept it hidden behind a curtain (37-40). Peress’s photojournalistic exploration of Bosnia is similarly a work of disavowal. While Peress seizes the visions of individuals in distress or actually dying in front of his eyes, there is a sense in which he never actually sees them. What he sees, rather, and hopes to show to the world through his work as a photojournalist, is a story of war and destruction, despair and dramatization larger than any of the individual scenes he depicts. In a sense, Peress replaces the brutal realist rendition of death with a melancholic representation of the violence of human history. At this level of collective abstraction and historical categorization, death becomes paradoxically more palatable. The ironic effect of his new approach to photojournalism is that Peress seems to return to the original intent of documentary photography: to “reassure the public,” to comfort and buffer the media and the public that will consume his work.

     

    Peress’s The Silence, the second of the three works I address in this review, takes him to Rwanda where he travelled in the immediate aftermath of the April-May 1994 ethnic conflict between Hutus and Tutsis. There, Peress follows the succession of events that saw the massacre of Tutsis by Hutus in April, and the subsequent counter-offensive of Tutsis that pushed the Hutus into the refugee camps of eastern Zaire in the summer of 1994. Peress, with a touch of cruel irony combined with hope, presents the events in a threefold sequence. He titles the three successive moments “the sin,” “purgatory,” and “the judgment.” “The sin” is loaded with some of the most ghastly photos that Peress has probably ever taken. The shock value is evident. Photos of young children’s faces maimed and deformed by the repeated blows of machetes, a shirt and a pair of mud-covered trousers out of which broken bones with remnants of decaying flesh protrude, an agonizing child thrown next to a slaughtered cow in a pool of blood. Similar photos were shown in the Western media in the summer of 1994, but none of them were as lurid as Peress’s. Peress conveys his overt disgust admirably well and powerfully, with a sense of unbearable density as he multiplies the shots of brutal death and torture page after page. The subsequent sections, “purgatory” and the “judgment,” which cover the escape of the Hutus into Zaire and their battle with epidemics and death in the refugee camps, are just as visually nauseating as the early section.

     

    If these disturbing images invoke classical photojournalism at its spectacular best (or worst), the book’s section titles suggest that Peress is after something more here. With titles such as “sin,” “purgatory,” and “judgment,” Peress seeks to install these photographs in a religious narrative of redemption. Yet, precisely because of the multivalence that inheres in the pairing of image and text, this redemption narrative is powerfully multivalent. On the one hand, Peress’s camera seems to make sense of senseless violence by bringing the truthful power of vision to scenes of useless death. In this sense, the photographer himself operates as a messiah in this God-forsaken place, saving death from meaninglessness by installing it in a Judeo-Christian narrative of human sin, of the eternal struggle between Good and Evil, Heaven and Hell. As evil, death is, at least, meaningful. Thus death, even here in its most graphic and violent form, takes its place in a larger system of meaning; it no longer seems quite so ugly and final. A sentence, attached by Peress to the opening and the closing of this volume, seems to speak of the desire to ward off the naturalness of death by bringing it to another, supernatural plane of existence. The sentence reads: “A prisoner, a killer is presented to us, it is a moment of confusion, of fear, of prepared stories. He has a moment to himself… As I look at him he looks at me.” The final shot s hows the “killer” looking up at the camera, as if facing his supreme Judge. It appears, for a moment, that there is some possibility of redemption in Rwanda; that there is a hope, captured by Peress’s camera, that the torturers will be apprehended and that they will repent. Yet, on the other hand, the images themselves, in their speechless, unspeakable horror, resist the very taxonomy the section titles would impose and thus call into question not only whether anything like justice can ever be achieved in Rwanda, but also whether divine justice, the Judeo-Christian concept of redemption itself, is adequate to the scale of human horror and death the book so abundantly registers. To return to the book’s final image: it is a picture of a man not otherwise recognizable as a killer except in the accompanying text that identifies him: a man, not a monster; a man, meeting eye to eye, another man, and through that man, the eye of all who look on. What is pictured then–quite apart from what is written–is, finally, not a moment of judgment, but of silent, inscrutable recognition.

     

    In Farewell to Bosnia, Peress combines stark images of death with more accessible narratives of personal memory. In The Silence, he pairs images of mass brutality in Rwanda with multivalent narratives of religious redemption. Finally, in The Graves, Peress turns to science and forensic medicine to find a text to parallel the violence he has encountered and captured as a photojournalist. Ralph Rugoff once wrote about forensic photography that in such a visual/clinical practice “the dead come alive” (183). The theme of re-animation is no doubt predominant throughout this photo-report co-authored by Gilles Peress and Eric Stover. The Graves narrates Peress and Stover’s coverage of the forensic efforts of anthropologists after the war in Bosnia. Specifically, Peress and Stover follow the work of two forensic anthropologists, William Haglund and Andrew Thomson, as they are in charge, in 1996, of excavating mass graves in Vukovar and Srebrenica. Mandated by the UN, and supported by the Boston-based organization Physicians for Human Rights, Haglund and Thomson are to gather scientific evidence for an international war crimes tribunal.

     

    While Stover’s essay is a textual diary of the forensic technicians’ activities and discoveries, Peress’s photos serve as a documentary supplement. Stover uses the forensic discoveries to re-imagine and re-create the idiosyncratic stories of each of the bones and pieces of flesh and clothing found in the graves. Here, forensic science is used as hard evidence, proof of a human drama that can be reconstructed piece by piece after the fact. Stover describes the meticulous task of the forensic researchers:

     

    During autopsies the forensic experts had removed teeth and sections of bone from the Srebrenica bodies and had sent them to the laboratories of Mary-Claire King, a molecular geneticist at the University of Washington. Michelle Harvey, a geneticist with Physicians for Human Rights, extracts DNA from these samples to compare it with DNA in blood samples taken from relatives. It remained to see whether DNA testing would be able to identify many of the Srebrenica men. The large number of teeth and bone samples, collected under less than optimum conditions, could easily have been contaminated by mishandling or the presence of bacterial DNA on the specimens. (174)

     

    The language here is descriptive, technical, rigorous, an exposition on forensic research and its inherent difficulties. But Stover’s account does not stop here. Forensic science has a story to tell. Forensic anthropology only matters to the extent that it makes the dead speak, that it re-evokes life. Stover partakes of this re-animation through forensic science by repeatedly recalling the specific stories of Bosnians during the war, such as the the women of Srebrenica, Drazen Erdemovic, the Croat soldier who joined the Bosnian-Muslim army, and the survivors of the Kravica massacre. This is also where Peress’s photos gather their meaning within this volume. Peress’s pictures of the “make-shift morgue” in Kalesija are no longer showing the victims or what’s left of them. The visual focus is now clearly on the uncovered fragments of life: personal items, old torn-up photos of family members, children’s drawings found with the clothes, et cetera. Life and death are juxtaposed.

     

    According to writer and audio artist Gregory Whitehead, the post-mortem condition has its origin in “the corresponding looking place of the forensic theater, built–at least in p rinciple–to pick up the pieces” (230). The forensic theater, as displayed by Stover and Peress, is a spectacle. It is a spectacular event in which death is turned into life, re-animated. Only under this condition, when it re-creates life, can death be accepted, justified. The (very literal) taxonomy of death generated by forensic photography is, to use Stewart’s vocabulary, a spectacle of “de-realization.” This suggests that the forensic theater is a deceptive practice. Forensic photography fools the eye of the viewer and is used “as a means of defense, keeping the irreducible fact of a boundary between life and death at bay” (Stewart 44). Scientifically and clinically re-organized, the naturalness of death is once again fetishized. While the forensic theater replays its scenes of excavation of bones and flesh, death is not seen. Forensic photography covers death by showing the spectacle of a meticulously and scientifically reconstructed life. As Stover intimates,

     

    [r]econstructing human behavior from physical evidence is like piecing together a multidimensional puzzle. Pieces may be missing, damaged, or even camouflaged, but each piece has its place. The challenge is to find the fragments, reconstruct them, and chart their placement in an accurate manner. (158; my emphasis)

     

    In his essay “The Gift of Death,” Jacques Derrida writes that “[m]ost often we neither know what is coming upon us nor see its origin; it therefore remains a secret. We are afraid of the fear, we anguish over the anguish, we tremble” (54). This statement seems to speak directly to Peress’s treatment of death in these three works. Peress’s overt visual fixation on death is a manner of keeping the myth of death intact, of maintaining death as a forever inscrutable secret. We must fear death because we do not know what it is, or when it arrives, because we cannot come to grips with it. The accounts of death offered by Peress in his photographic essays do not, cannot, represent death in its materiality. Rather, they provide substitute discourses in which death is superseded, ignored, disavowed. The reality of death is replaced by narratives of life that nonetheless keep us anxiously guessing as to what death may be. The discourses of history (past memories), divine salvation (the final judgment), and science (the forensic theater) keep the suspense of death intact as they deflect the attention of the photographer and his public toward other preoccupations. Instead of “realizing” death, it has become much more important to “organize” it. Death is no longer a fatality. It has become a taxonomy.

     

    Peress offers an ironic reversal of the initial principle and intent of photojournalism to reassure viewers even while disturbing them. In abandoning a realist approach, Peress’s photos “de-realize” the world captured by his camera, and may well have contributed to the creation of a new aesthetic genre: de-realist documentary photography. This de-realist photojournalism–discovered in his close encounters with death and its post-mortem sublimations–is no longer comfortable with the early photojournalistic requirement of visual curiosity. Yet, it seems clear that no modality of presentation can fully rescue photojournalistic reports from unintended, voyeuristic uses. By grafting layers of signification, organization, and taxonomy onto visual reports, de-realist photography installs images of unfathomable modes of dying within fathomable structures of human meaning. Thus even here, in Peress’s powerful and critical innovation, we are finally reassured; we remain saved from death.

     

    Notes

     

    1. This change may be explained by the fact that other popular visual media (television, video, Internet) have now supplanted classical documentary photography in the art of producing shock value images (Kirby).

     

    2. This photo-exhibit tour stopped in Washington, D.C.’s Corcoran Gallery, the Photomuseum Winterthur in Switzerland, the Museum of Contemporary Photography in Chicago, P.S. 1, Queens, New York, the Rhode Island College Art Center, and New Langton Arts in San Francisco. Farewell to Bosnia has also been made available by the “Picture Projects” group (a showcase for documentary photography) on the Internet. Picture Projects’ curators Alison Cornyn, Sue Johnson, and Chris Vail have embedded the photos into the texts contained in the volume, a technique of immediate materialization of both image and text that Internet technology makes possible.

     

    3. A claim often associated with documentary photography. Yet, as Derrick Price rightly observes, the documentary camera provides “not the objective facts that [are] craved by positivism, but accounts of the world in which ‘truth’ [is] achieved through the power of the image-maker” (66).

    Works Cited

     

    • Derrida, Jacques. The Gift of Death. Trans. David Wills. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1995.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “On Transience.” Freud, Character, and Culture. Ed. Philip Rief. New York: Collier, 1963. 148-151.
    • —. “Mourning and Melancholia.” The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works. Vol. 14. London: Hogarth, 1955-74. 237-258.
    • Kirby, Lynne. “Death and the Photographic Body.” Fugitive Images: From Photography to Video. Ed. Patrice Petro. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1995. 72-84.
    • Peress, Gilles. Telex Iran. Publisher unknown, 1984. Later reprinted as Telex: Iran, In the Name of Revolution. New York: Scalo, 1998.
    • Price, Derrick. “Surveyors and Surveyed: Photography out and about.” Photography: A Critical Introduction. Ed. Liz Wells, New York: Routledge, 1997. 57-102.
    • Rugoff, Ralph. Circus Americanus. New York: Verso, 1995.
    • Stewart, Susan. “Death and Life, in that Order, in the Works of Charles Willson Peale.” Visual Display: Culture beyond Appearances. Discussions in Contemporary Culture No. 10. Eds. Lynne Cooke and Peter Wollen. Seattle: Bay Press, 1995. 31-53.
    • Whitehead, Gregory. “The Forensic Theater: Memory Plays for the Postmortem Condition.” The Politics of Everyday Fear. Ed. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993. 229-241.

     

  • Cyberdrama in the Twenty-First Century

    Patrick Cook

    Department of English
    George Washington University
    pcook@gwu.edu

     

    Janet H. Murray, Hamlet on the Holodeck: The Future of Narrative in Cyberspace.New York: The Free Press, 1997.

     

    The finest writing on what some call the current communications revolution more often than not has emerged from the keyboards of scholars who combine training in the humanities with mastery of computers and cyberculture. Janet Murray fits this description as well as anyone, and her Hamlet on the Holodeck is the product of the creative interaction of both aspects of her thinking self. In addition to being a scholar of Victorian literature adept at drawing upon modern literary and cultural theory, she is also Director of the Program in Advanced Interactive Narrative Technology and Senior Research Scientist in the Center for Educational Computing Initiatives at MIT. Her outstanding book, which Library Journal named one of two “best computer books” of 1997, is at once a primer for the uninitiated, a historically and technically informed analysis of recent developments in electronically enabled storytelling, and a visionary prediction of how we may experience narrative in the more fully digitized future.

     

    Murray begins with Captain Kathryn Janeway, starship captain in the Star Trek: Voyager series, interacting with the Victorian characters who inhabit her holonovel in the virtual reality of her ship’s holodeck. The episode “marks a milestone in this virtual literature of the twenty-fourth century as the first holodeck story to look more like a nineteenth-century novel than an arcade shoot-’em-up” (16); the latter form has been the preference of stories run by most male crew members. Janeway’s attraction to her story’s brooding romantic hero becomes “an exercise posing psychological and moral questions for her” (16), and the episode thus stands as Murray’s representative anecdote for the artistic and educational potential of the kinds of narrative experience that will soon be available as technology progresses. Murray acknowledges the dystopic potentials of technological advance, conceding, for example, that “the violent gaming culture that now characterizes much of cyberspace is likely to spread as the Internet gains speed and bandwidth” (283). But, as her title suggests, she views our rapidly evolving communications technology as more liberating than dehumanizing, indeed as the opening of vast new artistic possibilities continuous with the great tradition of storytelling stretching from ancient epic poetry, through Renaissance drama and the Victorian novel, to modern cinema.

     

    Murray sees a number of innovations that feed a desire for audience participation as harbingers of the holodeck. The shape of future literature is foreshadowed by the multiform story, “the narrative that presents a single situation or plotline in multiple versions, versions that would be mutually exclusive in our ordinary experience” (30). Multiform short stories such as Delmore Schwartz’s “In Dreams Begin Responsibilities” and Borges’s “The Garden of Forking Paths” and multiform films such as It’s a Wonderful Life and Groundhog Day express the modern “perception of life as composed of parallel possibilities” (37). This kind of narrative demands that the reader or audience assume a more active role, a development that Murray sees paralleled in the participatory dynamics of fan culture, most fully in the live-action role-playing (LARP) games in which fans of fantasy literature “assume the roles of characters in the original stories to make up new characters within the same fictional universe” (42). Three-dimensional movies produce a similar urge for audience participation, since the compelling illusion of being in a space awakens instincts to explore it. Amusement park attractions that allow one to “ride the movies” combine a visceral experience with gratifications of our need for story. Computer games are evolving from early versions consisting of simple-minded combat sequences and puzzles toward more narrativized versions featuring dramatic moments, immersive use of sound, and a cinematic point of view. The participatory demands of hypertext fiction reveal that burgeoning genre’s connection to these other forms of participatory storytelling.

     

    All these phenomena are prominent in the critical discourse on postmodern culture. Murray’s contribution is to stress that they are related manifestations of a drive to merge performed and written narrative traditions with the rapidly expanding digital environment. Since participation is central to her vision of narrative’s future, some consideration of the relation between the participatory aspects of traditional and such emerging narrative forms would have been welcome. But Murray is less interested in theoretical continuities than in technological developments produced, one assumes, by scientists unburdened by the niceties of modern literary narratology or reader-reception theory. Readers will enter less familiar territory in her discussion of computer scientists as storytellers, where she reviews how researchers in virtual reality and artificial intelligence “have recently turned from modeling battlefields and smart weapons to modeling new entertainment environments and new ways of creating fictional characters” (59). One of the most impressive of proto-holodecks operates on her own turf. The MIT Media Lab contains a twelve-foot “magic mirror,” a computer screen in which viewers see themselves in three-dimensional space with “computer-based characters with complex inner lives who can sense their environment, experience appetites and mood changes, weigh conflicting desires, and choose among different strategies to reach a goal” (61). This kind of project suggests what future equivalents of a movie theater might be, as viewers would enter a story whose plot would be modified as a result of their actions.

     

    The narratives we will enter in the electronic theater of the future, Murray argues, will be shaped not only by formats inherited from older media, but also by properties native to the digital environment: its procedural, participatory, spatial, and encyclopedic aspects. The computer’s procedural power for shaping narrative became remarkably evident in 1966 with the creation of ELIZA, the first program to simulate the qualities of human conversation. The creator of ELIZA so successfully mimicked the procedural thought of a psychotherapist interacting with a patient that computers running the program could carry on a conversation persuasively, at least for a while. In the late sixties, the adventure game Zork realized the computer’s participatory powers through its fantasy world that responded to typed commands, allowing players to move through dungeon rooms and and fight off evil trolls. In the 1970s, the first graphic user interface was created at Xerox PARC, the first graphics-based game was produced by Atari, and the first “surrogate travel system” in which a mapped space could be walked through was created at MIT. The computer’s encyclopedic power grew as memory technology expanded geometrically. Its capacity to convey an unprecedented abundance of information “translates into an artist’s potential to offer a wealth of detail, to represent the world with both scope and particularity” (84); in this it recapitulates the representational incentives of the day-long bardic recitation and the multi-volume Victorian novel.

     

    After establishing this historical perspective, Murray devotes separate chapters to three “pleasures” that collectively define the aesthetics of emerging digital media: immersion, agency, and transformation. Like older forms of narrative and representation, a computer game or simulation can serve as a Winnicottian “transitional object,” providing us with something onto which we can project our desires and fears, but the fuller sensory matrix the simulation creates allows us to live out our fantasies to an unprecedented degree. The computer’s participatory powers must be calibrated carefully, however, since “the more present the enchanted world, the more we need to be reassured that it is only virtual” (103). Murray outlines various strategies developed in our early or “incunabular” stage of digital technology to establish and test the borders between the real and actual. She explores the realization of the “visit metaphor” in simple joystick games, which create correspondences between user movement and virtual motion; the “active creation of belief”–her revision of Coleridge’s “willing suspension of disbelief”–through the user’s manipulation of virtual objects; and the structuring of participation through “avatars” or representatives within the virtual world. The popularity of MUDs (Multi-User Domains, a form of online role-playing) derives from the computer’s ability to sustain the fiction through continuous characterization of all participants, but also from “the ability to flip back and forth between player and character, to remove the mask in order to adjust the environment and then put it back on again” (116). As the form has evolved, methods for controlling the real/virtual boundary have been refined, regulating such things as the degree of a dialogue’s privacy (one can “whisper” to another or talk publicly) or the consequences of an action (as in life, sex has a variable probability of resulting in pregnancy). “Little by little,” Murray concludes, “we are discovering the conventions of participation that will constitute the fourth wall of this virtual theatre, the expressive gestures that will deepen and preserve the enchantment of immersion” (125).

     

    As narrative moves into cyberspace, new opportunities for the pleasures of agency familiar to us from games will become part of any new significant literary form. On this subject again Murray considers first the elementary innovations of our nascent electronic culture, where the simple pleasures of navigation have been been encouraged by two distinct configurations, “the solvable maze and the tangled rhizome” (130). Combat videogames and puzzle dungeons often employ the maze form, and “in the right hands a maze story could be a melodramatic adventure with complex social subtexts” (131). But mazes limit opportunities for agency through their restricted options and their movement toward a single solution. Rhizomic hypertext fictions lack an end point or exit, but Murray finds severe limitations in even the most sophisticated existing versions: “in trying to create texts that do not ‘privilege’ one order of reading or interpretive framework, the postmodernists are privileging confusion itself” (133). She suggests that successful developments will realize some kind of compromise form, with a combination of goal-driven and open-ended potentials. The chapter also considers the relation between games and stories. Unlike those who have argued that computer-based narrative is inherently unsatisfying because it is dependent upon the “win/lose simplicity” of game structure, Murray believes that “the intrinsic symbolic content of gaming” can be developed into more expressive forms. The ability to switch sides in a contest, for example, opens opportunities for complicating perspectives and raising moral questions.

     

    The electronic environment promises unprecedented pleasures of transformation because “it offers us a multidimensional kaleidoscope with which to rearrange the fragments over and over again, and it allows us to shift back and forth between alternate patterns of mosaic organization” (157). Stories can be interwoven in new ways and multiple points of view can be experienced in varied sequences, combining cinema’s compelling visual surface with the novel’s richer experience of interiority. The reader or “interactor” can be given the opportunity to construct her own story from formulaic elements in an environment that is less a story than a set of story possibilities. Cyber-narrative’s “vision of retrievable mistakes and open options” (175), its resistance to closure, easily supports the comic side of life, but in one of the book’s most provocative sections Murray argues that the measure of its maturity will be an ability to support tragedy as well. She offers as a possible model various ways that a young man’s suicide could be narrated: experiencing the obsessive return to “associational paths that lead to closed loops of thinking” (176); a kaleidoscopic presentation of the wake, in which the multiple perspectives of the mourners would create “a pervasive sense of an interrelated community with multiple truths” (178); a simulation of the suicide that carefully defined the limits of the interactor’s powers to affect events, thus exploring the problematic of agency and destiny.

     

    The third section of Hamlet on the Holodeck attempts to predict how the next century’s cyberbard will realize the potentials of the new media, which will be interactive in a way no other narrative form has been, and which will divide the concept of authorship between the creators of an environment and the users. Murray looks to oral-formulaic composition for a model. She suggests that basic building blocks, called “primitives,” that resemble verbal formulas used in oral verse will be have to be developed, as will the appropriate templates to organize these basic units into more complex structures. Primitives will evolve in the direction of simple actions facilitating interactions of increasing subtlety. Plot events may be based on generic conventions to constitute intermediate levels of organization resembling the oral-formulaic type-scene, and at the highest organizational level resources will be developed to permit the creation of multiform stories, much as oral narrative contains alternative versions within itself that allow each performance to vary significantly. Authors will develop story algorithms like those discovered in Propp’s morphology of the folktale, but with much greater complexity. Coherence will be maintained by “plot controllers capable of making intelligent decisions about narrative syntax on the basis of aesthetic values” (200). Character creation techniques will develop from current technologies such as “intelligent agents” (227) capable of changing priorities and behaviors in response to external changes and from “chatterbot” programs which can engage in convincing conversations with humans and which manifest the kinds of change and growth that seem to signify an inner self. Multicharacter improvisations could build upon techniques of the commedia dell’arte, which relies on a very basic plot scenario, stock characters, and rituals of interaction as the basis for continual improvisation.

     

    A short final section of the book includes a chapter on the products that will likely emerge as the television, telephone, and computer industries converge in the next few decades to produce a unified digital communications system. Murray suggests that the TV serial will soon become the hyperserial. Virtual extensions of the fictional world will permit viewer participation between episodes and allow subsidiary narratives to branch out. The viewer will become “mobile,” able to choose from among various points of view how to experience a program. From this glance at popular media, Murray turns in a concluding chapter to a corollary issue: the question of whether emerging technologies will lead to “a cyberdrama that would develop beyond the pleasures of a compelling entertainment to attain the force and originality we associate with art” (273). She admits that “the notion of a procedural medium that provides the satisfactions of art takes some getting used to” (275), and anyone who has witnessed the banalities that vastly outnumber the genuinely creative and insightful productions of cyberspace has good reason for skepticism. She usefully reminds us, however, that “without those repetitive revenge plays that are now only read in graduate school, we would not have Hamlet” (278). Journeyman works establish conventions that can be exploited by the creative artist, and they also create the context for higher demands and aspirations. Can we expect a Hamlet to take shape on the twenty-first century’s rising holodeck? Janet Murray clearly thinks so. I believe that most readers will close Murray’s well-informed and compelling book and agree.

     

  • Jameson’s Postmodernism: Version 2.0

    Steven Helmling

    Department of English
    University of Delaware
    helmling@odin.english.udel.edu

     

    Fredric Jameson, The Cultural Turn: Selected Writings on the Postmodern, 1983-1998.Verso: London and New York, 1998.

     

    Perry Anderson, The Origins of Postmodernity. Verso: London and New York, 1998.

     

    Fredric Jameson’s new volume offers itself as a compendium of his “key writings” on postmodernism; but let the buyer beware that it does not contain the famous “Postmodernism” essay published in New Left Review (1984) and reprinted as the opening chapter of Postmodernism, or The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism (1991). Instead it opens with that essay’s earliest, much shorter, first take, “Postmodernism and Consumer Society”–the kernel that grew, at about three and a half times its original length, into the “landmark” essay.1 Presumably, the decision to reprint the earlier version was about marketing: publishers want to minimize overlap between competing products. But motivation aside, reprinting the earlier version has the effect of highlighting a little-noticed feature of Jameson’s thinking about postmodernism since the big essay, namely that ever since its first appearance and astonishing impact, Jameson has been moderating its grandest claims, qualifying just what had excited its enthusiastic readers most.

     

    On the evidence, the enormous success of the 1984 essay was not altogether what Jameson had hoped for. Many read it as a manifesto on behalf of the “postmodern”–modernism was dead, long live postmodernism–despite Jameson’s cautions in the essay itself against any such for-or-against reading. Granted, Jameson here and elsewhere in his ’80s writing allowed himself considerable hope on the score of postmodernism, but even in the essay itself, the culminating theme of “the sublime” was inflected as much with terror as with hope. “The sublime” was “unrepresentable,” and since we can’t understand what we can’t represent, the chronic Jamesonian burden of “Marxist hermeneutic” (“we are condemned to interpret at the same time that we feel an increasing repugnance to do so” [Jameson, Ideologies 6]) was for the nonce “relieved.” Jameson seemed, at last, to have joined the clamor (from Susan Sontag to Deleuze and Guattari) “against interpretation”; and the aesthetes of jouissance delighted to hear him talking the talk of “delirium,” “euphoria,” and “intensity.” This release involved others: like dominoes, all the direr Jamesonian themes seemed to be falling, as Hegelian “time” (History, temporality, the diachronic, narrativity) yielded to the favored pomo category of “space” (the synchronic, the visual, geographies [plural], cognitive mapping).

     

    And these were shifts not merely of theme, but of Jameson’s actual writing practice: dense and compact, The Political Unconscious had told a (Hegelian) story; by contrast, the vast and sprawling Postmodernism scanned, from varying altitudes, diverse cultural terrains whose roughly synchronous disjunctions were no small part of the point. These macrolevel gestures were sustained at the microlevel in the very textures of the prose as well: The Political Unconscious had elaborated the premise of revolution’s “inevitable failure” in a “stoic” and “tragic” prose that enacted the “labor and the suffering” of “the dialectic of utopia and ideology”; whereas “Postmodernism” (both essay and book) continuously evoked, in the feel and sound of the writing itself, “the relief of the postmodern generally, a thunderous unblocking of logjams and a release of new productivity that was somehow tensed up and frozen, locked like cramped muscles, at the latter end of the modern period” (Jameson, Postmodernism 313). Throughout Postmodernism, this promising prospect motivated not merely a thematics, but also a stylistics of “the sublime.”

     

    But “the sublime,” and everything I’ve just linked it with above, constitutes new material added between the earliest version of the essay, “Postmodernism and Consumer Society” and the now-canonical “Postmodernism, or the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism.” And it is precisely “the sublime” (etc.) that The Cultural Turn elides by reprinting the former rather than the latter. (Arguably, even the choice among the available “earlier” versions supports this point, since The Cultural Turn reprints the one that substitutes a discussion of the Westin Bonaventure for the earliest version’s pages on the proto-“sublime” theme of “the schizo” [see endnote 1].) In thus reverting, as it were, to this earlier, pre-“sublime” version, and making it the starting point for a new itinerary through Jameson’s “selected writings on the postmodern,” The Cultural Turn could be read as a thoroughly revisionist retrospect, a corrective alternative genealogy to the received understanding of “Jameson on postmodernism.” Whether or not Jameson intended anything like this, there’s no question that readers who rely on The Cultural Turn for their sense of Jameson’s role in the postmodern debate will derive a picture very different from that still governed by memories of the 1984 version’s initial impact.

     

    And in any case, such revisionist impulses manifested themselves in Jameson’s work even before Postmodernism came out (and indeed, in Postmodernism itself)–for example, in “Marxism and Postmodernism” (1989), which appeared as a reply-to-critics in Douglas Kellner’s casebook, Postmodernism/Jameson/Critique (1989; parts of this essay were also cannibalized for the “Conclusion” to Postmodernism). And in the work that followed Postmodernism, Jameson returned to the supposedly retro interests (Hegelian, Marxist, phenomenological) that Postmodernism had seemed to downplay or eschew: Signatures of the Visible and The Geopolitical Aesthetic (both 1992) renewed hermeneutic commitments; and The Seeds of Time (1994), as the last word of the title hints, conjured the phenomenological thematics of temporality. The latter book’s first and strongest chapter, the obvious program piece for the whole, is called “The Antinomies of Postmodernism,” a meditation on the contemporary (postmodern) ideology of standoff and standstill, of (Kantian) “antinomy” usurping the analytic/interpretive space where (Hegelian) “dialectic” should be. By now no one should have missed that Jameson was seeing the “postmodern condition” as much less “euphoric” and “joyous” than he had earlier seemed to do.

     

    The choice of “Selected Writings” in The Cultural Turn gives this tendency in Jameson’s work the sanction of a volume, and to that extent, The Cultural Turn is less a sequel to Postmodernism than a revision of it–an update, as my title here means to suggest. (After all, the 1991 volume was also a “Selected Writings on the Postmodern”). Besides reprinting the two essays (“Marxism and Postmodernism” and “The Antinomies of Postmodernity”) I’ve just discussed, The Cultural Turn presents four new essays that make Jameson’s dissent from pomo-as-usual almost aggressively insistent. Two of these offer yet another of Jameson’s periodic attempts to rehabilitate the irredeemably out-of-fashion Hegel; the other two extrapolate from the problem of “finance capital” Jameson’s most jaundiced take yet on The Way We Live Now.

     

    Of the two latter essays, the first, “Culture and Finance Capital,” takes up Giovanni Arrighi’s The Long Twentieth Century with an eye to the question whether “finance capital” is the distinctive or constitutive feature of late capitalism; the second, “The Brick and the Balloon: Architecture, Idealism, and Land Speculation” treats aesthetic issues: the paradoxes of the artwork’s “symbolic act” (is it “act” at all, or “symbol” merely?–a question for the centrality of which, recall the subtitle of The Political Unconscious: “Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act”). This problematic prompts the related question of what constitutes, and what is the use of, a critical account of cultural forms. The discussion here interestingly enlarges Jameson’s previous accounts of Manfredo Tafuri, the Marxist architectural historian who, for Jameson, has long instantiated the very problems of “dialectical writing” that Jameson’s own writing chronically raises for itself: how to own the “inevitable failure” of the revolutionary past without making a fatal defeatism the foregone conclusion of its future?

     

    But interesting as these issues are, I want to give the space remaining to the two Hegelianizing essays here, “‘End of Art’ or ‘End of History’?” and “Transformations of the Image in Postmodernity.” The first of these urges what can only be called a Hegelian full-court press: Jameson has been rereading the Phenomenology, the Aesthetics, and the Philosophy of History, and this return to Hegel quite contravenes the anti- or un-Hegelian carriage of Postmodernism. Indeed, this essay’s Hegelianizing makes that of The Political Unconscious seem mild; some of the more high-rolling passages leap from one continent of thought to a whole other galaxy, in a single bound and several times per paragraph, in ways actually reminiscent of Hegel himself. (When Jameson adverts to “Hegel’s immense dictée–the compulsive graphomanic lifelong transcription of what some daimon of the absolute muttered to him day-in day-out at the very limits of syntax and language itself,” it is hard not to see his own oeuvre, however momentarily, in similar terms.) In this distinctly Hegelian spirit, both essays pursue distinctly Hegelian themes. One array of these is gathered under the rubric of the “end of” problem, as instanced in “the sublime” and its relation to “the postmodern” (in which “end of” motifs proliferate, including Derrida’s meta-twist, the end of “the end of”). The other principle thematic is that of “theory” itself, whose “end,” in another sign of our accelerating times, we increasingly hear announced.

     

    There is considerable overlap between the two essays, because the “transformations in the image” (i.e., in the visual) tracked in the former prove an instance of the transformations (i.e., in part, endings) explored in the latter. For Jameson, the increasing hegemony of “the visual” attests a contemporary “return of the aesthetic”; and to the extent that the latter is a reaction against the self-transcending “anti-aesthetic” of modernism, postmodernism appears as a reversion from “the sublime” back to “the beautiful”–equivalent for Jameson with the merely “culinary” or “decorative” kind of art that Hegel’s prophecy of the triumph of philosophy, and modernism’s “anti-aesthetic” of shock and ugliness, both aimed, in what Jameson projects as their different but related ways, to “end.” Jameson sketches “self-transcendence” as one of the keys to the dialectic of “the sublime,” from Kant’s “sublime,” which transcends “the beautiful,” and Hegel’s “end of art” (in which sensuous figuration [the aesthetic] is sublated in the trans-sensuousness of the Absolute [philosophy]) through modernism to our own day.

     

    And here it becomes clear that if Jameson has downplayed sublimity in these recent writings, it is not to discount “the sublime” itself, but rather to deny its continuing potencies to “the postmodern.” This move directly reverses that of the 1984 essay, in which the thwarted energies of a “cramped” and “frozen” modernism were relieved in the “thunderous unblocking” of a postmodern sublime. That was then, this is now: in these two new essays, it is the “anti-aesthetic” of modernism that authentically mobilizes “the sublime”; postmodernism, by contrast, works merely reactively to secure the commodification of all sensuous experience to the “pleasure” of the merely “culinary” or “consumable” (in the “Transformations” essay, to the visual, to the “image” in Guy Debord’s sense, “the final form of commodity reification”):

     

    The image is the commodity today, and that is why it is vain to expect a negation of the logic of commodity production from it, that is why, finally, all beauty today is meretricious and the appeal to it by contemporary pseudo-aestheticism is an ideological maneuver and not a creative resource. (Cultural Turn 135)

     

    Compare this dour pronouncement with the brighter prospects on “the visual” in Signatures of the Visible, which attest that Jameson himself had once entertained some such hope of “a negation of the logic of commodity production from [the image].”

     

    All these moves revisit, and revise, Jameson’s perennially in-process triad of realism/modernism/postmodernism; and in the present discussion, “theory” itself is drastically dichotomized: there is a “heroic” (i.e., still-modernist) founding cohort–“from Lèvi-Strauss to Lacan, from Deleuze and Barthes to Derrida and Baudrillard” (Cultural Turn 85)–followed by more recent (unnamed) epigones whose premature and depoliticized celebrations of utopian jouissance, as in some “theory” avatar of “infantile leftism,” effectively domesticated jouissance itself (along with such other once-subversive themes as deconstruction, negation, dedifferentiation, etc.). Thus do our utopian and revolutionary inventions reify, in our very hands, into clichés: consumables, commodities, staples, fixed relay points in a routinized stimulus-response circuit of a variously libidinal and cerebral, but in any case depoliticized, “desire.” (Jameson has attempted to prevent, to repoliticize, this temptation of theory before, in “Pleasure: A Political Issue” [1983].) Onto this binary of “modern” versus “postmodern” varieties of theory, Jameson projects that of “the [critical, self-transcending or -negating, anti-aesthetic] sublime” versus the “domestic,” “culinary,” neo- or pseudo-aestheticizing of “the beautiful.”

     

    But for the Hegelian Jameson, no “end of” thematic can evade the question of its own aftermath, and thereby the question, and the necessity, of continuations–of “the sublime,” of “the modern,” of “theory” in the heroic mode–in however altered a form. In thus “preserving” what (some) theory too hastily (and complacently) “cancels,” Jameson, as usual, opposes the foreclosures of such contemporary ideological inflections as Fukuyama’s “end of history,” whose “end of” refrain Jameson startlingly, and cogently, compares to Turner’s closing of the frontier thesis a century ago. Here the point above–that Jameson aims not to discount “the sublime,” but to align its force rather with “the modern” against postmodernism–unveils its utopian potential:

     

    Whether the Sublime, and its successor Theory, have that capacity hinted at by Kant, to... crack open the commodification implicit in the Beautiful, is a question we have not even begun to explore; but it is a question and a problem which is, I hope, a little different from the alternative we have thought we were faced with until now: whether, if you prefer modernism, it is possible to go back to the modern as such, after its dissolution into full postmodernity. And the new question is also a question about theory itself, and whether it can persist and flourish without simply turning back into an older technical philosophy whose limits and obsolescence were already visible in the nineteenth century. (Cultural Turn 87)

     

    Vintage Jameson: defying the closure of the postmodern, thus to contrive a fresh opening, to pose a fresh set of questions, to propose a fresh (daunting: impossible?) project, to propose fresh terms with which to assess the success or failure of any “theory” aspiring to be worthy of the name.

     

    Alongside The Cultural Turn, a virtual co-publication, comes Perry Anderson’s The Origins of Postmodernity. Verso originally commissioned Anderson to write an introduction to The Cultural Turn, but his effort outgrew that function; the resulting brief book now stands, predictably enough, if you know Anderson’s previous books, as the most economical, elegant, and incisive discussion of Jameson extant. The focus is on postmodernism, so there are vast reaches of Jameson that Anderson doesn’t touch, but within that limitation, Anderson’s is and will doubtless remain the definitive treatment. (In this respect, as a brief book on a single Jamesonian title, Anderson’s text will doubtless do readers a service comparable to that of William Dowling’s 1984 primer on The Political Unconscious.)

     

    Anderson’s first chapter, “Prodromes,” briefly surveys diverse and often random coinages of “postmodern” going back to the 1890s and up to the 1960s; this magisterial sketch composes (in just eleven pages) Ortega y Gasset, Arnold Toynbee, Charles Olson, C. Wright Mills, Leslie Fiedler, and others, into an ideogram of an entire cultural milieu. Chapter two, “Crystallization,” focuses the decade between the inaugural issue of boundary 2 and Habermas’s lecture, “Modernity: An Incomplete Project,” the period, Anderson argues, in which the terms of the debate as we have come to know it “crystallized,” largely in the domain of architecture (Graves, Jencks, Venturi), but also in the work of such culture-critics as Ihab Hassan and J.-F. Lyotard. In chapter three, enter Jameson, with an impact registered in the chapter’s title, “Capture”–but if that title seems melodramatic, the chapter itself quite justifies it. Here, in thirty brisk pages, Anderson briefly sketches how Jameson’s thinking developed to the culmination achieved in the “Postmodernism” essay, with reference to “sources” as diverse as Barthes, Baudrillard, and Ernest Mandel; he then goes on to demonstrate with ungainsayable cogency why and how Jameson’s “intervention” (for once that grandiose term is appropriate) made such a difference in the “postmodern debate.”

     

    For Jameson’s “capture” of postmodernism effectively transformed what had been an incoherent rash of usages into a set of issues over which debate only then at last became really possible. This “capture” ensued, Anderson argues, from five “moves”: 1) posing pomo as not a “mere aesthetic break or epistemological shift,” but nothing less than “the cultural logic of late capitalism”; 2) an evocation of the new psychic Lebenswelt–the boredom, the “waning of affect”–concomitant with the achieved hegemony of consumerism; 3) a conspectus of the cultural surround embracing specialized discourses on pomo that had theretofore remained discrete (literature, architecture, philosophy, science), and extending further to several in which it had not yet played much of a role (film and media, postcolonial studies); 4) a consideration of the social effects (“dedifferentiation,” bourgeoisification of the proletariat and vice versa, “identity” politics displacing those of class) of the shift from production to service and information economies; and 5) “Jameson’s final move [and] perhaps the most original of all,” a wholesale removal of the discussion from the plane of mere opinion and facile for-and-against “debate” on which even such figures as Habermas had left it: before Jameson, postmodernism was the stuff either of jeremiads or panegyrics; since, it has become a key to all mythologies, an ideology of ideologies, but also the theorization that newly enabled their comprehensive critique as well.

     

    Anderson also claims, although without “arguing” the point at any length, that Jameson’s success has much to do with his power as a writer. This is refreshing. Usually, the difficulty of Jameson’s prose is treated as an unfortunate obstacle readers must overcome–justified and necessary, but a sort of test of the reader’s fitness to read, as well as an attestation of the work’s importance: if it’s worth the trouble, and this is the trouble it’s worth, hey, it’s got to be important. Anderson, by contrast, insists that the prose itself is a major part of Jameson’s accomplishment. Anderson deftly evokes what he lacks the space to demonstrate: the suppleness of Jameson’s syntax, the evocativeness of his metaphors, the exhilaration and expansiveness of his encyclopedic allusiveness. Usually, the more a writer tries to embrace, the more the energies of the writing attenuate. In Jameson, the reverse seems true: the wider the focus, the more richly cathected every detail of the scene.

     

    So I applaud, and second, Anderson’s insistence that in Jameson, “We are dealing with a great writer” (Origins 72)–but I add that the assertion introduces a slight dissonance: Anderson has written the most penetrating and simultaneously the most sympathetic study of Jameson we have, but he has done so in a style quite the reverse of Jameson’s own. (Thought experiment: compare and contrast Anderson’s Considerations on Western Marxism with Jameson’s Marxism and Form.) To that extent it seems slightly ironic praise to say that Anderson’s tight and lucid prose will make Jameson accessible to many a reader so far baffled by Jameson’s own dauntingly allusive, stratospherically high-flying, self-consciously “dialectical” scriptible. But it will. And for some time to come: neither Jameson’s work, nor postmodernity, is going away anytime soon.

    Note

     

    1. “Postmodernism and Consumer Society,” originally a 1982 lecture, was first printed in Hal Foster, ed., The Anti-Aesthetic (Seattle: Bay Press, 1983), 111-25. The expansion appeared as “Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism” in New Left Review 146 (July-August 1984), 59-92, and in substantially the same form as the first chapter of Postmodernism. But it was also “reprinted” in E. Ann Kaplan, ed., Postmodernism and its Discontents (London and New York: Verso, 1988), 13-29, but with a consequential alteration: the section on “schizophrenia” and Language Poetry was cut and a discussion of the Westin Bonaventure Hotel, cannibalized from the “big” essay, put in its place. It is the Kaplan version that The Cultural Turn reprints.

    Works Cited

     

    • Jameson, Fredric. The Ideologies of Theory. Vol. 1. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1991.

     

  • Interview with Harryette Mullen

    Cynthia Hogue

    Department of English
    Bucknell University
    hogue@bucknell.edu

     

    Born in Alabama, Harryette Mullen grew up in Texas, the daughter of teachers and the granddaughter and great-granddaughter of Baptist ministers in the still-segregated south. While completing a B.A. in English at the University of Texas at Austin, she began writing seriously, participating in the burgeoning black arts movement in the 1970s. She received a Ph.D. from the History of Consciousness program at the University of California at Santa Cruz, and teaches African American literature and creative writing at the University of California at Los Angeles. Her works include four collections of poetry, most recently Muse & Drudge (Singing Horse Press, 1995), and a critical study, Gender, Subjectivity, and Slave Narratives (Cambridge University Press, 1998).

     

    Known for her innovative, “mongrel” lyric poetry (as Mullen puts it in a 1996 interview with Calvin Bedient published in Callaloo: “We are all mongrels” [652]), Mullen is concerned to diversify the predominant aesthetic of “accessibility” that characterizes contemporary African American poetry and criticism. In “‘Ruses of the lunatic muse’: Harryette Mullen and Lyric Hybridity” (Women’s Studies 1998), Elizabeth Frost terms Muse & Drudge a “poetic hybrid” that draws on both Stein and blues, among other influences–a lyric long poem exploring “the diverse influences and languages of a miscegenated culture” (466). The interview that follows was conducted on May 25, 1998 in Los Angeles, where Mullen lives and I had arranged to meet her just prior to the 1998 American Literature Association Conference in San Diego.

     

    Cynthia Hogue: I want to start with your origin tale. How did you start writing? Why?

     

    Harryette Mullen: You could say there are several origins. There’s the origin of writing which for me goes far back, since I could hold a pencil. I’ve been writing to entertain myself and writing rhymes, stories, and cartoons as gifts to other people… making booklets for friends, and greeting cards for family members with little rhymed verses in them that I would illustrate. I always had a notebook as a child and I would sketch in it and write in it. This started because my mother was always working She was the breadwinner. She taught at an elementary school and she would often have to go to meetings and she had other jobs as well. So we always knew we had to be quiet and entertain ourselves. My sister and I read a lot and we both scribbled and drew a little bit. It was a way of keeping us out of trouble.

     

    The first time I had a poem published was in high school and it just happened because the English teacher made everyone write a poem. That was our assignment. She submitted the poems to a local poetry contest and my poem was chosen as the winner. It was published in the local newspaper. So that was my first published poem. As an undergraduate I continued to write for my own amusement and also I went to poetry readings. There were lots of African and African American poets coming to visit the University of Texas and I tried to go to as many readings as possible. Some of my friends were writers too. So I just kept writing. Then one of my friends insisted that I had to do more with my poetry. He was a poet and knew that I was writing, but I wasn’t attempting to publish my work, wasn’t participating in readings. I was at an open reading one night and he asked me, “Are you going to read your work?” I said, “I didn’t bring anything,” and he said, “We’re going to go home. I’m going to sign you up on the list and by the time you go home and get your stuff it’ll be close to your turn.” That was the first time I read in public and after that, I really started to think I could face an audience and see myself as a poet. I had been writing forever but not thinking that what I wrote was poetry or that I was a poet, but writing and drawing and reading all went together. They were all part of the same activity.

     

    CH: I want to turn to the evolution of your work. How would you describe that first collection, Tree Tall Woman?

     

    HM: The book was influenced by the poets that I was reading and hearing. I was definitely influenced by the Black Arts movement, the idea that there was a black culture and that you could write from the position of being within a black culture. At the time, my idea about black culture was very specific to being Southern, eating certain foods, and having certain religious beliefs. I have a broader sense of what blackness is, what African-ness is, or what a collection of cultures might be, where before, I think my idea of blackness was somewhat provincial. Or definitely, it was regional.

     

    CH: “Regional,” meaning monologic?

     

    HM: Part of what people were doing with the Black Arts movement was, in a sense, to construct a positive image of black culture, because blackness had signified negation, lack, deprivation, absence of culture. So people took all of the things that had been pejorative and stigmatized, and made them very positive, so that chitterlings, which was the garbage that people threw away from the hog, became the essence of soul food. Words were turned around in their meaning and all the things that were thought of as being pejorative aspects of blackness became the things to be praised. So, that project had created a space for me to write. I didn’t have to carry out that project because it had already been done; I didn’t have to say “I’m black and black is beautiful.” Actually, by the time I was writing, that was getting a little repetitive and almost boring. I wanted to write within the space that had been created without necessarily repeating exactly what those folks had done. At the same time, I now see that I had a kind of restricted idea of what it meant to write within a black culture or with a black voice. The idea of a black voice or black language–black speech–is much more problematic for me today than it was at that time. I felt I knew what it was to write in a black voice and it meant a sort of vernacularized English. I think that it’s much more complicated than that. For instance, my family spoke standard English at home. Educated, middle-class, black speakers are code-switchers, and what we really did was learn to switch from standard English to a black vernacular in certain situations when that was called for. In our case, my sister and I went through people saying, “You talk funny. You talk proper. Where are you from? You don’t sound like you are from here,” just because we were speaking standard English. The idea that there is a black language that is a non-standard English, that standard English, therefore, is white, is very problematic. In the work that I am doing now, I’m actually trying to question those kinds of distinctions that are being made between the standard and the non-standard. I wouldn’t say that standard American English is in any way a white language. It’s a language that is the result of many peoples’ contributions. In fact, if you look in the American Heritage Dictionary, Langston Hughes and Arna Bontemps are among the people consulted for their usage panel. So people really need to think harder about those distinctions that are being made.

     

    CH: But it was a journey before you began to experiment with the code-switching poetically?

     

    HM: Right. Partly, it had to do with going back to school, going back to graduate school and reading about language. Also, there was, even when I was an undergraduate, a whole movement of sociolinguistics and folklore, partly because there was no African American literature being taught while I was an undergraduate at the University of Texas.

     

    CH: You didn’t even read Zora Neale Hurston?

     

    HM: Zora Neale Hurston was not in the canon. She was out of print. Alice Walker was one of the people who helped bring Zora Neale Hurston back into print, and that was happening around the time that I was an undergraduate, but it hadn’t yet reached the classroom. I was an English major. I was interested in different kinds of literature. I also took Spanish, so I was reading literature in Spanish. I took courses in classical literature. I didn’t know Greek or Latin, but I read the works in English because I wanted to have the background. There was no African American text, even in American Literature classes that I took. We didn’t read Invisible Man. We didn’t read Richard Wright. We didn’t read any black women. The places where I was able to read any black writers were in African Literature courses because UT Austin had a very strong African and Oriental Languages Department. They were bringing in African poets like Kofi Awoonor and Dennis Brutus and novelists as well, like Chinua Achebe. There were all these African writers around and sometimes Caribbean writers. So I took a course in Caribbean literature. I took courses in Anglophone African literature, and Afro-American folklore, which was offered through Anthropology. Roger Abrahams, who is known for working on black folklore, was teaching at UT Austin at that time and I took two or three courses with him. My understanding of African American culture really had a lot to do with taking these folklore courses. What’s so interesting now, in retrospect, is that I had never heard of most of this Afro-American folklore because a lot of it was based on urban folklore that he had collected from black men on street corners in Philadelphia. He went from there to collecting in prisons because he could get a higher concentration of black men from different parts of the country. He would go to federal prisons and collect twenty different versions of “The Signifying Monkey.” His book Deep Down in the Jungle is a result of that research. I never would have heard such stuff, because my family’s version of black culture was: our household, our church, our school. It wasn’t the street corner and it definitely was not the prison.

     

    Here was this white man who was teaching me Afro-American culture, and it was practically all new to me. There were some folk tales that I had heard before, but a lot of it–like the toasting tradition–was completely new to me. Now I see, of course, that it is very much a male-centered performance. You don’t see a lot of women, especially a lot of middle class women, going around reciting these toasts. Now I feel that I understand why I kept having this experience of “Why don’t I know this? Why is this the black culture and I don’t have a real familiarity with it?” This is definitely a black culture that was marked for class and for gender in a way that did not include my own experience, but if you had talked about black people who go to church two or three days a week and who work very hard and are thrifty and try to avoid entanglements with the law, that is the culture that I knew. Partly what was going on was that people were fascinated with those aspects of black culture that were most different from what they saw as white middle class culture. There was a book that I read at the time actually called Black and White Styles in Conflict about people’s use of language and their ideas about how they conduct themselves in any kind of discourse. What is described as the “white style” was my family’s style and we lived totally in the black community. We were segregated in a black community! My parents had gone to a historically black college, Talladega College in Alabama. My mother taught in a segregated black public school in Texas. We lived in a neighborhood that was 99.9% black and it was a black world that we lived in, but according to this book, our style was a “white style” and the “black style” was the style of people my mother considered to be not well-educated. A certain style was a marker of education and class within the black community, but it was a marker of race within the mainstream. This was what was perceived as black.

     

    It’s taken me a while to clarify this distinction in my own mind and to realize it bothers me, because I’m not sure that black children today know that blackness and education are not mutually exclusive. It used to be that we were taught, “Yes, you should be a code-switcher because that way, you could talk to everybody.” Now, these kids think, “If I learn Standard English, then I am less black.” When they go to get a job, they are less able to qualify for the job if they can’t switch to Standard English (if that’s the mode of the workplace). Or they have trouble in school, because that is the language of instruction. The idea that Standard English is not just a tool that everyone can use, but is the possession of white people is harmful to black children and anyone else speaking a variant dialect. All of these things bother me now.

     

    CH: You grew up in Fort Worth in the sixties and went to college in the early seventies before the Black Studies movement had reached the University of Texas or widely nationally?

     

    HM: We were marching, protesting for better representation in the student body and the faculty, recruiting more minority faculty. There was an Ethnic Studies course that was required for education majors. We had a black publication that was folded into the school paper. It was The Daily Texan, the school paper, and then once a month, we folded in our Black Print supplement and I worked on that. I also worked on The Daily Texan as an editorial assistant. I wrote editorials for the paper on race subjects usually, and that’s what they wanted me to do.

     

    CH: I wonder why?

     

    HM: Yeah, really. I wrote an opinion column and then I worked on the staff for the black publication as well. We had some extremely right-wing Regents at that time. It was difficult, and we were forced to develop our political consciousness of who we were and why we were there. Austin was the place of one of the Supreme Court decisions, Sweatt vs. Painter, and I actually knew the nephew of Heman Sweatt, the man who entered the law school with much resistance to his admission. He was put in this room by himself with law books, and that was their way of complying with the requirement that he be admitted to the law school. He was not allowed to sit in the classroom with the other law students.

     

    CH: And this was what year?

     

    HM: Sweatt vs. Painter was in the fifties. [The case was decided in 1950.] Around the time of Brown vs. Board of Education. Sweatt’s nephew was going to UT Austin when I was there–that was very much living history for us. There were racial incidents happening. The first day that we moved into the dorm, there was a big brouhaha because some white parents didn’t want their child in a room with a black roommate. Everyone had gotten a form that said, “Do you mind having a roommate of another race?” and this girl had said she didn’t mind, but her parents did mind, so the school moved her out of the room and gave her a white roommate. That set the tone.

     

    CH: Let’s talk for a moment about the groups that were bringing in the black artists. There was a group that was publishing The Black Print monthly and a Black Arts movement in Austin. Did the University sponsor the readings?

     

    HM: Yes. These were readings on campus that were sponsored by departments. Many of the African writers came because of the strong African Languages Department. Some of them were visiting lecturers and I think that possibly, the English Department sponsored some of the readings even though they weren’t necessarily teaching these people’s work in the classroom. We also connected, through Black Print, with some of the writers. We published, or actually re-printed poems from people like Michael Harper and maybe Nikki Giovanni or Gloria Oden. I remember when Haki Madhubuti came. He was still Don L. Lee at the time. I had come from my English class to the reading with my Shakespeare book. I didn’t have any of his books and I couldn’t buy any because I was too broke, but I got him to sign my collected works of Shakespeare. He laughed; that is how it was. These writers’ work was not in the curriculum but they were there because they were on the circuit and someone had invited them. Feminist poets were coming too. I remember going to see Adrienne Rich read and Audre Lorde. There was also a group in Austin called Women and Their Work, and they did a lot to promote literature and art by women. They were one of the first organizations to sponsor me at a reading. There was also a group called Texas Circuit. I was starting to see that there was a world out there where people were poets and writers and that was their life. I hadn’t really thought about that. I just thought, “Okay, I am going to school and I’m going to be a teacher and that will be my life.” Then this other possibility opened up. It helped to see people who were women and who were black and who were American, who were poets and that was their identity.

     

    CH: You talked yesterday about beginning to hear the language poets around San Francisco after you started graduate school and how Nathaniel Mackey, himself influenced by Robert Duncan and Amiri Baraka, was an important mentor for you.

     

    HM: He was an important presence.

     

    CH: Presence?

     

    HM: Yes.

     

    CH: And you began to see a different possibility for your poetic voice? Even from your first book, were you already positioning your work, or negotiating your work in dialogue with, rather than in imitation of, what you were hearing?

     

    HM: I think so, because I felt it was possible to enter the space that was created. My identity was part of everything that I wrote, so it gave me a freedom to write a poem about a mother braiding her daughter’s hair that was a very black poem, but didn’t have to say, “This is a black woman braiding her black child’s black hair.” There were those poems where blackness had to be asserted and I appreciated what that act of assertion had accomplished. It allowed me to write a simple poem about a mother braiding her child’s hair or a poem about a quilt, just the warmth of the quilt. I realized that I was choosing certain subjects that would allow me to explore aspects of black culture and community and family. I think Tree Tall Woman is really about relations among black people, whether it’s family or intimate relationships or just being in the world as a person who has a particular perspective, but it was not having continually to point out that I was writing from a black perspective. That was just part of the work.

     

    CH: And this is the work that you were writing by the time you were in graduate school?

     

    HM: No, by graduate school I was responding to the idea that identity is much more complex and much more negotiated and constructed. I didn’t exactly have an essentialist notion of identity and culture, but I did think that I knew what black culture was, especially since as an undergraduate, I had learned about the other side of black culture that I hadn’t really experienced. I felt pretty well-versed. Then, I began to think about the subject as the problem, which was a lot of what graduate school is about, deconstructing the subject. There was resistance on the part of feminists and people of color who were saying, “Just as we are beginning to explore our subjectivity, all of a sudden, we are going to deconstruct the subject and it doesn’t matter who is writing?”

     

    CH: Say, “The author is dead.”

     

    HM: And it doesn’t matter who wrote it; it is language writing itself. There was resistance to that notion. I was really intrigued by it. On the one hand, we used to joke about how there should be a moratorium on certain kinds of writing because we’ve had enough of that. On the other hand, I thought I should think seriously about how poststructuralism applies to me because I didn’t think it applied to me in the same way it would to, say, a white male writer because a white male writer had a tradition to look back upon that I didn’t have. I had some tradition as a black writer, but it wasn’t regarded in the same way. I had to think about how this discussion of the subject would apply to me. I had to expand my sense of black subjectivity, to see that it is more complicated and dispersed throughout the diaspora. Black people do not necessarily speak the same language or have the same beliefs. There may be some things they have in common, but there is a lot of diversity at the same time. Muse and Drudge is the result of that thinking. Trimmings and S*PeRM**K*T are ways of moving in that direction. Those two books are influenced by Gertrude Stein’s Tender Buttons, and by my reading as a graduate student, reading the theory, particularly feminist theory, and thinking about language not as transparent but constructed. Muse and Drudge in some way allowed me to put together the kind of exploration of black culture that I had been doing in Tree Tall Woman and the kind of playing with language and form that I had been doing with Trimmings and S*PeRM**K*T.

     

    It allowed me to put these things together and also, it helped me to put audiences together because I had lost the audience for Tree Tall Woman. I didn’t see them when I would read Trimmings and S*PeRM**K*T because for one thing, I started to get more readings on campuses than in communities. Tree Tall Woman attracted audiences in community venues. Trimmings and S*PeRM**K*T got me a lot of invitations to read at colleges and universities. Part of it might have to do with the fact that I was part of that milieu, as a graduate student and as an assistant professor when I started out at Cornell. I was already known to people. But I would look out at audiences and there would be no people of color. Period. I would be the only person of color in the room–not that there is anything necessarily wrong with that but there is something a little bit odd about it. I would think, “What happened to all the black folks? Why aren’t they able to relate to this?” I made sure that my picture was on Trimmings–not just to see me, but to see that a black person wrote this book. It was a shock to go to reading after reading and there would be no people of color in the room. Muse and Drudge was written partly to bring the audience back together again.

     

    CH: Did it work?

     

    HM: Yes, it’s happening. It’s still the case that I am reading a lot on college campuses, but I will see black people, I’ll see some Latinos, I’ll see some Asian American students there. Part of it has to do with people of color feeling that they can actually deal with literature. People who are bilingual may feel that they have deficiencies in English. Partly it has to do with people being second and third generation in their family to go to college. When I was a student at UT Austin, most of the people in my cohort were the first in their families to go to college. First generation has to go out and be doctors and lawyers, business people. They have to be able to make back the investment for their families. I think my literary activity is possible because in my family, I was the third generation to attend some type of college. My maternal grandfather was in the Seminary. One of my grandmothers went to normal school and was an elementary school teacher. Since I was third generation, that created a certain tolerance in my family for my wanting to be a liberal arts major. Also, the kinds of jobs that people in my family had all had to do with having a respect for literacy. Being a teacher, being a pastor, a printer, a clerical worker. I never found even one other black student at UT Austin who was majoring in English. I was the only one. In every class that I attended, I was the only black person. And not a single black professor. I took Ethnic Studies to get a black professor. But in the English department, no. We had one person of color, a Japanese American who was teaching Emerson. That’s how it was.

     

    CH: No women taught at that time, or very few.

     

    HM: The white women professors I had were definitely inspirational to me. There were certain younger women who were my models and they made me feel that I could do that. They were intellectual and serious. They didn’t get tenure. Of the three that I am thinking of, not a one of them got tenure at UT Austin and now one of them is writing Gothic novels. She was a Chaucer scholar.

     

    CH: In Trimmings the language becomes more a subject for analysis, rather than a vehicle for expression, or in addition to being a vehicle for expression, and gender becomes a subject that you are really contemplating. Charles Bernstein calls this book “a poetics of cultural modernism.” Sandra Cisneros says of your later book Muse and Drudge that “language and rhetoric always come up.” You are “the queen of hip hyperbole,” as she puts it. What interests me is that you kind of burst into this linguistically innovative and thematically feminist verse. You say at the end of Trimmings that you wanted to think about language as clothing and clothing as language and that you wondered why women’s writing has traditionally been so ephemeral. How you do that in Trimmings?

     

    HM: A lot of it had to do with my engagement with Stein’s text, Tender Buttons. I remember my earlier attempts to read Stein and thinking, “I can’t read this! I can’t understand it!” I felt frustrated but it was intriguing. I thought, “She acts like she thinks she knows what she’s doing.”

     

    CH: Frustrated by the opaqueness?

     

    HM: Right. The language is elusive and there is a secretive quality about Stein’s work. She has her own idiosyncratic approach to language, and you get the sense that she definitely knows what she is doing but I felt I just didn’t get it. I probably first tried to read Stein as an undergraduate, but I got frustrated and left it. Then when I went back as a graduate student, armed with a lot more theory and a lot more critical attitude about language, all of a sudden, Stein was making sense to me. Also, I really appreciated the elegance of what she was doing, elegance in the way that scientists and mathematicians use it, that you use the fewest elements. An elegant solution is not too complicated. By using words and the syntactical structures over and over again–often there’s a series, a list, and the only punctuation is periods and commas–she is boiling down language to the absolute, essential elements. I began to understand that that was a different way to use language, a way of using language that forces the reader either to throw it down, or else if you stick with it, to enter another subjectivity. The language seems to create an alternate subjectivity. I thought, “This is really powerful, what she is doing with language.” I could see how putting items in a series created different ways of reading the sentence. Syntactically, it can be read as items in a series or it can be read as appositives. Are these things contiguous with or equivalent to each other? That is suggested by the way she uses punctuation.

     

    Around that time, I must have read Ron Silliman’s The New Sentence and I was very interested in the idea of the paratactic sentence and what that sentence is able to do poetically because in a way, the paratactic sentence, because of the compression, is more poetic than a prose sentence. I mean, you could have a prose sentence that uses the paratactic syntax, but there is something about parataxis itself that acts as a sort of poetic compression. I was interested in the technical, syntactical construction and how to use that to allow more ambiguity in the work, to create different levels of meaning using a prose paragraph, a prose poetry paragraph as the unit. Also, I was interested in Tender Buttons. The units operate separately and collectively. That really helped me with the form of Trimmings because you could read it as separate poems, you could read it as a longer poem that is composed of these units, these paragraphs. In a way, each paragraph is doing the same thing and there is a metonymical construction where the female body is constructed around metonymy.

     

    I was analyzing what Stein was doing to figure out what I could use and I found that on a lot of levels, I could use what she was doing: the structure of the book itself, in terms of using a prose-poetry form, and a paratactic sentence that is compressed, that is not really a grammatical sentence but that makes sense in an agrammatical way, in a poetic way. Also, in her use of subject matter, where she is dealing with objects, rooms, and food, the domestic space that is a woman’s space and with the ideas of consumption, our investment in objects, our consumer fetishism. At the same time, I read Marx on commodity fetishism. So, all these things came together for Trimmings.

     

    S*PeRM**K*T is really the companion of Trimmings. On the one hand, it’s the woman with the wardrobe and on the other, it’s the woman with her shopping list in the supermarket, because women are still constructed through advertising as the consumers who bring these objects into the household. S*PeRM**K*T was about my recollections of jingles that have embedded themselves in my brain. We used to have to memorize poetry, the nuns made us do that in Catholic school, and we had to do that also for church programs. It’s harder for me to recall some of that poetry than these ads, partly because the ads are just so quick, but twenty-year-old jingles are embedded in my brain and I thought about the power of those jingles, that mnemonic efficiency of poetry, of the quick line that is economical and concise and compressed. Even more than Trimmings S*PeRM**K*T is trying to think about the language in which we are immersed, bombarded with language that is commercial, that is a debased language. Those jingles are based in something that is very traditional, which is the proverb, the aphorism. Those are the models, so I try to think back through the commercial and the advertising jingle, through the political slogan, back to the proverb and the aphorism to that little nugget of collected wisdom, and to think about the language that is so commercialized, debased, and I try to recycle it. The idea of recycling is very much a part of S*PeRM**K*T, to take this detritus and to turn it into art. I was definitely thinking about visual artists who do that, collage artists and environmental artists, and things like the Heidelberg House in Detroit, where people take actual trash and turn it into a work of art.

     

    CH: The play, or the pun, on “meat market” is most obviously visual but also linguistic. You open signaling the metapoetic moment to the poem: “Lines assemble gutter and margin.” Maybe I don’t get the poetic lines by that first line, but I certainly do when I get to: “More on line incites the eyes. Bold names label familiar type faces. Her hand scanning, throwaway lines.” You read the lines and you read between the lines.

     

    HM: You read as you stand in line.

     

    CH: You read as you stand in line, right–holding your “individually wrapped singles, frozen divorced compartments, six-pack widows.” Is it accurate to read this passage as a breakdown of gender relations?

     

    HM: Well, people are hailed, as they say. You are ideologically hailed through your race, your class, your gender. You come to identify the ways that you are hailed and so you are identifying with a particular gender, with a particular race or class, or all at the same time. Or sometimes you are divided up into compartments and sometimes you are hailed for your class, but not your race or your gender. I always wanted to use the pun as a lever to create the possibility of multiple readings. Yes, it’s about the lines at the supermarket and about the lines on a page and, well, the supermarket as an environment of language. There is so much writing in a supermarket. There are signs everywhere, labels on products, and I liked the idea of the supermarket as a linguistic realm where there are certain genres of writing. Instructions as a genre of writing. Every trip to the supermarket became research and a possible excursion into language. I wanted to broaden the idea of the supermarket so that it works like clothing in Trimmings. The supermarket becomes the reference point, the metonymic reservoir of ways that we see the world and ourselves in it. We are consumers; that’s how we are constructed as citizens. People consume more than they vote. It’s more important what you buy than what candidates you vote for. That has overtaken our sense of ourselves as citizens in a civic society.

     

    CH: In terms of critically thinking about the discourses that we hear, your work suggests that we consume rather than think through language. At the end of Trimmings, you discuss how your identity as a black woman writing about constructions of dominant femininity goes into the book. A word like “Pink,” for example, signifies femininity in the dominant culture, but “pink” and “slit” apply equally to a sewing catalog and girlie magazine. You write that as “a black woman writing in this language, I suppose I already had an ironic relationship to this pink and white femininity. Of course if I regard gender as a set of arbitrary signs, I also think of race–as far as it is difference that is meaningful–as a set of signs. Traces of black dialect and syntax, blues songs and other culturally specific allusions enter the text with linguistic contributions of Afro-Americans to the English language.” So you were already thinking about how to infuse traditionally poetic language, and we might even say, the tradition of poetic innovation–if we look at Gertrude Stein’s Melanctha with its traces of black dialect and syntax.

     

    HM: This is another frustrating Gertrude Stein experience! Is she racist or is she just playing with the idea of race?

     

    CH: I taught that novella in New Orleans to a fairly diverse class and I had to stop teaching it. We couldn’t get past its representations of race.

     

    HM: Too much contention?

     

    CH: Well it wasn’t the contention; it was pain. It was an undergraduate class. Black students were very used to the thoughtless expression of racism in New Orleans, but they hadn’t seen it at that level of conscious expression. It was too painful for them to discuss. I ended up just stopping the attempt to discuss and analyze it.

     

    HM: Wow. I know that Richard Wright championed this work and actually, if you think about it, there are some similarities between it and Native Son, even though they had very different agendas. The naturalistic mode in which he was working also put blackness into a kind of stark relief in a way that happens in Melanctha as well, although she does it in a seemingly more playful manner. He seems very deadly serious. They both seem to be interested in the cultural significance of blackness and whiteness and the whole set of signifiers that are called into play when you question the whole idea of difference.

     

    CH: Before we get into Muse and Drudge, how did that come into play in Trimmings and S*PeRM**K*T?

     

    HM: In Trimmings, I actually found myself at a certain point becoming alarmed, because I wanted the book to be about feminist ideas, a feminist exploration of how femininity is constructed using clothing, how the clothing itself speaks to, or is emblematic of, certain kinds of constraints on women’s bodies. That is one of the issues I wanted to deal with: the overlap at that time of pornography and fashion, the kind of photography that was very trendy in fashion magazines. There was a lot of S & M imagery in the eighties. We read The Story of O in a graduate seminar at Santa Cruz. I was horrified and fascinated because all of a sudden, the discourse of pornography and sadomasochism was taking over the feminist conversation in the same way that pornography seemed to be taking over fashion. So I was really wondering, “What does this mean?” The other thing had to do with the critique by black women and other women of color of the very way that feminism was constructed around the needs of white women without always considering the sometimes very different needs of women of color who were not middle-class, or working-class white women who also had problems with academic feminism. I think a lot of us were puzzled by why we were reading The Story of O in a women’s studies class. Does this really make sense? I actually found that book hard to read, it was painful to read. Partly my book was really setting out to be an explication of white feminism, but then I felt kind of uneasy doing that. I was thinking about the dominant color code for femininity. It is pink and white. English literature is full of the “blush.” I felt that I had to include images of black women. Trimmings grew from my response to Stein. One of my poems even cannibalizes Gertrude Stein’s “Petticoat” poem. My reading of Stein’s “Petticoat” poem also brings Manet’s “Olympia” into the picture. I had an insight that she might have also been thinking about that painting, with her “Petticoat” poem.

     

    CH: Would you read that passage from your poem?

     

    HM:

    A light white disgraceful sugar looks pink, 
       wears an air, 
    pale compared to shadows standing by. To plump 
       recliner, 
    naked truth lies.  Behind her shadow wears her 
       color arms 
    full of flowers.  A rosy charm is pink.  And 
       she is ink.  The 
    mistress wears no petticoat or leaves.  The 
       other in shadow,
    a large, pink dress.

     

    I’m using the language of Stein. She has a “light white,” “an inkspot,” “a rosy charm.” So I put those words into my poem. Then I expanded to give the reader an image of Manet’s painting of the white nude with the black woman in the shadows who’s obviously a servant. Manet contrasts the white woman’s body and the black woman’s body with the white woman’s body constructed as beautiful, feminine, seductive, also a little outrageous. The black woman is basically just a part of the decor but her presence seems to enhance the qualities that are attributed to the white nude. In a way, the whole book is really built around this: both my active and my somewhat critical engagement with Stein, my problematic relation to the Western icon of beauty and the black woman’s relationship to that, and my interest in representation itself, whether it is a visual representation or a representation in language. I didn’t think it was enough just to have that, so I put some other things in here that were definitely meant to investigate alternative female images. I put in the Josephine Baker poem and the “bandanna” poem because it was unsettling to me just to investigate this white femininity without some kind of black experience being represented as well. There are also “cool dark lasses” wearing their shades, maybe jazz divas, someone like a Billie Holiday. I have “the veiled woman” at the end. I remember at this time in graduate school, I read a book, Veiled Sentiments,by Lila Abu-Lughod, about the Arabic traditions of veiling women, so that was in my mind as well. It’s a way of taking a woman’s body out of circulation but she’s still being controlled in the culture.

     

    CH: But not being specularized?

     

    HM: Right. She is outside of the gaze or she is protected from the gaze. Some of the radical Islamic fundamentalists think that they are actually liberated by wearing the veil. I was using this work to explore such questions and problems. This book is connected to Muse and Drudge because Muse and Drudge is a book about the image and representation of black women, and Trimmings has more to do with the representation in the dominant culture of white women, although there are black women here and there. Muse and Drudge is intended to think about folk representations, popular culture representations, self-representations of black women, and to think about how to take what is given. There is a whole set of codes, a whole set of images that we really don’t control as individuals. They are collective and they are cultural. The problem as a writer is: how do you write yourself out of the box that you are in? Muse and Drudge is an attempt to take those representations and fracture them, as I try to do with breaking up the lines and collaging the quatrains together, sometimes from four different sources. It was an attempt to use this language as representation, to use it in a self-conscious way as code, as opposed to taking the code as something that is real. The body exists but there is a way that your body is interpreted based on a historical and social context. I take that and use it as material, as opposed to saying well, that defines you; that’s what makes you who you are. I have a certain faith as a writer that we can use language in a liberatory way to try to free ourselves. But at certain point, I was concerned that I was continuing to be trapped, in the prison house, right? A lot of the strategies had to do with my breaking out. I had to take things and riff on them, as a musician improvises on a melody and really creates a new song. It’s based on the same old traditional standard but sounds new when it is performed in this way.

     

    CH: Aldon Nielsen, in his recent book Black Chant, and Elizabeth Frost, in a recent essay in Women’s Studies, have both discussed your work as fundamentally reconfiguring our understanding of black cultural productions. Frost characterizes Muse and Drudge as a hybrid serial-poem, a “heteroglossic series,” structured by the blues quatrain but working with Bahktinian heteroglossia, with a lot of languages, various cultural registers. I will confess to you that when I read Trimmings, I missed many of the references to black identity until I had read some of your criticism, even though I was really thinking about it. For example, in the section that you just read, I noted “shadow” when I first read the passage, but it didn’t signify anything more than the literal meaning. After reading your criticism, the light lit. It’s not possible for a white reader to miss the signifying in Muse and Drudge. You talked the other day about the practice of code-switching, and I wanted you to talk a bit more about how you are working with that in Muse and Drudge, the significance of including black dialect with the simultaneous invocation of Sappho as the poem opens up.

     

    HM: With “Sappho and Sapphire”? Because Sapphire has been a pejorative figure for black women ever since the old Amos & Andy television comedy, and before that, a radio program with white men doing their version of black dialect. So it was actually an extension of the minstrel tradition where “black face” was done linguistically instead of in a visual way. Later black actors performed these stereotypes in the television comedy. So the black woman, Sapphire, was a loud-mouth, aggressive, the image of the supposedly emasculating black woman with the husband who is hen-pecked. She was a shrill harpy and she always dressed in grotesque outfits as well, with hideous hats. So in the sixties, when people were reversing the signification of these pejorative terms, black women reclaimed Sapphire as an assertive, vocal black woman who stands up for her own opinions. You know, just take that negative stereotype and make it positive. Sapphire is actually an entry in the Feminist Dictionary with a discussion of this process of inversion. Of course, there is an African American writer who has taken this as her pseudonym as a poet and a novelist also. I definitely wanted to think about Sapphire singing the blues and Sapphire as Sappho, singing the blues. One of the people, my cohort at UC Santa Cruz, Diane Rayor, translates ancient Greek and has published a book called Sappho’s Lyre. I transformed her title in my first line, “Sapphire’s lyre,” to think about a crossroads of ancient lyric poetic tradition. If we think of ancient lyric poetry, we have to think of Sappho. This is a place where a woman is actually one of the forerunners and foremost practitioners of the art. We don’t have too many areas where that is the case, so I’m honoring this woman and I’m also thinking about the blues tradition and Diane Rayor’s translations, really, because she is trying to bring Sappho into a very contemporary American language. It seemed to me that Sappho is singing the blues. Sappho’s like a blues singer, to me, in translation. So, that was the conceit that allowed me to go on with this poem and to investigate my own connections with this tradition, which was actually called into question by people like the language poets who feel that the lyric poem is too much entangled with a subject they want to deconstruct. I have a certain attachment to the lyric subject, but the lyric subject in this poem is multiple, not singular. It is many voices and contradictory voices. It is a heteroglossia or maybe a cacophony of voices.

     

    CH: And it’s very playful. You have lines like, “Up from slobbery,” which are very funny and playful, yet at the same time, very critical of a particular voice.

     

    HM: Yes. In Up from Slavery, Booker T. Washington talks about learning “the gospel of the toothbrush” and part of what those educators thought they were doing was teaching people how to be decent and clean. In order to qualify for the rights of American citizens, you have to be decent and clean. That’s assuming that blacks weren’t already, but had to be taught how to do this!

     

    CH: And also placed. It allowed them to be placed in a perennially subservient position.

     

    HM: Yeah, his entrance exam was, in a sense, to sweep the floor. He talks about how he was assigned to sweep a floor when he came to apply for admission to Hampton, implicitly an admission requirement. So even to gain admission at this school, he had to be willing to sweep the floor, which is very appropriate considering what they trained people to do. Each one of those lines is a kind of tag for a whole possible conversation that the poem doesn’t stop to engage in. It just gives the tag and keeps moving.

     

    CH: Why?

     

    HM: Partly because I wanted the poem to have that quality of quick movement from one thing to another, from one subject or thought to another, from one mood or emotion to another. Partly because I wanted things to be in flux, a state of flux, a state of change. If you stand still too long, they will put chains on you, so you want to keep moving. This is one of the things that is most fascinating to me about the slave narratives I was studying while I was writing my dissertation. The true freedom in the slave narrative is at the point of deciding to escape and the journey north. Once they get to the north, they are, again, part of a hierarchy and they are still at the bottom of that hierarchy. If everyone is free in the North and you are still working as a servant and living in someone else’s house and having to obey the master of the house, you are earning wages, but you are still at the bottom of the hierarchy. The freedom that people experience is actually when they are on the road, in flight. I associate that with writing, for myself. The time that I am free is when I am writing. The poem is running; the poem is flying. There is an expression that is part of African American folklore–when people are telling tall tales they say, “If I’m lyin’, I’m flyin’” because they are pushing the limits of language.

     

    CH: We theorize identity as being fluid and that seems very pertinent to your work, through the punning and the word play. A word is never fixed; it’s always bleeding into a new identity by the process of association but in practice, once we fix that theory of identity as fluid, then it solidifies into something more inflexible.

     

    HM: Right, it’s a paradox.

     

    CH: I’m also fascinated by what seems a new spiritual register in the collection. Maybe I’m missing it in the earlier collections.

     

    HM: I think it is more deliberately in use in Muse and Drudge than it had been.

     

    CH: I recognized some of the references to Yoruba and Achebe’s “ancestor dances,” references to Orishas and the “deja voodoo queens”–that kind of wonderful word play that you are always engaging in! I wondered how that functioned in the poem as a whole. Would you talk about that a bit?

     

    HM: Partly those things are allusions. They work in the poem as allusions to the African Diaspora, cultures, and spiritual traditions. They expand the idea of blackness. They suggest both continuity and discontinuity. That is knowledge that I have acquired through reading, through study. It is not knowledge that I have directly through experience or practice. My family is Baptist. That is the religious or spiritual base that I come from regardless of whether I currently go to church or not.

     

    CH: Your grandfather was a Baptist minister?

     

    HM: My grandfather and one of my great-grandfathers also. My grandmother was the daughter of a Baptist minister and she married a Baptist minister. My family is very, very deeply religious. I think that I am spiritual; I am not religious in the same way that they are and I am not tied to the church in the same way that they are. I am interested in these African spiritual traditions partly because I think that in some ways, there are continuities for people who call themselves Christians. In my family, there was this other side of spirituality that I now understand to be retentions of African spiritual systems. In my family, because we were always so much involved with the church, there was the sense that those things were dangerous and that we don’t really want to deal with them, but we also don’t dismiss them.

     

    CH: These things?

     

    HM: Voodoo. Christians didn’t believe this stuff and just dismissed it and also educated people didn’t believe this stuff. My ideas about it have changed, partly because of what I see in my own family. They used to say to us that we should not eat food in other people’s houses because you don’t know who in the community might have a grudge against you or someone in your family. If we were with our family and invited to have dinner with some friends, that was one thing, but as children just wandering around at that time, people would invite you in. You could be playing with some kids and they would have you over to eat or old ladies might invite you in for tea cakes. My mother would warn us not to do that. She said they could harm you that way, through your food. At the time we thought, “Well, what are they going to do, poison us? Or does she think their kitchen isn’t clean enough?” This is what we would think, but now I realize that my mother meant they could harm you through the food. There was also an experience I had with a Nigerian when I was an undergraduate. He was a graduate student in computer engineering. He was completely technologically adept, a totally modern contemporary person who also believed in all sorts of ghosts and spirits and magical practices at the same time. It was perfectly compatible. These are some of the things that made me think in more complicated ways about black identity or just human capacity for holding contradictory thoughts. I began to think about the meaning of the whole world of spirits. What do they actually do for people?

     

    As an artist, it’s a whole set of metaphors. It’s a system of metaphors that allows people to think in certain ways. The fact is that people can think in these metaphoric ways and then they can shift into completely scientific ways of thinking. To me, that is fascinating, and it’s one of the things that black people and people of color have to offer, that tolerance of the dichotomy between the material and the spiritual or scientific ways of thinking versus ways of thinking that are thought to be superstitious or primitive. Some of the excesses of the twentieth century have to do with devotion to the scientific or mechanical and actually, in a way, worshipping that. Actually, we are closing off a part of ourselves, the metaphoric, the intuitive, the poetic aspects of our thinking process in order to enhance the other part. For instance, there is a great book by the anthropologist Karen McCarthy Brown. She studied women who practice Haitian voodoo. They have emigrated from Haiti to New York City; they live in Brooklyn and they are keeping their community together through these practices. One of the things that was interesting is that they have many loa or spirits. Everyone can pick the loa with which they are most compatible, and there are certain qualities that respond to human attributes that people want to feed or enhance and when you are feeding the loa, you are feeding these qualities in yourself. By bringing these offerings, you are giving yourself permission to express these qualities, these human qualities that are part of yourself. One of the things that she suggested as a feminist scholar is that there are as many female deities as there are male. This gives many opportunities for expression of female being in the world because there are so many goddesses that you can worship. If you are a woman who is very feminine and coquettish, and very much involved with enhancing your erotic powers, there is a deity for that. If you are really into being a mother, there is a deity for that. If you are out there being a career woman, there is a deity that will support that aspect of your being. That’s one way I understand certain spiritual practices. It was kind of mystifying, to have the sense that it really has to do with your life, here and now, on earth and that these are modes of expression of human aspiration, and that these gods are so humanlike. They have favorite foods, favorite liquor that they prefer. Some of them like beer and some like rum and some like whiskey. Some like cigars and some like a certain brand of perfume and they are very specific in their likes and dislikes and I am fascinated by the idea of indulging the preferences of these spirits. The people probably also feel that it reinforces their sense of themselves as being very particular and having very specific likes and dislikes and that you indulge yourself the way you indulge the loa.

     

    CH: You had mentioned that in your forthcoming study Gender, Subjectivity, and Slave Narratives, gender and the subjugated body have influenced your poetry. Can you discuss at a bit more length some of the ways that the two languages were mutually influential, perhaps, or have you found that your critical, theoretical work influenced your poetry?

     

    HM: When you go into graduate school and you learn how to do critical writing, in a sense, what you are learning is an alternative aesthetic for writing. I remember when I first thought that a lot of critical writing is awkward and ugly. It is densely compacted. The kind of critical writing that I aspired to seemed to cram a lot of information into a sentence. There were incredibly complicated sentences, and you had to really keep your wits about you, especially when writing on a computer screen. I’d think, “Could I diagram this sentence?” In a way it’s kind of the opposite of the paratactic sentence, the hypotactic sentence. It has many connectors, many clauses, subordinate and coordinate clauses and you have to know where you are in the sentence to keep it all together. Then you have to have many of these sentences adding up and accumulating. The academic training altered my sense of what in writing is pleasurable. The pleasure that I got from writing before I went to graduate school had a lot to do with rhythm, musicality, the usual poetic qualities that we think of when we think of literature. It was an aesthetics of beauty. Critical writing gave me an aesthetics of intellectual engagement, of complexity of thought and a corresponding complexity of syntax and structure, the complexity of argument as opposed to metaphor. Metaphor is complex in its own way; argument has another way of creating complexity. It was significant that I learned to enjoy and to love this writing that at first struck me as so ugly, so lacking in rhythm, so lacking in beauty and harmony, and also, so demanding. You don’t sit down and read critical theory for escape or for the kind of pleasure that people get when they read Wordsworth. You are in a different zone. I think that my poetry after graduate school is drawing on this different connection to writing, this critical connection to writing. In these more recent books, the writing engages both with what I think of as the pleasure centers–those things that really have to do with the heartbeat and with the singing quality of language, the voice, song, the rhythmic speech–and something that is happening from your eye to your brain, where your voice is not even necessarily involved. I try to combine those two qualities together in the poetry. I think it was very important; I could not write the poetry I am now, without having gone through that academic experience.

     

    But in some ways I think I’m ruined, because the kind of poetry I was writing before has much more of a mass appeal. Recently, I was reading in the LA Book Festival and because I realized there would be very few people there, since I was reading at nine in the morning, I chose to read from Tree Tall Woman. I talked with one man there who complained, “Poetry is so hard to understand. I feel like they are really trying to trick me and I don’t know what they are talking about.” But he loved those poems and I thought, “Boy, if I had read other stuff, he wouldn’t have felt this way.” My mother used to say, “You can sling that lingo but can you write it so that anybody’s grandma can understand?” To her way of thinking, that was the great writer. The great writer is the person who can write in a language that is accessible to anyone who is literate. So I’m always feeling a certain tension because poetry “should” be accessible, simple in certain ways. Plain speech. An American style really is a plain speech style. That is what we think of as American as opposed to European.

     

    CH: As Marianne Moore said, “A language dogs and cats can read.”

     

    HM: Yes, but on the other hand, there is the dazzle of the intellect and there is the complexity of the thought or the kinds of connections that can be made when you are working on different levels of signification or different rhetorical levels. I hope that this is a productive tension or conflict. I think that I don’t lose sight of the fact that everyone didn’t go to graduate school and some people just want to read something and feel a very direct and uncomplicated pleasure. I want some aspect of that kind of pleasure in my work and when I am revising my work, I am thinking about the people I am leaving out and I’m thinking about how I can bring them back in. I want the work I do to be intellectually complex, but at some level, the form is open to allow people to enter wherever they are. Especially with Muse and Drudge, I thought a lot about what is going to exclude readers and what is going to include readers. At various times, people will feel very strongly their exclusion and that will trouble them and be uncomfortable. There are other aspects of the book that will allow them to stick with it, to persist through the rough passages. There will be moments of insight and moments of familiarity and connection with the text as opposed to those moments of alienation, estrangement and feeling left out. I wanted there to be enough of those moments of inclusion for everyone so that they can tolerate the moments of feeling their exclusion. In some ways, the experience of the reader parallels my experience in the world and perhaps everyone’s experience in the world. In some conversations, I feel right at home. In other conversations I know I’d better sit quiet and listen for awhile because they are talking about things I really know little of and maybe at some point later, I can speak in this conversation, but at the moment, I’m better off just listening and understanding where they begin. I think more and more, as the world becomes a global village, it doesn’t mean that we have the simplicity of the village. It means that we are interacting with a lot of people we really don’t understand.

     

    CH: We may even think we understand and discover later that we missed some key codes.

     

    HM: It happens more and more often, but I’ve noticed as black codes are entering the mainstream, they are altered once they get there. The process of entering the mainstream alters them and that is partly what I am thinking about with Muse and Drudge. What happens when you take these codes and use them in a context, in a way that they are actually fractured and collaged with other materials so that they don’t mean what they would mean in a coherent system because they are now in an incoherent system. This book is really about what creates coherence and what is felt as incoherent. The quatrains and the use of rhyme are things that help people, things that make a poem look orderly, make the poem seem familiar, that give it elements of convention that people can deal with while they are reeling from the unfamiliar and incoherent.

     

    CH: Who have been your major influences?

     

    HM: Definitely Stein is an influence on Trimmings and S*PeRM**K*T. Gwendolyn Brooks is such a deep influence on me that sometimes I don’t even know that it’s there, but it’s there and it has been pointed out by a couple of people, like Stacey Hubbard in her review of Trimmings. I think Langston Hughes as well, for what he was trying to do–you know, the things that we now take for granted about using a culturally marked, black language and bringing this colloquial speech and blues and jazz elements into poetry, and also for being political, trying not just to entertain people with poetry, but also to get them to think. People like Bob Kaufman and Amiri Baraka have been very useful to me. I would say Lucille Clifton. She was at Santa Cruz when I was there. Nate Mackey, Lucille Clifton, and Al Young were all teaching there, at least part of the time that I was there. I think that all three of them were in different ways very important to me. They did different things but in different ways. They all suggested to me that there is a subtlety in the African American contribution to poetry. I came kind of late to reading Melvin Tolson’s work, but Melvin Tolson was a revelation. And Jean Toomer.

     

    There is a canon that is constructed now and there are certain people who are marginal to the canon or who get left out of the canon or else they are not taught as often as other writers. There are certain works that are at the center and other works that are more at the periphery and so one of the things I really started to do as a graduate student was to recover this tradition of innovation within African American poetry. The poetic practice that Jean Toomer was doing was very experimental work. I knew of Cane. I had found Cane in a used book store when I was an undergraduate. I used to scour the used book stores looking for those black books that I was otherwise not going to read in the classroom and I had my own library. I was on a mission to find this literature. I can’t understand when my students say, “I’m trying to get into your class. I haven’t been able to take your class yet so I can read this book that you are teaching.” If I waited until a class was offered, there would be a whole bunch of books I never would have gotten around to reading. I was free to form my own opinion about a lot of these works because there was nothing in the classroom about them. Then, as a graduate student, it was a question of recovering those things that were really at the margin of what was considered Black Literature, so I became interested in people like Bob Kaufman. I just taught a course that included Stephen Jonas. I haven’t seen a single black critic discussing his work at all. Bob Kaufman tends to get marginalized. Melvin Tolson tends to get marginalized. There are different stages of the recovery project. We all try to connect to something but because this information is missing, people don’t know that there is a tradition, so each time someone is doing work that is considered innovative, it seems to come out of nowhere or as if all of the interesting innovation comes from the white people that the black writers were hanging around with. Innovative black poets don’t seem to have any black antecedents. I’m constructing retrospectively a tradition that I can say is a black tradition. On the other hand, as Nate Mackey points out, there are actually connections that are made through these boundaries of race. A lot of the poets who really did influence my thinking about my work in a different way were white poets, the language poets. For example, people would say to me, “Oh, do you know Erica [Hunt]? Have you met Erica? You must know Erica.” Erica Hunt had been in California, but she had moved to New York by the time I got to California. So, no, I didn’t know Erica. I later met her, but people assumed that she and I must know each other but we didn’t. We had white friends in common.

     

    Eventually we read together in Detroit and I got to know her and I’m writing about her book, Arcade, and about Will Alexander for the first European MELUS conference in Germany. Will is here in Los Angeles and Will and I have a connection because of Nate Mackey and Hambone. It’s as if now there is beginning to be a quorum. Cecil Giscombe, who edited the special issue of American Book Review on so-called black postmodernists, was poetry editor for Epoch magazine at Cornell when I was there. I taught his book in my course this year. It was he and Nate and Erica and Will, plus Bob Kaufman, Stephen Jonas, Ed Roberson. Amiri Baraka and Ntozake Shange, along with Marlene Philip and Kamau Brathwaite. We also have had to ask, What are the qualities that are considered to be “black” in literature? If Erica Hunt is writing in Standard English, about an urban experience and a female experience with very few markers of blackness in the work, then is this not to be read as a black text? Will Alexander is writing in the tradition of Surrealism. There is Jayne Cortez, who also has connections to surrealism, but is seen as being really engaged with a black political consciousness in a way that moves her work in another direction. Those are some issues that we have had to think about now that we have an established canon with the Norton Anthology [of African-American Literature]. Nate Mackey is in it. Baraka is in it, but some other poets I taught just recently at UCLA in my graduate seminar are not in it.

     

    CH: In your opinion does that narrow the voices of black writers?

     

    HM: The Norton Anthology does not include people who are atypical, although it’s a fairly exhaustive anthology. It’s not just a poetry anthology; it’s got all the genres in it. It is trying very hard to include a lot of things, but the nature of anthologies is that they can’t include everything; they are supposed to be selective and there are particular criteria. Henry Louis Gates, the chief editor of this anthology, has a particular theory that privileges orality in the text, what I call mimesis of orality in the text. So what if a work does not do that and does not allude to African American culture or Diaspora culture? Or does it in ways that seem strange, unfamiliar, or difficult? There are certain things you have to do in order to be visible as a black writer. That necessity does eventually become constraining. I don’t think we have completely run out of things we can do within those constraints but we will find them eventually more constraining and I think that, for the future, I’d want to encourage as wide and as inclusive as possible a view of what black poetry, black literature, black language can be. When I am writing I’m sometimes thinking about that.

     

    CH: You mentioned earlier that language and poetry can be liberatory. I wondered how you position your work in terms of a politics of poetics or a poetics of politics. It’s so clear with a poet like June Jordan or Adrienne Rich, for that matter, and it’s that subject-driven element, if you will, that has become very controversial with the poets who are writing with a transformative politics in mind, a very impassioned and committed poetry that engages in formal experiment. How do you position your work? What are you trying to do?

     

    HM: These are questions that I think about a lot both as a writer and as a teacher and as a reader also. I think that political discourse and the rhetoric that accompanies it really can be in a productive tension with the aesthetic qualities of poetry and literature. I think that there are different intentions that are political that have to do with political discourse and rhetoric that assume that the audience is in your own time and space, that you are addressing living human beings who are capable of performing a particular action that will change political reality. I think that that is a good thing to do and a necessary thing to do and something that we really are compelled to do about our political circumstance. To my way of thinking, literature can do those things but literature also has other things that it wants to do that go beyond the address to the people who are my contemporaries. Partly I am writing for unborn readers in my most optimistic view that the world will still exist, that we will still have literature, that people will be literate, that people will want to read, and that my work will last beyond my lifetime. These are all very optimistic assumptions but if all of that should come to pass, then I am not just addressing the situation that exists in my lifetime. I’m addressing human beings who don’t exist yet and so, to me, that means that literature has a larger horizon than political discourse. Political discourse is very important, very necessary, and can be compatible with some but not all of the intentions of literature. When I’m writing, I am usually thinking more about the unborn than those people who are my contemporaries, and my approach to writing really is influenced by this belief, this hope, this optimistic aspiration on my part that my work will continue. In a way, for me, that is a spiritual belief and to the extent that literature has a spiritual intention, then the language operates differently. Language is not so instrumental. Language is not so intently focused on reality. Language is not so much a tool of persuasion to move people to think, act, behave, in a particular way, to focus their energy on a problem that exists now.

     

    Because I live now and I don’t live in the future, my framework is my own political reality, my social reality, my cultural reality, so that aspect is there already as far as I am concerned. Literature, art, is ideological even when it has no political agenda. There is a certain implicit politics that is inherent in any work that engages with reality in any sense. Who I am is a political question, but who I can be is a question that literature can help me to answer. I think that art involves a struggle between all of the things that engage us now and all of the things that we can’t even imagine because they don’t exist yet. For me, for literature to be powerful beyond its present moment, the conditions of its making, there has to be some space or acknowledgment of the possibility of this future, which politics cannot really encompass. Maybe that is the naive position of someone who is an artist, who would like to believe that literature has this power beyond politics, although a visionary politics can be part of literature just because how we live is determined to some extent by these circumstances that both confine us and allow us expression at the same time.

     

    Acknowledgements

     

    I wish to thank Myrna Treston and Shannon Doyne for their invaluable help in transcribing and editing the transcript of this interview. I am also grateful to Elizabeth Frost for sharing the manuscript of her then-forthcoming article on Mullen’s poetry, and to Harryette Mullen herself, who generously spent several afternoons with me in preparation for taping this interview.